MK Ted 204072 en

Automation & Control
07-04
Modicon Premium
automation platform
Modicon Premium automation platform

Unity & PL7
Catalogue
July
04
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

MKTED204072EN
Headquarters
Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics
89, bd Franklin Roosevelt given in the text and images in this document are not binding us until
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex they have been confirmed with us.
Production: Schneider Electric Industries

http://www.schneider-electric.com Photos: Schneider Electric Industries
http://www.telemecanique.com Printed by: Pozzo Gros Monti - Italy
ART. 802625 July 2004
Art. 802731 - MKTED204073EN
Art. 67341 - MKTED203111EN Ethernet TCP/IP

Transparent Factory
Safety solutions
using Preventa 2004
2004
Art. 55053 - MKTED203041EN
AS-Interface
cabling system
2003
Human/Machine dialogue
Communication
Control and Protection,

Detection,
Automation,
Control and Protection,

Detection, An overview
Automation,
Human/Machine dialogue,
of the product range
Communication
Control and protection,
Detection,
Control and signalling units Automation,

Art. 28697 - MKTED299014EN Human/Machine dialogue,
Telemecanique
Communication,
Components for Terminals and display units Supervision,
Human-Machine interfaces
Art. 96949 - MKTED2040401EN
Panel-building and cabling
2001 accessories
Automation and control
Human/Machine interfaces
2004 To be issued

Mounting systems
Art. 70263 - MKTED203113EN
2004 Automation and control

Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes
and power supplies
Art. 70455 - MKTED204011EN
2003
Automation and relay functions
2003
Supervision
Panel-building and cabling accessories

Automation
AUTC201108140EN
Distributed I/O
Advantys STB AUTC201104124EN
2003 Modicon Momentum Art. 802621 - MKTED204071EN

automation platform

2002 Automation platform
Modicon Quantum
and Unity - Concept Art. 802625 - MKTED204072EN
2004 Proworx software
Automation platform
Modicon Premium Art. 70984 - MKTED204012EN
and Unity - PL7 software
2004 Automation platform
Modicon TSX Micro
and PL7 software
2004
Art. 960015 - DIA1ED2040506EN

Telemecanique
The essential
2004
Automation,
Communication
Art. 66692 - DIA7ED20310006EN
Motion control
Lexium
Art. 61233 - DIA7ED2030902EN 2004

Twin Line
Motion control
Art. 802660 - MKTED204091EN 2003

Soft starters and
variable speed drives
Art. 27501 - MKTED201001EN 2004

Art. 54752 - MKTED203031EN Motor starter solutions
Control and protection
components
Global Detection
Electronic and
electromechanical sensors
2001
2003
Control and protection
Detection
General contents 0
Modicon Premium automation
platform
Welcome to the world of Telemecanique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6

New features in Unity Premium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
1 – Premium processors
1-1 Unity selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
Unity processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
Unity slot-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14
1-2 PL7 selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/24
PL7 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26
PL7 Slot-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32
2 – Racks, I/O architectures and power supplies

Power supply and fan modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2
Single rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6
Multi-racks configuration without remote module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8
Multi-racks configuration with remote module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12
3 – Discrete and analog I/O

3-1 Discrete I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2
3-2 Analog I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/20
3-3 IP 20 distributed I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/28
3-4 IP 65/67 distributed I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52
3-5 Tego Power installation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/74
4 – Application-specific modules and solutions

4-1 Preventa safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2
4-2 Counter ans electronic cam modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14
4-3 Motion control modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28
4-4 Integrated weighing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/56
4-5 Warm Standby redundancy (PL7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62
5 – Communication
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/2
5-1 Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8
5-2 CANopen machine bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/52
5-3 AS-Interface sensor/actuators bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/56
5-4 X-Way bus and network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64
5-5 Modbus Plus network and Profibus DP/INTERBUS buses . . . . . . . . page 5/88
5-6 Modbus SL, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. . . . page 5/98
6 – Software
6-1 Unity software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2
6-2 PL7 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54
4
7 – Human/Machine Interfaces
Magelis display units and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2
Magelis iPC industrial PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6
HMI software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8
OFS data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10
Tego Dial for Homme/Machine Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14
8 – Connection interfaces and power supplies

8-1 Telefast 2 pre-wired system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2
8-2 Phaseo power supplies for d.C control circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/20
9 – Services
Technical information
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/2
TSX PSY power supply module selection document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/4
Standards, certifications and environment conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/6
Optional conformal coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/9
Automation product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/10
Schneider Electric worldwide
Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/12
Index
Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/18
5
Welcome Modicon Quantum automation
platform 0
To the world of Telemecanique
Modicon automation platforms

A family of specialist automation platforms
Process
Applications
Discrete
Automation
PC based
control
applications
Modicon is the family name for a set of complementary automation platforms. They
are characterized by their extendable memory capacity and increasing execution
speed.
Premium, an optimized platform for complex

machinery, factory automation applications and
infrastructure
b Up to 7 Mb of program memory
b Compact size and high density I/O modules
b Extension racks for multirack architectures
b Extensive catalog of sensor/actuator buses, machine buses and fieldbuses
b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port on many CPUs
b Motion control, electronic cam, weighing and machine safety modules
Quantum, an optimized platform for batch/process

applications, with high levels of availability
b Up to 7 Mb of program memory
b Powerful process control library
b Supports fieldbuses for batch/process applications
b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port on new CPUs
b High performance Hot Standby solution
b Special treatment to resist corrosive atmospheres
Atrium, the slot PLC meeting PC Based requirements

b All the functionality of a PLC integrated in a PC
b No compromise of ruggedness or HMI integration
6
Welcome (continued) Modicon Quantum automation
platform 0
To the world of Telemecanique
Unity software
A new organizer environment for high end Modicon

platforms
To complement the existing software catalog, Unity offers a common environment for
Modicon Premium, Quantum and Atrium platforms. Based on the best standards in
existing software offers, Unity is a high performance programming tool that can
significantly increase productivity by means of:
b State-of-the-art functionality
b Optimum standardization enabling re-use of developments
b Numerous tools for testing the program and improving system operation
b New integrated diagnostic services
The Unity software catalog also offers specialist software representing another major
step towards “Collaborative Automation”:
b Management of distributed control architecture projects
b Design and generation of batch/process applications with PLC/HMI integration
b Openness to developments in C language or in VBA (Visual Basic for Applications)
Transparent Ready
Web technology serving automation solutions

Let us introduce you to the world of Transparent Ready - a world where products are
compatible, interoperable and easy to maintain.
With Transparent Ready, you can:

b Use Ethernet in infrastructures from field level to MES level
b Gain competitive advantage through the adoption of tried and tested technology
b Reduce downtime via Web-based diagnostics
b Create secure inter-factory communication worldwide
b Control costs through the use of standards
Collaborative Automation
The new world of automation

b Rather than opting for proprietary systems, Telemecanique has adopted market
standards such as IEC languages, Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus IDA, XML, OPC, IT
standards, etc.
b Partnerships with recognized leading hardware and software specialists have
been developed within the scope of the Collaborative Automation Partner Program
in an effort to share technology more effectively.
b You will be assured of designing the best solution without compromising on ease
of integration.
7
Welcome Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
New features in Unity Premium
New Premium CPUs
With Unity, the range has been complemented by new, faster CPUs with increased
memory capacity.
Extension of the range

b New high-performance TSX P57 5p CPUs
b New entry level CPUs with integrated CANopen
b TSX P57 1p CPU now available with integrated Ethernet port
Improved execution speed

b 32-bit architecture for TSX P57 0p and 1p CPUs
b Significant improvement in processing of complex arithmetic and instructions on
arrays
b Optimum performance with TSX P57 5p CPUs:
TSX P57 5p v 37 ns for a Boolean instruction (60 ns with PL7)
v 45 ns for a numerical instruction (80 ns with PL7)
Memory enhancements
b The whole internal memory can now be used for data when the PCMCIA extension
is used.
b Customizable program download to the PLC (with or without source code)
b More memory:
v up to 7 Mb for the program (4 times more than with PL7)
v up to 896 Kb for data (7 times more than with PL7)
Communication enhancements
b USB programming port for TSX P57 4p and TSX P57 5p CPUs
b Integrated Ethernet port with active Web server and automatic E-mail transmission
on event
b Improved Ethernet performance, a true Plug and Play port
b New master CANopen module supported by all CPUs
b More INTERBUS and Profibus DP fieldbus connections.
Enhancements in the process control offer

b Doubling of the number of analog I/O, up to 512 channels
b New library of process control blocks
43128-EN_Ver1.0.fm/2
Welcome (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0
New features in Unity Premium
New software
Unity Pro – a seamless continuation of PL7

Unity Pro has been designed primarily to ensure continuity with PL7 in order to cut
training costs to a minimum. In addition, the PL7 application converter is included as
standard in Unity Pro.
Unity Pro boosts software productivity by means of

b Standardization and reuse of:
v nested structured data
v unlocated symbolic data eliminating memory “mapping”
v libraries of customizable functions or function blocks
v function modules
b Increased productivity during the design process through simplicity of use:
v FBD language
v several SFC sections (Grafcet)
b Increased quality during testing and start-up phases:
v PLC simulator on PC (offline mode)
v new debugging tools
b Reduction in machine downtimes during use:
v simultaneous online modifications of variables and program sections
v tracking of operator actions
v troubleshooting
b Simplified integration of third-party tools:
v hyperlinks to any level of the project
v XML import/export on any project element
v access to the Unity Pro database and server
Advanced Unity Pro specialist software

b Unity Studio has the task of structuring distributed applications where several
applications and devices communicate with one another via Ethernet.
Unity Studio is particularly suitable for the needs of the manufacturing industry and
infrastructure.
b Unity Application Generator (UAG) is specialist software for developing and
generating process control applications.
Unity Application Generator is particularly suitable for the needs of continuous
control in batch/process industries.
b Unity Developer's Edition (UDE) is specialist software providing static or dynamic
access to all Unity servers based on development in VBA, VB or C++.
b Unity EFB Toolkit is specialist software for development in C language of
tailor-made functions destined for integration in Unity Pro function libraries.
b Unity SFC View is an Active X component designed for monitoring and diagnostics
of SFC sequential applications from an HMI station.
43128-EN_Ver1.0.fm/3
1
1/0
Contents 1 - Modicon Premium processors 1
1.1 - Premium processors - Unity

Processors and slot-PLCs selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
b Premium processors
1
v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4
v Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/5
v Memory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/8
v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/12
b Atrium slot-PLCs
v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14

v Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16
v TCP/X-Way software gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/17
v Memory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
b PCMCIA memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22
1.2 - Premium processors - PL7

Processors and slot-PLCs selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/24
b Premium processors
v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26

v Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/27
b Atrium slot-PLCs
v Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32

v TCP/X-Way software gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/33
b PCMCIA memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36
1/1
Selection guide Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs Unity
Premium/Atrium platforms for Unity Pro software offer TSX 57 Cp configuration TSX 57 0p processor TSX 57 1p processors
1.1
Number of racks 4/6/8 slots 1 (6 slots) 1 4

(according to rack type) 12 slots – 1 2
“In-rack” inputs/outputs Discrete inputs/outputs 192 channels (module with 8, 256 channels (module with 8, 512 channels (module with 8,
(1) 16, 32 or 64 channels) 16, 32 or 64 channels) 16, 32 or 64 channels)
Analog inputs/outputs 12 channels (module with 4, 8 or 16 channels) 24 channels (module with 4, 8
or 16 channels)
“In-rack” Max. no. of channels 4 8
application-specific Integrated counter 1 module with 2 counter –
channels channels max. 40 KHz
Counter Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module
Motion (2) Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control
servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link
Weighing Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)
Serial links TSX SCY “in-rack” communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
Serial link connections Modbus RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485
master/slave modules
Uni-Telway 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave
PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules
Jnet PCMCIA modules (4), max. 3
Character mode 1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and “in-rack”
RS 485 modules
Bus connections AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus 1 “in-rack” module 2 “in-rack” modules
master V2
CANopen machine bus 1 integrated PCMCIA module 1 PCMCIA module (3)
master V4.02
INTERBUS fieldbus master V2 (5) –
or Profibus DP fieldbus master V0
class 1 and 2 (5)
Network connections Max. no. of networks 1
Ethernet TCP/IP Multiprotocol “in-rack” modules (Modbus TCP, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open),
Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server
Fipway/Ethway/Modbus Plus Fipway module (4), “in-rack” Ethway modules Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3)
modules (4) modules, “in-rack” Ethway
modules
Integrated process Configurable loops –
control Programmable loops –
Number of channels
Memory capacity Without PCMCIA extension 96 Kb program and data 96 Kb program and data
With PCMCIA extension 96 Kb data 96 Kb data
128 Kb program 224 Kb program
Data storage 256 Kb (PCMCIA extension in upper slot on processor no. 0)
USB programming port –
Power supply a 100…240 V or a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated
c 24 V non-isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each
power supply module rack.
Premium processor Standard TSX P57 104M
Integrated Ethernet TSX P57 1634M (7) g
Integrated CANopen TSX P57 Cp 0244M TSX P57 0244M
Integrated Fipio TSX P57 154M (8)
Atrium slot PLC Standard
Integrated Fipio
Pages 1/13 1/12
(1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O and analog I/O are cumulative.
(2) 1 axis = 1 application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 2…32 channels.
(3) Insert the module into the lower PCMCIA slot on a processor (no. 1) or into the external PCMCIA slot on a slot PLC (no. 1).
(4) Insert the module into the TSX SCY 21 601 “in-rack” communication module slot.
(5) The INTERBUS and Profibus DP limits are not cumulative.
1/2
1
TSX 57 2p processors and slot PLCs TSX 57 3p processors and slot PLCs TSX 57 4p processors TSX 57 5p processors
1.1
16
8
1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 2048 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)
80 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 128 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 256 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 512 channels (modules with 4, 8 or
channels) 16 channels) 16 channels) 16 channels)
24 32 64
–
Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module
Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link
2-channel modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)

TSX SCY “in-rack” communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules
1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules
PCMCIA modules (4), max. 3

1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 modules
4 “in-rack” modules 8 “in-rack” modules
1 PCMCIA module (3)
1 “in-rack” module 3 “in-rack” modules 4 “in-rack” modules 5 “in-rack” modules
1 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium 3 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium 4

slot PLC) slot PLC)
Multiprotocol “in-rack” modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server and via
software gateway with Atrium slot PLCs
Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3) (4) module, “in-rack” Ethway modules
10 channels with max. 3 loops 15 channels with max. 3 loops 20 channels with max. 3 loops 30 channels with max. 3 loops
– Library of EFB control blocks
160/192 Kb program and data (6) 192/208 Kb program and data (6) 320 Kb program and data 640 Kb program and data
768 Kb program 1.75 Mb program 2 Mb program 7 Mb program
160/192 Kb data 192/208 Kb data 440 Kb data 896 Kb data
8 Mb (PCMCIA extension in upper or lower processor slot no. 0 and/or no. 1)
– 1
a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack.
TSX P57 204M TSX P57 304M

TSX P57 2634M (7) TSX P57 3634M (7) TSX P57 4634M (7) TSX P57 5634M (7)
TSX P57 254M TSX P57 354M TSX P57 454M TSX P57 554M
TSX PCI 57 204M
TSX PCI 57 354M
1/12 and 1/21 1/13
(6) The second value applies to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link.
(7) The integrated Ethernet port requires 1 of the available network connections.
(8) The TSX P57 154M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module.
1/3
Presentation Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Presentation
1 Premium TSX P57 pp4M and TSX P57 pp34M automation platform processors
manage the entire PLC station comprising:
b Discrete I/O modules

b Preventa safety modules
1.1 b Analog I/O modules
b Application-specific modules (counter, motion, weighing, communication)
If the PLC station needs to extend across a certain distance, these modules can be
distributed:
b Either in several racks interconnected by Bus X (max. 700 m)

b Or via one of the supported fieldbuses
The processors are differentiated by their memory capacities, processing speeds,

number of I/O, and number of communication ports.
Depending on the model, they include:
b 1 to 16 racks
b 192 to 2040 discrete I/O
b 12 to 512 analog I/O
b 4 to 64 application-specific channels. Each application-specific module (counter,
motion control, communication (1) or weighing) accounts for 1 or more
application-specific channels.
b 1 to 4 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway), 1 to 8
AS-Interface buses
b 0 or 1 Fipio bus, 0 or 1 CANopen or Modbus Plus bus and 0 to 5 INTERBUS or
Profibus DP fieldbuses
b 0 to 30 process control channels, with one channel able to have up to 3 loops
Depending on the model, Premium processors also feature:
b A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP port (RJ45 connector)

b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway protocol or
character mode (typically a 19 or 115 Kbps programming terminal and an operator
dialog terminal)
b A USB type TER port (for the connection of a programming terminal)
Each processor has 2 slots for a PCMCIA card:
b An upper slot (no. 0) for memory extension cards (program, symbols, constants
and/or data files)
b A lower slot (no. 1) for a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus) or bus (CANopen,
Fipio Agent, Modbus, Uni-Telway and serial links). Memory extension cards
specifically for data storage can also be inserted into this slot.
Premium application design and installation
The installation of these Premium processors requires:
b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same
as the software used in the Quantum platform.
b Optionally, depending on requirements:
v The Unity Studio software suite used to design distributed applications
v The Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modeling and
generating process applications
v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB function block libraries in
C language
v Unity SFC View software for visualizing and diagnosing applications written in
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language
1/4
Description Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
8 Description of TSX P57pp4M processors without integrated

1 Ethernet TCP/IP port
2
3
1
TSX P57 1p4M single-format processors and TSX P57 2p4/3p4M double-format
4
processors feature the following on the front panel:
5
1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps:
6
7 1.1
v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution)
TSX P57 104M TSX P57 154M v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory
card and PCMCIA communication card)
v I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration
1 fault
2
3 v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on TER or AUX terminal port
4
5 v FIP lamp (red): Activity on integrated Fipio bus (depending on model)
6 2 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated

7
3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming
or adjustment terminal (RS 485)
TSX P57 204/304M TSX P57 254/354/454M
4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming
7 or adjustment terminal (RS 485)
3
5 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card
4
6 A PCMCIA slot (no.1) for a communication card or memory extension card for
storing additional data
7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 154/254/354M models) for Fipio bus
TSX P57 0244M communication (Fipio manager port)
8 An air recirculating heatsink (on TSX P57 0244/1p4M models)
1 2 3 4 5 6 Description of the processor and configurations with

integrated CANopen port
The TSX P57 0244M processor and TSX P57 Cp 0244M configurations (built
around the TSX P57 0244M processor) feature all or some of the following
components:
1 A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY 6 rack
2 A standard-format c 24 V non-isolated TSX PSY 1610M or a 100…240 V TSX
PSY 2600M power supply (see page 2/5).
3 A TSX P57 C024M processor with slot no. 1 for the PCMCIA CANopen master
V4.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction (see page 5/55).
4 A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card
5 A 2-channel 40 kHz TSX CTY 2A counter module (see page 4/19). This module
uses 2 of the 4 application-specific channels provided by the processor.
6 Three single-format slots for any I/O module or Premium module
7 An air recirculating heatsink
TSX P57 CA 0244M/CD 0244M 8 A TSX P57 C024M processor with slot no. 1 for the PCMCIA CANopen master
V4.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction
These configurations are supplied already mounted and their component parts
cannot be detached.
1/5
Description (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Description of TSX P57pp34M processors with integrated

Ethernet TCP/IP port
1
TSX P57 1634/2634/2834M double-format processors with integrated Ethernet
TCP/IP port feature, on the front panel:
1 3 2 1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps:

1.1
v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory
4 v I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration
5 fault
6 v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on TER or AUX terminal port
7
8 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 lamps:
v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet port ready

v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault
v COL lamp (red): Collision detection
TSX P57 1634/2634/3634M
v STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics
v Two TX and RX lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity
3 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated

5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming

6 A standard RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network
7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card
1/6
platform 1
Unity processors
Description of TSX P57 4p4/5p4M high-performance

1 2 1 2 processors
1
Premium TSX P57 454/554/4634/5634M double-format high-performance
processors feature the following on the front panel:
3
4 1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps:
5
6
b RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) 1.1
b ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory
7
8 9
b I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration
fault
b TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the AUX terminal port
TSX P57 454/554M TSX P57 4634/5634M
b FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus (on TSX P57 454/554M model)
For the TSX P57 4634/5634M model (with integrated Ethernet port), this display
block features 6 additional display lamps:
v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet TCP/IP port ready
v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault
v COL lamp (red): Collision detection
Two Tx and Rx lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity
2 A "Memory extract" button for extracting the PCMCIA memory extension card.
The associated "Memory extract ready" display lamp indicates that this card can
be extracted safely.
4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming,

adjustment or HMI terminal
5 A USB type connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal

(requires the PC compatible connection cable reference UNY XCA USB 033,
length 3.3 m, to be ordered separately)
6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card
8 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 454/554Mmodels) for Fipio bus
communication (Fipio manager port)
9 An RJ45 type connector (on TSX P57 4634/5634M models) for connection to the
Ethernet TCP/IP 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network
USB type terminal port
The USB terminal port 5 provides a useful data rate (12 Mbps) greater than that of
the Uni-Telway terminal port available on Premium processors. The USB terminal
port is compatible with Unity Pro programming software and OFS (OPC Factory
Server) data server.
TSX P57 4p4/5p4M processors can be connected to a USB bus comprising several
peripheral devices. However:
b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus.

b No device on the USB bus can be controlled by the PLC (modem, printer).
1/7
Memory structure Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Processor without PCMCIA memory card Memory structure

Located data 1
1 Unlocated data 1
The application memory is divided into memory areas physically distributed in the
internal RAM memory and on 0, 1 or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards:
96 to 108
Internal RAM Program, symbols and 1 The application data area, which may be one of 2 possible types, is always in the
2
area for online program internal RAM:
1.1 modification b Located data corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW237) to
which a symbol may be associated (e.g. Counting_rejects).
b Unlocated data corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type of
Constants 3 addressing removes the memory "mapping" managment constraints because
Processor with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0
addresses are assigned automatically.
Located data 1 2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols. In
the event of this area being in internal RAM, it also supports the area for modifying
96 to 896 Kb
the program in online mode (1).

Internal RAM
This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code.
Unlocated data 1 The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory.
3 Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0)
4 Storage area for additional data (slot no. 0 or no. 1), e.g. for production data and
PCMCIA card Program and symbols 2
(slot no. 0) manufacturing recipes
128 to 7168 Kb
Constants Two memory structures are possible depending on whether the Premium processor
3 is fitted with 0, 1 or 2 memory extension cards:
Storage of additional 4 b Application in internal RAM. In this case, the application is entirely loaded in the
data processor’s internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the
processor model (96 to 640 Kb).
b Application in PCMCIA card. In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for the
application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 1) contains the program space
(program, symbols and constants areas) (224 to 7168 Kb). Certain types of PCMCIA
Processor with data storage type memory card in slot no. 0 memory card also host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb).
Located data The presence of the symbols area with the program area is optional. Having the
1
application symbols database on the PLC means that, when connected to a
Unlocated data programming terminal not containing any applications, all the elements needed to
96 to 640 Kb
1
debug or upgrade this PLC are available within the PLC.
Internal RAM Program, symbols and
area for online program 2
modification (1) If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, the memory used by program modification in online
mode is located in this memory card (outside zones 2, 3 and 4 opposite).
Constants 3 (2) The internal RAM memory is backed up by an optional battery (3 years' battery life) located in
the power supply module (see page 2/22).
Storage of additional data

4096 or 8192 Kb
PCMCIA data
storage card (slot
no. 0)
4
1/8
Memory structure (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Processor with mixed type memory cards in slot no. 0 and data
storage type memory cards in slot no. 1 (1)
Memory structure (continued)
Extension of the data storage area
96 to 896 Kb
Located data 1
Memory cards reserved for data storage (4096 or 8192 Kb) are used to:
1
Internal RAM Unlocated data
1
b Access the data storage area when the application is entirely supported by the
internal RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA
Program and
symbols slot no. 0. 1.1
2
128 to 7168 Kb
PCMCIA card
(slot no. 0) b Free up memory space to provide additional program space when the application
is in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is
Constants 3 inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 1 (a part of it can be supported by the memory card in
Additional data slot no. 0).
storage (zone A)
4 Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with the
management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium
PLC.
Additional data Protecting the application

storage (zone B)
4096 or 8192 Kb
PCMCIA data Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the
storage card (slot 4 internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect this in order to
no. 1)
prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) by only loading the executable
code on the PLC.
A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any
(1) TSX P57 20 processors and higher. program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads).
Program modification in online mode
This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7
software) and now allows program code and data in different parts of the application
to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification
unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process).
This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume
required. Any program modifications made in online mode require available program
memory space at least equal in size to the combined size of all sections of the Unity
Pro program affected by the same modification session.
Depending on circumstances:
b For a processor with memory extension card, the memory volume remaining
available in the card for online modification is sufficient if the recommendations on
page 2/22 are observed.
b For a processor without memory extension card, users wishing to have the option
of making modifications in online mode may select a processor according to:
v The anticipated size of the application
v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode
A memory extension card that only uses Flash Eprom technology (without additional
SRAM) obviously cannot provide the function of program modification in online
mode.
1/9
Characteristics Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment.
See pages 9/6 to 9/11 “Standards, certification and environmental conditions”.
1 Characteristics and performance
Type of processor TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57
0244M (1) 104M 1634M 154M 204M 2634M 254M
Maximum No. of racks 4/6/8 slots 1 4 16
configuration 12 slots 1 2 8
1.1 Max. no. of slots for modules 12 32 128
Functions Max. no. in rack Discrete I/O 192/256 (2) 512 1024
of (3) Analog I/O 12 24 80
Process control – 10 (up to 30 simple loops)
channels
Application-specific 4 8 24
channels (counter,
axis, weighing, and
serial links) (5)
Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP – 1 – 1 –
connections Fipio manager – 1 (63 – 1 (127
agents) agents)
Serial link 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 19.2 Kbps
Maximum no. of Network (Ethernet 1 1, none if 1 1, none if 1
connections TCP/IP, Fipway, integrated integrated
Ethway, Modbus Plus) Ethernet is Ethernet is
used used
AS-Interface bus 1 2 4
CANopen or Modbus 1 integrated 1 1 Modbus 1
Plus bus CANopen Plus only
INTERBUS or Profibus – 1
DP bus
Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kb 96 prog. + data 160 prog. + data 192 prog. +
capacity data
With PCMCIA card Kb 128 prog. 224 prog. 768 prog. 768 prog.
96 data 96 data 160 data 192 data
Data storage Kb 256 16,384 (limited to 8192 with current
PCMCIA cards)
Maximum size Located internal bits bits 4096 8132
of object zones (% of internal memory)
Located internal data Kb 64 for internal words %Mpi
64 for constant words %Kpi
Unlocated internal Kb Unlimited (6)
data
Application structure Master task 1 1 1
Fast task 1 1 1
Auxiliary tasks – – –
Event tasks 32 (1 of which has priority) 64 (1 of which has priority)
Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.19 0.19 0.19
for PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.25 0.25 0.25
one instruction arithmetic
On floating points µs 1.75…2.60 1.75…2.60 (7) 1.75…2.60 (7)
(7)
With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.25 0.25 0.21
card On word or fixed-point µs 0.50 0.50 0.42
arithmetic
On floating points µs 1.75…2.60 1.75…2.60 (7) 1.75…2.60 (7)
(7)
No. of Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ 4.76 4.76 4.76
Kinstructions PCMCIA card ms
executed every 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 3.71 3.71 3.71
ms 35% fixed arithmetic ms
With PCMCIA 100% Boolean Kinst/ 3.10 3.10 3.70
card ms
65% Boolean and Kinst/ 2.10 2.10 2.53
35% fixed arithmetic ms
System Master task ms 1.00 1.00 1.00
overhead Fast task ms 0.30 0.30 0.30
(1) Identical characteristics for TSX P57 Cp0244M configuration.
(2) The first value is valid for a TSX P57 Cp 0204M configuration, the second for a TSX P57 0244M processor.
(3) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are
cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or third-party bus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP)
are not included in this maximum number.
(4) Programmable loops using the CONT-CTL EFB control block library (in addition to configurable process control).
(5) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links.
1/10
Characteristics (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Characteristics and performance (continued)

1
Types of processor TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57
304M 3634M 354M 454M 4634M 554M 5634M
Maximum No. of racks 4/6/8 slots 16 16 16
configuration 12 slots 8 8 8 1.1
Max. no. of slots for modules 128 128 128
Functions Max. no. in rack Discrete I/O 1024 2048 2048
of (3) Analog I/O 128 256 512
Process control 15 (up to 45 simple loops) 20 (4) (up to 60 simple 30 (4) (up to 90 simple
channels loops) loops)
Application-specific 32 64 64
channels (counter,
axis, weighing, and
serial links) (5)
Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP – 1 – 1 – 1
connections Fipio manager – 1 (127 agents) – 1 (127 –
agents)
Serial link 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 1 x 12 Mbps USB link (TER),
19.2 or 115 Kbps 1 x 19.2 Kbps (AUX) link
Maximum no. of Network (Ethernet 3 3, 3 4 4, 4 4,
connections TCP/IP, Fipway, 2 if 3 if 3 if
Ethway, Modbus Plus) integrated integrated integrated
Ethernet is Ethernet is Ethernet is
used used used
AS-Interface bus 8 8 8
CANopen or Modbus 1
Plus bus
INTERBUS or Profibus 3 4 5
DP bus
Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kb 192 prog. + data 208 prog. + 320 prog. + data 640 prog. + data
capacity data
With PCMCIA card Kb 1792 prog. 1792 prog. 2048 prog. 7168 prog.
192 data 208 data 440 data 896 data
Data storage Kb 16,384 (limited to 8192 with current PCMCIA cards)
Maximum size Located internal bits bits 16,384 32,768 32,768
of object zones (% of internal memory)
Located internal data Kb 64 for internal words %Mpi 128 for int. words %Mpi
64 for constant words %Kpi 64 for const. words %Kpi
Unlocated internal Kb Unlimited (6)
data
Application structure Master task 1 1 1
Fast task 1 1 1
Auxiliary tasks – – 4
Event tasks 64 (1 of which has priority) 64 (1 of which has priority) 128 (1 of which has
priority)
32 (timers)
Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.12 0.039…0.057 (7) 0.0375...0.045 (7)
for PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.17 0.054…0.073 (7) 0.045...0.060 (7)
On floating points µs 1.75...3.00 (7) 0.55…0.63 (7) 0.48...0.56 (7)
With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.17 0.048…0.057 (7) 0.0375...0.045 (7)
card On word or fixed-point µs 0.32 0.054…0.073 (7) 0.045...0.060 (7)
arithmetic
On floating points µs 1.75...3.00 (7) 0.55…0.63 (7) 0.48...0.56 (7)
Typical Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ 6.72 15.75 20.26
program code PCMCIA card ms
execution time 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 5.11 11.40 14.00
for 35% fixed arithmetic ms
1 Kinstruction
With PCMCIA 100% Boolean Kinst/ 4.59 15.75 20.26
card ms
65% Boolean and Kinst/ 3.11 11.40 14.00
System Master task ms 1.00 1.00 1.00
overhead Fast task ms 0.35 0.08 0.07
(6) Within the processor's data memory capacity limit.

(7) Threshold values limited according to the type of instruction.
1/11
References Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
Ready-assembled TSX P57 02 processor configurations with integrated

CANopen port
1
These configurations, which are supplied already mounted, feature:
b A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY6 rack
b A TSX PSY 1610/2600M DC or AC power supply
b A TSX P57 C024M processor with a TSX CPP 110 CANopen bus kit
1.1 b A TSX CTY 2A 2-channel 40 kHz counter module
TSX P57 2634/3634M
I/O capacity (1) Capacity No. of bus/network Power Reference Weight
Memory modules supply V (2) kg
192 discrete I/O 96 Kb integrated 1 integrated c 24 TSX P57 CD 0244M 2.940
12 analog I/O channels 128 Kb on PCMCIA CANopen bus
4 application-specific 1 network
channels 1 AS-Interface bus a 100…240 TSX P57 CA 0244M 2.900
(1)
TSX 57 processors
I/O capacity (2) Capacity Maximum number of Integrated Reference Weight
Memory Process bus/network port (3) kg
control modules
channels
TSX 57 0p 1 rack
256 discrete I/O 96 Kb 0 1 network CANopen TSX P57 0244M 0.320
12 analog I/O integrated 1 AS-Interface bus
4 application-specific 128 Kb on
channels PCMCIA
TSX 57 1p 4 racks (4)

TSX P57 154M
512 discrete I/O 96 Kb 0 1 network – TSX P57 104M 0.380
24 analog I/O integrated 2 AS-Interface buses
8 application-specific Max. 224 Kb on 1 CANopen bus
channels PCMCIA
2 AS-Interface buses Ethernet TSX P57 1634M –
1 CANopen bus TCP/IP
1 network Fipio TSX P57 154M 0.420

2 AS-Interface buses

1024 discrete I/O 160 Kb 10 1 network – TSX P57 204M 0.520
24 application-specific Max. 768 Kb on 1 CANopen bus (5)
channels PCMCIA 1 fieldbus (5)
TSX P57 204/304M
4 AS-Interface buses Ethernet TSX P57 2634M –
1 CANopen bus (5) TCP/IP
1 fieldbus (5)
192 Kb 10 1 network Fipio TSX P57 254M –

integrated 4 AS-Interface buses
Max. 768 Kb on 1 CANopen bus (5)
PCMCIA 1 fieldbus (5)
1024 discrete I/O 192 Kb 15 3 networks – TSX P57 304M 0.520
32 application-specific Max. 1792 Kb 1 CANopen bus (5)
channels on PCMCIA 3 fieldbuses (5)
2 networks Ethernet TSX P57 3634M –
8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP
TSX P57 2634/3634M
1 CANopen bus (5)
3 fieldbuses (5)
208 Kb 15 3 networks Fipio TSX P57 354M 0.560
integrated 8 AS-Interface buses
Max. 1792 Kb 1 CANopen bus (5)
on PCMCIA 3 fieldbuses (5)
(1) 2 of these channels are used by the TSX CTY 2A 2-channel 40 kHz counter module integrated
into the configuration.
(2) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the different buses is not taken
into account.
(3) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English, French, German,
Spanish, and Italian.
(4) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the
TSX P57 154/254/354M TSX RKY 12 EX rack with 12 slots is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
(5) Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP.
1/12
References (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Unity processors
TSX 57 processor (continued)

I/O capacity (1) Capacity Maximum number of Integrated Reference Weight
Memory Process
control
bus/network
modules
port (2) kg
1
channels
TSX 57-4p 16 racks (3)
2048 discrete I/O 320/440 Kb 20 4 networks Ethernet TSX P57 4634M –
256 analog I/O integrated (4) 8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP
64 application-specific Max. 2048 Kb on 1 CANopen bus (5) 1.1
channels PCMCIA 4 fieldbuses (5)
4 networks Fipio TSX P57 454M 0.560

TSX P57 454/5544M 8 AS-Interface buses
1 CANopen bus (5)
4 fieldbuses (5)
TSX 57-5p 16 racks (3)

2048 discrete I/O 640/896 Kb 30 4 networks Ethernet TSX P57 5634M –
512 analog I/O integrated (4) 8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP
64 application-specific Max. 7168 Kb on 1 CANopen bus (5)
channels PCMCIA 5 fieldbuses (5)
4 networks Fipio TSX P57 554M 0.560

8 AS-Interface buses
1 CANopen bus (5)
5 fieldbuses (5)
TSX P57 4634/5634M PCMCIA memory extension cards
Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful

memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model.
See pages 1/22 and 1/23.
Connection cables for PC programming terminal

Description Use Length Reference Weight
from to kg
Universal cable for Micro/Premium/Atrium RS 232D port on a 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
terminal port/RS 232 port mini-DIN port or TSX P ACC PC terminal
01 unit (TER or AUX) (9-way SUB-D)
Cable for terminal Micro/Premium/Atrium USB port on a PC 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –
port/USB port mini-DIN port terminal
TSX PCX 1031 (TER or AUX)
USB cable for terminal USB port Premium USB port on a PC 3.3 m UNY XCA USB 033 –
port/PC TSX 57 4p/5p terminal
Quantum 140 CPU 6p1
(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not counted.
(2) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide.
TSX RKY 12 EX rack with 12 slots is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
(4) The second value corresponds to the capacity of the integrated RAM when the application
program is supported by the PCMCIA card.
1/13
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
Presentation
1 Atrium TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLCs are PC format cards (PCI 32-bit/25…33 MHz
bus) to be integrated into a PC running under Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
This combination of PLC and PC optimizes performance in applications requiring, for
example, a higher level of communication, control or supervision functions. The slot
PLC manages the entire PLC station, which comprises the same I/O modules as
1.1 Premium processors (discrete, analog, application-specific and communication):
b Locally, in one or more racks connected to Bus X on the Atrium slot PLC
TSX PCI 57 pp4M b Using remote I/O via the same fieldbuses
Two types of Atrium slot PLC are available. They can both accommodate:
b A maximum of 16 extendable TSX RKY ppEX racks

b A CANopen master bus function in their external PCMCIA slot
Both have:
b An internal PCMCIA slot (no. 0) to accommodate all types of memory extension
card: program and symbols only, or mixed (program, symbols and data storage)
b An external PCMCIA slot (no. 1) to accommodate the network card (Fipway,
Modbus Plus) or bus (CANopen, Modbus, Uni-Telway, Fipio Agent and serial link)
This slot can also accommodate the 4 or 8 MB SRAM memory extension card used
to store additional data (see page 1/22).
Their distinguishing characteristics are:
b The short application program execution time

b The program memory and data memory capacity
b 80 or 128 "in-rack" analog I/O
b 24 or 32 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter,
motion control, serial link, or weighing) accounts for 1 or a number of
b 1 or 3 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway types),
1 Ethernet TCP/IP network, 4 or 8 AS-Interface buses V2.1, 1 CANopen bus and 1
or 3 third-party fieldbuses (INTERBUS, Profibus DP)
b 10 or 15 process control channels
Integrated communication
Six means of integrated communication (communication that does not require the
external rack to be connected on the slot PLC Bus X) are possible:
b CANopen master, via a PCMCIA card that is inserted into the external slot on the
slot PLC
b Fipio manager, via a 9-way SUB-D type connector on the faceplate of the TSX PCI
57 354M slot PLC
b Ethernet TCP/IP, via the TCP/X-Way Windows-compatible gateway software,
which communicates with the slot PLC via the PCI bus on the host PC (this software
is either connected to an Ethernet port in the host PC, integrated into the
motherboard or supplied on a PC format card)
b INTERBUS master generation 4, via an additional PC format card, occupying an ISA
bus slot and connected to the slot PLC via a ribbon cable that includes Bus X
b Modbus Plus or Fipway, via a PCMCIA card that is inserted into the external slot
on the slot PLC
b Communication via a terminal port (TER) using Uni-Telway or character mode
protocol, 19.2 or 115 Kbps (typically a programming terminal or an HMI terminal)
1/14
Presentation (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
Presentation (continued)
TSX PSI 2010 standalone power supply
In order to enable standalone operation in the event of a PC power outage, a

1
standalone c 24 V TSX PSI 2010 power supply can be connected to a PCI or ISA
bus slot to ensure continuity of service for the automation part of the system (only
functions managed by the PC are disabled).
1.1
Design and installation of Atrium applications
Installation of these new Atrium slot PLCs requires:
b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same
as the software used on the Quantum platform.
b Optionally, depending on requirements:
v The Unity Studio software suite used to design distributed applications
v Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modeling and generating
process applications
v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB function block libraries in
C language
v Unity SFC View software for displaying and diagnosing applications written in
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language
The Atrium slot PLC is not supplied with any Windows driver or application type
software programs. These are supplied with the Unity Pro, Unity Studio, Monitor Pro,
Vijeo Look, OFS (OPC Factory Server), etc. software.
They enable connection to the slot PLC via:
b Uni-Telway and the TER port on the front panel

b PCIway and the PC host's PCI bus
b Ethernet TCP/IP (XIP)
Typical architecture
By integrating an Atrium slot PLC card, the architecture shown opposite can be
Ethernet TCP/IP created using any compatible PC (equipped with PCI bus slots) and Magelis IPC
industrial PC stations.
Magelis IPC This solution can provide a PLC architecture in which the I/O are:
fitted with, for example:
- Atrium TSX PCI slot PLC
- Vijeo Look and Unity Pro software b Remotely located close to the machine or process via the fieldbus (1):
- TCP/X-Way gateway software v Ethernet TCP/IP via the TLX CD GTW 10M gateway software
- c 24 V standalone power supply
v CANopen with TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card
v Fipio with the integrated port on the TSX PCI 57 354M slot PLC
v Modbus Plus with TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA card
v INTERBUS with PC format slot PLC card, TSX IBX 100 ISA bus (link to
TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLC via ribbon cable)
Premium I/O extension racks b And/or centralized in TSX RKY ppEX extendable racks. TSX RKY ppEX
extendable racks connected on Bus X permit the use of application-specific modules
and the setting up of AS-Interface bus segments. For example:
Altivar
v TCP/IP TSX ETY 4103 or TSX ETY 5103 Ethernet TCP/IP module (with Web
server, FactoryCast server or TSX WMY 100 module (FactoryCast HMI server))
v INTERBUS TSX IBY 100 or Profibus DP TSX PBY 100 master module
Momentum v TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface V2.1 master module
v TSX CAY, TSX CFY or TSX CSY 84 (SERCOS) motion control modules
Ethernet TCP/IP, CANopen, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS
(1) Corresponding to an integrated module solution on the host PC, without having to use
modules on extension racks on Bus X.
1/15
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
Description
Description of slot PLCs
1 TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLCs mechanically occupy two consecutive slots on the PCI
bus, but only use one electrically (1). They feature:
1
2 b On the faceplate:
1.1 3
4
5 1 A PCMCIA slot (no.1) for a communication card or memory extension card for
6 storing additional data
2 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for connecting Bus X to the first rack supporting
the I/O modules and application-specific modules
TSX PCI 57 pp4M
terminal
4 A RESET button causing a cold restart of the slot PLC when it is activated
5 An ERR lamp (red); fault on the slot PLC or its on-board devices (PCMCIA
memory or communication cards)
6 A 9-pin male SUB-D connector (on TSX PCI 57 354M model) for Fipio bus
manager communication.
b On the components side of the card:
v 4 or 5 LEDs indicating the operating status (RUN, TER, BAT, I/O and FIP on the
TSX PCI 57 354M)
v A slot for a backup battery for the slot PLC internal RAM memory
v A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card
v A Bus X line terminator circuit (type A)
v A PCI bus connector for connection to the host PC
Supplied with the slot PLC: 1 Bus X line terminator (type B) to be installed at the end
of the last of the I/O and application-specific module support racks.
Description of the additional TSX PCI ACC1 remote Bus X faceplate
7 An additional faceplate, TSX PCI ACC1, fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D
connector, enabling the slot PLC Atrium to be located in the middle of its extension
racks rather than at one end of them.
7 Description of the c 24 V TSX PSI 2010 power supply
The c 24 V TSX PSI 2010 power supply is inserted into a PCI bus slot located next
TSX PCI ACC1 to the TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLC. It occupies one slot mechanically but no slots
electrically. It can provide the power supply for one slot PLC. It features the following
on the front panel:
8 A 9-way female SUB-D connector enabling a second remote Bus X to be

connected (instead of using the TSX PCI ACC1 faceplate)
8
9 A 3-way female SUB-D connector for connection to the c 24 V power supply
(male connector supplied)
9
This power supply includes two ribbon cables for connection to the slot PLC, one for
the power supply to the slot PLC and the other to ensure Bus X continuity.
TSX PSI 2010

(1) Atrium slot PLCs can also operate using just one PC slot: For this purpose, carefully unscrew
and remove the external PCMCIA slot.
1/16
Gateway, Modicon Premium automation
setup platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
SCADA TCP/X-Way gateway

OFS server
The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium slot PLCs:
b Communication using the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet
1
Ethernet TCP/IP TCP/IP card integrated in the PC
b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in
Modbus the PC
Uni-TE
1.1
This software interfaces with the Atrium slot PLC PCIway driver and automatically
routes messages. The most common configurations are:
v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking
1 2
incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC Ethernet TSX ETY 4103
3 module. The Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported.
Premium
v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password
checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP
PC gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local
Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function).
Quantum Setup
Integration into the host PC
1 Atrium slot PLC
2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port To receive a TSX PCI 57 pp4M Atrium slot PLC, the host PC must:
3 TCP/X-Way software gateway b Run under Windows 2000 or Windows XP
b Have a 33-bit 33 MHz (c 5 or 3.3 V) PCI bus
b Have two consecutive slots available on the PCI bus (of which at least one must
be a PCI type slot)
The maximum number of slot PLCs per PC depends on the number of available
PCI/ISA slots, the PC power supply rating (when the TSX PSI 2010 power supply
option is not used) and whether or not PCMCIA cards have been inserted into the
slot PLC.
The slot PLC is completely independent of the application running on the PC, in
particular:
b The standard PC command "Restart" (1) has no effect on the slot PLC operating
modes (2).
b Switching the PC off and then on again causes a warm restart of the application
being managed by the slot PLC (restart without loss of application context).
b The c 24 V standalone power supply allows the slot PLC to operate even in the
event of a PC power supply outage.
The host PC, equipped with Unity Pro software, can be used as a programming and
setup terminal for the TSX PCI 57 Atrium slot PLC.
Magelis IPC or PC with Logical location on Bus X

Atrium slot PLC
The Atrium TSX PCI 57 slot PLC logically occupies the same 2 slots as a Premium
TSX P57 processor of the same type. The 2 slots in the TSX RKY rack with address
0 next to the TSX PSY power supply module must therefore remain unoccupied, see
page 1/27.
Bus X Bus X
The TSX PCI ACC1 faceplate or TSX PSI 2010 c 24 V power supply enables a
second Bus X to be connected from Magelis IPC industrial PCs, thus forming a Y
Premium extension Premium extension
structure (see the diagram opposite, where the maximum length of each Bus X
segment is 100 m). If they are not used, only one Bus X may be connected.
(1) "Ctrl-Alt-Del" command, followed by "Restart" or pressing the "Reset" button on the PC (if
Premium extension there is one).
(2) Causes the loss of the PCI bus connection.
1/17
Memory structure Modicon Premium automation
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
Slot PLC without PCMCIA memory card Memory structure

Located data
1 Unlocated data
1 The application memory is divided into memory areas physically distributed in the
internal RAM memory and on 0, 1 or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards:
1
160 to 208 Kb
Internal RAM Program, symbols and 1 The application data area, which may be one of 2 possible types, is always in the
area for online program 2 internal RAM:
modification v Located data corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW237) to
1.1 which a symbol may be associated (e.g. Counting_rejects).
v Global unlocated data corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type
Constants of addressing removes memory "mapping" management constraints, as address are
3
assigned automatically, and enables data to be structured.
v DFB unlocated data, corresponding to data from DFB user function blocks. The
size of this object zone is only limited by the size of the physical internal RAM
memory available.
2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols. In
the event of this area being in internal RAM, it also supports the area for modifying
the program in online mode (1).
Slot PLC with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0
This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code.
The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory.
Located data 1 3 Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0)
160 or 208 Kb
4 Storage area for additional data (slot no. 0 or no. 1), e.g. for production data and
Global unlocated data 1
Internal RAM
manufacturing recipes
DFB unlocated data

Two memory structures are possible depending on whether the Atrium slot PLC is
1
fitted with 0, 1 or 2 memory extension cards:
b Application in internal RAM. In this case, the application is entirely loaded in the
processor’s internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the
Program and symbols 2 processor model (160 or 208 Kb).
128 to 7168 Kb
PCMCIA card b Application in PCMCIA card. In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for
slot no. 0 application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 1) contains the program space
(program, symbols and constants areas) (max. 768 or 1792 Kb).
Constants 3 Certain types of PCMCIA memory card host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb).
The presence of the symbols area with the program area is optional. Having the
Storage of additional 4
data
application symbols database on the PLC means that, when connected to a
programming terminal not containing any applications, all the elements needed to
debug or upgrade this PLC are available within the PLC.
(1) If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, the memory used by program modification in online
mode is located in this memory card (outside zones 2, 3 and 4 opposite).
(2) The internal RAM memory is backed up by an optional battery (3 years' battery life) located in
the power supply module (see page 2/22).
1/18
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
Slot PLC with data storage memory card in slot no. 0

Memory structure (continued)
Extension of the data storage area
Internal RAM
Located data 1
Memory cards reserved for data storage (4096 or 8192 Kb) are used to:
1
Global and DFB 1
unlocated data
160 or 208 Kb
b Access the data storage area when the application is entirely supported by the
Program, symbols and
area for online program internal RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA
2
modification slot no. 0. 1.1
Constants 3 b Free up memory space to provide additional program space when the application
is in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is
inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 1 (a part of it can be supported by the memory card in
PCMCIA data the slot).
4096 or 208 Kb
storage card (slot

no. 0) Storage of additional
data 4 Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with the management
of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC.
Protecting the application
Slot PLC with mixed type memory cards in slot no. 0 and data Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the
storage type memory cards in slot no. 1 internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect this in order to
prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) by only loading the executable
Located data 1
160 or 208 Kb
code on the PLC.

Internal RAM Global unlocated data 1
Unlocated DFB data program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads).
1
Program and symbols 2 Program modification in online mode

128 to 7168 Kb
This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7
Constants 3
software) and now allows program code and data in different parts of the application
PCMCIA card (slot to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification
no. 0)
unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process).
Additional data storage This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume
(zone A) 4
required. Any program modifications made in online mode require available program
memory space at least equal in size to the combined size of all sections of the Unity
PCMCIA data
Pro program affected by the same modification session.
4096 or 8192 Kb
storage card (slot

no. 1) Depending on circumstances:
Additional data storage 4 b For a processor with memory extension card, the memory volume remaining
(zone B)
available in the card for online modification is sufficient if the recommendations on
page 1/22 are observed.
b For a processor without memory extension card, users wishing to have the option
of making modifications in online mode may select a processor according to:
v The anticipated size of the application
v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode
A memory extension card that only uses Flash Eprom technology (without additional
SRAM) cannot provide the function of program modification in online mode.
1/19
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
Characteristics and performance

Type of processor TSX PCI P57 204M TSX PCI P57 354M
1 Maximum
configuration
No. of racks 4/6/8 slots
12 slots
16
8
Max. no. of slots for modules 128
Functions Max. no. "in Discrete I/O 1024
rack" of (1) Analog I/O 80 128
1.1 Process control channels 10 (up to 30 simple loops) 15 (up to 60 simple loops)
Application-specific channels 24 32
(counter, axis, weighing, and
serial links) (2)
Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP 1 (uses the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated in the host PC via the TLX CD GTW 10M gateway
connections software)
Fipio manager – 1 (127 agents)
Serial link 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX),
19.2 Kbps 19.2 or 115 Kbps
Maximum Network (Ethernet TCP/IP, 2 (including 1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into 4 (including 1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into
no. of Fipway, Modbus Plus, PC) PC)
connections Ethway)
AS-Interface bus 4 8
CANopen or Modbus Plus bus 1
INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus 1, none if CANopen is used 3, 2 if CANopen is used
Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kb 160 program and data 208 program and data
capacity With PCMCIA card Kb 768 program 1792 program
160 data 208 data
Data storage Kb 16,384 (limited to 8192 with current PCMCIA cards)
Maximum Located internal bits (% of bps 8132 16 384
size of internal memory)
object Located internal data Kb 64 for internal words %MpWi, 64 for constant words %KpWi
zones
Global unlocated internal data Kb Unlimited, within the limits of the memory capacity of the slot PLC
Application structure Master task 1
Fast task 1
Auxiliary tasks –
Event tasks 64 (1 of which has priority)
Execution Without Boolean µs 0.19 0.12
time for one PCMCIA On word or fixed-point µs 0.25 0.17
instruction card arithmetic
On floating points µs 1.75...2.60 (3)
With Boolean µs 0.21 0.17
PCMCIA On word or fixed-point µs 0.42 0.32
card arithmetic
On floating points µs 1.75...2.60 (3)
Typical program code 100% Boolean Kinst/ 4.76 without PCMCIA card, 6.72 without PCMCIA card
execution time for ms 3.70 with PCMCIA card 4.59 with PCMCIA card
1 Kinstruction 65% Boolean and 35% fixed Kinst/ 3.71 without PCMCIA card, 5.11 without PCMCIA card
arithmetic ms 2.53 with PCMCIA card 3.12 with PCMCIA card
System MAST task ms 1.00 1.00
overhead FAST task ms 0.30 0.25
(1) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. The remote I/O
on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface/Uni-Telway/Fipio/Modbus Plus, etc.) or third-party bus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this
maximum number.
(3) Threshold values according to the type of instruction.
Standalone power supply characteristics

Type of power supply module TSX PSI 2010
Primary Voltage Nominal V c 24
Limits (including ripple) V c 19.2 … 30 (possible up to 36 V)
Current Nominal input value 1 rms A y 1.1 at c 24 V
Initial 1 inrush A 100 at c 24 V
power-up at I2t on triggering A2 3
25°C
It on triggering As 0.04
Power line disturbance period ms y 7 at 24 V, y 1 at 19.2 V
Built-in protection Via a 2 A time-delay fuse (complying with standards)
Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2
Insulation Dielectric Primary/secondary and V rms Non-isolated, internal 0 V connected to PC ground
strength primary/earth
Insulation Primary/secondary and MΩ –
resistance primary/earth
1/20
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

Unity
TSX PCI 57 slot PLCs

I/O capacity (1) Capacities Maximum number Reference Weight
Memory Process control
channels
of bus/network
modules
(2) kg
1
TSX PCI 57 20 16 racks (3)
1024 discrete I/O 160 Kb integrated 10 1 network all types TSX PCI 57 204M 0.310
80 analog I/O Max. 768 Kb on 1 Ethernet TCP/IP
24 application-specific PCMCIA network
channels 4 AS-Interface
buses
1.1
1 CANopen bus (4)
1 fieldbus (4)
TSX PCI 57 204M
TSX PCI 57 35 16 racks (3)
1024 discrete I/O 208 Kb integrated 15 1 integrated Fipio TSX PCI 57 354M 0.340
128 analog I/O Max. 1792 Kb on 3 networks all types
32 application-specific PCMCIA 1 Ethernet TCP/IP
channels network
8 AS-Interface
buses
1 CANopen bus (4)
3 third-party buses
(4)
Software options (5)
TSX PCI 57 354M When connected to an Atrium slot PLC, the TCP/X-Way gateway software offer
(supplied on CD-ROM) enables communication under the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP
protocol using the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated into the host PC.
PCMCIA memory extension cards

Atrium slot PLCs can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful
memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the slot PLC model. See
pages 1/22 and 1/23.
Description Use Site license Reference Weight

kg
TCP/X-Way gateway Compatible with Windows 2000 or XP Single-station TLX CD GTW 10M –
software
10 stations TLX CD10 GTW 10M –
200 stations TLX CDUNT GTW 10M –
Separate parts
Description Use Sold in lots of Reference Weight
kg
Faceplate for remote Bus X Enables a second remote – TSX PCI ACC1 –
Bus X connection (9-way SUB-D
connector)
c 24 V standalone power Enables the TSX PCI slot PLC to operate in – TSX PSI 2010 –
supply the event of a PC power supply outage
Enables a second remote Bus X connection
Batteries Internal RAM memory backup 1 TSX PLP 01 0.010
TSX PCI ACC1

10 TSX PLP 101 0.100
(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not counted.
(2) Product supplied with multilingual installation guide: English, French, German, and Spanish.
Supplied without software drivers.
(5) Other software compatible with Atrium slot PLCs: OFS data server software,
Vijeo Look/Monitor Pro, supervisory software, see our catalog.
TSX PSI 2010
1/21
platform 1

Unity
Presentation
PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of
1 Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs.
Some of the cards can also be used on Quantum and Micro processors. Depending
on the model, these cards can host:
b Application program, symbols and constants
b Additional application data
1.1 b Or both

All the cards are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors and Atrium
slot PLCs, i.e.:
b The upper slot on processors
b The internal slot on slot PLCs
Two of these SRAM data storage memory cards can also be inserted into slot no. 1,
i.e.:
b The lower slot on processors
b The external slot on slot PLCs
These cards support three types of data storage:

b Application storage: Program, symbols and constants in a common space (128 Kb
to 7168 Kb, depending on the card model):
v TSX MRP PpppK for SRAM memories
v TSX MFP PpppK/M for Flash EPROM memories
b Storage of the application and additional data, with 192 Kb to 7 Mb of application
space and 7 Mb to 0 Kb of data storage space for additional data. The limit between
these 2 spaces is configurable. The configurable cards are:
v TSX MRP CpppK/M for SRAM memories
v TSX MCP CpppK/M for Flash EPROM and SRAM memories
b Storage of additional data, provided by 4 Mb or 8 Mb TSX MRP F00pM SRAM
memory cards
These cards use 2 technologies:

b Battery-backed SRAM
Used in particular in the creation and debugging phases for the application program.
These cards support:
v All of the application's transfer and modification services in online mode
v Additional data storage
The memory is backed up by a removable battery integrated into the PCMCIA card.
A second auxiliary battery is present to enable the main battery to be replaced
without loss of data.
b Flash EPROM
Used once debugging of the application program is complete. It enables:
v Backup battery life restrictions to be overcome
v A global application transfer to be performed
If it is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode.
Program modification in online mode

Only extension cards on which the program is stored in SRAM memory (TSX MRP
PpppK/M. and TSX MRP CpppK/M) support online program modification.
Users of processors fitted with memory extension cards who wish to modify or add
program data in online mode must follow the two recommendations below:
b Structure the application program in a number of sections of a reasonable size
b Where possible, select one of the two extension cards recommended in the table
below:
Premium processors TSX P57 Cp TSX P57 1p TSX P57 2p TSX P57 3p TSX P57 4p TSX P57 5p
Atrium slot PLCs TSX P57 0p TSX PCI 57 2p TSX PCI 57 3p
Cards recommended for program modification All TSX MRP All TSX MRP CpppK/M/7 TSX MRP C002M,
in online mode TSX MRP PpppK P224K/P384K, all TSX MRP C003M,
and TSX MRP TSX MRP TSX MRP C007M
CpppK/M/7 CpppK/M/7
1/22
platform 1

Unity
Reminder of the memory characteristics of processors and slot PLCs

Memory capacities without PCMCIA extension card (data, program, symbols, and constants in internal RAM memory):
Premium processors
Atrium slot PLCs
TSX P57
TSX P57 TSX 57
Cp 0244/
104/154M/ 204/
TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57
57 204M 254 304/ 354M 57 354M 454/ 554/
1
0244M 1634M 2634M 3634M 4634M 5634M
In internal RAM 96 Kb 96 Kb 160 Kb 160 Kb 192 Kb 192 Kb 208 Kb 208 Kb 320 Kb 640 Kb
Memory capacities with PCMCIA extension card(s) (data in internal RAM memory; program, symbols, constants, and data storage on PCMCIA card):
Premium processors TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX 57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57
Atrium slot PLCs 0244M 104/154M/ 204/ 57 204M 254 304/ 354M 57 354M 454/ 554/
1.1
1634M 2634M 3634M 4634M 5634M
Data in internal RAM 96 Kb 96 Kb 160 Kb 160 Kb 192 Kb 192 Kb 208 Kb 208 Kb 440 Kb 896 Kb
PCMCIA extension (program, symbols 128 Kb 224 Kb 768 Kb 768 Kb 768 Kb 1792 Kb 1792 Kb 1792 Kb 2048 Kb 7168 Kb
and constants)
Data storage on PCMCIA (1) 256 Kb 16,384 Kb, limited to 8192 Kb if the TSX MRP F008M PCMCIA card is used
References
Premium TSX P57 Cp/0p/1p/2p/3p/4p/5p processors and Atrium TSX PCI 57 2p/3p slot PLCs support the
memory extension cards listed below.
There are two types of memory limit:
b One associated with the type of processor or slot PLC (see above)
b One associated with the model of PCMCIA memory card selected
The lowest of these two limits defines the memory capacity available to the user for his/her application.
PCMCIA memory extensions
Use on processor Slot Memory size Reference Weight
Application Data storage kg
SRAM application memory extensions
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 128 Kb – TSX MRP P128K –
TSX 57 0p…57 4p 224 Kb – TSX MRP P224K –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
384 Kb – TSX MRP P384K –
Configurable SRAM application/file memory extensions
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 96…448 Kb 352…0 Kb TSX MRP C448K –
TSX 57 0p…57 4p
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 192…768 Kb 576…0 Kb TSX MRP C768K –
TSX 57 0p…57 5p 192…1024 Kb 832…0 Kb TSX MRP C001M –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
192…1792 Kb 1600…0 Kb TSX MRP C01M7 –
192…2048 Kb 1856…0 Kb TSX MRP C002M –
192…3072 Kb 2880…0 Kb TSX MRP C003M –
192…7168 Kb 6976…0 Kb TSX MRP C007M
Flash EPROM application memory extensions
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 128 Kb – TSX MFP P128K –
TSX 57 0p…57 4p 224 Kb – TSX MFP P224K –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
384 Kb – TSX MFP P384K –
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 512 Kb – TSX MFP P512K –
TSX 57 0p…57 5p 1024 Kb – TSX MFP P001Mr –
TSX PCI 57 2p/4p
TSX 57 2p…57 5p, Slot 0 2048 Kb – TSX MFP P002Mr –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p 4096 Kb – TSX MFP P004Mr –
Flash EPROM and SRAM application/file memory extensions
TSX 57 0p…57 4p, Slot 0 224 Kb 256 Kb TSX MCP C224Kr –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 512 Kb 512 Kb TSX MCP C512Kr –
TSX 57 0p…57 5p, 2048 Kb 1024 Kb TSX MCP C002Mr –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
SRAM file memory extensions
TSX 57 2p…57 5p Slot 0 or 1 – 4096 Kb TSX MRP F004Mr –
TSX PCI 57 2p/3p (2) 8192 Kb TSX MRP F008M –
Flash EPROM backup card (3)
TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 96 Kb – TSX MFP B096K –
TSX 57 0p/1p
Replacement parts
Description Use Type Reference Weight
kg
Backup batteries PCMCIA SRAM memory card Main TSX BAT M02 0.010
Auxiliary TSX BAT M03 –
Handle PCMCIA memory card TSX P CAP 0.030
(1) Intended for the storage of manufacturing recipes and production data. Capacity depending on PCMCIA card model.
(2) Memory extension card for file storage to be inserted into slot no. 0 if free, otherwise into slot no. 1. In the latter case, an
application memory type or application memory and file storage type memory extension card is inserted into slot no. 0.
(3) This card is pre-loaded and can be used to update the application program on a Premium PLC without having to use a
programming terminal (the entire program must be located in the internal RAM).
r Due to be launched in
November 2004
1/23
platform 1
Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs

PL7
Premium/Atrium platforms for PL7 software offer TSX 57 1p processors TSX 57 2p processors and T PCX 57 2p
slot PLC
1.2
Number of racks 4/6/8 slots 4 16

(according to rack type) 12 slots 2 8
"In-rack" I/O (1) Discrete I/O 512 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or
64 channels) 64 channels)
Analog I/O 24 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 80 channels (modules with 4, 8 or
16 channels) 16 channels)
Integrated process control – Configurable loops (10 channels with max.
3 loops)
"In-rack" Max. no. of channels 8 24
application-specific Counter Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module
channels
Motion (2) Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control
servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link
Weighing Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)
Serial links "In-rack" communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
Serial link connections Modbus RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485
master/slave modules
Uni-Telway 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave
PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules
Character mode 1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and "in-rack"
RS 485 modules
Jnet PCMCIA modules (4), 3 max.
Bus connections AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus 2 "in-rack" modules 4 "in-rack" modules
master V2
CANopen machine bus master V4.02 1 PCMCIA module (3)
(5)
INTERBUS fieldbus master V2 (5) – 1 "in-rack" module
or
Profibus DP fieldbus master V0
class 1 and 2 (5)
Network connections Max. no. of networks 1 1 Global Data, I/O Scanning (+ 1 software
gateway with Atrium slot PLC)
Ethernet TCP/IP Multiprotocol "in-rack" modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast
service and Factory Cast HMI services
Communication modules Fipway (3) (4) and Modbus Plus (3) PCMCIA modules, "in-rack" Ethway modules
Memory capacity Without PCMCIA extension 32 K words program and data 48/64 K words program and data (6)
With PCMCIA extension 32 K words data 48/64 K words data (6)
64 K words program 160 K words program
Data storage 128 K words 640 K words + 2048 K words
Symbol storage – 128 K words
Power supply a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated power supply modules. A power
supply is required for each rack.
Type of processor and Standard TSX P57 103M TSX P57 203M Q
slot PLC Integrated Ethernet TSX P57 2623M Q (8)
Integrated Fipio TSX P57 153M (7) TSX P57 253M Q
Integrated Ethernet and Fipio TSX P57 2823M (8)
Atrium slot PLC Standard T PCX 57 203M
Integrated Fipio
Pages 1/31
(4) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and process control channels are cumulative.
(5) 1 axis = 1 application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 2…32 channels.
(6) Insert the module into the lower PCMCIA slot on the processor (no. 1) or into the external PCMCIA slot on the slot PLC (no. 1).
(7) Insert the module into the PCMCIA slot on the TSX SCY 21 601 "in-rack" communication module.
1/24
1
TSX 57 3p processors and T PCX 57 3p slot PLCs TSX 57 4p processors
1.2
16
8
1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels)
128 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels)
Configurable loops (15 channels with max. 3 loops)
32 64
Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module
Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link
Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)

"In-rack" communication modules (1 application-specific channel)
RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules
1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules
1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 modules
PCMCIA modules (4), 3 max.

8 "in-rack" modules
1 PCMCIA module (3)
2 "in-rack" modules
3 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium slot PLC) 4
Multiprotocol "in-rack" modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services
Fipway (3) (4) and Modbus Plus (3) PCMCIA modules, "in-rack" Ethway modules
64/80 K words program and data (6) 96 K words program and data
80/96 K words data (6) 176 K words data
384 K words program 512 K words program (992 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher)
640 K words + 2048 K words 2048 Kwords (640 K words + 2048 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher)
128 K words 256 Kwords (384 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher)
a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack.
TSX P57 303M Q

TSX P57 3623M Q (8)
TSX P57 353M Q TSX P57 453M
TSX P57 4823M (8)
T PCX 57 353M
1/31
(8) Reduce the number of modules permitted (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) by 1 when CANopen is used.
(9) The second value corresponds to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link.
(10)The TSX P57 153M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module.
(11)The integrated Ethernet port requires 1 of the available network connections.
Q Processor able to migrate from PL7 to Unity Pro by means of a simple processor operating system update (included in the Unity Pro software CD-ROM).
1/25
platform 1
PL7 processors
Presentation
1 Premium TSX P57 pp3M and TSX P57 pp23M control system platform processors
manage the entire PLC station comprising discrete or I/O modules, Preventa safety
modules, analog I/O modules, and application-specific modules, which can be
distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X or on a fieldbus.
TSX P57 processors

The types of processor available are divided into various capacities according to
memory, "in-rack" I/O, communication, and processing speed. According to the
model:
1.2 b 4 to 16 racks or steps.
b 512 to 2040 discrete I/O
b 24 to 256 analog I/O
b 8 to 64 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter,
motion control, communication or weighing) accounts for 1 or a number of
b 1 to 4 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 2 to 8
AS-Interface sensor/actuator buses, 1 to 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS,
Profibus DP), 0 or 1 Fipio fieldbus, serial links (Modbus, Uni-Telway)
b 10 to 20 process control channels
According to the model, Premium processors include:
b A 10 or 100 Mbps TCP/IP Ethernet port (RJ45 connection)
b A 1 Mbps Fipio bus link (bus manager)
b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway or character
mode protocol (typically a 19 or 115 Mbps programming terminal and an operator
dialog terminal)
Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card for accepting a network card
(Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus (CANopen (1), Fipio Agent) or serial link (Modbus,
Uni-Telway, character mode)
Application design and installation

Version V4.4 PL7 Junior/Pro software can be provided in a variety of versions
according to requirements:
b Single-station
b Multistation in the form of independent stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations
connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for 3 to 10 stations or
Pro OpenSite for 10 or more stations), or as a client/server architecture via Thin
Client type PC terminals (Pro Servi).
These licenses are compatible with PC terminals running Windows 2000
Professional or Windows XP operating systems.
Migration of Premium processors

Some Premium TSX P57 pp3M processors compatible with PL7 software can
migrate to become compatible with the Unity Pro software without the need for
hardware modifications. This migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is achieved by means
of the following software updates:
b Processor operating system
b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port operating system
This update is carried out using the OS-Loader tool, included in Unity Pro (see page
6/25). Once migrated, PL7 processors are equivalent to corresponding Unity
processors.
The following PL7 processors are able to migrate to Unity Pro (software migration):
b TSX 57 2p: TSX P7 203/253/2623M become TSX P7 204/254/2634M
respectively
b TSX 57 3p: TSX P7 303/353/3623M become TSX P7 304/354/3634M
respectively
b TSX 57 4p: TSX P7 453 becomes TSX P57 454M
Note: Processor migration requires the use of new PCMCIA TSX MRP P/C, TSX MFP P/C
memory references. See the equivalence table on page 1/36.
(1) Not with TSX P57 153M processor.
Description: Characteristics: Functions: References:

page 1/27 pages 1/28 and 1/29 page 1/30 pages 1/30 and 1/31
1/26
Presentation (continued), Modicon Premium automation
description platform 1
PL7 processors
Presentation (continued)
Migration of Premium processors (continued)
Migration offers involving the replacement of the processor are offered for other
product references. Please contact your Regional Sales Office for more information
1
about these offers, which are only available for a limited period of time. They concern
the following PL7 processors:
b TSX P57 2823M for migration to TSX P57 254M with TSX ETY 4103 (1)
b TSX P57 453M for migration to TSX P57 454M
b TSX P57 4823M for migration to TSX P57 454M with TSX ETY 4103 (1) 1.2
b TSX P57 4823M for migration to TSX P57 554M with TSX ETY 4103 (1)
TSX P57pp3M processors without integrated Ethernet port

Single-format TSX P57 1p3M processors and double-format TSX P57 2p3/3p3/453M
1 processors feature the following on the front panel:
2
3
4
5
6 card and PCMCIA communication card)
7 v I/O lamp (red): Faults occurring on another module in the station or configuration
fault
v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the terminal port
TSX P57 1p3M v FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus
or adjustment terminal
1
2
4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral
3 device
4 5 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card
6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a 4 MB SRAM communication or extension card for
5
6 7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 153/253/353/453M models) for Fipio bus
7 manager communication
TSX P57pp3M processors with integrated Ethernet port

TSX P57 2 p3/3p3/453M
Double-format TSX P57 2623/2823M and TSX P57 3623/4823M processors with
integrated Ethernet port feature the following on the front panel:

1 3 2 1 3 2 v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution)
v I/O lamp (red): Faults occurring on another module in the station or configuration
fault
4 v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the terminal port
5 v FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus
6 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 lamps:
7
v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet port ready
8 v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault
9 v COL lamp (red): Collision detection
v Two TX and RX lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity
TSX P57 2623/3623M TSX P57 2823/4823M
or adjustment terminal.
5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral
(1) The proposed TSX ETY 4103 Ethernet TCP/IP module device
provides the same functions as the integrated Ethernet port 6 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network
on TSX P57 2823/4823M processors. However, the 7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card
connection between the processor and the Ethernet module 8 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a 4 MB SRAM communication or extension card for
occupies one more slot than the PL7 processor to be
migrated. Therefore, this type of migration requires a free storing additional data
slot in the Premium rack and modification of the converted 9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823/4823/M models) for Fipio bus
Unity Pro application. manager communication
Presentation: Characteristics: Functions: References:

page 1/26 pages 1/28 and 1/29 page 1/30 pages 1/30 and 1/31
1/27
platform 1
PL7 processors
Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment..
1 Characteristics and performance
Types of processor TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57
103M 153M 203M 2623M 253M 2823M
Maximum No. of racks 4/6/8 slots 4 16
configuration 12 slots 2 8
Max. no. of slots 32 128
for modules
Functions Max. no. of Discrete I/O 512 1024
1.2 (1) Analog I/O 24 80
Process control – 10 (up to 30 simple loops)
channels
Application-specific 8 24
channels (counter,
axis, weighing, and
serial links) (2)
Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP – 1 – 1
connections Fipio manager – 1 (63 agents) – 1 (127 agents)
Serial link 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 19.2 Kbps
Maximum no. of Networks (Ethernet 1 1 1, none if 1 1, none if
connections TCP/IP, Fipway, integrated integrated
Modbus Plus, Ethway) Ethernet is Ethernet is
used used
CANopen bus 1 – 1
INTERBus or Profibus – 1, none if CANopen is used
DP bus
Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kwords 32, program and data 48, program and data 64, program and data
capacity With PCMCIA card Kwords 64, program 160, program 160, program
32, data 48, data 64, data
Data storage Kwords 128 2688
Maximum size Located internal bits bits 4096 8132
of object zones (%Mi)
Located internal data Kwords 30.5 for internal words %Mpi
Application structure Master task 1 1
Fast task 1 1
Event tasks 32 (1 of which has priority) 64 (1 of which has priority)
Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.50 0.19
per instruction PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.62 0.25
arithmetic
On floating points µs 44 2.6
With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.60 0.21
card On word or fixed-point µs 0.87 0.42
arithmetic
On floating points µs 44 2.6
No. of Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ 1.52 4.76
Kinstructions PCMCIA card ms
executed every 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 1.05 3.57
ms 35% fixed arithmetic ms
With PCMCIA 100% Boolean Kinst/ 1.18 3.70
card ms
65% Boolean and Kinst/ 0.85 2.50
System Master task ms 1.50 3.10 (2) 1.00 1.2 (2)
overhead Fast task ms 0.80 0.35
cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not
included in this maximum number.
Presentation: Description: Functions: References:

page 1/26 page 1/27 page 1/30 pages 1/30 and 1/31
1/28
platform 1
PL7 processors
Characteristics and performance (continued)

1
Type of processor TSX P57 303M TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M TSX P57 4823M
Maximum No. of racks 4/6/8 slots 16
configuration 12 slots 8
Max. no. of slots for modules 128
Functions Max. no. in rack Discrete I/O 1024 2040
(1) Analog I/O 128 256
Process control 15 (up to 45 simple loops) 20 (up to 60 simple loops)
channels 1.2
Application-specific 32 64
channels (counter,
axis, weighing, and
serial links) (2)
Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP – 1 – 1
connections Fipio manager – 1 (127 agents)
Serial link 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 19.2 or 115 Kbps
Maximum no. of Networks (Ethernet 3 3, 2 if integrated 3 4 4, 3 if integrated
connections TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethernet is used Ethernet is used
Modbus Plus, Ethway)
AS-Interface bus 8
CANopen bus 1
INTERBus, Profibus DP 2, 1 if CANopen is used
bus
Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kwords 64, program and data 80, program and 96, program and data
capacity data
With PCMCIA card Kwords 384, program 384, program 512/992 (3), program
80, data 96, data 176, data
Data storage Kwords 640 + 2048 2048/640 + 2048 (3)
Maximum size Located internal bits bits 16 384 32 768
of object zones (%Mi)
Located internal data Kwords 30.5 for internal words %Mpi
Fast task 1
Event tasks 64 (1 of which has priority)
Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.12 0.06
for PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.17 0.08
On floating points µs 2.2 1.5
With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.17 0.06
card On word or fixed-point µs 0.33 0.08
arithmetic
On floating points µs 2.3 1.5
Typical Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ 6.66 14.28
program code PCMCIA card ms
execution time 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 4.76 9.09
for 1 35% fixed arithmetic ms
Kinstruction
With PCMCIA 100% Boolean Kinst/ 4.55 14.28
card ms
65% Boolean and Kinst/ 3.12 9.09
System Master task ms 1.00 1.00
overhead Fast task ms 0.25 0.19
cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not
included in this maximum number.
(3) The second value applies if PL7 Junior/Pro programming software V4.4 or higher is used.
Presentation: Description: Functions: References:

page 1/26 page 1/27 page 1/30 pages 1/30 and 1/31
1/29
Functions, Modicon Premium automation
references platform 1
PL7 processors
Processor without PCMCIA card Memory structure

The application memory is divided into memory areas distributed physically in the
1 Data 1 internal RAM memory and the PCMCIA memory extension card(s):
32 to 96 Kwords
Internal RAM b The application data area is always in the internal RAM.
b The application program area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card.
b The constants area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card.
Program 2 There are two ways of organizing the application memory for TSX P57
1p3/2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823 processors with or without a memory extension
fitted in the form of a PCMCIA format card:
Constants 3
Application in internal RAM
1 Application data (max. 30.5 Kwords)
1.2 2 Task descriptor and executable code
The application is completely loaded into the processor’s battery-backed internal
RAM (1), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (32 to 96 K words).
3 Constant words, initial values and configuration
For example, the TSX P57 1p3 processor has 7.5 Kwords of application data and
Processor with PCMCIA card 24.5 Kwords of program, constants and system data (2).
The memory space (32 Kwords) is shared between the application data, the
32 to 176 Kwords
program, the constants, and the system data (2).

30.5 Kwords
Data 1
Internal RAM Application in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0)
The internal RAM is reserved for the application data.
The PCMCIA card contains the program and constants (64 to 512 K words).
The file storage area of 128 K or 640 Kwords (depending on the model of PCMCIA
64 to 512 Kwords
card) can be used in remote applications, for storing production data information,
Program 2 production recipes, etc.
PCMCIA card The symbols storage area of 128 K or 256 Kwords (depending on the model of
(slot no. 0) PCMCIA card) enables the application symbols database to be stored on the PLC.
32 Kwords
Constants 3 Extension of the additional data storage area (slot no. 1)

This area, containing 128 or 640 Kwords, can be extended to up to 2699 Kwords by
using an SRAM TSX MRP DS 2048P/MFP 004M PCMCIA memory card. This card
Storage of is inserted into the lower slot on TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M
Kwords
128/640
additional data 4 processors and can be used in conjunction with memory extension cards (type 1 in
the upper slot).
Symbol storage
Kwords
128/256
4 Data in internal RAM

The data area can be extended to up to 30.5 Kwords. It is only supported by the
PLC's internal RAM memory.
1 Application data (max. 30.5 Kwords)
The PL7 Junior/Pro memory assists the application designer with the management
2 Task descriptor and executable code
of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC.
4 Depending on the model of PCMCIA card Protecting the application
Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the
internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect the application
in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) in online mode under
PL7 Junior/Pro.
program modification (via the programming terminal or downloading).
Premium processor references

TSX P57 p03/p53/p623/p823M processors are equipped with:
b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for memory extension or SRAM memory card for the
storage of additional data
b A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for communication card or memory card for the storage of
additional data
b Two terminal ports (8-way female mini-DIN type), Uni-Telway or character mode
TSX P57 processors are double-format modules (except TSX P57 1p3, which are
single-format).
TSX P57 3p3/3623/453/4823M processors enable program loading, via the terminal
port, at a maximum speed of 115 Kbps (limited to 19.2 Kbps for TSX P57
1p3/2p3/2p23M processors.
The integrated Fipio link (bus manager) on TSX P57 253/2823/353/453/4823M
processors supports a maximum of 127 connection points. The link on the
TSX P57 153 processor is limited to 63 connection points.
(1) The internal RAM is protected by an optional battery, with 3 years' battery life, located in the
power supply module.
(2) The system has a minimum reserve RAM memory area in the order of 5 Kwords. Please refer
to the PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro TLX DOC PL7 44M reference manual.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics:

page 1/26 page 1/27 pages 1/28 and 1/29
1/30
platform 1
PL7 processors
TSX 57 processors
I/O capacity (1) Capacity Maximum number Integrated Reference Weight
Memory Process
control
of bus/network
modules
Ethernet
TCP/IP
(2) kg
1
channels
TSX 57 10 4 racks (3)
512 discrete I/O 32 integrated 0 1 network – TSX P57 103M 0.380
24 analog I/O Kwords. Max. 2 AS-i buses
8 application-specific 64 Kwords on 1 CANopen bus
channels PCMCIA
1 integrated Fipio – TSX P57 153M 0.420
1 network
TSX P57 103M TSX P57 153M 2 AS-i buses 1.2
TSX 57 20 16 racks (3)
1024 discrete I/O 48 integrated 10 1 network – TSX P57 203M 0.520
80 analog I/O Kwords. Max. 4 AS-i buses
24 application-specific 160 Kwords on 1 CANopen bus (4)
channels PCMCIA 1 fieldbus (4)
4 AS-i buses 1 port TSX P57 2623M –

1 CANopen bus (4)
1 fieldbus (4)
64 integrated 10 1 integrated Fipio – TSX P57 253M 0.560

Kwords. Max. 1 network
160 Kwords on 4 AS-i buses
TSX P57 203/303M PCMCIA 1 CANopen bus (4)
1 fieldbus (4)
1 integrated Fipio 1 port TSX P57 2823M –

4 AS-i buses
1 CANopen bus (4)
1 fieldbus (4)
TSX 57 30 16 racks (3)

1024 discrete I/O 64/80 15 3 network – TSX P57 303M 0.520
128 analog I/O integrated 8 AS-i buses
32 application-specific Kwords (5). 1 CANopen bus (4)
channels Max. 2 fieldbuses (4)
384 K words on
PCMCIA 2 network 1 port TSX P57 3623M –
8 AS-i buses
TSX P57 253/353/453M 1 CANopen bus (4)
2 fieldbuses (4)
80/96 15 1 integrated Fipio – TSX P57 353M 0.560

integrated 3 networks
Kwords (5). 8 AS-i buses
Max. 1 CANopen bus (4)
384 Kwords on 2 fieldbuses (4)
PCMCIA
TSX 57 40 16 racks (3)
2040 discrete I/O 96/176 20 1 integrated Fipio – TSX P57 453M 0.560
256 analog I/O integrated 4 networks (7)
64 application-specific Kwords (5). 8 AS-i buses 1 port TSX P57 4823M –
channels Max. 1 CANopen bus (4)
512/992 K words 2 fieldbuses (4)
on PCMCIA
TSX P57 2623/3623M PCMCIA memory extension cards
Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful

(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included.
(2) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O):
English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian.
TSX RKY 12EX rack (12 slots) is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
(4) Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBus/Profibus DP)
by 1.
(5) The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is
equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.
(6) 992 Kwords with PL7 Junior/Pro software V4.4 or higher.
TSX P57 2823/4823M (7) 3 networks with TSX P57 4823M processor.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Functions:

page 1/26 page 1/27 pages 1/28 and 1/29 page 1/30
1/31
Presentation, Modicon Premium automation
configuration platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

PL7
Presentation
1 Atrium T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLCs are PC format cards (16-bit ISA bus) to be
integrated into a PC running under Windows 95/98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT.
This combination of PLC and PC optimizes performance in applications requiring, for
example, a higher level of communication, control or supervision functions. The slot
PLCs manage the entire PLC station, which comprises the same I/O modules as
Premium processors (discrete, analog, application-specific, and communication),
and these modules can be distributed in one or more racks connected on the bus X.
Two types of Atrium slot PLC are available to meet various user requirements:
1.2 b Max. 16 racks
b Max. 1024 discrete I/O
b 80 or 128 analog I/O
b 24 or 32 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter,
motion control, communication or weighing) accounts for 1 or a number of
b 1 or 3 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 4 or
8 AS-Interface buses and 1 or 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS, Profibus-DP)
b 10 or 15 process control channels
Depending on the model, Atrium slot PLCs feature:

b A 1 Mbps Fipio bus link (bus manager) for the T PCX 57 353M model
b Communication via a terminal port (TER) using Uni-Telway or character mode
protocol (typically a 19.2 or 115 Kbps programming terminal and an operator dialog
terminal)
Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card for accepting a network card
(Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus card (CANopen, Fipio Agent) or serial link card
(Modbus, Uni-Telway, character mode)
Application design and installation
Version V4.4 PL7 Junior/Pro software is available in a variety of versions according

to requirements:
b Single-station
b Multistation in the form of independent local stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations
connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for 3 to 10 stations or
Pro OpenSite for 10 or more stations), or as a client/server architecture via Thin
Client type PC terminals (Pro Servi).
These licenses are compatible with PC stations running Windows 2000 Professional
or Windows XP operating systems.
Typical architecture
Ethernet TCP/IP
By integrating an Atrium coprocessor card, the architecture shown opposite can be

created using any compatible PC (fitted with ISA bus slots) and Magelis IPC
Magelis iPC industrial PC stations.
"Atrium Pro" Type D CPU pack:
- Atrium TPCX 57 203M slot PLC This solution can provide a PLC architecture in which I/Os are:
- Vijeo Look and PL7 Pro software
b Remotely located close to the machine or process via the fieldbus (1):
v Modbus Plus with TSX MBP 110 PCMCIA card
v CANopen with TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card
b INTERBUS with PC format card, TSX IBX 100 ISA bus (link to Atrium slot PLC via
ribbon cable)
b And/or centralized in TSX RKY ppEX extendable racks. TSX RKY ppEX
Premium I/O extension racks extendable racks connected on the bus X allow the use of application-specific
modules and the installation of AS-Interface bus segments. For example:
Altivar v TSX ETY 4103 or TSX ETY 5103 Ethernet TCP/IP module (with Web server,
FactoryCast server) or TSX WMY 100 FactoryCast HMI module
v INTERBUS TSX IBY 100 or Profibus DP TSX PBY 100 master module
v TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface V2.1 master module
Momentum
v TSX CAY, TSX CFY or TSX CSY 84 (SERCOS) motion control modules
Fipio/Modbus Plus (1) Corresponding to an integrated module solution on the host PC, without having to use
modules on extension racks on bus X.
Characteristics: References:
page 1/34 page 1/35
1/32
Description, Modicon Premium automation
installation platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

PL7
Description
1
T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLCs mechanically occupy two consecutive slots
2
(standard pitch of 20.32 mm) on the ISA bus but only use one electrically. 1
3 1 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card
4 2 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a communication card or SRAM memory extension card
(4 MB) for storing additional data
3 A 9-way female SUB-D connector enabling the bus X to be connected remotely to
5
an extendable rack
4 A TER terminal port for the connection of a programming terminal or adjustment
7 6 of a peripheral device
5 A male 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus 1.2
(with T PCX 57 353M)
6 An ISA bus connector for connection to the host PC
7 A slot for the slot PLC internal RAM backup battery
8 An additional plate (supplied as standard) fitted with a 9-way female SUB-D
8 connector, enabling a second remote bus X to be connected
SCADA TCP/X-Way gateway

OFS server The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium slot PLCs:
b Communication using the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet
TCP/IP card integrated in the PC
Ethernet TCP/IP b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in
the PC
Modbus
Uni-TE This software interfaces with the Atrium slot PLC ISAway driver and automatically
routes messages. The most common configurations are:
v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking
incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC Ethernet TSX ETY 4103
1 2 module. Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported.
3 v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password
checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP
Premium
gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local
Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function).
PC
Setup
Integration into the host PC
Quantum
To receive an Atrium T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLC, the host PC must:
1 Atrium slot PLC b Operate under Windows 95/98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT
2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port b Have a 16-bit 8 MHz ISA bus
3 TCP/X-Way software gateway b Have two consecutive slots (standard pitch of 20.32 mm) available on the ISA bus
A maximum of 2 T PCX slot PLCs can be connected to one PC.

The slot PLC is completely independent of the application running on the PC, in
particular:
b The standard PC command "CTRL + ALT + DEL" has no effect on the slot PLC
operating modes.
b Switching the PC off and then on again causes a warm restart of the application
being managed by the slot PLC.
The installation of a communication driver (ISAway 95/NT) supplied with the slot PLC
enables transparent communication between the host PC and the slot PLC. Equipped
with PL7 Junior/Pro software, the host PC can be used as a programming terminal
for the Atrium T PCX 57 slot PLC.
Logical location on the bus X

Magelis iPC or PC The Atrium T PCX 57 slot PLC logically occupies 1 slot on the bus X rack. The slot
with an Atrium
PCX slot PLC
in the TSX RKY rack with address 0 following the TSX PSY power supply module
must therefore remain unoccupied (see page 2/9).
A bus X line terminator is supplied with the PCX slot PLC.

The additional plate 8 enables 2 X buses to be connected, creating a Y structure as
Bus X Bus X
shown opposite.
Premium extension Premium extension
page 1/34 page 1/35
1/33
Memory structure, Modicon Premium automation
characteristics platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

PL7
Memory structure
1 There are two ways of organizing the application memory for T PCX 57 203M/353M
slot PLCs with or without memory extension in the form of a type 1 PCMCIA card:
Slot PLC without PCMCIA memory card
Data 1 Application in internal RAM
Internal
RAM
2 The application is loaded entirely in the slot PLC internal RAM with battery back-up
Program
(3 years' battery life). For the maximum memory capacity of the internal RAM, see
Constants 3
the characteristics below.
Slot PLC with PCMCIA memory card
Application in PCMCIA card
1.2 Internal
Data 1
The internal RAM is thus reserved for application data and system data (1).
RAM The PCMCIA memory card contains the program and constants.
Program 2 The PL7 Junior/Pro software assists the application designer with structure
PCMCIA
card Constants 3
management and occupation of memory space for the Atrium slot PLC.
(2)
(slot no. 0)
1 Application data (including internal words, (1) The system reserves a minimum RAM memory zone in the order of 5 Kwords. Please refer to
the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TLX DOC PL7 44M reference manual.
system words, function blocks, DFBs, etc.) (2) In addition, there are certain models of PCMCIA card available, which provide memory zones
2 Task descriptor and executable code for storing files and symbols (see page 1/37).
Characteristics
Type of slot PLC T PCX 57 203M T PCX 57 353M
Maximum configuration No. of racks 4/6/8 slots 16

12 slots 8
Max. no. of slots per module 128
Functions Max. number Discrete I/O 1024
of channels Analog I/O 80 128
(1) Application-specific (counter, axis, 24 32
weighing, serial links) (2)
Max. number Integrated Uni-Telway 1
of (terminal port)
connections Networks 2 (including 1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated 4 (including1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated
(Ethway, Fipway, Modbus Plus) into PC) (3) into PC) (3)
CANopen 1
INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus 1, none if CANopen is used 2, 1 if CANopen is used
Fipio bus manager (integrated) – 1
Process control channels 10 (up to 30 loops) 15 (up to 30 loops)
Real-time clock Yes
Memory (4) Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kwords 48 program and data 80 program and data
capacity With PCMCIA card Kwords 160 program 384 program
48 data 96 data
Storage of additional data Kwords 2688
Maximum Internal words (% MWi/MDi/MFi) Kwords 30.5
size of zones Constants (% KWi/KDi/KFi) Kwords 32
(5) Internal bits (%Mi) bits 8132 16 384
Fast task 1
Event-based processing 64 (1 of which has priority)
Execution time per Boolean µs 0.19/0.21 (6) 0.12/0.17 (6)

instruction On word or fixed-point arithmetic µs 0.25/0.42 (6) 0.17/0.33 (6)
On floating points µs 2.6 2.2/2.3
No. of Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ms 4.76 6.66

KinstructionsPCMCIA 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic Kinst/ms 3.57 4.76
executed card
every ms With 100% Boolean Kinst/ms 3.70 4.55
PCMCIA 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic 2.50 3.12
card
System overhead MAST task ms 1
FAST task ms 0.35 0.25
(1) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. The remote
I/O on the bus or network (AS-Interface/Uni-Telway/Fipio/Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (CANopen, INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum
number.
(3) With TCP/X-Way software gateway and Ethernet port on host PC (integrated motherboard or PC format card).
(4) Memory capacity for storing data or symbols on a PCMCIA card, see page 1/36.
(5) The sum of the program memory, data and constants zones is limited by the total memory capacity.
(6) The second value corresponds to the execution time when the slot PLC is fitted with a PCMCIA memory card.
Presentation: References:
page 1/32 page 1/35
1/34
platform 1
Atrium slot PLCs

PL7
References
PCX 57 slot PLCs
T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLCs are compatible with the PC ISA bus and have:
1
b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for memory extension
b A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for communication card or memory extension card for
b A terminal port (8-way female mini-DIN), Uni-Telway or character mode
b A remote bus X system for extendable racks
b A male connector (9-way SUB-D) for Fipio bus link manager function
(for model T PCX 57 353M)
b A bus X end of line terminator 1.2
b OFS data server software (see page 7/11)
b ISAway 95/NT communication driver software (see page 6/57: X-Way
communication drivers)
The slot PLC mechanically occupies 2 consecutive slots but only uses one slot
electrically on the ISA bus (long slot).
16-rack PCX 57 20 (1)

I/O capacity (2) Capacities Maximum Reference Weight
Memory Process number of (3) kg
control bus/network
channels modules
1024 discrete I/O 48 10 1 network T PCX 57 203M 0.310
80 analog I/O integrated 4 AS-i buses
24 application-specific Kwords 1 CANopen bus
channels Max. 160 (4)
Kwords on 1 fieldbus
PCMCIA
16-rack PCX 57 30 (1)

I/O capacity (2) Capacities Maximum Reference Weight
Memory Process number of (3) kg
control bus/network
channels modules
1024 discrete I/O 80/96 15 1 integrated Fipio T PCX 57 353M 0.340
128 analog I/O integrated 3 networks
32 application-specific Kwords 8 AS-i buses
channels data (5) 1 CANopen bus
Max. 384 (4)
T PCX 57 203M Kwords on 2 fieldbuses
PCMCIA
Memory extension cards
T PCX 57 pp3 slot PLCs can receive 1 memory extension card. However, useful
Software options
T PCX 57 353M When connected to an Atrium slot PLC, the TCP/X-Way gateway software offer
(supplied on CD-ROM) enables communication under the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP
protocol using the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated into the host PC.
Description Use Site license Reference Weight

Kg
TCP/X-Way Compatible with Single-station TLX CD GTW 10M –
gateway Windows 2000 or XP
software 10 stations TLX CD10 GTW 10M –
200 stations TLX CDUNT GTW 10M –
(2) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included.
(3) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O):
English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian.
(4) Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBUS or
Profibus DP) by 1.
(5) The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is fitted
with a PCMCIA memory card (type 1).
Presentation: Characteristics:
page 1/32 page 1/34
1/35
platform 1

PL7
Presentation
1 PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of
Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs. Depending on the model, these cards
are designed to:
b Receive the application program and constants
b Store additional application data
b Store various application object symbols
b Or all three
New offer for Premium and Atrium under PL7

1.2 From November 2004, the old TSX MRP/MFP pppP PCMCIA memory extension
cards offer, which was specific for Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs under
PL7, will be replaced by a new offer. This offer is supported by:
b TSX Micro PLCs under PL7
b Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs under Unity Pro and PL7
b Quantum processors under Unity Pro
The table below indicates equivalences between the old and new versions. If
migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, 1 or more new references may
correspond to each old reference.
PCMCIA SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0)

Use Max. memory size Old reference Do you envisage migration from PL7 to Recommended new
PL7 Data Symbol (until the end of October Unity Pro? reference
application storage storage 2004) (P indicates "PL7 program") (from November 2004)
All TSX 57 and PCX 57 32 Kwords – – TSX MRP 032P No Yes TSX MRP P128K
types 128 Kwords – TSX MRP 232P No Yes TSX MRP P384K
64 Kwords – – TSX MRP 064P No Yes, P < 52 Kwords TSX MRP P224K
– Yes, P > 52 Kwords TSX MRP P384K
128 Kwords – TSX MRP 264P No Yes (1) TSX MRP P384K
– Yes (1) TSX MRP C768K
TSX 57 20 128 Kwords – – TSX MRP 0128P – Yes, P < 64 Kwords TSX MRP P384K
TSX 57 30 No Yes, 64 Kwords < P < 104 Kwords TSX MRP C448K
TSX 57 40
– Yes, P > 104 Kwords TSX MRP C768K
PCX 57 20
PCX 57 30 128 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 2128P No Yes (1) TSX MRP C768K
– Yes (1) TSX MRP C01M7
256 Kwords – – TSX MRP 0256P – Yes, P < 104 Kwords TSX MRP C768K
No Yes, 128 Kwords < P < 208 Kwords TSX MRP C001M
– Yes, P > 208 Kwords TSX MRP C01M7
640 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 3256P No Yes TSX MRP C01M7
– Yes (2) TSX MRP C002M
– Yes (3) TSX MRP C003M
384 Kwords 640 Kwords – TSX MRP 3384P – Yes (1) TSX MRP C01M7
No Yes (1) TSX MRP C002M
TSX 57 40 512 Kwords – 256 Kwords TSX MRP 0512P – Yes, P < 256 Kwords TSX MRP C01M7
– Yes, 256 Kwords < P < 384 TSX MRP C002M
Kwords
No Yes, P > 384 Kwords TSX MRP C003M
992 Kwords 640 Kwords 384 Kwords – – – TSX MRP C007M
PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory extension (slot no. 0)
All TSX 57 and PCX 57 32 Kwords – – TSX MFP 032P No Yes TSX MFP P128K
types 128 Kwords – TSX MFP 232P No Yes TSX MCP C224K
64 Kwords – – TSX MFP 064P No Yes, P < 52 Kwords TSX MFP P224K
– Yes, P > 52 Kwords TSX MFP P384K
128 Kwords – TSX MFP 264P No Yes TSX MCP C224K
TSX 57 20 128 Kwords – – TSX MFP 0128P No Yes TSX MFP P384K
TSX 57 30
TSX 57 40
PCX 57 20
PCX 57 30
PCMCIA SRAM memory extension (slot no. 1)
TSX 57 20 – 2048 Kwords – TSX MRP DS 2048P No Yes TSX MRP F004M
TSX 57 30
TSX 57 40
Flash EPROM PCMCIA backup card (slot no. 0)
TSX 57 10 32 Kwords – – TSX MFP BAK032P No Yes TSX MFP B096K
(1) Selection based on the PL7 program memory volume in relation to the data storage memory volume.
(2) If symbols do not need to be stored on the PCMCIA.
(3) If data does not need to be stored on the PCMCIA.
1/36

PL7

All memory cards (with the exception of TSX MFP P004M/TSX MRP DS 2048P for
SRAM data storage) are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors
(upper slot) and Atrium slot PLCs (internal slot). The
1
TSX MFP P004M/TSX MRP DS 2048P data storage card is inserted into slot no. 1
only on Premium processors (lower slot) and Atrium slot PLCs (external slot on
faceplate).
With PL7, these cards support four different types of storage:
b Application storage: Program and constants in a common area of between 64 and
512 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM memory.
b Application and additional data storage, comprising an application area of
between 64 and 384 Kwords and a data storage area of 128 or 640 Kwords designed 1.2
for additional data, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM.
b Application, additional data and symbol storage, comprising an application area of
between 32 and 512 Kwords, a data storage area of 128 or 640 Kwords designed for
additional data, and a symbols area of 128 or 256 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash
EPROM and SRAM.
b Additional data storage provided by an SRAM with a capacity of 2 M words.
These cards use 2 technologies:
b Battery-backed SRAM. Used in particular in the creation and debugging phases
for the application program. These cards support all application transfer and
modification services in online mode and the storage of additional data.
The memory is backed up by a removable battery integrated into the PCMCIA card.
A second battery, which acts as an auxiliary for the first, provides backup for the main
battery should information be lost.
b Flash EPROM. Used once debugging of the application program is complete. It
enables restrictions in terms of the service life of backup batteries to be avoided and
supports global application transfer.
If a Flash EPROM is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode.
References
If future migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, see the equivalence table opposite for the
new equivalent reference.
PCMCIA type I SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0)
Use Max. memory size Old reference New reference Weight
PL7 Data Symbol (until the end of October (from November 2004)
application storage storage 2004) kg
TSX 57 10…40 32 Kwords – – TSX MRP 032P TSX MRP P128K –
PCX 57 20/30 64 Kwords – – TSX MRP 064P TSX MRP P224K –
128 Kwords – TSX MRP 232P/264P TSX MRP P384K –
TSX 57 20…40 128 – – TSX MRP 0128P TSX MRP C448K –
PCX 57 20/30 Kwords 128 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 2128P TSX MRP C768K –
256 – – TSX MRP 0256P TSX MRP C001M –
Kwords 640 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 3256P TSX MRP C01M7 –
384 640 Kwords – TSX MRP 3384P TSX MRP C002M –
Kwords
TSX 57 40 512 Kwords – 256 Kwords TSX MRP 0512P TSX MRP C003M –
992 Kwords 640 Kwords 384 Kwords – TSX MRP C007M –
PCMCIA type I Flash EPROM memory extension (slot no. 0)
TSX 57 10…40 32 Kwords – – TSX MFP 032P TSX MFP P128K –
PCX 57 20/30 64 Kwords – – TSX MFP 064P TSX MFP P224K –
128 Kwords – TSX MFP 232P/264P TSX MCP C224K –
TSX 57 20…40 128 – – TSX MFP 0128P TSX MFP P384K –
PCX 57 20/30 Kwords
PCMCIA type III Flash SRAM memory extension (slot no. 1)
TSX 57 20…40 – 2048 – TSX MRP DS 2048P TSX MRP F004M –
Kwords
PCMCIA Flash EPROM backup card
TSX 57 10 32 Kwords – – TSX MFP BAK032P TSX MFP B096K –
Replacement parts
Description Use Type Reference Weight
kg
Backup batteries TSX MRP P/Cpppp Main battery TSX BAT M02 (2) 0.100
TSX MFP P004M PCMCIA SRAM Auxiliary battery TSX BAT M03 –
memory
Handle PCMCIA memory – TSX P CAP 0.030
(1) With PL7 Junior/Pro software V4.4 or higher.
(2) Replace the old order reference for the TSX MRP pppP PCMCIA SRAM memory with order reference TSX BAT M01.
1/37
2
2/0
Contents 2 - Racks, I/O architectures and
power supplies 2
Power supply and fan modules

b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/3
b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5
b Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5

2
Single rack configuration
b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/7
b Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/7
Multi-racks configuration without remote module

b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8
b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/9
b Racks addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/9
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10
b Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/11
Multi-racks configuration with remote module

b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13
2/1
platform 2
Description of power supply modules

TSX PSYppp0M power supply modules provide the power supply for each rack and
1 the modules installed on it.
The power supply module is selected according to:

2
3 b The mains electrical supply: c 24 V, c 24...48 V, a 100...120, a 200...240 V
b The required power: standard format or double format model.
4
2 TSX PSYppp0M power supply modules comprise:
5
1 Display block comprising:
v OK lamp (green), on if voltages are present and correct.
7 6 v BAT lamp (red), on if the battery is faulty or missing.
TSX PSY 2600M v 24 V lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present (according to model).
2 RESET pencil-point pushbutton causing a warm restart of the application.
8 3 Slot for a battery which protects the internal RAM memory of the processor.
4 Cover to protect the front panel of the module.

1
5 Screw terminal for connecting:
2 v To mains supply.
3
v The alarm relay contact.
v The sensor power supply for a.c. supplies (according to model).
4
6 Opening for cable clamp.
5
7 Fuse located beneath the module and protecting:
v 24 VR voltage on the non-isolated d.c. supply with TSX PSY 3610.
v Primary voltage on the other power supplies.
7 6
TSX PSY 5500M 8 110/220 voltage selector (according to model).
Description of fan modules
TSX FAN ppP fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide
forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the
enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist.
Fan modules are required whenever the ambient temperature is between 60 °C and
70 °C (forced ventilation enables the ambient temperature in the enclosure to be
lowered by 10 °C) (1).
Three types of fan module are available: c 24 V, a 110 V and a 220 V.
According to the modularity of the racks used:

b One fan module for a 4 or 6 position rack,
b Two fan modules for an 8 position rack,
b Three fan modules for a 12 position rack.
TSX FAN ppP fan modules comprise:

3 3 1 Connection terminal for the fan module power supply, the internal temperature
probe and the associated LED or preactuator.
1 4
2 Earth terminal.
2 3 Two mounting holes for the fan module.
4 Shuttered air outlets.
(1) For an ambient temperature between 25 °C and 60 °C, the use of fan modules increases the
MTBF.
Characteristics: Functions: References:

page 2/3 page 2/4 page 2/5
2/2
platform 2
Characteristics
Type of power supply module TSX PSY 1610M TSX PSY 3610M TSX PSY 5520M
Primary Voltage Nominal V c 24 c 24 c 24...48
Limit (ripple included) V c 19.2...30 (1) c 19.2...60
(possible up to 34 V for 1 h in evry 24 h)
Frequency Nominal/limit Hz – – –
Currency Nominal input 1 rms A ≤ 1.5 at c 24 V ≤ 2.7 at c 24 V ≤ 3 at c 24 V
≤ 1.5 at c 48 V
Initial start up 1 inrush A 100 at c 24 V 150 at c 24 V 15 at c 24 V
15 at c 48 V
at 25 °C (2)
I²t on activation A ²s 12.5 20 50 at c 24 V
2
55 at c 48 V
It on activation As 0.2 0.5 7 at c 24 V
6 at c 48 V
Duration of Main supply (accepted) ms ≤1 ≤1 ≤1
micro breaks
Integrated protection By fuse 5 x 20, No By fuse 5 x 20,
time-delayed 3.5 A time-delayed 5 A
Secondary Power Total useful (typical) W 30 50 50
Output c 5 V Nominal voltage V 5 5 5
Nominal current A 3 7 7
Power (typical) W 15 35 35
Output Nominal voltage V U mains - 0.6 U mains - 0.6 24
c 24 VR (3) Nominal current A 0.6 0.6 0.8
Output c 24 V sensors – – –
Integrated protection on outputs (4) Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
Conformity to standards IEC 1131 2
Isolation Dielectric Primary/secondary and V eff Non isolated, internal 0 V connected to PLC earth 2000 - 50/60 Hz - 1 min
withstand primary/earth
Insulation Primary/secondary and MΩ – ≥ 10
Type od power supply module TSX PSY 2600M TSX PSY 5500M TSX PSY 8500M
Primary Voltage Nominal V a 100...240 a 100...120/200...240
Limit (ripple included) V a 85...264 a 85...140/190...264 a 85...140/170...264
Frequencys Nominal/limit Hz 50…60/47…63
Current Nominal input 1 rms A 0.5 at a 100 V 1.7 at a 100 V 1.7 at a 100 V
0.3 at a 240 V 0.5 at a 240 V 0.5 at a 240 V
Initial start up I inrush current A 37 at a 100 V 38 at a 100 V 30 at a 100 V
at 25 °C 75 at a 240 V 38 at a 240 V 60 at a 240 V
(2) I²t on activation A²s 0.63 at a 100 V 4 at a 100 V 15 at a 100 V
2.6 at a 240 V 2 at a 240 V 8 at a 240 V
It on activation As 0.034 at a 100 V 0.11 at a 100 V 0.15 at a 100 V
0.067 at a 240 V 0.11 at a 240 V 0.15 at a 240 V
Duration of Mains supply (accepted) ms ≤ 10 ≤ 10 ≤ 10
micro breaks
Integrated protection By fuse 5 x 20, time-delayed, 4 A
Secondary Power Total useful (typical) W 26 50 77 (5)
Output c 5 V Nominal voltage V 5 5 5
Nominal current A 5 7 15
Output Nominal voltage V 24 24 –
c 24 VR (3) Nominal current A 0.6 0.8 –
Power (typical) W 15 19 –
Output Sensors A 0.5 0.8 1.6 (TBTS)
c 24 VC
Integrated protection on outputs (4) Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages
Conformity to standards IEC 1131 2
Isolation Dielectric Primary/secondary and V eff 2000 - 50/60 Hz - 1 min 3000 - 50/60 Hz - 1 min
withstand primary/earth
Insulation Primary/secondary and MΩ ≥ 100
(1) When supplying modules with relay outputs, the range is reduced to 21.6…26.4 V.
(2) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously and
for sizing protection devices.
(3) Output c 24 V for supplying relays of modules with relay outputs.
(4) Output c 24 VR, cannot be accessed by the user and is protected by a fuse located beneath
the module (5 x 20, 4 A, type Medium)
(5) 77 W at 60 °C, 85 W at 55 °C, or 100 W at 55 °C using TSX FAN fan modules.
Description: Functions: References:

2/3
Functions Modicon Premium automation
platform 2
Functions
Alarm relay
The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a volt-free contact which
can be accessed on the connection screw terminal of the module.
The operating principle is as follows:
b Module alarm relay located on the processor rack (rack 0): in normal operation,
2 PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1). Whenever
the application stops, even partially, occurrence of a blocking fault, incorrect output
voltages or loss of mains power, the relay de-energizes and the associated contact
opens (state 0).
b Alarm relay of power supply modules located on other racks (racks 1 to 7): when
the module is powered up and if the output voltages are correct, the relay is activated
and its contact is closed (state 1). When the mains power is lost or if the output
voltages are incorrect, the relay de-energizes (state 0).
Back-up battery
Each power supply module has a slot reserved for a battery which provides the
power supply to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, in order to
ensure that data is saved when the PLC is switched off. The duration of data back-up
is one year. The battery must be changed as soon as the BAT lamp (red) on the front
panel lights up.
RESET pushbutton
Pressing this pushbutton, which is located on the front panel of the power supply
module, triggers a sequence of service signals which is the same as that for:
b A power break when the pushbutton is pressed

b A power up when the pushbutton is released
These operations are expressed by the application as a warm restart.
Sensor power supply
The TSX PSY 2600M/5500M/8500M a.c. power supply modules have an integrated
power supply which provides a voltage of c 24 V to supply the input sensors.
Connection to this sensor power supply can be accessed via the module screw
terminal. The available power on c 24 V depends on model (0,5/0,8/1,6 A), see
characteristics page 2/3.
Description: Characteristics: References:

2/4
References, Modicon Premium automation
dimensions, platform 2
mounting Power supply and fan modules
References
Each TSX RKY p/pEX rack must be equipped with a single or double format power
supply module (slot marked PS).
The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number
of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to establish a power
consumption table rack by rack in order to determine the TSX PSY power supply
module most suitable for each rack.
Power supply module

Power Available power (1) Format Reference Weight
2
supply c5V c 24 VR c 24 VC Total (2) kg
c 24 V non 15 W 15 W – 30 W Standard TSX PSY 1610M 0.540
isolated (3)
35 W 19 W – 50 W Double TSX PSY 3610M 0.780
c 24...48 V 35 W 19 W – 50 W Double TSX PSY 5520M 0.890

isolated
a 25 W 15 W 12 W 26 W Standard TSX PSY 2600M 0.510
100…240 V
TSX PSY 2600M a 35 W 19 W 19 W 50 W Double TSX PSY 5500M 0.620
100…120 V
a 75 W – 38 W 77 W Double TSX PSY 8500M 0.740
200…240 V (SELV)
Accessories
Description Use Quantity Reference Weight
kg
Battery Internal RAM memory backup (position 1 battery TSX PLP 01 0.010
in power supply modules)
10 TSX PLP 101 0.100

batteries
TSX PSY 5500M
Fan modules
Description Use Power supply Reference Weight
kg
Fan modules For TSX RKY p or c 24 V TSX FAN D2P 0.500
(4) TSX RKY pEX racks a 100…120 V TSX FAN A4P 0.500
a 200…240 V TSX FAN A5P 0.500
(1) Voltages c 5 V and c 24 VR for power supply to Premium modules, voltage c 24 VC for
TSX FAN ppP supplying power to input sensors. The sum of absorbed power on each voltage (c 5 V,
c 24 VR and c 24 VC) should not exceed the total power of the module.
(2) Product supplied with a RAM memory backup battery and multilingual installation guide (racks
and power supplies) English, French, German, Spanish and Italian.
(3) The internal 0 V of the module is connected to the PLC earth.
(4) One fan module for rack with 4 or 6 positions, two fan modules for rack with 8 positions and
three fan modules for rack with 12 positions. Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference
Guide: English and French.
Dimensions/mounting TSX FAN pP

Side view Front view Fan module mounting
138
54
58
58,3
110 146
88,9
Description: Characteristics: Functions:

2/5
Single rack configuration
Presentation
TSX RKY ppp racks form the basic elements of the Premium control system platform
with a single rack (6, 8 or 12 positions).
These racks provide the following functions:
b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply,
processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted.
2 b Electrical function: they enable connection to the bus (Bus X) and provide
distribution of:
v power supplies required for each module in the same rack,
v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this has several racks.
enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist (voir page 2/2).
Description
TSX RKY ppp racks comprise:
1 Metal frame.
2 Slots for anchoring the module pins.
1 5
3 48-way female 1/2 DIN connectors for module-rack connections (the first
connector is reserved for the power supply module).
9 4 Locating slot for the power supply module.
8
5 Tapped holes for fixing the module.
3
6 Four holes for mounting the rack.
7 Position for rack address label.
8 Position for station network address label.
7 6 9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack.
4 2
2/6
mounting Single rack configuration
Non-extendable racks
Description Type of modules to be Capacity Reference Weight
installed kg
Non-extendable TSX PSY power supply, 6 positions TSX RKY 6 (1) 1.470
racks, TSX P57 processor, 8 positions TSX RKY 8 (1) 1.750
for single rack I/O modules,
12 positions TSX RKY 12 2.310
configuration application-specific modules
Connection accessories
Description Use Comprising Unit reference Weight
TSX RKY 6
Protective covers Unoccupied position on 5 screw-on TSX RKA 02
kg
0.050 2
(Sold in lots of 5) TSX RKY p or covers
TSX RKY pEX racks
Mountingscrews Mounting for Captive screw TSX ACC VA625 0.350
M6 x 25 TSX RKY p or and washer with
(Sold in lots of 50) TSX RKY pEX racks hexagonal slotted
head
(1) Limits of electromagnetic emissions, see (3) page 9/7.
Dimensions, mounting
TSX RKY
Common side view Front view : TSX RKY 6 exemple
a
TSX RKY 6 261.6
151,5
165 (1)
TSX RKY 8 335.3

TSX RKY 12 482.6
(1) With screw terminal bloc

(2) With HE 10 or SUB-D type connectors
160 (1) a
200 (2)
Mounting of racks
on AM1 PA perforated plate Installation rules
4 trous (1) ≥100

31,3
≥150 (3)
a
AF1-EA6 ≥100 (2)
(4)
151,5
88,9
(2) (1)
31,3
16 8,75 a 8,75 a a
a
≥150 (3)
b
a
(2)
≥150
on AM1 ED profiles
AF1-CF56
=
88,9
=
a
a b a≥ 50 mm
TSX RKY 6 244.1 261.6 (1) Equipment or enclosure
TSX RKY 8 317.8 335.3 (2) Cable ducting or clip
TSX RKY 12 465.1 482.6 (3) ≥ 130 mm with TSX FAN ppP fan module
(1) For mounting on panel: the diameter of the fixing holes must (4) TSX RKY 6 1 fan module per rack
be sulficient for an M6 screw TSX RKY 8 2 fan module per rack
TSX RKY 12 3 fan module per rack
2/7
platform 2
1 2 Composition of a PLC station
Using TSX RKY 6/8/12 standard racks, it is possible to constitute a PLC station with
3 Premium processors, with just a single rack.
Using 1 TSK RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX (1) extendable racks, a PLC station can be
5 constituted which comprises up to:
100 m max. (without bus X remote)
b 4 racks for a station with TSX 57 10 processor,
4 b 16 racks for a station with TSX 57 20, 57 30, 57 40, 57 50 Premium processor or
Atrium slot-PLCs.
2 The racks are connected to each other by bus X extension cables 2.
Bus X
The racks distributed on bus X are connected to each other via bus X extension
cables whose total length is 100 m maximum. Using TSX REY 200 bus X remote
modules enables the length of bus X to be increased to a maximum of 2 x 350 m (see
page 2/12).
The racks are connected to each other using TSX CBY pp0K bus X extension cables
which are connected to one of the two 9-way SUB-D connectors on each extendable
rack. The incoming cable from another rack can be connected to either the right 4 or
left-hand 3 connector.
Line terminations
The two extendable racks located at the ends of the line must have a TSX TLY EX
line terminator 5 fitted on the unused 9-way SUB-D type connector, except when
using PCX 57 coprocessors where the line terminator is supplied with the
coprocessor module.
Presentation of extentable racks
TSX RKY ppEX racks form the basic elements of the Premium control system
platform. These racks provide the following functions:
b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply,
processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted.
b Electrical function: they enable connection to the bus (bus X) and provide
distribution of:
v power supplies required for each module in the same rack,
v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this has several racks.
To meet user requirements, several types of rack are available in order to make up
PLC stations comprising 1 to 16 racks maximum distributed over bus X with a
maximum cumulative length of 100 meters.
enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist (see page 2/2).
2/8
functions platform 2
Description
TSX RKY ppp racks comprise:
1 Metal frame.
2 Slots for anchoring the module pins.
1 5
3 48-way female 1/2 DIN connectors for module-rack connections (the first
10 connector is reserved for the power supply module).
9 4 Locating slot for the power supply module.
8 3
5 Tapped holes for Mounting the module.
6 Four holes for mounting the rack.
2
11 11 7 Position for rack address label.
8 Position for station network address label.
7 6 9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack.
10 Microswitches for coding the rack address (on extendable racks).
4 2 11 Two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for the remote connection of bus X to
another rack (on extendable racks).
Address rack n (with power supply standard format) Rack addresses

“less-significant” “most-significant”
Address 0: this address is always assigned to the rack which holds the processor.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 PS 08 09 10 11 12
This rack can be located in any position on the line.
Addresses 1 to 7: these can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable
racks of the station.
As the two racks with 4,6, or 8 slots which make up each pair can have the same
address on the bus X, position numbers are defined as follows:
b Rack n “less-significant”: position 00 to xx (02, 04 or 06); rack n “most-significant”:
position 08 to yy (10, 12 or 14).
b Each rack with 12 slots holds an address (with position 00 to 10).
Installing the various modules on the standard or extendable rack with address 0
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
The rack with address 0 must contain a power supply module and the processor
module. For Premium PLCs which have two types of power supply (standard or
double format), the position of the processor (standard or double format) will depend
on the type of power supply used.
Using a standard format power supply module:
b The power supply module systematically occupies position PS.
b The processor module must be installed in position 00/01 (00 with standard format
processor).
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 b The other modules are installed from position 02 (01 with standard format
processor).
Using a double format power supply module:
b The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00.
b The processor module must be installed in position 01/02 (01 with standard format
processor).
b The other modules are installed from position 03 (02 with standard format
processor).
Installing the various modules on extendable racks with addresses 1 to 7

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Each rack must have either a standard format or double format power supply
module.
Using a standard format power supply module:
b The power supply module systematically occupies position PS.
b The other modules are installed from position 00 onwards.
Using a double format power supply module:
b The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00.
PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
b The other modules are installed from position 01 onwards.
2/9
platform 2
Extendable racks
Description Type of modules to Capacity Reference Weight
be installed kg
Extendable racks TSX PSY power 4 positions TSX RKY 4EX 1.160
for multi-racks supply, 6 positions TSX RKY 6EX 1.500
configuration TSX P57 processor
8 positions TSX RKY 8EX 1.780
(maximum 16 racks) (main rack),
(1) I/O modules, 12 positions TSX RKY 12EX 2.340
application-specific
modules
2 Connection accessories
Description Use Comprising Length Unit reference Weight
TSX RKY 6EX
kg
Daisy chaining Between 2 x 9-way 1m TSX CBY 010K 0.160
cables TSX RK Y pEX SUB-D 3m TSX CBY 030K 0.260
Bus X (total length racks connectors
5m TSX CBY 050K 0.360
100 m maxi mum)
(2) 12 m TSX CBY 120K 1.260
18 m TSX CBY 180K 1.860
28 m TSX CBY 280K 2.860
38 m TSX CBY 380K 3.860
50 m TSX CBY 500K 5.060
72 m TSX CBY 720K 7.260
100 m TSX CBY 1000K 10.060
Cable on reel Length to be Cable with 100 m TSX CBY 1000 12.320
fitted with free ends,
TSX CBY K9 2 line testers
connectors
Line terminators Compulsory on 2 x 9-way SUB-D TSX TLY EX 0.050
(sold in lots of 2) the connectors labelled A
TSX TLY EX 2 TSX RKY pEX and B
end racks
Protective covers Unoccupied 5 screw-on covers TSX RKA 02 0.050
(Sold in lots of 5) position on
TSX RKY p or
TSX RKY pEX
racks
Bus X connectors For 2 x 9-way SUB-D TSX CBY K9 0.080
(Sold in lots of 2) TSX CBY 1000 connectors
cable ends
Installation of Mounting of 2 crimping pliers, TSX CBY ACC 10 –
connectors TSX CBY K9 1 pen (3)
connectors
Mounting screws Mounting for Captive screw and TSX ACC VA625 0.350
M6 x 25 TSX RKY p or washer with hexagonal
(Sold in lots of 50) TSX RKY pEX slotted head
racks
(1) 16 racks TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX maximum (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12EX
(12 slots) is the same as occupying 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots.
(2) 2 x 350 m maximum when using the TSX REY 200 bus X remote module (see page 2/12).
(3) Installation of connectors on the cable also requires a wire stripper, a pair of scissors and a
digital ohmmeter.
2/10
Dimensions, Modicon Premium automation
mounting platform 2
TSX RKY
Common side view Front view : TSX RKY 6EX example
a
TSX RKY 4EX 187.9
151,5
165 (1)
TSX RKY 6EX 261.6
TSX RKY 8EX 335.3
TSX RKY 12EX 482.6
160 (1) a
200 (2) 2
(1) With screw terminal bloc
(2) With HE 10 or SUB-D type connectors
Mounting of racks
on AM1 PA perforated plate Installation rules
4 trous (1) ≥100

31,3
≥150 (3)
a
AF1-EA6 ≥100 (2)
(4)
151,5
88,9
(2) (1)
31,3
16 8,75 a 8,75 a a
a
≥150 (3)
(2)
≥150
On AM1 ED profiles
AF1-CF56
=
88,9
=
a b a≥ 50 mm
TSX RKY 4EX 170.4 187.9 (1) Equipment or enclosure
TSX RKY 6EX 244.1 261.6 (2) Cable ducting or clip
TSX RKY 8EX 317.8 335.3 (3) ≥ 130 mm with TSX FAN ppP fan module
TSX RKY 12EX 465.1 482.6 (4) TSX RKY 4EX/6EX 1 fan module per rack
(1) For mounting on panel: the diameter of the fixing holes must TSX RKY 8EX 2 fan module per rack
be sulficient for an M6 screw TSX RKY 12EX 3 fan module per rack
2/11
platform 2
Presentation
Bus X for Premium PLCs can be used to connect eight 12 position racks or sixteen
4, 6 or 8 position racks, distributed over a maximum length of 100 metres
(see page 2/9).
For applications requiring longer distances between racks, the bus X remote
rackmaster module: TSX REY 200 can be used to increase this distance up to a
maximum of 350 metres without reducing performance.
The bus X remote system is electrical. Using the bus X remote rackmaster module
2 will not result in any loss of performance in reading or controlling I/O.
The bus X remote system comprises:
b One TSX REY 200 module called the “master” 1 located on the rack at address 0
(rack supporting the processor 2 and the main bus X 3). This module has 2 channels
used to locate 2 bus X segments 5 remotely at a maximum distance of 250 metres.
b One or two TSX REY 200 modules 4 called “slaves” located on each extendable
rack.
b Each slave module is connected to the master module by a TSX CBRY 2500
cable 5, which the user should cut and fit with TSX CBRY K5 connectors as required
(cabling does not require any special equipment).
Each end of the bus should be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator 6.
3
4
6 Bus X 6
100 m
5
2
3 Remote location of bus X at 250 m max.
6 Bus X 6
100 m
Remote location of bus X at 250 m max.

1
5
6 Bus X 6
100 m
3
4
Implantations
The rules for installing the bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, are as
follows :
b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a master. It is installed on the rack at

address 0 supporting the processor with :
v The power supply module systematically occupying position(s) PS (and 00). The
processor module must be installed in position 01 (and 02 if it is a double format
processor).
v The bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, can be installed in any
position after 02 (or 03 if it is a double format processor).
b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a slave. It is installed in an extendable

rack (located on an extendable bus X segment) in any position apart from the
positions dedicated to the power supply module.
Description: References:
page 2/13 page 2/13
2/12
Maximum distances for remote location
From one remote system, the maximum permitted distances from the processor are
shown in the table below:
Types of modules References Bus X remote
system 5
Discrete inputs (a) TSX DEY ppp 250 m
Discrete outputs TSX DSY ppp
Preventa safety module TSX PAY ppp
Discrete I/O (b)
Analogue I/O (c)
TSX DMY
TSX AEY ppp/ASY ppp
175 m less then the
lenght of bus X 2
Counting/motion modules (d) TSX CTY pA/CTY 2C/CAY 21/CAY41/
CFY p1
Weighing module TSX ISP Y101/Y111
AS-Interface bus module TSX SAY 100/1000
SERCOS motion module TSX CSY 84/164 Remote location of
Communication module TSX SCY 21601/11601 bus X not permitted
Ethernet modules TSX ETY pppp
Fieldbus modules TSX IBY 100/PBY100
(a) TSX DEY 16FK (version ≥ 06) 225 m less then the
(b) TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK lenght of bus X
(c) TSX AEY 810/1614
TSX ASY 410 (version ≥ 11)
(d) TSX CTY 2C/CCY 1128
TSX CAY 22/42/33
Description
1
The front panel of the bus X remote rackmaster module TSX REY 200 comprises:
v RUN indicator: module running
v ERR indicator: module has internal fault
v I/O indicator: module has external fault
v MST indicator: module acting as master or slave
2 v CH0 indicator: channel 0 operating
v CH1 indicator: channel 1 operating
2 5-way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 0.
3 3 5-way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 1.
References
Description Operation Number of channels Reference Weight
(1) kg
Extendable racks – 4/6/8/12 positions See page 2/10
Bus X remote Master/slave 2 TSX REY 200 –

rackmaster module
Connection cables and accessories

kg
Bus X cables Connection of two 250 m TSX CBRY 2500 –
supplied on a drum TSX REY 200
modules
Class C1 flame
resistance
Cable for daisy chain 250 m TSX CBRY 2500F –

mounting (2)
5-ways SUB-D 9 Connections for – TSX CBRY K5 –

connectors bus X cable
(sold in lots of 5)
Description Use Composition Reference Weight

TSX REY 200 kg
Line terminators Must be fitted on 2 x 9-way SUB-D TSX TLY EX 0.050
(sold in lots of 2) eachTSX RKY pEX connectors
end rack
(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide.

(2) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472, part 603/H:
- for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 75 mm,
- for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions
for use such as acceleration, speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further
information.
- not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications.
Presentation:
page 2/12
2/13
3
3/0
Contents 3 - Discrete and analog I/O 3
3.1 - Discrete I/O modules

Selection guide: Input and input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2
Selection guide: Output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4
b Discrete I/O modules
v Principle, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6

v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/9
v Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/17
3.2 - Analog I/O modules

Selection guide: Input and output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/20
b Analog I/O modules 3

v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22
v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/23
3.3 - Distributed I/O systems

Selection guide: IP 20 inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/28
Selection guide: IP 20 TBX discrete I/O on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/30
b TBX distributed discrete I/O modules
v Presentation, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/32

v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/36
v Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/45
Selection guide: IP 20 TBX analog I/O on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46
b TBX distributed analog I/O modules

v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/50
Selection guide: IP 65/67 splitter boxes and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52
b TBX discrete I/O IP 65 modules on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/54
b Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/60
b Discrete I/O IP 65 modules on INTERBus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/70
3.4 - Specialized I/O

b Tego Power installation system

v Associations with Modicon automation platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/76
3/1
platform 3
Discrete I/O modules
Applications Connecting inputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires fitted with either cable ends or
open/closed cable tags
3.1
Type c c or a a
Voltage 24 V 48 V 24 V 48 V 100…120V
Modularity
(Number of channels) 8 isolated 16 isolated channels

channels
Connection Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01
Isolated inputs IEC 1131 2 conformity Type 2 –
Logic Positive Negative –

Sensor compatibility acc. 2 wire c/a, 3 wire PNP c any type 2 wire c/a, 2 wire c/a
to IEC 947 5 2 standard 3 wire NPN
c any type
Isolated outputs Fallback
IEC 1131 2 conformity

Protection
Logic
Type of discrete input and I/O modules TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY
08D2 16D2 16D3 16A2 16A3 16A4
Pages 3/12
Compatibility with Tego Tego Dial –
installation system
Tego Power –
Compatibility with Connection sub-bases –

Telefast pre-wired system
Input adaptor sub-bases –
Type of passive Maniature (55 or 72 mm)

connection sub-bases
Standard (106 or 113 mm)
Large width (194 mm)
Type of adaptor sub-base Solid input relays

Plug-in relays
Type of cables fitted with HE10 connectors
3/2
3
Connecting inputs to Connecting inputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads, rolled Connecting inputs to HE 10 connectors with
screw terminal ribbon cables or multicore cables preformed cables with flying leads, rolled
blocks for bare wires ribbon cables or multicore cables
fitted with either cable
ends or open/closed
cable tags
3.1
a c
200…240 V 24 V 48 V 24 V
16 isolated inputs and 12 isolated outputs
0.5 A
16 isolated 16 fast isolated 32 isolated 64 isolated 32 isolated Event-triggered fast Programmable
channels channels channels channels channels inputs reflex inputs and
outputs
Via 20-way screw Via 20-way HE 10 connectors
terminals:
TSX BLY 01
– Type 1 Type 1
– Positive
2 wire c/a 2 wire c/a , 3 wire PNP c any type
Output fallback may be configured, with

continuous monitoring of output control and
output reset in case of internal fault
Yes
Protected
Positive
TSX DEY 16A5 TSX DEY 16FK TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 64D2K TSX DEY 32D3K TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY
28RFK
3/12 3/14
– Tego Dialbase 8I/8O APE 1B24M (see page 3/76) –
– Communication module APP 1CH, control and power splitters –

APP 2R4H2
– 8 ou 16 channels, with or without LED, with commom or 2 terminals per channel passive connection sub-bases
– 16 channels c 5 V TTL, c 24 V, c 48 V, a 115 V or 230 V, 2 terminals per channel adaptor sub-bases
ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21, ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H20Eppp ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21,
ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H20Eppp,
ABE 7H12R50
ABE 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R23, ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H16R2p, ABE 7H16R20 ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H16R2p,
ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7H16Cpp ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7HCpp,
ABE 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R23,
ABE 7H12Rpp
ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7H16S43
ABE 7S16E2pp
ABE 7P16F3pp
TSX CDP pp3 ou ABF H20pp0
3/3
Discrete output Modicon Premium automation
selection guide platform 3
Applications Connecting ouptuts to screw terminal blocks for bare wires or wires fitted with either cable ends
or open/closed cable tags (minimum cross-section 0.28 mm2, maximum 1.5 mm2)
3.1
Type c transistor c our a relay
Voltage 24 V 48 V c 24 V,
a 24…240 V
Current 0.5 A 2A 0.5 A 1A 0.25 A 3 A (lth)
Modularity 8 channels, protected 16 8 16 8 16

(number of channels) channels, channels, channels, channels channels
protected protected protected not not
protected protected
Connection Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01

Isolated outputs Fallback Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of Output fallback may be
output control and output reset in cse of internal fault configured
IEC 1131 2 conformity Yes
Protection Protected Not protected
Logic Positive –
Types of discrete output module TSX TSX TSX TSX TSX TSX TSX
DSY DSY DSY DSY DSY DSY DSY
08T2 08T22 16T2 08T31 16T3 08R5 16R5
Pages 3/13
Compatibility with Tego Tego Dial –

installation system
Tego Power –
Compatibility with Connection sub-bases –

Telefast pre-wired system
Input adaptor sub-bases –
Type of passive Maniature (55 or 72 mm)

connection sub-bases
Standard (106 or 113 mm)
Large width (194 mm)
Type of adaptor sub-base Solid input relays
Plug-in relays
Type of cables fitted with HE10 connectors
3/4
3
Connecting ouptuts to screw terminal blocks for bare wires or wires fitted with Connecting outputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with flying
either cable ends or open/closed cable tags (minimum cross-section 0.28 mm2, leads (cross-section 3.324 mm2), rolled ribbon cables (cross-section
maximum 1.5 mm2) 0.08 mm2) or multicore cables (cross-section 0.324 mm 2)
3.1
c our a c relay a triac c transistor

relay
c 24…48 V 24 V
a 24…240V 24…120 V 48…240 V 24…120 V
5 A (lth) 5 A (lth) 2 A per 1 A per 1 A per 0.1 A per channel
channel channel channel
8 channels, protected 16 channels, 16 channels, 32 channels, protected 64 channels, protected
protected not protected
Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01 Via 20-way HE 10 connectors

Output fallback may be – Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output
configured control and output reset in case of internal fault
Yes
Protected Not Protected

protected
– Positive
TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K
08R5A 08R4D 08S5 16S5 16S4
3/13
– Tego Dialbase 8I/8O APE 1B24M (see page 3/76)
– Communication module APP 1CH, control and power splitters APP 2R4H2
– 8 or 16 channels, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per

channel
– 8 or 16 relay channels with 1 “N/O”, 1 or 2 “C/O” or transistor,
c 5…48 V, c 24 V, a 24…240 V 1 or 2 terminals per channel
ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21
ABE 7H16S21
ABE 7H16F43
ABE 7S08S2pp, ABE 7R08Sppp, ABE 7S16Sppp, ABE 7R16Sppp
ABE 7P08T330, ABE 7R16Tppp, ABE 7P16Tppp
TSX CDP pp3 ou ABF H20pp0

ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21
3/5
Principle Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
Connecting modules with screw terminal blocks
Discrete I/O module terminal blocks have a device for automatically transferring the
coding when first used. This prevents manipulation errors when a module is replaced.
This coding ensures electrical compatibility for the type of module.
Each terminal can accept bare wires or wire with cable ends with open tags.
The capacity of each terminal is:
b Minimum: 1 x 0.2 mm2 wire (AWG 24) without cable end.
b Maximum: 1 x 2 mm2 wire (AWG 14) without cable end or 1 x 1.5 mm2 wire
(AWG 15) with cable end.
Screw connection terminal blocks are equipped with captive screws.
The maximum terminal block capacity is 16 x 1 mm2 (AWG 17) wires + 4 x 1.5 mm2
(AWG 15) wires.
Connecting modules with HE 10 connectors

Preformed cable with 20 wires, 22-gauge (0.324 mm2)
3
Used for simple and direct wire to wire connection of the I/O of the module with
1
connectors 1 to the sensors, preactuators or terminals.
This preformed cable 3 comprises:
b An insulated HE10 2 connector at one of the ends, with 20 x 0.34 mm2
2
3.1 cross-section sheathed wires.
b At the other end 4, flying leads differentiated by a colour code conforming to
3 standard DIN 47100.
TSX CDP 301: 3 metres long,

TSX CDP 1001: 10 metres long.
Rolled ribbon cable with sheath, 28-gauge (0.08 mm2)
Used for connecting I/O of modules with HE 10 connectors 1 to Telefast 2 fast wiring
2 connection and adaptation interfaces. This cable 3 has 2 HE 10 connectors 4 and
a rolled ribbon cable with sheath with 0.08 mm2 cross-section wires.
Preformed cable
Given the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended for use with low current
I/O only (100 mA maximum per output).
TSX CDP 102: 1 metre long,

1 4 TSX CDP 202: 2 metres long,
Connection cable, 22-gauge (0.324 mm2)

3
1 Used for connecting the I/O of modules with HE 10 connectors 1 to Telefast 2 fast
6 wiring 2 connection and adaptation interfaces. This cable 5 has 2 insulated HE 10
connectors 6 and a cable for carrying higher currents (500 mA maximum).
TSX CDP 053: 0.5 metres long,

TSX CDP 103: 1 metre long,
5 2
4
6 TSX CDP 1003: 10 metres long.
Rolled ribbon and connection cable
Characteristics: References: Connections:

pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/13 and 3/14 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/6
Principle (continued), Modicon Premium automation
Connection to Tego Dial and Tego Power systems

TSX DEY 16FK/32D2K/64D2K input modules and TSX DSY 32T2K/64T2K output
1 modules 1 are specially designed for use in conjunction with Tego Dial and Tego
Power systems (1).
The modules are easily connected using a TSX CDP pp3 connecting cable 2 to the
Dialbase sub-base APE 1B24M 3 installed on the Dialpack terminal 4 equipped with a
panel 5 which enables operator dialogue.
2 3 4 5
3.1
(1) See pages 3/70 and 7/14.

Description
Discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a plastic case which
ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics.
I/O modules with screw terminal connection

1
2
1 A display block for channels and module diagnostics.
2 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the I/O to the sensors and
preactuators, TSX BLY 01 (connectors to be ordered separately).
3
3 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the
4 identification label.
4 A rotating support containing the module locating device.
I/O modules with connection via HE 10 connector

1
1 A display block for channels and module diagnostics.
2
2 HE 10 connectors, protected by a cover. They are used to connect the I/O to
sensors and preactuators either directly, or via Telefast 2 connection sub-bases.

3/7
platform 3
Functions
I/O assignment
Each module is functionally organised into groups of 8 channels. Each group of
channels can be assigned a specific application task.
Reactivation of outputs
If a fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated if no other terminal
fault is present. The reactivation command, defined during configuration, can be
automatic (reactivation every 10 seconds) or controlled via the program. Reactivation
is carried out in groups of 8 channels. This function can be accessed on modules with
solid state d.c. outputs. For relay and triac output modules protected by fuse, the same
type of reactivation (automatic or via program) is necessary after replacement of one
or more fuses.
RUN/STOP command
3 An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC.
The command is accepted on a rising edge. A STOP command via an input takes
priority over a change to RUN via the terminal or via a network command.
Output fallback
When an application is placed in STOP mode, outputs must be set to a state which is
3.1 not harmful to the application. This state, known as the fallback position, is defined
for each module when its outputs are configured.
This configuration enables the choice between:
b fallback: channels are set to state 0 or 1 depending on the fallback value entered.
b maintain: outputs retain the state they were in before the PLC stopped.
Diagnostic functions
b module diagnostics: any exchange fault preventing normal operation of an output
module or fast input module is signalled. Similarly, any internal module fault is
signalled.
b process diagnostics: sensor/preactuator voltage check, terminal block presence
check, short-circuit and overload check, sensor voltage check, preactuator voltage
check.
Specific functions of the TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28 FK module inputs
b Latching: accepts particularly short pulses with a duration of less than the PLC
scan time.
b Event input: enables events to be accepted and ensures their immediate processing
(processing on interrupt). These inputs are associated with event processing (EVTi)
and defined in configuration mode where: i = 0 to 31 for TSX P57 10 processors,
i = 0 to 63 for TSX P57 20/30/40 and coprocessors Atrium T PCX.
b Event processing can be triggered on a rising edge (0→1) or falling edge (1→0) of
the associated input. A masking/unmasking function for TSX DEY 16FK/DMY 28FK
inputs is available in online mode.
b Programmable input filtering: inputs are equipped with filtering which can be
configured for each channel. Inputs are filtered by a fixed analogue filter which ensures
a maximum immunity of 0.1 ms for filtering line interference and by a digital filter which
can be configured from 0.1 to 7.5 ms in increments of 0.5 ms.
Reflex and timer functions for the TSX DMY 28RFK module
Can be used to create applications which require a faster response time than the
FAST task or event processing (< 500 µs). These control system functions are
executed in the module and are independent of the PLC task. They are programmed
using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software in configuration mode.
Removal when powered up

Due to their integrated devices, I/O modules (including application-specific modules)
can be removed and connected while powered up.

3/8
Functions (continued), Modicon Premium automation
Functions (suite)
2/3 wire compatibility
Type of input c 24 V c 24/48 V c 24 V a 24/48 V a 200…240 V
type 1 type 2 a 100…120 V
positive logic positive logic negative logic type 2 type 2
All 3 wire c sensors, PNP
All 3 wire c sensors, NPN
Telemecanique 2-wire c sensor or others with the following

characteristics:
- residual voltage, closed < 7 V
- minimum switching current < 2.5 mA
- residual current, open < 1.5 mA
2-wire c/a sensor (1)
2-wire a sensor (1)

3
(1) In nominal voltage range a 220…240 V.
Compatible
Characteristics
Environment
3.1
Conformity to standards NFC 63 850, IEC 664, IEC 1131 2, UL 508, UL7 46C, CSA 22 2 n° 142
Temperature derating Characteristics at 60 °C are ensured for 60 % of inputs and 60 % of outputs at state 1
Characteristics of input modules c 24/48 V

Type of module TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY
08D2/16D2 16D3 16A2 16FK 32D2K 64D2K 32D3K
Number of inputs 8/16 16 16 16 32 64 32
Connections Screw Screw Screw HE 10 HE 10 HE 10 HE 10

terminal terminal terminal connector connector connector connector
Nominal input values Voltage V c 24 c48 c 24 c 24 c 24 c 24 c 48
(pos. logic) (pos. logic) (neg. logic) (pos. logic) (pos. logic) (pos. logic) (pos. logic)
Fast inputs
Current mA 7 7 16 3.5 3.5 3.5 7
Sensor supply V 19…30 38…60 19…30 19…30 19…30 19…30 38…60

(ripple included)
Input limit At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 11 ≥ 30 ≤ Ual-14 V ≥ 11 ≥ 11 ≥ 11 ≥ 30

values
Current mA ≥ 6,5 ≥ 6.5 ≥ 6.5 ≥3 ≥3 ≥3 ≥ 6.5 (pour
U = 30 V)
At state 0 Voltage V ≤5 ≤ 10 ≥ Ual-5 ≤5 ≤5 ≤5 ≤10
Current mA ≤2 ≤2 ≤2 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1.5 ≤2
Impédance d'entrée à l'état 1 KΩ 4 7 1.6 6.3 6.3 6.3 4
Temps de réponse Typique ms 4 4 10 Configurable 4 4 4

from 0.1 to
Maximum ms 7 7 20 7.5 7 7 7
Conformité IEC 1131 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 2
Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensor IEC 947 5 2 IEC 947 5 2 IEC 947 5 2 See table on page 3/9 IEC 947 5 2
Isolation resistance MΩ >10 at c 500 V
Dielectric strength Veff 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Type of input Current sink Resistive Current sink
Consumption See page 9/4
Dissipated power W 1 + 0.15 Nb 1 + 0.3 Nb 1 + 0.4 Nb 1.2 + 0.1 Nb 1 + 0.1 Nb 1.5 + 0.1Nb 2+ 0.1 Nb
No. = No. of channels
Characteristics: Connections:
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/9
platform 3
Characteristics of a.c. input modules

Type of module TSX DEY 16A2 TSX DEY 16A3 TSX DEY 16A4 TSX DEY 16A5
Number of inputs 16 16 16 16
Nominal input values Voltage V a 24 a 48 a 110 a 220

Current mA 15 16 12 15
Frequency Hz 47…63 47…63 47…63 47…63
Sensor supply V 20…26 40…52 85…132 170…264
(ripple included)
Input limit At state 1 Voltage V 10 29 74 159
values Current mA 6 6 6 6
At state 0 Voltage V 5 10 20 40
Current mA 4 4 4 4
Input impedance at state 1 for 24 V KΩ 1.6 3.2 9.2 20
3 Response time Typical ms 15 10 10 10
Maximum ms 20 20 20 20
IEC 1131 2 conformity Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2

3.1
Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensor IEC 947 5 2
Isolation résistance MΩ > 10 at c 500 V
Dialectic strength Veff 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Type of input Resistive Capacitive
Dissipated power W 0,89 0.86 0.83 0.97
Characteristics of solid state modules with terminal block

Type of module TSX DSY 08T2/16T2 TSX DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 08T31 TSX DSY 16T3
Output nominal values Voltage V c 24 c 24 c 48 c 48
Current A 0.5 2 1 0.250
Output limit values Voltage V 19…30 19…30 38…60 38…60
Current/channel A 0.625 2.5 1.25 0.31
Current/module A 4/7 14 7 4
Leakage current At state 0 mA < 0.5 <1 <1 < 0.5
Residual voltage V < 1.2 < 0.5 <1 < 1.5
Min. load impedance W 48 12 48 192
Response time 1.2 ms 200 µs 200 µs 1.2 ms
Switching frequency on inductive load Hz 0.5/LI2
Built-in protection Against overvoltages Yes, by Transil diode
Against inversions Yes, by reverse mounted diode, use a fuse on the + 24 V or + 48 V of the preactuators
Against short-circuits and Electronic tripping on reactivation (automatic or via program)

overloads
Preactuator voltage detection threshold V 16 34
Isolation resistance MΩ > 10 sous c 500 V
Nominal power Dissipated W 1/1.1 1.3 2.2 2.4
Per output x module current + (0.75 W) + (0.2 W) + (0.55 W) + (0.85 W)
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/10
platform 3
Characteristics of 50 VA relay output modules

Type of module TSX DSY 08R5/16R5
Voltage a.c. Nominal V a 24…240
Limit V a 20…264
d.c. Nominal V c 12…24
Limit V c 10…34
Thermal current A 3
Voltage V 24 48 110 220

a.c. load AC-12 duty, Power VA 50 (5) 50 (6), 110 (4) 110 (6), 220 (4) 220 (6)
resistive
AC-14 and AC-15 Power VA 24 (4) 10 (10), 24 (8) 10 (11), 50 (7), 110 (2) 10 (11), 50 (9)
duty, inductive 110 (6), 220 (1)
d.c. load DC-12 duty,
resistive
Power W 24 (6), 40 (3) – 3
DC-3 duty, Power W 10 (8), 24 (6) –
inductive
Response time Activation ms <8
Deactivation ms < 10 3.1

Type of contact Normally open
Built-in Against averloads and short-circuits None, each channel or group of channels must have a fast blow fuse
protection
Against a.c. inductive overvoltages None, an RC circuit MOV (ZNO) peak limiter circuit appropriate to the voltage must be mounted
in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator
Against d.c. inductive overvoltages None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator
Isolation resistance MΩ > 10 at c 500 V
Dissipated nominal power W 0.25 W + (0.2 W x No. of outputs at 1)
(1) For 0.1 x 106 operating cycles.

(6) For 1 x 106 operating cycles.
(10)For 5 x 106 operating cycles.
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/11
platform 3
Characteristics of 100 VA relay output modules

Type of module TSX DSY 08R4D TSX DSY 08R5A
Operating a.c. Nominal V – a 24…240
voltage
Limit V – a 20…264
d.c. Nominal V c 24…130 c 24…48
Limit V c 19…143 c 19…60
Thermal current A 5 5
Voltage V – 24 48 100…120 220…240

a.c. load AC-12 duty, Power VA – 100 (5) 100 (6) 220 (6) 440 (6)
resistive 200 (4) 440 (4)
AC-14 and AC-15 Power VA – 50 (4) 20 (10) 20 (11) 20 (11)
duty, inductive 50 (8) 110 (7) 110 (9)
3 220 (2) 220 (6)
440 (1)
Voltage V 24 48 100…130 24 48
d.c. load DC-12 duty, Power W 50 (6) 100 (6) 220 (6) 24 (6) 50 (6)
resistvie 100 (3) 200 (3) 440 (3) 50 (3) 100 (3)
DC-3 duty, Power W 20 (8) 50 (8) 110 (8) 10 (8) 24 (8)
3.1 inductive 50 (6) 100 (6) 220 (6) 24 (6) 50 (6)
Response time Activation ms < 10
Deactivation ms < 15
Type of contacts 2 x 2 “O/F”, 2 x 2 “F”
Built-in Against averloads and short-circuits Interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse per common
protection
Against overvoltages RC circuit and Ge-Mov
Dielectric strength Veff 2000 - 50/60 Hz
Dissipated No: number of outputs at 1 W 0.25 + 0.24 Nb

nominal power
Characteristics of triac output modules
Type of module TSX DSY 08S5 TSX DSY 16S5 TSX DSY 16S4
Operating a.c. Nominal V a 48…240 a 24…120
voltage
Limit V a 41…264 a 20…132
Permissible current A 2 A per channel - 12 A per 1 A per channel - 12 A per 1 A per channel - 12 A per
module module module
Response time Activation ms ≤ 10
Deactivation ms ≤ 10
Built-in Against overvoltages Ge-Mov

protection
Against averloads and short-circuits Fast blow fuse per common < 5 A Non interchangeable fireproof
protection per common, 10 A
Dielectric strength Veff 2000 - 50/60 Hz
Consumption See page 9/4 See page 9/4
Dissipated power 0.5 W + 1 W/A per output 0.85 W + 1 W/A per output 0.85 W + 1 W/A per output

pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/12
platform 3
Characteristics of solid state output modules with connector

Type of module TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K
Logic Positive
Operating voltage d.c. Nominal V c 24
(ripple included) Limit V c 19…30, possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period
Permissible current A 0.1 A per channel, - 3.2 A per module 0.1 A per channel, - 5 A per module
Filament lamp max power W 1.2
Residual voltage V < 1.5 for I = 0.1 A
Response time ms 1.2
Paralleling of outputs Yes: 3 max
Leakage current mA < 0.1 for U = 30 V
Compatibility with d.c. inputs IEC 1 and 2
Built-in Against overvoltages Yes, transil diode
protection Against overloads and short-circuits Automatic trip after 15 ms
Against polarity inversion Reverse diode (place a 3 A fuse on the 24 V)
Load impedance At state 1 W > 220
Isolation resistance MΩ > 10 at c 500 V 3
Dissipated power W 1.6 W + 0.1 W/output 2.4 W + 0.1 W/output
Characteristics of I/O mixed modules with connector 3.1
Type of module TSX DMY 28FK/TSX DMY 28RFK
Fast inputs c 24 V Solid state outputs c 24 V
Nominal values Voltage V c 24 c 24
Current mA 3.5 500
Filament lamp max power W – 6
Output limit At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 11 –
values Current mA ≥3 –
At state 0 Voltage V ≤5 –
Current mA ≤ 1.5 –
Sensor power supply (ripple included) V 19…30 (possible up to 30 V, limited to 1 in –
every 24 hours)
Output limit Voltage V – 19…30 (1)
values Current/channel A – 0.5
Current/module A – 4
Leakage current At state 0 mA – <1
Residual voltage At state 1 V – < 1.2
Minimum load impedance W – 48
Filter time Default ms 4 –
Configurable ms 0.1…7.5 (at intervals of 0.5) –
Response time (2) ms – 0.6
Type of input Current sink –
Paralleling of inputs (3) Yes –
Switching frequency on Hz – 0.5/LF
IEC 1131-2 conformity Yes type 1 –
Built-in Against overvoltages – Yes, by transil diode
protection
Against inversions – Yes, by inverted diode. Fuse required on
+ 24 V of preactuators
Against short-circuits and overloads ms – 15
Compatibility 2-wire proximity sensor Yes (Telemecanique sensor and < 1.5 mA –
leakage current)
3-wire proximity sensor Yes –
Preactuator voltage detection threshold V – 16

Dissipated power W 1.2 + 0.1 x no. of inputs at 1 –
Temperature Characteristics at 60 °C Ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1 Ensured for 60 % of the maximum current of
derating the module
(1) 34 V possible for 1 hour in every 24 hour period.
(2) All outputs are equipped with an electro-magnet rapid demagnetisation circuit. Discharge time
for electro-magnets < L/R.
(3) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module, or on
different modules for input redundancy.
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/13
platform 3
References
Discrete input modules
Type of Input Connection IEC 1131 2 Modularity Reference (2) Weight
current voltage (1) conformity (no. of channels) kg
c 24 V Screw Type 2 8 isolated inputs TSX DEY 08D2 0.300
(pos. log.) terminal
block
16 TSX DEY 16D2 0.300
isolated inputs
48 V Screw Type 2 16 TSX DEY 16D3 0.300

(pos. log.) terminal isolated inputs
block
TSX DEY 08D2 24 V HE 10 Type 1 16 TSX DEY 16FK 0.300
(pos. log.) connector isolated fast
inputs (3)
3 32
isolated inputs
TSX DEY 32D2K 0.300
64 TSX DEY 64D2K 0.370

isolated inputs
24 V Screw Type 2 16 TSX DEY 16A2 0.310

3.1 (neg. log.) terminal isolated inputs
block
48 V HE 10 Type 2 32 TSX DEY 32D3K 0.310
(pos. log.) connector isolated inputs
TSX DEY 16FK
a 24 V Screw Type 2 16 TSX DEY 16A2 0.310
50/60 Hz terminal isolated inputs
block
48 V Screw Type 2 16 TSX DEY 16A3 0.320
terminal isolated inputs
block
100...120 V Screw Type 2 16 TSX DEY 16A4 0.320
block
200...240 V Screw Type 2 16 TSX DEY 16A5 0.360
block
(1) By connector: module supplied with cover. By screw terminal block: connection block to be
ordered separately.
TSX DEY 32D3K (2) Multilingual Discrete I/O Quick Reference Guide included with each TSX P57 p0M processor.
TSX DM 57p installation manual to be ordered separately (see page 1/29).
(3) Module with isolated fast inputs (filtering from 0.1 to 7.5 ms) which can activate the event task.
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/14
platform 3
References (continued)
Discrete output modules (screw terminal block not supplied)
Type of Output Connection IEC 1131 2 Modularity Reference (2) Weight
current voltage (1) conformity (no. of channels) kg
c 24 V/0.5 A Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08T2 0.320
solid (pos. log.) terminal outputs
state block
24 V/2 A Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08T22 0.410
(pos. log.) terminal outputs
block
24 V/0.5 A Screw Yes 16 protected TSX DSY 16T2 0.340
block
48 V/1 A Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08T31 0.320
block
TSX DSY 16T2
48 V/0.25 A Screw Yes 16 protected TSX DSY 16T3 0.340
(pos. log.) terminal
block
outputs
3
24 V 0.1A HE 10 Yes 32 protected TSX DSY 32T2K 0.300
per channel connector outputs
(pos. log.)
64 protected TSX DSY 64T2K 0.360
outputs 3.1
c ou a c 24 V/3 A, Screw Yes 8 outputs, not TSX DSY 08R5 0.330
relay a 24 to terminal protected
240 V/3 A block
16 outputs, not TSX DSY 16R5 0.380
protected
c 24 to Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08R5A 0.420

48 V/5 A, terminal outputs
TSX DSY 64T2K a 24 to block
240 V/5 A
c 24...120 V Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08R4D 0.370

relay 5A terminal outputs
block
a 24...120 V Screw Yes 16 outputs, not TSX DSY 16S4 0.380
triac 1 A/channel terminal protected
block
48...240 V Screw Yes 16 protected TSX DSY 16S5 0.310
1 A/channel terminal outputs
block
48...240 V Screw Yes 8 protected TSX DSY 08S5 0.340
2 A/channel terminal outputs
block
(1) By connector: module supplied with cover. By screw terminal block: connection block to be
ordered separately.
(2) Multilingual Discrete I/O Quick Reference Guide included with each TSX P57 p0M processor.
TSX DM 57p installation manual to be ordered separately (see page 1/29).
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/15
platform 3

Number Connection No. and type No. and type IEC 1131 2 Reference (2) Weight
of I/O (1) of inputs of outputs conformity kg
28 HE 10 16 fast 12, solid Input, type 1 TSX DMY 28FK 0.320
connector (pos. log.) state Output, Yes
(3) c 24 V/0.5 A
protected
12 reflex or Input, type 1 TSX DMY 28RFK 0.350

time-delayed
c 24 V/0,5 A
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK protected
Connection terminal block

Designation Use Reference Weight
kg
Screw connection terminal block To be ordered separately TSX BLY 01 0.100
20-way with each I/O module with
3 screw terminal block
connection
TSX BLY 01
Connecting cables for I/O modules fitted with HE 10 connectors
Description Constitution Section Length Reference Weight
Use kg
3.1 20-wire pre-formed 1 HE 10 0.324 mm2 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cable connector with
colour coded 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
flying leads
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
Rolled ribbon 2 HE 10 0.08 mm2 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090

connecting cable connectors
for Telefast 2 2m TSX CDP 202 0.170
system
3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
TSX CDP p01 Connecting cables 2 HE 10 0.324 mm2 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
connectors
for Telefast 2 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
system
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
TSX CDP p02 3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
10 m TSX CDP 1003 1.180
Simulator sub-base
Designation Use Reference Weight
TSX CDP p03 kg
16-channel Comprises 2 HE 10 connectors which ABE 7TES160 0.350
Telefast 2 simulator allow it to be inserted between the PLC I/O
sub-base for discrete module and the Telefast I/O sub-base
I/O ABE 7H/P/R/S.
Enables display, forcing, inhibiting or
8
2 01
9
continuity of discrete I/O
0
2 01 10
1
11
2
12
(1) By connector: module supplied with cover.
3
4
13 (2) Multilingual discrete I/O Quick Reference Guide included with each Premium processor.
5
14 TSX DM 57 2p installation manual to be ordered separately (see page 1/29).
15
6 (3) Module with isolated fast inputs (filtering from 0.1 to 7.5 ms) which can activate the event task.
7
ABE 7TES160
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/15 to 3/17
3/16
Connections Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
TSX DEY 08D2 TSX DEY 16D2 TSX DEY 16D3 TSX DEY 16FK
Capteurs I00->15 Entrées

Inputs
Inputs Sensor Inputs Sensor Inputs Sensor
Sensor blanc 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 marron 1 2 1
2 1 2 1
2 1 2
3 2 3 2 vert
3 2 jaune 3 4 3
4 3 4 3
4 3 4
5 4 5 4 gris
5 4 rose 5 6 5
6 5 6 5
6 5 6
7 6 7 6 bleu
7 6 rouge 7 8 7
8 7 8 7
8 7 8
9 8 9 8 noir
9 violet 9 10 9
10 9 10 9
10 10
11 10 11 10 gris-rose
11 rouge-bleu 11 12 11
12 11 12 11
12 12
13 12 13 12 blanc-vert
13 marron-vert 13 14 13
14 13 14 13
14 14
15 14 15 14 blanc-jaune
15 jaune-marron 15 16 15
16 15 16 15
16
FU1 17
17 17 + 24 V blanc-gris
17 18
0V FU1 18 gris-marron
0V FU1 18 FU1
18 0V
+ –
c + 24 V 20
19 + –
c + 24 V
20
19
+ –
c + 48 V
20
19 +
– 0V
blanc-rose
rose-marron
19 20
3
FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse
TSX DEY 32D2K/64D2K/32D3K TSX DEY 16A2 (negative logic) TSX DEY 16A2/16A3/16A4/16A5
C Inputs A Inputs
3.1
Inputs Sensor Inputs
Sensor 32 Sensor 0 Sensor
1 2 33 1 2 1 1 0 1 0
2 1 2 1
34 2
3 4 35 3 4 3 3 2 3 2
4 3 4 3
36 4 5 4 5 4
5 6 37 5 6 5
6 5 6 5
38 6 7 6 7 6
7 8 39 7 8 7
8 7 8 7
40 8 9 8 9 8
9 10 41 9 10 9 10 9 10 9
42 10 11 10 11 10
11 12 43 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
44 12 13 12 13 12
13 14 45 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
46 14 15 14 15 14
15 16 47 15 16 15 16 15 16 15
c UV c UV 17 17
17 18 17 18 18 18
FU1 24 V FU1 a UV
FU1 FU1 a
+ + - + 0 V 20
19
20
19
19 20 19 20
– – 0V
0V
FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse UV: a 24 V for TSX DEY 16A2
Sensor
a 48 V for TSX DEY 16A3
D B
a 110 V for TSX DEY 16A4
48 16
1 2 49 1 2 17 a 220 V for TSX DEY 16A5
50 18 FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse
3 4 51 3 4 19
52 20
5 6 53 5 6 21
54 22
7 8 55 7 8 23
56 24
9 10 57 9 10 25
58 26
11 12 59 11 12 27
60 28
13 14 61 13 14 29
62 30
15 16 63 15 16 31
c UV c UV
17 18 17 18
FU1 FU1
+ 19 20 + 19 20
– –
0V 0V
FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse
TSX UV A B C D
DEY 32D2K c 24V I00 V 15 I16 V 31 – –
DEY 32D3K c 48V I00 V 15 – I32 V 47 –
DEY 64D2K c 24V I00 V 15 I16 V 31 I32 V 47 I48 V 63
20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp1: correspondence between HE 10connector
pin and colored of wire, see table on page 3/19.
pages 3/9 to 3/12 pages 3/13 and 3/14
3/17
Connections (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
TSX DSY 08T2 TSX DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 16T2/16T3 TSX DSY 08T31
Preactuors Outputs Preactuors Preactuors Outputs Preactuors Outputs

Outputs
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
2 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 1
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
4 5 4 2 5 2 4 5 4 2 5 2
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
6 7 6 3 7 3 6 7 6 3 7 3
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
9 4 9 4 8 9 8 4 9 4
10 10 9 10 9 10
11 5 11 5 10 11 10 5 11 5
12 12 11 12 11 12
13 6 13 6 12 13 12 6 13 6
14 14 13 14 13 14
15 7 15 7 14 15 14 7 15 7
0V
16 16 15 16 15
– 17 17 17
16
+ 18
17
3 FU2
18
20
19
0V
20
19
0V
18
20
19
0V
18
19
– + FU2 – + FU2 UV – + FU2
20
FU2: 6.3 A fast-blow fuse FU2: 16 A fast-blow fuse UV: c 24 V for TSX DSY 16T2 FU2: 10 A fast-blow fuse
c 48 V for TSX DSY 16T3
3.1 FU2: fast-blow fuse
6.3 A for TSX DSY 16T2
10 A for TSX DSY 16T3
TSX DSY 32T2K/64T2K TSX DSY 08R5/16R5 TSX DSY 08R5A/08R4D
Outputs Outputs Preactuors Outputs

Preactuors C Preactuors A Preactuors Outputs
32 0 Q0 T0 1
33 0 1 Q0
32 1 2 0 1 2 1 1 R0 2
33 34 1 1 2
2 2 T1 3
35 3 2 3 Q1
34 3 4 2 3 4 3 R1 4 FU
35 36 3 3 4 C0-1
4 FU C0-3 5
37 5 5
36 5 6 4 5 6 4 6 (1)
37 38 5 6 4 6
5 (1) 7 FU
39 7 5 7 C2-3
38 7 8 6 7 8 6 8
39 40 7 6 8
8 7 T2 9
41 9 7 9 Q2
40 9 10 8 9 10 FU C4-7 R2 10
41 42 9 10
10 8 T3 11
43 8 11 Q3
42 11 12 10 11 12 11 9 R3 12
43 44 11 12 9 12
10 13 (1)
45 13 10 13 Q4
44 13 14 12 13 14 11 4 14
45 46 13 11 14 C4-5
14 FU C8-11 15
47 15 15 Q5 FU
46 15 16 14 15 16 12 5 16
47 15 12 16
13 17 (1)
13 17 Q6
0V 17 18 0V 17 18 14 6 18
14 18 C6-7
19
- - 15 19
15
Q7 FU
+ 19 20 + 19 20 FU 20
C12-15 7 20
FU2 FU2
c + 24 V c + 24 V UV
a 19…240V
Outputs Outputs ou c 24 V
Preactuors D Preactuors B
48 16 FU: fuse to be rated according to
48 1 2 49 16 1 2 17 UV: a 19…240 V or c 19…60 V
load for TSX DSY 08R5A c 24…130 V
49 50 17 18
51 19 For protection of integrated outputs, for TSX DSY 08R4D
50 3 4 18 3 4
51 52 19 20 see page 43520/5 FU: 6.3 A fast-blow fuse
52 5 6 53 20 5 6 21 (1) Connection must be made for
53 54 21 22
55 23
c 24 V or a 24 V power supply
54 7 8 22 7 8
55 56 23 24
56 9 10 57 24 9 10 25
57 58 25 26
58 11 12 59 26 11 12 27
59 60 27 28
60 13 14 61 28 13 14 29
61 62 29 30
62 15 16 63 30 15 16 31
63 31
0V 17 18 0V 17 18
-
+- 19 20 + 19 20
FU2 FU2
c + 24 V c + 24 V
FU2: 2 A fast-blow fuse
A B C D
TSX DSY 32T2K Q00 V 15 Q16 V 31 – –
TSX DSY 64T2K Q00 V 15 Q16 V 31 Q32 V 47 Q48 V 63
20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp1: correspondence between HE 10connector
pin and colored of wire, see table on page 3/19.
3/18
platform 3
TSX DSY16S4 TSX DSY 16S5 TSX DSY 08S5
Preactuors Outputs Preactuors Outputs

Q0 Preactuors Outputs Q0
0 1 Q0 0 1
1 0 1
1 2 1
2 1 2 2
2 3 2 1
3 2 3 1 3
3 4 3
FU C0-3 3 4 4
5 C0-3 C0-1 FU
4 5 FU 5
4 6 4 2
5 4 6 2 6
5 7 5 7
6 5 7 3
6 8 6
7 6 8 3 8
7 9 7 9
FU C4-7 7 9
10 C4-7 C2-3 FU
8 10 FU 10
8 11 8 4
9 8 11 4 11
9 12 9
10 9 12 12
10 13 10 5
11 10 13 5 13
11 14 11
FU C8-11 11 14 14
15 C8-11 C4-5 FU
12 15 FU 15
12 16 12 6
13 12 16 6 16
13 17 13 17
14 13 17 7
14 18 14 7
15 14 18 18
15 19 15
PN
FU
20
C12-15
NP
15
20
19
C12-15
FU PN
48…240 V
20
19
C6-7 FU
3
48… 240 V
FU: Fusible 6.3 A fast-blow fuse FU: interchangeable 5 A fast-blow fuse FU: interchangeable 5 A fast-blow fuse
TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK

3.1
Préactionneurs Q16 -> 27 Outputs
Sorties Capteurs Entrées
I00->15 Inputs
Preactuors Q16 Sensor 0
blanc 17 blanc 1
16 marron 1 2 1 2
17
marron
18 2
18 vert 3 4 19 vert
jaune 3 4 3
19 jaune
20 4
gris 21 gris
20 5 6 5 6 5
rose rose
21 22
bleu 23 6
22 7 8 bleu
rouge 7 8 7
23 24 rouge
noir 25 8
24 9 10 noir
violet 9 10 9
25 26 violet
gris-rose 27 10
26 11 12 gris-rose
rouge-bleu 11 12 11
27 rouge-bleu
blanc-vert 12
marron-vert 13 14 blanc-vert
13 14 13
marron-vert
blanc-jaune 14
jaune-marron 15 16 blanc-jaune
15 16 15
blanc-gris jaune-marron
0V gris-marron
17 18 + 24 V blanc-gris
17 18
– blanc-rose gris-marron
+ rose-marron
19 20 FU1 blanc-rose
FU2 + rose-marron
19 20
+ 24 V – 0V
FU2: 2 A fast-blow fuse FU1: Fusible 0.5 A fast-blow fuse
20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp1: correspondence between HE 10

connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page 3/19.
1 white
2 brown
3 green
4 yellow
5 grey
6 rose
7 blue
8 red
9 black
10 violet
11 grey/rose
12 red/blue
13 white/green
14 brown/green
15 white/yellow
16 yellow/brown
17 white/grey
18 grey/brown
19 white/rose
20 rose/brown
3/19
platform 3
Analog I/O modules
Applications Analog inputs
Type of I/O Low level isolated inputs, Thermocouple inputs High level inputs with common
3 thermocouples, temperature
probes
Type Multirange Multrange Voltage/current
Range Voltage ± 10 V, ± 5 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, - 80…+ 80 mV ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V,

1…5 V 1…5 V
Current 4…20 mA, 0…20 mA, – 0…20 mA,
external shunt supplied 4…20 mA
Thermocouple, B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U Thermocouples
3.2 temperature probes thermocouples
Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000, 2 or
B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
4 -wire temperature probes
Modularity 4 channels 16 channels 8 channels
Isolation Between channels: Between channels: Between channels: common

a 2830 V rms ± c 100 V point
Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels:
a 1780 V rms a 1000 V rms a 1000 V rms
Between channels and earth: Between channels and Between channels and earth:
a 1780 V rms earth: a 1000 V rms a 1000 V rms
Read time 550 ms 1120 ms (normal scan) 27 ms (normal scan)

70 ms/channel used 3 ms/channel used
(fast scan) (fast scan)
Response time User-definable filtering 0 to User-definable filtering User-definable filtering

68.5 s 0.04 Te to 0.012 Te 0 to 3.44 s
(Te: module scan time)
Resolution 16 bits 16 bits 12 bits
Connection 20-way screw terminal: Two 25-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D connector
TSX BLY 01 connectors
or 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base

(ABE 7CPA12) (ABE 7CPA02/03)
Type of module TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 1614 TSX AEY 800
Pages 3/26
3/20
3
Analog outputs
point High level isolated inputs High level input with common Isolated outputs between Outputs with common point
between channels point channels
3
Voltage/current
± 10 V
0…20 mA,
4…20 mA
3.2
16 channels 8 channels 4 channels 8 channels
Between channels: common Between channels: Between channels: common Between channels: Between channels: common
point. ± c 200 V point a 1500 V rms point
Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels: Between bus and channels:
a 1000 V rms a 1000 V rms a 1000 V rms a 1500 V rms a 1000 V rms
Between channels and earth: Between chanenls and earth: Between channels andearth: Between channels and earth: Between channels and earth:
a 1000 V rms a 1000 V rms a 1000 V rms a 1500 V rms a 1000 V rms
51 ms (normal scan) 126.4 ms (normal scan) 1 ms – –

3 ms/channel used 3.3 ms/channel used
(fast scan) (fast scan)
User-definable filtering User-definable filtering – 2.5 ms 5 ms

0 to 6.50 s 0 to 3.82 s
12 bits 16 bits 11 bits + sign 13 bits + sign for voltage

13 bits for current
Two 25-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D connector 25-way SUB-D connector 20-way screw terminal: 25-way SUB-D connector
connectors TSX BLY 01
or via 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base

(ABE 7CPA02/03) (ABE 7CPA02/31) (ABE 7CPA03/21) (ABE 7CPA02)
TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420 TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800
3/26
3/21
Analog I/O modules
Presentation
Analog I/O modules for Premium PLCs are equipped with :

b Either one 25-way SUB-D connector (TSX AEY 420/800/810 and TSX ASY 800)
b Or two 25-way SUB-D connectors (TSX AEY 1600/1614)
b Or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414, TSX ASY 410)
They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY ppp racks except for the positions
reserved for power supply modules. Analog I/O modules can be removed while the
PLC is powered up.
The maximum number of analog channels in a Premium configuration depends on

the processor used, see pages 1/20, 1/21, 1/28 and 1/34.
Description
The front panels of TSX AEY/ASY analog I/O modules comprise:

3
1 1 A display and module diagnostics block.
2 A connector for receiving the screw terminal block.
3 A rotating support containing the module locating device.

2
4 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the I/O to the sensors and
preactuators TSX BLY 01 (to be ordered separately).
3.2
3 5 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the
7
identification label.
4
5 6 A screw terminal block encoder.
Connection using Connection using
screw terminal block SUB-D connector
6 7 A 25-way SUB-D connector for connecting the sensors.
Nota : The TSX ASY 800 modules have on the front panel a screw terminal for external 24 VR
connection. See page 3/26.
Connection principle for TSX AEY/ASY modules with SUB-D connector
The Telefast 2 pre-wired system simplifies the installation of modules by providing

access to the inputs (or outputs) at the screw terminals.
Connection is via a TSX CAP 030 3 metre shielded cable equipped with SUB-D
connectors at either end.
Premium (extension rack) b The Telefast ABE 7CPA02 sub-base enables 8 channels to be connected.
TSX CAP 030
+ + Ð Ð
b The Telefast ABE 7CPA03/31 sub-base enables the connection of 8 channels
and:
GND
GND
N1
N1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
v provides channel by channel supply for 2 and 4-wire sensors with c 24 V (for
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE 7CPA02
sub-base ABE 7CPA03),
TSX CAP 030
+ + Ð Ð
v channel by channel isolated supply for 2 and 4-wire 24 V sensors (for sub-base
ABE 7CPA31),
GND
GND
N1
N1
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
v ensures continuity of current loops when the SUB-D connector is removed,

11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE 7CPA03/31
v protects the current shunt within the modules against overvoltages.
b The Telefast ABE 7CPA12 sub-base enables 16 thermocouples to be

connected. The terminal block is fitted with a temperature probe for cold junction
compensation.
pages 3/24 and 3/25 pages 3/26 and 3/27
3/22
platform 3
Analog I/O modules
TSX AEY 420, 800/810, 1600 analog input modules

TSX AEY ppp modules are high level analog input modules with 4 inputs for the
TSX AEY 420 module, 8 inputs for TSX AEY 800/810 modules and 16 inputs for the
TSX AEY 1600 module.
Used with sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and
process control functions for continuous processes.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600
modules offer the following ranges for each of their inputs ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V,
1…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA.
Functions
b Scanning of input channels, protection against overvoltages, adaptation of signals
by analog filtering, scanning by solid state multiplexing.
b Adaptation to input signals: gain selection, drift compensation.
b Digitisation of signals: 12-bit analog/digital conversion for TSX AEY 800/1600 and
16 bit analog/digital conversion for TSX AEY 420/810.
b Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, filtering,
scaling.
3
b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block
presence test, “watchdog” test.
b Isolation of input channels on TSX AEY 810.
b Fast processing of inputs (1 ms) on TSX AEY 420.
TSX AEY 414/1614 analog input modules
The TSX AEY 414 module is a multirange input module with 4 channels isolated from
each other.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following ranges are 3.2
available for each of its inputs:
b thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, U or - 13…+ 63 mV electrical range.
b 2 or 4-wire Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 temperature probe, or ohmic range:
0…400 ohms, 0…3850 ohms.
b High level ± 10 V, 0…10 V, ± 5 V, 0…5 V (0…20 mA with external shunt) or
1…5 V, 4…20 mA (4…20 mA with external shunt).
b The TSX AEY 1614 module is an analog input module with 16 thermocouple
inputs. Depending on the selections made during configuration, the following range
is available for each of the input channels (supporting a common mode between
them of c 250 V or a 280 V):
b Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, or electrical range - 80 mV… + 80 mV
Functions
b Scanning of input channels, gain selection according to input signals, multiplexing.
b Digitisation of input signals.
b Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient,
linearisation, cold junction compensation, filtering, scaling.
b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block
presence test, sensor link test, “watchdog” test.
TSX ASY 410, 800 analog output modules
The TSX ASY 410 module has 4 analog outputs isolated from each other, and the
TSX ASY 800 module has 8 outputs with common point.
Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer the following
range for each of its outputs: ± 10 V, 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA without external
supply.
Functions
b Protection of the module against overvoltages.
b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output.
b Conversion of digital signals to analog signals (11 bits + sign for TSX ASY 410 and
13 bits + sign for TSX ASY 800).
b Transforming application data into data which can be used by the digital/analog
converter.
b Module monitoring and fault indication to the application: converter test, range
overshoot test, terminal block presence test, “watchdog” test.
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software performs configuration and debugging

functions:
b Choice of modules used.
b Configuration of channels according to the type of module: scanning (normal or
fast), cold junction compensation (internal or external), range, filtering, display
format, task (MAST or FAST), detection of terminal block presence, wiring check.
b Debugging, access to certain parameter settings, module/channel diagnostics,
forcing, calibration.
3/23
platform 3
Analog I/O modules
Characteristics of analog input modules

Type of input module TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 420
Number of channels 8 16 8 4
Input range ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V,

1…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
Analog/digital conversion 12 bits 16 bits
Read time Normal scan ms 27 51 29.7 1

Fast scan ms 3 x (no. of channels used + 1) 3.3 x (no. of channels used –
+ 1)
Max.error ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 ± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20

0…10 V 1…5 V mA 0…10 V 1…5 V mA 0…10 V 1…5 V mA
4…20 4…20 4…20
mA mA mA
3 At 25 °C %FS 0.19/0.1 0.15/0.1 (1)

(1)
0.25/
0.16 (1)
0.244 0.13 0.142 0.1 0.2 0.2
0…60 °C %FS 0.22/ 0.22/0.13 (1) 0.41/ 0.305 0.191 0.12 0.2 0.4 0.4
0.13 (1) 0.32 (1)
Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 1000
Betw. ch. and earth V rms 1000
Between channels cV Common point ± 200 Common point
Common mode between channels None ± 200 None
3.2 Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on the inputs ± 30 V voltage

± 30 mA en current
Standards IEC 1131
Consumption mA See page 9/4
Type of input module TSX AEY 414

Number of channels 4 16
Input range b B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range : b B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T,

- 13…+ 63 mV U thermocouples or
b Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 2 or 4-wire temperature probes, or electrical range:
ohmic range: 0…400 Ω, 0…3850 Ω - 80...+ 80 mV
b ± 10 V, 0…10 V, ± 5 V, 0…5 V (0…20 mA with external shunt)
or 1…5 V, 4…20 mA (4…20 mA with external shunt)
Analog/digital conversion 16 bits 16 bits
Read time Normal scan ms 550 70 ms/channel

Fast scan ms – –
Max. error At 25 °C %FS See page 3/25 See page 3/25

0…60 °C %FS See page 3/25 See page 3/25
Isolation Betw. ch. and bus V rms 1780 1000

Betw. ch. and earth V rms 1780 1000
Between channels V rms 2830 –
Common mode V a 240 or c 100 between channels and earth c 250 between channels
a 415 or c 200 between channels and earth
c 250 between channels
or a 280
Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on the inputs ± 30 V powered up without 250 Ω external resistance c ± 30 V in differential
mode
± 15 V powered down without 250 Ω external resistance
± 25 mA powered up/down without 250 Ω external shunt
Standards Sensor: IEC 584, IEC 751, DIN 43760, DIN 43710, NFC 42 330
PLC: IEC 1131
(1) The 1st value corresponds to the max. error of the TSX AEY 800 module, the 2d, to the TSX AEY 1600.
References:
pages 3/26 and 3/27
3/24
platform 3
Analog I/O modules
Input range for TSX AEY 414

Voltage/current range ± 10 V 0…10 V ± 5 V 0…5 V 1…5 V 0…20 4…20 13…63 0… 0…
mA mA mV 4000 Ω 3850 Ω
Max. error at 25 °C %FS 0.27 0.16 0.27 0.22 0.27 0.36 0.45 0.19 0.13 0.22
(1)
Max. error at 0…60 °C %FS 0.50 0.39 0.50 0.45 0.56 0.69 0.86 0.44 0.27 0.48
(1)
Temperature probe range Pt 100 Pt 1000 Ni 1000
Max. error at 25 °C °C 1.2 2.5 1
Max. error at 0…60 °C °C 2.4 5 2
Thermocouple range B E J K L N R S T U
Max. error at 25 °C CI (2) °C 3.5 6.1 7.3 7.8 7.5 6 6 6.6 6.6 5.4
CE (3) °C 1.5 1.5 1.8 2.3 2 2 3.2 3.4 1.5 1.5

3
Max. error at 0…60 °C CI (2) °C 8.1 8.1 9.5 10.5 9.8 8.7 11 12 8.8 7.3
CE (3) °C 3.5 3.2 3.8 4.7 4.1 4.3 7.7 8.5 3.2 3.1
Input range for TSX AEY 1614

Thermocouple range B E J K L N R S T U
Max. error at 25 °C (4) °C 2.5 0.8 0.9 1 0.9 1.1 2.1 2.2 1 1
3.2
Max. error at 0…60 °C (4) °C 4 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.4 1.7 2.4 3.7 1.3 1.3
Characteristics of analog output modules

Type of output module TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800
Number of channels 4 8
Output range ± 10 V, 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA, output supplied by PLC (or 24 V SELV external on
TSX ASY 800, see page 8/31)
Analog/digital conversion 11 bits + sign 13 bits + sign (voltage), 13 bits

current
Conversion time ms 2,5 5
Maximum resolution Voltage output 5.12 mV (5), current output 10.25 µA (6) Voltage output 1.28 mV,
current output 2.56 µA
Output load Voltage output, impedance > 1 kΩ, load < 0.1 µF, current output, impedance < 600 Ω, load
< 300 µH
Measurement error as a % of FS
Voltage output, FS = 10 V %FS 0.45 to 25 °C, 0.75 from 0 to 60 °C ± 0.14 to 25 °C,
± 0.28 from 0 to 60 °C
Current output, FS = 20 mA %FS 0.52 to 25 °C, 0.98 from 0 to 60 °C ± 0.21 to 25 °C,
± 0.52 from 0 to 60 °C
Isolation between channels and bus V rms 1500 1000
Isolation between channels and earth c 500 V 1000 V rms
Isolation between channels V rms 1500 Common point
Type of protection Short-circuits and overload
Max. voltage without damage V ± 30
Standards IEC 1131
(1) %FS: error as a % of full scale.

(2) IC: with internal cold junction compensation.
(3) EC: with external cold junction compensation (with class A Pt 100 probe on channel 0).
(4) Max. errors, regardless of type of internal or external cold junction compensation (via Telefast
sub-base or with class A Pt 100 probe).
(5) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version: II > 10), for TSX ASY 410 (software version:
II ≤ 10). This value is 4.88 mV.
(6) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version: II > 10), for TSX ASY 410 (software version:
II ≤ 10). This value is 9.77 µA.
References:
pages 3/26 and 3/27
3/25
platform 3
Analog I/O modules
Analog input modules

Type of inputs Input signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
range channels (1) kg
Analog, high level with ± 10 V, 16 bits 1 x 25-way SUB-D 4 fast TSX AEY 420 0.330
common point 0...10 V, connector channels
0...5 V,
1...5 V,
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA
Analog, low level isolated ± 10 V, 16 bits Screw terminal 4 channels TSX AEY 414 0.320
0...10 V, block
TSX AEY 800/420
0...5 V, (2)
1...5 V,
± 5 V,
0...20 mA,
4...20 mA,
- 13...+ 63 mV,
0...400 Ω,
3 0...3850 Ω,
temperature
probe,
thermocouple
Analog, high level with ± 10 V, 12 bits 1 x 25-way SUB-D 8 channels TSX AEY 800 0.310
TSX AEY 1600/1614 common point 0...10 V, connector
0...5 V,
1...5 V, 2 x 25-way SUB-D 16 channels TSX AEY 1600 0.340
0...20 mA, connectors
4...20 mA
3.2
Analog, low level isolated ± 10 V, 16 bits 1 x 25-way SUB-D 8 channels TSX AEY 810 0.330
0...10 V, connector
0...5 V,
1...5 V
0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Thermocouple ± 63 mV, 16 bits 2 x 25-way SUB-D 16 channels TSX AEY 1614 0.350
(B, E, J, K, L, N, connectors
TSX ASY 410/AEY 414 R, S, T, U)
Analog output modules

Type of outputs Output signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference Weight
range channels (1) kg
Analog, isolated ± 10 V, 11 bits + sign Screw terminal 4 channels TSX ASY 410 0.350
0...20 mA, block
4...20 mA (2)
Analog with common point ± 10 V, 13 bits + sign 1 x 25-way SUB-D 8 channels TSX ASY 800 –
0...20 mA, connector (3)
4...20 mA
TSX ASY 800
(1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.
(2) TSX BLY 01 screw terminal block not supplied. To be ordered separately.
(3) The number of TSX ASY 800 modules is limited to 1 per rack with standard format power
supply, to 2 per rack with double format power supply (when this supplies the c 24 V voltage
required by outputs).
Characteristics:
pages 3/24 and 3/25
3/26
platform 3
Analog I/O modules
Description Compatible Use Type of Reference (1) Weight
with module terminal block kg
Telefast 2 TSX AEY 800 Distribution of 8 channels on Screw ABE 7CPA02 0.290
sub-bases TSX AEY 810 screw terminals
TSX AEY 1600
TSX ASY 800
(2)
TSX AEY 420 Distribution of 8 channels with Screw ABE 7CPA03 0.330
ABE-7CPA0p TSX AEY 800 common point on screw
TSX AEY 1600 terminals, protected sensor
supply, continuity of current
loops during disconnection,
protection against overvoltages
TSX AEY 810 Distribution of 8 isolated Screw ABE 7CPA31 0.410

channels on screw terminals,
channel by channel sensor
supply (without common point), 3
protection against overvoltages
TSX AEY 1614 Distribution of 16 channels on Screw ABE 7CPA12 0.360

screw terminals, integrates
temperature probe for external
cold junction compensation
Spring ABE 7CPA31E 0.410
TSX AEY 420 Distribution of 4 channels on Screw ABE 7CPA21 0.200 3.2
TSX ASY 410 screw terminals
(3)
Connection cables TSX AEY 420 Link between 25-way SUB-D – TSX CAP 030 0.670
TSX AEY 800 connectors of analog I/O
TSX AEY 810 modules and
TSX AEY 1600 ABE 7CPAppsub-bases
TSX AEY 1614 Length 3 m
(4)
TSX ASY 800
TSX ASY 410 Link between 1.5 m – ABF Y25S150 0.500
module and
ABE 7CPA21 2m – ABF Y25S200 0.560
sub-bases
(5)
3m – ABF Y25S300 0.740
5m – ABF Y25S500 0.920
Screw terminal TSX AEY 414 To be ordered separately with Screw TSX BLY 01 0.100
20-way TSX ASY 410 each I/O module for connection
via screw terminal block
Set of 4 resistors TSX AEY 414 Adaptation for current range – TSX AAK2 0.020
(supplied with TSX AEY 414)
TSX BLY 01
(1) Product supplied with a bilingual quick reference guide: French and English.
(2) Can be used with TSX AEY 420 module.
(3) Can be used with TSX ASY 410 module by using the ABF Y25Spp0p cables.
(4) Necessity to use two TSX CAP 030 cables to connect the ABE 7CPA12 sub-base.
(5) Includes the TSX BLY 01 20-way screw terminal block.
Characteristics:
pages 3/24 and 3/25
3/27
platform 3
Distributed I/O systems
Applications TBX distributed I/O
3 Type of bus or network Fipio
Max. nunber per connexion points 1 monobloc module 2 base units
Max. number of connexion points 127

3.3
Discrete inputs/outputs Number of channels 16 I et 16 O 16 I, 12 O, 16 O, 8 I/8 O et 8 I/2 O
Input voltage c 24 V c 24 V, c 48 V
Output voltage c 24 V and relay c 24 V, a 120 V and relay
Analogue inputs/outputs – Base units 4 I, 2 O et 6 I/2 O
Counting –
Other types –
Type of distributed I/O TBX CpP TBX DpS
Pages 3/40
3/28
3
Momentum distributed I/O Advantys OTB distributed I/O Advantys STB distributed I/O solution
Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet

3
Modbus Plus CANopen CANopen
Fipio Modbus SL (RS 485) Modbus Plus
DeviceNet Fipio
Profibus DP DeviceNet
INTERBUS Profibus DP
INTERBUS
1 base 1 module + 7 Twido I/O expansion module 32 modules
126 to 512 points depending on the type of bus or network

3.3
16 I, 32 I, 8 O, 16 O, 32 O, 10 I/8 O, 16 I/8 O, 16 I/12 O et 12 I/8 O, 8 I, 16 I, 8 O, 16 O, 4 I/4 O et 2 I, 4 I, 6 I, 2 O, 4 O, 6 O
16 I/16 O 16 I/8 O
c 24 V, a 120 V and a 230 V c 24 V, a 120 V c 24 V, a 115 V and a 230 V
c 24 V, a 120 V and a 230 V and relaiy c 24 V and relay c 24 V, a 115/230 V and relay
Bases 4 I, 8 I, 16 I and 4 O Modules 4 I, 8 I, 2 O et 2 I/1 O Modules 2 I and 2 O
Base 2 channels 10 kHz/200 kHz – Module 1 channel 40 kHz
6 I/3 O a 120 V and 1 Modbus port module – Parallel interface module for Tego Power
M1 processeur module (programming under Concept or applications
ProWORX) Parallel interface module for TeSys
modèle U starter-controllers
170 ADp OTB 1pO DM9LP r STB Dpp/App
Consult our catalogue “Momentum automation platform” Consult our catalog “Advantys OTB Consult our catalogue “Advantys STB
distributed I/O” distributed I/O”
r Available later
3/29
platform 3
TBX distributed discrete I/O modules
Applications Distributed discrete inputs on Fipio bus
Degree of protection IP 20
3
Voltage c 24 V c 48 V
Output current –
Modularity 16 channels 16 channels

(transistors)
3.3
Possible extension – 32 channels maximum per connection point
Proximity sensor compatibility Type 1 Type 2

IEC 1131
Protection against overloads
Additional functions Wiring check – Integrated –
Output fallback – – –
Programmable filter – – Integrated –
Latching states – – Integrated –
Type of modules TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX

CEP DES DES DES DES
1622 1622 16C22 16F22 1633
Pages 3/40
3/30
3
Distributed discrete outputs on Fipio bus Distributed discrete I/O on Fipio bus
3
c 24 V a 24/240 V Inputs c 24 V Inputs c 24 V Inputs
c 24 V c 24/48 V c 24 V Outputs c 24 V Outputs a 24/240 V, a120 V
c 24 V Outputs
a120 V
0.5 A 16 “F” 12 “F” 16 “F” 0.5 A 2A 0.5A 2 “F” 8 “F” 8 “F”
50 VA 100 VA 50 VA 50 VA 50 VA 100 VA
16 channels (transistors) 16 12 16 8 channels Inputs/ 16 8 Inputs 8 Inputs 8 Inputs

channels channels channels 8 channels Outputs channels channels channels channels
(Relay) (Relay) (Relay) (transistors) I/O 2 Outputs 8 Outputs 8 Outputs
program- channels channels channels 3.3
mables (Relay) (Relay) (Relay)
– 32 channels maxi per – 24 ou 32 channels maxi 32 ou 20 channels maxi per connection point
connection point per connection point
Type 2
Protected Not Protected Protected Not Protected Protected
– Integra- – Integrated –
ted
– Integra- – Integrated
ted
–
TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX TBX
CSP DSS DSS CSP DSS DSS DMS DMS DMS DMS DMS DMS
1622 1622 16C22 1625 1235 1625 16C22 16C222 16P22 1025 1625 16S44
3/31
General, Modicon Premium automation
General, functions
Decentralising I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers
while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure:
b The volume of wiring associated with discrete and analog sensors and actuators
is reduced.
b Mechanical constraints associated with wiring ducts are eliminated.
b The time required for designing and testing connections is reduced.
b Machine or plant availability is maximised.
b Installations are more flexible and meet requirements more closely due to the
number and type of modules.
b Protection for use in harsh environments, TBX IP 65 dust and damp proof models.
3 Dust and damp

Premium proof TBX
Fipio
TBX TBX
AS-Interface bus
TBX
ATV
3.3
TBX distributed I/O modules, dust and damp proof or not, are a simple response to
control system architectures distributed on a fieldbus. They are integrated into
Schneider Electric PLC X-Way communication architectures by means of the Fipio
fieldbus, which conforms to the Fip standard.
TBX distributed I/O modules are addressed by the Unity Pro or PL7 application
program as “In-rack” I/O, with which they can coexist.
TBX distributed I/O modules are connected to Premium bus manager processors or
Atrium PCX coprocessors via the Fipio fieldbus (maximum number of modules per
Fipio bus, see page 5/72).
The range of TBX distributed I/O modules includes the following modules:
b Monobloc or modular discrete I/O modules (IP 20), see page 3/40.
b Dust and damp proof monobloc discrete I/O modules (IP 65), see page 3/58.
b Dust and damp proof discrete I/O modules (IP 67), see page 3/68.
b Modular analog I/O modules (IP 20), see page 3/50.
TBX monobloc and modular modules IP 20

Protection of transistor and triac outputs
All transistor outputs have a protection mechanism which detects an overload or a

short-circuit on the load when an output is active. This type of fault is displayed and
deactivates the output. This fault is accessible to the application program when
testing the fault bits.
Reactivating transistor and triac outputs
When an output is no longer active following a fault, it must be reset in order to

reactivate it. It can be reactivated automatically or via a command from the
application program, depending on the selection made during the software
configuration.

3/32
Functions (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
TBX modular modules IP 20

TBX modular discrete modules have many functions, which are defined in the table below:
TBX reference DES 16C22 DSS 16C22 DES 16F22 DMS 16P22 DSS 1622 DMS 16C22
DSS 1235/1625 DMS 16C222
DMS 1025/1625
DMS 16S44
Wiring check
Programmable filtering
Latching states
Configuration of channels as I or O
Output fallback
Assignment of channels to application
tasks
Function available
Input wiring check
The input wiring check function continuously checks the quality of the connection
between the sensor and the distributed I/O module and discriminates between a
closed or open state of the sensor and a short-circuit or open circuit. When a fault 3
appears, the fault bit for the channel is activated before changing the input to state 0.
After the fault has disappeared, if the sensor is closed, the input changes to state 1
before the fault bit is deactivated.
The input wiring can be enabled as required for each channel during software
configuration.
Output wiring check

The output wiring check function continuously checks the quality of the connection
between the actuator and the module and detects a faulty actuator or its connection
(open circuit or short-circuit).
The output wiring check can be enabled as required for each channel during software
configuration. 3.3
Programmable filtering
This function offers the possibility to choose, during software configuration, the
filtering to be assigned to the inputs : normal or fast. Filtering can be configured for
groups of 8 channels (channels 0 to 7 or channels 8 to 15).
Fast filtering is analog, with a typical value of 0.7 ms.
Normal filtering is provided by a digital filter of 5 ms in conjunction with an analog filter
of 0.7 ms. By default, inputs are configured for fast filtering.
Latching stats
This function enables pulses lasting more than 2 ms on a rising edge to be
recognised. This information is latched during a PLC scan in order to be processed
in the Unity Pro or PL7 application program.
Configuring the channels as input or output

This function enables the channels to be defined as input channels or output
channels. This can be:
16 inputs maximum and 0 output (this is the default configuration),
15 inputs and 1 output,
8 inputs and 8 outputs.
Output fallback
All modular TBX module outputs can be set to a specific state on a fault. Several
choices are possible:
Fallback to 0 (default fallback position),
Fallback to 1,
Maintain state: the output maintains the state (1 or 0) which it was at when the fault
occurred,
Fallback value defined by the user program.
This choice is made for groups of 8 channels (channels 0 to 7 or channels 8 to 15)
during software configuration.
Assigning module channels to several tasks

Each base unit is functionally divided into groups of 8 consecutive channels
(channels 0 to 7 and channels 8 to 15), called functional channel groups. Each
channel group in a TBX module can be assigned, during software configuration, to a
specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task).

3/33
platform 3
Monobloc distributed I/O modules IP 20
TSX CEP/CSP monobloc I/O modules comprise:
1 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus via a TBX BLP 01
connector.
2 5 dip switches for coding the Fipio address together with an address coding label.
5 12 3 4 6
3 A location for the user's module/connection point identification label.
4 An I/O display window.
5 A screw clamp for earthing the module.
6 A removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the sensors,
preactuators and power supplies.
Modular distributed I/O modules IP 20

Base units
3 The base units are designed to be used with:

b A TBX LEP 020/030 communication module to constitute a base module.
b A TBX CBS 010 cover and cable to constitute an extension module.
They enable direct connection of sensors and preactuators. They are available as
input base units, reference TBX DES ppp, output base units,
reference TBX DSS ppp and mixed base units, reference TBX DMS ppp.
3 4 1 2 5
TBX DES/DSS/DMS modular I/O base units comprise:
1 A female 1/2 DIN connector for connection to the TSX LEP 020/030
communication module.
2 A removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the sensors,
preactuators and power supplies.
3 A screw clamp for earthing the base unit.
3.3 4 A location for the user's station/module identification label.
5 An access flap to 2 dip switches for adjusting the leakage current for the wiring
check and the filter times (slow or fast).
Fipio bus communication modules
The TBX LEP 020/030 communication modules enable dialogue with the PLC via the
Fipio bus. They are fixed to the base unit by 4 screws. A female 1/2 DIN connector,
protected by a flap, is used for connection to the extension base unit.
The Fipio address is assigned using 6 dip switches.
12 3 4 5 An I/O display window indicates locally the state of the module and of the base unit
and the extension I/O.
TBX LEP 020/030 communication modules comprise:

1 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus via a TBX BLP 01
connector.
2 5 dip switches for coding the Fipio address together with an address coding label.
4 An I/O display window.
5 An access flap for the female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting the extension base
unit.

3/34
platform 3
1 2 I/O display window
Each monobloc I/O module and communication module has an I/O display window
RUN DEF 4 which contains all the information to be displayed:
COM I/0 3
0 8 0 8
1 A RUN lamp (green), device operating.
1 9 1 9
2 10 2 10
3 11 3 11 2 A DEF lamp (red), steady if the device is faulty, flashing if there is a
4 12 4 12
5 13 5 13 communication fault on the Fipio bus.
6 14 6 14
7 15 7 15
3 A COM lamp (yellow), Fipio frame sent and received.
4 An I/O lamp (red), sensor or preactuator fault (short-circuit, open circuit, loss of
voltage).
5 6
5 Sixteen lamps 0 to 15 (red), steady when channel active, flashing if channel faulty.
6 Sixteen lamps 0 to 15 (red), steady when channel active, flashing if channel fault
3
(corresponds to extension module channels).
Cover and cable for extension base units
The TBX CBS 010 comprises a cover and a connecting cable.

The cable connects the extension base unit to the communication module.
The cover, attached to the base unit by 4 screws, protects the connector and gives
the extension module (base unit and cover) a similar size and shape to that of the
base module.
1 3 2 The TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit comprises:

3.3
1 A flexible connecting cable with two male 1/2 DIN moulded connectors for
connecting theTBX LEP 020/030 communication module to the base unit.
2 A cover to be fixed to the base unit.

3/35
Characteristics of modules Modicon Premium automation
and input base units platform 3
Type of modules TBX DES 1622 TBX DES 16C22 TBX DES 16F22
Modularity 16 16 16
Nominal input Voltage V c 24 c 24 c 24

values Current mA 15 7 7
Sensor supply (ripple included) V c 19…30 c 19…30 c 19…30
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 11 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA ≥ 6 for 11 V ≥ 6 for 11 V ≥ 6 for 11 V
At state 0 Voltage V <5 <5 <5
Current mA ≤2 ≤2 ≤2
Input impedance kΩ 1.6 3.4 3.4
Logic Positive Positive Positive

Response time Change from 0 to 1 Fast filter ms – 5…8.5 0.3…1.5 (1)
Slow filter ms 7…15.5 30…45 4.5…8.5 (1)
Change from 1 to 0 Fast filter ms – 5…8.5 0.3…1.5 (1)
3 Slow filter
Protection against polarity inversion Sensor supply
ms 7…15.5
Reverse parallel diode
30…45 4.5…8.5 (1)
Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W 4.1 2.6 2.6
Typical current consumed Module supply mA 20 40 (+10 if extension) 40 (+10 if extension)

Sensor supply mA 150 70 70
Type of input Resistive, conforms to Current sink, conforms to IEC 1131 type 2
IEC 1131 type 2
Sensor common To “+ve” of supply
Compatible output modules TBX transistor outputs TBX transistor outputs (2) TBX transistor outputs
External line Line resistance W < 500 with volt-free contact, < 100 with 2-wire proximity sensor
Open line leakage resistance kΩ > 30 with volt-free contact, > 100 with 2-wire proximity sensor
3.3
Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs Veff 1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min
and earth
Insulation resistance MΩ > 10 at c 500 V
Type of modules TBX CEP 1622 TBX DES 1633

Modularity 16 16
Nominal input Voltage V c 24 c 48

values Current mA 7 7
Sensor supply (ripple included) V c 19…30 c 38…60
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage V > 7 > 30
Current mA ≥ 2 for 11 V ≥ 6 for 30 V
At state 0 Voltage V < 5 < 10
Current mA ≤ 1.4 ≤ 2
Input impedance kΩ 3.4 6.7
Logic Positive Positive

Response time Change from 0 to 1 ms 5…11 5…11
Change from 1 to 0 ms 5…13 5…13
Protection against polarity Module supply Series diode –
inversion Sensor supply Reverse parallel diode
Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W 3.9 4.3
Typical current consumed Module supply mA 90 20

Sensor supply mA 70 (with 60 % load)
Type of input Resistive, conforms Current sink,

to IEC 1131 type 1 conforms to IEC 1131 type 2
Compatible output modules TBX transistor outputs
External line Line resistance W < 500 with V-free contact < 100 with 2-wire prox.sensor
Open line leakage resistance kΩ > 50 with V-free contact > 30 with V-free contact,
> 200 with 2-wire prox. sensor > 100 with 2-wire prox. sensor
and earth
Insulation resistance MΩ >10 at c 500 V
(1) Normal or fast programmable filter.
(2) Only with transistor outputs having wiring check function.
References: Connections:
pages 3/40 and 3/41 pages 3/42 to 3/44
3/36
Characteristics of modules Modicon Premium automation
and output base units platform 3
Type of modules TBX CSP 1622 TBX DSS 1622 TBX DSS 16C22
Modularity 16 16 16
Loads Voltage V c 24 c 24 c 24
Nominal current A 0.5 0.5 0.5
Tungsten filament lamp W 8 8 8
Limit values Voltage (ripple included) V c 19…30 c 19…30 c 19…30
Logic Positive outgoing current
Response time Change from 0 to 1 ms ≤1 ≤1 ≤1

Change from 1 to 0 ms ≤1 ≤1 ≤1
Leakage current At state 0 mA < 0.5 < 0.5 <2
Residual voltage At state 1 V < 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4
Built-in protection Against overloads Yes (thermal)

3
Against overvoltage Zener diode
Against polarity inversion Reverse parallel diode
Load common To “-ve” of supply
Typical current Module supply mA 100 30 30

consumed Alimentation préactionneurs mA 35 (except active outputs) 45 (exc. active outplus)
Compatibility d.c. Yes Yes Yes 3.3

input modules
Load impedance At state 1 W > 50 > 50 50 < z < 3000
and earth
Type of modules TBX CSP 1625 TBX DSS 1235 TBX DSS 1625
Modularity 16 12 16
Loads Voltage V a 24…264 a 24…264 a 24…264

c 24 c 24…48 c 24
Permissible d.c. DC-12 resistive W 24 0.2x106 manœuvres 50…24 V 0.25x106 manœuvres 24 0.2x106 manœuvres
power 50…48 V 0.5x106 manœuvres
DC-13 inductive W 10 106 manœuvres 25…24 V 0.25x106 manœuvres 10 106 manœuvres
25…48 V 0.15x106 manœuvres
Permissible a.c. AC-12 resistive A 1-110/220 V 0.2x106 man. 2-110/220 V 0.5x106 man. 1-110/220 V 0.2x106 man.
current 0.5-110/220 V 2x106 man. 1-110/220 V 1.5x106 man. 0.5-110/220 V 2x106 man.
1-24/48 V 0.5x106 man. 2-24/48 V 0.5x106 man. 1-24/48 V 0.5x106 man.
2-24 V 0.2x106 manœuvres 4-24 V 0.15x106 manœuvres 2-24 V 0.2x106 manœuvres
AC-15 inductive A 0.5-24/48 V 106 manœuvres 1-24/48 V 106 manœuvres 0.5-24/48 V 106 manœuvres
1-24 V 0.2 106 manœuvres 0.5-48 V 2x106 manœuvres (1) 1-24 V 0.2 106 manœuvres (2)
Thermal current A 3 7 3
Typical current Module supply (with 60 % load) mA 195 130…24 V 125

consumed 70…48 V
Response time Change from 0 to 1 ms < 10 < 10 < 10

Change from 1 to 0 ms < 20 < 20 < 20
Built-in Against overloads and short -circuits No

protection Against inductive overvoltage No (for a use an RC or GMOV, and for c use a reverse diode)
Compatibility d.c. Yes

input modules
and earth
(1) 100 VA - 110/240 V 106 operations, 20 VA - 110/240 V 5X106 operations.

(2) 50 VA - 110/220 V 106 operations, 10 VA - 48/220 V 107 operations.
3/37
Characteristics of I/O base Modicon Premium automation
units platform 3
Type of modules TBX DMS 1025 TBX DMS 1625 TBX DMS 16S44
Input modularity 8 8 8
Nominal Voltage V c 24 c 24 a 120

input values Current mA 15 15 15
Sensor supply (ripple included) V 19.2…30 19.2…30 92…132
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 11 ≥ 11 > 74
Current mA ≥ 6 for 11 V ≥ 6 for 11 V 6
At state 0 Voltage V <5 <5 < 20
Current mA ≤2 ≤2 4
Input impedance kΩ 1.6 1.6 10
3 Logic Positive Positive Positive
Response time Change from 0 to 1 5…15 5…15
Change from 1 to 0 5…17 5…17
Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load) W 2.6 3.7 6
Typical current consumed Module supply mA 35 (+10 if extension) 80 (+10 if extension) 60
Type of input Resistive, conforms to standard IEC 1131 type 2
3.3 Sensor common To “+ve” of supply
External line Line resistance kW < 500 with volt-free contact, < 100 with 2-wire proximity sensor
Open line leakage resistance kΩ > 30 with volt-free contact, > 100 with 2-wire proximity sensor
Outputs modularity 2 8 8
Loads Voltage V a 24…264 a 24…264 a 93…132

c 24 c 24
Permissible DC 12 W 24 0.2x106 manœuvres –
d.c. power resistive
DC 13 W 10 106 manœuvres –
inductive
Triac W – 95 per output at 60° C1 at 25° C
Relay Permissible AC 12 A 1 - 110/220 V 0.2x106 operating cycles –

a.c. current resistive 0.5 - 110/220 V 2x106 operating cycles
1 - 24/48 V 0.5x106 operating cycles
2 - 24 V 0.2x106 operating cycles
AC 15 A 0.5 - 24/48 V 106 operating cycles –

inductive 1 - 24 V 0.2 106 operating cycles
Thermal current A 3 3 –
Response time Change from 0 to 1 ms ≤ 10 ≤ 10 ≤ 80
Change from 1 to 0 ms ≤ 20 ≤ 20 ≤ 20
Built-in protection Against overloads and No No Yes

short -circuits
Against inductive overvoltage No (for a use RC or GMOV, and for c use a reverse diode)
Compatibility input modules d.c. Yes No
Isolation Dielectric strength between Veff 1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

inputs and earth
(1) 50 VA - 110/220 V 106 operating cycles, 10 VA - 48/220 V 107 operating cycles.

3/38
Characteristics of I/O base Modicon Premium automation
units (continued) platform 3
Type of modules TBX DMS 16C22 TBX DMS 16C222 TBX DMS 16P22
Input modularity 8 8 8…16
Nominal input values Voltage V c 24 c 24 c 24

Nominal current mA 7 7 15
Sensor supply (ripple V c 19.2…30 c 19.2…30 c 19.2…30
included)
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage V ≥7 ≥7 ≥ 11
Current mA ≥ 6 for 7 V ≥ 6 for 11 V ≥ 6 for 11 V
At state 0 Voltage V <5 <5 <5

Current mA ≤2 ≤ 2.5 ≤2
Input impedance kΩ 3.4 3.4 1.6
Response
time
Change from 0 to 1 Fast filter
Slow filter
ms
ms
5…8.5
30…45
5…8.5
30…45
–
5…10
3
Change from 1 to 0 Fast filter ms 5…8.5 5…8.5 –
Slow filter ms 30…45 30…45 5…12
Protection against polarity inversion Sensor supply Diode inverse en parallèle
Typical current consumed Module supply mA 40 (+ 10 if extension) 45 (+ 10 if extension) 30

Type of input Current sink, conforms to conforms to IEC 1131 type 2 Resistive, conforms to
IEC 1131 type 2
Input common To “+ve” of supply
3.3
External line Line resistance kΩ < 500 with volt-free contact
< 100 with 2-wire proximity sensors
Open line leakage resistance kΩ 200 or 500 > 30 with 2-wire prox. sen.
> 100 with 2-wire prox. sen.
Outputs modularity 8 8 0…8
Loads Voltage V c 24 c 24 c 24
Nominal current A 0.5 2 (1) 0.5
Tungsten filament lamp W 8 15 8
Limit values Voltage (ripple included) V c 19…30 c 19…30 c 19…30
Response time Change from 0 to 1 ms ≤ 1.5 ≤1 ≤1
Change from 1 to 0 ms ≤ 1.5 ≤1 ≤1
Leakage current At state 0 mA < 2.3 < 2.5 < 0.5
Residual voltage At state 1 V < 0.4 < 0.8 < 0.4
Built-in protection Against overloads Yes (thermal) Yes (current limitation) Yes (thermal)
Against overvoltage Yes (Zener diode) Yes (Zener diode) Yes (Zener diode)
Against polarity inversion Yes (reverse diode) Yes (reverse diode) Yes (reverse diode)
Load common To “-ve” of supply
Compatibility input modules d.c. Yes (if z < 3 kΩ) Yes
Load impedance At state 1 W 50 < z < 3000 > 50
Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs and earth Veff 1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min
(1) Temperature derating: total output current per base unit 16 A at 30 °C, 8 A at 60 °C.
3/39
platform 3
Monobloc input module (IP 20)

Type of Input voltage Modularity IEC 1131 2 Reference Weight
current (no. of chan.) conformity kg
c 24 V 16 Type 1 TBX CEP 1622 0.820
Monobloc output modules (IP 20)

Type of Output voltage Modularity Channel Reference Weight
current (no. of chan.) characteristics kg
c 24 V 16 0.5 A protected TBX CSP 1622 0.880
transistor
a ou c a 24/240 V 16 50 VA not TBX CSP 1625 0.960

TBX CpP 16pp relay c 24 V protected
Input base units (IP 20) (1)

Type of Input voltage Modularity IEC 1131 2 Reference Weight
3 current
c 24 V
(no. of chan.) conformity
16 Type 2 TBX DES 1622
kg
0.510
16, contrôle de Type 2 TBX DES 16C22 0.510

filerie
TBX DES 16pp 16, filtrage Type 2 TBX DES 16F22 0.510
progr.
48 V 16 Type 2 TBX DES 1633 0.510
Output base units (IP 20) (1)

Type of Output voltage Modularity Channel Reference Weight
current (no. of chan.) characteristics kg
c 24 V 16 0.5 A protected TBX DSS 1622 0.580
transistor
3.3
0.5 A TBX DSS 16C22 0.580
protected
wiring check
a ou c a 24/240 V 12 100 VA not TBX DSS 1235 0.610
TBX DSS 16pp relay c 24/48 V protected
a 24/240 V 16 50 VA not TBX DSS 1625 0.610

c 24 V protected
I/O base units (IP 20) (1)

Type of Input Output Modularity IEC 1131 2 Reference Weight
current voltage voltage (no. of chan.) conformity kg
c c 24 V c 24 V 8 E/8 S 0.5 A Type 2 TBX DMS 16C22 0.530
transistor protected
8 E/8 S 2 A Type 2 TBX DMS 16C222 0.530

protected
Programmable Type 2 TBX DMS 16P22 0.530

de 16 E/0 S à
8 E/8 S 0.5 A
protected
a ou c c 24 V a 8 E/2 S (2) Type 2 TBX DMS 1025 0.540
relay 24/240 V
c 24 V
8 E/8 S (2) Type 2 TBX DMS 1625 0.570
a triac a 120 V a 120 V 8 E/8 S (3) Type 2 TBX DMS 16S44 0.570
50/60 Hz
(1) Requires the TBX LEP 020/030 communication module to constitute a base, requires the
TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit to constitute an extension.
(2) 50 VA outputs, not protected.
Characteristics: Dimensions:
pages 3/36 to 3/39 page 3/45
3/40
platform 3
Fipio communication modules

Description Connection Reference Weight
kg
Communication Fipio fieldbus on TBX discrete or analog TBX LEP 030 0.280
modules for I/O IP 20 I/O base units
base units
TBX LEP 020/030 Fipio fieldbus on TBX discrete IP 20 TBX LEP 020 0.280
I/O base units
Connection Tap link or daisy-chained on Fipio bus TBX BLP 01 0.080

terminal block
Accessories (1)
TBX BLP 01 Description Use Sold in lots of Unit Reference Weight
kg
Cover and
connecting cable
For extension on TBX 1
base units
TBX CBS 010 0.100 3
Earthing strip For connecting cable 5 TBX GND 015 0.060

TBX CBS 010
shielding on TBX
terminal block
Inter-terminal Channel commons on 5 TBX RV 015 0.020

connection comb TBX terminal block
TBX GND 015 (9 terminals per comb)
8-channel simulator 8 inputs displayed 1 TBX SEP 08 0.120 3.3

with/without line
check function
TBX RV 015
8 inputs displayed 1 TBX SSP 08 0.140
(1) For Fipio bus connection accessories, see pages 5/86 and 5/87.
Characteristics: Dimensions:
pages 3/36 to 3/39 page 3/45
3/41
platform 3
Monobloc I/O modules

TBX CEP 1622 input c 24 V TBX CSP 1622 output c 24 V TBX CSP 1625 relay output
40 40 40
+IS 39 +OS 39 NC 39
ÐIS 38 ÐOS 38 NC 38 Preactuator
I15 37 O15 37 O15 37 supply 1
+CS 36 +CA 36 C14,15 36
I14 35 O14 35 O14 35
For 3-wire prox. sen.
-CS 34 -CA 34 NC 34
I13 33 O13 33 O13 33
+CS 32 +CA 32 C12,13 32
I12 31 O12 31 O12 31
-CS 30 -CA 30 NC 30
I11 29 O11 29 O11 29
+CS 28 +CA 28 C10,11 28 Preactuator
I10 27 O10 27 O10 27 supply 2
For 3-wire prox. sen. -CA NC
-CS 26 26 26
I9 25 O9 25 O9 25
+CS 24 +CA 24 C8,9 24
I8 O8 O8
3
23 23 23
-CS 22 – -CA 22 NC 22
I7 21 3-wire O7 21 O7 21
+ +CA
+CS 20 + prox. 20 C6,7 20
I6 19 sen. O6 19 O6 19
ÐCS 18 – -CA 18 NC 18
For 3-wire prox.
–
I5 17
sen. 2-wire O5 17 O5 17
+
+CS 16 + prox. +CA 16 C4,5 16
I4 15 – sen. O4 15 O4 15
ÐCS 14 For 3-wire prox. sen. -CA 14 NC 14
I3 13 O3 13 O3 13
+CS 12 +CA 12 C2,3 12
I2 11 O2 11 O2 11
For 3-wire prox. sen. -CA NC
ÐCS 10 10 10
I1 9 O1 9 O1 9
+CS 8 +CA 8 12 A fuse C0,1 8
Preactuator
I0 7 O0 7 O0 7
supply 0
ÐCS 6 For 3-wire prox. sen. ÐCA 6 N1 6
Preactuator
+
3.3 +IS
ÐIS
5
4
2 A fuse
+
–Sensor supply
+OS
ÐOS
5
4 –
supply
c 24 V (1)
NC
N1
5
4
+SV 3 + c 24 V +SV 3 + +SV 3 + Module supply
2 Module supply 2
Module supply 2 c 24 V
– c 24 V ÐSV – c 24 V ÐSV –
ÐSV 1 1 1
Input base units

TBX DES 1622/16C22/16F22 input c 24 V TBX DES 1633 input c 48 V
40 40
+IS 39 +IS 39
ÐIS 38 ÐIS 38
I15 37 I15 37
+CS 36 +CS 36
I14 35 I14 35
-CS 34 For 3-wire prox. sen. -CS 34 For 3-wire prox. sen.
I13 33 I13 33
+CS 32 +CS 32
I12 31 I12 31
-CS 30 For 3-wire prox. sen. -CS 30 For 3-wire prox. sen.
I11 29 I11 29
+CS 28 +CS 28
I10 27 I10 27
-CS 26 For 3-wire prox. sen. -CS 26
I9 25 I9 25
+CS 24 +CS 24
I8 23 I8 23
-CS 22 For 3-wire prox. sen.
– -CS 22
–
I7 21 I7 21
+ 3-wire + 3-wire
+CS 20 + +CS 20 +
prox. prox.
I6 19 I6 19
– sen. – sen.
ÐCS 18
For 3-wire prox.– ÐCS 18
I5 17 I5 17
For 3-wire prox.–
sen. + 2-wire sen.
+CS 16 + +CS 16
+ 2-wire
prox. +
prox.
I4 15 – sen. I4 15 –
ÐCS 14 For 3-wire prox. ÐCS 14
sen.
I3 13 sen. Volt-free I3 13
+CS 12
contact +CS 12
I2 11
(2) I2 11
ÐCS 10 For 3-wire prox. ÐCS 10 For 3-wire prox. sen.
I1 9 sen. I1 9
+CS 8 +CS 8
I0 7 I0 7
For 3-wire prox.
ÐCS 6
Sensor supply ÐCS 6 For 3-wire prox. sen.
sen. + Sensor supply
+IS 5
2 A fuse c 24 V +IS 5 +
ÐIS 4 – ÐIS 4 – c 48 V
+SV 3 + Module supply +SV 3 +
Module supply
2 c 24 V 2
c 48 V
ÐSV 1 – ÐSV 1 –
(1) Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to sensor supply.

(2) With TBX DES 16C22.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

pages 3/36 to 3/39 pages 3/40 and 3/41 page 3/45
3/42
platform 3
Output base units

TBX DSS 1622/16C22 output c 24 V TBX DSS 1235 output relay TBX DSS 1625 output relay
40 Supply. 1 Preactuator
40 40
Preactuator supply 1
+OS 39 NC 39 NC 39
ÐOS 38 NC 38 N NC 38 N
O15 37 O11,NC 37 O15 37
+CA 36 C11 36
Ph C14,15 36 Ph
O14 35 O11,NO 35 O14 35
-CA 34 NC 34 NC 34
O13 33 O10,NC 33 O13 33
+CA 32 C10 32 C12,13 32
O12 31 O10,NO 31 O12 31 Preactuator
-CA 30 NC 30 4 relay outputs NC 30 supply 2
O11 29 O9,NC 29 N/O and N/C O11 29
+CA 28 C9 28 C10,11 28 Ph
O10 27 O9,NO 27 O10 27
-CA 26 NC 26 NC 26 N
O9 25 O8,NC 25 O9 25
+CA 24 C8 24 C8,9 24
O8 O8,NO
3
23 23 O8 23
-CA 22 NC 22 NC 22
O7 21 O7 21 O7 21
+CA 20 C6,7 20 C6,7 20
O6 19 O6 19 O6 19
-CA 18 NC 18 NC 18
O5 17 O5 17 O5 17
+CA 16 C4,5 16 C4,5 16
O4 15 O4 15
8 relay outputs N/O O4 15
-CA 14 NC 14 NC 14
O3 13 O3 13 O3 13
+CA 12 C2,3 12 C2,3 12
O2 11 O2 11 O2 11
-CA 10 NC 10 NC 10
O1 9 O1 9 O1 9
+CA 8 C0,1 8 Ph C0,1 8 Ph
O0 7 12 A fuse O0 7
Preactuator O0 7 Preactuator
ÐCA 6 N1 6
supply 0 N1 6 supply 0
+ Preactuator
+OS
ÐOS
5
4 – supply
NC
N1
5
4
NC
N1
5
4 N
3.3
+SV + c 24 V (1) N
3 +SV 3 + +SV 3 +
2
Module supply 2 Module supply Module supply
2
c 24 V –c 24 V or 48 V
ÐSV 1 – ÐSV 1 ÐSV 1 –c 24 V
(1) Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to preactuator supply.

3/43
platform 3
I/O base units

TBX DMS 16C22 c 24 V 0.5 A I/O TBX DMS 16C222 c 24 V 2 A I/O TBX DMS 16P22 programmable c 24 V 0.5 A I/O
40 40 40
+OS 39 + NC 39 +S 39
ÐOS 38 – ÐOS 38 – Preactuator ÐS 38
O15 37 O15 37 supply I/O15 37
+CA 36 +OS14,15 36 + c 24 V (1) +C 36
O14 35 O14 35 20 A fuse I/O14 35
-CA 34 NC 34 -C 34
O13 33 O13 33 I/O13 33
+CA 32 +OS12,13 32 +C 32
O12 31 O12 31 I/O12 31
0 to 8
-CA 30 NC 30 -C 30
outputs
O11 29 O11 29 I/O11 29
max.
+CA 28 +OS10,11 28 +C 28
O10 27 O10 27 I/O10 27 For 3-wire prox. sen.
-CA 26 NC 26 -C 26
O9 25 O9 25 I/O9 25
+CA 24 +OS8,9 24 +C 24
O8 23 O8 23 I/O8 23
3 -CA
I7 21
22 –
+
NC
I7 21
22 –
+ 3-wire pro
-C
I7 21
22 For 3-wire prox. sen.
+CS6,7 20 + +CS6,7 20 + +C 20
I6 19 I6 19 sen. I6 19
– – For 3-wire prox. sen.
ÐCS 18
For 3-wire prox. – ÐCS 18 ÐC 18 –
I5 I5 – 3-wire
17
sen. 17
2-wire pro I5 17
+ + + prox.
+CS4,5 16 + +CS4,5 16 + +C 16 +
sen. sen.
I4 15 – I4 15 – I4 15
ÐCS 14 ÐCS 14 ÐC 14 –
I3 For 3-wire prox.
– 2-wire
I3 13 13 Volt-free I3 13
sen. + prox.
+CS2,3 12 +CS2,3 12 contact +C 12 +
I2 11 I2 11 I2 11
sen.
–
ÐCS 10 ÐCS 10 ÐC 10 For 3-wire prox. sen.
I1 9 I1 9 I1 9
+CS0,1 8 +CS0,1 8 +CS 8
I0 7 I0 7 I0 7
ÐCS 6 ÐCS 6 1 A fuse ÐC 6
1 A fuse 6 A fuse
+IS 5 + +IS 5 + Sensor supply +S 5 + Preactuator and
3.3 ÐIS 4 – ÐIS 4 – c 24 V (1) ÐS 4 – sensor supply
+SV 3 + +SV 3 + +SV 3 + c 24 V (1)
Module supply Module supply
2 2 2 Module supply
c 24 V c 24 V
ÐSV 1 – ÐSV 1 – ÐSV 1 – c 24 V
TBX DMS 1025 relay I/O TBX DMS 1625 relay I/O TBX DMS 16S44 triac I/O
40 40 Preactuator
40
Supply a 120 V
NC 39 NC 39 supply N Preactuator (2)
39
NC 38 NC 38 N 38 Ph
NC 37 O15 37
O15 37
NC 36 C14,15 36 Ph
C15 36
NC 35 O14 35
O14 35
NC 34 NC 34
C14 34
NC 33 O13 33
O13 33
NC 32 C12,13 32
C13 32
NC 31 O12 31
O12 31
NC 30 NC 30
C12 30
NC 29 O11 29
O11 29
NC 28 C10,11 28
C11 28
NC 27 O10 27
O10 27
Preactuator NC 26
NC 26 C10 26
supply O9 25
O9 25 O9 25
C8,9 24 C8,9 24
C9 24
O8 23 O8 23
O8 23
NC 22 NC 22 – C8 22
I7 21 I7 21 3-wire
+ prox. I7 21
+CS 20 +CS 20 + C 20
I6 19 I6 19 sen.
For 3-wire prox. sen. –
I6 19
ÐCS 18 – ÐCS 18 For 3-wire prox. C 18
– 2-wire
I5 17 I5 17 sen. + I5 17
+ prox.
+CS 16 + +CS 16 + C 16
sen.
I4 15 I4 15 – I4 15
ÐCS 14 – ÐCS 14 For 3-wire prox. sen.
For 3-wire prox. C 14
I3 13 – I3 13
sen. + I3 13
+CS 12 + +CS 12
C 12
I2 11 – I2 11
I2 11
ÐCS 10 ÐCS 10
C 10
I1 9 I1 9
I1 9
+CS 8 +CS 8 C 8
I0 7 I0 7
I0 7
For 3-wire prox. sen. ÐCS 6 For 3-wire prox. sen.
ÐCS 6 C 6
+IS 5 + Sensor supply +IS 5 + Sensor supply Sensor supply
5
ÐIS 4 – c 24 V ÐIS 4 – c 24 V a 120 V
4
+SV 3 + +SV 3 +
3
2 2 Module supply 2
Module supply
ÐSV 1 – ÐSV 1 – c 24 V
1
a 120 V
(1) Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to preactuator and sensor supplies.

(2) 7 A fuse included in the base unit.

3/44
Dimensions, Modicon Pemium automation
mounting platform 3
Dimensions
TBX CEP/CSP modules
TBX DES/DSS/DMS base units with
TBX LEP 020/030 or TBX CBS 010 module
235
221
6
33
54
87
72 210
3
Mounting
TBX CEP/CSP/DES/DSS/DMS TBX CEP/CSP/DES/DSS/DMS
on AM1 PA/PB/PC perforated mouting plate on AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 rail
221
27
54
3.3
72 AF1-EA4 81,5
Fixed by 3 screws with captive washer M4 x 16 AF1-VA416
Nota : In order to ensure correct operation of TBX modules in severe electromagnetic conditions, the modules must be mounted on metal supports correctly
connected to earth. The base module and the extension module must be installed on the same plate, or the same rail, or on rails connected to each other by a metal
crossbar.
Mounting vertically Mounting side by side
13 mini
25 maxi
Mounting one above by other
13 mini
25 maxi
40 mini
80 maxi

3/45
platform 3
TBX distributed analog I/O modules
Applications Distributed analog inputs on Fipio bus
Type of I/O High level inputs Temperature probe Thermocouple inputs

inputs
Type Voltage Current Pt 100, Pt 1000, B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
3 Ni 1000
Range ±5V 0…20 mA – ± 20 mV

± 10 V 4…20 mA ± 50 mV
± 200 mV
± 500 mV
Modularity 4 channels
Isolation a 500 V ms between channels

a 500 V ms between channels and earth
a 1500 V ms between supply and channels
3.3 a 1500 V ms between supply and earth
Acquisition period for the complete module 400 ms in 50 Hz mode (4 channels)

340 ms in 60 Hz mode (4 channels)
Resolution 12 bits + sign
Restitute time
Input filtering 1st order with user-definable time constant
Fallback position
Type of module TBX AES 400
Pages 3/51
3/46
3
Distributed analog I/O on Fipio bus Distributed analog outputs on Fipio bus
Voltage/current inputs Voltage/current outputs Voltage/current outputs
Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current
3
0…5 V 0…20 mA ± 10 V 4…20 mA ± 10 V 4…20 mA
± 10 V 4…20 mA 0…20 mA 0…20 mA
6 channels 2 channels
No isolation between input channels a 1500 V ms between output channels

a 1500 V ms between input channels and output channels
a 1500 V ms between supply and channels
a 1500 V ms between supply and earth 3.3
42.4 ms
12 bits (including sign) 11 bits + sign 11 bits 11 bits + sign 11 bits
4 ms
At zero value on internal module fault

At the last value or at a value defined by the user
on Fipio communication fault
TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200
3/47
platform 3
Decentralising the I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine
manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised
structure.
Distributed analog I/O modules complete the TBX range of distributed I/O modules.
They provide general discrete I/O module functions with the benefit of:
b Connection to the Fipio fieldbus.
b Wiring system.
b Size.
Distributed analog I/O base units offer a wide range of analog inputs for acquisition
of high and low level measurements, both voltage and current.
Three modular base units are available:
b 4 multi-range inputs, TBX AES 400.
b 6 high level inputs (voltage/current), 2 outputs (voltage/current), TBX AMS 620.
b 2 outputs (voltage/current), TBX ASS 200.
3 A TBX LEP 030 communication module is required when 1 or 2 analog base units
(base or extension) are connected at any Fipio fieldbus connection point. The
number of analog channels for TBX base units of the same type is limited to1008.
Description
Modular analog base units
1 Distributed analog I/O base units comprise:
1 32-way female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting to the TBX LEP 030
communication module.
3.3 2 Removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the analog
sensors and actuators.
2
3 Screw clamp for earthing the base unit.
3 4 4 Location for user's identification label.
Fipio communication module
2 The TBX LEP 030 communication module comprises:
1 9-way male SUB-D type connector for connecting to the Fipio fieldbus.
2 Five dip switches for setting the Fipio address together with an address coding
5 label.
3 Location for the user's module/connection point identification label.
4 I/O display window.
1 3 4 5 Access cover for 32-way female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting the Extension
base unit.
Cover and cable for extension modules
1 The TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit comprises:
1 Flexible connecting cable with two 32-way male 1/2 DIN moulded connectors for
connecting the base unit to the TBX LEP 030 communication module.
2 2 Cover to be fixed to the discrete or analog I/O base unit.
3 Location for the user's module/connection point identification label.
Functions: Characteristics: References: Connections:

page 3/49 page 3/50 page 3/51 page 3/51
3/48
platform 3
Modular TBX base unit combinations
Analog base units require a TBX LEP 030 communication module for connecting the
connection point to the Fipio fieldbus.
As they are modular in structure, discrete and analog base units can be used in the
following combinations:
Mix of modules (1) Base Extension

Communicator Base unit Base unit Cover
TBX LEP 030 TBX ApS ppp – –
TBX LEP 030 TBX ApS ppp (1) TBX DpS ppp (1) TBX CBS 010
TBX LEP 030 TBX ApS ppp TBX ApS ppp TBX CBS 010
TBX LEP 030 TBX DpS ppp (1) TBX ApS ppp (1) TBX CBS 010
Base Extension
3
(1) In the case of the Premium automation platform, the combinations of base units and
extensions on any one Fipio connection point must be of the same type (it is not possible to
mix discrete I/O and analog I/O).
Functions
TBX AES 400 analog modules, with 4 high level (voltage or current) or low level
(temperature probe or thermocouple) isolated inputs, TBX AMS 620, with 6 high level
isolated inputs (voltage or current) / 2 isolated outputs (voltage or current), and
TBX ASS 200, with 2 isolated outputs (voltage or current) offer the following
functions:
3.3
Input channels
b Measurement acquisition
v selection of the input range for each channel and first order filtering with
user-configurable time constant.
b Processing
v automatic linearization (TBX AES 400),
v integral cold junction compensation for thermocouples (TBX AES 400).
b Operation
v conversion of measurements into standard units or temperatures whose
parameters can be defined by the user.
b Checks
v recalibration and self-calibration of each channel in relation to an internal reference
(TBX AMS 620),
v checking input value overruns (± 5% of the selected range),
v checking the sensor link.
Output channels
b Output range selection

v voltage or current for each module channel.
b Output fallback
On a communication fault with the PLC, the user can select:
v fallback of the output to a defined value,
v to maintain the output at its previous value,
v On an internal module fault, all the outputs on the same module fall back to zero.
b Output protection
Output modules are protected against:
v open circuit overloads,
v short-circuits.
All these parameters are selected during software configuration.
Description: Characteristics: References: Connections:

3/49
platform 3
Type of base unit TBX AES 400 TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200
Analog input modularity 4 channels 6 channels –
Input ranges mV ± 20 – –
mV ± 50 – –
mV ± 200 – –
mV ± 500 – –
V ±5 0…5 –
V ± 10 –
mA 0…20 –
mA 4…20 –
Temperature probes Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 – –
Thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T – –
Special characteristics
Self-calibration No Yes –
Automatic linearization Yes Yes –
Resolution 12 bits + sign 12 bits –
3 Acquisition
period
For entire module ms For 4 channels:
400 (50 Hz mode)
For 6 channels: 42.4 –
340 (60 Hz mode)

Rejection Serial mode dB 50 – –
(50 Hz) Common mode dB > 130 for ± 20 mV – –
dB > 90 for ± 10 V – –
Maximum error at 25 °C/60 °C ± 10 V % FS 0.23/0.99 0.20/0.29 –
0…5 V % FS 0.23/0.99 0.15/0.22 –
0…20 mA % FS 0.23/0.99 0.25/0.43 –
4…20 mA % FS 0.23/0.99 0.25/0.43 –
Low level % FS 0.90/1.69 (1) – –
External Use as 4…20 or 0…20 mA Ω 250 at 0.1% – –
resistors parallel on the input
3.3 (supplied with
TBX AES 400
module)
Permitted overload Voltage V ± 30 ± 30 ± 30
Current mA ± 25 ± 30 ± 30
Isolation (2) Between input channels V rms 500 Non-isolated –
Between output channels V rms – 1500 1500
Between channels and earth V rms 500 1500 1500
Between channels and supply V rms 1500 1500 1500
Between supply and earth V rms 1500 – –
Common mode voltage (2) permitted during V c ± 100 – –
operation between channel and earth and between V rms 75 150 –
channels
Temperature Operation °C 0…55
Storage °C - 25…+ 70
Type of base unit TBX AES 400 TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200
Analog output modularity – 2 channels
Output ranges Voltage V – ± 10
Current mA – 4…20, 0…20
Resolution Voltage – 11 bits + sign
Current – 11 bits
Refresh period Per channel ms – 5
Load impedance Voltage Ω – ≥ 1000
Current Ω – ≤ 600
Leakage current Current µA – 50 (0…20 mA)
Maximum error at 25 °C/60 °C Voltage % FS – 0.45/0.75
Current % FS – 0.52/0.98
(1) Accuracy at low level covers the whole ± 20 mV, ± 50 mV range, the middle of the range for
Pt 100, Pt 1000 and Ni 1000, with any orientation, and the middle of the range for B, E, J, K,
N, R, S and T thermocouples.
(2) Voltage in volts rms 50/60 Hz for 1 minute.
Description: Characteristics: References: Connections:

3/50
connections, platform 3
dimensions TBX distributed analog I/O modules
References
Analog base units (1)
Type of input/output Number of Ranges Reference Weight
channels kg
Input 4 channels ± 5 V, ± 10 V, ± 20 mV, ± 50 mV, ± 200 mV TBX AES 400 0.280
12 bits + sign (2) 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA, Low level ± 500 mV
Thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
TBX ApS pp0 Temp.probes Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000
Isolated output 11 bits 2 channels ± 10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA TBX ASS 200 0.280
High level input 6 channels ± 10 V, 0…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA TBX AMS 620 0.280
12 bits
isolated output 11 bits 2 channels ± 10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
Communication module and accessories

Description Connection Reference Weight
kg
Fipio communication module Fipio fieldbus on TBX base units TBX LEP 030 0.280 3
Cable connector Tap link or daisy chain to Fipio fieldbus TBX BLP 01 0.080
Replacement part
TBX LEP 030 Set of 4 resistors Adaptation for TBX AES 400 current range TSX AAK2 0.100
250 Ω ± 0.1 %
(1) Requires TBX LEP 030 communication module to constitute a base unit, requires
TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit to constitute an extension.
(2) Set of 4 resistors TSX AAK2 for adaptation to current range supplied.
Connections, dimensions (1)
TBX AES 400 input TBX AMS 620 input/output (3) TBX ASS 200 output
3.3
40 40 40
NC 39 NC 39 NC 39
-R3 38 ch. 3- NC 38 NC 38
NC 37 NC 37 NC 37
+R3 36 ch. 3+ NC 36 NC 36
NC 35 Terminals for NC 35 NC 35
-R2 34 ch. 2- connecting 250 Ω Com7 34 Output voltage reference Com1 34 Voltage reference
NC 33 resistor when using Com7 33 Channel 7 Com1 33 Channel 1
+R2 32 ch. 2+ the channel in O7i 32 Channel 7, current output O1i 32 Channel 1, current output
NC 31 0…20 mA or O7u 31 Channel 7, voltage output O1u 31 Channel 1, voltage output
-R1 30 ch. 1- 4…20 mA current NC 30 NC 30
NC 29 range NC 29 NC 29
+R1 28 ch. 1+ Com6 28 Output voltage reference Com0 28 Voltage reference
NC 27 Com6 27 Channel 6 Com0 27 channel 0
-R0 26 ch. 0- O6i 26 Channel 6, current output O0i 26 Channel 0, current output
NC 25 O6u 25 Channel 6, voltage output O0u 25 Channel 0, voltage output
+R0 24 ch. 0+ Com 24 Input voltage NC 24
NC 23 Com 23 reference NC 23
NC 22 R5 22 Channel 5, current input NC 22
NC 21 Terminal - current source (2) I5 21 Channel 5, voltage input NC 21
-IS 20 channel 3- R4 20 Channel 4, current input NC 20
-I3 19 Channels 2 to 3 daisy chained(2) I4 19 Channel 4, voltage input NC 19
2/3 18 channel 3+ Com 18 Input voltage NC 18
+I3 17 Channels 2 to 3 daisy chained(2) Com 17 reference NC 17
2/3 16 channel 2- R3 16 Channel 3, current input NC 16
-I2 15 Channels 1 to 2 daisy chained I3 15 Channel 3, voltage input NC 15
1/2 14 (2) R2 14 Channel 2, current input NC 14
+I2 13 channel 2+ I2 13 Channel 2, voltage input NC 13
1/2 12 Channels 1 to 2 daisy chained Com 12 Input voltage NC 12
-I1 11 (2) Com 11 reference NC 11
0/1 10 channel 1- R1 10 Channel 1, current input NC 10
+I1 9 Channels 0 to 1 daisy chained I1 9 Channel 1, voltage input NC 9
0/1 8 (2) R0 8 Channel 0, current input NC 8
-I0 7
channel 1+ I0 7 Channel 0, voltage input NC 7
+IS 6
Channels 0 to 1 daisy chained NC 6 NC 6
-I0 5
(2) NC 5 NC 5
NC 4
channel 0- NC 4 NC 4
+SV 3 + +SV 3 + Power supply +SV 3 + Base unit
Terminal + current source (2)
2 2 24/48 V 2 Power supply 24/48 V
channel 0+
–SV 1 – –SV 1 – –SV 1 –
Power supply
24/48 V
(1) Dimensions the same as for TBX discrete I/O module: see page 3/45.
(2) Inputs to be used for wiring temperature probes.
(3) To use an input channel as a current input, link terminals li and Ri of the corresponding channel.
Description: Functions: Characteristics:

3/51
platform 3
IP 65/67 splitter boxes and modules
Splitter box and module type Passive splitter boxes Monobloc I/O splitter boxes and modules
Telefast, ABE9 splitter Advantys, FTB splitter TBX, I/O modules

boxes boxes
108733
108737
Fielbus type – CANopen Fipio

DeviceNet
3.4 Profibus DP
INTERBUS
Number of inputs/outputs 8 I/O, 16 I/O 16 I, 8 I + 8 O, 12 I + 4 O, 8 I, 16 I, 8 O and 16 O

16 I/O,
8 I + 8 I/O
Type of signal c 24 V digital
Functions Connection of 1 to 16 sensors/actuators
Type of input/output connectors M12
Degree of protection IP 67 IP 65
Housing type Plastic Plastic and metal Zamac
Module type
ABE 9 FTB 1 TBX EEP/ESP
Pages Consult our catalogue “IP 67 splitter boxes” 3/56
3/52
3
Modular I/O splitter boxes
TSX EpF, I/O modules 170 EDp, I/O modules Modules on AS-Interface cabling Advantys, FTM splitter boxes
system
540334
108735
540351
3
108743
108741
Fipio INTERBUS AS-Interface CANopen
DeviceNet
Profibus DP 3.4
8 I, 16 I, 8 I/O and 8 O 16 I or 16 O 4 I or 2 I 4I 4 I or 2 I 8 I, 16 I, 8 I/O and 16 I/O discrete
4 O or 2 O 4 O or 2 O 4 I or 4 O analogues
c 24 V discrete and analogue
Connection of 1 to 8 Connection of 1 to 256

sensors/actuators sensors/actuators per bus module
M8 M12 M8 M8 and M12
IP 67 IP 65 IP 67
Plastic Metal Plastic
TSX EpF 170 EDI/EDO ASI MEp ASI XZ SpA FTM 1r

+ ASI Bp MMOp
3/68 3/73 Consult our catalogue Consult our catalogue “IP 67 splitter
“AS-Interface cabling system” boxes”
r Available 1st half 2004
3/53
General, Modicon Premium automation
TBX discrete I/O IP 65 modules on Fipio bus
General
Decentralising the I/O meets the requirement of both users and machine
structure.
In the same way as distributed I/O modules, TBX dust and damp proof modules are
used to create distributed control systems, which offer increased availability of
installations. They also offer the possibility of locating the I/O interfaces close to the
process or machines, in harsh environments (water jets, dust, etc).
TBX modules are addressed by the application program as “In rack” I/O, with which
they can coexist.
TBX dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are connected to Premium
processors via the Fipio fieldbus (maximum number of modules per Fipio bus,
see page 5/80).
TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules offer:

3 b Compact interface elements.
b Easy setup and connection:
v sensors and actuators are directly connected to dust and damp proof standard
connectors,
v tools are available for local testing and diagnostics of both the interfaces and those
devices which are connected to them.
TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules with IP 65 protection conform to the following
test standards:
v UL, NEMA,
v CSA,
v IEC 65A,
v NFC 63850,
v to the CNOMO EO3 40 50 recommendation,
v to the NF 46 604 FIP standard.
Functions
3.4
TBX dust and damp proof distributed discrete I/O modules offer identical functions to
those of the modular TBX I/O modules:
Reference TBX EEP 08C22 TBX EEP 1622 TBX ESP 08C22 TBX ESP 1622
Wiring check
Outputs fallback
Assignment of
I/O channels to
application tasks
Function available
TBX EEP 08C22/1622 dust and damp proof distributed input modules
The TBX EEP 08C22 input module (8 channels c 24 V) and the TBX EEP 1622
input module (16 channels c 24 V) have the following functions:
b Wiring check providing line check via short-circuit, open circuit or earth line
detection.
b Assignment of each group of 8 input channels (channels 0 to 7 or 8 to 15) to a
TBX ESP 08C22/1622 dust and damp proof distributed output modules
The TBX ESP 08C22 output module (8 channels c 24 V) and the TBX EEP 1622
output module (16 channels c 24 V) have the following functions:
b Transistor output protection, detection of overloads or short-circuits which can be
used by the user program (channel by channel or for all 8 or 16 module channels).
b Reactivation of transistor outputs, choice of automatic reactivation or by user
program.
b Wiring check providing line check via short-circuit, open circuit or earth line
detection.
b Output fallback state: on module fault, maintains the state of the outputs at their
last value or at a configured value (state 0 or 1) channel by channel.
b Assignment of each group of 8 output channels (channels 0 to 7 or 8 to 15) to a

3/54
platform 3
Description
TBX EEP/ESP 08C22 modules
Dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 65 casing
and comprise:
1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors or preactuators.
1 2 8 channel status indicator lamps.

3
3 4 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication.
4
4 A dust and damp proof connector for connection to the Fipio bus, and to the
c 24 V power supply.
5 For output modules, a c 24 V preactuator power supply connector.
5 2 Connector to be ordered separately:

3
b TBX BLP 10 dust and damp proof connector which can also be used for coding
connection points.
b For output modules, a TBX BAS 10 dust and damp proof power supply connector.
TBX EEP/ESP 1622 modules
Dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 65 casing
and comprise:
1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors or preactuators
(1 connector for 2 channels).
1
3 2 16 channel status indicator lamps (yellow lamps for even channels and green
lamps for odd channels).
4
3.4
4 A dust and damp proof connector for connection to the Fipio bus, and to the
c 24 V power supply.
2 For output modules, a c 24 V preactuator power supply connector on the left side.
Connector to be ordered separately:
b TBX BLP 10 dust and damp proof connector which can also be used for coding
connection points.
b For output modules, a TBX BAS 10 dust and damp proof power supply connector.

3/55
Connection principles Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
Connection principles
TBX dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules require a c 24 V power supply.
This supply can be provided:
b Via a TBX FP ACC 10 dust and damp proof network junction box 1.
In this case, the TSX FP CFp00 tap link cable 2 is required which is a screened
twisted pair 150 W with 2 conductors carrying the c 24 V supply for the modules.
The mechanical and chemical resistance characteristics for this cable are suitable
for use in harsh environments.
Directly to the TBX BLP 10 connector on the dust and damp proof TBX module 5. In
this case, a tap link off the trunk cable is made using the TSX FP ACC 4 T-junction
box 3 with the TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable 4 (double twisted pair 150 Ω).
3 Dust and damp proof TBX
5
Premium
2
a 24 V
1
Fipio
3
a 24 V 3
TBX a 24 V
4
2
5
3.4
Daisy chaining dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules using a
TBX FP ACC 10 T-junction box
Using a TBX FP ACC 10 junction box 1 up to 10 TBX dust and damp proof modules
can be daisy chained.
Since power is carried to the TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules via the
TSX FP CFp00 tap link cable 2, the length of the tap links depends on the type of
c 24V power supply and the number of TBX dust and damp proof modules daisy
chained on the same tap link. The lengths in metres are given in the table below:
Number of TBX dust and 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

damp proof modules in
daisy chain
c 24 V ± 3% supply 263 131 87 65 51 42 36 31 27 24
c 24 V ± 5% supply 232 116 77 57 45 37 31 27 24 21
c 24 V ± 10% supply 154 77 51 38 30 24 20 17 15 13

3/56
platform 3
Type of inputs module TBX EEP 08C22 TBX EEP 1622

Modularity 8 16
Nominal input values Voltage V c 24

Current mA 7
Sensor supply V c 19.2…30
(ripple included)
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 11
Current mA ≥ 6 for 11 V
At state 0 Voltage V <5
Current mA ≤2 ≤ 1.4
Input impedance kΩ 3.4
Logic Positive
Response time Change from 0 at 1 ms 6 5…11
Change from 1 at 0 ms 6 5…13
Protection against Sensor supply Reverse mounted parallel diode Series diode
polarity inversion
Dissipated power Per module W 2.6 2.7…24 V 3
(with 60 % load)
Typical currents Module supply mA 40 95 (at 24 V)
consumed Sensor supply mA 70 100 (at 24 V)
Type of inputs Current sink, conforming to IEC 1131 type 2
Compatibility output modules TBX transistor outputs of the same voltage
External line Line resistance Ω < 500 with volt-free contact, < 100 with 2-wire priximity sensor
Open line leakage kΩ > 30 with volt-free contact, > 100 with 2-wire priximity sensor
resistance
Isolation Dielectric strength between V eff 1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min
inputs and earth
Storage °C - 25…+ 70 3.4
Type of outputs module TBX ESP 08C22 TBX ESP 1622
Modularity 8 16
Loads Voltage V c 24
Nominal current A 0.5
Tungsten filament lamp W 8
Limit values Voltage (ripple included) V c 19.2…30
Logic Positive outgoing current

Response time Change from state 0 to 1 ms ≤1
Change from state 1 to 0 ms ≤1
Leakage current At state 0 mA < 2
Residual voltage At state 1 V < 0.4
Built-in protection Against overloads Yes (thermal)

Against overvoltages Zener Diode
Against inverse polarity Reverse mounted parallel diode Series diode
Load common To “–ve” of supply
Typical currents Module supply mA 30 107 (at 24 V)

consumed Preactuator supply mA 45 (except actives outputs ) 51 (at 24 V)
Dissipated power Per module (with 60 %load) W 4.3 3.7 (at 24 V)
Compatible input d.c. Yes
modules
Load impedance At state 1 Ω 50 < Z < 3000
Isolation Dielectric strength between V eff 1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

inputs and earth

3/57
platform 3
Dust and damp proof monobloc discrete I/O modules

Type of Operating Modularity Characteristics Reference Weight
module voltage (no. of channels) kg
Input c 24 V 8 Conforming to TBX EEP 08C22 0.510
IEC 1131 type 2
Wiring check
function
TBX EEP 08C22
16 Conforming to TBX EEP 1622 0.510
IEC 1131 type 2
Output c 24 V 8 0.5 A protected TBX ESP 08C22 0.580

Wiring check
function
16 0.5 A protected TBX ESP 1622 0.580
Accessories (1)
3 TBX ESP 1622
Type of module Characteristics Reference Weight
kg
Dust and damp proof junction Tap link off trunk cable TSX FP ACC 4 0.660
box Holds 1 female 9-way SUB-D
connector Zamac casing
Tap link off trunk cable including TBX FP ACC 10 0.680

wires for c 24 V supply.
Holds 1 female 9-way SUB-D
TSX FP ACC 4 connector Zamac casing
Dust and damp proof Tap link or daisy chaining with TBX BLP 10 0.320
connector for TBX modules adress coding
Dust and damp proof supply c 24 V preactuator power TBX BAS 10 0.120
connector for TBX output supply for TBX ESP 08C22/1622
modules output modules
(1) For other Fipio accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/86 et 5/87.
3.4
TBX BLP 10 TBX BAS 10

3/58
Connections, Modicon Premium automation
mounting TBX discrete I/O IP 65 modules on Fipio bus
Connections
TBX EEP 08C22 inputs
Mechanical contacts 2-wire prox.sen. 3-wire prox.sen.
3 4 -
3 4
3 4 -
5 5
5
2 1
+ +
2 1
2 1
TBX EEP 1622 inputs

Mechanical contacts 2-wire prox.sen. 3-wire prox.sen.
3 4 3 4 - 3 4 -
5 5
2 1
+
5
+ 3
2 1 2 1
+
-
-
TBX ESP 08C22 outputs

Direct wiring Wiring with amplification
-
3 4
3 4
5 +
5
2 1 -
2 1
+
3.4
Outputs TBX ESP 1622
Direct wiring Wiring with amplification Preactuator supply via
TBX BAS 10 connector
3 4
-
3 4 3 2
5 + 5 a 24 V
2 1 - 2 1 4 1 +
+
-
TBX EpP pp22 inputs/outputs
193,15 69,1
125 (3) 57,9
(2)
80
52
113
210,3 (1)
(1) For TBX ESP 08C22/1622

(2)TBX BLP 10 connector
(3) 2 holes Ø 4.4
General: Characteristics: References:
3/59
architecture platform 3
Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus
Presentation
structure.
Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O modules are used to create distributed control
systems by removing the need for enclosures, improving connections and thus
increasing the availability of installations. These IP 67 protection modules also offer
the possibility of locating the standard I/O interfaces used in the processes or
machines in harsh environments (oil jets, water jets, dust etc).
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software is used for the software
configuration and installation of the dust and damp proof I/O modules on the Fipio
bus.
3 There are 4 types of Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O module:
b Input module, 8 channels, c 24 V IEC type 2: TSX EEF 08D2.
b Input module, 16 channels c 24 V IEC type 2: TSX EEF 16D2.
b Mixed module, 8 IEC type 2 inputs/8 x 0.5 A transistor outputs, c 24 V:
TSX EMF 16DT2.
b Output module, 8 channels, 2 A transistor outputs, c 24 V: TSX ESF 08T22.
Furthermore, this new module design offers a number of special functions:

b Remote power supply: the Fipio modules, inputs, and Fipio communication power
supplies are provided using a single cable. Each remote power supply can be used
to power up to 31 modules.
b A daisy-chained module can be changed without interrupting the bus.
b An operator terminal can be connected at any point on the bus.
b Short-circuits in the sensor power supply can occur without causing the bus to
malfunction.
b A Fipio bus fast connection system using cables and M23 connectors.
b A sensor/preactuator fast connection system using an M12 connector.
3.4
The Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O modules conform to the following standards
and approvals:
b IEC 1131.
b CNOMO.
b Fipio certification.
b DIN.
b UL certification.
b CSA certification.
b e mark.
Architecture
Premium
Fipio
c 24 V c 24 V
TBX
TSX EpF TSX EF ACC 99
c 24 V
preactuator
TSX EpF
Momentum
Fipio
Characteristics: Connections: Dimensions, mounting: References:

pages 3/63 and 3/64 pages 3/65 to 3/67 page 3/65 pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/60
Architecture (continued), Modicon Premium automation
Architecture (continued)
The Fipio fieldbus is a standard relating to communication between different
automation components where the IP 67 dust and damp proof I/O are located
remotely.
6
Each segment supports up to 31 IP 67 I/O modules over a maximum distance of
7 1000 meters. Because the IP 67 I/O modules have a remote power supply, the
2 voltage drops caused by the connected modules limit the maximum distances
between each T-junction box (from the one which provides the c 24 V power supply)
and the remote powered IP 67 I/O modules. For the calculation of these distances,
3 see page 3/66.
The use of electrical or electrical/fiber optic repeaters allows the connection of up to 98
IP 67 I/O modules on 5 segments over a maximum distance of 15,000 meters.
1
Description
5
TSX EEF 08D2 and TSX EEF 16D2 modules
4
Dust and damp proof input modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and 3
comprise:
7 1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors (2 input channels
per connector for the 16-channel model).
2 8 or 16 channel status indicator lamps.
4 Dust and damp proof male M23 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus, the
7 c 24 V power supply for the sensor and the internal electronics of the module.
5 Access to the addressing micro-switch.
6
6 1 or 2 sensor power supply fault indicators.
8 7 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (10 labels supplied).
2 Two sealing plugs for M12 connectors are supplied with every module.
3
TSX ESF 08T22 module
Dust and damp proof output modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and 3.4
comprise:
1
6 1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the preactuators.
5 2 8 channel status indicator lamps.
4 3 3 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication.
4 Dust and damp proof male M23 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus and
the power supply for the internal electronics of the module.
8 5 Access to the addressing micro-switch.
6 2 preactuator power supply presence indicators.
7 A male 7/8” type connector for connecting the two c 24 V preactuator power
supplies.
8 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (10 labels supplied).
7 Two sealing plugs for M12 connectors are supplied with the module.
6
8
TSX EMF 16DT2 module
9 Dust and damp proof I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and
2 comprise:
1 8 female M12 type fast connectors of which 4 are for connecting the sensors and 4
3 for the preactuators (2 input channels or 2 output channels per connector).
2 16 channel status indicator lamps.
1 4 Dust and damp proof male M23 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus, the
6 c 24 V power supply for the sensor and the internal electronics of the module.
5 Access to the addressing micro-switch.
5 6 2 preactuator power supply presence indicators.
4 7 A male 7/8” type connector for connecting the two c 24 V preactuator power
supplies.
8 1 sensor power supply fault indicator.
9 9 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (10 labels supplied).
Two sealing plugs for M12 connectors are supplied with the module.

3/61
platform 3
2 3 TSX EF ACC 2ppp Fipio bus connecting cables
TSX EF ACC 2ppp cables are used to carry Fipio bus signals and the c 24 V power
supply for the sensors and the internal electronics of TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules.
They comprise:
2
1 A trunk cable, with a 150 Ω shielded twisted pair and a 1.5 mm power supply pair,
4 0.2, 1, 3, 7, 12 or 25 m long depending on the model (radius of curvature 30 mm,
Ø 9.5 mm).
At one end:
1 2 An insulated IP 67 male connector, with M23 type ring, 6-way for Fipio connection
to the preceding module n-1 (or to the upstream T-junction box).
At the other end: an insulated double connector comprising :
3 3 An IP 67 female connector, with M23 type ring, 6-way for connection to module n.
4 An IP 67 female connector, with M23 type thread, 6-way for an outgoing cable of the
same type for connection to the next module n+1 (or to the downstream T-junction
box).
Use of this cable on the dust and damp proof I/O modules:
b Locks access to the module's Fipio addressing microswitch.

b Ensures continuity of the Fipio bus even if the module is disconnected (when
replacing a module, for example). Patented system.
TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box
The IP 65 T-junction box comprises:
1 A male M23 type soldering connector for connecting the Fipio bus (incoming and
outgoing).
3.4
1 2 A male 7/8” type connector for connecting the c 24 V power supply for the remote
powered modules, fitted with a protective plug.
3 A female M23 type connector for connecting the Fipio bus (outgoing), fitted with a
2 sealing plug.
4 An access cover for the 9-way femaleSUB-D connector used for connecting an
4
operator terminal.

3/62
Functions
Remote dust and damp proof I/O modules integrate the following monitoring
devices :
b Inputs:
v power supply fault monitoring in groups of 8 channels. Indicated on the front panel
by the SF1 and SF2 indicator lamps (red).
v module fault monitoring. Indicated on the front panel by the ERR indicator lamp
(red).
One fault bit for the whole module is available at PLC processor level for use by the
user program.
b Outputs:
v preactuator power supply presence monitoring in groups of 4 channels. Indicated
on the front panel by the US1 and US2 indicator lamps (green). A power supply
presence bit is associated with each indicator lamp.
v short-circuit monitoring for each channel. Indicated on the front panel by an indicator
lamp for each channel (red). There is one fault bit per channel (for 8 channel modules) or
per group of 2 channels (for mixed modules). In addition, there is one bit per group of 4
3
channels which can be used to reset the channels remotely.
v module fault monitoring. Indicated on the front panel by the ERR indicator lamp
(red). One fault bit for the whole module is also available.
In the case of the TSX EMF 16DT2 mixed module, a diagnostic bit allows the origin
of the power supply fault to be determined (input or output power supply).
Environmental characteristics
Type of module TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2/ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 TSX ACC 99
Temperature Operation °C 0...60
Storage °C 0...60
Altitude m 0...2000
Vibration resistance Testing in progress 3.4

Protection against shocks 15 gn/11 ms
Operating positions All positions
Input characteristics
Type of module TSX EEF 08D2 TSX EEF 16D2 TSX EMF 16DT2
Inputs channels Number 8 inputs 16 inputs 8 inputs
(8 outputs, see page 3/64)
Groups of channels 1 2 1
Conforms to IEC 1131 2 Yes, type 2
Proximity sensor 2-wire/3-wire Yes

compatibility
Nominal values Voltage V c 24 (positive logic)
Current mA 7
Sensor power supply (ripple included) V c 19.2...30
Inputs limit Voltage At state 0 V <5
values At state 1 V ≥ 11
Current At state 0 mA <2
At state 1 mA ≥ 6 to 11 V
Built-in protection against short-circuits mA 350 per 4 channels group
Typical response State 0 to 1 ms 3.5

time State 1 to 0 ms 3.5
Sensor power supply monitoring V c 14...18
Isolation Between channels None

Between bus and internal logic V a 500
Consumption mA 80 with 5-two-wire sensor 130 with 10 two-wire sensor See consumption
inputs inputs page 3/64
(1) (1)
(1) + 10mA per additional input and + 10 mA per 3-wire sensor input.
Connections: Dimensions, mounting: References:

pages 3/65 to 3/67 page 3/65 pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/63
platform 3
Outputs characteristics
Type of module TSX ESF 08T22 TSX EMF 16DT2
Type of outputs Solid state Solid state
Outputs Number 8 outputs 8 outputs

channels (8 inputs, see page 3/63)
Groups of channels 2 groups of 4 channels
Nominal values Voltage V c 24
Current A 2 0.5
Outputs limit Voltage V c 19.2...30

values
Current per channel A 2.5 0.625
3 Current per group At 40 °C

of 4 channels
A 8 2
At 60 °C A 4.8 1.2
Leakage current at state 0 mA <1
Residual voltage at state 1 V < 0.5 to 2 A < 0.5 to 0.5 A
Response time ms < 0.5 (resistive load)
Preactuator power supply monitoring V c 14...18
Built-in Against overvoltage Yes, by transil diode

protection
Against short-circuits and overloads A 4.5 1.5
by thermal circuit-breaker by thermal circuit-breaker
Isolation Between channels of the same group Non

3.4
Between output channel groups V rms a 60
Between output channel groups and V rms a 60

internal logic
Between input channels and output V rms – a 60

channels
Between bus and internal logic V a 500
Consumption mA 80 with 5 outputs at state 1 (1) 130 with 5 two-wire sensor

inputs and 5 output at state 1
(1) (2)
(1) + 10 mA per additional output at state 1.

(2) + 10 mA per additional input and + 10 mA per 3-wire sensor input.
Connections: Dimensions, mounting: References:

pages 3/65 to 3/67 page 3/65 pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/64
mounting Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus
Connections
TBX EEF 08D2 inputs
Mechanical contacts 2-wire sensors 3-wire sensors
3 4 3 4 3 4 -
-
5 5 5
+
2 1 2 1
+ 2 1
TBX EEF 16D2/TSX EMF 16DT2 inputs

3 4 3 4 3 4 -
-
5 5 5
2 1 2 1
+ 2 1
+
3
+
- -
TBX ESF 08T22 outputs TBX EMF 16DT2 outputs

Direct wiring Direct wiring Preactuator power supply
3 4 3 4
+
+ Power supply 2 3
+ 5
5 c 24 V 4 2
2 1 - 2 1 -
-
- 5 1 +
Power supply 1
c 24 V
+ -
3.4
TSX EpF inputs/outputs
(3) 52 a
107 4,5
(2)
(1)
60
77
33
39
200
18 152
e
a e
TSX EpF + TSX EF CT 03 222 87
TSX EpF + TSX EF CF 03 252 1
(1) TSX EF CT 03
(2) 2 oblongs holes Ø 4.5
(3) TSX EF ACC pppp
TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box

Rear mounting Front mounting
18
21
=
122
122
80
65
80
48
11
21
34 24 5 = 50 =
20 80 50 80 20
3/65
platform 3
Dust and damp proof input/output wiring system
14 12
4 2 2
1 1
c 24 V 4
c 24 V
9 9
12
3 9
3 9
3
1 A 10
3
11 7 9 9
9 9
c 24 V 3
1
1
4
15
3.4 c 24 V
9 5 6 4 5 6 4
9 9 4
A: Main junction box B

B: Remote powered T-junction box
13
Control of c 24 V voltage drop
The dust and damp proof I/O module power supply is carried by Fipio cables, which
means that the maximum distance from each TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box
depends on the type of c 24 V power supply and the number of I/O modules. The
power supply voltage of the last module must be no lower than 19.2 V.
Typical voltage drops are given in the table below (1):
Number of input/output modules Distance between T-junction box (used with c 24 V remote supply) and last
input/output module
m 10 20 30 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300
5 V 0.09 0.18 0.28 0.46 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.3 2.8
10 V 0.17 0.34 0.51 0.86 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.6 3.4 4.3 5.1
15 V 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.25 1.9 2.5 3.1 3.7 5 6.2 7.5
20 V 0.32 0.65 0.98 1.63 2.5 3.3 4 4.9 6.5 8.2 9.8
25 V 0.4 0.8 1.2 2 3 4 5 6 8.1 10 12
30 V 0.48 0.96 1.45 2.4 3.6 4.8 6 7.2 9.6 12 14.5
(1) The typical values are given for connecting 2-wire sensors. If using 3-wire sensors, apply a
coefficient of 1.77 to these voltage drop values.
Example:
Use of a 24 V ± 3% power supply.
Over a distance of 100 m and connecting 30 dust and damp proof I/O modules.
The voltage drop is (24 x 0.97) - 4.8 = 18.48 V (which is less than the permitted
19.2 V). It is necessary to insert a second c 24 V power supply via a
TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box (distance to be defined and verified according to the
installation topology).
Characteristics: Dimensions, mounting: References:
pages 3/63 and 3/64 page 3/65 pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/66
platform 3
T-junction box
1 TSX EF ACC 99: IP 65 Fipio bus T-junction box, used to connect the c 24 V
power supply intended for dust and damp proof I/O. It also has a 9-way female
SUB-D connector for an operator terminal. This box also serves as the main Fipio
bus junction box A as well as for connecting the c 24 V T-junction power supply
(example B).
Connectors
2 TSX EF CF 01: IP 67 female soldering connector with M23 type ring, 6-way for
connection of Fipio bus and c 24 V power supply. This type of connector is used
at the ends of TSX FP CA/CC/CP/CR p00 cables.
3 TSX EF CM 01: IP 67 male soldering connector with M23 type ring, 6-way for
connection of Fipio bus and c 24 V power supply. This type of connector is used
at the ends of TSX FP CA/CC/CP/CR p00 cables.
4 TSX EF CF 03: IP 67 female 7/8” type screw connector, 5-way for c 24 V power
supply connection. This type of connector is used for the c 24 V power supply of
the TSX ESF/EMF I/O modules and the TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box. The
maximum current permitted for each connector contact is 8 A.
3
5 TSX EF CM 03: IP 67 male 7/8” type screw connector, 5-way for connection to a
TSX EF CT 03 T-connector used for the c 24 V preactuator power supply.
6 TSX EF CT 03: IP 67 7/8” type T-connector, 5-way for daisy-chaining the c 24 V
preactuator power supply. The maximum current permitted for each connector
contact is 8 A.
7 TSX EF CF 02: IP 67 female soldering connector with M23 type thread, 6-way for
extending Fipio TSX FP CP p00 cables.
8 TSX FP ACC 2 or TSX FP ACC 12: 9-way SUB-D connectors for Fipio/Fipway
connection to PLC. Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90° output high or
low, 45° output high or low).
Cables
2
9 TSX EF ACC 2pppp: trunk cable, a 150 Ω shielded twisted pair and a 1.5 mm
power supply pair. Fitted with an M23 male connector and a double M23
female/female connector.
2
10 TSX FP CP p00: trunk cable, a 150 Ω shielded twisted pair and a 1.5 mm power
supply pair (Ø 9.5 mm). Wire ends free to fit IP 67 M23 type soldering connectors 3.4
TSX CF 01/02 and TSX CM 01.
11 TSX FP CC p00: tap link cable, double shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (Ø 8 mm) for
normal environments and use inside buildings. Wire ends free to fit IP 67 M23 type
soldering connector TSX CM 01.
12 TSX FP CA p00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (Ø 8 mm) for normal
environments and use inside buildings.
TSX FP CR p00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (Ø 8 mm) for harsh
environments and use outside buildings.
Wire ends free to fit IP 67 M23 type soldering connectors TSX CF 01/02 and
TSX CM 01.
Other components
13 TSX EF ACC 7: IP 67 M23 type line terminator, to be placed at one or both ends of
the segment, depending on the use.
14 TSX FP ACC 7: IP 20 line terminator (set of 2), to be placed at one or both ends of
the segment, depending on the use.
15 TSX FP CG 0p0: tap link connecting cable for TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card for
FT 2100 terminal,TSX Micro/Premium PLC and PC compatibles.
Calculation of bus length
The total length of a bus is the sum of all the lengths of the trunk cables plus all the
lengths (multiplied by 2) of the tap link cables.
i.e. in the example opposite, the length of the cables is: ¦12 + ¦9 + ¦10 + (2 x ¦11).
Characteristics: Dimensions, mounting: References:

pages 3/63 and 3/64 page 3/65 pages 3/68 and 3/69
3/67
platform 3
Dust and damp proof input/output modules (IP 67)

Number No,type No, type Inputs Connection Reference Weight
of I/O of inputs of characte- via kg
outputs ristics
8 8, – IEC type 2 8 female M12 TSX EEF 08D2 0.500
c 24 V positive connectors
logic
– 8,solid state 8 female M12 TSX ESF 08T22 0.540
c 24 V/2A connectors
16 16, – IEC type 2 8 female M12 TSX EEF 16D2 0.500

c 24 V positive connectors
logic
8, c 24 V 8, solid IEC type 2 8 female M12 TSX EMF 16DT2 0.540
state c positive connectors
TSX ESF 08T22 24 V/0.5A logic
Fipio bus connection accessories

3 Type Use No. Reference Weight
(1) kg
Fipio bus T-junction box
M23 male Trunk cable tap-off via two M23 1 TSX EF ACC 99 0.715
M23 female connectors
7/8” male Remote c 24 V power supply
distribution via 7/8” connector
PC compatible terminal connection
via 9-way female SUB-D 9
connector
TSX EEF 16D2 TSX EMF 16DT2 M23 type soldering connectors
Female Equipment for TSX FP CA/CC/CP 2 TSX EF CF 01 0.080
bus cables
Male Equipment for TSX FP CA/CC/CP 3 TSX EF CM 01 0.080
bus cables
Female Extension for TSX FP CA bus trunk 7 TSX EF CF 02 0.075
cables
3.4
7/8” type screw connectors
Female Equipment for c 24 V preactuator 4 TSX EF CF 03 0.050
power supply
TSX EF ACC 99 Male Equipment for c 24 V preactuator 5 TSX EF CM 03 0.050

power supply
T c 24 V preactuator power supply 6 TSX EF CT 03 0.095

daisy chain on TSX EpF I/O modules
M23 type line terminator

TSX EF CF 01 TSX EF CM
Male To place at the ends of the Fipio 13 TSX EF ACC 7 0.085
segment requiring IP 67 protection
IP 20 connection accessories for Fipio bus

Type Use No. Reference Weight
(1) kg
9-pin SUB-D connectors
TSX EF CF 02 Female zamac Bus connection for Fipio manager 8 TSX FP ACC 2 0.080
output on Premium PLCs
Female insulating Bus connection for Fipio manager 8 TSX FP ACC 12 0.040
output on Premium PLCs
Line terminator (set of 2)

TSX EF CT 03 2-wire connection To place at the ends of the Fipio 14 TSX FP ACC 7 0.020
segment (IP 20 protection)
Other Fipio accessories

See page 5/86 –
(1) For key to numbers, see pages 3/66 et 3/67.
TSX EF ACC7 TSX EF CF 03
Characteristics: Connections: Dimensions, mounting:

pages 3/63 and 3/64 pages 3/65 to 3/67 page 3/65
3/68
platform 3
Fipio bus connecting cables

Type Use No. Length Reference Weight
(1) kg
Trunk cables with M23 moulded connections (patented)
Ø 9.5 mm, Fipio bus and c 24 V 9 0.2 m TSX EF ACC 2002 0.245
1 shielded twisted power supply
pair, Equipped with 1 male 1m TSX EF ACC 2010 0.340
1 pair, 1.5 mm2 for M23 connector and
remote power 1 double female M23
3m TSX EF ACC 2030 0.580
supply connector
7m TSX EF ACC 2070 1.020
12 m TSX EF ACC 20120 1.645
25 m TSX EF ACC 20250 3.180
Trunk cables to be fitted with M23 connectors

TSX EF ACC 20pp Ø 8 mm, 1 shielded Fipio bus, for use in 12
twisted pair normal environments
100 m TSX FP CA 100 5.680 3
(2) inside buildings 200 m TSX FP CA 200 10.920
500 m TSX FP CA 200 30.000
Fipio bus, for use in 12 100 m TSX FP CR 100 7.680

harsh environments
(3) and outside 200 m TSX FP CR 200 14.920
buildings or in garland
(3)
500 m TSX FP CR 500 40.000
Ø 9.5 mm,1 shielded Fipio bus and c 24 V 10 100 m TSX FP CP 100 5.680
twisted pair, power supply
1 pair, 1.5 mm2 for To be fitted with M23
remote power connectors, according 500 m TSX FP CP 500 30.000
supply to use
Tap-off cables 3.4

Ø 8 mm, 2 shielded Fipio bus tap-off 11 100 m TSX FP CC 100 5.680
twisted pairs (between 2
TSX EF ACC 99 200 m TSX FP CC 200 10.920
T-junction boxes)
500 m TSX FP CC 500 30.000
Replacement parts
Use Unit reference Weight
kg
Strip of 10 referencing labels
For referencing I/O modules and I/O channel connectors XZ LG101 0.010
IP 67 seling plugs
For M12 type connectors XZ LG102 0.005
(order in multiples of 10)
For M23 type connectors 170 XTS 050 00 0.140
(1) For key to numbers, see pages 3/65 et 3/67.

(2) Normal environment:
v without special environmental restrictions,
v operating temperature between + 5 °C and + 60 °C,
v fixed installations.
(3) Harsh environment:
v resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes,
v up to 100 % humidity,
v saline environment,
v significant variations in temperature,
v operating temperature between - 10 °C and + 70 °C,
v mobile installations,
v Use in garland: radius of curvature = 10 x cable diameter (either 80 or 95 mm).
For other special restrictions, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Characteristics: Connections: Dimensions, mounting:

3/69
Discrete I/O IP 65 modules on INTERBUS bus
Presentation
structure.
Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules (IP 65) are used to create,
via the INTERBUS bus, distributed control systems, which offer increased availability
of installations. They also offer the possibility of locating the I/O interfaces close to
the process or machines, in harsh environments (water jets, dust, etc).
These 170 EDp modules must be controlled by an INTERBUS master module, such
as the TSX IBY 100 Premium PLC module or TSX IBX 100 coprocessor. They are
only connected to an installation remote bus. The installation remote bus terminal
module is used for the tap link to this installation remote bus.
3 Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules with 16 x c 24 V inputs or
16 x 0.5 A/c 24 V outputs offer:
b Compact interface elements.
b Easy setup and connection.
Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules have been designed to
conform with the main international standards concerning electronic industrial control
equipment:
b Specific requirements for programmable controllers: operating characteristics,
immunity, ruggedness, safety etc.
b NF C 63 850, IEC 1131 2.
b Immunity to electrostatic discharges: IEC 801.2 level 4.
These products, marked e, satisfy the requirements of the European directives and
conform to the applicable harmonised standards.
These products are approved by the INTERBUS club.
3.4 Description
Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules 170 EDp 346 00 are
monobloc type in an IP 65 casing and comprise :
4 1 A 9-way connector for connection to the installation remote bus (in).
2 A 9-way connector for connection to the installation remote bus (out).
3 16 status indicator lamps for inputs or outputs.

6
4 Two holes for fixing the module on a mounting plate.
7
5 Eight connectors for input or output channels.
3
6 A c 24 V auxiliary power supply connector (for the 170 ED0 346 00 output
module).
7 Three or four diagnostics indicators (depending on the model).

5
8 Space for self-adhesive identification label.

4 v For output modules, TBX BAS 10 dust and damp proof power supply connector.
1 8 2
Characteristics: References: Connections: Dimensions:

3/70
Connection principle Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
Connection principle
Momentum dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are connected to the
installation remote bus of an INTERBUS bus. This installation remote bus is a tap link
of the remote bus to which a c 24 V power supply is added via an installation remote
bus terminal module.
The number of I/O modules on the installation remote bus is limited by the current
consumption of the modules and connected sensors. Total consumption should not
exceed 4.5 A. The current consumption of the actuators is not included in the
calculation, since these are supplied separately.
The maximum length of the installation remote bus cable is:

b Between the installation remote bus terminal module and the first I/O module:
50 m.
b Between two I/O modules: 50 m.
b Between the installation remote bus terminal module and the last I/O module:
50 m.
3
Premium
1
d < 400 m 2 2
Installation remote bus
TSX SUP
d < 400 m 3.4

1
2 2 2 2
3
TSX SUP d < 50 m

Installation remote
bus
d < 50 m
Momentum
1 Installation remote bus terminal module 170 ENO 396 00.
2 Dust and damp proof distributed I/O module 170 EDp 346 00.
3 Sealing plug 170 XTS 050 00.
Characteristics: References: Connections: Dimensions:

3/71
platform 3
Type of input module 170 EDI 346 00

Modularity 16
Nominal input Voltage c V 24

values Current mA 100 (0 % active inputs), 640 (100 % active inputs)
Sensor supply (ripple included) c V 19.2…30
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 11

Current mA 2.5…10
At state 0 Voltage V < 5
Current mA < 2
Input impedance kΩ 3.6
Logic Positive
Response time Change from state 0 to state 1 ms 5

Change from state 1 to state 0 ms 5
3 Dissipated power Per module W 1.9 (0 % active inputs), 2.5 (100 % active inputs)
Per channel W 0.3
Compatibility with INTERBUS output module Yes
Isolation Dielectric strength between inputs and earth c V 750 for 1 min

Relative humidity Without condensation 5…95 %
Altitude m 0…2000
3.4 Type of output module 170 EDO 346 00
Modularity 16
Loads Voltage c V 24
Nominal current A 0.5
Limit values Voltage (ripple included) c V 19.2…30
Logic Positive
Response time Change from state 0 to state 1 ms 5

Change from state 1 to state 1 ms 5
Leakage current At state 0 mA <1
Residual voltage At state 1 V < 0.5
Built-in protection Against short- circuits Yes (thermal)

Against overloads Automatic reset
Typical currents Mains power supply mA 200 (0 % active outputs), 380 (100 % active outputs)
consumed Auxiliary power supply mA 180 (0 % active outputs), 220 (100 % active outputs)
Dissipated power Per module W 1.9 (0 % active outputs), 3 (100 % active outputs)
Compatibility with INTERBUS input module Yes
Isolation Dielectric strength between outputs and c V 750 for 1 min

earth
Relative humidity Without condensation 5…95 %
Altitude m 0…2000
References: Connections: Dimensions:

3/72
connections, platform 3
dimensions, Discrete I/O IP 65 modules on INTERBUS bus

mounting
References
Dust and damp proof monobloc distributed discrete I/O modules
Type of Operating Modularity IEC 1131 2 Reference (1) Weight
module voltage (nb of chan.) Conformity kg
Inputs c 24 V (pos.log.) 16 isolated Type 1 170 EDI 346 00 0.520
inputs
Outputs c 24 V 16 protected Yes 170 EDO 346 00 0.580
0.5 A outputs
Accessoires de raccordement
Description Use Reference (1) Weight
kg
170 EDI 346 00
Installation remote bus Tap-off from remote bus to 170 ENO 396 00 –
terminal module (1) installation remote bus
Enables communication of
distributed I/O and INTERBUS
master module
Sealing plug To be fitted at end of installation 170 XTS 050 00 0.140
remote bus
Dust and damp proof power c 24 V preactuator power TBX BAS 10 0.120
3
supply connector for output supply for 170 EDO 346 00
module output module
Connection cables
Description Length Reference (1) Weight
kg
Installation remote bus 0.4 m TSX IBI CP DD9 004 –
cables preformed with dust 1m TSX IBI CP DD9 010 –
and damp proof M23
3m TSX IBI CP DD9 030 –
connectors, composite pure
material 7m TSX IBI CP DD9 070 –
170 EDO 346 00 12 m TSX IBI CP DD9 120 –
25 m TSX IBI CP DD9 250 –
Documentation
Description Language Reference Weight
kg
Installation manual English 870 USE 100 00 –
3.4
(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide .
Connections, dimensions, mounting
170 EDI 346 00 inputs
3 4 3 4 3 4 -
-
5 5 5
+
2 1 2 1
+ 2 1
+
- -
170 EDO 346 00 outputs

Direct wiring Wiring with amplification Preactuator supply via TBX BAS 10 Dimensions, mounting
connector
- (2)
-
3 4 3 4 3 2
5 + 5
80
52
2 1 - 2 1 4 1 +
+
- 163
175
+
192,1 (1)
(1) For 170 EDO 346 00 module.

(2) 2 holes for M4 x 16 screws.
Characteristics:
page 3/72
3/73
platform 3
Installation system
Tego Power for motor power-stater components
General presentation
Tego Power is a modular system which standardises and simplifies the

implementation of motor power-starters with its prewired control and power circuits.
Hence, installation of a motor power-starter is quick, simple, safe and flexible with no
wires needed for connection. In addition, this system enables the motor
power-starter to be customised at a later date. The system reduces maintenance
time and optimises panel space, by reducing the number of terminals, the amount of
ducting and intermediate interfaces.
Two solutions are offered :
b A solution using Quickfit technology for TeSys motor power-starter components with
spring terminals : model d contactors (9 to 32 A) and the GV2-ME motor circuit-breaker.
b A solution for TeSys motor power-starter components with screw terminals : model
d (9 to 18 A) and model k (6 to 12 A) contactors and GV2 motor circuit-breakers.
Tego Power Design definition software
This software on CD-ROM enables the motor power-starter application to be
3 1 3 6 graphically defined according to the circuit-breakers and contactors used.
It determines which Tego Power products are required for the application.
Referencing labels can also be created for the starters.
System for Quickfit technology TeSys motor power-starters with spring terminals
The motor power-starters concerned are those formed by combining :

b GV2-M circuit-breakers,
b with 9 to 32 A model d (LC1) contactors.
Consisting of simple parts, Tego Power Quickfit technology is used to create motor
starter assemblies up to 15 kW/400 V.
5
The main components which make up this range are :
4
For the power circuit
b a power kit comprising, for each starter, a plate 1 for mounting the contactor and
the circuit-breaker, and the two power connection modules 2,
2
b a power splitter box 5 for 2 or 4 starters,
b an upstream terminal block 6 for a power supply up to 63 A (16 mm2),
b a downstream terminal block 7 for connecting the motor power supply cables
and the earth cables (6 mm2).
2 For the control circuit
b a control splitter box 3 for 2 or 4 starters, with control-command data on HE 10
3.5 connector. The data on 4 to 8 starters can be fed back directly to the PLC via an 8I/8O
or 16I/8O Telefast cable or to a fieldbus module (AS-i, Fipio, CANopen, DeviceNet,
7 INTERBUS, Profibus) (see opposite page).
b a control circuit connection module 4 which plugs directly into the contactor and
the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module concentrates the motor starter
control-command data. It integrates the circuit-breaker status data in the prewiring of
the contactor control circuit.
1
System for TeSys motor power-starters with screw terminals
The motor power-starters concerned are those formed by combining :

b GV2 circuit-breakers (mainly GV2-ME and GV2 P),
b with 6 to 12 A model k contactors (LC1, LP1, LC2, LP2, LP4, LP5) and 9 to 18 A
model d contactors (LC1).

b modular sub-bases 1 for 2 or 4 direct or reversing contactors, consisting of a
prefabricated power busbar system and a control-command circuit. These sub-bases
can be combined to form a variable configuration of 2, 4, 6 or 8 direct starters.
b the sub-base interconnection kit to interconnect the control and power circuits
on two sub-bases.
b connection blocks 2 and 3 which perform the following three functions :
2 v ensure the mechanical fixing of the motor starter to the modular sub-base,
v connect the power terminals of the contactor and circuit-breaker,
v connect the auxiliary contact and A1-A2 coil terminals to the modular sub-base.
3/74
platform 3
Installation system
Tego Power for motor power-starter components
Communication modules
General
Communication modules are used to send I/O data from a Tego Power motor power-
starter configuration to the PLC.
The communication modules is selected according to the type of connection
required:
b in parallel mode (modules, terminal blocks or HE 10),
b or in serial mode on the bus (AS-i bus, INTERBUS, Fipio, Profibus DP, CANopen or
DeviceNet modules).
The communication modules are the same, whether the TeSys motor power-starter
system uses spring or screw terminals.
Modules in a TeSys motor power-system with spring terminals

1 2 3
Motor power-starters can be connected to a PLC or a bus in two ways :

b by direct connection from the control circuit splitter box 3 with 4 starters, with an 3
HE 10 connector (8I/8O) or two HE 10 connectors (16 I and 8 O),
b by a Tego Power module 1 using an APP-2CX adaptor plate 2.
3.4
Modules in a TeSys motor power-starter system with screw terminals
A module 4 is mounted by direct mechanical assembly on the modular sub-base ,

with no screws or accessories.
The electrical connection between the modular sub-base and the communication
module is made using an HE 10 connector.
4
3/75
Compatibility Modicon Premium automation
platform 3
Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system
Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces and Tego Power for motor power-starter components
Automation platform Tego Dial components Tego Power components
3
Type Modularity of Compatible I/O Tego Dialbase 8 I/8 O Tiego Dialbase 16 I Communication module or control splitter
connection to the modules box with 8 I/8 O
PLC
APE 1B24M APE 1B24E APP 1CH, APP 2R4H1/H3
TSX Micro platform
Tego Dial 8 inputs TSX DMZ 16DTK 1

+ 8 outputs
16 inputs TSX DMZ 64DTK 1 (1)
+ 16 outputs
16 inputs TSX DMZ 1
64DTK/28DTK
Tego Power 8 inputs TSX DMZ 16DTK 1
+ 8 outputs
16 inputs TSX DMZ 64DTK 1
3.5 + 16 outputs
Premium platform
Tego Dial 16 inputs TSX DEY 1 (1)

+ 16 outputs 16FK/32D2K/64D2K
TSX DSY
32T2K/64T2K
16 inputs TSX DEY
16FK/32D2K/64D2K
Tego Power 16 inputs TSX DEY 1
+ 16 outputs 32D2K/64D2K/16FK
TSX DSY
32T2K/64T2K
Quantum platform
Tego Dial 32 inputs 140 DDI 353 00/10, 1 (1)

+ 32 outputs 140 DDI 853 00,
140 DD0 353 00/10
32 inputs 140 DDI 353 00/10, 1
140 DDI 853 00
Tego Power 32 inputs 140 DDI 353 00/10, 1
+ 32 outputs 140 DDI 853 00,
140 DD0 353 00/10
Advantys STB discrete I/O
Tego Power 16 inputs STB EPI 1145

+ 8 outputs
(1) For the connection of a second Dialbase APE 1B24M, use 2 x TSX DP pp3 connecting cables.
3/76
3
3
Control splitter box Control splitter box Splitter box Splitter box Telefast connecting cables
16 I/16 O 16 I + 16 O 16 to 2 x 8
in 2 x (8E+8S)
APP 2RH2/H4 APE 1R1628 ABE 7ACC 02 TSX CDP pp3 ABF M32Hpp0 STB XCA 300p
1 2
1 (2) 3
3.4
1 1 (3) 3
1 2
1 (2) 3
1 1 (3) 3
1 1 2
1 (2) 1 2
1 1 (3) 1 2
APP 2R2E APP 2R4E 1

(2 motor-starters) (4 motor-starters)
(4)
(2) 8 I + 8 O remain available. To connect a second APP-1CH module or APP-2ppp 8 E + 8 S control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp4 cable.
(3) 8 O remain available on ABE-7ACC02. To connect them a second AAP-2ppp 16 I/8 O control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp3 cable.
(4) For 8 motor-starters, to use 2 APP 2R4E control and power splitters.
3/77
4
4/0
Contents 4 - Application-specific modules and
solutions 4
4.1 - Preventa safety modules and solution

b Use of Preventa safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2
b Preventa safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/4
b Preventa safety controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/10
4.2 - Application-specific counter modules

Selection guide: counter and electronic cam modules . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14
b 40 kHz counter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/16
b 1 MHz measurement and counter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/20
b Electronic cam module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/24
4.3 - Motion control modules

Selection guide: motion control modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28
b Twin Line offer presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/30
b Lexium offer presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/32
b Modules for stepper motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/34 4

b Modules for servomoteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/38
b SERCOS motion control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/48
4.4 - Integrated weighing system

b ISP Plus weighing modules

v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/58
4.5 - Warm Standby redundancy (PL7)

b Presentation/principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62
b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/64
b Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/67
4/1
platform 4
Use of Preventa safety modules
Safety
Production workshops and technical building installations are subject to increasing requirements in terms of machine
safety.
A good machine is a safe machine, combining:

b Safety of personnel (machine is not dangerous).
b Availability of the production tool (machine operational at any time).
b Safety is achieved by:
v simultaneously optimising safety and availability,
v using basic principles: redundancy, self-monitoring, etc,
v considering reliability (failure determining the behavior of the machine in a specified position, positive safety
4 features),
v ease of maintenance.
The machinery directive and the work equipment directive

The machinery directive
A machine manufacturer is required to conform to the machinery directive. The machinery directive
(89/392/EEC, 91/36/EEC, 93/44/EEC and 93/68/EEC) is designed to ensure the free circulation of machinery
and safety components in European Union countries and to improve the level of safety for personnel.
Harmonised European standards establish technical specifications which comply with the minimum safety
4.2 requirements defined in the corresponding directive.
Manufacturers must produce machinery which conforms to safety requirements.
The work equipment directive

The user is required to ensure that his range of machines conforms to the use of work equipment by
workers at work directive. Directive 89/655/EEC lays down the minimum objectives for protection in the
working environment and in particular concerns the use of products. The directive specifies the general
framework of preventative measures which should be taken in the workplace.
Safety and automated systems

All dangerous areas must be identified and have restricted access, controlled in a secure manner, ie. any
breakdown or careless operation must leave the automated system in a safe position.
It should be noted that the use of safety products does not necessarily mean that the machine conforms to the
machinery directive.
It is the operation, wiring, compatibility and scheme used, which make the entire machine safe. It is more important
to think in terms of safety solutions rather than safety products.
Groupe Schneider, safety specialists

Groupe Schneider, specialists in safety, has a range of several thousand products, all concerned directly or
indirectly with safety. Some of these products are exclusively designed for safety.
“Mushroom head”
emergency stop Two-handel control
Preventa safety module button
Safety module integrated in PLC
For further details on components for safety applications, please consult our specialist catalogue.
4/2
platform 4
Use of Preventa safety modules
Non-controlled safety systems
The control signal from the protection device (emergency stop pushbutton illustrated
to the left) acts directly on the power contactor of the machine.
In this type of scheme, the risks of simple faults are:

b emergency stop button being shorted.
b KM1 contactor sticking.
When the operator presses an emergency stop button, the instruction is not
processed, and another sequence can begin following the emergency stop, despite
the presence of the fault.
KM1
In the case of failure, the safety function (1) is compromised. Therefore, a reliable
KM1 intermediate relay system must be used.
(1) A safety function is a function whose non-execution or untimely execution results in the
KM1
immediate placement of the equipment into a non-hazardous position.
4
Safety system controlled by a Preventa safety module
Feedback loop 4.2

KM6 KM5 KM5 KM5
Emergency stop Run

KM6 KM6
Preventa safety module Redundancy
KM6
M
KM5
KM5 and KM6 contactors with mechnically linked contacts Independent safety circuits
Preventa safety modules provide a reliable interposing relay function by eliminating

the risks of:
b A control circuit fault (inputs).

b A power circuit fault (outputs).
b A fault on an internal safety module component.
The safety function remains operative whenever any one of these faults
occur.
For the use of mechanically linked contacts CA2-DN22/DN31, LC1-D09/D18/D25,
LP1-D09/D18/D25 with contacts which can be used in the feedback loop, please
consult your Regional Sales Office.
4/3
functions 4
platform 4
Preventa safety modules type TSX PAY
Presentation
TSX PAY safety modules integrated in the Premium PLC combine :

v the simplicity of use of Preventa safety modules
v the high performance of PLC diagnostics
in addition to the advantages of a standard PLC (extended choice of I/O, simplicity
of setup, flexibility for hardware and software developments, etc).
TSX PAY safety modules incorporate in a single module, a Preventa (XPS) hard-wired
safety block and an electronic data acquisition unit for complete diagnostics of input
contacts and the state of outputs in the safety system.
TSX PAY safety modules are used to safely interrupt one or more Emergency stop or
safety stop control circuits according to the standards EN 60204-1 and EN 418.
The proven safety of hard-wired technology and the performance of Premium PLCs
make the TSX PAY modules the optimum solution for creating machines which are
more available, safer, more compact and lower in cost.
Solution for applications requiring safety systems and high-performance

diagnostics
The solution, integrated safety modules, enables complete diagnostics on the entire
4 Premium + TSX PAY
safety system. This diagnostics quickly locates the faulty contact, pushbutton cables,
or limit switch, without additional contacts on the inputs and without any additional
wiring.
TSX PAY safety modules have their own power supplies and operate independently
of the PLC processor.
TSX PAY modules are suitable for Emergency stop and limit switch monitoring
applications, demanding a level of safety up to category 4 according to standard EN
4.2 954-1 (parts of control systems relating to safety).
K4
K3 M
Functions
TSX PAY modules offer the following functions:
b Monitoring of 1 to 12 double or single pushbutton contacts, Emergency stop and

limit switches for safety guards for an Emergency stop or immediate stop safety
system (Emergency stop category 0 according to standard EN 418).
b Hard-wired safety block identical to Preventa XPS safety modules:
v 2 or 4 N/O (normally open) safety outputs,
v 12 double contact inputs.
b Safety block independent of the Premium PLC processor: the PLC does not
operate on the safety module.
b 28 LEDs on the module display block: for complete diagnostics of the safety
system.
b Electronic data acquisition units for complete diagnostics of the safety system:
v read the status of the 24 inputs (image of the status of the 12 pushbuttons or limit
switches)
v read the enable input,
v read the feedback loop,
v read the safety outputs control,
v monitor the external power supply of the module.
This electronic data acquisition is designed so that the safety function is not
compromised by any failure. If the safety system uses more sensors, it is possible to
connect several TSX PAY modules.

4/4
Operation 4
platform 4
TSX PAY 262 module schematic

To ensure the safety function irrespective of the first failure, it is compulsory to use:
b For the inputs: Emergency stop pushbuttons or safety limit switches with double
contacts
b For the outputs: if relaying is necessary, use a guided contact relay
b On the module power supply : an F1 protection fuse (see page 4/7 characteristics).
B1 TSX PAY 262

F1
24 V A1
0V A2
S121
S12 S131/S122 Ix,12
S13 S141/S132 Ix,13
S231/S222
S23 S232 Ix,23
Y1
I
K3 K4 Y2/S33 s
Safety logic o
S34
K2 K1
l
Y3
Bus interface
a
Y4 t Bus
S112 i
S11 S111/S102 Ix,11 o
n
S1
S21/S12
S11/S02 Ix,1
4
S0 S01 Ix,0
F2 K2 K1
L1(+) 23
13
14
24
K3 K4
N(-)
13-14 et 23-24 Safety outputs, volt-free 4.2

Y1-Y2/S33: Feedback loop
Y2/S33-S34: Run enable
Y3-Y4: Choice of reactivation mode, see page 4/9
S121 à S232: 12 contacts on (+) input channel
S01 à S112: 12 contacts on (+) input channel
A1-A2: c 24 V external power supply
B1: Selection of double or single contact wiring
Functional diagrams
Emergency stop function
Power supply On Emergency stop Emergency stop
voltage not activated activated
Input channel (+)
(S121 to S232)
Input channel (-)
(S01 to S112)
Feedback loop
Y1-Y2/S33
Start-up button
Y2/S33-S34 N/O
Output 13-14 N/O
1
Output 23-24 N/O
Key 0
Protective function with automatic start-up

Power supply 1st switch 2nd switch Guard
voltage opens
Guard closed
Input channel (+)
(S121 to S232)
Input channel (-)
(S01 to S112)
Feedback loop
Y1-Y2/S33
Shunt to Y2/S33-S34
N/O
Output 13-14 N/O 1
Output 23-24 N/O Key 0

200 ms
max
page 4/7 page 4/8
4/5
connection principle 4
platform 4
Description
TSX PAY safety modules comprise on the front panel :
1 A rigid IP 20 casing to hold and protect the electronic card.

1
2 2 A display block (32 LEDs) showing operating modes, faults and the status of the
safety system.
6
3 A high density 44-way SUB-D connector for connecting the safety system.
3
4 A 6-way removable screw terminal block for connecting the safety outputs.
4 5 Marking for labelling the safety outputs.
6 Marking for the external power supply of the module.
Connection principle
Two types of connection for TSX PAY safety modules are available:
4
Standard wiring
A TSX CPP 301 three metre cable is fitted with a 44-way SUB-D moulded, elbow
connector at one end, and flying leads differentiated by a colour code at the other
end.
This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 954-1.
Fast wiring
4.2
Using the Telefast 2 pre-wired system facilitates the installation of TSX PAY safety
modules by giving access to inputs on the safety system via screw terminals.
Connection is carried out using TSX CPP p02 cables fitted with 44-way SUB-D
moulded, elbow connectors at both ends.
The Telefast ABE 7CPA13 sub-base enables the connection of 12 double or single
contact inputs, the power supply, reset inputs and the feedback loop.
This wiring system conforms to the standard EN 954-1.

4/6
Characteristics 4
platform 4
Standards and certifications

Type of modules TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282
Standards Machine Machine electrical EN 60204-1 ou IEC 204-1, EN 292
equipment
Emergency stop equipment EN 418
Product Machine safety-parts of EN 954-1 category 4, EN 1088
control systems relating to pr IEC 61508 (SIL 3)
safety
PLC Specific requirements IEC 61131-2 (EN 61131-2), CSA 22-2, UL 508
Product certifications BG, UL, CSA

General characteristics
Power supply Nominal voltage V c 24
Operating voltage limit V c 19,2…30
Fault indication V c < 20
Maximum consumption mA 200
Protection by external Conforming to IEC 947-5-1 A 1 gG
F1 fuse
Consumption on internal 5 V mA < 150
Isolation kV 4 (overvoltage category III, degree of pollution 2)
Characteristics of discrete inputs
Modularity Emergency stop or limit 12 double or single contacts
switch discrete inputs
Reset PB input
Feedback loop input
1
1
4
Reset PB monitoring input 1
Double or single contact 1
selection input
Logic Positive
IEC 1131 conformity Type 1
Courant d'appel Maximum A 0,5
Isolation between input and earth V eff 500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
4.2
Power Dissipated in the module W <5
Characteristics of safety relay outputs

Modularity 2 volt-free outputs 4 volt-free outputs
Operating voltage limita.c V a 19…250

d.c V c 17…127
Maximum thermal current (Ithe) A 2,5
Minimum current mA 30
a.c. load Inductive Voltage V a 24 a 48 a 110 a 220
AC-15 duty Power VA 60 120 280 550
d.c. load Inductive Voltage V c 24
DC-13 duty Power VA 60
(L/R = 100 ms)
Response timee ms < 10
Type of contact AgCdO gold plated
External protection of Conforming to IEC 947-5-1 A 4 gG

outputs by F2 fuse
Cross-section of Without cable end mm2 0.2…2.5
connecting cables With cable end mm2 1,5
Isolation between input Insulation voltage conforming V 300
and earth to DIN VDE 0110 part 2
Test voltage V eff 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Environment
Temperature Operation °C 0 °C …+ 60 °C
Storage °C - 25 °C …+ 70 °C
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 529 IP 20
page 4/8 page 4/9
4/7
References 4
platform 4
Safety modules
Type of input Safety outputs Connections Reference (1) Weight
c 24 V kg
12 Emergency 2 N/O Inputs: 44-way SUB-D connector TSX PAY 262 0.430
stops or limit (volt-free) Outputs: screw terminal
switches 2.5 A (Ithe) (supplied)
(double or
single
contacts),
1 reset button, 4 N/O Inputs: 44-way SUB-D connector TSX PAY 282 0.490
1 feedback (volt-free) Outputs: screw terminal
loop, 2.5 A (Ithe) (supplied)
1 reset monitor
TSX PAY 262
Connection accessory
Description For Type of connector on Reference Weight
connection on TSX PAY 2p2 kg
screw terminal
Telefast 2 Safety system, SUB-D, 44-way ABE 7CPA13 0.290
sub-base for reset,monitoring
TSX PAY 2p2 and loop inputs
modules Power supply
c 24 V
Connecting cables
4 Use From
TSX PAY 2p2
To Length Reference Weight
kg
module
TSX PAY 282 For fast wiring 44-way SUB-D ABE-7CPA13 1m TSX CPP 102 0.160
connector sub-base
2m TSX CPP 202 0.260
4.2
3m TSX CPP 302 0.360
ABE-7CPA13
For standard 44-way SUB-D Flying leads 3m TSX CPP 301 0.330
wiring connector with colour-
coded wires
(1) Product supplied with a multilingual quick reference guide.
page 4/7 page 4/9
4/8
Connections 4
platform 4
Input channel connection schemes

Wiring 1 input channel: single contact Wiring 2 input channels: double contacts
S01 (—)
(—)
S01
S112 S0
S11/S02
S121 S1
S12 S21/S12
S122/S131 S2
S13 S31/S22
S132/S141 S3
S14 S41/S32
S142/S151 S4
S15 S51/S42
S152/S161 S5
S16 S61/S52
S162/S171 S6
S17 S71/S62
S172/S181 S7
S18 S81/S72
S182/S191 S8
S19 S91/S82
S192/S201 S9
S20 S101/S92
S202/S211 S10
S21 S111/S102
S212/S221 S11
S22 S112
S222/S231
S23 S232
S232 S23
(+) S231/S222
B1 S22
S221/S212
F1
+ 24 V A1 S21
S211/S202
0V
A2 S20
S19
S201/S192 4
S191/S182
S18
Single contact wiring is not suitable for applications which require S181/S172
a category 3 or 4 safety level. S17
S171/S162
Not all faults are detected, a short-circuit on a contact is not S16
detected. S161/S152
S15
When using less than 12 single contacts, connect the input S151/S142
terminals which are not being used. S14
For applications with more than 12 single contacts, it is possible S141/S132
S13
to use several TSX PAY modules by wiring the outputs in series.
S12
S131/S122
4.2
S121
Double contact wiring of the inputs is necessary for creating (+)
applications which require a category 3 or 4 safety level. B1
When prompted, all the first faults are detected and located. A F1
+ 24 V A1
short-circuit between the 2 inputs is detected.
When using less than 12 double contacts, connect the input A2
0V
terminals which are not being used.
For applications with more than 12 double contacts, it is possible
to use several TSX PAY modules by wiring the outputs in series.
Safety output connection schemes Reset function configurations
Y1 Y1
Y1
K4 K3 Y2/S33 Y2/S33
K2 K1
Y2/S33
S34 S34
14 13
Y3 Y3
24 23
Y4 Y4
K3 K4 F2
) L1(+)
Automatic start-up Manual reset without start button

monitoring
Y1
K4 K3 Y1
K2 K1 Y2/S33
K6 K5 Y2/S33
14 13/23 F2
L1(+) S34
24
Y3
34 33/43 F2
L2(+) Y4
44
K3 K4 K5 K6
The design of a category 3 or 4 immediate stop system requires redundancy and Manual reset with start button
checking, on request, of the power supply breaker devices. monitoring
The wiring of N/C contacts (K3 and K4) enables this check on each request.
Relays K3 and K4 must be mechanically linked contact relays.
When TSX PAY modules cut the power directly, it is necessary to connect the
terminals Y1 and Y2/S33.
page 4/7 page 4/8
4/9
Presentation 4
platform 4
Preventa safety controllers

Type XPS MC
Presentation
Safety controllers XPS MCppX are designed to meet the requirements of safety
applications requiring conformity to category 4 of standard EN 954-1.
b They are available in 2 versions:

v XPS MC16X with 16 inputs and 8 independent safety outputs,
v XPS MC32X with 32 inputs and 8 independent safety outputs.
v The safety inputs are supplied by the various control outputs, in such a manner so
as to monitor for short-circuits between the inputs, short-circuits between each input
and earth or the presence of residual voltages. The controller, assisted by the control
outputs, continuously tests all the connected inputs. As soon as an error is detected
on an input, all the outputs associated with this input are disconnected. Safety
XPS MC16X with screw connector XPS MCTS16 outputs associated with other inputs remain active.
v The 10 safety outputs comprise 4 contact guided relay outputs and 6 solid-state
outputs.
b Safety controllers XPS MC incorporate a Modbus communication interface for

configuration and diagnostics. The Modbus interface enables the controller to be
connected to a PC, PLC or an operator dialogue terminal.
b Configuration of the safety functions is carried out using software XPS MCWIN.
22 certified safety functions are available with this software and they are easily
4 assignable to the safety outputs. The safety functions have multiple combination
possibilities and various starting conditions.
b Safety controllers XPS MCppX can be fitted as required:

XPS MC32X with screw connector XPS MCTS32
v with screw connectors XPS MCTSpp,
v or with spring clip connectors XPS MCTCpp.
v These connectors are to be ordered separately.
Safety functions
4.2 The safety functions are certified in accordance with category 4 of standard EN 9541-1
and configurable in the XPS MC controller using software XPS MCWIN.
Main safety functions

Emergency stop monitoring, with or without time delay,
1 or 2-channel wiring.
Two-hand control (type III-C conforming to EN 574-1).
Guard monitoring with 1 or 2 limit switches.

Guard monitoring for injector presses and blowing machines.
Magnetic switch monitoring.
Sensing mat monitoring.
Light curtain (type 4 conforming to EN 61496, relay or solid-state output) monitoring.

Zero speed detection.
Dynamic monitoring of hydraulic valves on linear presses.
Monitoring safety stop at top dead centre on eccentric press.

Safety time delays.
"Muting" function of light curtains.
Enabling switch monitoring, 2 or 3 contact.
Characteristics: References, dimensions:

page 4/12 page 4/13
4/10
Description 4
platform 4

Type XPS MC
Description
Front face of controllers XPS MCppX
1
1 LED display and system diagnostics.
6 2 Solid-state safety output and "muting" indicator light terminals.
3 Power supply (c 24 V) and relay safety output terminals.
5 4 Control output terminals for power supply to safety inputs and safety input
terminals.
4 5 RJ45 type connector.
2 6 RESET button (reinitialisation).
Controller XPS MC32X with screw connector

4
LED details
5 7 9
PWR 1 PWR: green LED, power on.

1 RUN
2 CNF: yellow LED, on or flashing in configuration mode.
2 CNF COM
3 E In: red LED, internal error.
E In 4 E Ex: red LED, external error.
3
E Ex 5 Run: green LED, on or flashing depending on service mode.
4 4.2
6 COM: green LED, controller communicating via TER connection.
7 green LEDs, solid-state outputs.
6 8 8 green LEDs, relay outputs.
Illuminated display 9 green LEDs, inputs.
Operator Operator Network architecture

dialogue dialogue
terminal PLC terminal
(Magelis) (Premium) (Magelis) b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate on the Modbus network for
diagnostics using an operator dialogue terminal (Magelis) or an industrial PLC
(Premium).
For direct connection to a Magelis operator dialogue terminal, use the following
connection accessories:
Modbus 1 Adaptor XPS MCCPC,
2 Connecting cable XBT Z968.
2
1
XPS MC XPS MC XPS MC

PC Profibus DP
b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate with a PC, running software
1 LUF P7 XPS MCWIN, for configuration of the safety functions.
Connection accessories:
1 Adaptor XPS MCCPC,
2 Connecting cable TSX PCX 1031.
2
XPS MC
b Safety controllers XPS MCppX communicate on the Profibus DP network using
communication gateway LUF P7.
XPS MC
Characteristics: References, dimensions:

page 4/12 page 4/13
4/11
Characteristics 4
platform 4

Type XPS MC
Characteristics
Controller type XPS MC16X, XPS MC32X
Product designed for max. use in safety related parts of Category 4 conforming to EN 954-1
control systems
Supply voltage V c 24 ± 20%
Maximum consumption W 12
Fuse protection A 16 gL max.

Start button monitoring Yes/No (depending on configuration selected)
Control circuit voltage 28.8 V/13 mA (between input terminals C1-I1 to C8-I16, resp.l32)
Calculation of wiring resistance RL Ω 100 max, maximum cable length: 2000 m (Between input terminals)
Synchronisation time between inputs s Depending on configuration selected
Outputs Relay Voltage reference Potential Free

Safety circuit 2 N/O per function (4 N/O total) (13-14, 23-24, 33-34, 43-44)
Breaking capacity in AC-15 VA C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180
Breaking capacity in DC-13 24 V/1.5 A L/R = 50 ms
Thermal current (Ithe) for each A 6 for 1 output and 2 for the other, or 4 for both outputs.
group of 2 outputs
Current limit A Ith y 16 (with several relay output circuits simultaneously loaded)
Output fuse protection A 4 gL or 6 fast acting
4 Minimum current mA 10 (1)

Minimum voltage V 17 (1)
Solid-state Breaking capacity 24 V/2 A

Safety circuit 6 solid-state (O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, O6)
Current limit A Ith y 6.5 (with several relay output circuits simultaneously loaded
Electrical durability Consult our catalogue “Safety solutions using Preventa”

Response time on input opening ms < 20
4.2 < 30 for a safety mat
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 300 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to IEC 60647-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 part 1)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp.) kV 4 (overvoltage category III, conforming to IEC 60647-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 part 1)
LED indicators 30 (XPS MC16X), 46 (XPS MC32X)

Temperature Operating °C - 10…+ 55
Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 (connector and enclosure)

Connections Type (2) Separate plug-in screw connector Separate plug-in spring clip connector
XPS MCTSpp XPS MCTCpp
Power supply and relay output terminals
1 conductor Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…2.5 mm², AWG 24-12
With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5
mm² With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…2.5
2 conductors Without cable end mm² Solid or flexible cable: 0.2…1.5 –

With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5 –
mm² Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5…1.5 Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5…1
Tightening torque of screw contacts Nm 0.5…0.6 –

Wire stripping length mm 10
Other terminals
1 conductor Without cable end Solid or flexible cable: 0.14…1.5 mm², AWG 28-16
With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…1.5
mm² With bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…0.5
2 conductors Without cable end mm² Solid cable: 0.14…0.5 –

Flexible cable: 0.14…0.75
With cable end mm² Without bezel, flexible cable: 0.25…0.34 –
mm² Double, with bezel, flexible cable: 0.5 –
Enclosure fixing (conforming to DIN EN 50022) Metal adaptor for fixing on standard 5 35 mm rail
(1) The controller is also capable of switching low power loads (17 V/10 mA minimum) provided that the contact has not been used for switching high power loads,
causing possible contamination or wear of the gold layer on the contact tips.
(2) To be ordered separately.
Presentation: Description: References, dimensions:

page /10 page 4/11 page 4/13
4/12
dimensions 4
platform 4

Type XPS MC
References
Safety controllers (connector not included)
Number of Number of outputs Reference Weight
inputs Relay Solid-state kg
16 4 6 XPS MC16X 0.820
32 4 6 XPS MC32X 0.840
Connector (to be ordered separately)

Description For use with Reference Weight
XPS MC16X XPS MC32X kg
with screw connector with screw connector Screw XPS MC16X XPS MCTS16 0.080
XPS MCTS16 XPS MCTS32 connectors XPS MC32X XPS MCTS32 0.110
Spring clip XPS MC16X XPS MCTC16 0.080

connectors XPS MC32X XPS MCTC32 0.110
Accessories (to be ordered separately)

Description Usage Length Reference Weight
From To (m) kg
Connecting XPS MCppX Magelis operator 2.5 XBT Z968 0.180
cables dialogue terminal
PC 2.5 TSX PCX 1031 0.170 4
Adaptor Link between XPS MCppX and PC or XPS MCppX XPS MCCPC 0.011
and Magelis operator dialogue terminal
TSX PCX 1031 XPS MCCPC
Configuration software CD-ROM XPS MCWIN 0.200
For Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000 and XP.
Power supply unit c 24 V ABL 7RP2410 2.200
XPS MCppX 4.2
6
151,5
139,5
59
16 74 = =
6
(1)
17 40
74
(1) With connector XPS MCTSpp: 153 mm.

With connector XPS MCTCpp: 151.4 mm.

page /10 page 4/11 page 4/12
4/13
platform 4
Counter and electronic cam modules
Applications Counter modules
Number of channels 2 channels 4 channels

Frequency per channel 40 kHz 40 kHz
Module cycle time 5 ms 10 ms
Counter/measurement Counting pulses Up to 40 kHz:

input c 24 V - Proximity sensor type 2
- Mechanical contacts
4 Incremental encoder Up to 40 kHz :

- c 10…30 V
- c 5 V RS 422 with zero marker
Absolute encoder –
Reflex inputs/outputs Per channel:

- 3 inputs c 24 V: enable, preset and read
- 1 input c 24 V line check, incremental encoder power supply
4.2 - 2 reflex outputs c 24 V
Counting capacity 24 bits + sign (0 to + 16 777 215 points or ± 16 777 215 points)
Functions Downcounting with preset input, upcounting with reset to zero input
Up/down counting with preset input, configurable upcounter input:
- 1 upcounter input/1 downcounter input
- 1 up/down counter input and 1 direction input
- Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals
Processing Inputs: counter enable, counter preset, read current value

Comparison:
- Downcounting, to value 0
- Upcounting, 2 thresholds and 1 setpoint
- Up/down counting, 2 thresholds and 2 setpoints
Reflex outputs:
- Downcounting function, 1 passage through zero output
- Upcounting function,1 passage through setpoint value output
- Up/down counting function, 2 user-definable outputs
- Up/down counting function, 2 user-definable outputs
Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (threshold crossing, setpoint crossing,
preset or reset, enable, capture)
Connection - 15-way SUB-D connectors (1 per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP S15 pp accessory)
- HE 10 connector for auxiliary I/O and power supply
- Telefast 2 system (ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7H08R10/16R20)
Type of module TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A
Page 4/19
4/14
4
Fast counter and measurement module Electronic cam module
2 channels 1 channel
500 kHz
1 ms
Up to 1 MHz: –
- Proximity sensor type 2
- Mechanical contacts
500 kHz in multiplication by 1, 250 kHz in multiplication by 4:
- c 10…30 V
- c 5 V RS 422 with zero marker
4
Power supply c 5 V ou c 10…30 V:
- SSI absolute encoder up to 25 bits
- Parallel absolute encoder up to 24 bits (with Telefast ABE 7CPA11 sub-base)
Per channel :
- 2 inputs c 24 V : preset and read - 3 proximity sensor compatible inputs 24 V type I
- 1 enable input or c 24 V output, configurable - 24 track outputs 24 V/0.5 A protected
- 2 reflex outputs c 24 V 4.2
- 1 programmable frequency output 24 V
- 1 encoder power supply input c 5 V/24 V
24 bits + sign (0 to + 16 777 215, upcounting) or 24 bits + sign (- 16 777 215 to 256 to 32 768 points per cycle and from 1 to 32 768 cycles,(absorbs play on
+ 16 777 215, downcounting, up/down counting). Up to 25 bits for SSI absolute reverse)
encoder
Up/down counting with preset input, configurable counter input: Processing of 128 cams/32 tracks (of which 24 with direct output)
- 1 upcounter input/1 downcounter input Output update cycle:
- 1 up/down counter input and 1 direction input - 50 µs for 16 cams
- Incremental encoder with phase-shifted signals - 100 µs for 64 cams
Measurement 2: - 200 µs for 128 cams
- SSI absolute encoder Two capture registers
- Parallel output absolute encoder with ABE 7CPA11 sub-base Control/recalibration of axis slip
Inputs: counter enable, counter preset, read current value Cam profiles: 3 basic types (position, monostable, brake)
Comparison: Associated functions:
2 thresholds - Elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration
- Measurement capture
- Switching feedforward
- Parts counter
Reflex outputs:
2 user-definable outputs
Speed monitoring
Special functions
User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (crossing of thresholds or User-definable activation of the event-triggered task (cams, track, adjustment,
modulo value, preset, enable, capture) read, etc.)
- 15 way SUB-D connectors (1 per counter channel, direct or TSX TAP S15pp accessory)
- HE 10 connector for reflex I/O and power supply
- Telefast 2 system (ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7H16R20, ABE 7CPA11)
TSX CTY 2C TSX CCY 1128
4/23 4/26
4/15
description, platform 4
operation TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules
Presentation
Counting functions are required for counting parts or events, grouping objects,
incoming or outgoing flow control, and measuring the length or the position of
elements.
Premium PLCs perform these functions using TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules
which have a counting frequency of 40 kHz maximum. In a Premium PLC
configuration, the number of TSX CTY counter modules is added to the number of
other application-specific modules (communication, motion control and weighing).
See pages 1/30 and 1/35. They can be disconnected while powered up. Counter
modules are characterised by the number of channels :
b 2 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting functions for the
TSX CTY 2A module,
b 4 channels with downcounting, upcounting and up/down counting functions for the
TSX CTY 4A module.
The parameters of these functions are set by software configuration. The modules
accept c 5 V or c 10 to 30 V solid state output sensors (incremental encoders,
proximity sensors, photoelectric detectors) and mechanical contact output sensors
(in this case the counting frequency is limited to 100 Hz).
Description
4 3 The front panel of TSX CTY 2A (2-channel) and TSX CTY 4A (4-channel) counter
4 3 modules comprises:
1 4
1
1 One 15-way SUB-D type connector per channel for connecting:
b Counting sensors or incremental encoder.
b Sensor power supply.
b Encoder supply feedback for checking it is correctly supplied.
2 2 One 20-way HE10 type connector for 2 channels for connecting on each channel:
2
4.2 b Auxiliary inputs: preset, enable.
TSX CTY 2A b Reflex outputs.
TSX CTY 4A
b Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and incremental encoders.
3 Rigid casing which:

b Holds the electronic card.
b Locates and locks the module in its slot...
4 Module diagnostic LEDs:

b Module diagnostics:
CH2 CH0 RUN ERR v Green RUN LED: module operating,
CH3 CH1 I/O 4 v Red ERR LED: internal fault, module failure,
v Red I/O LED: external fault.
b Channel diagnostics:
v Green CHp LED: channel diagnostics available.
Operation block diagram

Block diagram of a channel
Configuration
and adjustment Discrete sensor or Incremental encoder input
%KW, %MW Configuration incremental Sensor inputs
parameters encoder signals
Auxiliary
I/O Counter enable input
Upcounting and/or Read input
%Q, %QW downcounting function with processing
Preset input
processing:
- measurement comparison
%I, %IW with 2 thresholds and
2 setpoints
- event management Reflex output 0
Reflex output 1
Counter modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro software (see page 6/59).
Characteristics: Connections: References:
4/16
platform 4
TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules
Electrical characteristics
Type of modules TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A
Modularity 2 channels 4 channels
Frequency on counter inputs kHz 40 maxi 40 maxi
Consumption mA see page 9/4 see page 9/4
Dissipated power W 4.5 typical (6 maxi) 8 typical (11.5 maxi)
Sensor power supply check yes yes
Module cycle time ms 5 10
Event processing response time ms Acceptance of event-triggered input (enable/read/preset) and positioning of:
- reflex output on TSX CTY 2A/4A: 1 ms
- discrete module output; TSX DSY 8T22: 2.1 ms; TSX DSY 32T2K: 3.2 ms
Type of input Counter inputs Auxiliary inputs
(IA/IB/IZ) (preset, enable, read)
Nominal values Voltage V 5 24 24

Current mA 18 18 7
Limit values Voltage V ≤ 5.5 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, 19...30 (up to 34 V possible,
limit 1 hr per 24 hr period) limit 1 hr per 24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 2.4 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA > 3.7 (for U = 2.4 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ 1.2 ≤5 ≤5
Current mA < 1 (for U = 1.2 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V)
Logic
Sensor voltage check response time
Positive Positive Positive 4
At loss of 24 V ms – – < 2.5
At return of 24 V ms ms – –
Input impedance For nominal U W 400 1400 3400
For U = 2.4 V W > 270 – –

(RS 422 compatibility)
Response time Maximum permissible frequency 40 kHz with incremental < 250 µs
encoder
Immunity 1.6 ms with mechanical contact
4.2
Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink
IEC 1131 conformity – Type 2 Type 2
2-wire proximity sensor compatibility – 2-wire/3-wire 2-wire/3-wire
Output characteristics
Type of output Auxiliary outputs (2 par channel)
Nominal voltage V c 24
Voltage limits V 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limit 1 hr per 24 hr period)
Nominal current mA 500
Maximum voltage drop when ON V < 0.5
Leakage current mA < 0.1
Switching time µs < 250
Electrostatic discharge time s L/R
Switching frequency on inductive load Hz F < 0.6 / (LI2)
Compatibility with d.c. inputs All positive logic inputs with input resistance < 15 kΩ
IEC 1131 2 compatibility yes
Protections against overloads and short-circuits Current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivated via program or automatically)
Protection against channel overvoltages Zener diode between outputs and + 24 V
Protection against polarity inversions Diode reverse-mounted on supply
page 4/19 page 4/18
4/17
dimensions platform 4
Connections
Examples of connecting counter inputs
Counter sensor 28
+ + —— c 24 V supply + 24 VDC 26
1 2 + + ——
— 0 VDC 27
Telefast 2 — 0 VDC 25
TSX CTY 4A EPSR 18
GND
3 3
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
Channel 2 Channel 0
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
IZ — 16
1
3
5
7
9
—
ABE 7CPA01
Channel 3 Channel 1 IZ + 24 V 14 Z 3-wire PNP
proximity
+
4 sensor
IB — 10
—
IB + 24 V 8 B
+
Channels 2 and 3 Channels 0 and 1
IA — 1
—
IA + 24 V 4 A
+
GND
4 Q1 315 Reflex
outputs
115
Auxiliary I/O 314
Supply c 24 V Q0
+ + —— 114
6 ++—— 110
ICapt1 Read
+
Telefast 2 210
5
109 Channel 1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
IVal1 Enable
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
+
209
4.2
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 108

+ ABE 7BV20 IPres1 Preset
208
+
313
Q1 Reflex
113
312 outputs
Q0
1 Incremental encoder 112
2 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector 106 Read
ICapt0
+
TSX TAP S15 05 TSX TAP S15 24 206

1 IB - 7 NC 1 NC 7 NC
105 Channel 0
2 Power ret. 8 IB + 5 V 2 NC 8 IB + 24 V Enable
+
IVal0
3 IZ + 5V 9 NC 3 IZ + 24 V 9 NC 205
4 IZ - 10 0V 4 NC 10 0V
104 Preset
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 5 IA + 24 V 11 NC
+
IPres0
6 IA - 12 +5V 6 NC 12 + 10…30 V 204
3 TSX CCP S15 cable with connector
4 TSX CAP S15 connector
102
5 TSX CDPpp1 preformed cable
101
6 TSX CDPpp2 or TSX CDP pp3 rolled ribbon or preformed cable with connectors Encoder
power supply 100
Dimensions
Connection interface for incremental encoder
TSX TAP S15 05/24
Mounting through enclosure (dust and damp proof)
- cut-out Ø 37,
∅ 5,5 - maximum panel thickness 5 mm.
43
70,4
27,4
31 38
55 47
page 4/17 page 4/19
4/18
platform 4
Counter modules
Type of input Characteristics Nb of Reference Weight
chan- (1) kg
nels
2/3-wire prox.sensors Counting 40 kHz 2 TSX CTY 2A 0.320
PNP/NPN, c 24 V, Cycle time 5 ms
Incremental encoder,
c 5 V RS 422, Counting 40 kHz 4 TSX CTY 4A 0.430
c 10…30 V Totem Pole Cycle time 10 ms
Description For connecting Connector type on Rep. Unit Reference Weight
TSX CTY pp kg
TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A SUB-D Counter sensors or SUB-D, 15-way 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050
connectors incremental encoder
(sold in lots of 2)
Telefast 2 connection Counter sensors SUB-D, 15-way – ABE 7CPA01 0.300
sub-bases and c 24 V power
supply
Auxiliary inputs, HE 10, 20-way – ABE 7H16R20 0.300

c 24 V power (for 2 channels )
supply and
ABE 7CPA01 c 5 V/10…30 V
encoder power
supply
Additional terminal
block
20 shunted terminals (Sold in lots of 5)
for ABE 7H16R20
– ABE 7BV20 0.030 4
sub-base
Connection Encoder SUB-D, 15-way 2 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260

interfaces for c 5 V RS 422
incremental encoder
ABE 7H16R20
Encoder c 10...30 V SUB-D, 15-way 2 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
Totem Pole
Connecting cables 4.2

Description From TSX CTY pp To Rep. Length Reference Weight
module kg
Cables 15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA01/ 3 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
TSX TAP S15 pp (cross-section connector ABE CPA11 sub-bases or 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
0.205 mm2) TSX TAP S15pp
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.300
(15-way SUB-D connector)
20-wire preformed Auxiliary inputs, Free end with colour-coded 5 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
cables c 24 V power wires 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
(500 mA max.) supply and
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.210
c 5 V/10…30 V
encoder power
supply
(HE 10, 20-way
moulded connector)
Rolled ribbon cable Auxiliary inputs, ABE 7H16R20 6 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090
(100 mA max.) c 24 V power Telefast 2 sub-base 2m TSX CDP 202 0.170
supply and (HE 10, 20-way connector)
3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
c 5 V/10…30 V
encoder power
TSX CCP S15 ppp TSX CDP p01 supply
(HE 10, 20-way
connector)
Connecting cables Auxiliary inputs, ABE 7H16R20 6 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
(500 mA max.) c 24 V power Telefast 2 sub-base 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
supply and (HE 10, 20-way connector)
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
c 5 V/10…30 V
encoder power 3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
supply 5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
(HE 10, 20-way
connector)
TSX CDP p02 TSX CDP p03
Characteristics:
page 4/17
4/19
operation TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module
Presentation
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module is used with fast machines
requiring precise measurements with short cycle times and high input frequencies
(timber machines, packing machines, etc).
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module provides the standard functions
(speed monitoring, reflex outputs, etc) enabling a simple position control function to
be performed by the application program.
The TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module also enables special functions
to be managed.
Description
3 The front panel of a TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module comprises:
4
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting:
1
v Counting sensors or incremental encoder,
v SSI absolute encoder or parallel output encoder with ABE 7CPA11 sub-base,
v Sensor power supply,
v Encoder power supply feedback for checking it is correctly supplied.
4 2 One 20-way HE10 connector for connecting on each channel :

2 v Auxiliary inputs: preset, enable and read,
v Reflex outputs,
v Programmable frequency output,
TSX CTY 2C v Power supplies for auxiliary I/O and encoders.

v Holds the electronic card,
v Locates and locks the module in its slot...
4.2
CH0 RUN ERR 4 Module diagnostic lamps:
CH1 I/O 4
v Module diagnostic:
- Green RUN: module operating.
- Red ERR lamp: internal fault, module failure.
- Red I/O lamp: external fault.
v Channel diagnostic:
- Green CHp lamp: channel diagnostics available.

Block diagram of a channel:
Configuration
and adjustment Discrete sensor Incremental encoder input
%KW, %MW signals or Detector inputs
Configuration
parameters
incremental SSI absolute encoder inputs
encoder or SSI Parallel output encoder inputs
absolute encoder
Auxiliary I/O Enable input (1)

Upcounting/downcounting processing Read input
function and measurement
%Q, %QW with processing:
Preset input
- measurement comparison
%I, %IW with 2 thresholds Reflex output 0
- event management Reflex output 1
- speed monitoring Output 2 (1)
Programmable frequency output 3
Counter modules are set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software (see pages
6/6 or 6/56). This requires the use of TSX P/PCX 57pp2/3M processors and Atrium
TPCX57 pp2M/3M coprocessors.
(1) The enable input and output 2 cannot be used simultaneously.
page 4/21 page 4/23
4/20
platform 4
TSX CTY 2C measurement and counter module
Type of module TSX CTY 2C
Modularity 2 channels
Frequency on counter inputs Counting: 1 MHz.
With phase-shifted signal encoder: multiplication by 1: 500 kHz, multiplication by 4: 250 kHz
Consumption mA see page 9/4

Dissipated power W 7 typical (10 max.)
Sensor power supply check Yes
Module cycle time ms 1 (for 2 channels)
Event processing ms Acceptance of event-triggered input (enable/read/preset) and positioning of
response time - a reflex output: 1 ms
- discrete output modules TSX DSY 8T22: 2.1 ms ; TSX DSY 32T2K: 3.2 ms.
Type of input Counter inputs Auxiliary inputs
(IA/IB/IZ or SSI absolute (IA/IB/IZ ) (preset, enable, read)
encoder)
Nominal values Voltage V 5 24 24
Current mA 18 16 8
limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 2.4 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA > 3.6 (for U = 2.4 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage
Current
V
mA
≤ 1.2
< 1 (for U = 1.2 V)
≤5
< 2 (for U = 5 V)
≤5
< 2 (for U = 5 V)
4
Sensor voltage check response At loss of 24 V ms – – < 2.5
time
At return of 24 V ms – – < 10
Input impedance For nominal U W 400 1500 3400

Input impedance for U = 2.4 V (RS 422 compatibility) W > 270 – –
Response time µs – – < 50
Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink
4.2
IEC 1131 conformity – Type 2 Type 2
Proximity sensor compatibility – 2-wire/3-wire 2-wire/3-wire
Type of output Auxiliary outputs (2 per channel)
Voltage limits V 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
Maximum voltage drop when ON V < 0.5
Leakage current mA < 0.1
Switching time µs < 250
Electrostatic discharge time s L/R
Switching frequency on inductive load Hz F < 0.6 / (LI2)
Compatibility with d.c. inputs All positive logic inputs with input resistance < 15 kΩ
IEC 1131 2 compatibility Yes
Protection against overloads and short-circuits Current limiter and thermal tripping (reactivation via program or automatically)
Protection against channel overvoltages Zener diode between outputs and + 24 V
Protection against polarity inversions Diode reverse-mounted on supply
References:
page 4/23
4/21
Connections
Examples of connecting counter inputs
Counter sensor 28
+ + —— c 24 V supply power + 24 VDC 26
1 4 + + —— - 0 VDC 27
Telefast 2 - 0 VDC 25
TSX CTY 2C
EPSR 18
GND
5 5
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
11
Channel 0 Channel 0
1
3
5
7
9
IZ — 16
ABE-7CPA01
-
2 Channel 1 Channel 1 IZ + 24 V 14 Z
6 3-wire PNP
+
+ + —— proximity
IB — 10
—
5 sensor
+ + ——
IB + 24 V 8 B
Telefast 2
+
IA — 1
—
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
11
A
1
3
5
7
9
IA + 24 V 4
ABE-7CPA11
+
3
GND
4
Auxiliary I/O
c 24 V power spply
+ + —— 315 Reflex
Q1
115 output
8 ++ —— 314
Q0
Telefast 2 114 Frequency
7 311 output
Q3
111
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
111
1
2
3
4
Read
110
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
212
213
214
215
211
Channel 1
4.2 ICapt1
+
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
312
313
314
315
210
311
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 109 Enable

IVal1
+ ABE-7BV20
209 +
108 Preset
IPres1
+
1 Incremental encoder 208

313 Reflex
2 SSI serial absolute encoder fitted with its cable Q1
113 output
3 Parallel output absolute encoder 312
Q0
4 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector 112
307 Frequency
TSX TAP S15 05 TSX TAP S15 24 Q3 output
107
1 IB - 7 NC 1 NC 7 NC Read Channel 0
106
2 Ret. Alim 8 IB + 5 V 2 NC 8 IB + 24 V ICapt0
+
206
3 IZ + 5V 9 NC 3 IZ + 24 V 9 NC Enable
105
4 IZ - 10 0V 4 NC 10 0V IVal0
+
205
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 5 IA + 24 V 11 NC Preset
104
6 IA - 12 +5V 6 NC 12 + 10…30 V IPres0
+
204
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connectors
6 TSX CAP S15 connector
7 TSX CDPpp1 preformed cable 103 Reference voltage
8 TSX CDPpp2 or TSX CDP pp3 rolled ribbon or preformed cable Encoder 102
power
supply 101
100
5V
Dimensions
TSX TAP S15 05/24s
Mounting through enclosure (dust and damp proof):
- cut-out Ø 37
- maximum panel thickness 5 mm
43
70,4
27,4
31 38
55 47
page 4/21 page 4/23
4/22
platform 4
Measurement and counter module

Type of input Characteristics Rep Nb of Reference (1) Weight
channels kg
2/3-wire prox.sensors Counting – 2 TSX CTY 2C 0.340
PNP/NPN, c 24 V, Cycle time 1 ms
Incremental encoder,
c 5 V RS 422,
c 10…30 V Totem Pole
SSI serial or parallel output absolute Cycle time 1 ms
encoders with ABE 7CPA11 sub-base
TSX CTY 2C Connection accessories

Description For connecting Connector type Rep. Unit reference Weight
on TSX CTY 2C kg
SUB-D Counter sensors or SUB-D, 15-way 6 TSX CAP S15 0.050
connector incremental encoder
(sold in lots of 2)
Telefast 2 Counter sensors and SUB-D, 15-way – ABE 7CPA01 0.300
connection c 24 V power supply
ABE 7CPA01 sub-base Auxiliary inputs, HE 10, 20-way – ABE 7H16R20 0.300
supply c 24 V and (for 2 channels)
encoder supply
c 5 V/10…30 V
Additional 20 shunted terminals (Order in multiples of 5) – ABE 7BV20 0.300
terminal block for ABE 7H16R20
sub-base
ABE 7H16R20
Adaptor
sub-base for
Parallel output
absolute encoders
SUB-D, 15-way – ABE 7CPA11 0.300 4
TSX CTY 2C c 5 V, c 10…30 V
module (2)
Connection Encoder SUB-D, 15-way 4 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
interfaces for c 5 V RS 422
incremental Encoder c 10...30 V SUB-D, 15-way 4 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260
TSX TAP S15 pp encoder Totem Pole
Connecting cables
Description From TSX CTY 2C To Rep. Length Reference Weight 4.2
module kg
Cables 15-way, SUB-D ABE 7CPA01/ 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
(cross-section connector ABE CPA11 sub-base 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
0.205 mm2) or TSX TAP S15pp
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.300
accessory
(15-way, SUB-D
connector)
20-wire Auxiliary inputs supply Free end with flying 7 3m TSX CCP 301 0.400
preformed c 24 V and encoder leads 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
cables supply c 5 V/10…30 V
10 ms TSX CDP 1001 1.210
(500 mA max.) (20-way, HE 10
moulded connector)
TSX CCP S15 ppp TSX CDP p01
Rolled ribbon Auxiliary inputs supply ABE 7H16R20 8 1m TSX CDP 102 0.090
cables c 24 V and encoder Telefast 2 sub-base 2m TSX CDP 202 0.170
(100 mA max.) supply c 5 V/10…30 V (20-way, HE 10
3m TSX CDP 302 0.250
(20-way, HE 10 connector)
connector)
Connecting Auxiliary inputs supply ABE 7H16R20 8 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
cables c 24 V and encoder Telefast 2 sub-base 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
(500 mA max.) supply c 5 V/10…30 V (20-way, HE 10
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
(20-way, HE 10 connector)
moulded connector) 3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
(2) Enables multiplexing of 2 absolute encoders on the same channel (up to 4 absolute encoders
when using 2 ABE 7CPA11 adaptor sub-bases).
TSX CDP p02 TSX CDP p03
page 4/21 page 4/23
4/23
operation platform 4
TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module
The TSX CCY 1128 module performs the “electronic cam” function for an animated
axis of a rotary movement in a single direction, alternating, cyclical (with periodic
Premium arrival of parts for processing) or endless (with random arrival of parts for processing).
The axis is managed by an incremental or absolute encoder.
The TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module manages, independently, up to 128 cams
which may be spread over a maximum of 32 tracks to which 24 discrete physical
Encoder Motor outputs and 8 logic outputs may be assigned.
Processing is structured in 4 groups of 8 tracks each, with groups 0 and 1 associated
with the module connector 0 and groups 2 and 3 with connector 1.
The TSX CCY 1128 module can be used for the following functions: elimination of
Track outputs axis backlash, position recalibration, capturing measurements (part length, number
of points per revolution, angle of arrival of parts, slip, etc), anticipation of switching,
Preactuators parts counter, generating events.
Like all application-specific modules, the TSX CCY 1128 module can be installed in
any slot of a Premium PLC, except those dedicated to the power supply and the
processor.
Description
The front panel of the TSX CCY 1128 electronic cam module comprises :
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector for connecting the incremental or absolute

encoder.
4 2 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the track outputs on groups 0 and 1
(connector 0).
3 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the track outputs on groups 2 and 3
5 (connector 1).
6 4 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting the auxiliary inputs and the encoder
power supply.
5 Rigid casing for the following functions:

1
v Holding the electronic cards,
2
v Attaching and locking the module in its slot.
4.2
3 6 Module diagnostic indicator lights:
4 v Module diagnostics :
- green RUN indicator lamp: module on,
TSX CCY 1128 - red ERR indicator lamp: internal fault, module defective,
- red I/O indicator lamp: external or application fault.
v Channel diagnostics:
- green CH0 indicator lamps: channel diagnostics operative.
CH0 RUN ERR 6
I/O Operation
Block diagram of channel
Configuration
+ adjustment
Encoder inputs
Servo loop
%KW.%MW Configuration
parameters
Track outputs
Auxiliary input Recalibration input

Processing
%O, %QW processing Read input 1
Read input 2
%I, %IW
The electronic cam module is set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro (version ≥ 3.4)
and requires the use of processors with software version ≥ 3.3.
Characteristics: References: Connections :

4/24
platform 4
Operating characteristics
Number of cams 128 position, monostable, brake type
Number of tracks 32 (24 directly associated with the 24 physical outputs, 8 logic)
Position encoder inputs Incremental with RS 422/485 line emitter or Totem Pole output
Absolute with SSI serial link
Absolute with parallel outputs (via ABE 7CPA11 adaptor sub-base)
Controlled outputs 24 discrete outputs 24 V, 0.5 A
Associated functions Elimination of axis backlash, position recalibration, measurement capture, switching
feedforward, parts counter, generation of events
Modularity 1 axis
Max.frequency on encoder input
SSI absolute CLK transmission frequency kHz 200
encoder
8 to 25 bits
Incremental encoder x1 kHz 500
x4 kHz 250
Current drawn by On internal 5 V with internal module mA 660
the module fan during operation
(typical) On 24 V sensors/preactuators mA 15
(auxiliary inputs and track outputs
On 10…30 V (use of an SSI encoder mA 11
and single 24 V power supply)
Power dissipated in the module (typical) W 7
Monitoring of sensor/preactuator power supplies Yes 4
Output refresh cycle µs 50 (up to 16 cams), 100 (up to 32 cams), 200 (up to 128 cams)
Type of input Encoder inputs (IA/IB/IZ) Auxiliary inputs
with RS 422 with 10…30 V (recalibration, capture 0,
capture 1)
Logic Differential inputs Positive or negative Positive
Nominal values Voltage V – 24 24
Current mA 10 15.5 8
Sensor power supply V ≤ 5.5 19…30 (possible up to 34 V limited to 1 hr in 24 hrs)
4.2
Limit values At state 1 Voltage >3 ≥ 11 ≥ 11
Current mA > 5.8 >5 >3
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ -3 <5 <5
Current mA ≤ - 5.8 <2 < 1.5
Input impedance for nominal U Ω – 1500 3000
Type of input Resistive Resistive Resistive
Response time µs – – < 100
Conformity with IEC 1131 – – Type 1
Compatibility w. 2-wire sensors – – Yes (with 24 V)
Compatibility w. 3-wire sensors – – Yes (with 24 V)
Type of output Track outputs
Nominal values Voltage V 24
Current mA 500
Limit values Voltage V 19…30 (possible up to 34 V limited to 1 hr in 24 hrs)
Max.current Per output for U c 30 or 34 V mA 600
Per connectorr A ≤6
Per module A ≤ 12
Maximum power for tungsten filament lamp W 10
Switching frequency on an inductive load Hz < 0.6/LI2
Electro. discharge time s < L/R
Preactuator voltage monitoring OK V > 18
threshold Fault V < 14
Compatibility with d.c. inputs All positive logic inputs whose input resistance is < 15 kΩ
Protection Against overloads and short-circuits By current limiter and thermal circuit-breaker
Against overvoltages on outputs By Zener diode between the outputs and the + 24 V
Against polarity inversions By reverse diode on the power supply
Conformity with IEC 1131 2 Yes
References: Connections :
page 4/26 page 4/27
4/25
platform 4
Electronic cam module

Type of output Characteristics Nb of Reference Weight
axes (1) kg
Incremental encoder 500 kHz counting 1 TSX CCY 1128 0.480
Supplied with 5 V or 10…30 V, with RS 422/485, or 5 V w. incremental
Totem Pôle outputs (2) encoder
Absolute encoder RS 485 serial or parallel (3) Acquisition 200 kHz

with serial absolute
encoder
TSX CCY 1128 Connection accessories

Description For connection of Type of connectors Ref. (4) Unit reference Weight
on TSX CCY 1128 kg
SUB-D connector SSI 15-way 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050
(sold in lots of 2) absolute/incremental SUB-D
encoder
TSX TAP S15pp
Connection interfaces for c 5 V RS 422/RS 485 15-way 6 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
incremental encoder encoder SUB-D
c 10…30 V 15-way 6 TSX TAP S15 24 0.260

Totem Pôle SUB-D
Telefast 2 connection Auxiliary inputs, 20-way HE 10 – ABE 7H16R20 0.300

sub-base c 5…24 V encoder (1 per module)
4 ABE 7CPA11
power supply
Track outputs 20-way HE 10 – ABE 7H16R20 0.300

(1 per 2 groups)
Adaptor sub-base Absolute encoder with 15-way – ABE 7CPA11 0.300

parallel outputs SUB-D
ABE 7H16R20 (16 to 24 bits)
c 5 V, 10…30 V
4.2 Connection cables

Description From To Ref. Length Unit reference Weight
(4) kg
Cables with connectors TSX CCY 1128 TSX TAP S15 pp 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
module interface or
15-way SUB-D ABE 7CPA11 adaptor 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
connector sub-base
(15-way SUB-D
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.220
connector)
Connection cables TSX CCY 1128 ABE 7H16R20 7. 9 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
(500 mA max.) module sub-base
20-way insulated (20-way HE 10 1 TSX CDP 103 0.150
HE 10 connector connector)
2 TSX CDP 203 0.280
TSX CDP p03
3 TSX CDP 303 0.410
5 TSX CDP 503 0.670
Preformed cables with flying TSX CCY 1128 Auxiliary inputs, 8 3 TSX CDP 301 0.400
leads module power supply signals
(500 mA max.) 20-way insulated (free end) 5 TSX CDP 501 0.660
HE 10 connector
(2) Totem Pole encoder with complementary Push/Pull outputs.
(3) Absolute encoders with parallel outputs with ABE 7CPA11 adaptor interface.
(4) Diagram references (see page 4/27).
TSX CDP p01
TSX CCP S15 ppp
Characteristics : Connections :
page 4/26 page 4/27
4/26
platform 4
Connections
Examples of encoder connections Examples of auxiliary input connections
1 4
Auxiliary input sensor
+ + —— c 24 V power supply
—
307
4 ++ —— Read1 input
1a 107
Telefast 2 207
+
108 Read 2 input
+
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
208
1
2
3
4
2 6 5
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
104 Recalibration input
204
+
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE-7H16R20 103 Encoder supply monitoring
102
+ 10/30 V
5 +5V Encoder
100
101
0V supply
+ + ——
Telefast 2 7
TSX CCY 1128
Example of track output preactuator connection
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
8
4
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE-7CPA11
Track output preactuator
8 + + —— c 24 V power supply
211
Track 3 Q1/3,3
++ —— 111 —
3 210
Track 2 Q1/3,2
9 Telefast 2 110 — Groups
209 1 and 3
109
Track 1 Q1/3,3
—
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
208
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
108 Track 0 Q0/3,3

—
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
207
C
C
C
C
Track 7 Q0/2,7
ABE-7H16R20 107
206
— 4.2
1 Incremental or absolute encoder Track 6 Q0/2,6
106 —
1 Incremental or absolute encoder with 12-way DIN connector output 205
Track 5 Q0/2,5
105 —
2 5 V RS 422/485 Totem Pole incremental encoder 204 Groups
Track 4 Q02,4
3 Absolute encoder with parallel outputs 104 —
0 and 2
203
4 TSX CAP S15 connector Track 3 Q0/2,3
103 —
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connectors 202
102
Track 2 Q0/2,2
6 TSX TAP S15 05/24 connector —
201
101
Track 1 Q0/2,1
TSX TAP S15 05 TSX TAP S15 24 —
200
1 IB- 7 NC 1 NC 7 NC 100 Track 0 Q0/2,0
—
2 Sup.Ret. 8 IB + 5 V 2 NC 8 IB + 5 V 115
114
3 IZ + 5 V 9 NC 3 IZ + 24 V 9 NC 113 + 24 V commons
4 IZ - 10 0V 4 NC 10 0V 112
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC 5 IA + 24 V 11 NC 1
6 IA - 12 +5V 6 NC 12 + 10…30 V
7 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connectors
8 TTSX CDPp01 preformed cable with flying leads
9 TSX CDPp03 cable with connectors
Dimensions
Connection interface for TSX TAP S15 05/24 incremental encoder
Enclosure feedthrough mounting (dust and damp proof)
- cut-out Ø 37,
- maximum panel thickness 5 mm.
43
70,4
27,4
31 38
55 47
page 4/25 page 4/26
4/27
platform 4
Premium motion control modules
Applications Motion control modules for stepper motor Motion control modules for servomotors
Compatible with:
- Lexium MHDA servodrives with analog setpoint
- Altivar ATV 38/58/68 variable speed drives
Number of axes 1 axis 2 axes 2 axes 4 axes

Frequency per axis 187 kHz Counter: 500 kHz with incremental encoder
Counter input Per axis: Per axis:

Translator inputs c 5 V, negative logic Incremental encoder c 5 V, RS 422/RS 485
(translator loss of step checks) or Totem pole
SSI serial absolute encoder 16 to 25 bits
4 c 10…30 V
Parallel output absolute encoder 16 to 24 bits
c 5/10/30 V with Telefast 2 conversion
sub-base (ABE 7CPA11)
Control outputs Per axis: Per axis:

RS 422 translator outputs, TTL 5 V 1 analog output ± 10 V, 13 bits + sign,
compatible (+/- pulses, boost, enable, reset
loss of step check)
4.2
Auxiliairy input/output Per axis: Per axis:
6 discrete inputs c 24 V 4 discrete I/O c 24 V (homing cam, event, recalibration,
1 output c 24 V (brake control) 1 input/1 output for servodrive control
1 reflex output c 24 V
Counter capacity 24 bits + sign (± 16 777 215 points)
Functions Servo Control on individual linear axis
Processing Open loop control of the position of a moving Positioning of a moving part on an axis according
part on a limited linear axis according to
motion control functions supplied by the PLC
processor
Axis parameter setting, adjustment and Axis parameter setting, adjustement and debugging using
debugging using PL7 Junior/Pro and
Unity Pro software
Events User-definable activation of the event-triggered task
Connection - 15-way SUB-D connector for translator - 9 and 15-way SUB-D connectors for encoder input
- 20-way HE 10 connector for auxiliary I/O - HE 10 connector for auxiliary inputs
- Telefast 2 system (ABE 7H16R20) - Telefast 2 system (ABE 7CPA01, ABE 7H16R20,
- Specific accessories (TSX TAP MAS)
Type of modules TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21 TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 41
Page 4/37 4/41
4/28
4
Motion control modules for servomotors

Compatible with Lexium MHDA servodrives equipped with
optional card SERCOS
2 axes 4 axes 3 axes 8 axes 16 axes

Acquisition: 200 kHz with SSI serial absolute encoder or parallel output SERCOS ring: 4 M bauds
Per axis: Per SERCOS digital link

- Incremental encoder c 5 V, RS 422/RS 485 or Totem pole,
- SSI serial absolute encoder 12 to 25 bits
Parallel output absolute encoder 12 to 24 bits c 5/10/30 V with Telefast 2 conversion sub-base
(ABE 7CPA11) 4
Per SERCOS digital link

servodrive setpoint
4.2
Per SERCOS digital link
emergency stop)
Servo control on individual infinite axis Servo control on individual Individual linear or infinite axis
Follower axes (dynamic ratio) linear or infinite axis Linear interpolation on 2 to 8 axes
Realtime correction of servodrive offset Linear interpolation on 2 or Follower axes (6 slaves) by gearing or camming
Flying shear on position or – 3 axes Manual mode (JOG and INC) (1)
event (1) Realtime correction of Special functions, see page 4/50
servodrive offset
to motion control functions supplied by the Premium PLC processor
PL7 Junior/Pro and Unity Pro software (2) Axis parameter setting,
adjustment and debugging
using PL7 Junior/Pro
software
(direct or via TSX TAP S15pp ), speed reference 2 SMA type connectors for plastic (or glass) fiber optic cable
ABE 7CPA11),
TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33 TSX CSY 84 TSX CSY 164
4/54
(1) Function not available with Premium platform under Unity Pro software.
(2) The Unity Pro software is not compatible with the TSX CSY 164 module.
4/29
The Twin Line range Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Presentation
Twin Line servodrives and SER brushless motors are the latest additions to the
Schneider Electric range of motion control products.
± 10 V
In response to the demands of an ever widening range of industrial applications, we
Encoder have created the most flexible servodrives possible, so that they can be economically
integrated into machine designers' preferred architectures.
Twin Line TLD and TLC servodrives

TLD 13
Control built-in to PLC
Premium and Quantum automation platforms offer, as part of their interface ranges,
axis control modules with analog outputs for position control functions: TSX CAY,
multi-axis control modules (2 to 4 axes), or 140 MSB 10100 single-axis control
modules.
These modules, associated with Twin Line TLD 13 modules, offer unequalled ease
of integration and installation of motion control (intelligent position control) in the
Discrete I/O automation sequence.
Discrete control
TLC 43
4 Twin Line TLC 43 servodrives are fitted with a position controller that can be easily
controlled via the discrete input/output lines of a PLC.
This simple configuration, offering all the precision of Twin Line servodrives, is for
applications involving a small number of axes, with little synchronization and rarely
requiring adjustment of servodrive settings.
4.2 Control by industrial field bus

Field bus
The Twin Line TLC 53 range of servodrives offers, in addition to built-in position
control in the servodrive, a wide choice of communication bus connections.
This possibility of communication via industrial field buses widens the range of
applications by facilitating remote adjustment and maintenance operations.
Programmable motion controller
TLC 53 TLC 53 TLC 53 In order to respond to applications which also require straightforward sequential
control with field bus inputs/outputs, Twin Line TLC 63 servodrives are motion
controllers which can be programmed in graphic or textual automation languages,
compliant with the standard IEC 61131-3.
The Twin Line TLC 63 servodrive naturally occupies the master position of multi-axis
applications managed by Twin Line TLC 53 servodrives.
Field bus
SER brushless motors
The technology of SER brushless motors means they are well-suited to the most
demanding dynamic and precision applications within continuous torque ranges from
0.3 to 13.4 Nm.
They are fitted with a thermal probe protection system and a single turn or multiturn
PLC
SinCos Hiperface integrated sensor.
Depending on the model, they are fitted with:
TLC 63 TLC 53 TLC 53 b Failsafe holding brake.
b IP 41 or IP 56 degree of protection.
b Gearboxes of ratio 3:1, 5:1 or 8:1.
4/30
The Twin Line range Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Association of SER brushless motors and

Twin Line servodrives
SER brushless motors Twin Line TLD and TLC servodrives

(IP 41 or IP 56) (IP 20 or IP 54)
TLp p32 TLp p34 TLp p36 TLp p38

3 A / 750 W 3 A / 1.5 kW 6 A / 3 kW 16 A / 8 kW
single phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
SER 364 3L 3S 12,000 rpm (1) 0.3/0.8 Nm
SER 364 3L 5S 0.3/1.1 Nm
SER 364 3L 7S
SER 366 3L 3S
0.3/1.3 Nm
0.5/1.1 Nm
4
SER 366 3L 5S 0.5/1.6 Nm
SER 366 3L 7S 0.5/2.1 Nm
SER 368 3L 3S 0.7/1.5 Nm
SER 368 3L 5S 0.7/1.9 Nm
SER 368 3L 7S 0.7/3 Nm
SER 36A 3L 3S 0.7/1.5 Nm

4.2
SER 36A 3L 5S 0.9/2.1 Nm
SER 36A 3L 7S 0.9/3.6 Nm
SER 39A 4L 3S 6000 rpm (1) 1.1/2.4 Nm
SER 39A 4L 7S 1.1/4 Nm 1.1/4 Nm
SER 39B 4L 3S 4.2/2.2 Nm 4.2/2.2 Nm 7.8/2.2 Nm
SER 39B 4L 7S 8/2.2 Nm 8/2.2 Nm
SER 39C 4L 3S 2.3/4.8 Nm 2.3/4.8 Nm 2.9/11.5 Nm
SER 39C 4L 5S 2.9/6.8 Nm 2.9/6.8 Nm 2.9/11.5 Nm
SER 39C 4L 7S 2.9/11.5 Nm 2.9/11.5 Nm
SER 39D 4L 5S 3.1/6.4 Nm 3.1/6.4 Nm 3.6/11.5 Nm
SER 3BA 4L 3S 6000 rpm (1) 2.3/4.6 Nm 2.3/4.6 Nm 4.6/14.5 Nm 4.6/18 Nm
SER 3BA 4L 5S 4.3/7.6 Nm 4.3/7.6 Nm 4.6/18 Nm
SER 3BA 4L 7S 4.6/12.8 Nm 4.6/12.8 Nm 4.6/18 Nm
SER 3BB 4L 3S 3/6 Nm 3/6 Nm 6/19 Nm 6.6/25 Nm
SER 3BB 4L 5S 4/8 Nm 4/8 Nm 6.6/19.5 Nm 6.6/23 Nm
SER 3BB 4L 7S 6.6/15 Nm 6.6/15 Nm 6.6/25 Nm
SER 3BC 4L 5S 4500 rpm (1) 4.3/8.5 Nm 4.3/8.5 Nm 8.5/27 Nm 10/38 Nm
SER 3BC 4L 7S 8.3/16.5 Nm 8.3/16.5 Nm 10/38 Nm 10/38 Nm
SER 3BD 4L 5D 8.7/26.8 Nm 13.4/40 Nm
SER 3BD 4L 7S 7.9/15.7 Nm 7.9/15.7 Nm 13.4/39 Nm 13.4/48 Nm
0.3/0.8 Nm The 1st value corresponds to the continuous stall torque, 2nd value corresponds to the peak stall torque
Selected example: the motor SER 364 3L 3S associated with the TLp p32 answers to the demands of applications
servodrive
requiring at most 0.3 Nm of continuous stall torque, 0.8 Nm of peak torque and a maximum mechanical speed of 12,000 rpm.
(1) Maximum mechanical speed.
4/31
Lexium offer Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Lexium motion control

Presentation
Analog setpoint or digital Stand alone mode with The axis control offer is intended for machines which simultaneously require high
link mode integral position indexer performance servo motion control, associated with PLC sequential control.
Position control system
Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum automation platforms offer a range of

interfaces including axis control modules providing a position control function. These
modules are:
b Analog output modules:

v TSX CAY, multi-axis control (2 to 4 axes) for Premium,
v 140 MSB, single-axis control for Quantum
b Modules with SERCOS digital link:

v TSX CSY, controls up to 16 servodrives for Premium,
v 141 MMS, controls up to 22 servodrives for Quantum.
Lexium MHDA servodrive
Lexium servodrives provide solid state switching, current (or torque), speed and
position control.
Three types of servodrive, each available in 7 current ratings (1.5, 3, 6, 10, 20, 40
and 70 A permanent rms), are available:
4 b + 10 V analog setpoint, controlled by position control module of PLC.
b Stand alone mode with integral position indexer, controlled by:
v discrete inputs/outputs (1),
v CANopen bus,
v Modbus Plus network, Fipio bus or Profibus DP bus (1).
b SERCOS high speed digital link (1) allows Lexium servodrives to be controlled by
PLC position control module.
4.2 Lexium brushless motors
Brushless motors are synchronous, 3-phase motors. They are equipped with a built-
in sensor which can be a resolver or a SinCos Hiperface absolute encoder. They are
provided with or without holding brake. Two ranges of motors are available:
SER motors
They are equipped with Neodynium Iron Borium (NdFeB) magnets and provide a
high power density within a confined space, as well as large velocity dynamic that
meet all machine requirements. They have:
b IP 41 or IP 56 protection.
b With or without gearbox. These gearboxes are offered with three speed reduction
ratios 3:1, 5:1 and 8:1.
b Smooth shaft end (2) (for the model without gearbox) or with key (for the model
with gearbox).
BPH motors
Their design, with samarium cobalt permanent magnets, ensures perfect rotation
even at low speed. Depending on the model, they have:
b IP 65 or IP 67 protection (IP 54 for BPH 055 motor).
b Keyed or smooth shaft ends.
Configuration and installation
Motion control applications are designed and installed using:

b PL7 Junior/Pro (for Premium PLCs) software.
b Concept (for Quantum PLCs) software.
b Unity Pro (for Premium or Quantum PLCs) software.
Unilink user software, in association with Lexium servodrives, provides configuration

and adjustment of the parameters for these servodrives.
(1) Requires use of an optional card (one slot available per MHDA servodrive).
(2) Shaft end with key for the model without a gearbox, please contact our Regional Sales Office.
4/32
Lexium offer Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Association of brushless motors and

Lexium servodrives
SER brushless motors Digital Lexium MHDA servodrives Lexium BPH brushless
(IP 41 or IP 56) motors
(IP 65 or IP 67)
MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA MHDA

1004p00 1008p00 1017p00 1028p00 1056p00 1112A00 1198A00
1.5 A rms 3 A rms 6 A rms 10 A rms 20 A rms 40 A rms 70 A rms
0.4/1.1 Nm 8,000 rpm BPH 0552 S
0.9/1.9 Nm 1.3/3.4 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 0751 N
SER 39A 4L7S 6,000 rpm 1.1/2.5 Nm 1.1/4 Nm
SER 39B 4L3S 6,000 rpm 2.2/4.4 Nm 2.2/8.0 Nm

4
1.3/2.5 Nm 2.3/4.8 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 0752 N
SER 39C 4L3S 6,000 rpm 2.9/4.7 Nm 2.9/9.4 Nm
3.7/7.2 Nm 4.3/13.4 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 0952 N
SER 3BA 4L3S 6,000 rpm 4.6/9.2 Nm 4.6/15.3 Nm

4.2
SER 3BA 4L5S 6,000 rpm 4.6/8.2 Nm 4.6/15 Nm
6.0/13.4 Nm 6.0/20.3 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 0953 N
SER 3BB 4L3S 6,000 rpm 6.6/12 Nm 6.6/20 Nm
SER 3BB 4L5S 6,000 rpm 6.6/15.8 Nm 6.6/25 Nm
7.4/13.6 Nm 7.4/19.3 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 1152 N
6.8/13.5 Nm 10.5/19 Nm 6,000 rpm BPH 1153 N
SER 3BC 4L5S 6,000 rpm 10/17 Nm 10/28 Nm
SER 3BC 4L7S 3,000 rpm 10/16 Nm 10/32 Nm
11.4/18 Nm 12/30 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 1422 N
SER 3BD 4L5D 6,000 rpm 13.4/29 Nm
SER 3BD 4L7S 3,000 rpm 13.4/24 Nm 13.4/38 Nm
14.5/24 Nm 17/42 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 1423 N
25/37.5 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 1902 N
36/57 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 1903 K
46/76.2 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 1904 K
75/157 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 1907 K
90/163 Nm 100/230 Nm 4,000 rpm BPH 190A K
1.1/2.5 Nm For a SER motor, the 1st value corresponds to continuous stall torque max., the 2nd value corresponds to peak stall torque max.
1.3/3.4 Nm For a SER/Lexium BPH motor, the 1st value corresponds to continuous stall torque max., the 2nd value corresponds to peak stall torque max.
Example: The SER 3BB 4L3S motor associated with the MHDA1017 servodrive meets the requirements of applications requiring a
6.6 Nm continuous stall torque max, 12 Nm peak stall torque max. and 6,000 rpm mechanical speed.
4/33
TSX CFY 11/21 modules for stepper motors
Presentation
Fip The TSX CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control range is intended for machines which
simultaneously require motion control by stepper motor associated with sequential
control by programmable controller.
Amplifier The TSX CFY 11 module controls, via an amplifier for stepper motor, 1 axis
(channel 0). The TSX CFY 21 module controls 2 axes (channels 0 and 1). They
Premium accept amplifiers with:
b RS 422 or TTL 5 V inputs (negative logic).
b RS 422 or c 5 V NPN open collector outputs.
In a Premium PLC configuration, the number of TSX CFY motion control modules
Motor should be added to the other application-specific modules (communication, counting,
axis control and weighing).
Description
The front panel of TSX CFY 11/21 stepper control modules comprises:
1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per channel for connecting:
3 3
v Amplifier inputs.
4 4 v Amplifier outputs.
1 1
v Amplifier input power supply.
2 One 20-way HE 10 connector for connecting:
4 v Auxiliary inputs: per axis, homing cam, emergency stop, limit switches (+ and -),
event, external stop.
v Brake outputs (1 per axis).
2
v External power supplies for sensors and preactuators.
2 3 Rigid casing which:
TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21
v Holds the electronic card.
v Locates and locks the module in its slot.
4 Module diagnostics lamps:
v Module diagnostics:
4.2 CH2 CH0 RUN ERR
4
- green RUN lamp: module operating,
CH3 CH1 I/O - red ERR lamp: internal fault, module failure,
- red I/O lamp: external fault.
v Axis diagnostics:
- 2 green CHp lamps: axis diagnostics available.
Operating characteristics are described on page 4/36. Stepper control modules are
set up using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro and Unity Pro software.
Configuration
+ adjustment Configuration Pulse generator Amplifier enable output
%KW.%MW parameters A/B pulse outputs
Reactivation of loss of step output
Boost output
Amplifier fault input

Loss of step check input
Cam input (homing)

Auxiliary I/O
+ and – limit switch input
Processing processing
SMOVE function Emergency stop input
Event input
External stop input
%O, %QW
%I, %IW Brake output
Characteristics: References: Connection:

pages 4/35 and 4/36 page 4/37 page 4/36
4/34
platform 4
Type of module TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21
Modularity 1 axis 2 axes
Maximum pulse frequency kHz 187.316 187.316
Consumption c5V mA 510 650

c 24 V mA 50 100
Power dissipated in the module Typical W 3.8 5.6
Sensor power supply check Yes Yes
Inputs Amplifier inputs Auxiliary inputs
Logic Negative Positive
Nominal values Voltage V 5 24
Current mA 4.5 7
Limit values Voltage V – 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hr per
24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V <2 ≥ 11
Current mA – > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V > 3.6 <5
Input impedance for nominal U

Current mA
kΩ
–
–
< 2 (for U = 5 V)
3.4
4
Input immunity µs Loss of step input: 15 to 30: –
µs – Homing cam and event inputs: < 250
ms Amplifier fault input: 3 to 16 Limit switch, emergency stop and external stop
inputs: 3 to 10
Monitoring of Voltage for OK state V – > 18
external power Voltage for fault state V – < 14
supply for
Immunity OK V fault ms – >1
sensors and
preactuators Immunity fault V OK ms – < 30 4.2
Type of input Resistive Current sink
IEC 1131 conformity – Type 2
Sensor compatibility – 2-wire/3-wire
Outputs Amplifier outputs Brake outputs (1 per axis)
Type of output RS 422, TTL 5 V open collector NPN Open collector, PNP
compatible
Output differential voltage V ± 2 (load resistance ≤ 100 Ω) –
Short-circuit current mA < 150 –
Permissible common mode voltage V ≤7 –
Permissible differential voltage V ≤ 12 –
Voltages Nominal V – c 24
Limit V – 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hr per
24 hr period)
Currents Nominal mA – 500
Leakage mA – < 0.3
Maxi mA – 625 (for U = 30 or 34 V)
Maximum voltage drop when ON V – c<1
Switching time µs – < 250
Compatibility with DC inputs – All positive logic inputs with input resistance
< 15 kΩ
IEC 1131-2 compliance – Yes
Protection against overloads and – Via current limiter and thermal tripping
short-circuits (reactivated via program or automatically)
Short-circuit check on each channel – One signalling bit per channel
Protection against channel overvoltage – Zener diode between outputs and c + 24 V
Protection against polarity inversions – By diode reverse-mounted on supply
References: Connection:
page 4/37 page 4/36
4/35
Characteristics (continued), Modicon Premium automation
connections platform 4
Control Pulse, frequency from 0 to 187 kHz
+ and - outputs or +/- outputs and direction
Paths Trapezoidal speed profile with minimum movement frequency
Operating modes OFF Module inactive
DIR DRIVE Module operating as pulse generator
MAN Motion controlled by operator:

v visual control of movement
v incremental movement
AUTO Movement sequence controlled by PLC program. Movements are described using a syntax
similar to that of ISO language. Movements may be expressed in absolute or relative terms (in
relation to either the current position or a home point). Operation is possible in "step-by-step"
mode.
Checks Environment Amplifier, limits switches, Emergency stop
Motion Check correct execution by software position limits, loss of step
Control Check consistency of commands
4 Parameters Check validity of parameters
Optional commands Boost, brake
Connections
TSX CFY 11/21 stepper control module connections
+ pulses 114 Brake output Output axis 1
RI
Q0
4.2 – pulses (or direction)
Boost Axis 0
1
214
112 RI Brake output Output axis 0
Q0
Amplifier enable 1 212
Reactivation of step loss Axis 1 Auxiliary I/O c 24 V 111 Limit switch –
I5
+
check 1 Power supply 211

Axis 0 or 1 ++ – –
110 Limit switch +
Amplifier check I2
+
2 ++ ÐÐ 210
Loss of step check 109
Telefast 2 I4 External stop
4 3
+
209 Inputs axis 1

TSX CFY 11/21 108 Emergency stop
I1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
Amplifier (1)
1
2
3
4
208
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
107 Event
I3
+
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
207
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 106 Homing

I0
+
206
Axes 0 and 1
305
Ð
Limit switch –
I5 105
304 +
205
Ð
Limit switch +
I2 104
303 +
204
Ð
External stop
I4 103
Inputs axis 0
302 +
203
Twin line TLD 01 servodrive
Ð
with PULSE-C option Emergency stop

I1 102
301 +
202
Ð
1 TSX CAP S15 connector Event

I3 101
2 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connector
300 +
201
Ð
3 TSX CDPp01 preformed cable with connector

Homing
4 TSX CDPp63 cable with connector I0 100
+
200
(1) Type of amplifier

b With RS 422 interface:
v RS 422 compatible inputs,
v RS 422 outputs.
b With open collector, NPN interface:
v TTL/5 V source compatible inputs,
v Open collector, NPN outputs (5 V power supply from TSX CFY 11/21 module).
pages 4/35 and 4/36 page 4/37
4/36
platform 4
Motion control modules for stepper motors

Description To control Connections to connectors No. of Reference Weight
SUB-D, 15-way HE 10, 20-way axes (1) kg
Motion control modules Amplifier with Amplifier I/O Auxiliary I/O, 1 TSX CFY 11 0.440
for stepper motors RS 422 I/O, c 24 V power
c 5 V TTL and supply
O c 5 V with
open collector 2 TSX CFY 21 0.480
Description TSX CFY p1 Type of connector on N° Unit Weight
connector TSX CFY p1 module (2) reference kg
TSX CFY 11 SUB-D connectors Amplifier SUB-D, 15-way 1 TSX CAP S15 0.050
(1 per axis)
Sold in lots of 2
Telefast 2 connection Auxiliary I/O for HE 10, 20-way ABE 7H16R20 0.300
sub-base axes 0/1, c 24 V (1 for 2 axes)
power supply
Additional terminal block 20 shunted terminals Order in multiples of 5 ABE 7BV20 0.030
for ABE 7H16R20
sub-bases
TSX CFY 21 4
Connecting cables
Description From module To N° Length Reference Weight
TSX CFY p1 (2) kg
Cables 20-way HE 10 ABE 7H16R20 2 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
2
(cross-section 0.324 mm ) connector sub-base (20-way
HE 10 molded
connector) 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
ABE 7H16R20
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280 4.2

3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
Preformed cables 20-way HE 10 Auxiliary I/O for 3 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
(cross-section 0.324 mm2) connector axes 0/1,
24 V c power supply
(flying leads at I/O end) 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
10 m TSX CDP 1001 1.310

TSX CDP p03
Cables for Twin Line 15-way SUB-D Twin Line TLD 01p 4 2m TSX CXP 263 –
TLD 01p amplifier connector amplifier with
PULSE-C option 6m TSX CXP 663 –
(15-way female
SUB-D connector)
(1) Includes a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: French and English.
(2) For key, see page 4/37.
TSX CDP p01
Characteristics: Connection:
pages 4/35 and 4/36 page 4/36
4/37
platform 4
TSX CAY modules for servomotors
The TSX CAY pp servo loop positioning axis control range is intended for machines
which require simultaneous high performance motion control together with
sequential control by programmable controller.
Premium
Lexium
servodrive Depending on model:
b The TSX CAY 21/22 modules control 2 individual axes.
b The TSX CAY 41/42 modules control up to 4 individual axes.
b The TSX CAY 33 module control 3 interpolated linear axes.
They can be used with ± 10 V analog input servodrives such as Lexium 17D/17D HP,
and Twin Line TLD 13 servodrives.
Motor TSX CAY pp modules can be installed, like all application-specific modules, in any
location on a Premium PLC rack.
Description
5 The front panel of TSX CAY pp axis control modules comprises:

6 1 One 15-way SUB-D connector per axis for connecting an incremental or absolute
encoder.
1 2 One 9-way SUB-D connector for all axes for connecting:
v 1 "speed reference" analog output for each axis.
2 3 One 20-way HE 10 connector for all axes for connecting:
v Auxiliary inputs for servodrive control,
v External power supply for servodrive I/O.
4 4 One 20-way HE 10 connector for 2 axes (0/1 or 2/3) for connecting:
3
v Auxiliary inputs: homing cam, Emergency stop, event, recalibration.
4 v High speed outputs.
TSX CAY 21/22
v External power supplies for sensors and preactuators.
5
v Holds the electronic card.
6 v Locates and locks the module in its slot.
1 6 Module diagnostic lamps:
v Module diagnostics:
4.2 - green RUN lamp: module operating,
2 - red ERR lamp: internal fault, module failure,
- red I/O lamp: external fault.
3 v Axis diagnostics:
4
- green CHp lamps: axis diagnostics available.
TSX CAY 41/42
Operation
Block diagram of an axis
Configuration Encoder input

+ adjustment Servo loops
Configuration
%KW.%MW
parameters
Servodrive speed reference output
Auxiliary Cam input (homing)

SMOVE function I/O Event input
Processing processing Recalibration input
%O, %QW Emergency stop input
Drive fault input
%I, %IW
Drive enable output
High speed output
Axis control modules are set up using PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity Pro software.
TSX CAY 22/42/33 modules require the use of TSX P57 pp2M/3M/4M processors
and Atrium TPCX57 pp2M/3M coprocessors or TSX PCI 57pp4M.
Flying shear function of the TSX CAY 22 module requires the version ≥ 4.1 of
PL7 Junior/Pro software (function not available with Unity Pro software, version 1.0).

pages 4/39 and 4/40 pages 4/41 and 4/42 page 4/47
4/38
platform 4
Type of module TSX CAY 21/22 TSX CAY 41/42 TSX CAY 33
Servo loop Proportional with feedforward and gain switching
Period ms 2 4
Paths Speed profile Trapezoidal or parabolic
Resolution Minimum 0.5 position unit per point
Maximum 1000 position units per point
Length of axis Minimum TSX CAY 21: 32,000 points TSX CAY 41: 32,000 points TSX CAY 33: 256 points
TSX CAY 22: 256 points TSX CAY 42: 256 points
Maximum 32,000,000 points
Speed Minimum 54,000 points/min
Maximum 270,000 points/min
Acceleration Minimum s 10
(from 0 to VMAX)
Maximum ms 8 16
4
Operating modes OFF Measurement mode, inhibition of servo loop
The module operates in current speed and position acquisition mode
DIR DRIVE Direct drive mode, inhibition of servo loop

The module operates in analog output mode only
MAN Motion controlled by operator:

b visual control of movement
b incremental movement
4.2
AUTO Movement sequence controlled by PLC program. Movements are described using a syntax
similar to that of ISO language. Movements can be expressed in absolute or relative terms
(either in relation to current position, to a captured position or in relation to a home point).
Operation is possible in "step by step" mode, by motion stop/start, by speed correction
FOLLOWER The n axis of the module is governed by: –

b either the 0 axis of the same module
b or a command profile transmitted by the application
program
Checks Environment Encoder link, drive present, Emergency stop
Motion Check correct execution of movements (following error, in-position band, software position
limits)
Commands Check consistency of commands
Parameters Check validity of parameters
Functions
Type of module TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33
Linear interpolation, 2/3 axes – – – – Yes
Limited axes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Infinite axes – Yes – Yes Yes
Follower axes Static ratio Yes – Yes – –
Dynamic ratio – Yes – Yes –
Correction of servodrive offset – Yes – Yes Yes
Flying shear On position or on event – Yes – – –

with infinite master axis (see page
and linear slave axis 4/38)

pages 4/39 and 4/40 pages 4/41 and 4/42 pages 4/43 to 4/46
4/39
platform 4
Type of module TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33
Number of axes 2 axes 2 axes 4 axes 4 axes 3 axes
Maximum frequency at counter inputs

SSI absolute encoder 16 to 25 bits 12 to 25 bits 16 to 25 bits 12 to 25 bits 12 to 25 bits
CLK transmission frequency kHz 200
Incremental encoder x 1 kHz 500
x4 kHz 250 kHz as input or 1 MHz as counter
Consumption c 5V mA 1100 1500
c 24 V mA 15 30
Current drawn by the module Typical mA 11 (20 max) 22 (40 max)
on the 10/30 V encoder at 24 V
(24 V absolute encoder)
Power dissipated in the Typical W 7.2 (11.5 max) 10 (17 max)
module
Sensor power supply check Yes Yes
Type of input Counter inputs c 5 V Servodrive check inputs Auxiliary inputs
(IA/IB/IZ) (1 per axis) (homing, event, recalibration,
Emergency stop)
4 Nominal values Voltage

Current
V
mA
5
18
24
8
24
8
limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
At state 1 Voltage V ≥ 2.4 ≥ 11 (OK state) ≥ 11
Current mA > 3.7 (for U = 2.4 V) > 3.5 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V)
At state 0 Voltage V ≤ 1.2 ≤ 5 (fault state) ≤5
Current mA < 1 (for U = 1.2 V) < 1.5 (for U = 5 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V)
Voltage/encoder feedback check Presence check – –
Input impedance for nominal U Ω 270 3000 3000
4.2 Type of input Resistive Resistive Current sink
IEC 1131 compliance – Type 1 Type 2
2-wire sensor compatibility – – Yes (all prox. sens. 24 V)
3-wire sensor compatibility – – Yes (all prox. sens. 24 V)
Type of output Analog outputs Drive enable High speed outputs
(1 per axis) (1 relay output per axis) (1 per axis)
Range V ± 10.24 – –
Resolution 13 bits + sign – –
Value of LSB mV 1.25 – –
Nominal voltage V – c 24 c 24
Voltage limit V – 5…30 19...30 (up to 34 V possible,
limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period)
Current mA – – 500 nominal
Maximum current mA 1.5 200 (resistive load at 30 V) 625 (for U = 30 or 34 V)
Minimum permitted load – 1 V/1 mA –
Maximum voltage drop when ON V – – <1
Leakage current mA – – < 0.3
Switching time – < 5 ms < 500 µs
Compatibility with DC inputs – – All positive logic inputs with
input resistance < 15 kΩ
IEC 1131 compliance – – Yes
Protections against overload – – Current limiter and thermal
and short-circuits tripping
Protection against channel overvoltage – – Zener diode between outputs
and + 24 V supply
Protection against polarity inversions – – Reverse-mounted diode on
supply
References: Connections: Dimensions:

4/40
platform 4
Motion control modules for servomotors

Type of input Characteristics Functions No. of Reference Weight
axes (1) (2) kg
Incremental encoders 500 kHz counter Servo control on independent 2 TSX CAY 21 0.480
c 5 V RS 422, c 10…30 V with incremental linear axis
Totem Pole (3) encoder,
Absolute encoders Acquisition 200 kHz 4 TSX CAY 41 0.610
RS 485 serial or parallel with serial absolute
(4) encoder
Servo control on independent 2 TSX CAY 22 0.480
linear or infinite axis
Follower axes
Realtime correction of servodrive 4 TSX CAY 42 0.610
TSX CAY 2p offset
Flying shear (5)
Servo control on linear or infinite 3 TSX CAY 33 0.610
axis
Linear interpolation on 2 or 3 axes
Realtime correction of servodrive
offset
Description Connection Type of connector on No. Reference Weight
TSX CAY pp module (6) kg
SUB-D connectors Incremental/SSI SUB-D, 15-way 4 TSX CAP S15 0.050
(lot of 2) absolute encoder (1 per axis)
4
TSX CAY 33 Speed references SUB-D, 9-way 7 TSX CAP S9 0.050
(1 per TSX CAY module)
Connection interface for Incremental encoder SUB-D, 15-way 6 TSX TAP S15 05 0.260
incremental encoder c 5V (1 per axis)
RS 422/RS 485
Splitter block Speed references SUB-D, 9-way – TSX TAP MAS 0.590
to servodrives (1 per TSX CAY module) 4.2
Telefast 2 connection Speed references SUB-D, 9-way – ABE 7CPA01 0.300

sub-bases (1 per TSX CAY module)
TSX CAY 4p
Auxiliary inputs, HE 10, 20-way – ABE 7H16R20 0.300
High speed outputs, (1 for 2 axes)
I/O power supply
c 24 V, encoder
power supplies
c 5/24 V
TSX TAP S15
Servodrive control HE 10, 20-way – ABE 7H16R20 0.300

signals, (1 per TSX CAY module)
I/O c 24 V power
supply
Adaptor sub-base Parallel output SUB-D, 15-way – ABE 7CPA11 0.300
absolute encoders
(16 to 24 bits)
TSX TAP MAS c 5 V, c 10…30 V
(1) TSX CAY 41/42/43 modules, double format.
(2) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French
(3) Totem Pole encoder with complementary Push/Pull outputs.
(4) Parallel output absolute encoders with ABE 7CPA11 adaptor interface.
(5) Flying shear function available with TSX CAY 22 module. Requires version ≥ 4.1. of
PL7 Junior/Pro software. Function not available with Unity Pro software.
(6) For key, see pages 4/43 to 4/46.
ABE 7CPA01
ABE 7H16R20
Characteristics: Connections: Dimensions:

4/41
platform 4
Cables with SUB-D connectors

From To No. Length Reference Weight
(1) kg
TSX CAYpp TSX TAP S15 05 interface, 5 0.5 m TSX CCP S15 050 0.110
module, or ABE 7CPA11 adaptor
15-way SUB-D sub-base (15-way SUB-D 1m TSX CCP S15 100 0.160
connector connector)
2.5 m TSX CCP S15 0.220
TSX CAYpp ABE 7CPA01 sub-base 8 2.5 m TSX CXP 213 0.270
module, or TSX TAP MAS block
9-way SUB-D (15-way SUB-D connector) 6m TSX CXP 613 0.580
connector
(speed reference)
Preformed cables with SUB-D connector fitted at 1 end and 1 free end (servodrive side)
TSX CAY pp Speed reference for 9 6m TSX CDP 611 0.790
module, or servodrive: Lexium MHDA,
TSX TAP MAS Twin Line TLD 13 or other
block (cross-section 0.205 mm2)
Connecting cables with HE 10 connector
TSX CAY pp ABE 7H16R20 sub-base 10 0.5 m TSX CDP 053 0.085
module, (20-way (20-way HE 10 moulded 1m TSX CDP 103 0.150
HE 10 connector) connector)
2m TSX CDP 203 0.280
(500 mA max.)
3m TSX CDP 303 0.410
5m TSX CDP 503 0.670
4 Preformed cables with HE 10 connector fitted at 1 end and 1 free end (servodrive side)
TSX CAY pp Auxiliary inputs, high speed 11 3m TSX CDP 301 0.400
module, (20-way outputs, control signals, power
HE 10 connector) supplies (free end) 5m TSX CDP 501 0.660
20-wire (500 mA max.)
Connecting cables for Lexium MHDA servodrive
TSX CAY pp Simulated incremental 12 2m TSX CXP 235 0.210
module, 15 way encoder feedback
SUB-D connector (9-way SUB-D connector) 6m TSX CXP 635 0.470
4.2 (encoder input)
Simulated absolute encoder 13 2m TSX CXP 245 0.210
feedback
(9-way SUB-D connector) 6m TSX CXP 645 0.470
TSX CDP pp3 Connecting cables for Twin Line TLD 13 servodrive
TSX CAY pp TLD 13 servodrive with 14 2m TSX CXP 243 –
module, 15 way ESIM1-C/2-C module (1)
SUB-D connector Simulated incremental
(encoder input) encoder feedback 6m TSX CXP 643 –
(15-way SUB-D connector) (1)
TLD 13 servodrive with SSI-C 15 2m TSX CXP 273 –

module
Simulated absolute encoder
feedback 6m TSX CXP 673 –
Connecting cables for NUM MDLA servodrive (2)

TSX CAY pp NUM MDLA modular speed 16 2.5 m TSX CXP 233 0.220
module, drive
15-way SUB-D (15-way, high density, 6m TSX CXP 633 0.470
TSX CDP p01 connector SUB-D connector)
(encoder input)
TSX TAP MAS Speed reference on 17 2.5 m TSX CXP 223 0.340
block, 9-way NUM MDLA modular speed
SUB-D connector drive
Cables fitted with splitter block for Altivar AC drive

TSX CAY pp Speed reference for 18 1m VY1 X411CA15 0.400
module ATV 38/58/58F AC drives for
asynchronous motors
(1) For key, see pages 4/43 to 4/46.
(2) See page 9/16.
Characteristics: Connections: Dimensions:

4/42
platform 4
Connections for TSX CAY modules

General connections
Examples of encoder connections Examples of speed reference signal connections
23 GND-ANA link
1 4 7 21 (terminals 5, 11, 15 and 19)
19 Vref 3
+ + – – 20 – Axis 3
8
18 +
1 4 Telefast 2
15 Speed drive
with differential
GND
16 – Vref 2
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
Axis 2 inputs
2
4
6
8
14 +
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
ABE 7CPA01 11 Common (0 V)
12 – Vref 1 Ref –
2 6 5 Ref +
10 + Axis 1 GND
9 Ref
8 – Vref 0 Common
5 6 + Axis 0 GND
GND Speed drive

Axis 2 Axis 0 with 2-wire input
Example of speed drive connection
Axis 3 Axis 1
++ – –
++ – –
Power supply c 24 V (auxiliary I/O)
0V
4
303
TSX CAY 41 10 Telefast 2 113 Drive check input
Drive enable Axis 1
104
204 24 V
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
203
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
103
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 301 0V

+ + – – 112 Drive check input
101 Drive enable Axis 0
Telefast 2 201 24 V
200 4.2
GND
100
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
1
3
5
7
9
P4
ABE 7CPA11
3 11 Example of auxiliary I/O connection

Power supply c 24 V
++ – – auxiliary I/O sensors
++ – – 314 High speed

10 114
Q0
output
Telefast 2
–
311
Recalibration
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
111 I3
1
2
3
4
+
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
211
–
310
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 110 Event Axes 1 and 3

I2
210
+
1 Incremental or absolute encoder –
309
2 5 V RS 422 incremental encoder 109 Emergency I1

3 Parallel output absolute encoder 209
+ stop
4 TSX CAP S15 connector –
308
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connectors 108 Homing I0

6 TSX TAP S15 05 connector 208
+
312
High speed Q0
1 IB- 7 NC 112
output
2 Sup. Ret. 8 IB + 5 V 107
3 IZ + 5 V 9 NC 207
+ Recalibration I3
Axes 0 and 2
4 IZ - 10 0V 106
206
+ Event I2
5 IA + 5 V 11 NC
105 Emergency
6 IA - 12 +5 V + I1
205 stop
104
7 TSX CAP S9 connector + Homing I0
204
8 TSX CXP 213/613 cable with connector
9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with connector 102
+ 10/30 V encoder
100
+5V power
10 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connector 0V
101 supply
11 TSX CDPp01 preformed cable with connector

4/43
platform 4
Connection example for Lexium MHDA servodrives
Incremental encoder 12
SSI absolute encoder 13 X5
9 X3
9 black - In +
blue 4 - In -
1 6 5 brown 5 Com
8 1
r
TSX TAP MAS To other
TSX CAY 42 Lexium
servodrives
++ – – Power supply c 24 V
++ – –
10 Telefast 2 Lexium MHDA

servodrive
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
101 15 Enable
ABE 7H16R20 servodrive OK
112 2
4 212
1
3 + 24 V
11 2
Power supply c 24 V
++ – – auxiliary I/O sensors
10 ++ – –
Telefast 2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
4.2
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 212 18 Common

112 11 Input 1
4
3
Connection example for Twin Line TLD 13 servodrives with ESIM 1-C/2-C option
Incremental encoder with module ESIM1-C/2-C 14 Simulated

M4 encoder
Absolute encoder with SSI-C option
15 feedback
9
9 black
17
blue
1 6 5 brown
18
8 16
r
To other
TSX TAP MAS Twin Line
servodrives Twin Line TLD 13
TSX CAY 42 servodrive
Speed
Power supply c 24 V reference,
++ – – auxiliary
servodrive I/Os
++ – –
10 Telefast 2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20
31
32
11 33
34
1 Incremental or absolute encoder 9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with 12 TSX CXP 235/635 cable with connector (simulated incremental encoder feedback)
5 TSX CCP S15ppp cable with connector connector 13 TSX CXP 245/645 cable with connector (simulated SSI absolute encoder feedback)
(encoder feedback) 10 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connector 14 TSX CXP 243/643 cable with connector (simulated incremental encoder feedback)
6 TSX TAP S15 05 connector 11 TSX CDPp01 preformed cable with 15 TSX CXP 273/673 cable with connector (simulated SSI absolute encoder feedback)
8 TSX CXP 213/613 cable with connector connector
4/44
platform 4
Connection example for Altivar ATV-58F speed drive (for asynchronous motors)
TSX CAY 42
++ – – Power supply c 24 V
++ – –
10 Telefast 2
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1
2
3
4
(1)
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
C
C
C
C
ABE 7H16R20 TSX TAP MAS
18
9
supply
power
To other drives
Ref.
+5V
4
101
112
212
A+
B+
A–
B–
0V
Z+
Z–
1
2
Drive fault
1
Enable
brown
black
blue
A1
A
A/
B
B/
0V
LI1
LI4
R1B
R1A
AI1A
AI1B
COM
4.2
ATV 58F speed drive (2) Axis 0
1 Incremental encoder
9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with connector
10 TSX CDPpp3 cable with connector
18 VY1 X411CA15 cable with connector and adapter sub-base
(1) For auxiliary I/O connections (for example: Emergency stop, homing, etc), see the
connections on page 4/43.
(2) The speed drive must be programmed as "Macro configuration General use". For other
ATV 58F speed drive connections, please see our specialist catalog "Progressive starters and
speed servodrives".

4/45
platform 4
Connection example for NUM MDLA modular speed drives
16
J2
17
J3
J4
NUM MDLA
8
TSX CAY 21
17
J3
NUM MDLA
4 TSX TAP MAS

17 TSX CXP 223 cable with connector
Connection example for distribution of speed references for speed drives
4.2
Drive
8
TSX CAY 21
Drive
TSX TAP MAS
9 TSX CDP 611 preformed cable with connector

4/46
Dimensions Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Dimensions
TSX TAP S15 05 connection interface for incremental encoder
43
70,4
27,4
31 38
55 47
Mounting in enclosure feedthrough (dust and damp proof)

b Ø 37 cut-out,
b Panel thickness 5 mm maximum
TSX TAP MAS speed reference splitter block for speed drives
=
4
65
80
=
= 50 =
80
Mounting on DIN rail with LA9-DC9976 accessory.

4.2

4/47
SERCOS architecture, Modicon Premium automation
system overview platform 4
SERCOS TSX CSY 84/164

motion control module
Architecture
Fiber optic cables

SERCOS ring network
Lexium MHDA
servodrives
(with SERCOS
option card).
SER/Lexium BPH
motors
SERCOS (SERiaI COmmunication System) is a communication standard which

defines the digital link (exchange protocol and medium) between a motion control
module and intelligent servodrives. It is defined in European standard EN 61491.
Using the SERCOS distributed architecture allows application I/O (position encoder,
emergency stop, etc.) to be connected directly to the intelligent servodrives, reducing
4 the cost of connection. The fiber optic digital link permits high speed exchanges (2 or
4 M bauds) while ensuring a high level of immunity in disturbed industrial environments.
The SERCOS range in the Premium control system platform comprises:

b Two TSX CSY 84/164 axis control modules which can each control up to 16
servodrives via a SERCOS ring. The module calculates the path and interpolation for
several axes (position mode). Access to the other modes (speed and torque) is
possible with the assistance of Schneider Electric application services.
b 1.5 A to 70 A Lexium MHDA servodrives with digital link (equipped with SERCOS
4.2 option card). The servodrives manage the position loop, speed loop and torque loop,
and ensure power conversion to control the motor. The encoder feedback
information is sent to the servodrive (current position, current speed).
b SER/Lexium BPH brushless motors. These have permanent magnets delivering a
high power-to-weight ratio, resulting in excellent dynamic speed response in a
compact unit.
The Lexium range offers all the accessories required (filter choke, braking resistor,
etc.) and a full set of connectors.
System overview
The system overview presents the various functions performed by the different parts
of the multi-axis control system.
PL7 Junior/Pro, Unilink
Unity Pro
PLC SERCOS Lexium MDHA

Premium/Atrium TSX CSY 84/164 servodrive (with
module SERCOS option card).
SER/Lexium
Application Interpretation of BPH motor
program Linear or infinite commands
Bus X independent axes Position loop
2 to 8-axis linear Speed loop
interpolation Current loop
Follower axes Power
(6 slaves) by gearing conversion
or profiled cams
Position
Speed
SERCOS ring
(to servodrive network)
Characteristics: Functions: References: Links:

pages 4/50 and 4/51 pages 4/52 and 4/53 page 4/54 page 4/55
4/48
System overview (continued), Modicon Premium automation

motion control modules
System overview (continued)
PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity software via the Premium platform terminal port can:
b Declare TSX CSY 84/164 SERCOS modules (1) in the PLC configuration.
b Configure the functions and define the parameters for the axes used.
b Program the movements in the PLC application.
b Adjust the parameters via the operating codes (parameters, TSX CSY module and
Lexium MHDA servodrives with SERCOS option card).
b Test and debug the application.
Unilink software, via the RS 232 terminal port for the Lexium MHDA servodrive (with
SERCOS option card), can:
b Define types of Lexium MHDA servodrives (with SERCOS option card and
SER/Lexium BPH motors.
b Adjust the parameters for Lexium MHDA servodrives (with SERCOS option card),
back them up to EEprom memory in the drive and save them on a compatible PC.
Description
3
The TSX CSY 84/164 SERCOS axis control modules comprise:
4 1 A SMA-type connector, marked Tx, for connecting the servodrives using the 4
SERCOS ring fiber optic transmission cable.
6
2 A SMA-type connector, marked Rx, for connecting the servodrives using the
5 SERCOS ring fiber optic reception cable.
7 3 Rigid cases, double format, in order to:

1 b Support electronic cards
b Attach and lock the module in its slot.
2 4.2
4 Module diagnostic lamps:
b RUN LED (green): LED ON indicates module operating correctly.
b SER LED (yellow): flashing LED indicates data transmission and reception on the
SERCOS network
b ERR LED (red):
v LED ON indicates internal module fault,
v flashing LED on module start up indicates communication fault, incompatible
configuration or application missing.
b I/O LED (red): LED ON indicates external fault or application fault.
b INI LED (yellow): flashing LED indicates module is reinitializing.
5 Channel diagnostic LEDs (green): LED ON indicates axis operating normally;

OFF: configuration fault; flashing: serious error on axis:
b 1 to 8: display of 8 real axes (2)..
b 9 to 12: display of 4 imaginary axes (2).
b 13 to 16: display of 4 remote axes (2).
b 17 to 20: display of 4 coordinated sets.
b 21 to 24: display of 4 follower sets.
6 A pencil point button to initialize the module.
7 Two mini DIN type 8-way connectors for Schneider Electric use.
(1) TSX CSY 164 module can not be implemented with Unity Pro V2.0 software.
(2) 1 to 16: display the 16 axes (real, imaginary or remote) with module TSX CSY 164.
Characteristics: Functions: References: Links:

4/49
platform 4

Characteristics
Electrical characteristics TSX CSY 84 TSX CSY 164
SERCOS ring network Type Industrial medium complying with standard EN 61491
Topology Ring
Medium Fiber optic cable
Baud rate M bauds 4 by default
Cycle time (1) 2 axes 4 axes 8 axes 2 axes 4 axes 8 axes 12 axes 16 axes
(independent axes) ms 2 2 4 2 2 2 3 4
Maximum number of 9 17
segments
Length of segment m 38 max. with plastic fiber optic cable, 150 max. with glass fiber optic cable
Bus X Distance m 100 max. (2) between TSX CSY 84 axis control module and the Premium processor
SERCOS certification (3) TSX CSY 84/164 modules comply with SERCOS CEI/EN 61491 certification and with the tests
determined by IGS (Interest Group SERCOS).
Certification N° Z00030
Power consumption for c 5V voltage mA 1800
4 Power dissipated in the module W 9 (typical)
Operating characteristics TSX CSY 84 TSX CSY 164
Number of channels 32 configurable (0 to 31), channel 0 used for SERCOS ring configuration
Type of axes Real axes 8 (channels 1 to 8) 16 (channels 1 to 16) may be dynamically configured as
(connected to a servodrive) real axes, imaginary axes or remote axis.
4.2
Imaginary axes 4 (channels 9 to 12)
Remote axes (4) 4 (channels 13 to 16)
Set of axes 4 coordinated (channels 17 to 20). Each set allows linear interpolation of 2 to 8 axes
4 followers (channels 21 to 24). Each set can comprise a maximum of 7 axes: 1 master/6 slaves
in gearing or camming
Cam profile 7 (channels 25 to 31). Used to create the electronic cams with linear or cubic interpolation
between profile points
(1) 4 ms default value. Values may be programmed according to number of axes.

(2) Without the use of a TSX REY 200 bus X remote module.
(3) For further certification details, see pages 9/10 and 9/11.
(4) Determine external position using an encoder connected to the servodrive position input.
Architectures Functions: References: Links:

4/50
platform 4
SERCOS TSX CSY 84

Premium motion control module
Characteristics (continued)
Main functions
Programming Movements b Homing, absolute, relative, or continuous
b Immediate movement, or queued, to a given position
b Speed override possible
b Acceleration and deceleration parameters may be set for each axis motion control (1)
b Synchronisation on start and desynchronisation on stop for a slave axis on a master axis,
in a given position (1)
b Crossover counter (1)
Special functions b Position sensor and distance measurement between two edges on one or two discrete inputs
on the drive. This can be applied to a real or auxiliary axis (position measurement via external
encoder)
b Count probe: counts the edges on a discrete input on the drive over a period of time
b Fast index: starts a movement on an event
b Registration move: position capture on an edge of the discrete input on the drive
b Rotary Knife: cuts using a rotary knife. Synchronizes a circular axis on a linear axis and
controls a discrete output on the drive
Other special functions The development of all other special function is possible with the assistance of our application
services. Please consult our Regional Sales Offices .
Stop/start functions b Fast stop, stop on configured deceleration profile

b Temporary stop
b Restart of stopped movement
b Choice of stop method (1):
v Faulty slave: master is not stopped. master stops normally according to pre-determined
deceleration ramp or Servo-driven master emergency stop
v Faulty master: slave stops normally according to pre-determined deceleration ramp or Servo-
4
driven slave emergency stop
b On Emergency Stop: calculation of slave axis deceleration ramp alignment with master axis
so that all set axes stop in synch. (1)
b Emergency Stop: axes may be allowed to "freewheel" or may be stopped according to pre-
determined (1)
Configuration SERCOS ring Bus cycle time, traffic on the bus, optical power on the fiber, SERCOS loop diagnostics
/adjustment
Acceleration/deceleration Ramp values, ramp type (rectangular, triangular and trapezoid), choice of units, maximum
acceleration adjustment 4.2
Speed Speed units, default speed, maximum speed, speed override
Other settings Target window, rollover, software limits
Set of follower axes Following of master axis by gearing or camming (cam profile), threshold position of master
triggers the following, bias value when synchronizing an axis, monitoring of master/slave
positions, master offset for follower axis
Set of coordinated axes Type of interpolation: linear
Cam profile Value of an existing point of a cam profile, number of points (5000 max.), type of interpolation,
table addresses
State of a movement or axis Moving, accelerating, decelerating, homing, in position, faulty, etc.
Diagnostics b Drive fault, axis currently reading data, following error, overvoltage, undervoltage,
overcurrent, power supply fault
b Availability of master axis fault information for a given axis set (1)
b Multiaxis motion path control according to common tolerance for all axes in the motion, with
alarm feature. Access available only with TSX CSY 164 module
(1) Implementation of the TSX CSY 84, release u 1.3 requires the use of the PL7 Junior/Pro
application, version u 4.4. Access available only with TSX CSY 164 module.
Architectures Functions: References: Links:

4/51
platform 4

Software setup (1)
When setting up application-specific functions, screens specific to SERCOS axis

control functions can be accessed via PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity software for
configuration, adjustment, debugging and documentation of applications. These
services are performed by editors which can be directly accessed from the basic
screen using icons in the tool bars. Windows relating to the editors can be
simultaneously displayed on one screen (example: it is possible to program using
the program editor and simultaneously define the symbols in the variables editor).
Declaring the SERCOS motion control modules

Parameter entry screens for application-specific functions can be accessed via the
configuration screen by clicking on the slot.
Example: configuration in which a TSX CSY 84/164 module has been defined.
Configuring the module

The configuration editor provides assistance with entering and modifying the values
of the various axis configuration parameters. These parameters enable the operation
of the axis control module to be adapted to the machine which is to be controlled.
4.2 Axis configuration parameters are:
b Units of measurement.
b Resolution.
b Maximum and minimum limit positions.
b Maximum speed.
b Accelerating/decelerating.
This data relates to the machine and cannot be modified by the program.
The following configuration screen can be used to declare the 16 axes as real,
imaginary or remote measurement axes in module TSX CSY 164.
(1) The setting up screens require the version u 4.1 of PL7 Junior/Pro software TLX CD/RCD
PL7J/P P41M/42M/43M/44M or Unity Pro UNY SPU pFU CD 10.
Architectures Characteristics: References: Links:

4/52
platform 4
SERCOS TSX CSY 84

Software setup (continued)

Adjusting the modules
These parameters are associated with operation of the axes. They generally require
the operations on and movements of the moving part to be known. These parameters
are adjusted in online mode (they are initialized during configuration, in offline mode).
They concern:
b Maximum speed.
b Resolution.
b Servocontrol parameters.
b Accelerating/decelerating.
Debugging the modules

In online mode, the configuration editor also provides the user with a control panel
screen, giving a quick visual display which can be used to control and observe the
behavior of the axis. 4
The TSX CSY 84/164 (1) module associated with PL7 Junior/Pro software (2)
provides manual mode for running continual (JOG) or incremental (INC) motion
commands without prior programming.
4.2
(1) Auto/Manu mode requires the use of TSX CSY 84 module, version u 1.2.
(2) Requires the use of PL7 Junior/Pro version u 4.3. Mode not available with Unity Pro
version 2.0.
Architectures Characteristics: References: Links:

4/53
platform 4

References
The TSX CSY 84/164 multiaxis control module has 32 application-specific channels
which are only counted when they are configured in the Premium application (using
PL7 Junior/Pro or Unity Pro software). The maximum number of application-specific
channels allowed depends on the type of processor:
Type of processors TSX/57 1p TSX/57 2p TSX/57 3p TSX/57 4p TSX/57 5p

PCX 57-20 PCX 57-35 PCI 57-45
PCI 57-20
Maximum number of 8 24 32 64 64
channels
Description Functions Number of axes Reference Weight

kg
Multiaxis control modules SERCOS digital servodrives 8 real axes TSX CSY 84 0.520
control 4 imaginary axes
4 remote axes
16 axes (real axes, imaginary TSX CSY 164 –

axes or remote axes) (1)
4 Description Connection Length Reference Weight
kg
TSX CSY 84 164: Plastic fiber optic cables Lexium MHDA 0.3 m 990 MCO 000 01 0.050
fitted with SMA-type servodrive 1pppN00/A00
connectors (with SERCOS option card) 0.9 m 990 MCO 000 03 0.180
(curvature radius:
25 mm min.)
1.5 m 990 MCO 000 05 0.260
4.5 m 990 MCO 000 15 0.770
4.2 16.5 m 990 MCO 000 55 2.830
22.5 m 990 MCO 000 75 4.070
37.5 m 990 MCO 001 25 5.940
Sets of plastic fiber optic connections

Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
Set of fiber optic cables 12 SMA-type connectors 990 MCO KIT 01 –
and SMA-type connectors 12 insulating sleeves
Plastic fiber optic cable, length 30 m
Fiber optic cable Tools for making up cables to required length from a 990 MCO KIT 00 –
installation tool 990 MCO KIT 01 kit
Includes stripping tool, crimping pliers, 25 W/110 V cutting tool,
and instructions for use
Separate item
Description Use Reference Weight
kg
PC to TSX CSY 84/164 Used to download the servodrive operation configuration file for TSX CCT 200 0.100
connectors connection the servodrives present on the SERCOS ring (2)
cable Used to download specific functions developed by our Industrial
(length 2 m) Applications Department.
(1) The TSX CSY 164 module is compatible with version 4.3 of the PL7 Junior/Pro software
application with the Motion software add-on update included on the TSX CSY 164 module
CD-Rom. Version 4.4 of PL7 Junior/Pro includes this software add-on. The TSX CSY 164
module is not compatible with Unity Pro version 2.0 software.
(2) The add-on can be downloaded when the default configuration file is not adapted to the
configuration required.
Architectures: Characteristics: Functions: Links:

pages 4/48 and 4/49 pages 4/50 and 4/51 pages 4/52 and 4/53 page 4/55
4/54
platform 4

Connections
SERCOS ring with 5 servodrives (example)
TX
RX
3
SERCOS network ring
3 3 3 3
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX
X13 X15 X13 X15
2 2 2 2 2
Servodrive 1 Servodrive 3 Servodrive 5 Servodrive 2 Servodrive 4
4
1 TSX CSY 84/164: multiaxis control module for Premium.
2 MHDA 1pppN00/A00 Lexium servodrives fitted with the SERCOS

AM0 SER 001 V000 option card.
3 990 MCO 000 pp: plastic fiber optic cables fitted with SMA type connectors.
4.2
TX Transmission.
RXReception.
Architectures: Characteristics: Functions: References:

pages 4/48 and 4/49 pages 4/50 and 4/51 pages 4/52 and 4/53 page 4/54
4/55
platform 4
ISP Plus integrated weighing system
The ISP Plus

2
weighing range,
when used with the
Premium PLC,
enables the
automation of
1
machines combined
with weighers or
installations
3
4 1 Weighing module The TSX ISP Y100 standard format weighing module is the central part of the weighing system.
It has:
b A measurement input which will take up to 8 sensors.
b A sealable link for the display unit.
b Two discrete reflex outputs for weigher doser applications.
4.2 2 Weight indicator The TSX XBT H101 remote display unit displays the measured weight with no prior configuration.
When the link to the weighing module is sealed, this display unit then becomes the main display
unit for commercial transactions.
The TSX ISP Y111module/display unit assembly conforms to OIML recommendations and is
e approved for class lll weighers (6000 scale divisions) and for class llll weighers (1000 scales
divisions).
3 Accesories Junction boxes, cables and test circuit.
4/56
platform 4
When a TSX ISP Y101 weighing module is plugged into a Premium programmable
controller, it is possible to go beyond the scope of a simple weighing application. The
PLC manages not only the entire weighing environment, but also the whole of the
machine or industrial process associated with the weighing system.
In a Premium configuration, the number of TSX ISP Y101 weighing modules must be
added to the other dedicated modules (TSX SCY 21601 communication, TSX CTY
counting, TSX CAY/CSY axis control and TSX CFY movement control).
The maximum permissible is:
b 2 dedicated modules with TSX P57 0p processor.
b 32 dedicated modules with TSX P57 4p/5p processor.
Description
Weighing module
The TSX ISP Y101 weighing module has the following on the front face:
1 A SUB-D 9-way female connector for the dedicated RS 485 serial link to the
4 weight indicator.
2 A screw terminal block for connecting the 2 discrete reflex outputs (outputs used
4
1 with threshold detection).
2 3 A SUB-D 15-way female connector for the indicator input channel (50 samples per
second, from 1 to 8 load cells).
3
4 Module sealing device, if required.
4.2
Weighing indicator
Weight values are displayed on a TSX XBT H100 weight indicator (supplied with the
TSX ISP Y11p unit). The weight indicator is pre-configured.
It has the following on the front face:
1 An LCD, back-lit display screen with 1 line of 20 characters (height 9 mm).
2 An area for affixing the instrument rating plate.
The back is equipped with:

1 v A plug-in screw terminal block for c 24 V supply.
v A SUB-D 25-way female connector for connection to the TSX ISP Y101 weighing
module (30 metres maximum).
2
Strain gauge type load cells and connection accessories
Consult your Regional Sales Office.
4/57
implementation platform 4
Functions
The weighing module with its associated display unit constitutes a weighing
indicator. The module incorporates numerous functions specific to weighing:
b Continuous weighing (in g, kg, t, lb, oz…) and flow calculation (weight variation).
b Filtering of measurements by several methods (19 filtering options).
b Tare (automatic/manual) and preset tare.
b Automatic reset.
b Weighing stability control.
b Threshold detection with extrapolation of the cut-off point: positioning of local
“discrete” outputs to the nearest millisecond.
b Assisted calibration: the module calculates the zero point and the gradient.
b Calibration parameters saved in the module (EEPROM) and in the Premium
processor.
b Forced calibration: fast replacement of a failed module and restarting using the
previous calibration parameters.
b Locking of the configuration, sealing of the module and its connections to the load
cells and weight indicator.
b Continuous formatting and transmission of measurements to the PLC.
b Transmission of measurement validity data (validity, stability, nett/gross…).
b Transmission of diagnostic data from the module and its connections.
b Configuration, calibration and debugging via Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro screens.
b Most of the operating parameters can be modified and most of the functions can
4 be run by PLC program.
Setting up the weighing module
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software allows complete setting up of the weighing
system (configuration, calibration and debugging).
Configuration
4.2 This covers:

b The measuring data of the weigher.
b Filtering of measurements.
Configuration b The flow calculation method.
b The tare.
b Data format.
b Stability criteria and zero point management method.
b Threshold monitoring for positioning of discrete outputs.
Weigher calibration
The module itself calculates the gain and the offset to be applied to the electronic
weighing system.
Calibration is carried out in two phases:

b Measurement of the dead load.
b Measurement of a standard weight.
Weigher calibration Forced calibration allows immediate restarting of the system in the event of a module
failure; the new module is configured automatically.
Debugging
The dedicated weighing screen provides the following dynamic display:

b The measurement in progress.
b The operating state of the module.
It also allows fast modification of setting parameters (filtering, flow, threshold

values…).
Instructions and parameters that can be modified by the program in real time with the
module.
These parameters and instructions can be monitored from an operator dialogue type
device and/or a supervisory device connected to the Premium.
Debbuging
4/58
platform 4
Electrical characteristics of weighing module TSX ISP Y101

Measurement input 1 weigher per module 1 measurement input
Resolution 1 048 576 points (20 bits)
Measuring rate 50 measurementss per second
Input impedance MΩ >1
Input load cells Number that may be Maximum of 8 x 350 Ω load cells, connected in parallel
connected
Supply voltage V c 10
Supply type d.c.
Cabling distance m 300 (without loss of accuracy with 4 load cells)
Discrete reflex outputs Number 2 positive logic transistor outputs, for sack weighing, filling and sort/check weighing.
Response time 1 ms discrimination. The point at which the thresholds are crossed between 2 measurements is
calculated by polling to the nearest millisecond. 4
Weight indicator output Physical interface RS 485 non isolated
Binary flow K bit/s 9.6
Remote connection m 30 (maximum)

distance
Consumption mA See pages 9/4 and 9/5

4.2
Environment Weights and measures See page 1/28
The weighing module associated with its weight indicator conforms to OIML recommendations.
It is e approved for class III (up to 6000 divisions) and class IIII (up to 1000 divisions) weighers
in accordance with European circular 90 384 of 20th June 1990.
Minimum voltage division µV 1
e certification SDM n° 97.06 - Revision of 15 june 1999
Characteristics of weight indicator TSX XBT H100

Display Type of screen LCD back-lit
Number of lines 1 line used for weighing applications
Number of characters 20 per line
Character size (height) mm 9
Alimentation Nominal voltage V c 24 non isolated
Limit voltages V c 18…30
Consumption W 10
Environment Conforming to standards IEC 1131 2, EN 61131 2, UL 508, CSA C22 2 n° 14
Temperatures Operation: 0…50 °C. Storage: - 20…+ 60 °C
Degree of protection Front face : IP 65. Back: IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20 010
Function Signalling 1 signal lamp
4/59
platform 4
ISP Plus weighing module

Description Composition Reference Weight
(1) kg
ISP Plus Standard format module (sealable) TSX ISP Y101 0.420
weighing modules - Load cell input 50 meas./s (for 1 to 8 load
(1 weigher cells),
per module) - 2 reflex discrete outputs (for threshold
(2) detection),
TSX ISP Y101 - RS 485 output (for display)
- Module TSX ISP Y101. TSX ISP Y111 1.020

- Indicator XBT H100
(LCD back-lit, preconfigured display).
- Module/weight indicator connecting cable
(length 3 m)
Accessories for maintenance test (supplied with a 4 m cable)

Function For use with Mounting Reference Weight
kg
Load cell simulation ISP Plus all models Separated SM1 PS371 0.520
TSX ISP Y111 Test circuit ISP Plus and ISP7 A Separated SM1 PS381 0.100
(voltage)
Junction boxes for load cells
Material Number of load cells Reference Weight
4 Metal 4 SF2 PY3504
kg
0.800
(3)
Intrinsically safe junction box (4)
This box is installed in the weighing system between the weighing indicator and the junction box
in which the load cells are grouped. Its function is to limit any peak voltages and to limit the
current to 100 mA in the event of a short circuit.
The load cells and junction box are the only devices located in the explosive environment; the
SM1 PS371 weighing indicator is located in a safe environment.
4.2 Description For use with Marking Reference Weight

kg
Zener barrier box All types of load cells EEx ib II B SM1 PY52 2.800
and weighing EEx ib II C
indicators
Remote weight indicator

Description Reference (1) Weight
kg
Weight indicator for connection to the weighing module TSX XBT H100 –
Description Length Reference Weight

m kg
Module/weight indicator connecting 5 SF3 CPY005 0.500
cable 10 SF3 CPY010 1.100
15 SF3 CPY015 1.700
20 SF3 CPY020 2.200
25 SF3 CPY025 2.800
SF2 PY3504
30 SF3 CPY030 3.400
(1) Supplied with multilingual Installation manual as standard: French and English.
(2) The setup of weighing modules requires of Unity Pro V2.0 or PL7 Junior/Pro V4.1min.
software.
(3) When a weighing system is located in an explosive environment, a metal junction box must
be used.
(4) Equipment approved by the Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques (LCIE) (Central
Laboratory for the Electric Industries).
SM1 PY52
TSX XBT H100
4/60
Descritpion For connection to Length Reference Weight
m kg
Indicator cable: Junction box 3 SF3 PY32003 0,300
6-core with SF2 PY3504 10 SF3 PY32010 1,100
1 SUB-D type
20 SF3 PY32020 2,200
15-way connector
for ISP Plus 30 SF3 PY32030 3,400
40 SF3 PY32040 4,500
50 SF3 PY32050 5,600
60 SF3 PY32060 6,900
80 SF3 PY32080 9,000
120 SF3 PY32120 13,500
200 SF3 PY32200 22,500
SF3 PY32ppp 300 SF3 PY32300 33,500
Dimensions
Junction boxes SF2 PY3504 Zener barrier box SM1 PY52
94
80 99,7
14 52 52,5 75
84
6
110
238
250
76,3
(2)
(3) 4.2
35,5
5
6,5
(1)
Weight indicator TSX XBT H100 Flush mounting Zener barrier box panel mounting
Fixing by 4 or 6 press-in fasteners (supplied) SM1 PY52
(on 1 to 6 mm thick panel)
50
4,5
12,35 183,8 5,85

6,2
89,6
102
6,5
7 202
6,2
60
4/61
platform 4
Premium Warm Standby redundancy
Presentation
The Premium Warm Standby redundancy offer ensures continuity of operation for a
control system based on a Premium platform in the event of failure of:
b Central processing and communication functions.
b All or part of the I/O system.
It is based on the “Normal/Backup” redundancy principle with complete redundancy
of the main processing and communication functions, the use of simple I/O shared
on a Fipio bus and/or redundancy of in-rack I/O.
It covers all availability requirements when the purpose of the PLC is to monitor an
installation in continuous operation, signal incidents to a control station, and transmit
command instructions from the supervision manager to various locations on an
extensive site. It is aimed at processes which can tolerate a lack of control on the part
of the PLC lasting 1 to 2 s (average time for changeover from the “Normal” to the
“Backup” unit).
Areas of application:
b In the commercial sector:
v centralised technical management of a public facility (tunnel, airport, etc),
v control/monitoring of a water treatment or distribution station,
v electrical technical management.
b In the industrial sector:
v food and beverage processing,
v slow chemical processes,
4 v level/temperature monitoring, etc.
Operational safety and availability
The Warm Standby architecture ensures that the control system functions are
available, irrespective of the failure of any system component.
Operational safety in V Safety: capacity of an entity to present no danger to people,

control systems: goods and the environment
Capacity to provide a V Availability: V Reliability: capacity of an entity

specific service during the capacity of an entity to to perform a service within a given
cycle be operational, at any time
given moment or for a
given period of time V Ease of maintenance: capacity
of en entity to be maintained or
returned to operational state
within a given time
V Maintenance logistics : capacity

of an organisation to provide
the necessary maintenance
4.5 resources
Safety
Safety PLCs
Standard PLCs Premium Warm Standby solution
Availability
page 4/66 page 4/67
4/62
Principle Modicon Premium automation
platform 4
Principle
The Premium Warm Standby architecture combines physical redundancy of the PLC
with “Normal/Backup” type operation.
Only the “Normal” PLC processes the application and generates the outputs. The
“Backup” PLC applies the outputs generated by the “Normal” PLC, performs
self-diagnostics and permanently diagnoses the “Normal” PLC.
In event of a malfunction on the “Normal” PLC, the “Backup” PLC takes control and
then becomes the “Normal” PLC (the faulty PLC, previously “Normal”, becomes the
“Backup”).
Optimum availability of the application is ensured by:

b Automatic or manual “Normal/Backup” changeover.
b Smooth changeover on the actuators.
b Updating of the “Backup" PLC on each cycle.
b Signalling of the faulty component.
b Online repair.
b Transparent supervision (SCADA).
Ethernet TCP/IP network
Modbus bus
1 2
4
3 4 5
Essential elements for redundancy
1 TSX PSY power supply
2 TSX P57 353M/453M processor
3 TSX ETY 110 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module

6 7
Optional elements for redundancy
4 TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module TBX

TSX Micro
5 TSX SCY 21601 communication module with
TSX SCP 114 Modbus protocol PCMCIA card
6 TSX PSY power supply

4.5
7 TSX DpY discrete I/O modules Momentum Premium
Fipio bus
Shared elements on the Fipio bus
Elements which can be redundant are:

b The main rack.
b The main rack power supply.
b The processor.
Possibly accompanied by:
b Discrete input modules.
b Discrete output modules.
b One or more extendable racks with their power supply.
b One or more Ethernet TCP/IP network or Modbus bus communication modules.
Elements of the Fipio bus shared between the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs are:
b Discrete or analog input modules (Momentum or TBX).
b Discrete or analog output modules (Momentum or TBX).
b One or more TSX Micro/Premium agent PLCs (these can support the entire range
of I/O: discrete, analog or application-specific).
page 4/66 page 4/67
4/63
platform 4
Functions
“Normal” and “Backup” PLC functions
The “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs are physically and functionally identical, but their role
is differentiated according to their status: “Normal” or “Backup”.
The “Normal” Premium PLC:
b Executes the application.
b Updates the outputs and inputs (in-rack and on the Fipio bus).
b Provides communication functions with peripheral devices.
b Sends its database to the “Backup” PLC.
b Recovers diagnostic information from the “Backup” PLC.
b Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm
Standby architecture.
The “Backup” Premium PLC:
b Executes part of the application.
b Reads the state of the in-rack inputs.
b Updates its in-rack and Fipio outputs according to the state of those of the
“Normal” PLC.
b Provides communication functions with peripheral devices.
b Recovers diagnostic information from the “Normal” PLC.
b Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm
Standby architecture.
Management of shared I/O on Fipio bus
The Fipio bus manages I/O exchanges on Fipio devices. The “Normal” PLC is an
4 arbitrator for the active Fipio bus while the “Backup” PLC is an arbitrator for the
passive Fipio network.
Due to the characteristics of the Fipio bus, only the “Normal” PLC reads the physical
inputs on the Fipio bus and controls the physical outputs on the Fipio bus. The
“Backup” PLC does not access the Fipio bus.
During each cycle, the “Backup” PLC receives the values of the I/O on the Fipio bus
from the “Normal” PLC via the inter-PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110 module) and
applies them to its own outputs. This updating of the memory enables smooth
“Normal/Backup” changeover by maintaining the state of the I/O during
changeover.
Management of “Normal/Backup” states
Malfunction of one of the following elements automatically causes a
“Normal/Backup” changeover:
b Main rack power supply.
b PLC processor.
b TSX ETY 210 communication module.
b Fipio bus connected to the integrated processor port.
For all other elements, “Normal/Backup” changeover can be customised (manual
changeover).
Management of optional redundant I/O
4.5 For redundant inputs, the sensor information is transmitted simultaneously to the
“Normal” and “Backup” PLCs via the 2 input modules placed in each PLC. Two
Telefast 2 16-channel sub-bases, ABE 7ACC10 with redundant inputs and
ABE–7ACC11 with redundant outputs, can be used to perform this double wiring easily
using preformed HE 10 connector connection cables, (see page 4/67, refs. 14, 15,
20 and 21).
The output values are only generated by the application processing of the “Normal”
PLC. This sends its commands to the corresponding output modules.
During each cycle, the “Backup” PLC receives the “Normal” PLC output values via
the inter-PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110 module) and applies them to its own
outputs. This updating enables smooth “Normal/Backup” changeover by
maintaining the state of the outputs during changeover.
Management of supervision transparency (SCADA)
Transparent communication with level 2 (supervisor, third-party device, etc) during
changeover of the PLC in “Normal” mode to the PLC in “Backup” mode is provided by
the TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP modules, using a unique IP address.
Communication with a redundant architecture is therefore similar to that for a simple
architecture.
This transparency is identical in Modbus with the use of the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA
card (Modbus protocol in RS 485) installed in the TSX SCY 21601 communication
module.
page 4/66 page 4/67
4/64
software setup platform 4
Functions
Ring topology for shared equipment on the Fipio bus
To improve the availability of shared equipment on the Fipio bus, it is possible to create
a Fipio redundant ring using fibre optics. The fibre optic ring can then be used to:
b Maintain normal operation in the event of a break at some point on the fibre optic
medium.
b Increase the immunity of the Fipio bus in environments with high levels of
electromagnetic interference.
Optical fibre
4
1
Premium Momentum Premium
1 OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter (see page 5/83).
Software setup
A Premium Warm Standby redundant architecture is set up using PL7 Pro software
(1), in exactly the same way as a standard non-redundant process is set up. It is,
however, necessary to apply the rule that the application program of both the
“Normal” and “Backup” PLCs must be completely identical.
4.5
Redundancy entails certain special features which, if taken into account at the start
of the development task, are very simple to set up using the additional Premium
Warm Standby application design software TLX CD/CD3 WSBY P40E.
This software can be perform the following functions:
b Taking account of Normal/Backup states during program execution.

b Sharing the database between the 2 PLCs via DFB user function blocks and EF
elementary function blocks.
b Management of redundant in-rack I/O.
b Management of shared I/O on the Fipio bus.
(1) Warm Standby non compatible with Unity Pro software.
page 4/66 page 4/67
4/65
platform 4
References
Description Type Reference Weight
(1) kg
Software packages for setting Equipment with 1 station (equiped with PL7 Pro) TLX CD WSBY P40E –
up a Warm Standby redundant Equipment with 3 stations (equiped with PL7 Pro) TLX CD3 WSBY P40E –
architecture on Premium
Designation Type Reference Weight
kg
Ethernet TCP/IP Identical to those of the TSX ETY 110 module (see page TSX ETY 210 0.270
communication module for 5/40). For the Warm Standby architecture, this module also
Premium Warm Standby provides:
architecture - transparent addressing during changeover
- diagnostics of the architecture (self-tests, state of the
Ethernet link and of the TSX ETY 210 dual module),
- la maintenance with access to the "backup" PLC
Additional compatible elements
The Warm Standby architecture presented on page 4/63 shows, among other things,
the essential elements for redundancy. Compatible standard modules can be added
to this minimum configuration according to the requirements of the process being
automated.
Elements for redundancy (sold in lots of 2) (2)

4 b Bus X remote system:
v TSX REY 200 Bus X remote module, for increasing the length of Bus X to
2 x 350 m.
b Communication:
v TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module, for communication with
level 3,
v TSX SCP 114 Modbus communication PCMCIA card, for Modbus Slave
communication with transparent addressing for third-party devices. This card should
be inserted in the slot in the TSX SCY 21601 communication module.
b Discrete and analog I/O:
v TSX DEY ppK discrete input modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC11
Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases,
v TSX DSY ppK discrete output modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC10
Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases,
v TSX DMY ppK discrete mixed I/O modules with HE 10 connectors with
ABE 7ACC11/10 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases,
v TSX AEY/ASY analog,TSX CTY/CCY counter, TSX CAY/CSY/CFY axis control and
TSX ISP weighing modules. These modules cannot be used as elements for
redundancy, but can be used as elements shared via the Fipio agent Premium PLCs.
4.5 Shared elements on the Fipio bus
b TBX distributed I/O modules:

v TBX LEP 030 Fipio communication module for base units,
v TBX DES/DSS/DMS discrete I/O base units,
v TBX AES/ASS/AMS analog I/O base units,
v TSX EEF/ESF/EMF dust and damp proof discrete I/O base units.
b Momentum I/O modules:
v 170 FTN 110 01 Fipio communication module,
v 170 ADI/ADO/ADM discrete I/O base units,
v 170 AAI/AAO/AMM analog I/O base units.
b Fipio agent PLCs:
v Premium PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules,
v TSX Micro PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules .
b Other shared elements:
v OZF FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter, can be used to create a Fipio bus fibre optic
ring,
v TSX FP ACC 6 Fipio electrical repeater, increases the length of the bus by the
creation of segments, each 1000 m maximum.
(1) Product supplied with setup manual in English.

(2) The TSX AEY/ASY I/O analog modules, the TSX CTY/CCY/CAY/CSY/CFY/ISPY
application-specific modules are no redundancy elements. They can be used as shared
elements with Fipio agent Premium PLCs.
Connections:
page 4/67
4/66
platform 4
Example of architecture with redundant I/O and shared I/O on Fipio bus
12 3 45 6 12 3 45 6
16
17 17
1 18 1
19
7 8 7 8
9 10 10 11
20 20
14
TBX
12 15
4
13
21
Momentum
1 TSX RKY pEX: Premium extendable rack.

2 TSX PSYppppM: power supply module.
3 TSX P57 353M/453M: Premium processor with integrated Fipio link.
4 TSX ETY 110: Ethernet TCP/IP network module.
5 TSX ETY 210: Ethway/Ethernet TCP/IP network module.
6 TSX SCY 21601: communication module for type III PCMCIA card.
7 TSX DSYppK: discrete output modules, for redundancy.
8 TSX DEYppK: discrete input modules, for redundancy.
9 TSX LEP 030: Fipio communication module for TBX base units with TSX BLP 01
connector.
10 TBX DES 16pp: distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared.
11 TBX DSS 16pp: distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared with
TBX CBS 010 cache/cable.
4.5
12 170 FNT 110 00: Fipio communication module for Momentum base unit with
TSX FPP ACC2 connector.
13 170 ADI/AAI/ADMppp: discrete or analog I/O Momentum base unit.
14 ABE 7ACC11/10: Telefast 2 sub-bases for redundant I/O.
15 ABE 7p16ppp: Telefast 2 connection sub-bases.
16 LA4 DT2U: time-delay relay designed to desynchronise starting of the “Normal”
PLC and the “Backup” PLC during simultaneous power-up.
17 TSX SCP 114: type III PCMCIA card for Modbus Slave communication.
18 490 NTW 000pp: preformed connection cable with RJ 45 connector, for
interconnecting TSX ETY 110 modules (shielded twisted pair).
19 TSX FP CAp00: Fipio bus trunk cable, shielded twisted pair.
20 TSX CDPp53: preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector
(length = 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5 m).
21 ABF H20H008: preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector
(length = 0.08 m).
References:
page 4/66
4/67
Contents 5 - Communication 5
Selection guide: networks, buses and serial links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/2
5.1 - Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready

b Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8
b Embedded Web servers
v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10

v Standard Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12
v FactoryCast Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/14
v FactoryCast HMI Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16
b Ethernet TCP/IP communication services
v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/22

v Standard Ethernet services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/23
v I/O Scanning service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/26
v FDR replacement service for faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/27
v Global Data service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28
v NTP time synchronization service (Unity Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/29
v SMTP electronic mail notification service (Unity Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30
v SNMP service protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/31
v TCP Open optional service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/32
b Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/34
b Processors with integrated Ethernet port and Ethernet modules . . . . . . . . . page 5/38
b Ethernet infrastructure ConneXium wiring system

5 v Presentation, installation principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/40
v Hubs, transceivers, switches, gateways and cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/46
5.2 - CANopen machine bus

b CANopen PCMCIA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/52
5.3 - AS-Interface sensor/actuator bus

b AS-Interface master module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/56
b Phaseo regulated power supplies for AS-Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/60
5/0
5.4 - X-Way bus and networks
b Communication architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66
b Fipio bus manager function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/70
b Fipio bus Agent function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/74
b Fipway network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/78
b Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/82
b Fipio/Fipway wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/84
b Ethernet TCP/IP network (10BASE5 interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/88
5.5 - Network and fieldbus

b Modbus Plus network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90
b Profibus DP fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/94
b INTERBUS fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/96
5.6 - Serial links

b Modbus SL serial link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/100
5
b Uni-Telway serial link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104
b Jnet serial link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/108
b Asynchronous serial links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/110
b Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports . . . . . . . . page 5/112
5/1
platform 5
Ethernet CPUs and modules

Transparent Ready
Applications Processors with built-in TCP/IP Ethernet port (heterogeneous industrial local area network)
Network type
Type of network Ethernet TCP/IP
Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

Method of access CSMA-CD
Data rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Medium Double twisted pair

Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system
Configuration Maximal number of devices Maximum of 64 stations per network

Maximum length 100 m max. between hub and terminal device
Number of networks/station 0 (1) 2 (1) 3 (1)
5 Other built-in port – Fipio bus manager – Fipio bus manager

function function
Basic services Services TCP/IP Uni-TE/Modbus message handling

Services X-Way Inter-network X-Way routing, X-Way/Uni-Telway routing, module diagnostics
Ethway –
Embedded Web Basic services "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics

serverservices "Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data
FactoryCast services –
Factory Cast HMI services –
Transparent Ready communication services I/O Scanning (64 stations)

Global Data
Network management (SNMP)
FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP protocols)
–
Type of processor –
Module format Double format processor
Type of module TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 2823M TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 4823M
TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 4634M
TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 5634M
Page 5/38
(1) Excluding embedded Ethernet port.
5/2
5
Ethernet TCP/IP modules (heterogeneous industrial local area network)
10BASE5 (AUI), 10BASE-T (RJ45) 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (RJ45)

CSMA-CD
10 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s
Triaxial cable or double twisted pair Double twisted pair

Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system
1 to 4 depending on processor or slot-PLC used
–
5
Uni-TE message handling, common words, application to –

application
– "Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics

"Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data
“Alarms viewer” – “Alarms viewer” alarm display
“Graphic Data Editor” “Graphic Data Editor” graphic object editor
Display of user Web pages Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available)
(1.4 Mb available)
FactoryCast HMI services
(2)
– I/O Scanning (64 stations) –

– Global Data –
– FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP) –

TCP Open – TCP Open –
All types of Premium processors TSX P57 1p/57 2p/57 3p/57 4p and Atrium slot-PLC T PCX/TSX PCI 57 2p/57 3p
Standard format module
TSX ETY 110 TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100
5:39 5/19
(2) FactoryCast HMI services : HMI database, E.mail with automatic sending on events, interpreted math and logic functions, connection to relational databases
and simulator tool.
5/3
Selection guide (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
Network and bus modules
Applications Local area network conforming to Local area network conforming to Fip
Modbus Plus standard
Type of network or bus Modbus Plus Fipway
Structure Physical interface Modbus Plus standard Fip standard
Method of access Rotating token Bus managed by bus arbitrator

Data rate 1 Mbit/s 1 Mbit/s
Medium Twisted pair Twisted shielded pair

Fibre optic via transceivers or repeaters
Configuration Maximal number of devices 32 per segment 32 per segment

5 64 on all segments 128 on all segments
Maximal length 450 m per segment 1000 m per segment

1800 m with 3 repeaters 5000 m maxi with 3 repeaters
Number of links/station 1 max. 1 to 4 depending on the model of processeur
Services Message handling - Write/read varaibles - Uni-TE

- Global database - COM/shared table
- Peer Cop service - Application-to-application
- Telegram
Type of processor All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-PLC
Nature of module PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-PLC PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-PLC
and on TSX SCY 21601 module
Type of module TSX MBP 100 TSX FPP 20
Pages 5/91 5/79
5/4
5
CAN fieldbus Open industrial sensor/actuator bus conforming to Modbus open industrial bus
AS-Interface standard
Bus CANopen V4.02 AS-Interface Modbus
ISO 11898 V2 AS-Interface standard RS 232D RS 485 isolated

RS 485 isolated
20 mA CL
CSMA/CA, multi-master Master/slave Master/slave

20 Kbit/s...1 Mbit/s according to distance 167 Kbit/s 19.2 Kbit/s max.
Twisted shielded pair 2-wire AS-Interface cable Twisted shielded pair
127 slaves 31 + 31 discrete, analog or security devices 32 devices max. 32 devices max.
48 slave addresses
max.
247 slave addresses
max.
5
From 20 m (1 Mbit/s)…2500 m (20 Kbit/s) 100 m 15 m in RS 232D 1300 m
200 m with repeaters 1000 m in RS 485
1300 m in 20 mA CL or
intégrated link
1 max. 2 to 8 depending on the model of processor According to power consumption (see page 9/2)
- Implicit PDO exchange Transparency of exchanges with sensor/actuator Modbus master/slace RTU or ASCII
- Explicit SDO exchange or CAN function block devices 13 Modbus functions (read/write bits and words,
- Explicit PDU CAN exchange diagnostic…)
All type of Premium processor (except All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-PLC
TSX P57 153/154) and Atrium slot-PLC
PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-PLC Standard format module PCMCIA type III card Standard format
inserted on (1) module
TSX CPP 110 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCP 11p (2) TSX SCY 11601
1 built-in link
TSX SCY 21601
5/53 5/57 5/100

(1) Premium processor/Atrium slot-PLC and TSX SCY 21601 communication module.
(2) At the end of reference, replace p by 1: RS 232D, by 2: 20 mA CL or by 4: isolated RS 485.
5/5
Selection guide (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
Network, bus and serial link modules
Applications Local area network conforming to Fip Uni-Telway multicomponent industrial bus
Type of network or bus Fipio (Agent) Fipio (gestionnaire Bus Uni-Telway

de bus)
Structure Physical interface Fip standard RS 485 RS 485 isolated

non-isolated
Method of access Bus managed by bus arbitrator Master/slave

Data rate 1 Mbit/s 19,2 Kbit/s max. (1)
Medium Twisted shielded pair Twisted shielded pair

Fibre optic via transceivers or repeaters
Configuration Maximal number of devices 32 per segment, 5 (excluding 28, (96 slaves
5 128 on all segments (limited to 64 with
TSX P57 153M processor )
programming
terminal)
addresses max.)
Maximal length From 1000 m to 15 000 m (depending on the 10 m 1000 m

medium use) with repeaters 15 m in 20 mA CL
Number of links/station 1 max. 1 max. According to power
Services Message handling - Uni-TE - Uni-TE Client/Server 240 bytes (128 bytes on
- Periodic data exchange - Application-to-application 240 bytes (128 bytes
- Application-to-application - Transparency of all devices on X-Way architecture
- Transparent exchange of remote I/O
Type of processors All type of Premium TSX P57 p53/p54M All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-PLC
processor and TSX P57 p823M
Atrium slot-PLC T PCX 57 353M
TSX PCI 57 354M
Nature of module PCMCIA type III Built-in on the Uni-Telway built-in Standard format
card on processor processor or link module
or slot-PLC slot-PLC
Type of module TSX FPP 10 2 Built-in link 1 AUX 2 TSX

on processor terminal port SCY 21601
Pages 5/75 5/71 5/105
5/6
5
Jnet proprietary industrial local INTERBUS industrial fieldbus Profibus industrial fieldbus
network
Jnet INTERBUS Profibus DP
RS 232 RS 485 20 mA CL RS 485 isolated RS 485

RS 485 isolated isolated
20 mA CL
Rotating token Master/slave generation 4 Master
19,2 Kbit/s 500 Kbit/s 9,6 Kbit/s...12 Mbit/s according to
lenght of bus
Twisted shielded pair Twisted shielded pair, Twisted shielded pair,

Fiber optic, infra-red ... Fiber optic or infra-red
2 in RS 232D, 32 (16 if SMC PLC in the network) 512 slaves max. with 254 bus 126 slaves
28 in RS 485,
16 in 20 mA CL
terminal blocks max. 5
1300 m 200 m 400 m max. (inter-station bus) 1200 m (9,6 Kbit/s), 4800 m with
depending on 3 repeaters
network 100 m (12 Mbit/s), 400 m with
topology 3 repeaters
consumption(see page 43900/2) 3 maxi 1 ou 2 depending on the type of Premium processor/Atrium slot-PLC
terminal port) Shared table pwith a total of - Data process implicit exchange - Read/write access for DP slave I/O
on terminal port) 128 words (64 words if SMC PLC in - Pre-processing data
via the master the network) - Logical addressing - Data transfer for slave diagnostics
- Segmentation - Parametering and monitoring
requests
- Inter-master dialog not supported
All type of Premium processor(except TSX 57 1p) and Atrium slot-PLC
PCMCIA type III card on processor PCMCIA type III card on Standard PC card on Standard format module
or slot-PLC and on TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCY 21601 module format module ISA bus
module
TSX SCP 11p TSX JNP 112 TSX JNP 114 TSX IBY 100 TSX IBX 100 TSX PBY 100
(1)
5/107 5/97 5/93

(1) At the end of reference, replace p by 1: RS 232D, by 2: 20 mA CL or by 4: isolated RS 485.
5/7
Architecture Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready

Logical Ethernet communication architecture
Company
Intranet
Internet
Site 3
Site 2
Enterprise MES ERP Site 1
Unix Windows Linux
Factory
HMI + SCADA
ETHERNET TCP/IP
Industrial PC
Workshop
Quantum Quantum Quantum
5 Premium
5.1 Dialog terminal

Quantum
PLC
Momentum M1E
Robot
Distributed I/O
Servodrive
Gateway
Inputs/outputs
Workshop 1 Workshop 2
MES: Manufacturing Execution System (production management system)

ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning (integrated management software packages)
HMI/SCADA: Human/Machine Interface/Supervision Control And Data Acquisition
Gateway: Bridge to sensor/actuator bus, to installed base network, field bus, etc.
5/8
Architecture (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 5

Physical Ethernet communication architecture
Site 3
Router
Router Site 2
WAN Internet
Provider Public
Provider telecommunications
Specialized link
Site 1
Frame Relay network, ADSL
ATM
Router Firewall RAS
Switches (VLAN)
or routers
(max. 50 switches) Switch

Switch
Switch Redundant optical ring ERP
100BASE-FX Switch
3,100 m
max.
Full Duplex Half Duplex MES
100 m Fiber optics
100 m max.
Collision domain 2 max.
Hub
Switch Quantum
100 m
5
max.
Premium Quantum
100BASE-TX
Hub Hub 5.1
Transceiver Momentum M1E
Third-party device
Hub
Gateway Magelis iPC

210 m VijeoLook
maximum Robot
100 m
max.
TSX Micro
Collision domain 1 Momentum
100 m ATV58
max.
Premium
Collision domain 3
AS-Interface bus (1)
(1) In general, several collision domains should be defined in order to increase the architecture surface and improve performance. See pages 5/34 to 5/45.
5/9
platform 5

Embedded Web servers
Presentation
FactoryCast HMI Web server user In line with the Transparent Ready approach, TSX Micro, Premium, Quantum,
Momentum, Advantys STB distributed I/O and ATV drive automation platforms
provide transparent access to data in realtime using Web-based technologies via
their Ethernet TCP/IP or FactoryCast communication module.
The Transparent Ready communication modules in automation platforms integrate

Ethernet TCP/IP services (Modbus TCP/IP messaging, SNMP network management
functions, etc.) and provide the following Web functions:
b Standard Web server
FactoryCast Web server b FactoryCast Web server
b FactoryCast HMI Web service
Standard Web server

Standard Web services can be used to execute diagnostic and maintenance
functions on automation system installations locally or remotely using a simple
Internet browser:
Standard Web server b PLC system and I/O module diagnostics, PLC error display (“Rack Viewer” pages
ready to use)
b Display and adjustment of PLC variables (“Data Editor” pages ready to use)
The embedded Web server is a realtime PLC data server. All the data can be
Ethernet TCP/IP PLC module services presented in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be
accessed using any Internet browser that supports the integrated Java code. The
standard functions provided by the Web server are supplied “ready to use” and
therefore do not require any programming at either PLC level or at the level of the
PC device supporting the Internet browser.
5 FactoryCast Web server

In addition to providing standard Web services, the FactoryCast Web server can be
used to control and monitor automation system installations both locally and
remotely. The following functions are available:
b Management of system alarms and PLC application with partial or global
acknowledgment (“ready to use” pages for the “Alarm Viewer” function)
5.1 b Application graphics diagnostics (customized graphical views created by the user
using the “Graphic Data Editor” function)
b Graphics control via animated Web pages created by the user and stored in the
FactoryCast module
FactoryCast Web servers can also be used to customize control, diagnostics and
maintenance interfaces via user-defined Web pages and Web pages transferred to
the module using FactoryCast configuration software (maximum available memory
required is 8 Mb).
FactoryCast HMI Web server

In addition to the FactoryCast Web functions, the FactoryCast HMI Web server
provides HMI Web functions, which are executed in the module itself:
b Realtime HMI database management, independent of the PLC processor
b Arithmetic and logical calculations based on HMI data
b Connectivity with relational databases
b Transmission of electronic messages (e-mail)
FactoryCast HMI is an active Web server, which can be used to execute HMI
functions integrated in a PLC module. This eliminates the need for communication
via polling to update the HMI/SCADA database.
In FactoryCast HMI modules, the HMI functions are executed without affecting the
PLC application program and therefore the cycle time.
5/10
Selection Modicon Premium automation
platform 5

Embedded Web servers
Selection of Telemecanique Transparent Ready modules (1)

Products Reference Web server integrated
Standard FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI
Class B20 Class C20/C30 Class D10
Quantum automation Processors 140 CPU 651 50
platform
140 CPU 651 60
Modules 140 NOE 771 01
140 NOE 771 11
140 NWM 100 00
Premium automation Processors TSX P57 2623 M

platform
TSX P57 2823 M
TSX P57 3623 M
TSX P57 4823 M
TSX P57 1634 M
TSX P57 2634 M
TSX P57 3634 M
TSX P57 4634 M
TSX P57 5634 M
Modules TSX ETY 4103

5
TSX ETY 110WS
TSX ETY 5103
TSX WMY 100 5.1

TSX Micro automation Modules TSX ETZ 410
platform
TSX ETZ 510
Momentum automation M1E 171 CCC 960 20

platform processors
171 CCC 960 30
171 CCC 980 20
171 CCC 980 30
Modules 170 ENT 110 01
170 ENT 110 02
Advantys STB Network STB NIP 2212

distributed I/O interface
module
Altivar ATV 38/58 Card VW3 A58310
variable speed drive
FactoryCast is a range of PLC modules associated with their configuration software

and combines the following features:
b Realtime communication functions based on Ethernet TCP/IP
b Predefined Web pages, which enable advanced installation diagnostics
b The capacity to store dynamic user-defined Web pages
(1) Electrical Distribution products of Merlin Gerin.
5/11
platform 5

Embedded Web servers, standard Web services
Standard Web services
Remote Web clients
“Thin Client” PC
Web client
Internet
Magelis
Smart iPC Firewall
Intranet “Thin Client” Web client
Premium + Web server TSX Micro + Web server
Quantum + Web server
“Rack Viewer” and “Data Editor” functions are supported by the Ethernet TCP/IP
modules of the following:
5 b TSX Micro platform
b Premium platform
b Quantum platform
b Momentum platform
b Advantys STB distributed I/Os
b FactoryCast modules
5.1 See module reference on page 5/7.
These functions can be accessed using a standard Internet browser connected to the
network. They are “ready to use” and secure (password-protected).
They can be used locally or remotely via:

b Intranet
b A modem and RAS server
b Internet.
5/12
platform 5

Embedded Web servers, standard Web services
“Rack Viewer” PLC diagnostics function
The “Rack Viewer” function (PLC rack display) can be used for PLC system and I/O
diagnostics. It displays the following in realtime:
b LED status on the front panel of the PLC

b The PLC version
b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and
words
b Detailed diagnostics of all I/O module channels or application-specific channels in
the configuration
Quantum hardware configuration
“Data Editor” read/write function for PLC data and variables
The “Data Editor” function can be used to create tables of animated variables for
realtime read/write access to lists of PLC data.
The variables to be displayed can be entered and displayed either symbolically

(S_Pump 234) or by their address (%MW99).
These variables only support write access if this option has been enabled using the
FactoryCast configuration software. A second password must be entered and
verified when writing a value to a variable. 5
Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or
modified can be created by the user and saved in the Ethernet TCP/IP module.
5.1
Premium main rack hardware configuration
Variables table
5/13
platform 5

Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast Web server
FactoryCast Web server
Remote Web client
Modem Internet
+
RAS server
Magelis
Smart iPC Firewall
“Thin Client” Web client

Intranet
Premium + Web server TSX Micro + Web server

In addition to standard Web services, FactoryCast modules (see selection table on

page 5/11) support the following functions:
5 b Alarm Viewer
b Creation and display of graphical views via an online graphics editor (Graphic Data
Editor supplied)
b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user
5.1 FactoryCast configuration software (supplied with FactoryCast modules) is required

for the last 2 functions.
Alarm Viewer function
“Alarm Viewer” is a ready-to-use password-protected function. Based on the

diagnostics buffer managed in the PLCs (specific memory area used to store all
diagnostic events), this function is available with the Premium/Atrium platforms (with
PL7 or Unity software) and the Quantum platform (with Unity software).
This function can be used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion)
managed at PLC level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as
DFBs (system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic
function blocks created by the user).
Alarm Viewer page
The diagnostics viewer is a Web page comprising a list of messages, which displays
the following information for each alarm:
b Its state
b The type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB)
b Its geographical area
b The dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a fault.
5/14
platform 5

Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast Web server
FactoryCast Web server (continued)

Graphic Data Editor function
This function can be used to create graphical views online, animated by PLC
variables.
These views are created using a library of graphic objects, which are predefined by
simple copy/paste operations. The object parameters are set according to user
requirements (color, PLC variables, labels, etc.). The graphic objects provided,
which are the basic elements of the view, are as follows:
b Analog and digital indicators
b Horizontal and vertical bar charts
b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values
b Pushbutton boxes
b Functions for recording trends
b etc.
The views created can be saved in the FactoryCast modules.
These customized graphic objects can be reused in user Web pages that have been
created using standard software for editing HTML pages.
Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages
In addition, FactoryCast Web modules have 8 Mbytes of memory (1), which is

accessed in the same way as a hard drive and can be used to host user-defined Web
pages.
These Web pages can be created using any standard tool (2) that enables creation
and editing in HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated
graphic objects linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are provided in the
Graphic Data Editor supplied with FactoryCast. 5
The Web pages created can be used, for example, to:
b Display and modify all PLC variables in realtime
b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc.)
5.1
This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic screens used for the
following purposes:
b Display, monitoring, diagnostics
b Generation of realtime production reports
b Maintenance help
b Operator guides
Configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers
The configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers is supplied on CD-Rom with
every FactoryCast module (TSX Micro, Premium or Quantum).
The software is used for the configuration and administration of the Web server
embedded in these modules. The software is compatible with Windows 95/98,
Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 and Windows XP operating systems. It offers the
following functions:
b Access security management
b Definition of user names and associated passwords for accessing Web pages
b Definition of access to variables authorized for modification
b Saving/restoration of an entire website
b Transfer of Web pages created locally by the user on their PC workstation to the
FactoryCast module and vice versa.
(1) Memory is not affected in the event of power outages or if the PLC is reinitialized.
(2) For example, Microsoft FrontPage.
5/15
platform 5

Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server
FactoryCast HMI Web services
The FactoryCast HMI range comprises two Web server modules embedded in the
PLC (one for the Premium platform and one for the Quantum platform) and
FactoryCast HMI application development software (to be ordered separately).
These modules have the same Web functions as FactoryCast modules, namely:
b Ethernet TCP/IP communication functions:
v TCP/IP messaging service with Modbus TCP and Uni-TE TCP protocols
v SNMP agent for standardized network management, which supports standard
MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB.
b Standard Web and FactoryCast services:

v “Rack Viewer” PLC diagnostics functions, see page 5/13,
v “Data Editor” read/write functions for PLC variables, see page 5/13,
v “Alarm Viewer” alarm display functions, see page 5/14,
v “Graphic Data Editor” online graphical editor functions, see page 5/15,
v Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages, see page 5/115.
FactoryCast HMI modules also provide the following specialized HMI Web services:
b Realtime database management specific to the module, combining PLC data
acquisition and the management of local internal variables.
b Arithmetic and logical calculations for pre-processing data.
b E-mail with automatic transmission triggered by a specific process event.
b Connection to the SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle relational databases for
archiving data for tracking or logging.
5 By simply setting parameters, the FactoryCast HMI application development

software can be used to set up these functions in an intuitive and user-friendly way.
A simulation mode, which is integrated in the software, can be used to test the
operation of the FactoryCast HMI application without a module and without the need
for a physical connection to a PLC, thereby simplifying debugging.
5.1
Functions: Description: Characteristics: References:

Pages 5/14 to 5/16 Page 5/17 Page 5/17 Page 5/17
5/16
platform 5

Architectures
FactoryCast HMI Web servers can be integrated in various architectures:
b Installations that require a flexible and cost-effective HMI solution.

b “Hybrid” architectures supplementing conventional SCADA systems.
b Architectures where a direct link is required between automation systems and
information management levels (IT link).
Relational database
Thin Client
Flexible Web HMI solution
The use of Web-based technologies means that FactoryCast HMI can replace
IPC conventional HMI or SCADA solutions in applications where architectures require a
flexible multistation HMI, thus providing a temporary “nomadic” remote control
function.
Ethernet TCP/IP
These architectures consist of:

b Several PLCs networked on Ethernet, which have FactoryCast HMI Web server
modules.
b One or more PC terminals with “Thin Client” interface equipped with a simple Web
browser.
b If necessary, a relational database in which FactoryCast HMI can archive data
Premium directly from the automation system.
+ Web server Quantum + Web server
FactoryCast HMI modules read PLC data and execute HMI services (E-mail,
interpreted calculations, connection to relational databases, updating Web pages) at
source in the PLC, without affecting the PLC program or the scan time.
This solution provides:

b A reliable HMI application, which is executed at source in a robust PLC device.
Premium TSX Micro b An integrated multistation interface and remote access that is easy and
cost-effective to set up (“Thin Client” terminal).
5
b An HMI application that is easy to maintain (the application is housed in a single
location on the server side).
b Preventive maintenance via E-mail.
b Greater availability of data archiving done from source. 5.1
Nomad
HMI
Hybrid architectures
SCADA Vijeo Look
In this type of architecture, FactoryCast HMI supplements conventional SCADA
MIS IT links systems. SCADA Vijeo Look or Monitor Pro software meets the requirement for
centralizing information for global supervision from a central site.
Intranet
Combining a FactoryCast HMI solution and a conventional SCADA solution enables:
b Simplification of the SCADA application by locating some of the SCADA
processing at source, at PLC level.
b Increased availability of the traceability function due to the direct connection
between FactoryCast HMI modules and relational databases.
b Powerful “ready to use” remote diagnostics capacities.
b “Nomadic” stations to be connected to the Intranet or Internet via “Thin Client” PC
or PDA devices.
Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server
Functions: Description: Characteristics: References:

5/17
platform 5

Nomad Direct links with the information management levels

HMI
In this type of architecture FactoryCast HMI eliminates the need for intermediate
MIS IT links devices (gateways), which are expensive to install and maintain, by establishing a
direct link between the automation levels and the global information management
levels (MES, ERP, etc).
Intranet The PLC directly archives information from the automation system in relational
databases, which allows a “collaborative” automation system to be set up, making it
easier to share data in real time.
This solution results in:

b Simplified architectures
b Lower installation, development and maintenance costs
b Increased reliability of information (the data is collected at source)
b Greater availability of data archiving
Premium + Web server
Thin Client
Relational database Specialized HMI services
Magelis PLC acquisition and realtime database
Smart iPC
With an internal architecture similar to that of an HMI/SCADA system, FactoryCast
HMI modules manage their own variable database in realtime, independently of the
PLC program. It is this variable database that is used to execute various functions,
Database Web page
connection including internal processing, archiving, alarm, E-mail, etc.
display
Variables in this realtime database are updated using the automation system data
acquisition service.
This service becomes operational once the following parameters have been set in
5 FactoryCast Interpreted
the FactoryCast HMI software:
HMI realtime calculations b Direct import of PLC variable/symbol databases (no double entry).
database b Definition of the frequency of acquisition (period at which this variable is updated).
PLC data
Note: A FactoryCast HMI application running in a Premium configured FactoryCast HMI module
5.1 Transmission can access also the remote PLC variables in the architecture via a transparent network
of E-mail (X-Way/Uni-TE transparent protocols).
Characteristics:
b Maximum number of I/O variables per application: 1000 variables from PLCs
FactoryCast HMI modules b Maximum number of internal variables per application: 100
b Acquisition frequency: 500 ms, minimum

Page 5/17 Page 5/17 Page 5/17
5/18
platform 5

Specialized HMI services (continued)

E-mail transmission
The FactoryCast HMI module can, on a specific event, send E-mail completely
autonomously to a predefined list of E-mail addresses. This function is executed
independently of the PLC program.
The event that triggers the E-mail may be associated with the following:
b A PLC variable (I/O, internal variable)
b An alarm, a threshold overshoot
b A machine or process state
b An operator action, etc.
When an E-mail is sent to a destination E-mail address, it must pass through an

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server. This server receives the E-mail and
waits for the recipient to acknowledge it. The E-mail service is compatible with all
SMTP servers. A return address can be defined should delivery to the destination
address fail.
Characteristics:
b Configuration of the SMTP server: Compatible with all SMTP servers
b Maximum number of E-mail: 100
b Contents of E-mail messages: Free text with embedded dynamic variable values
(from the PLC) and hypertext links (unlimited)
Connection to relational databases
The FactoryCast HMI module can be connected directly and completely

autonomously to the following remote relational databases:
b SQL Server
b MySQL
b Oracle
5
This connection enables all internal or process data to be archived so that it can be
logged and traced.
5.1
The data can be archived (written) periodically and/or on a specific event. These
variables can either be from PLCs (I/O bits, internal bits, internal words and registers)
or local to the module. The FactoryCast HMI “Roll Over” function checks the size of
tables by managing the maximum number of records. This circular data archiving
function automatically deletes the oldest data and can be accessed by simply setting
parameters in the FactoryCast HMI software.
Characteristics:
b Number of databases that can be connected: 3
b Number of tables that can be written per database: 10, maximum
b Number of columns per table: 50, maximum
b Type of database supported: Oracle, SQL Server and MySQL
b Automatic table creation: The FactoryCast HMI server automatically creates a
table in the database if one does not already exist
Calculation functions
The FactoryCast HMI server can carry out various arithmetic and logical operations
on a combination of variables from the HMI database and does this independently of
the PLC processor. These calculations include, for example, scaling, formatting,
logic processing for event triggering, etc.
This calculation function is provided in the form of spreadsheets where the formulae
are defined in cells. The spreadsheets are interpreted and processed by the server.
The result of each formula is associated with a new internal variable. The processing
of each spreadsheet is initiated by a trigger.
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References:

5/19
platform 5

FactoryCast HMI application development software
FactoryCast HMI application development software, referenced

TLX CD FCHMI V1M, provides multiproject management and complete control of
FactoryCast HMI applications, during both the development and the debugging
phases, thanks to the online mode and simulation mode (operational when the
system is offline) options.
This software enables the intuitive and user-friendly setup of HMI functions by simply
setting parameters using a tree structure of the application and can be used for
complete management of the Web site:
b Setting parameters for HMI functions:

v Configuration of PLC interfaces: Import symbol databases and set parameters for
the acquisition period
v Configuration of spreadsheets
v Configuration of E-mail
v Configuration of connections to databases
b Management of the Web site:

v Management of the Web site tree structure (creation/deletion of HTML folders
and files)
v Management of default Web site pages
v Management of user Web site pages (1)
v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages
v Launch of the system editor for HTML pages (FrontPage or similar)
v Up/downloading/comparison of Web pages in online mode
v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including
animations and Java beans)
b Simulation mode
5 The application and the Web site (including animations and Java beans) can be
debugged in either online or simulation mode, which enables operation to be tested
without a FactoryCast HMI module and without a physical connection to a PLC, thus
simplifying debugging.
5.1
An integrated graphics editor in the FactoryCast HMI software can be used to easily
customize the following graphic objects: bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors,
operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc.
User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage
or similar, not supplied).
FactoryCast HMI includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier
to set up animations, which enable PLC variables to be accessed in realtime in the
HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply
inserting customized graphic objects (FactoryCast Java beans).
(1) Creation of user Web pages: User Web pages created in the FactoryCast HMI environment
are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on
HMI Web technology, they enable realtime access to PLC variables thanks to the FactoryCast
graphic objects library (FactoryCast Java beans).
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: References:

5/20
characteristics, platform 5
references Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready

Description
The TSX WMY 100 (for Premium platform) and 140 NWM 100 00 (for Quantum
1 platform) modules are equipped with the following on the front panel:
1 A display block, which indicates the module status and the transmission status of
the Ethernet TCP/IP network.
2
2 An RJ45 connector (with Premium/Quantum) and an MTRJ connector for a
100BASE-FX interface (with Quantum).
To be ordered separately: Accessories and connecting cables, see Ethernet

ConneXium wiring system (see page 5/40).
TSX WMY 100
140 NWM 100 00
Characteristics
FactoryCast HMI module type TSX WMY 100 140 NWM 100 00
Modicon automation platform Premium Quantum

Communication services
Interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX
Connection type Point-to-point connection (via a standard RJ45 connector), which enables the formation of a
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) star network (the stations are linked to ConneXium hubs or
switches).
Number of stations 64 stations maximum per network
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbit/s with automatic speed recognition
Ethernet communication services
Network management SNMP agent, supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB
TCP/IP services Uni-TE v Client/server mode
v Client/server requests of 256 bytes
– 5
(synchronous mode)
v Client/server requests of 1 K byte
(asynchronous mode)
Modbus v Client/server mode
v Asynchronous requests of 256 bytes 5.1
X-Way services v X-Way inter-network routing –
v X-Way/Uni-Telway routing
v Module diagnostics
Web server services
Embedded Web server Standard services v “Rack Viewer” PLC diagnostics
v “Data Editor” access to PLC data and variables
FactoryCast services v “Alarm Viewer” alarm display
v “Graphic Data Editor” graphic object editor
v Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available)
FactoryCast HMI services v HMI database (1000 variables, maximum)
v E-mail transmission (100, maximum)
v Connection to SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle databases: connection to 3 databases max.,
10 tables maximum in write mode per database;
v Interpreted arithmetic and logical calculations
v Simulator for debugging the HMI application offline
References
Ethernet TCP/IP Transparent Ready modules
Embedded Web Name and Speed Reference Weight
server description kg
FactoryCast HMI FactoryCast HMI 10/100 Mbit/s TSX WMY 100 0.340
Premium module
FactoryCast HMI 100 Mbit/s 140 NWM 100 00 -
Quantum module
FactoryCast HMI installation software (to be ordered separately)

Name and Use Operating Reference Weight
description system kg
Multilingual Development and Windows 2000, TLX CD FCHMI V1M 0.340
TSX WMY 100 FactoryCast HMI (1) debugging of the HMI Windows XP
application
(1) Includes documentation in electronic format.

140 NWM 100 00
Presentation: Functions:
Pages 5/12 to 5/14 Pages 5/14 to 5/16
5/21
platform 5

Ethernet TCP/IP communication service
Presentation
Transparent Ready products allow transparent communication on a single Ethernet

TCP/IP network.
Services Network Time Global Automatic FDR reconfiguration Web E-mail TCP Open Message Modbus
manage- synchroni- Data server handling I/O
ment zation Scanning
Applica- SNMP NTP RTPS DHCP TFTP FTP HTTP SMTP Modbus
MIB Transparent Ready

tions
Transport UDP TCP
Link IP
Physical Ethernet 802.3 and Ethernet II
In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, FTP, etc), the

Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in automation
applications include:
b Modbus TCP messaging for class 10, 20 or 30 devices.
b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices.
b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 10, 20 or 30 devices.
b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) network administration for class
20 or 30 devices.
5 b Global Data, for class 30 devices.
b Pass band management for class 30 devices (see performance levels on pages
5/34 to 5/37).
b NTP (Network Time Protocol) time synchronization for class 30 devices.
b Notification of SMTP events via E-mail for class 30 devices.
5.1 b TCP Open, optional, for class 30 devices.
The following pages present the various options available through all of these
services in order to facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system
integrating Transparent Ready devices.
5/22
platform 5

Functions
Standard Ethernet services
HTTP “Hypertext Transfer Protocol” (RFC1945)
The HTTP protocol (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is used for transmitting Web pages
between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990.
Web servers embedded into Ethernet TF devices are at the heart of the Transparent
Ready concept, and are used to provide easy access to devices anywhere in the
world from a standard browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531)
BOOTP/DHCP is used to automatically provide the devices with the IP parameters.

This avoids having to manage the addresses of each device individually.
Management is instead performed in a dedicated IP address server.
DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to automatically
assign the devices their configuration parameters. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP.
DHCP protocol is made up of 2 components:
b One for providing the IP network address,
b One for providing the IP parameters specific to the device from a DHCP server.
Telemecanique devices can be:

b BOOTP clients allowing automatic recovery of an IP address from a server,
b BOOTP servers enabling a device to distribute IP addresses to the network
stations.
Telemecanique uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its Faulty Device
Replacement service (FDR).
FTP “File Transfer Protocol” (RFCs 959, 2228, et 2640)

5
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides basic file sharing elements. Many systems use
FTP protocol to exchange files between devices.
Transparent Ready devices implement FTP for transferring certain data to or from
devices, in particular when downloading firmware or user Web pages. 5.1
5/23
platform 5

Functions (continued)
Standard Ethernet services (continued)
NTP “Network Time Protocol” (RFC 1305)
NTP (Network Time Protocol) is used to synchronize the time of a client or server
device from a time server. Depending on the network used, it provides the following
time precisions based on the UTC:
b Several milliseconds on a local area network (LAN).
b Several tens of milliseconds on a wide area network (WAN).
SMTP “Simple Mail Transfer Protocol” (RFC 0821)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is an E-mail transmission service. It is used to

send E-mail between a sender and a recipient via an SMTP E-mail server.
SNMP “Simple Network Management Protocol” (RFCs 1155, 1156 et 1157)
The Internet community developed standard SNMP for managing the different
components of a network through a single system. The network management system
can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function enables the manager to
view the status of the network and devices, modify their configuration and feed back
alarms in the event of failure.
Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in

a network managed via SNMP.
COM/DCOM “Distributed Component Object Model”
COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and

5 Embedding) is the name of the technology used in Windows components. This
enables Windows applications to communicate transparently.
These technologies are used in the OFS Data server software.
5.1
5/24
platform 5

Modbus TCP/IP function codes dec hexa
Modbus communication standard
Bits access Read of n input bits 02 02
Read of n output bits 01 01
Modbus, the industrial communication standard since 1979, has been combined with
Exceptional read status 07 07
Ethernet TCP/IP, which supports the Internet revolution, to make Modbus TCP/IP, a
Write 1 output bit 05 05
completely open Ethernet protocol. The development of a connection to Modbus
Write of n output bits 15 0F
TCP/IP requires no proprietary component or license purchase.
Read of 1 input word 04 04
This protocol may be easily combined with any device supporting a standard TCP/IP
Read of n input words 03 03 communication stack. Specifications can be obtained free of charge from the
Write 1 output word 06 06 website: www.modbus-ida.org.
Write of n output words 16 10
Read device ID 43/14 2B/0E
Modbus TCP, simple and open
Example of Modbus TCP/IP function codes supported for
accessing data and diagnostics
The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally recognized. Thousands
of manufacturers are already implementing this protocol. Many have already
developed a Modbus TCP/IP connection and many products are currently available.
The simplicity of Modbus TCP/IP enables any small field team, such as an I/O
module, to communicate over Ethernet without the need for a powerful
micro-processor or a lot of internal memory.
Modbus TCP, high-performance
Because of the simplicity of its protocol and the high speed of 100 M bits/s Ethernet,
Modbus TCP/IP delivers excellent performance. This means it is possible to use this
type of network in real-time applications such as I/O Scanning.
Modbus TCP/IP, one standard
An identical application protocol is used for Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus or
Modbus TCP. This therefore makes it possible to route messages from a network to
another without changing protocol.
5
As Modbus is implemented above the TCP/IP layer, users can also benefit from the
IP routing which enables devices located anywhere in the world to communicate
without having to worry about the distance between them.
Schneider offers an entire range of gateways for interconnecting a Modbus TCP/IP
network to already existing Modbus Plus or Modbus serial link networks. For further
5.1
details, consult our regional sales office.
The IANA institute (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has assigned Schneider
port TCP 502 (Well known port), which is reserved for the Modbus protocol. This
protocol will shortly be also subject to an RFC (Request For Comments), documents
which form standard references within the Internet community.
Modbus TCP/IP characteristics
Maximum size of data:

b Read: 125 words or registers.
b Write: 100 words or registers.
5/25
platform 5

I/O Scanning service
Word table
Read Write
INPUT A INPUT A
OUTPUT B OUTPUT B
+ +
– –
Ethernet TCP/IP
Input words
Output words of
devices
The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of distributed I/Os
on the Ethernet network after a simple configuration operation, with no need for
special programming.
The I/Os are scanned transparently by means of read/write requests according to the
Modbus Master/Slave protocol on the TCP/IP profile. This principle of scanning via
a standard protocol enables communication with any device which supports a
5 Modbus server on TCP/IP.
This service can be used to define:
b An %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs.
b An %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs.
b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan.
5.1 During operation, the module:
b Manages the TCP/IP connections with each of the distributed devices.
b Scans the devices and copies the I/Os into the configured %MW word zone.
b Feeds back status words so that correct operation of the service can be monitored
from the PLC application.
b Applies the preconfigured fallback values in the event of a communication
problem.
An offer of hardware and software products which enable the I/O Scanning protocol
to be implemented on any type of product which can be connected to the Ethernet
network (please consult: www.modbus-ida.org).
Characteristics:
b Each station can exchange a maximum of 120 words.
b Maximum size in the PLC managing the service:
v 2 K words %MW in inputs and 2 K words %MW in outputs with manager PLC
(64 stations max.),
v 4 K words %MW in inputs and 4 K words %MW in outputs with manager PLC
(128 stations max.).
I/O Scanning service diagnostics
I/O Scanning service diagnostics can be performed in 3 ways:

b By the application program from a data field specific to the PLC.
b From the debugging screen in the installation software.
b From the PLC system diagnostics function viewed with the Internet browser on a
PC station.
5/26
platform 5

Replacement service for faulty devices (Faulty Device Replacement)
The Faulty Device Replacement service uses the standard BOOTP, DHCP, file
management and TFTP technologies with the objective of simplifying Ethernet
device maintenance.
It enables a faulty device to be replaced by a new product while guaranteeing its

detection, reconfiguration, and automatic restart by the system, without difficult
manual intervention.
The principal steps are:

b A device using the FDR service is faulty.
b Another similar device is taken from the maintenance pool, preconfigured with the
“role_name” (or identifier) of the device that is out of service, then reinstalled on the
network.
b The FDR server can be:
v Premium processor with embedded Ethernet,
v Quantum processor with embedded Ethernet,
v Premium Ethernet module: TSX ETY,
v Quantum Ethernet module: 140 NOE 771,
detects the new addition, configures its IP address and transfers all configuration
parameters to it.
The substituted device verifies if all the parameters are indeed compatible with its
own characteristics, then switches to operating mode.
5.1
5/27
platform 5

Global Data service
The Global Data service ensures data exchanges in

Distribution group 1 real time between stations belonging to the same
Data exchange of 4 Ko max. distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote
IP multicast 239.255.255.251 applications, or share a common database among
several distributed applications.
The exchanges are based on a standard
producer/consumer protocol, guaranteeing optimal
performance while maintaining a minimum network
load. This RTPS (Real Time Publisher Subscriber)
Ethernet TCP/IP protocol is promoted by the IDA (Interface For
Distributed Automation) organization, and has already
been adopted as a standard by several manufacturers.
INPUT A INPUT A
OUTPUT B OUTPUT B
+ +
– –
IP multicast 239.255.255.250
Data exchange of 4 Ko max.
Distribution group 2
Characteristics: A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within the

same distribution group.
Each station can:
b Publish one 1024-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from
1 to n periods of the MAST task of the processor.
b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 variables. Validity for each variable is controlled by
5 Health Status Bits, linked to a refresh timeout configurable between 50 ms and 1 s.
Access to a variable element is not possible. The total size of the subscribed
variables reaches 4 K contiguous bytes.
In order to optimize Ethernet network performance further still, Global Data can be
configured with the “multicast filtering” option, which together with switches in the
5.1 ConneXium range, perform data broadcasting only on Ethernet ports, where there is
a Global Data service subscriber station. If these switches are not used, Global Data
is transmitted in “multicast” on all switch ports
Global Data service diagnostics
The diagnostics screens use a color code to show Global Data status:
b Configured/not configured/faulty.
b Published/subscribed.
Unity Studio software suite: single Global Data entry point
The Unity Studio software suite is the key component required on design office
workstations used for designing and structuring distributed industrial automation
projects.
The Unity Studio Global Data view enables the definition of Global Data distribution
groups and the configuration of settings for published and subscribed station
variables. During generation at each station level, this setting configuration is saved
automatically to station files, thereby ensuring:
b Guaranteed consistency of communication between the distributed applications in

question.
b Maximum productivity with respect to station configuration tasks.
Editeur de Global Data b Minimized risk of errors.
5/28
platform 5

NTP time synchronization service
Presentation
Power Processor Ethernet NTP

supply module server
Internal
clock NTP request
(S)NTP
client Ethernet network
NTP response
Premium/Quantum
The time synchronization service is based on the NTP (Network Time Protocol)
which is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet TCP/IP from
a server or another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc).
Operation
The Ethernet TCP/IP communication modules in the Modicon Quantum Unity V2 and
Premium Unity V2 automation platforms have an NTP client component. These
modules can connect to an NTP server using a client request (unicast), in order to
update their local time. The module clock is updated periodically (1 to 120 seconds)
with an error of less than 10 ms for standard processors and less than 5 ms for high
performance processors. If the NTP server cannot be reached, the Ethernet TCP/IP
module switches to a standby NTP server.
5
Unity module and processor used Predicted typical time service precision
Ethernet modules Ethernet modules with Unity Clock synchronisation (1) Event synchronisation Time stamping (2)
processor 5.1
TSX ETY 4103 TSX P57 0244M ± 1 ms typical = =
TSX ETY 5103 TSX P57 1p4M ± 10 ms max. Clock Clock
TSX P57 2p4M synchronisation synchronisation
TSX P57 3p4M precision precision
TSX P57 4p4M ± 1 ms typical
TSX P57 5p4M ± 5 ms max. + +
Fast task time I/O time

140 NOE 771 01 140 CPU 311 10 ± 1 ms typical
140 NOE 771 11 140 CPU 434 12U ± 10 ms max.
+
140 CPU 534 14U
140 CPU 651 50 ± 1 ms typical I/O time
140 CPU 651 60 ± 5 ms max.
140 CPU 671 60
(1) Time difference between field input and central NTP server.
(2) Assuming input connected to the interrupt module.
The PLC processor clock is therefore itself updated with a precision of 5 ms for
standard processors and 1 ms for high performance processors. A function block is
available for reading this clock. In each PLC application, events or variables can be
time-stamped.
The Ethernet module is configured via a Web page. The time zone can be
configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also
available.
Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the

Transparent Ready private MIB, which can be accessed via the SNMP network
management service (see above).
5/29
platform 5

Electronic mail notification SMTP service
Introduction
This simple mail notification service is a programmed service that allows PLC
applications to report by exception conditions monitored by the PLC. The automation
controller can automatically and dynamically create electronic mail to alert specified
users with data, alarms and events - whether the recipients are local or remote.
Note: This service is available on the latest Premium and Quantum Ethernet modules
& CPUs, when operating with Unity Pro software. A more comprehensive mail
service, independent of the PLC application, is available on the FactoryCast HMI
active web server modules (see page 5/15).
Usage
A simple yet powerful mechanism is used. Predefined email headers are linked
together with the body of the mail which is created dynamically from the latest
information in the automation application.
The user logic program can trigger the message based on a predefined event or
condition. Using a function block, one of 3 predefined headers is selected and an
email message with variable information and text (up to a maximum of 240 bytes) is
created and sent directly from the PLC.
Each of the three mail headers contains these common predefined items –email
recipient list, sender name and subject. This information can be defined and updated
by an authorized administrator using the configuration web pages.
Message creation and delivery

The PLC application selects the appropriate header. The system architect may
5 define the mail headers to indicate differing importance levels. For example :
b Header 1 could be “URGENT problem reported by PLC 10”,
b Header 2 might be “WARNING at substation 10”,
b Header 3 could be “INFO message from water system”.
5.1 Differing lists of recipients between the three headers help to ensure that the right
information quickly flows to the right recipients. The application can then add
pertinent information to the body of the mail message such as the specific device,
process or location.
Completed mail is then sent to an electronic mail server for expeditious distribution
to the interested parties. These recipients could be engineers, managers, process
owners etc.
Security
Each mail message can be protected by an optional login and password that is
authenticated by the SMTP mail server. If, for additional security, the site’s mail
installation has changed the TCP port number from the default of 25, the port number
can be changed in the PLC email configuration (via secured web page access).
Configuration
An authorized administrator can use a web page to easily configure the mail service.
For each of the three mail headers, the sender; recipient list and subject message
can be defined. The electronic mail server connection information such as IP address
and security information can also be set from the web page.
Diagnostics
As all other Ethernet services in Premium and Quantum systems, the Mail Service
has a Diagnostic Web page showing the complete, up to the second, status.
Remote Monitoring
These products provide diagnostic information for remote management applications
following the SNMP network management standard. Information for the mail service
is included in the Schneider Electric private MIB which is publicly available.
5/30
platform 5

SNMP service protocol
The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) protocol is used, from a network
management station, to monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components
and thus ensure rapid diagnostics if a problem occurs.
It is used to:
b Query devices such as computer stations, routers, switches, bridges or terminal
devices (DTE) in order to view their status.
b Obtain statistics for the network on which the devices are connected.
This management software respects the traditional Client/Server model. However, in

order to avoid confusion with other communication protocols using this terminology,
we prefer to use the expression:
b Network manager for the Client application running on the computer station.
b SNMP agent for the server application that runs on the device.
Transparent Factory can be managed by any SNMP network manager, including
HP Openview or IBM Netview.
Standard SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used to access

configuration and management objects included in the MIB (Management
Information Base) for the devices. These MIBs must comply with certain standards
in order to be accessed by all managers on the market. However, depending on the
device complexity, manufacturers can add certain objects to the private databases.
The Transparent Factory private MIB includes management objects specific to the
Telemecanique offer. These objects simplify installation, implementation, and
maintenance for Transparent Factory products in an open environment using
standard network management tools.
The Transparent Factory products support 2 SNMP network management levels:
b Standard MIB II, a first level of network management, can be accessed via this
interface. It lets the manager identify the devices forming the architecture and
5
retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of the Ethernet
TCP/IP interfaces.
b MIB Transparent Factory interface; management of the Transparent Factory
devices is improved via this interface. This MIB includes a set of data that enables
the network management system to supervise all the Transparent Factory services.
5.1
The Transparent Factory private MIB can be downloaded from the Web server from
any Ethernet Transparent Factory module in a PLC.
5/31
platform
TCP Open optional service

Presentation
TSX ETY 110 WS/5103 Premium platform Ethernet modules support a number of
communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard.
Among these, the Modbus protocol has public specifications and its simplicity
recommends it for the needs of communication with third-party devices.
Ethernet TCP/IP profile
Modbus protocol
Direct
Socket access
(TCP Open)
Modbus
TCP
IP
ISO 8802.2-ISO 8802.3
5 ISO 8802.3 Ethernet

10/100 M bit/s
However, for certain applications, it may prove necessary to use other protocols.
This is the case when, for example, users wish to integrate Premium platforms into
5.1 existing architectures which use a particular communication protocol, possibly a
proprietary one.
To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the
Telemecanique offer:
b A library of basic functions, which can be used in C language, enables direct
access to the socket interface on TCP. The user can thus create his own
communication functions using SDKC development software and take advantage of
the ease of use which this program offers in terms of development and debugging.
Once generated, these function blocks are used in the application like any standard
PL7 programming software function block.
b A library of basic function blocks known as EFs, which can be used directly in the
application programs with PL7 language. These are the same as functions
developed in C language seen earlier, but are designed for use by non-computer
specialists. These EF function blocks are not modifiable.
Functions
Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley
socket interface enable:
b Management of 16 connections on the Open profile out of a maximum of 32

b Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port.
b Switching of these sockets to "listen for a connection request from a remote client"
mode.
b Opening of a connection.
b Transmission and reception of data on these connections (8 bytes max.).
b Closing this connection.
5/32
platform
TCP Open optional service (continued)

Description
The TCP Open offer consists of a CD-ROM containing the TCP/IP function libraries.
Open access on TCP is only possible via TSX ETY 110WS (1) and TSX ETY 5103
Ethernet modules. With open access on TCP, all the basic functions of these
modules can be used.
The TCP/IP TLX CD TCP 50M function library comprises:

b The SDKC program enhancement library that provides access to the module
TCP/IP socket functions
b The user's manual in English (no printed version)
b EF elementary communication function blocks (Socket/Bind/Listen/Accept/
Shutdown/Close/Send/Receive/Select/Set_Socket Option/Connect) for installation
using PL7 software (version u V3.3)
b Higher level EF function blocks, provided by way of example, which can perform
more advanced functions such as the complete sequence for establishing or closing
a connection, or sending or receiving data. The source files for all these EF blocks
are also supplied
b An example of a PL7 application communicating with a TELNET application on a
PC
If customised function blocks are needed both the SDKC program for C language
TLX L SDKC PL741M (with PL7) or UNY SPU ZU CD 20E (with Unity Pro) and the
library of function blocks TCP Open TLX CD TCPA33E should be installed on the
development station.
Setup precautions
The development of C language functions requires compliance with certain setup

precautions:
b To set up these services, the user should be familiar with the TCP/IP profile
5
b In addition, since the SDKC program enables access to all the PLC internal
resources, all the necessary precautions should be taken when developing EF
communication blocks to avoid endangering the PL7 application, especially on the
commonly fragile operating modes such as cold/warm restarts, response to a fault, etc 5.1
b The user should also take care to maintain the requests from the different
communication profiles at a level compatible with the performance required by the
application
b Finally, it is the responsibility of the client application software (PL7 or C program)
to manage the operating modes for communication which may be specific to the
application, for example the behavior if a remote device fails to respond or in the
event of a break in connection
For these different reasons, we recommend that you consult your Regional Sales
Office to ensure that your TCP protocol open access project is feasible.
(1) Open access on TCP requires TSX ETY 110 WS modules, version u PV 03 and SV 2.9. In
addition, it should be integrated on a configuration with a TSX P57 pp3 processor
(or TSX P57 pp2 version > V3.3).
5/33
Performances Modicon Premium automation
platform 5

Performances
Selecting the communication architecture
When selecting an architecture, it is advisable to take performance into account at

the earliest possible stage.
For this, the designer must:
1 Have a clear idea of his needs as regards:
v quantity and type of devices to be interconnected,
v volume and type of exchanges,
v expected response times,
v environment.
2 Compare his needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware
that the precise performance level between any 2 points on an architecture is
dependent on the weakest link in the chain, which can be:
v a function of the hardware,
v but also a function of the applications (size, architecture, OS, machine power, etc.)
which are often poorly defined at this stage of project.
3 Select the most suitable architecture.
The objective of the following pages is to answer the second point by explaining the
performance of the different components which constitute an Ethernet architecture,
concentrating on the following 2 aspects:
b Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges (see pages 5/29 and 5/30).
b Application response time (see page 5/31).
Introduction
As in any communication system, the performance of an Ethernet architecture is

linked to numerous parameters which depend on the:
b Hardware used:
v network bandwidth,
5 v resources of module or CPU with Ethernet embedded,
v processor resources (PLC, PC or other CPUs).
b Application services used:
v Modbus (or Uni-TE) industrial messaging handling service,
v Global Data service, data scanning between PLC,
5.1 v I/O Scanning service, data scanning of distributed I/O,
v Others (Web access, TCP Open communication).
The difficulty in determining the correct size of an architecture is due to the fact that
the majority of these parameters are linked.
Nota : For purposes of simplification, the values shown in the tables which follow have been
reduced. If these are adhered to, correct operation of the architecture is ensured. If the
performance levels obtained are not sufficient, please consult our Regional Sales Office for a
more detailed study.
Nota : The performance levels indicated depend relatively little on the size of messages. Limiting factors
have much more to do with the number of messages. It is therefore necessary to group as much useful
information as possible within the same message using the most suitable Modbus request.
Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges
The methodology presented below in 4 steps can be used to determine the message
processing capacity on Ethernet TCP/IP.
Step 1: calculation of exchanges necessary for the application
Using the tables below, calculate the exchanges necessary for the application, i.e.
for each station on the architecture and for each service used, the number of
messages to be transmitted and received per second.
Messages transmitted per second from Total number

Station A Station B Station N of messages received
per station
Messages per Station A R1
second sent to Station B R2
Station N Ri
Total number of messages E1 E2 Ei Network load

transmitted per station Cru = Σ [R1…Ri, E1…Ei]
Not applicable
5/34
Performances (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 5

Performances
Step 2: station processor processing capacity, system requests
Using the table below, compare the total number of messages received via the
Modbus and Uni-TE service for each station (value R1, R2 or Ri) with the station
processor processing capacity.
If the result of this initial calculation is positive, go to step 3.
Premium or Atrium platform Messages being received Messages being
transmitted
Communication by EFs or EFBs (PL7 or Unity Pro)
Modbus requests TSX 57 10 4 mes/cyc Does not constitute a
(1) TSX 57 20 8 mes/cyc limiting factor
TSX 57 30 12 mes/cyc
TSX 57 40 16 mes/cyc
TSX 57 50 (2) 16/20 mes/cyc
Quantum platform Messages being received Messages being
transmitted
Communication by EFs or EFBs (Concept, ProWORX or Unity Pro)
Modbus requests CPU 113 02/03 (3) 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc
(1) CPU 311 10 (2) 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc
CPU 434 12p 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc
CPU 534 14p 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc
CPU 651 p0 (2) 16 mes/cyc (4) 4 mes/cyc
CPU 671 60 (2) 16 mes/cyc (4) 4 mes/cyc
mes/cyc: number of messages being received per cycle from the PLC master task (typical cycle
from 50 to 100 ms).
Step 3: bus or network module processing capacity
For each station, compare the total number of messages received (Σ [values Ri, Rj]
and the total number of messages transmitted (Σ [values Ei, Ej] for station N, for
example) with the bus or network processing capacity shown below. If the result of
this second calculation is positive, go to step 4.
5
Processing capacity of Ethernet Premium Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP
connections TSX ETY 110/210 TSX ETY 4103/5103 TSX P57 50 140 NOE 771 pp 140 CPU 65 150/160
TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100 (5)
TSX P57 10/20/30/40
140 NWM 100 00 (5) 140 CPU 67 160 5.1
Message transactions 60 transactions/s 450 transactions/s 500 transactions/s 350 transactions/s 350 transactions/s
Scanning I/O polling Service not available 2000 transactions/s 2000 transactions/s 2000 transactionsIs 2000 transactions/s
Global Data subscriptions 800 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 800 transactions/s
Characteristics summary
b Modbus requests:
v 125 words or registers in read access,
v 100 words or registers in write access.
b Global Data: 1024-word published variable, subscription to a maximum of
64 variables, with a maximum size of 2 K %MW.
b I/O Scanning with maximum size in the PLC managing the service:
v 2 K %MW in input and 2 K %MW in output with manager PLC limited to 64 stations,
v 4 K %MW in output and 4 K %MW in output with manager PLC limited to
128 stations (TSX P57 50, 140 CPU 65 150/160 and 140 CPU 67 160).
(1) A temporary overload on several PLC cycles, due, for example, to an adjustment terminal or
the temporary connection of an Internet browser, is acceptable.
(2) Only with Unity Pro.
(3) Only with Concept/ProWORX.
(4) With Unity Pro version V2.0, 1 message/cycle with version V1.0.
(5) I/O Scanning and Global Data services are not available for TSX WMY 100 and
140 NWM 100 00.
5/35
platform 5

Performances
Step 3: bus or network module processing capacity (continued)

Network bandwidth management in the Ethernet TCP/IP modules
The bandwidth management service shows load level for the Ethernet module.
This enables the user to monitor any drift and anticipate possible problems.
Ethernet module load is indicated in 3 ways:
b Anticipated load in the PL7 configuration screen.
b Actual load in the PL7 diagnostics/debugging screen, as well as in Web
diagnostics pages. The load is displayed as a bar graph, animated in real time.
b In the SNMP interface for access to the SNMP network manager.
The bandwidth is shown as a percentage for each of the following services:
b Modbus (and Uni-TE) message handling.
b I/O Scanning.
b Global Data.
b Other.
Step 4: network load
In spite of the large bandwidth of an Ethernet Network (100 Mbit/s), the user must
ensure that the actual application load does not exceed 25 to 30 % of the hypothetical
network capacity. If this should occur, this load must be reduced via a switched
architecture (use of switches). See page 5/38.
Application response time

Event Report For the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging handling service
TT
Station 1
PLC-module processor exchanges are synchronous with the PLC cycle, in the same
CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1
manner as the input/output exchanges. When an event appears, (input switching to 1
5 NAT NAT
for example), a message can only be transmitted after this input has been taken into
consideration (start of the following cycle) and the PLC program has been executed,
i.e. approximately 1.5 cycles after the event has appeared.
CT2 CT2 Station 2
Network access time (NAT) shown in the table below as ms, totals the module transit
time and the delay before the message can be transmitted across the network.
5.1 Action
Processing Modbus message Premium Ethernet TCP/IP Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP

requests TSX ETY 110/210 TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 pp 140 CPU 65 150/160
TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100 140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 67 160
TSX P57 10...57 50 140 CPU 434/534 1p
Network access time NAT < 25 ms < 10 ms < xx ms < 10 ms
Transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message from
a client station 1, its reception by a server station 2, processing the request, sending
back the response and its acceptance by station 1 (update of an output for example).
As the block diagram above shows:
b The duration of the transaction will be between:
TT = 2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT
b Average duration is:
TTave = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT
For the Global Data service

Top synchro Return synchro
The transaction time (TT) includes the delay between publication of a Global Data by
Transaction time
TT
station 1, its reception and processing by remote station 2 and its retransmission to
CT CT CT Station 1 the initial station 1:
For an exchanged variable:
Publication
NAT
b If CT < 5 ms, transaction time: TT = 5 to 6 x CT
NAT
Subscription Publication
b If CT u 10 ms, transaction time: TT = 3 x CT
CT CT Station 2
5/36
platform 5

Performances
Application response time (continued)

I/O Scanning service
CT Manager
Ethernet TCP/IP The RT application response time include the delay between getting data from a
RT remote input and up dating remote output. It includes PLC application treatment time.
Hub
This RT response time is composed of following parameters:
Input Device 1
Output Device 2 Input
TMod In TIOS In
TNet
NxCycleT
TIOS Out
TNet
TMod Out
Response time (RT) Output
b TMod In and TMod Out: response time of the read/written device excluding the
input circuit transition (TMod depends of the device, but commonly between 1 to
8 ms).
b TIOS In and TIOS Out: time between two scanning of the same read device
(0.3 ms x number of device scanned and at least the pooling rate configured. TIOS
is executed in parallel of the CPU cycle time, so could be hidden for the RT response
time).
b N: number of PLC CPU cycles.
b CycleT: CPU cycle time.
b Tnet: propagation time on the network (depending of the application, but
commonly Tnet is 0.05 ms at 10 Mbit/s and 0.005ms at 100 Mbit/s). 5
The RT response time could be estimated using the following formulas:
b TRmin, minimal response time with TIOS hidden and 1 CycleT:

TRmin = Tmod In + 0 x TIOS In + Tnet + 1 x CycleT + 0 x TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod 5.1
Out
b TRtypic, typical response time (with 0,5 TIOS hidden and 2 CycleT:
TRtypic = TMod In + 0.5 x TIOS In + Tnet + 2 x CycleT + 0.5 x TIOS Out + Tnet +
TMod Out
b TRmax, maximal response time with TIOS not hidden and 3 CycleT:
TRmax = TMod In + TIOS In + Tnet + 3 x CycleT + TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out
The TMod In and TMod out response time are shown below:
Type of distributed I/O Response time Mini Typical Maxi

Momentum 170 ENT 110 02 TMod In 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms
TMod Out 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms
Momentum 170 ENT 110 01 TMod In or TMod Out 4 ms 6 ms 8 ms
Advantys STB NIP 2212 TMod In or TMod Out 2 ms 3 ms 4 ms
The TIOS In and TIOS Out times mesured between two scanning are shown below:
Mesured TIOS
(Network with switches)
25
20
15
Time (ms)
10
5
0
1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60
Number of scanning products
5/37
characteristics, platform
references Processors with integrated Ethernet port
Description
7 1 2 12 TSX P57 1634M, TSX P 26pp/2823/36pp/4634/4823/5634M double format

processors (1) with built-in Ethernet port include the following on the front panel:
1 A display block with 5 LEDs relating to the processor.
2 A display block relating to the built-in Ethernet port.
3 7
5 or adjustment terminal.
4 4 A USB connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment
terminal.
6
8 5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting an RS 485
9
peripheral device.
6 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface.
7 A slot for a PCMCIA memory extension card.
8 A slot for a PCMCIA communication or data storage memory extension card.
9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823/4823M models) for Fipio bus
manager link.
Characteristics
Type of module Unity Pro software TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 5634M
PL7 Pro software – TSX P57 2p23M TSX P57 3624M TSX P57 4823M –
Transparent Class B30
Ready Standard Web server “Rack Viewer” access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics
services “Data editor” access to the configuration functions and PLC variables
Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words)
Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning Yes (between 64 stations) Yes (128
advanced stations)
communication Global Data Yes
services
FDR server Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters
SMTP E-mail notification Yes
5 SNMP network administrator Yes
Pass band management Yes
Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
Data rate 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition
Medium Twisted pair
5.1 Premium No. of discrete I/O 512 1024 2048
processor No. of analog I/O 24 80 128 256 512
No. of application-specific channels 8 24 32 64
Max. no. of network connections (including 1 3 4 5
integrated link)
Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP Client/server requests: 128 bytes in synchronous mode and 1 Kb in asynchronous mode
communication X-Way Yes
service
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
Relative humidity 10...95% non condensing during operation
Power supply Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
Conformity to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e
LED indicators Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX)
Collision detection (COL), Ethernet link diagnostics (STS), Ethernet port fault (ERR)
5 LEDs specific to the operation of the processor (RUN, ERR, I/O, TER and FIP)
References
Description Discrete I/O Reference Weight
Analog I/O kg
App-sp. chann. Unity software PL7 software
Processors with 512 / 24 / 8 TSX P57 1634M – 0.042
integrated 1024 / 80 / 24 TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 2623M 0.042
Ethernet link
– TSX P57 2823M (2)
Class B30 1024 / 128 / 32 TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 3623M 0.042
2048 / 256 / 64 TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 4823M (2) 0.042
2048 / 512 / 64 TSX P57 5634M –
(1) Except TSX P57 1634M processor, single format.
(2) Also has an integrated Fipio bus manager link.
TSX P57 4634/5634M TSX P57 26/28/36/48ppM
5/38
description, platform
characteristics, Ethernet network module
references
Presentation
TSX ETY ppp modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot
on Modicon Premium PLC stations or Modicon Atrium coprocessors. A configuration
can take from 1 to 4 network modules, depending on the type of processor.
TSX ETY 110/110 WS/4103/5103 Ethernet modules route X-Way and Uni-TE
1 messages transparently from a TCP/IP network to an X-Way network and vice versa.
2
Description
3 The front panel of TSX ETY ppp modules comprises:

1 A display block indicating the state of the module.
4
2 A standard connector for 100BASE-TX and/or /100BASE-T interface (RJ45)
depending on the model.
3 A standard connector for 10BASE5 interface (AUI).
4 Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and network number.
Characteristics
Type of module TSX ETY 110 TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100M
Transparent Class A10 C10 B30 C30 D10
Ready Standard Web server – “Rack Viewer” access to the product description and status and to the PLC
services diagnostics
“Data editor” access to the configuration functions and variables
FactoryCast configurable Web server – Yes – Yes
User Web pages (available size) – Yes (1.4 Mb) – Yes (8 Mb)
FactoryCast HMI active Web server – Yes (1)
Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words)
services
Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning – Yes (between 64 stations) –
advanced
communication
services
Global Data
FDR server
–
–
Yes
Automatic assignment of IP address
–
– 5
and network parameters
NTP time synchronization – Yes –
SMTP e-mail notification – Yes –
SNMP network administrator SNMP agent
TCP Open – Option – Option – 5.1
Pass band management – Yes –
Structure Physical interface 10BASE-T (RJ45)/10BASE5 (AUI) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
Data rate 10 Mbps 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition
Medium Twisted pair/AUI cable Twisted pair
Network Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C
module Relative humidity 10...95% non condensing during operation
Power supply Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor
Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP Client/server requests: 128 bytes in synchronous mode and 1 Kb in –
communication asynchronous mode
service Ethway/X-Way Uni-TE, common words –
Conformity to standards IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e
LED indicators Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX)
Collision detection (COL), Ethernet port fault (ERR)
References
Description Data rate Transparent Ready Reference Weight
class kg
Ethernet TCP/IP 10 Mbit/s A10 TSX ETY 110 0.370
modules C10 TSX ETY 110 WS 0.370
10/100 Mbit/s B30 TSX ETY 4103 0.340
C30 TSX ETY 5103 0.340
D10 TSX WMY 100 0.340
FactoryCast HMI HMI application development and TLX CD FCHMI V1M –

software debugging in TSX WMY 100
TCP Open SDKC, C language development TLX LSDKC PL741M –
software (2) TCP Open function block library TLX CD TCPA33E –
TSX ETY 110/110 WS TSX ETY p103/WMY 100
(1) Database management, arithmetic and logic calculations, automatic e-mail transmission on
process event, connection to relational databases.
(2) With TSX ETY 110 WS and TSX ETY 5103 modules.
5/39
characteristics platform
ConneXium wiring system
Presentation
Industrial Ethernet networks can use various standards. In each case, a set of rules
must be respected when determining what topology will be produced and with what
performance level.
The ConneXium offer comprises a complete family of industrial products used to

build a network architecture: hubs, switches, transceivers and cables. Wiring rules
pertaining to the ConneXium offer are described on pages 5/34 to 5/39.
Characteristics
General characteristics for industrial Ethernet standards
Standard Date rate Medium Type of connector Useable bandwidth Advantages
(Mbit/s) (on automation
network)
10BASE5 10 Thick coaxial cable 15-way SUB-D (AUI) 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Cost, Ethway
(yellow) compatibility
10BASE-T 10 Twisted shielded pair RJ45 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Cost

(SFTP) (1)
10BASE-FL 10 Fibre optic (generally ST or MT-RJ 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s Immunity,

62.5/125 multimode confidentiality
1300 µm (2)
100BASE-TX 100 Shielded twisted pair RJ45 40 %, i.e. 40 Mbit/s Data rate (x 50)
(SFTP)
100BASE-FX 100 Fibre optics SC or MT-RJ 40 %, i.e. 40 Mbit/s Immunity
5 (1) SFTP cables (Shielded and Foiled Twisted Pair) are available in 2 versions:
v UL 1581 vertical tray, NFC 32070 level C1, IEC 332-1.
v Reaction to fire compliant with NFC 32 070 # class C2 and IEC 332-1, Low Smoke Zero
Halogen (LSZH) and UL 1581 VW1.
(2) The mutimode fiber is Low Smoke Zero Halogen as per HD.624-7, with reaction to fire
5.1 complying with NFC 32 070 # class C2 and IEC 332-1.
Installation principles
The Ethernet 802.3 Link Layer is based on a collision detection mechanism

(CSMA CD). Each station (DTE, Data Terminal Equipment) sends its data when
necessary and verifies if the frame has been correctly propagated. If a collision with
a frame sent by another station is detected, the station repeats the message after a
timeout, which increases the network load and thus the probability that another
collision will occur.
The transceivers or hubs (repeaters) are used to regenerate the signal once the
physical limits of the medium have been reached. They also propagate collisions, if
there are any.
Because of the transmission time needed to send data from one end of the network
to the other, a maximum network length exists, beyond which collisions might not be
detected by the sender. For this reason, and for each technology, a network size limit
has been set. This is described as the “maximum network diameter” within a same
collision domain.
Presentation: Installation rules:

page 5/40 pages 5/40 to 5/45
5/40
Installation rules Modicon Premium automation
platform
Architectures in a same collision domain
Various architectures may exist, depending on each standard:
b Line or bus topology, using transceivers.

b Star network topology, using hubs.
b Tree network topology, using hubs.
Transceivers are also used for transmitting signals between 2 dissimilar media such
as fiber optic and twisted pair cables.
In addition, the hubs (or concentrators) are also used to transmit signals among
several media (ports).
The transceivers and hubs are “plug and play” devices.
Line or bus topology Star topology Tree topology

DTE DTE DTE
Transceiver Hub Hub

DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE
10BASE5 10BASE-T, 10BASE-F, 10BASE-T, 10BASE-F,

100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX
Note: in the information that follows, the terms “hubs” and “repeaters” are used
interchangeably.
Rule 1: to respect the “maximum network diameter” within a same collision

domain
5
Depending on the Ethernet standard employed, the network size can vary. To define
the correct architecture, the 2 constraints of maximum segment length and maximum
network diameter must be respected. The Schneider Electric ConneXium
performances make it possible, in some situations, to surpass the limits of the 802.3
standard. 5.1
Ethernet Maximum segment length Maximum network diameter
standard (physical limit) (limited by collisions)
Type According to With According to With

standard 802.3 ConneXium standard 802.3 ConneXium
products products
10BASE5 500 m 1.800 m
(50 m for a drop cable) (2.800 m with fiber optic segment)
10BASE-T 100 m 500 m 1.000 m
10BASE-FL or 2.000 m 3.100 m 2.500 m 3.100 m

mixed (FL and T) (1) (1)
100BASE-TX 100 m 200 m
100BASE-FX in 412 m 228 m or 412 m between 2 DTE

Half Duplex devices
100BASE-FX in 2.000 m 3,000 m with 228 m or 412 m between 2 DTE
Full Duplex multimode devices
15.000 m with
monomode
(1)
(1) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation.

page 5/40 pages 5/40 to 5/45
5/41
Installation rules (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform
Installation rules (continued)

Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same
collision domain
10BASE5
Between 2 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) devices, a maximum of 2 repeaters or

1 repeater with 2 half-repeaters (half-repeaters ensure transmission between a
copper and a fiber optic medium):
b Drop cable, 50 m length max.,
b One segment, 500 m length max.,
b Between 2 fiber optic half-repeaters, 1000 m length max.
Examples:
b All copper, 1,800 m length max.
Segment Segment Segment

500 m 500 m 500 m
DTE DTE
50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m
Hub/repeater Hub/repeater
b Mixed copper/fiber optic, 2,800 m length max.
Segment Segment Segment

500 m 500 m 500 m
1,000 m
DTE DTE
50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m
Hub/repeater Half-repeater Half-repeater
5
10BASE-T/10BASE-F
Between 2 DTE devices, a maximum of 5 segments and 4 hubs (or repeaters).

5.1
b Topology of 5 segments and 4 hubs (or repeaters): each 10BASE-FL segment
must have a length of < 500 m.
b Topology of 4 segments and 3 hubs (or repeaters): the 10BASE-FL inter-repeater
segments must have a length of < 1,000 m, and the 10BASE-FL segments between
hub and DTE devices must have a length of < 400 m.
Examples:
In the following 2 topologies, distances are usually given for the 10BASE-T standard,
with distances for the 10BASE-F standard within parentheses.
Hub/repeater 100 m (500 m) Hub/repeater
100 m (500 m) 100 m (500 m)
DTE DTE
100 m (500 m) 100 m (500 m)
Maximum 500 m in 10BASE-T, 2,500 m in 10BASE-F.
Hub/repeater
100 m 100 m
(1,000 m) (1,000 m)
DTE DTE
100 m (400 m) 100 m (400 m)
Maximum 400 m in 100BASE-TX, 2,800 m in 100BASE-FX

page 5/40 pages 5/40 to 5/45
5/42
platform
Installation rules (continued)

Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same
collision domain (continued)
100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX
This Ethernet standard defines 2 classes of hubs (or repeaters):
b Class 1 hubs: Maximum of 1 hub in a same collision domain.

b Class 2 hubs (for ConneXium repeaters): Maximum of 2 hubs in a same collision
domain.
Examples:
In the following 4 topologies, distances are usually given for the 100BASE-TX
standard, with distances for the 100BASE-FX standard within parentheses.
Class 1 hub/repeater Class 1 hub/repeater
DTE DTE DTE DTE

100 m 100 m 160 m 160 m
(200 m)
200 m max. in 100BASE-TX, 300 m in mixed 320 m max. in 100BASE-FX
5m
DTE DTE
100 m 100 m
(111 m)
205 m max. in 100BASE-TX, 216 m in mixed 5
DTE 28 m DTE
5.1
100 m 100 m
228 m max. in 100BASE-FX

page 5/40 pages 5/40 to 5/45
5/43
platform
Architectures with several collision domains
Switched devices enable the limits of the above-described architectures to be

increased. Switches are used for communicating between 2 or more collision
domains. Communication for the upper layers is guaranteed among the different
ports and collisions at the link layer level are not propagated (filtering).
Switches are “plug and play” devices that can be remotely administered via SNMP
or HTTP. They essentially contribute 2 functions:
b Extension of the architecture to surpass the “maximum network diameter”.

b Improvement of performance by a better allocation of bandwidth due to reduction
in collisions and network load. In addition, switches in the ConneXium range support
multicast filtering via the standard GARP/GMRP protocol, which optimizes
performances of the Global Data service. With these products, multicast frames are
transmitted only on switch ports where stations subscribing to the Global Data
service are connected. ConneXium switches also support the Faulty Device
Replacement (FDR) service, as well as the Transparent Ready private MIB for
managing devices via the SNMP network management protocol.
Rule 3: to be respected when switches are used
b Switches are DTE devices that can be connected to hubs or directly connected to
devices. Rules 1 and 2, mentioned previously, thus apply.
b When 2 switches are connected, the line can be in Full Duplex, which removes the
risk of collisions and allows the effective data rate to be doubled. The rules related to
the collision domain thus do not apply, and only those imposed by the physical limits
should be observed.
For example, 2 switches may be connected on their 100BASE-FX ports via a fiber
optic cable 3,000 m in length.
5 Examples:
Collision domain 1 Collision domain 2

DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE
5.1
DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE
Site 1 Site 2
Switch
Switch 1 Switch 2
DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE
Collision domain 3
Switch used to isolate several collision domains (reduction of Switches used to extend the architecture to provide a link between 2 buildings, for example.
the network load in order to improve performance).
Maximum distances:
b 100BASE-TX: 100 m between 2 switches.
b 100BASE-FX: 2,000 m between 2 switches, 3,000 m with ConneXium switches
and up to 40 km using monomode optical fiber (outside supply).

page 5/40 pages 5/40 to 5/45
5/44
platform
Routers
In general, routers are used at the Enterprise's network level, in order to link different
units or sites. They are sometimes associated with security functions such as
firewalls for filtering remote access.
A router must be configured to enable it to recognize where messages must be

routed. Routing mechanisms are based on the IP address. Stations are grouped on
the same subnet according to their IP addresses and their subnet mask.
Every message addressed to a remote network will be transmitted to the router,

which ensures routing to the correct destination.
All of our Ethernet modules can be configured with a default gateway address and a
subnet mask, complying with the IP standard.
On the factory floor level, a switch is less expensive than a router, performs better,
and is easier to install (“plug and play”).
Redundancy
The architectures previously described can be created to have greater availability by

using hubs or specific switches, linked to redundant copper or fiber optic rings. If the
ring is broken, communication is seamlessly restored in less than 500 ms.
These products are available with the possibility to create a redundant power supply.
Associated with the Warm or Hot Standby offers, they guarantee maximum
availability of the automation installations.
The various possible redundant topologies are: 5

1 10 Mbit/s copper or fiber optic redundant ring topology, with redundant hubs.
2 100 Mbit/s fiber optic ring redundant topology with redundant switches: maximum
commutation time from the “normal” line to the “emergency” line of 500 ms for a 5.1
redundant ring with 50 switches.
3 100 Mbit/s redundant fiber optic multiple ring topology with redundant switches:
maximum commutation time from the “normal” line to the “emergency” line
of 500 ms.
DTE DTE DTE
DTE DTE 1,100 Mbit/s

DTE DTE DTE DTE fiber optic ring
10 Mbit/s copper or
fiber optic redundant 100 Mbit/s Redundant
ring fiber optic ring switches
DTE Fiber optic ring 2 Fiber optic ring 3

DTE DTE DTE DTE
Redundant hubs
DTE DTE DTE DTE
1 2 3

page 5/40 pages 5/40 to 5/45
5/45

ConneXium hubs
Presentation
Hubs (or concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media
(ports). Hubs are “plug and play” devices that do not need any configuration.
The use of hubs (or concentrators) makes it possible to create the following
topologies:
b Star topology using hubs.
b Tree topology using hubs.
See “Cabling system” page 5/35.
Hub DTE DTE

DTE DTE
Hub Hub Hub
Hub
Hub Hub
DTE DTE DTE DTE
DTE
Star topology Tree topology Ring topology

(with 499 NOH 105 10)
Characteristics and references
5
Hubs
Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 4 x 10BASE-T ports 4 x 100BASE-TX ports 3 x 10BASE-T ports
Shielded connectors RJ45
5.1 Medium Shielded twisted pair
Line length 100 m
Optical fiber ports Number and type – 2 x 10BASE-FL ports

Connectors – ST (BFOC)
Medium – Multimode optical fiber
Line length – 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1)
Optical budget – With 50/125 or 62.2/125 µm
fiber: 11.5 dB:
Topology Number of cascaded hubs 4 max. 2 max. 4 max.
Number of hubs in a ring – 11 max.
Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies P1 and P2 redundant power
supplies, redundant optical
ring
Power supply Voltage c 24 V (18…32 V), safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Power consumption 80 mA (130 max. at c 24 V) 210 mA (270 max. at c 24 V) 160 mA (350 max. at c 24 V)
Removable terminal 5-pin
Operating temperature 0…+ 60 °C (32…140 °F)
Relative humidity 10…95% non condensing
Degree of protection IP 30 IP 20 IP 30
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 40 x 125 x 80 47 x 135 x 111 80 x 140 x 85
(1.57 x 4.92 x 3.14) (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35) (1.85 x 5.31 x 4.37)
Weight kg (lbs) 0.530 (1.17) 0.240 (0.53) 0.900 (1.98)
Conformity to standards cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL
FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 – FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1
Division 2 Division 2
LED indicators Power, activity, link Power, activity, link, error Power, activity, link, collision
Alarm contact Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port
(volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V)
Reference 499 NEH 104 10 499 NEH 141 00 499 NOH 105 10
5/46

ConneXium transceivers
Presentation
The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following:

b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies, for products with twisted pair cable
Ethernet connection.
b Interfacing products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with fiber optic
cable.
Transceivers are “plug and play” devices that do not need any configuration. See
“Cabling system” page 5/35.
ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas

subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long
distance communications.
DTE
DTE DTE
Linear topology on optical fiber
5.1
Transceivers
Interfaces Copper cable port Number and type 1 x 10BASE-T port 1 x 100BASE-TX port
Medium Shielded twisted pair
Line length 100 m (328 ft)
Optical fiber ports Number and type 1 x 10BASE-FL port 1 x 100BASE-FX port
Connectors ST (BFOC) SC
Medium Multimode optical fiber
Line length 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1)
Signal attenuation 11.5 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 8 dB with 50/125 µm fiber
11.5 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber 11 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber
Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Power supply Voltage c 24 V (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Power consumption 80 mA (100 max. at c 24 V) 160 mA (190 max. at c 24 V)
Removable terminal 5-pin
Operating temperature 0…+ 60 °C (32…140 °F)
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 40 x 134 x 80 (1.57 x 5.47 x 3.14) 47 x 135 x 111 (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35)
Weight kg (lbs) 0.520 (1.15) 0.230 (0.50)
FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2 –
LED indicators P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status
Reference 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00
5/47

ConneXium switches
Presentation
Switches (see “Cabling system” page 5/38) are used to

DTE DTE DTE
DTE DTE DTE increase the limits of architectures based on hubs or
transceivers, by separating collision domains. Higher
layer communication is provided between the ports,
DTE DTE DTE DTE
and collisions at link layer are not propagated (filtering).
DTE DTE DTE DTE
They therefore improve performance by better
Collision domain 1 Collision domain 2 allocation of the pass band due to the reduction of
100 Mbit/s collisions and the network load.
optical ring
Certain Connexium switches also enable redundant
architectures to be created on twister pair copper or
DTE
fiber optic ring.
Switches are “plug & play” devices that do not need any
configuration. They can also be administered remotely
Collision DTE DTE via the SNMP or HTTP protocols for monitoring and
domain 3
DTE DTE DTE DTE
diagnostics purposes.
Switches Unmanaged Shielded twisted pair and optical fiber, unmanaged

basic
5 Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 5 x 10BASE-T/ 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/ 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports
Max. distances 100 m (328 ft)
Optical fiber ports Number and type – 1 x 100BASE-FX 2 x 100BASE-FX 1 x 100BASE-FX 2 x 100BASE-FX
5.1 port ports port ports
Connectors – SC
Medium – Multimode fiber Monomode fiber
Fiber length – 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1) 15 000 m (49 210 ft) (1)
Optical budget – 8 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 16 dB with 50/125 µm fiber
11 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Any
Redundant in a ring –
Power supply redundancy – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Power supply Voltage c 24 V c 24 V (18…32 V), safety extra low voltage (SELV)
(19.2…30 V)
Power consumption 100 mA (120 max.) 5.4 W 5.9 W 5.4 W 5.9 W
Removable terminals 3-pin 5-pin
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C (32…140 °F)
Relative humidity 10…95% non Max. 95% non condensing
condensing
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 75.2 x 143 x 43 47 x 135 x 111
(2.96 x 5.63 x (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35)
1.69)
Weight kg (lbs) 0.190 (0.42) 0.330 (0.72) 0.335 (0.74) 0.330 (0.72) 0.335 (0.74)
Conformity to standards UL508,CSA 1010, cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division
EN 61131-2 2, e, GL
LED indicators Power supply, P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity
ETH link status,
10/100 Mbps
Alarm contact – Activity, power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP
port (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V)
Reference 499 NES 251 00 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02
r r r r
(1) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation
r Available later.
5/48
references (continued) Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready

ConneXium switches
Characteristics and references (continued)
Switches Unmanaged, copper Managed, copper Managed, copper + fiber

Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type 8 x 10BASE-T/ 5 x 10BASE-T/ 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports
100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports
2 x 100BASE-TX ports
Optical fiber ports Number and type – 2 x 100BASE-FX ports
Connectors – SC
Medium – Multi mode optical fiber
Fiber length – 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1)
Optical budget – 8 dB with 50/125 µm fiber
11 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber
Ethernet services – FDR client, SNMP, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data
protocol, Web based configuration
Topology Number of switches Cascaded Any
Redundant in a ring – 50 max.
Redundancy P1 and P2 redundant power supplies
Power supply Voltage c 18…32 V, safety extra low voltage (SELV)
Power consumption 125 mA (290 max.) 7.5 W 9W 5
Removable terminals 5-pin
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C 0…+ 55°C
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 47 x 135 x 111 110 x 131 x 111 mm 5.1
(3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35) (4.33 x 5.16 x 4.37)
Weight kg (lbs) 0.230 (0.72) 0.460 (1.00)
LED indicators P1 and P2 power P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, redundancy
supplies, Ethernet link management
status,
– Redundancy health
Reference 499 NES 181 00 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00
(1) Depends on the optical fiber budgt and fiber attenuation..
5/49

ConneXium gateways
Presentation
ConneXium communication gateways are used for interconnecting the following:

b Modbus/Ethernet TCP/IP
b Modbus Plus/Ethernet TCP/IP
by providing multiple ports to adapt to the different architectures.
Gateways
Functions Communication gateway Ethernet/Modbus serial link Ethernet/Modbus Plus
Interface for programming Ethernet/Modbus Ethernet Ethernet/Modbus Plus
Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication Modbus TCP messaging Modbus TCP messaging Modbus TCP messaging
services SNMP Agent SNMP Agent
Modbus SL (RS 232/RS 485 serial link) RTU/ASCII frame –
Data rate 0.3 K…115.2 Kbps
Modbus Plus (RS 485 network) – Token bus, HDLC synchronous mode
Data rate 1 Mbps
Configuration Local or remote by Telnet in Local using DOS Local or remote (1)
hyper terminal mode
Interfaces Ethernet TCP/IP port Type 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 1 x 10BASE-T 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
5 1 x 10BASE2
1 x 10BASE5
Shielded connectors RJ45 RJ45, BNC and AUI RJ45
5.1 Serial port Type 1 x Modbus SL 1 x Modbus Plus
Shielded connectors RJ45 9-way SUB-D connector
Medium Shielded twisted pair Shielded twisted pair (single or double)
Power supply Voltage c 9…30 V, a 110/220 V (a 93.5 V…242 V), 47…63 Hz
a 9 …24 V
Power consumption 3W 1A
Operating temperature 0…+ 60°C 0…+ 50°C
Relative humidity 20…90% non condensing 10…95% non condensing
Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) 35 x 95 x 60 122 x 229 x 248
(1.38 x 3.74 x 2.36) (4.80 x 9.0 x 9.80)
Weight kg (lbs) 0.500 (1.10) 4.260 (9.40)
Conformity to standards UL, CSA, FM 3611 Class 1 UL 508, CSA 142, e
Division 2
LED indicators Activity, status, diagnostics Power
Reference 174 CEV 300 20 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 200 40 r
(1) Local with additional keyboard and monitor, via a dedicated screen for basic diagnostic and
configuration. Remote, via intuitive Web pages for full configuration and diagnostic.
r Available later
5/50

ConneXium connection cables
Presentation
ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet current
standards and approvals:
b Standard EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables:

These cables conform to the EIA/TIA-568 standard, category 5, IEC 11801/EN
50173 class D. Their fire behavior conforms to NFC 32070# class C2 and IEC 322/1,
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH).
b UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables:

These cables are UL and CSA 22.1 approved. Their fire resistance conforms to
NFPA 70.
References
Standard EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables
Description Pre-equipped at both ends Length Reference Weight
m (ft) kg
490 NT p 000 pp Straight-through 2 RJ45 connectors 2 (6.56) 490 NTW 000 02 –
shielded twisted pair For connection to terminal 5 (16.4) 490 NTW 000 05 –
cables devices (DTE)
12 (39.4) 490 NTW 000 12 –
40 (131.2) 490 NTW 000 40 –
80 (262.5) 490 NTW 000 80 –

kg
Crossed cord 2 RJ45 connectors 5 (16.4) 490 NTC 000 05 –
shielded twisted pair For connections between 15 (49.2) 490 NTC 000 05 –
cables hubs, switches and
40 (131.2) 490 NTC 000 40 –
transceivers
80 (262.5) 490 NTC 000 80 –
UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables

5
kg
Straight-through 2 RJ45 connectors 2 (6.56) 490 NTW 000 02U –
490 NOC 000 05 shielded twisted pair For connection to terminal
cables devices (DTE)
5 (16.4) 490 NTW 000 05U – 5.1
12 (39.4) 490 NTW 000 12U –
40 (131.2) 490 NTW 000 40U –
80 (262.5) 490 NTW 000 80U –

kg
Crossed cord 2 RJ45 connectors 5 (16.4) 490 NTC 000 05U –
shielded twisted pair For connections between 15 (49.2) 490 NTC 000 05U –
490 NOT 000 05 cables hubs, switches and
40 (131.2) 490 NTC 000 40U –
transceivers
80 (262.5) 490 NTC 000 80U –
Fiber optic cables

m (ft) kg
Glass fiber optic 1 SC connector and 5 (16.4) 490 NOC 000 05 –
cables for terminal 1 MT-RJ connector
devices (DTE) to 1 ST (BFOC) connector and 5 (16.4) 490 NOT 000 05 –
490 NOR 000 05 hubs, switches and 1 MT-RJ connector
transceivers
2 MT-RJ connectors 5 (16.4) 490 NOR 000 05 –
5/51
platform 5
CANopen machine bus
Presentation
Originally used in the automotive industry, CAN is increasingly used in general

industry. Several fieldbuses based on CAN lower layers and components are
available. The CANopen machine bus conforms to the ISO 11898 international
standard, promoted by the CAN In Automation association, which consists of users
and manufacturers and offers an excellent assurance of open access and
interoperability due to its standardised devices and communication profiles.
TSX Micro Lexium

MHD
Premium Advantys STB Twin Line TLC
CANopen bus
From 1 to
127 slaves
ATV 38 FTB 1CN FTB 1CN

ATV 58/58F
TeSys Tego Power
model U
The CANopen bus is a multimaster bus which ensures reliable deterministic access
to realtime data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on
5 broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, which ensures optimum use of
the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave
parameters.
The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair, on which 127 devices maximum are
connected by daisy chaining. The variable data rate between 20 Kbit/s and 1 Mbit/s
depends on the length of the bus (between 30 and 5000 m).
Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator.
5.2 The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following
characteristics:
b Open bus system.
b Data exchanges in real-time without overloading the protocol.
b Modular design allowing modification of size.
b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices.
b Standardised configuration of networks.
b Access to all device parameters.
b Synchronisation and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled
processes (short system response time).
b Interoperability between numerous international manufacturers.

5/52
Connectable devices, Modicon Premium automation
CANopen machine bus
Connectable devices
The TSX CPP 110 module performs the role of the master on the CANopen bus, and
other Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are:
b TeSys model U starter-controllers.
b TeSys model d using the Tego Power installation assistance system.
b Advantys STB distributed I/O.
b Advantys FTB, IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes.
b Advantys FTM, IP 67 modular I/O splitter boxes.
b Altivar 31, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.18…15 kW.
b Altivar 58, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.37…75 kW.
b Altivar 58F, variable speed drives with flux vector control for asynchronous motors
TeSys model U Advantys FTB 0.75…55 kW.
b Twin Line TLC servodrives for brushless motors 3…16 A.
b Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors 1.5…70 A.
Are also compatible:

b Any third-party device which conforms to the CANopen standard profile.
b Any CAN device which uses CAN V2.0B identifiers on the ISO 11898 physical
layer.
The TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card supports the V4.02 CANopen standard with in
particular the heartbeat network management.
Altivar ATV 31 Twin Line TLC
Example of connectable devices on the CANopen bus
Description
The Modicon TSX Micro/Premium platforms connect to the CANopen bus by means
of the TSX CPP 110 type III PCMCIA card inserted in the processor or coprocessor
5
1 communication port slot.
2 The TSX CPP 110 machine bus CANopen set comprises:

1 A PCMCIA card, type III with fixing screws.
2 A tap junction equipped with one 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting the
CANopen bus.
3 A connection cable length 0.5 m, interdependent of the PCMCIA card and the tap
junction. 5.2
3
TSX CPP 110
Presentation: Characteristics: References:

5/53
platform 5
CANopen machine bus
Software setup
The CANopen bus is configured using dedicated SyCon (1) software, which should
be ordered separately, reference SYC SPU LFp CD28M.
This software is used:
b To describe all devices connected on the bus.
b To generate the “.CO” file including the informations relating to the devices
connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software.
If the configuration file is too large in relation to the TSX Micro/Premium processor
capacity (see characteristics table), it is possible to load the master configuration
directly by inserting the TSX CPP 110 card in a PCMCIA port (type III) on the PC on
which SyCon software has been installed.
In PL7, it is possible to configure the CANopen bus card so that the PLC
processor/TSX CPP 110 card exchanges are executed at the same rate as the
master task or the fast task.
The process data exchanged with the slaves can be accessed by %MW standard
Example of SyCon configuration devices screen
words, the number of which depends on the type of processor and the task in which
the module has been declared. PL7 standard function blocks are used to define the
device parameters.
Nota : In addition to supporting the CANopen protocol which uses V2.0A standard CAN
identifiers on 11 bits, the card enables direct access to the CAN link layer via CAN V2.0B
identifiers on 29 bits, used by the majority of CAN devices. In certain applications this enables
simultaneous control of CANopen devices and dedicated CAN products.
(1) The SyCon field bus configurator software also makes it possible to describre the I/O
configuration of Profibus DP bus for Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum platforms and
the I/O configuration of INTERBUS bus for Modicon Quantum platform.
5
Characteristics
Type of bus CANopen
Structure Type Industrial bus
Physical interface ISO 11898
Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining
Access method CSMA/CA, multimaster, producer/consumer, prioity information
Transmission Data rate 20 Kbit/s…1 Mbit/s depending on the length of bus

5.2
Medium Double shielded twisted pair
Physical Number of devices 127 max.

configuration Length of bus according to data rate 1 Mbit/s 800 Kbit/s 500 Kbit/s 250 Kbit/s 125 Kbit/s 50 Kbit/s 20 Kbit/s
m 20 45 100 250 500 1000 2500
Segments Number 5 maxi (4 repeaters)
No. of devices per 64 devices 32 devices 16 devices
segment
Max. length of m 170 190 210
segment
Equivalent length m 15
of a repeater
Software configuration Micro TSX 37 Premium PLCs and Atrium slot-PLCs
21 001/101 57 0p 57 2p 57 3p 57 4p
22 001/101 57 1p 57 5p
Size of configuration data (1) Ko 0…8 0…12 16 32 64
Max. size Master task words 256 %MW 384 %MW 512 %MW 1024 %MW 3584 %MW
of CANopen I/O Fast task words 32 %MW 48 %MW 64 %MW 128 %MW 256 %MW
data
(1) This size can be exceeded if the configuration is loaded in the memory of CANopen PCMCIA
card via the SyCon software.
Presentation: Description: References:

5/54
platform 5
CANopen machine bus
References
CANopen machine bus set
Description Services No. of module Use Reference Weight
per PLC/PC kg
CANopen - PDO cyclic 1 on Micro Supplied with TSX CPP 110 0.230
master V4.02 exchanges TSX 37 21/22 a tap junction
PCMCIA card - CMS 1 on Premium and cable
(type III) message TSX P57 (1) length 0.5 m
handling (SDO) 1 on Atrium
- management TPCX
of bus operating
modes
Sycon configuration softwares
The SyCon software is the configurator for machine bus and field bus of
Telemecanique.
It supports the buses:
TSX CPP 110
b CANopen for TSX Micro et Premium platforms.
b Profibus DP for Premium et Quantum platforms.
b INTERBUS for Quantum platform.
The SyCon tool includes also the device description for Telemecanique I/O modules.
Description Type Reference Weight

kg
SyCon V2.8 configuration Single (1station) SYC SPU LFU CD28M –
software licenses Group (3 stations) SYC SPU LFG CD28M –
(2)
Team (10 stations) SYC SPU LFT CD28M –
Site (up to 10 stations) SYC SPU LFF CD28M –
SyCon V2.8 configuration Single (1station) SYC SPU LRU CD28M –

5
software update
SyCon V2.8 configuration Group (3 stations) SYC SPU LUG CD28M –

software upgrade for Team (10 stations) SYC SPU LUT CD28M –
previous version
Site (up to 10 stations) SYC SPU LUF CD28M –
(1) Unauthorized on TSX P57 153/154M Premium processor.

(1) A software kit of single type (1 station) including PL7 Micro et Sycon softwares is also 5.2
available, see page 6/71.

5/55
TSX SAY master module for AS-Interface bus
Presentation
TSX SAY 1000 master module for the AS-Interface bus enables the Premium PLC
to act as the AS-Interface bus master.
Sensors
Premium
+ TSX SAY 1000
XVA
column
AS-Interface
bus
XBL keyboard
XAL button box Intelligent

Motor starter ASI ABL
sensors
power supply
The bus comprises a master station (Premium PLC) and slave stations. The master
that supports the AS-Interface profile successively interrogates the devices
connected on the AS-Interfacenterface bus and stores the data (status of
sensor/actuators, operational status of devices) in the PLC memory. Communication
management on the AS-Interfacenterface bus is completely transparent with regard
to the PLC application program.
TSX SAY 1000 master module with the AS-Interface M2E profile (AS-Interface V2)
5 manages:
b Discrete slave devices (a maximum of 62 devices organized in 2 banks, A/B, with
31 addresses each),
b Analog devices (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A)
b Safety interfaces (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A).
The maximum number of TSX SAY 1000 modules per PLC station is either 2,4, or 8,
depending on the type of processor installed (see page 5/57).
An AS-Interface power supply must be used for powering the various devices on the
bus. Ideally, this PSU should be situated nearest to the stations with the largest
power demands.
5.3 Description
TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface bus master module is standard format modules.
Modules of this format are designed to slot into any position on the Premium PLC
rack like any Input/Output module or application-specific module. The modules
feature, on the front panel:
1 A display unit comprising 4 indicator lamps showing the module operating modes:
v RUN indicator lamp (green): module operating,
1
v ERR indicator lamp (red): module fault,
2 v A/B indicator lamp (green): display of group of 32 slaves,
3 v I/O indicator lamp (red): AS-Interface bus I/O fault.
2 A display unit comprising 32 indicator lamps for diagnostics of the AS-Interface
4
bus and of each slave connected to the bus depending on the A/B push button
selected (1).
5
3 Two or three indicator lamps specific to the module: See diagnostics on
page 5/57.
4 Two push buttons: See diagnostics on page 5/57.
5 One 3-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface bus (female
TSX SAY 1000 screw connector supplied).
(1) Depending on the selection made with the A/B push button, the first 31 slaves (standard
address settings) or the last 31 slaves (extended address settings with AS-Interface V2) are
displayed.
5/56
Diagnostics, Modicon Premium automation
references, platform 5
connections TSX SAY master module for AS-Interface bus
Diagnostics
TSX SAY 1000 module (AS-Interface V2)
The two indicator lamps 3 on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 module that
correspond to the two push buttons 4 are used for diagnostics at module level:
Indicator lamps marked: Push buttons marked:

PWR: FAULT: AS-Interface bus fault A/B: selection of MODE: module
AS-Interface slave group on Off line/On line
power supply display unit 2
present
The display unit on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 master module allows
simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slave devices on the
AS-Interface bus. Detailed diagnostics for each of these slave devices can be carried
out via the ASI-TERV2 adjustment console.
References
Description Number Protocol Number of I/Os Reference Weight
per PLC and profile (2) kg
AS-Interface 1 for 57 Cp AS-Interface Maximum of 62 discrete TSX SAY 1000 0.340
bus master 1 for 57 0p M2E devices
module (1) 2 for 57 1p Maximum of 31 analog
for Premium 4 for 57 2p devices (3)
PLCs and 8 for 57 3p 31 safety devices
Atrium 8 for 57 4p
Slot-PLCs 8 for 57 5p
Description Supply Length Reference Weight
kg
TSX SAY 1000

AS-Interface For AS-Interface bus
bus
20 m
50 m
XZ-CB 10201
XZ-CB 10501
1.400
3.500
5
ribbon cables
100 m XZ-CB 11001 7.000
(yellow)
(1) The 3-way SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface cable is supplied with the
module.
(2) These maximum values cannot be cumulated: see the characteristics on page 5/59.
(3) Supports analog devices that have between 1 and 4 input or output channels.
Connections
TSX SAY 1000 module
Brown wire
5.3
AS-Interface ribbon
cable
Blue wire
5/57
Software setup Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
Master modules for AS-Interface bus
Software setup
The AS-Interface bus is configured using Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro
software. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity:
b Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (this
management is transparent to the user).
b Topological I/O addressing: each AS-Interface slave declared on the bus is
assigned a topological address on the bus. This is transparent to the user.
b Each sensor/actuator for the AS-Interface bus interfaces is treated as an in-rack
I/O by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC.
AS-Interface bus configuration
All devices on the AS-Interface bus are configured implicitly using the following
sequence of screens:
b Declaration of the AS-Interface bus master module
v The TSX SAZ 10 module is always inserted and declared in position no. 4 on
TSX 37 10/21/22 TSX Micro automation platforms.
v TSX SAY 1000 modules can be inserted into any position on Premium automation
platforms or Atrium slot-PLCs (except positions reserved for processors and power
Declaration of the TSX SAZ 10 TSX Micro module supplies).
b Configuration of AS-Interface slave devices
5 Using the configuration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices
corresponding to all interface I/Os on the AS-Interface bus. Depending on its type,
the configuration for each device consists of defining, as appropriate:
v Schneider Electric AS-Interface devices.

The user selects the AS-Interface device catalog reference from the various discrete,
analog, or safety interfaces listed. This selection automatically determines the
AS-Interface profile and the parameters associated with each interface.
v Third-party AS-Interface device.

The user can use Uniti Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior software to manage a “customized”
list of sensors/actuators of different brands. This list, specifying the AS-Interface
profile and parameters, is compiled to meet the needs of the user.
5.3 Configuration of slave devices in TSX SAY 1000
Programming
After configuration, the I/Os connected on the AS-Interface bus are processed by the
application program in the same way as an in-rack I/O of the PLC, using either the
address (e.g. %I\4.0\16.2, input 2 of slave 16 of the AS-Interface bus), or the
associated symbol (e.g. Start_conveyor).
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software has an integrated function block library
containing the specific diagnostic DFBs for AS-Interface bus. Its check for the
appearance of any error on the AS-Interface (bus or slaves).
5/58
Diagnostics, Modicon Premium automation
Master modules for AS-Interface bus
Diagnostics
Diagnostics performed using the centralized display unit of the TSX Micro platform
1 or using the display unit of TSX SAY 1000 module can be completed using a PC
terminal on which Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software has been installed.
2
The terminal connected to the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is used to perform
diagnostics of the operating state of the AS-Interface V1 TSX SAZ 10 master module,
the bus and the slave devices on the bus.
For the AS-Interface V2 TSX SAY 1000 master module, the diagnostics are identical
to those of the AS-Interface V1 module, and in addition, take into account
developments in the M2E standard.
Diagnostics are performed using a single screen divided into four sections providing
information on:
1 Status of the TSX SAZ 10 or TSX SAY 1000 module (RUN, ERR, I/O).
3 4 2 Status of the AS-Interface channel connected to the module.
Diagnostics of the TSX SAY 1000 module using PL7 3 Faulty interface (or slave).
4 Data relating to any selected interface (profile, parameters, forcing, etc).
In the event of an AS-Interface module or channel fault, a second screen can be

accessed, which clearly shows the type of fault, which may be at internal or external
level.
Characteristics
Type of module TSX SAZ 10 TSX SAY 1000
AS-Interface profile M2(AS-Interface V1) M2E (AS-Interface V2)
Type of addressing
Product certification
Standard
AS-Interface No. 12001,
Standard and extended
Pending
5
IEC 61131 2
Ambient air temperature Operation 0…+60 °C.
Storage -25…+70 °C.
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 68 2 6. Fc tests.
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 68 2 27. EA tests.
Number of connectable interfaces With standard addressing 31 slaves
(or slaves) With extended addressing – 31 slaves
Type of connectable interfaces With standard addressing Discrete I/Os (4I/4O) Discrete I/Os (4I/4O) (1)
Analog I/Os (a maximum of 4 channels)
Safety interfaces
With extended addressing – Discrete I/Os (4I/3O) 5.3
Bus connection By terminal block inside module By 3-way SUB-D connector (included with the
(polarity locating device) module)
Module power supply Via power supply integrated into the host platform of the module
Display/diagnostics Via:
v centralized display unit on TSX Micro PLC or via the display unit of TSX SAY 1000 module
v use of the Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software diagnostics function
v use of the ASI-TERV1 adjustment console (infrared link)
(1) If the interfaces are connected using extended addressing, the type of discrete I/Os is 4I/3O
(instead of 4I/4O).
5/59
Presentation 5
platform 5
Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for

AS-Interface
Power supplies for AS-Interface
Consistent with the standard Phaseo line, the range of ASI ABL power supplies is
designed to deliver a d.c. voltage, as required by networks operating under the
AS-Interface protocol. Three versions are available to meet all needs encountered in
industrial applications, in enclosures, cells or floor-standing enclosures. These
single-phase, electronic, switch mode power supplies guarantee the quality of the
output current, in accordance with the electrical characteristics and conforming to
standard EN 50295.
PE N L b ASI ABLB300p
100-240V Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this power
supply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4
24 V
and 4.8 A ratings, the parallel output terminal blocks
AS-i : 2,4 A allow the bus to be connected separately to the slaves
ASI ABLB3002
and the master. Input and output LEDs allow fast and
continuous diagnostics.
AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND
(1)
AS-InterfaceAS-Interface
master
module
Earth
b ASI ABLD300p
fault Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this power
Reset supply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4
PE N L + 1 2 and 4.8 A ratings, it allows diagnosis and management
5 100-240V
24 V
Reset Fault
Fault
Fault +
of earth faults on AS-Interface networks. In the event
of an earth fault, the Phaseo power supply trips out,
thus stopping dialogue on the bus. Restarting is only
AS-i : 2,4 A ON
OFF
possible after deliberate acknowledgement of the
ASI ABLD3002
TEST fault. Two I/O are provided, which may be used to
RESET monitor status. The parallel output terminal blocks are
used to connect the bus separately to the slaves and
the AS-Interface master. Input, output and fault LED’s
allow fast and continuous diagnostics.

Warning: the earth (GND) (2) connection must be
made. In the event of disconnection, the built-in
(2)
detector becomes inoperative. To obtain earth
AS-InterfaceAS-Interface connection diagnostics, it is recommended that an
5.3 master
module ASI ABLB300p power supply be used together with
insulation relay RMO PAS 101.
PE N L b ASI ABLM3024
100-240V Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this product
delivers two d.c. outputs which are totally independent in
24 V AS-i
the way they operate.
AS-i : 4,8 A Two output voltages - 30 V d.c./2.4 A (AS-Interface
ASI ABLM3024
24 V - 3 A
supply) and 24 V d.c./3 A - are available, so making it
24 30,5 V possible to supply the control equipment without an
additional power supply. Input and output LEDs allow fast
and continuous diagnostics.
(1) Recommended connection.

(2) Compulsory connection.
+ AS-i + AS-i GND AS-i + AS-i GND
(1)
AS-Interface
24 V d.c. master AS-Interface
control module

5/60 Schneider Electric

Characteristics 5
platform 5

AS-Interface
Technical characteristics
Type of power supply ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLB3004 ASI ABLD3002 ASI ABLD3004 ASI ABLM3024
Functions Supply to the AS-Interface system 24 V c
supply
Product certifications UL 508, CSA 22-2 n° 950
Conforming to standards Safety EN 60950, TÜV
EMC EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 55022 class B
Low frequency harmonic No
currents
Input circuit
LED indication Orange LED
Input voltage Rated values V a 100…240
Permissible values V a 85…264
Permissible frequencies Hz 47…63
Efficiency at nominal load % > 83 > 80
Current consumption 0.5 1 0.5 1
Current at switch-on A < 30
Power factor > 0.65
Output circuit
LED indication Green LED
Nominal output voltage V c 30 (AS-Interface) c 24
Nominal output current A 2.4 4.8 2.4 4.8 2.4 3
Precision Adjustable output voltage V – 100 to
120 %
Line and load regulation 3%
Residual ripple - interference mV 300 - 50
Micro-breaks Holding time for I max ms 10
and Ve min
Protection Short-circuit Permanent/automatic restart after elimination of the fault
Overload
Overvoltage
1.1 In
Tripping if U > 1.2 Un U > 1.5
5
Un
Undervoltage Tripping if U < 0.95 Un U < 0.8
Un
Connections Input mm2 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth
Output mm2 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth, multiple output
Environment Storage temperature °C - 25 to + 70
Operating temperature °C 0 to + 60 (derating from 50)
Maximum relative humidity 95 % (without condensation or dripping water)
Degree of protection IP 20 (conforming to IEC 529)
Vibration EN 61131-2
Operating position Vertical 5.3
MTBF h > 100000 (conforming to Bell core, at 40 °C)
Dielectric strength Input/output 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mm
Input/earth 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mm
Output/earth (and input/output) 500 V/50 Hz/1 mm
Input fuse incorporated Yes (not interchangeable)
Emissions Conducted/radiated Class B (conforming to EN 55022)
Immunity Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air)
Electromagnetic EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m)
Conducted interference EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV), EN 61000-4-6 (10 V)
Mains interference EN 61000-4-11
Presentation: References: Dimensions:

Schneider Electric 5/61

Characteristics, Modicon Premium automation
selection 5
platform 5

AS-Interface
Derating
The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an
electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the
electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced.
The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power
supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature.
P/Pn (%) 140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Maximum operating temperature (°C)
Selection
Upstream protection of power supplies for use on the AS-Interface system
Mains supply a 115 V single-phase a 230 V single-phase
Type of Thermal-magnetic Gg Thermal-magnetic Gg
protection circuit-breaker fuse circuit-breaker fuse
Single-pole GB2 CBpp
2-pole GB2 DBpp C60N GB2 DBpp C60N
5 ASI ABLB3002
ASI ABLB3004
GB2 pB07 MG24517
GB2 pB08 MG24518
(1)
(1)
2A
4A
GB2 DB06
GB2 DB07
MG24516
MG17453
(1)
(1)
2A
2A
ASI ABLD3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) 2A GB2 DB06 MG24516 (1) 2A
ASI ABLD3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 (1) 4A GB2 DB07 MG17453 (1) 2A
ASI ABLM3024 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) 2A GB2 DB06 MG17453 (1) 2A
(1) UL certified circuit-breaker.
Function diagram
10 5 1 ON/OFF DDT
2 Supply
N L + 1 2 AS-i + AS-i – , and GND (4)
AS-i +
5.3 6 8
7 24 V 9 AS-i –
(1)
AS-i : 2,4 A 1 3 Reset
or (1)
4
3 10 Reset
(1)
4 Test
(3) (3) (3) (3)
(2) (2) (2) (2)
5 Fault
6
7 AS-i
8 Fault +
9 Fault –
2
Relay off
Relay on
Input at state 0 or contact open
Input at state 1 or contact closed
LED off
LED on
(1) 30 ms min.
(2) 15 ms.
(3) 20 ms.
(4) Warning: the earth fault detector will only operate if the earth (GND) terminal is connected.
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:


schemes 5
AS-Interface
ASI ABL regulated switch mode power supplies

Mains input voltage Output Nominal Nominal Auto-protect Earth fault detection Reference Weight
47…63 Hz voltage power current reset
V cV W A kg
100…240 30 72 2.4 auto no ASI ABLB3002 0.800

single-phase
wide range
145 4.8 auto no ASI ABLB3004 1.300
72 2.4 auto yes ASI ABLD3002 0.800
145 4.8 auto yes ASI ABLD3004 1.300
30 + 24 2 x 72 2.4 + 3 auto no ASI ABLM3024 1.300
Dimensions
Common side view ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLM3024
Mounting on 35 and 75 mm rails ASI ABLD3002 ASI ABLp3004
120
120
5
120 54 81
Schemes
ASI ABLB300p ASI ABLD300p ASI ABLM3024
+
N
L
L
N
L
Set
5.3
Fault
detector
Filter Filter ON/ Filter

OFF
AS-i +
AS-i +
AS-i +
AS-i +
AS-i +
AS-i +
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
AS-i
24 V
Presentation: Characteristics: Selection:


Communication Modicon Premium automation
architecture platform 5
Level 3
Ethernet
Monitor Pro
Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus)
Ethernet TCP/IP
Level 2 (Uni-TE, Modbus)
TSX Micro
TSX ETZ
TSX ETZ
Modbus bus
Uni-Telway bus Premium
Modem
ATV 28
Modem
5
ATV 58 TSX Micro
Level 1
Fipway/Modbus Plus
TSX Micro TSX Micro
Magelis
AS-Interface bus
XAL control station
Nano
5.4
Intelligent
sensor
Nano
Nano
Nano
5/64
5
Digital HP
Magelis iPC (1)
Service Global Data Ethernet TCP/IP (Modbus)
Quantum + Web serveur
Quantum
Premium + Web serveur
Ethernet
Premium
Magelis iPC
Modbus Plus
5
I/O Scanning
Momentum
TSX Micro Premium Bridge
Premium
ATV 58
T XBT F Magelis
Premium I/O extension rack Quantum

Sensors
5.4
AS-interface bus
Premium I/O extension rack
AS-interface bus
Motor starter
Bus X XAL control Intelligent XBL keypad

station sensors
Motor starter
(1) PC industriel Magelis iPC in configuration “Thin Client” : PC having only Windows and an
Internet browser.
5/65
X-Way and the OSI model Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
X-way communication
X-Way and the OSI model
The communication architecture of the programmable TSX Micro/Premium PLCs,

like that of TSX 17 or TSX model 40 PLCs, is compliant with the OSI model.
Telegram
7 Application Common words/shared table Uni-TE
Application-to-application communications Modbus (1)
Uni-TE
6 Presentation
5 Session
4 Transport TCP
3 Network X-Way addressing system IP
2 Link Uni-Telway WorldFip ISO 8802 3 ISO 8802 3

Ethernet Ethernet
1 Physical RS 485 WorldFip ISO 8802 3 ISO 8802 3
19.2 Kbps 1 Mbps 10 Mbps 10/100 Mbps
Uni-Telway Fipio/Fipway Ethway Ethernet TCP
The physical layer enables the physical transmission of data signals between
5 2 systems via a medium. In order for a network to operate correctly, and to ensure
full security of personnel in compliance with IEC 1131 2, it is necessary to implement
the wiring recommendations described in the reference manual TSX DR NET F
“X-Way communication” (or in the TSX CD DMTE 13E CD-ROM “Technical
documentation”).
The application layer concerns application programs, data exchange and

cooperation conventions.
This layer provides the following services:
b Industrial Uni-TE message, available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs.
b Distributed COM database available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs, or
Shared Table service available on TSX Micro/Premium PLCs.
b Periodical data exchange on Fipio bus, see page 5/72.
b Application-to-application communication.
b Telegram.
5.4 Size of requests Ethway, Ethernet Fipway

TCP/IP (1)
Fipio Uni-Telway
Uni-TE service 256 bytes (2) 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3)
COM service 256 word 128 word – –
database (4) database
Application-to- 256 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3)
application
Telegram – 16 bytes – –
(1) Ethway not available on TSX Micro PLC.
(2) 1 K bytes with requests executed as a background task.
(3) 128 bytes on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX model 40 terminal port, 32 bytes on
TSX 17 20/47 20/25.
(4) COM service not available with Ethernet TCP/IP.
Uni-TE services
The Uni-TE protocol is the industrial message handling system supported by the
X-Way communication architecture. It operates on the question/answer or
request/confirmation principle. A device which supports the Uni-TE protocol can be a:
b Client: this device initiates communication. It asks a question (reads), transmits data
(writes) or sends an instruction (Run, Stop, etc.).
b Server: this device executes the service requested by the client and sends a
confirmation after execution.
5/66
X-Way and the OSI model Modicon Premium automation
(continued) platform 5
X-way communication
The services provided depend on the type of device (PLC, numerical controller,
programming terminal, supervision station, etc.). Depending on its function, each
device can be Client and/or Server. A Client PLC can access other devices on the
architecture via its application program: It can read/write objects on another PLC or
numerical controller, select programs on a numerical controller, etc.
Network transparency
When connected to any station in the network or directly connected to the Fipway/
Ethernet TCP/IP network, a programming terminal can communicate with any other
station in the network (as if the terminal were physically connected to the PLC with
which it is dialoguing).
Network transparency also applies between stations connected to different
segments of the same multinetwork architecture.
COM service and Shared Table service (exclusive services one from another)
The COM service is made up of a set of dedicated words called common words.
Each Fipway/Ethway network station may or may not access the database (in read
only or read/write mode).
All PLC stations exchanging common words (32 stations on Fipway, 64 stations on
Ethway) are allocated, in a dedicated database (128 words for Fipway, 256 words for
Ethway), a write zone (set at 4 words for the Fipway network, and variable from 4 to
64 words for the Ethway network) per TSX Micro/Premium station.
COM words are updated automatically during each scan of the general sequential
program (master task) without the intervention of the application program.
The Shared Table service can be used to exchange a table of internal words
divided into as many zones as there are TSX Micro/Premium PLCs which comprise
the Fipway network. The exchange principle is based on the broadcasting, by each
PLC, of a word memory zone (broadcast zone) to the other PLCs on the network.
Each network station is allocated an exchange table comprising 128 internal words
for the 32 PLCs that share the service, with a broadcast zone assigned to each PLC,
variable from 1 to 32 internal words.
5
Application-to-application communication
This consists of using the user application program to send word tables between
2 devices, which may be TSX Micro/Premium and TSX PLCs.
This service is particularly suitable for:
b Sending alarm messages from a PLC to a supervision station.
b Exchanging data tables between two PLCs controlled by the application programs
of the transmission and destination device.
b Sending broadcast messages to all stations and devices.
Telegram
The telegram service available on Fipway is a special case of application-to-
application messages. It enables short messages to be sent and received on a
priority basis (maximum 16 characters).
A telegram from a TSX Micro/Premium PLC is sent immediately without waiting for
the end of the cycle. The telegram is received by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC in:
5.4
b The event-triggered task (processed as soon as the message arrives in the
network card).
b The fast task or master task (when scanning the reception function).
b A PLC can only process one telegram at a time.
Use in a multinetwork
The X-Way communication architecture is designed to cover multinetwork
applications capable of dealing with problems of:
b Concentration, the architecture is particularly suitable for feedback of supervision
data to a higher level.
b Redundancy, each PLC monitors the correct operation of both networks to which
it is connected. If one of the networks should fail, all traffic could be transferred to the
valid network.
b Inter-network communication. These architectures comprise several network
segments which are interconnected by “bridge PLC” stations. Transparent
communication is then offered between the entire architecture.
5/67
connectable devices platform 5
Fipio bus manager function
Presentation
Premium (Bus manager)
Magelis IPC Magelis XBT,

CCX17 Produits
Tiers
Momentum
TBX
Fipio
AS-interface
Micro (Agent) Premium (Agent) gateway
Dust and damp ATV AS-i
proof TBX
The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control

system components. It enables 127 devices to be connected at the connection point
integrated in the processor. This fieldbus conforms to the WorldFip standard based
on producer/consumer mechanisms. It is designed for remote location of l/O up to
15 km away and enables a third-party Schneider Alliances device to be installed.
The bus arbitrator (manager) can be a :
b Premium PLC TSX P 57 15p/25p/2823/35p/45p/4823/554M.
b Atrium slot-PLC T PCX 57 353/TSX PCI 354M.
Characteristics see page 5/73.
5 Fipio bus accessories and connecting cables, see pages 5/82 to 5/85.
Connectable devices
Schneider Electric devices which can be connected on the Fipio bus include:
b Micro/Premium Agent function (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card).
b CCX 17 operator panel (version ≥ 2.4 ) (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card).
b Magelis XBT-F graphic screen terminal (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card) PCMCIA
TSX FPP 20 card.
b Le PC industriel Magelis IPC (via carte PCMCIA TSX FPC 10M).
b Advantys STB distributed I/O (with STB NFP 2212 network interface module).
b Momentum distributed discrete, analogue or application-specific l/O (with
170 FNT 110 01 communication module version u 1.0).
b TBX distributed discrete (1) or analogue l/O (IP 20) with TBX LEP 030
communication module version ≥ 1.2.
b TBX distributed discrete dust and damp proof l/O (IP 65) (2) or TSX EpF (IP 67).
5.4 b ATV 38/58/58F variable speed drive (via VW3-A58301/311 card) and ATV 68
(via VW3-A68301 card).
b TBX SAP 10 Fipio/AS-Interface gateway (2).
b Partner products (see below).
Fipio bus openness
Collaborative Automation Partner Program is a programme of cooperation between

Schneider Electric and its partners, offering automation products (hardware and
software), system integration and other services to complement the Schneider
Electric offer.
The programme was established to improve the connection of devices from other
control system suppliers on the Fipio bus. Connection of a wide variety of different
brands of sensors and actuators offers the end user a choice of global,
high-performance and low-cost control system solutions.
(1) WorldFip mode is only supported by TBX discrete I/O modules version ≥ 1.4. (TBX LEP 020).
(2) WorldFip mode is only supported by modules version ≥ 2.0.
Description: References:
page 5/69 page 5/71
5/68
software setup platform 5
Fipio bus openness (continued)
Schneider Electric has integrated specific WorldFip mechanisms into its PLCs and
software in order to make them accessible to any automation system engineer
without any particular expertise in this area. Schneider Electric products and partner
products connected on Fipio then automatically reap the following benefits: simplified
description of architectures and configuration of equipment, and also simple control
system development and programming, operation and maintenance.
Find out more about the “Collaboprative Automation Partner Program” at:
www.collaboratveautomation.schneider-electric.com
Description
TSX P57 p53/54M (1) processors and the T PCX P57 353/354M slot-PLC have on
the front panel:
1 A 9-way SUB-D connecdiscr. for connection to the bus via the TSX FP ACC 2/12
connector.
1
TSX P 57p823M T PCX P57 353M
Software setup
Configuration
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software offer configuration screens which enable the
1
declaration and immediate and intuitive configuration of the remote devices
connected on the Fipio bus. 5
1 Each circle represents one connection point.
2
2 Clicking on a circle accesses the catalogue of devices which can be connected.
3 Once confirmed, the Fipio bus configuration will appear.
3 Processors fitted with the integrated Fipio link can manage 128 connection points on
the bus (addresses 0 to 127).
See page 5/70 for the table detailing limitations according to processor and type of
device.
Diagnostics 5.4
1 The diagnostic functions of the Fipio bus, integrated in the Unity Pro or
PL7 Junior/Pro software, very quickly identify a fault on:
b The bus medium.

b Remote devices.
2
1 A graphic representation of the architecture displays the defective devices in red.
2 More detailed diagnostics can be accessed by double-clicking.
3 3 In addition, special screens display an overview of all the faults appearing on the bus
or on any device. On request, these faults can be recorded for later analysis.
(1) The TSX P57 153/154M processor is a single format module.
page 5/68 page 5/71
5/69
Maximum configuration Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
Maximum configuration
The Fipio bus enables a maximum of 128 devices to be connected. This limit can, in
certain cases, be restricted depending on the type of bus manager processor and on
the devices which are connected on the bus.
The maximum number of devices which can be connected depends on:
b The maximum size of memory space available for Fipio data which is
v 94320 bytes for TSX P57 15p/25p/2823/35p processors and the
T PCX 57 353/TSX PCI 57 354M slot-PLC,
v 213104 bytes for the TSX P 57 45p/4823/554M.
b The total number of bytes consumed by each device (see table below).
Product family Reference Base size Extension size Maximum number of connection points
(bytes) (bytes) TSX P571p 2p/35p 4p/5p
Maxi number of Fipio devices (1) 63 127 127
ATV 38/58 With VW3-A58301 card 1808 52 52 62
ATV 38/58/58F With VW3-A58311 card 1280 62 62 62
ATV 68 With VW3-A68301 card 1280 62 62 62
Lexium MHDA With AM0 FIP 001V000 card 1424 62 62 62
CCX 17 T CCX 1720 F/FPS, 1952 4 4 4
T CCX 17p0 L/LPS
Magelis XBT-F With TSX FPP 10 card 1424 62 62 62
Magelis IPC, compatible PC With TSX FPP 20 (address 63) – 1 1 1
Inductel, read/write stations XGK-S130421, XGP-S1304202 With 1808 52 52 62
VW3-A58301 card
Advantys STB STB NFP 2212 832, 896, or 1280 62 113, 106 or 73 126
(2)
Momentum 170 ADI ppp/ADO ppp, 832, 896 or 1280 62 98 98
170 ADM 350 10/11, (2)
170 ARM 370 10/390 10/30,
170 ADM 690 51,
170 ARN 120 90,
170 ARM 370 30/390 10
5 170 AAI 030 00/520 40,
170 AAO 120 00/921 00,
1808 52 52 98
170 AEC 920 00,

170 AMM 090 00
170 AAI 140 00 2304 40 40 92
TBX (3) TBX AES 200/ASS 400(4) 1332 62 70 126
272 59 59 126
(2/4 chan.
extens.)
TBX AMS 620 1584 59 59 126
272
(2 chan. extens.) 50 50 100 (4)
(4 chan. extens.) 50 50 84 (4)
528 44 44 63 (4)
(8 chan.extens.)
TBX CEP 1622/CSP 1622/1625 1152 31 31 31
TBX DES 16pp/DMS16pp/DSS16pp 1152 62 81 126
144 (extension) 62 64 (5) 64 (5)
5.4 TBX DSS 1235 1152 144 (extension) 62 72 85 (5)
TBX DMS 1025 1152 144 (extension) 62 72 102 (5)
TBX EEP/ESP 08C22/1622 (IP 65) 1152 62 64 126
TBX SAP 10 1808 52 52 117
I/O IP 67 TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2 832 62 98 98
TSX ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 1808 52 52 98
Micro/Premium Agent With TSX FPP 10 card 1424 62 62 62
FipConnect profile FRD C2 832 62 113 126
FRD C2P 1744 54 54 122
FSD C8 896 62 105 126
FSD C8P 1808 52 52 117
FSD M8 1040 62 90 126
FSD M8P 1952 48 48 109
FED C32 1280 62 73 126
FED C32P 2304 40 40 92
FED M32 1424 62 66 126
FED M32P 2448 38 38 87
Not applicable
(1) Address 63 is reserved for the programming and diagnostic terminal.
(2) Depending on the I/O number of island.
(3) Do not mix discrete and analogue base units on the same Fipio connection point.
(4) The number of analogue channels for TBX base units (AES, ASS or AMS) is limited to 1008.
(5) The number of channels for TBX base units (DES, DMS or DSS) is limited to 2048.
5/70
Application services, Modicon Premium automation
Application services
When using the bus manager function, the application services supported by the
Premium PLCs are:
b Remote l/O
Remote l/O modules are addressed by the PL7 application program as “In rack” l/O,
with which they can of course coexist. This service enables the exchange of l/O
status variables and output command variables. These exchanges are carried out in
a cyclical and deterministic manner and without intervention from the application
program.
TSX P57 153M The manager also manages remote devices (configuration) in an aperiodic manner,
without intervention from the application program.
b Uni-TE service
X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for MMI, diagnostics and control
functions (requests of 128 bytes maximum).
b Application-to-application service
This service consists of sending tables between 2 devices under the control of their
respective application programs (requests of 128 bytes maximum).
b Terminal transparency
Terminals connected on a higher level X-way network or on the manager PLC
terminal port communicate with the devices on the bus. This is also the case when
the terminal is connected at the priority address 63.
TSX P57 253/353/453M Processors and coprocessor

Type and With software Reference (4) Weight
max. no. of racks kg
TSX P57 15pM Unity Pro Voir page 1/12 –
4 racks PL7 Junior/Pro Voir page 1/31 –
TSX P57 2823M PL7 Junior/Pro Voir page 1/31 –
16 racks
5
16 racks
TSX P57 4823M PL7 Junior/Pro Voir page 1/31 –
TSX P57 454/554M 16 racks
TSX P57 554M Unity Pro Voir page 1/13 –
16 racks
Accessories and connecting cables (1)

Description Use Material Reference Weight
kg
Female connectors Processors Polycarbonate black TSX FP ACC 12 0.040
(9-way SUB-D) and (IP 20)
slot-PLCs Zamac TSX FP ACC 2 0.080
with Fipio
T PCX 57 353M integrated
link
5.4
(1) For other accessories and Fipio bus connecting cables, see pages 5/82 and 5/85.
TSX FP ACC 12
Presentation: Description:
page 5/68 page 5/69
5/71
platform 5
Fipio bus Agent function
Presentation
Premium
(bus manager)
Lexium
Momentum TSX Micro (Agent)

CCX 17
Fipio bus
ATV 58
Intelligent XAL keyboard

sensors
Premium (Agent)
Bus AS-Interface
Motor starter
TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) or Premium PLCs, fitted with a TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card
on their integrated communication channel, are agents on the Fipio bus. The bus
manager is a TSX P 57 15p/25p/2823/35p/45p/4823/554M, Atrium slot-PLC
5 T PCX 57 353/TSX PCI 354M.
The Fipio bus enables I/O to be remotely located close to the devices to be controlled
(Momentum, Altivar, etc). The Agent function enables offline processing, by locating
a TSX Micro PLC close to the machine.
In addition to the standard Fipio services (see pages 5/66 to 5/67), TSX Micro
(TSX 37 21/22) and Premium PLCs allow exchanges of input and output variables
with the bus manager PLC. These exchanges are performed cyclically, automatically
and without the involvement of the application program at the same rate as the task for
which the agent PLC has been configured.
For characteristics, Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see
pages 5/82 to 5/85.
Application services
5.4 The application services supported by TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium
Agent function PLCs are:
b Uni-TE service, X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator
dialogue, diagnostics and control functions (requests of up to 128 bytes).
b Application-to-application communication service, which consists of the

transmission of tables between 2 devices controlled by their respective application
programs (messages of up to 128 bytes).
b New periodic data exchange service for exchanging a 64 word table between the
bus manager PLC and the Premium Agent PLC. Sofware setup see page 5/74.
Characteristics: References: Description:

5/72
platform 5
Characteristics
The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control

system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard.
Type of bus/network Fipio bus

Structure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard
Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections
Maximum length m 15 000
Access method Producer/consummer principal

Management by fixed arbitrator
Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46 604
Data rate Mbit/s 1
Medium 150 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62.5/125 ou 50/125 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters
Configuration Number of Per segment 32 connexion points per segment

devices
5
Maxi 128 on all segments
Segments Number Unlimited
Length m 1 000 maxi per electric segment

3 000 maxi per optical segment
Services Input/output exchanges Periodic and deterministic exchanges of variables between bus manager PLC and Agent PLC
(64 %MWi consecutive words: 32 %MWi for transmmission and 32 %MWi for reception)
Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all
devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server 5.4
device system functions)
Application-to-application Point-to-point messages: 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all
TSX Micro(1)/Premium/TSX Serie 7
Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming
to standard NF C 46 603
(1) TSX 37 21/22 only.
Presentation: References: Description:

5/73
Software setup, Modicon Premium automation
Software setup
Each TSX Micro/Premium PLC Fipio Agent uses 64 %MWi consecutive internal
words to exchange periodic data. The first 32 words are reserved for sending data to
the manager, and the remaining 32 are reserved for receiving data from the manager.
Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro application-specific screens allow the

configuration of the Fipio Agent PCMCIA card. This consists of:
b Indicating the connection point number (1 to 127).
b Indicating the address at the beginning of the 64 %MW word table reserved for
sending data to and receiving data from the manager.
Description
TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22)/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a type III
PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with a TSX FPP 10 Fipio bus
connection card.
3
The TSX FPP 10 card comprises:
1 A protective cover.
2 A removable cover with fixing screws giving access to the 20 way miniature
connector.
5 3 Two indicator lamps:

v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault,
1 2 4 v COM lamp: transmission or reception of data.

4 TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connecting the TSX FP ACC 4 tap junction
(on 9-way SUB-D connector).
5.4
Presentation: Characteristics: Description:

5/74
platform
References
Fipio bus connection component
Description Composition Use Reference Weight
kg
Fipio Agent 1 type III PCMCIA On TSX Micro TSX FPP 10 0.110
function card Version V1.8 processors
(TSX 37 21/22),
Premium
processors and
TSX FPP 10 Atrium
slot-PLCs
Fipio bus connection accessories (1)
kg
Insulated bus Trunk cable tap link, supports TSX FP ACC 3 0.090
cable 2 x 9-way female SUB-D connectors
TSX FP ACC 3 connector (for TSX FP CG 010/030 PCMCIA card
(in black cable), for connection of TBX dust
polycarbonate, and damp proof module c 24 V supply
IP 20)
Dust and damp Trunk cable tap link TSX FP ACC 4 0.660
proof bus
cable
connector
TSX FP ACC 4 Fipio bus connection cables (1)

From To kg
Cables for TSX FPP 10 TSX FP ACC 4 1 m TSX FP CG 010 0.210
PCMCIA card card (miniature cable connector
connector) (9-way SUB-D
connector) 5
3m TSX FP CG 030 0.410
(1) For other Fipio bus accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/84 and 5/85.
TSX FP CG 010/030
5.4

5/75
platform 5
Fipway network
Presentation
Magelis iPC
Ethernet TCP/IP
Premium
Fipway
TSX
TSX 17 20
TSX Micro
Premium Bus X
The Fipway network is an open local area network for communication between the
various TSX Micro, Premium and TSX Series 7 PLCs using the X-Way services.
Communication conforms to the FIP standard with access via a bus arbitrator.
5 TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium PLCs can be connected to a Fipway
network using a Fipway PCMCIA card which is inserted in each processor or into the
TSX SCY 21601 (Premium) communication module. Supported X-Way services
(see pages 5/66 to 5/67) are:
b Uni-TE services.
b Distributed database (COM) or Shared Table.
b Telegram (service only available when the PCMCIA card is inserted in the
processor).
b Application-to-application communication.
For characteristics, Fipway network wiring and connection accessories, see pages
5/82 to 5/85.
5.4
Characteristics: References: Performances:

5/76
platform 5
Fipway network
Characteristics
The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control

system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard.
Type of bus/network Fipway network

Structure Type Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard
Topology Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections
Maximum length m 5 000
Access method Producer/consummer principal

Management by fixed arbitrator
Transmission Mode Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46 604
Data rate Mbit/s 1
Medium 150 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62.5/125 ou 50/125 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters
Configuration Number of Per segment 32 stations

devices
Maxi 64 stations
Segments Number Unlimited

5
Length m 1 000 maximum per electrical segment
3 000 maximum per optical segment
Services COM (1) Distributed database: 128 mots maximum

0 or 4 % NWi words for TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to 31
Shared table(1) Shared table of internal words: 128 words maximum

1 to 32 % MWi words per TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to 3 (2)
Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all
devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server
device system functions)
Application-to-application Point-to-point messages: 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all
TSX Micro (1)/Premium/TSX Serie 7
Telegram Point-to-point priority messages: 16 bytes maximum between 2 Premium (3) or TSX Series 7
stations with addresses 0 to 15
5.4
Security Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming
to standard NF C 46 603
(1) The COM and Shared table service are mutualy exclusive.
(2) Service reserved for TSX Micro and Premium PLCs.
(3) Service only available when Fipway PCMCIA card is installed in the processor.
Presentation: References: Performances:

5/77
Performances, Modicon Premium automation
Fipway network
Performances
The operating principle of a Fipway network gives ensured, constant network cycle
times whatever the traffic and number of stations (2 to 64). This enables the Fipway
network to be updated (addition or removal of stations) without changing
the performance.
Maximum transmission time

b Telegram (TLG): priority application messages are transmitted in less than 10 ms
(one telegram per station).
b Common words (COM): the database of common words is updated every 40 ms.
b Shared Table: the exchange table is updated every 40 ms.
Uni-TE message handling system: Uni-TE or standard application-to-application
messages are normally transmitted in less than 80 ms (40 ms for stations with
addresses below 32). Where there is a large amount of traffic, some messages can
wait for several cycles before being transmitted. The network characteristics enable
a maximum of 210 messages of 128 bytes per second to be transmitted.
Event Report
The performance can be improved by inhibiting the Telegram service in the network.
Device 1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1 With such network characteristics, the response time at application level depends
almost exclusively on the processing capacity of the devices which are connected.
For example, the remote loading of a 50 K word program takes less than two minutes
Fipway network NCT NCT
on a network with normal load.
CT1 = Cycle time of device 1.
Device 2 CT2 CT2 NCT = Cycle time of Fipway network.
CT2 = Cycle time of device 2.
Action
The response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application in relation
to the devices connected.
The processing time of a device can vary from one to two cycle times as a function
5 of asynchronous operation.
Connectable devices
TSX 7 PLCs Magelis iPC industrial PC Magelis operator dialogue

terminals
Connection via Fipio/Fipway Equipped with Connection via the

integrated link or via the TSX FPC 10M for PC TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card.
TSX FPM 100 module of compatible (ISA bus).
5.4 TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs.
Connection via the
They access all devices in
the X-Way architecture. The
TSX FPG 10 module of various X-Way drivers are
TSX 17 20 TSX Micro available on CD-ROM.
PLCs.

5/78
Fipway network
Description
TSX Micro/Premium PLCs have a slot on the processor for a type III PCMCIA
communication card. This can be fitted with the TSX FPP 20 fipway network
connection card, which is also inserted into the TSX SCY 21601 communication
3 module slot.
The TSX FPP 20 card comprises:
1 Protective cover
4
2 Removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector
3 Two indicator lamps:
2 v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault,
1 v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.
TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connection to the TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4
T-junction box (on 9-way SUB-D connector).
References
Description Number per Use Compo- Reference Weight
Premium sition kg
PLC
Fipway card 1 with 37 20 Type lll slot on, 1 type lll TSX FPP 20 0.110
TSX FPP 20 1 with 57 10 - TSX Micro PCMCIA
1 with 57 20 - Premium PLC card
3 with 57 30 - Atrium slot-PLC
4 with 57 40 - TSX SCY 21601
module
Communication See page For Premium PLC or 2 channels TSX SCY 21601 0.360
module 5/103 Atrium slot-PLC
- 1 isolated 2 wire
RS 485 integrated
channel
(Half-duplex) 5
- 1 slot for type lll
PCMCIA card
TSX SCY 21601
Set of X-Way Includes all X-Way drivers 1 CD-Rom TLX CD DRV 20 M –

drivers for PC
compatible
Connection cables and accessories (1)

From To kg
Cables for TSX FPP 20 TSX FP ACC 3/4 1m TSX FP CG 010 0.210
PCMCIA card box (SUB-D 9-way
(miniature connector)
connector)
3m TSX FP CG 030 0.410 5.4

TSX FP CG 010/030
(1) For other Fipway network accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/84 and 5/85.
Presentation: Characteristics: Performances:

5/79
platform 5
Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver
Presentation
The OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers are particularly adapted for use with applications
which are subject to harsh electrical environments or which are distributed over large
areas:
b Public buildings.
b Large-scale industrial sites.
b Water treatment and distribution.
b Transport and highway tunnel infrastructures, etc.
The OZD FIP G3 optic transceiver enables conversion of a FIP electric interface to
2 FIP optic interfaces and vice versa. As a result, it allows redundant ring topologies
to exist; these improve installation availability even when a line is broken at a point
in the medium.
In these situations, the length of the bus or the Fipio/Fipway ring can reach 20 Km,
with a maximum of 32 Fipio or 20 Fipway transceivers. See characteristics on
page 5/81. These characteristics may be increased using mixed topologies such as
2 serial optic rings or 2 serial optic buses; please consult our regional office.
Wiring system
Premium
CCX 17
3 3
4 6 4 6
2
5 1
2
1
6 6 Optic ring
1 1 1
6 6 6
2 4 2 4
2
6 6 5 6
3 5
5.4 Third party

Momentum
TSX Micro or
Premium + TSX FPP 10
Magelis iPC + TSX FPC 10M
1 OZD FIF GG3: Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver.

2 TSX FP CAp00: 150 Ω shielded twisted pair trunk cable (diameter 8 mm) for use
in standard environments and inside buildings.
3 TSX FP CG 0p0: tap-off connection cable for TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA module
card for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs.
4 TSX FP ACC 3/4: T-junction box. It also has two 9-way female SUB-D connectors
for connecting any device which connects to the bus by a PCMCIA card.
5 TSX FP ACC 2/12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection
using daisy chaining or tap link connection.
6 TSX FP ACC 7: line terminator to be placed at each segment end.
TSX LES 65: terminal block for TSX Series 7 PLC, which performs the address
coding.
page 5/81 page 5/81
5/80
references Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver
Performances
Fipio bus operating mode and performance on fiber optics

After configuration in Fipio mode, the processor scans the various application
devices according to the software configuration:
b Image variables of the input values and of the output command values of a
configured device are scanned as quickly as possible on the bus, whilst respecting
the existing relationships between periods of different tasks which use these devices.
b Appearance or disappearance of a configured device is detected on the bus within
a maximum time of 200 ms.
b Exchanges occur at the rate defined by the programmer, from 10 to 20 Uni-TE
messages per second.
The network cycle time is double that of the electrical bus when OZD FIP G3
transceivers are used.
Fipway bus operating mode and performance on fiber optics

The operating principle is identical to that on an electrical network, in that the number
of stations is limited to 32 and the transmission time is as follows:
b For the Common words and Shared Table services, updating of the entire
database is carried out every 40 ms maximum.
For Uni-TE message handling, the network characteristics are used to transmit a
maximum of 230 messages of 128 bytes per second.
Characteristics (with OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers) (1)

Type of bus/network Fipio bus Fipway network
Structure Type Open industrial support conforming to Fip standard
Topology In redundant rings or in a line with simple redundant links
Access method Producer/consumer principle Producer/consumer principle
Management by a fixed arbitrator Management by an automatically elected
arbitrator
Transmission Mode
Data rate
Multimode (860 nanometres)
1 Mbit/s
5
Medium (2) Fiber optic 50/125 - 17 dBm or 62.5/125 - 15 dBm
Inter-repeater distance 2,500 m for 50/125 and 2,800 m for 62.5/125
Configuration No. of connection points 32 optic transceivers 20 optic transceivers
Maximum no. of devices 16 Fipio devices can be connected to the same 16 stations can be connected to the same fiber
fiber optic transceiver optic transceiver but the maximum number of
stations is 32
No. of segments The loop (or fiber optic line) is similar to a non cascadable segment
Length Maximum circumference of the ring (or length of the line): 20 km
Maximum optic distance 1,500 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 32 optic transceivers
between 2 OZD FIP G3 2,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: < 32 optic transceivers
transceivers 3,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 2 optic transceivers
Tap links From the OZD FIP G3 fiber optic transceiver, the maximum length of the electrical tap link is 100 m
Services Same as page 5/66 except for the Telegram service, which is not available with OZD FIP G3
fiber optic transceiver.
References
Description Max. number of Connectable devices Fipway Reference Weight 5.4
transceivers Fipio bus network kg
Optic transceiver 32 with Fipio - TSX Micro/Premium/Atrium TSX Micro, OZD FIP G3 0.500
Fipio/Fipway (3) 20 with Fipway - TBX remote I/Os with Premium,
TBX LEP 30 Atrium (with
- Remote Momentum I/O TSX FPP 20
- CCX 17 panels (version 2.4) PCMCIA card)
- Magelis iPC industrial PCs
- Lexium drives, etc.
TSX Micro/Premium PLC connection components (4)

Description Use Composition Reference Weight
kg
Fipway card TSX 37 21/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, 1 type III TSX FPP OZD 200 0.110
OZD FIP G3
Atrium slot-PLC PCMCIA card
Fipio card agent function TSX 37 21/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, 1 type III TSX FPP 10 0.110
Atrium slot-PLC PCMCIA card
(1) These characteristics can be increased using mixed topologies; please consult our regional
office.
(2) Devices connected on electrical tap links are compatible with the WorldFip physical layer.
TSX FPP 20/10 (3) For TSX FP ACC 8M fiber optic electrical repeater, see page 5/84.
(4) For accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/84 and 5/85.
Presentation:
page 5/80
5/81
platform 5
Fipio bus and Fipway network
Fipio bus and Fipway network wiring system

TSX Micro Agent TSX 17 20 TSX 17 20
Premium Agent
Magelis XBT F Magelis iPC Premium bus manager TSX SAP 10 Premium (bus manager) TSX SAP 10
Compatible PC Momentum TBX (IP 20) Momentum TBX (IP 20)
Lexium, ATV 38/58/68 Lexium, ATV 38/58/68
CCX 17 FipConnect third-party FipConnect third product
FipConnect third-party products
products
4 4 9 10 9 10
or or
Daisy chaining
5 5
3 3
7
Daisy or
7 8 chaining 6 8 6
24 V 1
15
14 1 or 2
14 1 or 2 1 or 2 13 13 1 3 24 V 14
Daisy
Fiber optic link
chaining 14 12
4
24 V 14
11 11
1 or 2
TSX Serie 7 model 40 TSX Series 7 TSX Series 7 Proof I/O IP 65 or

with PCMCIA model 40 model 40 IP 67 (1)
Integrated link Integrated link
F Connection to Fipway network and Fipio bus Connection to Fipway bus Connection to Fipio bus
(1) Dust and damp proof I/O modules on Fipio bus for IP 65 modules: TBX EEP/ESP modules and connections, see pages 3/54 to 3/58, IP 67 modules:
TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules and connections, see pages 3/60 to 3/69.
Connectable devices
5 Devices to be connected on Fipio Boxes Connectors
TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TBX FP TSX EF TSX FP TSX FP TBX TBX TBX
ACC4 8 ACC14 6 ACC3 7 ACC10 ACC99 ACC 2 9 ACC12 9 BLP01 10 BLP10 BAS10
Premium Fipio Agent D D
Premium bus manager D D C/D C/D
TSX Micro Fipio Agent D D
Lexium D D C/D C/D
ATV 58E D D C/D
ATV 58H/P/F, ATV 68/68F D D C/D
CCX 17 D D
Industrial Magelis iPC PCs D D
XBT F Magelis terminals D D
PC compatible D D
Momentum D D C/D C/D
TBX IP 20 D D C/D
TBX IP 65 with telealimentation C/D (2) C/D C/D (3)
5.4 TBX IP 65 without telealimentation D (1) D D (3)
IP 67 I/O C/D
TBX SAP 10 AS-i gateway D D C/D
Devices to be connected on Fipway Boxes Connectors
TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TBX FP TSX EF TSX FP TSX FP TBX TBX TBX
ACC4 8 ACC14 6 ACC3 7 ACC10 ACC99 ACC2 9 ACC12 9 BLP01 BLP10 BAS10
Premium D D
TSX Micro D D
TSX Series 7 model 40 (integrated link) D D C/D
TSX Series 7 model 40 (PCMCIA) D D
TSX 17 20 D D C/D C/D
XBT F Magelis terminals D D
Magelis iPC industrial PC D D
PC compatible D D
LUF P1 Modbus gateway D D C/D C/D
recommended connection C: connection by daisy chaining

possible connection D: connection by tap link
(1) Possible if only one TBX IP 65 module is used.
(2) The connection by daisy chaining with the TBX FP ACC 10 connection box is only possible with the first TBX module on Fipio bus.
(3) The TBX BAS connector is only used for TBX IP 65 output modules.
5/82
platform 5
Cables
1 TSX FP CAp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (8 mm diameter) for
normal environments and use inside buildings.
2 TSX FP CFp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω and 1 x 1.5 mm2 pair for
remote supply (9.5 mm diameter) for harsh environments and use outside
buildings.
3 TSX FP CCp00: tap link cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω ( 8 mm diameter) for
normal environments and use inside buildings.
4 TSX FP CG0p0: tap link connecting cable for PCMCIA TSX FPP 10/20
communication card for TSX Micro/Premium/TSX Series 7 PLCs, FT 2100
terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way
SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC3/ACC4 junction box.
5 TSX FP CE030: tap link connecting cable for TSX FPC 10 or FCP FPC 10 PC
communication card (ISA bus) for Magelis iPC and PC compatibles. Connection
to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4
junction box.
Connection boxes
6 TSX FP ACC14: Polycarbonate IP 20 junction box: provides tap link from the trunk
cable to connect 1 device via TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable or several devices in
a daisy chain.
7 TSX FP ACC3: IP 20 box for connecting 2 PC or PCMCIA cards (TSX FPP 10,
TSX FPC 10, TSX FPP 20/200, FCP FPP 10) on a 9-way SUB-D connector.
8 TSX FP ACC4: IP 65 junction box. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector
for any device which is connected to the bus via a PCMCIA card (in this case, the
box is IP 20).
5
TSX EF ACC99: IP 65 junction box for IP 67 I/O modules, see page 3/67.
Connectors
9 TSX FP ACC2 and TSX FP ACC12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for
Fipway/Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC 2 connector for TSX 17 20 micro-PLC for
example). Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90° output high or low, 45°
output high or low).
10 TBX BLP01: connector for TBX I/O modules (IP 20).
11 TSX LES65: connecting cable for TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs. Used for address
coding.
12 TSX FP ACC6: electrical repeater: used to increase the number of stations

(max 64) and the length of the network by creating an additional segment of up to
1000 m (a maximum of 4 repeaters in cascade giving a network length of 5000 m). 5.4
TSX EF Cppp: dust and damp proof connectors for IP 67 I/O modules,
see page 3/69.
Other elements
13 TSX FP ACC8M: fibre optic/electrical repeater: used to connect electrical
segments via a fibre optic link (particularly suitable for zones with a high level of
interference) or to connect a fibre optic device.
14 TSX FP ACC7: Line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment.
15 TSX FP JF020: fibre optic jumper (length 2 m). For fibre optic connection of the
TSX FP ACC 8M repeater to a patch panel. The maximum length of the fibre optic
cable (62.5/125) between 2 repeaters is 3000 m.
TSX EF ACC7: line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment
requiring IP 67 protection, see page 3/69.
TSX FP ACC9: network wiring test tool. This is used for testing the continuity of
segments, the connections of the various devices and the installation of line
terminators.
5/83
platform 5
Fipway network/Fipio bus connection accessories (1)

Description Use Rep. Reference Weight
kg
Female connector for Connection by daisy chaining 9 TSX FP ACC2 0.080
TSX FPG10p module Zamac material
(TSX 17 micro-PLCs)
TSX FP ACC 12
Female isolating Connection by daisy chaining 10 TSX FP ACC12 0.040
connector for devices with or tap link black polycarbonate material IP 20
9-way SUB-D connectors
Insulated bus connection Trunk cable tap link (for connecting the c 24 V 6 TSX FP ACC14 0.120
box power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules)
(black polycarbonate, IP 20)
TSX FP ACC14
Trunk cable tap link supports 7 TSX FP ACC3 0.090
2 x 9-way SUB-D female connectors (for PCMCIA
card cable TSX FP CG 010/030)
For connecting c 24 V power supply of TBX dust
and damp proof modules
Dust and damp proof bus Trunk cable tap link, supports 8 TSX FP ACC4 0.660
connection box 1 x 9-way female SUB-D connector (for PCMCIA
(Zamac material, IP 65) card cable TSX FP CG 010/030)
Trunk cable tap link via 2 M23 connectors Remote TSX EF ACC99 0.715
c 24 V power distribution via 7/8” connector PC
TSX FP ACC3
compatible terminal connection via 9-way female
SUB-D connector
5 Line terminators
(sold in lots of 2)
2 impedance adaptors 14 TSX EF ACC7 0.020
Electrical repeater Increases the length of the network or bus by 12 TSX FP ACC6 0.520
TSX FP ACC4 (IP 65) allowing the connection of 2 segments of up to 1000
m each
Electrical/fibre optic Used to connect (via patch panel) an electrical 13 TSX FP ACC8M 0.620
repeater segment (1000 m max.) and a fibre optic segment
(IP 65) (3000 m max.)
FIP wiring test tool Used to test each cable segment of the network TSX FP ACC9 0.050
TSX EF ACC99
5.4
Fipio/Fipway communication cards
PCMCIA cards Type III cards See pages 5/75 and 5/79
ISA bus PC card Fipio/Fipway connection card for PC compatible TSX FPC10M 0.140
Card with short format on ISA bus
Windows 95/98 and Windows NT4 compatible
(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories
being used.
5/84
References (continued), Modicon Premium automation
Dimensions platform 5
Fipway network/Fipio bus connecting cables (1)

Description Type Conditions of use Rep. Length Reference Weight
kg
Trunk cables 8 mm In normal environment 1 100 m TSX FP CA100 5.680
1 shielded twisted (2) 200 m TSX FP CA200 10.920
pair 150 Ω and inside building
500 m TSX FP CA500 30.000
9.5 mm, 1 shielded In harsh environment (3) 100 m TSX FP CR100 7.680
twisted pair 150 Ω outside building or in 200 m TSX FP CR200 14.920
garland (4)
500 m TSX FP CR500 30.000
9.5 mm, 1 shielded I/O IP 67, – 100 m TSX FP CP100 7.680

twisted pair 150 Ω In normal environment 500 m TSX FP CP500 30.000
and 1 x 1.5 mm2 pair (2) and inside building
for remote supply
Tap link cables 8 mm, 2 shielded In normal environment 3 100 m TSX FP CC100 5.680
twisted pairs 150 Ω (2) and inside building 200 m TSX FP CC200 10.920
500 m TSX FP CC500 30.000
Cable for PCs card 2 shielded twisted From TSX FPC10M card 5 3m TSX FP CE030 0.410
pairs to TSX FP ACC3/4 box
Fibre optic jumper Double fibre optic For electrical/fibre optic 15 2m TSX FP JF020 0.550
62.5/125 repeater
(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus/Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories
being used.
(2) Normal environment:
v without special environmental restrictions,
v operating temperature between + 5 °C and + 60 °C,
v fixed installations.
(3) Harsh environment:
v resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder chips,
v up to 100% humidity,
v saline environment,
v extreme variations in temperature,
5
v operating temperature between - 10 °C and + 70 °C,
v mobile installations.
(4) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472, part 603/H:
v for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 75 mm,
v for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration,
speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further information.
v not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications.
Dimensions
TSX FP ACC4 TSX FP ACC6 TSX FP ACC8M TSX FP ACC14
175 27 220 116

80 20
= 160 = = 205 = 104
= 50 =
20
20
=
=
=
5.4
68
50
79
50
83
65
80
RUN DEF ø ¡
RUN DEF ø ¡
=
=
20
25
20
25
20
=
5/85
Wiring system Modicon Premium automation
platform 5
Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by

10BASE5 interface (AUI)
Wiring system
TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules can take an AUI connector which enables direct
connection to an Ethernet 10BASE5 segment with the accessories and cables
described below.
Connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI)
7 5 1 5 6 5 5 4 5
TSX ETY 110/110WS
7 5 1 5 4 5 5 5
TSX ETY 410/5101
5 3
TSX ETY 110/110WS
1 TSX ETH CA pp0 trunk cable, triaxial cable (50 Ω coaxial with shielding) 1 male
N type connector to be fitted to each end.
TSX ETH CD 025 trunk cable, triaxial cable equipped with N type connectors,
length 2.5 m. Corresponds to minimum length between 2 TSX ETH ACC 2
transceivers.
2 TSX ETY CB 0pp drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface
(a straight connector and an elbow connector).
3 TSX ETY CC 0pp drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface
(two straight connectors).
5.4 4 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceiver, AUI interface. Enables a device to be connected to
the Ethway network (obligatory when connecting two modules in point-to-point).
5 TSX ETH ACC 3 male N type connector for trunk cable.
6 TSX ETH ACC 4 female/female adaptor for extension of trunk cable.
7 TSX ETH ACC 5 (50 Ω) line terminator (includes an isolated terminator and a non
isolated terminator which must be connected to the installation grounding network.
One assembly per segment is required).
Wiring system:
page 5/86
5/86
platform 5
Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by

10BASE5 interface (AUI)
AUI interface accessories for connecting to the Ethernet

network
Description Use No Order in Unit reference Weight
(1) multiples kg
of
Ethernet transceiver Access point to any 4 1 TSX ETH ACC 2 0.765
network
TSX ETH ACC 2
Mini transceiver Can be used to connect 1 TSX ETH NTR1 –

10BASE5 Ethernet
station on a 10BASE-T
network
Connector for trunk Must be fitted to both 5 10 TSX ETH ACC 3 0.050
cable ends of cable segment
on trunk cable
Female/female Extension of 2 cable 6 10 TSX ETH ACC 4 0.050

adaptor segments on trunk
cable
Line terminator kit Impedance adaptor 7 1 TSX ETH ACC 5 0.070
Ethernet network connecting cables

Description Connectors No Length Reference Weight
5
(1) kg
Trunk cables 2 type N 1 2.5 m TSX ETH CD 025 0.840
(radius curvature
min. 500mm) To be equipped with 2 1 23.4 m TSX ETH CA 020 1.650
TSX ETH ACC 3 male
N type connectors 117 m TSX ETH CA 100 5.600
210.6 m TSX ETH CA 200 8.300
Drop cables 15-way, SUB-D 2 5m TSX ETY CB 005 0.510

(radius curvature 1 straight, 1 elbow
min. 65mm) (module side) 10 m TSX ETY CB 010 0.980
20 m TSX ETY CB 020 1.820
15-way, SUB-D, 3 5m TSX ETH CC 005 0.510

2 straight (for FTX 517 5.4
or PC compatible 10 m TSX ETH CC 010 0.980
connection)
20 m TSX ETH CC 020 1.820
Description Use Reference Masse

(2) kg
Ethernet 10BASE5 Fitting TSX ETH ACC 3 on trunk cable TSX ETH ACC 10M 4.800
installation kit
(1) See page 5/86 for key.
(2) The letter M at the end of a reference indicates that the product is supplied with documentation
in English and in French.
References:
page 5/86
5/87
platform 5
Modbus Plus network
Presentation
Premium
3
Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway
Quantum
1 Lexium XBT-F
2 Momentum MHDA
Premium Momentum
3 5
Modbus Plus
Bridge
Premium TSX Micro Modbus Plus

Third-party device
ATV 58 Gateway
2
1 Modbus
Quantum
4
Modbus device
The Modbus Plus network is a high-performance industrial local network which can
respond to Client/Server type extended architectures,combining a high data rate
(1 Mbit/s), simple and economical transmission support and several message
5 handling services.
The main data exchange functions between all devices connected to the network
are:
b The message exchange function according to the Modbus protocol.
b The “global database” function (Shared Table service, periodic, controlled by the
application: a station with the token can send 32 words to a maximum of 63 other
stations connected on the network).
1 The Premium (or TSX Micro) client communicates with the Quantum server on the
Modbus Plus network via function block (communication function).
2 The Quantum client communicates with the Premium server on the Modbus Plus
network via MSTR function blocks.
3 A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway
network can communicate in read/write mode with a Modbus Plus station (the
Premium PLC therefore acts as a gateway).
5.5
4 A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Modbus Plus network can
access a remote station via the Modbus Plus/Modbus gateway.
5 A Premium client connected to the Modbus Plus network can make exchanges
with the Momentum distributed inputs/outputs via the Peer cop function.
5/88
Modbus Plus network
Description
The type III TSX MBP 100 card is used to connect the Premium/TSX Micro PLCs and
Atrium slot-PLCs to the Modbus Plus network. This card is installed in the slot reserved
for processors or slot-PLCs:
1 A host slot on processors or slot-PLCs.
1
3 A removable cover with fixing screw (access to 20-way miniature connector).

1 v ERR: card or link fault,
v COM: activity on the line.
Connectors to be ordered separately:

2 3 v TSX MBP CE 0pp drop cables.
Characteristics
Physical interface RS 485

5
Method of access Token bus
Transmission Mode Synchronous HDLC
Data rate 1 Mbit/s
Medium Twisted pair
Configuration Number of devices 32 per segment, 64 maximum on all segments (1,800 m maximum)
Number of addresses 64 devices maximum per segment
Length of bus 450 m maximum per segment, 1,800 m maximum with 3 repeaters
Number of segments Cascaded: 5 maximum using Modbus Plus BP85 bridges
Services Global database - 4096 byte common database

- cyclical exchange of 32 broadcast words
“Peer to peer” dialogue Read/write services (number of requests: 100 registers per transaction) 5.5
Peer Cop Cyclical exchange service (on Premium only): 500 words per station (broadcast or
point-to-point)
5/89
platform 5
Modbus Plus network
Wiring system
11 5 3 5 6 5
4
8 9
7 7 7
12
10
1 2
1 TSX MBP 100: Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, for type III processor slot on TSX Micro
or Premium platforms.
2 170 PNT 110 20: communication module for Momentum I/O base unit.
3 490 NAA 271 0p: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair with shielding drain (flying
leads). In lengths of 30, 150, 300, 450 or 1,500 m.
5 4 170 MCI 020/021 p p: drop cable equipped at each end with an RJ45 connector
(baseT interface). In lengths of 0.25, 0.75, 3 or 10 m.
5 990 NAD 230 00: IP 20 local site tap, provides a tap link from the trunk cable for
connecting 1 device (connection of conductors requires wiring tool 043 509 383).
Integrates the line terminal.
6 Local site taps provides a tap link from the trunk cable for 1 device (screw terminal
connection). It also has an RJ45 connector for connecting a programming and
maintenance terminals:
- 990 NAD 230 20/21: IP 20 plastic tap,
- 990 NAD 230 10: IP 65 zamac tap.
7 170 XTS 020 00: IP 20 tee, provides a tap link from the Modbus Plus cable (cable
with connectors at each end of an RJ45 connector). It has a 9-way SUB-D female
connector for connecting the device.
8 TSX MBP CE 030/060: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on
the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and with flying leads on the
990 NAD 230 00/010 local site tap side. In lengths of 3 or 6 m.
9 990 NAD 211 10/30: drop cable with a 9-way SUB-D male connector for
connecting the device and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 local site
tap side. In lengths of 2, 4 or 6 m.
10 TSX MBP CE 002: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the
PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and on the network side with a
5.5 9-way SUB-D female connector. Can be used as an extension for cable
990 NAD 211 10/30. In lengths of 0.2 m.
11 AS MBKT 185: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) to be placed at
each end of the segment. The AS MBKT 185 terminators are placed directly at the
end of the cable (without a tap or tee).
990 NAD 230 11: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for IP 65 local site
tap 990 NAD 230 10, to be placed at each end of the segment.
12 170 XTS 021 00: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for tee
170 XTS 020 00, to be placed at each end of the segment.
For wiring system:
b Quantum platform: please refer to our catalog.

b Lexium drive for brushless motors: please refer to our catalog “Lexium movement
command”.
b Altivar drive for asynchronous motors: please refer to our catalog “Progressive
starters and speed controllers”.
5/90
platform 5
Modbus Plus network
Reference
Description Number per PLC Use Addr. Composition Reference Weight
kg
Modbus Plus 1 with TSX Micro Type III slot on: 1 1 PCMCIA TSX MBP 100 0.110
PCMCIA card TSX 37 21/22 - TSX 37 21/22 PLC type III card
1 with - Premium processor
Premium/Atrium TSX 57 1p/2p/3p/4p/5p
TSX MBP 100 - Atrium slot-PLC
T PCX /TSX PCI 57 2p/3p
- Magelis XBT F terminals
Description Connection Addr. Reference Weight
(1) kg
Distributed I/O on Advantys STB network interface module – STB NMP 2212 0.145
Modbus Plus network Momentum communication module 2 170 PNT 110 20 0.110
170 PNT 110 20 Connection accessories (1)

Description Use Mounting Addr. Reference Weight
kg
Modbus Plus IP 20 tee, requires the wiring tool – 5 990 NAD 230 00 0.230
taps 043 509 283. Integrates the line terminal
IP 20 tap for tap link connection (screw DIN rail 6 990 NAD 230 20 –
terminal connection), supports 1 RJ45 Mounting plate 6 990 NAD 230 21 –
connector on front panel
IP 65 tap for tap link connection (tee), Mounting plate 6 990 NAD 230 10 0.650
supports 1 RJ45 connector on front
panel
IP 20 tee with 2 RJ45 connectors for 7 170 XTS 020 00 0.260
Modbus Plus cable and 1 9-way SUB-D
connector for tap link devices
Line For tap (IP 20) 990 NAD 230 20/21 11 990 NAD 230 22 –
terminators For tap (IP 65) 990 NAD 230 10 11 990 NAD 230 11 –
(sold in lot
For tee (IP 20) 170 XTS 020 00 12 170 XTS 021 00 –
of 2)
Used directly at the end of the cable 11 AS MBKT 185 –
(without a tap or tee) 5
Mounting kit DIN rail mounting for 990 NAD 230 10 – 990 NAD 230 12 –
for IP 65 tee local site tap
Protector Replacement port protectors to prevent Sold in lot of 4 990 NAD 230 23 –
pack ingress into the RJ45 quick connect
programming port of 990 NAD 230 10
tap
Wiring tool Mounting trunk and tap wires in the local – 043 509 383 –
site tap.
Connection cables (1)

Description Use Addr. Length Reference Weight
From To kg
Modbus Plus Local site tap Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 3 30 m 490 NAA 271 01 –
trunk cables 150 m 490 NAA 271 02 –
300 m 490 NAA 271 03 –
450 m 490 NAA 271 04 –
1,500 m 490 NAA 271 06 –
Drop cables IP 20 IP 20 170 XTS 020 00 tee 4 0.25 m 170 MCI 020 10 –
5.5
170 XTS 020 00 1m 170 MCI 020 36 –
tee
3m 170 MCI 021 20 –
10 m 170 MCI 020 80 –
PCMCIA card Drop cable with 9 way male SUB-D 10 0.2 m TSX MBP CE 002 –
TSX MBP 100 connector
(miniature Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 8 3m TSX MBP CE 030 0.340
connector)
6m TSX MBP CE 060 0.530
TSX MBP CE 030/060 Communication Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 9 2.4 m 990 NAD 211 10 0.530
module for 6m 990 NAD 211 30 0.530
Momentum I/O
base units
(1) For other Modbus Plus network connecting cables and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
5/91
connectable devices Profibus DP bus
Presentation
PLC with Unity Pro/PL7 and DP software
X-Way
Premium
Repeaters
(3 maxi)
With Unity Pro/PL7 and DP software Third party device Third party device Momentum
ATV
The Profibus DP bus is a high-speed fieldbus which conforms to industrial

communication requirements.
The Profibus DP is a linear bus with a centralised access procedure of the
master/slave type. Only master stations, also known as active stations, have access
rights to the bus. The slave or passive stations can only respond to prompts.
5 Dialogue between masters is also possible from some stations by means of a token
bus protocol. The physical connection is a single shielded twisted pair, but fibre optic
interfaces are available to create tree, star, or ring structures. Compared to the ISO
model, only layers 1, 2 are implemented, since access from the user interface is made
directly to the link layer via simple mapping of variables.
Configuration
The Profibus DP bus is configured usind dedicating SyCon software, which should
be ordered separatly, reference SYC SPU LFp CD28M.
This sofware is used to generate the file including the informations relating to the
devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the
Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software.
Description
Premium PLCs and Atrium slot-PLCs are connected to the Profibus DP bus by a
TSX PBY 100 module. This module can be installed in any slot in the Premium PLC
rack. It comprises:
5.5 1 Host module for the PCMCIA card.
2 Profibus DP PCMCIA card with its integral connecting cable, 0.6 m long.
3 T-junction box enabling the tap link of the main bus 490 NAE 911 00.
Connectable devices
The TSX PBY 110 module performs the role of the master on the Profibus DP bus.
The Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are:
1 2 3 b TeSys model U starter-controllers, via Modbus gateway.
b Advantys STB and Momentum distributed I/O.
b Advantys FTB/FTM, IP 67 monobloc and modular I/O spliter boxes.
b Altivar 31/58/58F/68, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors.
b Twin Line TLC and Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors.
b Altistart ATS 48 soft starters.
b …
And any third-party device which conforms to the Profibus DP standard profile.
5/92
Profibus DP bus
Characteristics of the bus supported by the module

Type of bus Profibus DP
Physical interface RS 485
Method of access Master
Transmission Mode NRZ
Medium Shielded twisted pair, fibre optic, infra-red
Physical configuration Data rate v to 9.6 K bit/s with the length of 1200 m (4800 m with 3 repeaters)
v from 12 M bit/s with the length of 100 m (400 m with 3 repeaters)
Number of slaves 126
Number of inputs/outputs 3872 inputs/3872 outputs (242 %IW words, 242 %QW words)
Services (VO) Subset of Class 1 master Read/write DP slave I/O data

function Transfer slave diagnostic data
Set slave parameters (on power-up)
Check slave configurations (on power-up)
Subset of Class 2 master Manage monitoring requests: Global_CONTROL et Get_Master_Diag
function master/master dialogue is not supported
References
Description Communication Services Reference Weight
profile kg
+ Profibus DP module Master/slave Class 1 and Class 2 TSX PBY 100 0.870
kit for Premium PLC 12 Mbit/s V0 master
+ and Atrium slot-PLC functions, see
characteristics
Profibus FMS
message handling
5
not supported
SyCon V2.8 – Generates an See page 5/55 –
configuration ASCII configuration
software file for the module
to be imported into
the Unity Pro or
+ PL7 application
Description Type of license Reference Weight
TSX PBY 100 kg
SyCon V2.8 Single (1 station) SYC SPU LFU CD28M –
configuration Group (3 stations) SYC SPU LFG CD28M –
software licenses
Team (10 stations) SYC SPU LFT CD28M –
Site (up to 10 stations) SYC SPU LFF CD28M –
SyCon V2.8 Single (1 station) SYC SPU LRU CD28M –
configuration
software update
490 NAD 911 03 SyCon V2.8 Group (3 stations) SYC SPU LUG CD28M –
configuration Team (10 stations) SYC SPU LUT CD28M –
software update for
Site (up to 10 stations) SYC SPU LUF CD28M –
previous version
Elements for connection to Profibus DP bus
5.5
kg
Distributed I/O on Advantys STB network interface module STB NDP 2112 0.140
Profibus DP Momentum communication module 170 DTN 110 00 –
Connectors for Line terminator 490 NAD 911 03 –
communication Intermediate connection 490 NAD 911 04 –
module
Intermediate connection and terminal 490 NAD 911 05 –
port
Description Length Reference Weight
kg
Profibus DP 100 m TSX PBS CA 100 –
connecting cables 400 m TSX PBS CA 400 –
5/93
platform 5
INTERBUS bus
Presentation
The INTErBUS bus is a serial link type fieldbus for sensors and actuators which
conforms to the requirements of an industrial environment.
Quantum
Premium/Atrium
E/S IP 65
Installation remote bus module
ATV 58 c 24 V
1 2
Installation remote bus module
Bus terminal module
c 24 V E/S IP 65
5 Momentum
The topology of the INTERBUS bus is designed as a ring system with master/slave
central access procedure.
It is subdivided into three parts:
b The remote bus 1 (bus devices use RS 485 point-to-point connection).
b The installation remote bus 2 (remote bus tap link via a bus terminal module). Its
technology is particularly suitable for IP 65 dust and damp proof systems.
b The local bus with TTL technology is particularly suitable for buses within a control
cabinet.
Each bus subscriber comprises a transmitter and a receiver.

The INTErBUS system is like a data ring and has the structure of a shift register
distributed on the bus. With its registers, each module constitutes a component of
this shift register ring. The INTErBUS master circulates the data in series on this ring.
5.5

5/94
connectable devices platform 5
INTERBUS bus
Description
1
Premium PLCs are connected to the INTERBUS bus via the TSX IBY 100 INTERBUS
1 bus module.
2 The TSX IBX 100 communication coprocessor can be used to connect a Atrium
2
slot-PLC integrated in a PC compatible to the InterBus bus.
3
3 The front panel on the TSX IBY 100/IBX 100 module comprises:
1 A display block with 6 indicator lamps (on the card for the TSX IBX 100).
2 A 9-way female RS 232 SUB-D connector: CMD Tool software support

(configuration software).
3 A 9-way female RS 485 SUB-D connector: InterBus link (this connector integrates
an additional power supply for the fibre optic link).
Connectable devices
The TSX IBY 100 module or the TSX IBX 100 card acts as the master on the
INTERBUS bus, other Schneider Electric devices (slaves) which can be connected on
the bus are:
b ATV 38/58 variable speed drives for asynchronus motors.
b Telefast IP 20 I/O interfaces.
b Momentum IP 20 I/O.
b Distributed discrete dust and damp proof I/O (IP 65). 5

b Inductel inductive identification systems (XGP/XGK-S read/write stations).
b AS-Interface/INTERBUS gateway.
b Any third-party device conforming to InterBus standard profiles.
5.5

5/95
software configuration platform 5
INTERBUS bus
Characteristics of the bus supported by TSX IBY 100 modules or TSX IBX 100 coprocessors
Type of bus Remote bus Installation rmote Local bus INTERBUS loop
bus
Physical interface RS 485 RS 485 with c 24 V in TTL Combined interface

cable (vertically mounted
signal and c 24 V
power supply)
Method of access Master/slave
Transmission Mode NRZ
Data rate 500 K bit/s
Medium - Twisted pair Special cable for: Special cable 2 x 1.5 mm2
- Fibre optic Sensor and I/O
- Wave guide rail module 24V power
- Infra-red supply
- Rotating collector Data transmission
Physical configuration Length of segment 400 m maxi – – 200 m max. in the loop
Maximum length of cable - Module and the 1st - Bus terminal module - Bus terminal module - Bus terminal module
between: bus terminal module: and 1st module: 50 m and 1st module: 1.5 m and 1st interface:
400 m - 2 modules: 50 m - 2 modules: 1.5 m 20 m
- 2 bus term.modules: - 2 modules: 10 m
400 m
Module and last The bus terminal Bus terminal module Bus terminal module
station on the remote module and last and last module: 10 m and last module:
bus: 12.8 km module: 50 m 100 m
Number of tap links 16 maxi – – 1 loop per bus terminal
module
Number of bus terminal modules 254 maxi – – –
5 Number of slaves 512 maxi Total current of 8 63

connected modules:
4.5 A max.
Number of I/O 3872 I/3872 O max. – – –

(4096 I/O in total)
INTERBUS services Implicit exchange of process date: 242 %IW and 242 %QW
Pre-processing
Logical addressing
Segmentation
Software configuration
The INTERBUS bus can be configured in 3 modes:
b Auto mode: This mode does not require the use of any special configuration
software (I/O images are copied to %IW, %QW implicitly). It facilitates the wiring
check.
5.5 b Mode Unity Pro/PL7 V IBY mode: This mode is used to define and load the
configuration to the module (explicit assignment of %IW, %QW). The CMD Tool
software (1) is required in order to generate the configuration text file.
b CMD V IBY mode: Reserved for configurations > 8 K words, and requires the use
of the CMD Tool software.
PMS message handling (usable on PCP devices) is managed via standard OFs
(Read-var, Write-var, etc).
The catalogue file which enables Schneider Electric devices to be integrated in the
CMD Tool software is available on our Web site:
b Address: www.schneiderautomation.com
b File for downloading: Schneider device catalog for CMD.
(1) Contact your Phœnix Contact vendor.
Presentation: Description: References:

5/96
platform 5
INTERBUS bus
References
INTERBUS bus modules
Description No. of modules Communica- Services Reference (1) Weight
per PLC/PC tion profil kg
INTERBUS See pages Master/slave - cyclical TSX IBY 100 0.320
module for 1/12, 1/13 or 0.5 Mbit/s variable
Premium PLC 1/31 Generation 4 exchanges
- PMS
messaging
- bus operating
modes
management
INTERBUS See page 1/21 Master/slave cyclical TSX IBX 100 0.280
TSX IBY 100 coprocessor or 1/35 0.5 Mbit/s variable
Atrium Generation 4 exchanges
slot-PLC - PMS
messaging
- bus operating
modes
management
Converter software
TSX IBX 100 kg
Symbol Used to convert CMD symbols into Unity Pro or TLX LIBS CNVE –
converter PL7 symbols
software
Bus connection elements
Description Use Length Reference (1) Weight
kg
Momentum Momentum I/O base units on – 170 INT 110 00 –
communica-ti INTERBUS bus
on module Avantys STB distributed I/O – STB NIB 2212 –
Remote bus – 100 m TSX IBS CA 100 – 5

cables
170 INT 110 00 400 m TSX IBS CA 400 –
Installation Preformed cables for linking 2 0.110 m 170 MCI 007 00 –

remote bus communication modules
cables 1m 170 MCI 100 00 –
Connecting TSX IBp to PC connection 6m 990 NAA 263 20 –

cable (with CMD Tool software)
15 m 990 NAA 263 50 –
9-way SUB-D Remote bus cables – 170 XTS 009 00 0.045

connectors
(sold in lots of 2)
(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.
5.5

5/97
Modbus serial link
Presentation
Magelis iPC
ATV 58
Modbus
XBT
TSX Micro/Premium
April 5000 Quantum
The Modbus bus is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary, however,
to check that the Modbus services used by the application are implemented on the
devices concerned).
The bus comprises one master station and several slave stations. Only the master
station can initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not
possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible:
b Question/answer, where the requests from the master are addressed to a given
slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been
interrogated.
5 b Broadcasting, the master broadcasts a message to all the slave stations on the
bus. These stations execute the order without transmitting a response.
Description
The TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or Atrium slot-PLCs offer various Modbus bus
connection possibilities.
Built-in links to the TSX Micro processor or to the TSX SCY p1601 Premium
1 module
1 Via integrated port on the TSX Micro processor.

The TER port (8-way mini DIN) has Modbus RTU master/slave (1) protocol.
2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 11601/21601 module for Premium PLCs.
TSX Micro
This module has an isolated Half-duplex RS 485 serial link channel(25-way SUB-D
3
connector) with multiprotocol (including Modbus); (for the TSX SCY 11601
module, only the Modbus protocol is supported).
6
5
TSX SCP 11 multiprotocol PCMCIA cardsp
4
3 A slot on the TSX Micro/Premium processors, the Atrium slot-PLC and the
TSX SCY 21601 module(2) exists for the multiprotocol TSX SCP11p cards,
Premium TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCY 11601
including Modbus, featuring:
5.6
2
5 A removable cover with fixing screws (to access a 20-way miniature connector).
3
6 Two LEDs:
v ERR lamp: card or link fault,
v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.
Cable connector to be ordered separately: TSX SCP/SCY cable.
(1) Modbus RTU slave Protocol with TSX 37 05/08.

6 (2) This slot is also designed for Fipway TSX FPP 20 or Jnet TSX JNP 112/114 PCMCIA network
cards.
4 5
References:
pages 5/100 and 5/101
5/98
platform 5
Modbus serial link
Characteristics
Physical Interface TSX Micro terminal port PCMCIA card TSX SCY integrated port
for integrated
Non-isolated RS 485 Premium RS 485
TSX 37 05/08 TSX Isolated 20 mA CL Non-isolated TSX TSX
37 10/21/22 RS 485 (1) RS 232D SCY 11601 SCY 21601
Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus
Method of access Slave Master/slave Master/slave Type
Transmission Mode Asynchronous in baseband
Frame RTU RTU/ASCII
Data rate 1.2...14.2 Kbit/s 0.6..19.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 111) 1.2...19.2 Kbit/s
1.2... 19.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 112/114)
Medium Double shielded twisted pair Double Quintuple Double shielded twisted pair
shielded shielded
twisted pair, twisted pair
doubled
Configuration Number of devices 28 max. in RS 485 16 max. 2 32
Point-to-point in RS 422 (point-to-point)
Max. number of link 98 248 98 248 98

addresses
Length of bus 10 m max. non isolated link 1,300 m 100 to 1,000 m 15 m max. 1,300 m excluding C
1,300 m max. on isolated link excluding tap according to
(2) links rate
Tap links – 15 m max. – – 15 m
Services Requests Bits: 1,920 bits per request

Words: 120 words per request
Security One CRC 16 check parameter on each frame 5

Monitoring No flow control Diagnostic counters, event counters
Modbus functions available Code Modbus slave Modbus master

on Premium/TSX Micro PLCs or 01 Read n output bits Read bits
on Atrium slot-PLC
02 Read n input bits Read input bits (3)
03 Read n output words Read words
04 Read n input words Read input words (3)
05 Write 1 output bit Write 1 bit or n bits
06 Write 1 output word Write 1 word or n words
07 Exceptional read status Exceptional read status
08 Diagnostic Diagnostic
0B Event counter Event counter
0C Event connection Event connection
0F Write n output bits –
10 Write n output words –
11 Identification Slave identification
– – Other requests accessible via SEND_REQ
generic function blocks
(1) Point-to-point RS 422 compatible connection.
(2) For an isolated link, you must use the TSX P ACC 01 terminal port cable connector.
(3) Requests not available on TSX 37 10/21/22 terminal port.
5.6
References:
pages 5/99 and 5/100
5/99
platform 5
Modbus serial link
Modbus bus connection elements

Description Protocol Physical layer Reference Weight
kg
TSX Micro PLC Modbus (RTU) Non-isolated RS 485 Refer to our catalog –
integrated link Uni-Telway “TSX Micro
(TER port) character mode automation platform”
Communication Modbus - 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel TSX SCY 21601 0.360
module for Character mode (channel 0), (1 to 97 slaves)
Premium/Atrium Uni-Telway - 1 slot for PCMCIA card (channel 1)
(1)
TSX Micro
Modbus 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel TSX SCY 11601 0.340
(channel 0), 1.2...19.2 Kbit/s
(1 to 247 slaves)
PCMCIA cards Modbus RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) TSX SCP 114 0.105
type III for Premium Character mode 1.2...19.2. Kbit/s
processor, Atrium Uni-Telway
slot-PLC,
PLC TSX 37 21/22 or
TSX SCY 21601
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCY 11601
module RS 232D (9 signals) TSX SCP 111 0.105
0.6...19.2. Kbit/s
20 mA CL TSX SCP 112 0.105

5 1.2...19.2. Kbit/s
TSX SCP 11p
Modbus connection accessories

kg
Passive junction Bus tap link and extension, line termination adaptation TSX SCA 50 0.520
box
TSX SCA 50
2 channel passive Tap link of 2 devices with 2 wires TSX SCA 64 0.570
subscriber socket Tap link of 1 master device and/or 1 slave device with 4 wires
(2 or 4 wire) (2) Fitted with 2 female 15-pin SUB-D connectors
Active adapter Connection of an RS 232C device as RS 485 TSX SCA 72 0.520

RS 232C/RS 485 Isolation of signals and line termination adaptation
TSX SCA 64
TSX Micro PLC TER Bus tap link cable (2 or 4-wire) TSX P ACC 01 0.690
terminal port cable Isolation of Modbus signals
connector Line termination adaptation
5.6 Supplied with cable (length 1 m) fitted with a mini-DIN
connector (TER port)
Line terminators 2/4-wire cabling TSX SCA 10 0.030

(sold in lot of 2) Can be connected to the front panel of the TSX SCA 64
subscriber socket
(1) PCMCIA type III slot for 1 TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114 card.
(2) 2 or 4 wire cabling, compatible with the TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket requires a max. 10 mm
external diameter Modbus cable.
Characteristics:
page 5/99
5/100
platform 5
Modbus serial link
Modbus connection cables

From To kg
RS 485 double Modbus Bus – 100 m TSX CSA 100 5.680
shielded twisted pair
trunk cables
200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920
500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000
Cables for isolated TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 housing 3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160
RS 422/485 tap link 2 wires (1)
TSX SCA 64 subscriber 3 m TSX SCP CM 4530 0,180

socket,
2/4 wires
Modbus standard 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160

device, 4 wires (1)
(point-to-point)
Built-in channel TSX SCA 50 housing, 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.160

(channel 0) Premium
TSX SCY 11601,
2 wires (1)
5
TSX SCY 21601
module
TSX SCA 64 subscriber 3 m TSX SCY CM 6530 0.160
socket,
2 wires
RS 232D tap link TSX SCP 111 card Communication device 3 m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190
cables (Modem, converter, etc)
(DCE) (2)
Terminal device 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

with point-to-point
(DTE) (2)
10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
Cable for tap link TSX SCP 112 card Multidrop Modbus (1) 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
20 mA CL
Other connecting – – – See page 5/110 –

cables
5.6
(1) End of cable fitted with free wires.

(2) End of cable fitted with a male 25-pin SUB-D connector.
Characteristics:
page 5/99
5/101
Uni-Telway serial link
Presentation
The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication between control system

components (PLCs, MMI terminals, supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical
controllers, weighing equipment, etc.).
It is suitable for architectures designed to manage control and monitoring devices via
Premium a PLC, or architectures used for MMI (supervision, etc.).
The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station which manages the allocation of bus
access rights to the various connected stations (known as slave stations).
CCX 17
Uni-Telway
ATV 58
TSX Micro
Characteristics
Physical interface RS 485 non isolated Premium RS 485 Isolated RS 485/ 20 mA CL PCMCIA Non-isolated
5 terminal port
(TER/AUX)
isolated module
integrated port (1)
RS 422 PCMCIA card card RS 232D PCMCIA
card
Structure Type Heterogeneous industrial bus
Link Multidrop Point-to-point
Method of access Master/Slave principle
Transmission Mode Asynchronous transmission in baseband
Data rate 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s
Medium Shielded double twisted pair
Configuration Number of devices 5 max. 28 max. 16 max. 2
Number of connection 8 max. 96 max.(1 device can occupy several datalink addresses)
addresses
Length of bus 10 m max., 1,000 m 1,000 m max. excluding tap links 1300 m max., 15 m
with TSX P ACC 01 excluding tap links (unlimited via modem)
Tap links – 20 m 20 m 15 m –
Service Uni-TE Point-to-point requests with confirmation (question/response), of up to 240 bytes (2) initiated by any connected device
Unsolicited point-to-point data, without confirmation, of up to 240 bytes(2) initiated by any connected device
5.6
Broadcast messages of up to 240 bytes (2) initiated by the master device
Other functions Transparent communication, via the master, with any device in an X-Way architecture
Diagnostics, debugging, adjustment and programming of PLCs
Security Check character on each frame, acknowledgement and, if required, repetition of messages ensure security of
transmission
Monitoring Bus status table, transmission error counters and device status can be accessed by program in each device
Status of the bus and devices connected from the master PLC accessible using Unity Pro or PL7 software.
(1) TSX SCY 21601 single format module.

(2) Limited to 128 bytes with TSX Micro/Premium PLC terminal port.
Connections: References:
page 5/104 page 5/105
5/102
Characteristics (continued), Modicon Premium automation
Performances
BCT The Uni-Telway bus cycle time depends on:

(ms) b The number of devices polled (datalink addresses).
400 b The data rate.
b The turnaround time of each device.
1 b The number, length and type of messages.
300
2 BCT = Bus Cycle Time, is the interval between two polls from the same device.
200
The curves opposite give the Uni-Telway cycle time as a function of the number of
slaves operating at 9.6 Kbit/s or 19.2 Kbit/s, with a typical turnaround time of 5 ms per
100 device (excluding messages).
The following table shows the time to be added (in ms) to obtain the true BCT value
as a function of the traffic (N = Number of usable characters):
1 4 8 12 16 20 24 27
1 = 9.6 Kbit/s Time (ms)

2 = 19.2 Kbit/s Exchanges at 9.6 Kbit/s at 19.2 Kbit/s
Master to slave 24 + 1.2 N (1) 17 + 0.6 N (1)
Slave to Master 19 + 1.2 N (1) 12 + 0.6 N (1)

Event Report
Slave to slave 44 + 2.3 N (1) 29 + 1.15 N (1)
Device 1 CT1 CT1 CT1 CT1
In a distributed control system architecture the application-to-application response

Uni-Telway bus BCT BCT time depends not only on the communication system, but also on:
CT2 CT2
b The processing times of the message source and destination devices.
Device 2
b The degree of asynchronism between the bus and processor cycle times.
Action This response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application according
to the devices which are connected.
5
BCT = Uni-Telway bus cycle time
CT1 = Device 1 bus cycle time The processing time of a device may vary from one to two cycle times depending on the
CT2 = Device 2 bus cycle time degrees of asynchronism.
Description
TSX Micro/Premium PLCs
TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the Uni-Telway

bus.
1 By integrated TSX Micro/Premium processor or Atrium slot-PLC port

The AUX port (2) (8-way mini-DIN) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link
channel (maximum distance 10 m).
2 By TSX SCY 21601 integrated port for Premium PLC or Atrium slot-PLC
This module has one Half-duplex isolated RS 485 serial link channel, which is
multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.
3 Via multiprotocol PCMCIA card
A slot on the TSX 37 21/22/Premium PLC processors, the Atrium slot-PLC and
TSX Micro the TSX SCY 21601 module (3) accepts the following multiprotocol cards:
v TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card

Isolated RS 485/RS 422 link. This type of card corresponds to the Uni-Telway
standard. 5.6
1 2 v TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card

Non isolated RS 232D link. This type of card can be used for direct point-to-point
links or via Modem.
3 v TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card

20 mA current loop link. This type of card is used for a multidrop link (2 to 16 devices)
and requires a c 24V external power supply.
Premium TSX SCY 21601
(1) N = Number of usable characters corresponding to the messages to be exchanged.
(2) TER port for TSX 37 05/08/10 PLC.
(3) This slot can also accept the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card for Fipway networks, or the
TSX JNP 112/114 PCMCIA card for JNet networks.
Connections: References:
page 5/104 page 5/105
5/103
platform 5
Uni-Telway bus wiring system
12
FT 2100
TSX 17 20 11
4 2 1 2 2 5 2
TER AUX
Device 3 Adaptor
10 8
3
TSX Micro
9 (TER terminal port)
7
ATV 38/58
6
1 TSX CSA ppp: bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be
connected to the earth of each device.
2 TSX SCA 50: passive T-junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed
at the end of the line.
5 3 TSX SCA 62: passive 2-channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, is used for
coding the address of two connected devices, and matching the impedance when
it is installed at the end of the line.
4 TSX SCA 60/61: passive terminal block, used for intermediate devices that have
a 15-way female SUB D connector:
v TSX SCA 60 used for intermediate devices,
v TSX SCA 61 used for end devices.
5 TSX P ACC 01: connection box, used for connecting a TSX Micro/Premium
PLC to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC terminal port. The connecting cable
(length 1 m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for
distances >10 m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used
to set the operation of the terminal port (Uni-Telway Master/Slave or character
mode).
6 TSX LES 64/74: cable connectors for extensions to the Uni-Telway bus, used to
connect TSX model 40 PLC processors that have an integral Uni-Telway port as
standard. They are used for coding the address of the connected device.
7 TSX SCP 114 : PCMCIA card for connecting TSX Micro (1)/Premium PLCs to the
Uni-Telway bus.
8 TSX SCP CU 4030: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP 114
PCMCIA card (on TSX P57 p0M processor or TSX SCY 21601 module) and the
TSX SCA 50 junction box.
9 TSX SCY CU 6530: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCY 21601
module integrated channel and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.
10 XBT-Z908: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the CCX 17 and the
TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.
5.6 11 TSX PCX 1031: universal connecting cable between a PC compatible (COM port,
9-way SUB D connector) and the TER or AUX port for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs
or the TSX P ACC 01 connection box (8-way mini-DIN connector).
12 TSX CSC 015: connecting cable between the TSX 17 micro-PLC (via a
TSX 17 ACC 5 adapter or a TSX SCG 1161 module) and TSX SCA 62
subscriber socket.
TSX DG UTW F: this manual describes the operating principles and the architectures
of the Uni-Telway bus. It is required for setting up and installing the
Uni-Telway bus.
TSX DR NET F: this manual describes the X-Way architectures, services and
address mechanisms. It includes the coding of Uni-TE requests as well as
precautions for connecting earths for the networks. It also includes the principles
of asynchronous serial transmission.
(1) With TSX 37 21/22 PLCs.
Characteristics: Description: References:
5/104
platform 5
Elements for connection to Uni-Telway bus

Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Addr. Reference Weight
(1) kg
Integrated link on Uni-Telway Non isolated RS 485 TSX Micro – Please consult our catalog
processor Character mode “Modicon TSX Micro”
Premium – See page 1/12,1/13 or1/31
Atrium – See page 1/21 or 1/35
Communication module Uni-Telway 1 isolated 2-wire RS 485 Premium – TSX SCY 21601 0.360
Modbus/Jbus integrated channel Atrium
TSX Micro Character mode (channel 0),
1 PCMCIA card slot
(channel 1) (2)
Type III PCMCIA cards Uni-Telway RS 232 D (9 signals) 7 TSX SCP 111 0.105
for Premium processors, Modbus/Jbus 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s
Atrium slot-PLCs, Character mode
TSX 37 21/22 PLCs, or RS 485 (RS 422 7 TSX SCP 114 0.105
TSX SCY 21601 modules compatible)
1.2…19.2 Kbit/s
20 mA CL 7 TSX SCP 112 0.105

1.2…19.2 Kbit/s
Set of X-Way drivers for Includes all the X-Way drivers 1 CD-Rom – TSX CD DRV 20M –
Premium TSX SCY 21601 PC compatibles
Uni-Telway bus connection accessories
Description Use Addr. Reference Weight
kg
Terminal port connection Isolation of Uni-Telway signals for bus length > 10 m, end 5 TSX P ACC 01 0.690
box of line adaptation, bus cable tap links. Supplied with cable
(1 m length) equipped with a mini-DIN connector (TER or
AUX ports)
TSX SCP 11 p Passive T-junction box Tap link and extension of bus cable, 2 TSX SCA 50 0.520
5
Passive 2-channel 2-channel tap link (15-way female SUB-D connector) and 3 TSX SCA 62 0.570
subscriber socket extension of bus cable, address coding and end of line
adaptation
Active adaptation box Connection of an RS 232C device active adapter unit – TSX SCA 72 0.520
RS 232C/RS 485 (using Uni-Telway protocol), adaptation and isolation of
TSX P ACC 01
signals, end of line adaptation (no address coding)
Uni-Telway bus connecting cables (3)

Description Use Addr. Length Reference Weight
From To (1) kg
Double shielded twisted Uni-Telway bus – 1 100 m TSX CSA 100 5.680
TSX SCA 50 pair RS 485 cables
200 m TSX CSA 200 10.920
500 m TSX CSA 500 30.000
Cables for isolated RS 485 TSX SCP 114 card TSX SCA 50 T-jun. 8 3m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160
tap link box
TSX SCA 62 sub. – 3m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.180
TSX SCA 62 sock.
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 T-jun. – 3m TSX SCP CU 6030 0.180
module integrated box
channel (channel 0) TSX SCA 62 sub. 9 3m TSX SCP CU 6530 0.200
sock.
RS 232 terminal TSX Micro/ RS 232D port for 11 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
port/peripheral device Premium or Atrium 9-way SUB D type PC
connecting cable port or compatible
5.6
TSX SCA 72
TSX P ACC 01 box USB port of PC – 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –
(TER or AUX)
(1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.
(2) Type III PCMCIA type III slot for TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114p card
(3) For information on other connection cables, please see pages 5/108.
TSX PCX 1031
Characteristics: Description: Connections:

5/105
characteristics Jnet serial link
Presentation
The Jnet network enables an automatic exchange of data between several Series
1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs, using the shared table service (exchange by
each PLC of a memory zone, internal words, broadcast zone, to other PLCs on the
network), see page 5/67.
Jnet
Premium April 5000 April 2000 April 3000 April 7000 SMC 50/600
The Jnet network services exchange data between Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and
Premium PLCs. The principle is based on broadcasting of a local zone by each PLC
(word memory zone), which is automatically copied to other PLCs on the network ;
no explicit programming for exchanges is required.
Description
Premium PLCs are connected to the Jnet network using type III PCMCIA
communication cards:
b TSX JNP 112 card for which the physical layer is a 20 mA current loop serial link.
5 b TSX JNP 114 card for which the physical layer is a RS 485 serial link.
These PCMCIA cards are installed in the host slot 1 on the TSX SCY 21601 module
of communication.
1 TSX JNP cards comprise:

3 A removable cover avec vis de fixation (accès au connecteur miniature 20
4 contacts.
4 Two indicator lamps:
v ERR: card or link fault,
v COM: activity on the line.
Connectors to be ordered separately:

2 3 v TSX SCP CM 4030/CM 4530/CX 2030 cable.
Characteristics
Structure Type Inter-PLC network
Topology Bus with passive tap links
Method of access Circulation by token
Physical interface RS 485 2 wire, 20 mA CL
Transmission Mode Half duplex on 2 wires

5.6 Format 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop
Data rate 92.2 Kbps
Configuration Number of devices 32 (16 if the network includes SMC PLCs)

Length of bus 1300 m maximum without tap links
Tap links 15 m maximum
Services Data exchanged Distributed database:

- 128 16-bit words for a network with 32 stations (Series 1000/Premium),
- 64 16-bit words for a network including SMC PLCs.
Monitoring Network nominal duty control indicator lamp
References:
page 5/107
5/106
Software configuration, Modicon Premium automation
Jnet serial link
Installation procedures and access to the Jnet module configuration screen are
identical to those for any PCMCIA type communication module, using Unity Pro or
PL7 Junior/Pro software.
Configuration of a Jnet PCMCIA card is accessed using the screen below:
Stations communicate between themselves automatically once they are configured

and connected to the same Jnet network.
A debug screen is also linked to the module. It gives the following information:
b Status of each station (RUN/STOP/ABSENT).

b Transmission error counter.
References
Connection elements to Jnet network
Description Number per Use Physical layer Reference Weight
PLC (1) kg
Jnet type III 3 maximum Type III slot on 20 mA CL TSX JNP 112 0.110
PCMCIA TSX SCY 21601 19.2 Kbps
module
RS 485 TSX JNP 114 0.110
19.2 Kbps
Description Use Power supply Reference
(1)
Weight
kg 5
TSX JNP 112/114 2-channel Tap link of 2 x 2-wire devices – TSX SCA 64 0.570
subscriber Tap link of 1 Master device and/
socket or 1 x 4-wire Slave device Fitted
(2 or 4-wire) with 2 x 15-way female SUB-D
(2) connectors
Line Connection to the front panel of – TSX SCA 10 0.030

terminators TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket
(sold in lots of 2) 2/4-wire cabling
T-junction box Connection to RS 485 viatap link Passive TSX SCA 50 0.520
TSX SCA 64 (Tee)
Connection cables
From To kg
Cables for TSX JNP 114 TSX SCA 50 box 3 m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160
isolated card 2-wire (3)
RS 422/485 tap
link TSX SCA 64 3m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180
TSX SCA 50 subscriber socket
2/4-wire
Cable for TSX JNP 112 Multidrop Modbus 3 m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
20 mA CL tap card (3)
link
(1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.
5.6
(2) 2 or 4-wire cabling, compatible with TSX SCA 64 subscriber sockets requires the use of a
Modbus cable with an external diameter of 10 mm maximum.
(3) Cable end fitted with flying leads.
Presentation:
page 5/106
5/107
characteristics Asynchronous serial links
Presentation
Premium TSX SCY 21601 TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide, via their processor, slot-PLC or TSX SCY 21601
communication module, several possible ways for exchanging data in character
mode with devices equipped with an asynchronous serial link interface:
b RS 485 integrated port.
b Type III PCMCIA card with RS 232D, RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) or 20 mA
2
1 current loop link.
Protocols supported are character mode (ASCII), Uni-Telway and Modbus.
Other protocols are also available, or can be developed on request, on a RS 485 or
3
3 RS 232D link, which enables TSX Micro/Premium PLCs to communicate on
third-party architectures. These products are offered within the framework of the
Schneider Alliances partnership programme. The list of modules available can be
obtained from your Regional Sales Office, or from our Internet site
TSX Micro
www.schneideralliances.com.
5
Description
1 Integrated links
1 Via integrated port on the processor or slot-PLC
The AUX (1) port (8-way mini-DIN connector) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link
3 4 channel (maximum distance 10 m).
2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 module
This module for Premium PLCs has one isolated RS 485 serial link channel (25-way
SUB-D connector). Half duplex multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway.
TSX SCP 11p multiprotocol PCMCIA cards
3 A slot on the processor, slot-PLC and on the TSX SCY 21601 module takes cards
which comprise:
4 A removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature
connector.

v ERR lamp: card or link fault,
v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.
Connector cable to be ordered separately:
TSX SCP Cp ppp cable.
(1) TER port for TSX Micro TSX 37 05/08/10 PLC.
Characteristics
Type Non isolated Isolated RS 485 PCMCIA cards PCMCIA cards PCMCIA cards
RS 485 terminal TSX SCY 21601 RS 232D RS 485 20 mA current
port integrated port RS 422 loop (3)
(1) Compatible
Physical layer Data rate 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s
(2)
Transmission Size 120 characters 4096 characters max.
Data 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit 1 or 2 bits
Parity bit Even, odd or none
Stop on silence
Services Reception echo
Repeat 1st char. echo
Auto LF
Back space
Beep
Flow mgmt by Xon-Xoff
byRTS/CTS
5.6 RTS/CTS delay
Stop on reception
End of message
PSR management
Parameters which can be accessed in configuration mode.

(1) For characteristics of the communication module integrated channel.
(2) With the TSX P57 3p3/453 processor, data rate up to 115 Kbit/s during program uploading.
(3) Point-to-point or multidrop link.
References:
page 5/109
5/108
platform
Asynchronous serial links
References
Asynchronous serial link elements (character mode)
Description Protocol Physical layer PLC Reference Weight
(1) kg
Integrated link on Character mode RS 485 TSX Micro Please consult our catalog
processor Uni-Telway non-isolated “Modicon TSX Micro”
Premium See page 1/12, 1/13 or 1/31
Atrium See page 1/21 or 1/35

TSX Micro
Communication module Character mode - 1 isolated RS 485 Premium TSX SCY 21601 –
Uni-Telway integrated chan. Atrium
Modbus/Jbus (channel 0),
- 1 type III PCMCIA
card slot (channel 1)
(2)
Type III PCMCIA cards for Character mode RS 232 D (9 signaux) TSX SCP 111 –
TSX 37 21/22, PLC, Uni-Telway 0,3…19,2 K bits/s
Premium processor, Modbus/Jbus
Atrium slot-PLC or RS 485 (compatible RS 422) TSX SCP 114 –
TSX SCY 21601 module 1,2…19,2 K bits/s
BC 20 mA TSX SCP 112 –

Premium 1,2…19,2 K bits/s
Asynchronous serial link connection accessories

kg
Terminal port connection Isolation of RS 485 signals, end of line 1m TSX P ACC 01 0.690
box adaptation, supplied with cable for
connection to PLC
Connecting cables for asynchronous serial links

5
From To kg
TSX SCY 21601
Cables for isolated RS 485 TSX SCP 114 card RS 485/RS 422 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160
connection device
(3)
Integrated channel RS 485/RS 422 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
(channel 0) module device (4) via
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 box
Universal cable for TSX Micro/Premium/ RS 232D of a 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
terminal port/RS 232 Atrium port terminal device (DTE)
TSX SCP 11 p device (TER or AUX) or (5)
TSX P ACC 01 box USB port of PC 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –
Cables for RS 232D TSX SCP 111 card Communication 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190
connection device: modem,
converter, (DCE)
(4)
TSX P ACC 01
Point-to-point 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190
terminal device (DTE)
(4) 10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
Cable for BC 20 mA TSX SCP 112 card Current loop device 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
connection (3)
5.6
TSX PCX 1031 (2) PCMCIA type III slot can receive one TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or
TSX JNP 112/114 card.
(3) End of cable fitted with flying leads.
(4) End of cable fitted with a 25-way male SUB-D connector.
(5) End of cable fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D connector. For use, to order separatly one
TSX CTC 10 adaptator (9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way male SUB-D connectors).

page 5/108 page 5/108 page 5/108
5/109
platform 5
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards

and TER/AUX ports
TSX Micro/Premium Device to be Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weight

PLC connected kg
TSX SCP 111 DTE terminal 2 RS 232D Character mode 3m TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190
PCMCIA card
10 m TSX SCP CD 1100 0.620
DCE terminal RS 232D Character mode 3m TSX SCP CC 1030 0.190

(Modem...) 2 Uni-Telway
TSX SCP 114 TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Character mode 3m TSX SCP CU 4030 0.160
PCMCIA card T-junction box (2-wire isolated) Uni-Telway
3
RS 422/485 Character mode 3m TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160

(2-wire isolated) Modbus
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCP CU 4530 0.160

2-channel (2-wire isolated)
subscriber
socket 4
TSX SCA 64 RS 422/485 Modbus 3m TSX SCP CM 4530 0.180

2-channel (2/4 wire)
subscriber
socket 4
5
DTE Terminal 3 RS 422/485 Modbus 3m TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160
(4-wire)
TSX SCP 112 Active or 20 mA current Character mode 3m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160
PCMCIA card passive loop Uni-Telway
terminal 3 Modbus
TER/AUX ports TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 Uni-Telway 1m Included with TSX P ACC 01
1 junction box
TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 Uni-Telway 2m T FTX CB1 020 0.100

junction box 5
5.6
5m T FTX CB1 050 0.190
DTE terminal RS 232 Character mode 2,5 m TSX PCX 1031 (1) 0.170
(PC, printer) 6
7 RS 232 Character mode 2,5 m TSX PCX 3030 –
1 25-way male miniature connector. 4 15-way male SUB-D connector.

2 25-way male SUB-D connector. 5 8-way female mini-DIN connector.
3 Flying leads. 6 9-way female SUB-D connector.
7 USB type connector.
(1) Separate parts see page 5/111.
5/110
platform 5
Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards

and TER/AUX ports
TSX Micro/Premium Device to be Physical link Protocol Length Reference Weight

PLC connected kg
TER/AUX ports (contin.) DTE terminal RS 232 Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
1 (slave PC ) 2 RS 485
3 RS 232 Uni-Telway 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –

RS 485
DTE terminal RS 232 Character mode 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 (1) 0.170
(printer, slave Uni-Telway
PC without RTS)
2
3 RS 232 Character mode 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 –
Uni-Telway
DCE terminal RS 232 Character mode 3m TSX PCX 1130 (2) 0.140
(Modem M/Sl. Uni-Telway
USA/Europe) 4
CCX 17, panel, RS 485 Uni-Telway 2.5 m XBT Z968 0.180

XBT terminal 5
5m XTB Z9681 0.340
TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6030 0.180
communication module T-junction box 6 (2-wire isolated)
integrated port 5 5
Modbus/Jbus 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180
TSX SCA 62 RS 485 Uni-Telway 3m TSX SCY CU 6530 0.200

2-channel (2-wire isolated)
subscriber
socket 7
RS 485 RS 485 Character mode 3m TSX SCY CM 6030 0.180

terminal 6 (2-wire isolated)
Separate parts
Description Description Reference Weight
kg
SUB-D adapter 9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way female SUB-D connectors TSX CTC 07 0.060
5.6
9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way male SUB-D connector TSX CTC 10 0.060
1 8-way female mini-DIN connector. 4 9-way male SUB-D connector.

2 9-way female SUB-D connector. 5 25-way male SUB-D connector
3 USB type connector. 6 Flying leads.
7 15-way male SUB-D connector
(1) To be ordered separatly: TSX CTC 07 and TSX CTC 10 adapters, see above separate parts.
(2) Point to point, supplied wih 1 SUB-D adapter: TSX CTC 09 9-way female/25-way male SUB-D connector.
5/111
6
6/0
Contents 6 - Software 6
6.1 - Unity software

Selection guide: Unity software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2
b Unity Pro software
v Presentation, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4

v Software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/7
v IEC languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10
v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/16
b Unity EFB Toolkit software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/28
b Unity SFC View software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30
b Unity Studio software suite

v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/35
v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/41
b Unity Application Generator (UAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/42

v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/47
b Process control
v Presentation (user-definable and programmable control loops) . . . . page 6/48

v User-definable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/49
6.2 - PL7 software

Selection guide: PL7 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54
b PL7 Junior/Pro programming software
v Presentation, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/56

v Software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/59
v 4 languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/61
6
v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/63
b SDKC software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/72
b PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/74
b PL7 DIF application comparison software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/76
b Process control
v Presentation (user-definable control loops) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/78

v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/79
v Control and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/83
6/1
platform 6
Unity software
Unity Pro programming software
IEC 61131-3 Instruction List (IL) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q

languages Ladder (LD) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Structured Text (ST) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Function Block Diagram (FBD) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)/Grafcet A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Programming Multitask programming (Master, fast and A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
services event-triggered)
Multitask programming (Master, fast, P (TSX P57 5p) -
auxiliary and event-triggered) Q (140 CPU 651/671)
Functional view and function modules A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
DFB editor A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
DDT compound data editor A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Data structure instances and tables A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Use of DFB instances A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
EF function block libraries and EFB function A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
blocks
User-definable control loops A (TSX PCI 2p) - A (TSX PCI 2p/3p) - P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p)
P (TSX P57 2p) P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p)
Programmable control loops (with function P (TSX P57 4p) - Q P (TSX P57 4p/5p) - Q
block libraries)
Hot Standby PLC redundancy system Q (140 CPU 67 160)
System diagnostics A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Application diagnostics A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Diagnostics with location of error source A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Debugging and PLC simulator A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
display Hypertext link animations in graphic A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
services languages
6 Step by step execution, breakpoint A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Watchpoint A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Runtime screens A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Diagnostic viewers A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Other services Creation of hyperlinks A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
6.1 XML import/export A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Application converters (Concept, PL7) A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Utilities for updating PLC operating systems A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Communication drivers for A-P A-P-Q A-P-Q
Windows 2000/XP
Compatible Atrium slot-PLCs A TSX PCI 204M TSX PCI 204M TSX PCI 204M
Modicon TSX PCI 354M TSX PCI 354M
platforms Premium CPUs P TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M
TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 104/1634/154M
TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 204/2634/254M
TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 304/3634/354M
TSX P57 4634/454M TSX P57 4634/454M
TSX P57 5634/554M
Quantum CPUs Q – 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 311 10
140 CPU 434 12/534 14U 140 CPU 434 12/534 14U
140 CPU 651 50/60
140 CPU 671 60
Software name Unity Pro Medium Unity Pro Large Unity Pro Extra Large
Unity Pro software type UNY SPU MFp CD 20 UNY SPU LFp CD 20 UNY SPU EFp CD 20
Pages 6/27
6/2
6
EF/EFB function “Collaborative Control” Software for designing and SFC View application Pack for developing specific
development software in C distributed project generating batch/process diagnostic and monitoring solutions
language development software applications software
Enhancement of EF and EFB Software suite for managing UAG specialist software for ActiveX control component for Specialist software for
function block libraries: distributed and designing and generating monitoring and diagnostics of developing made-to-order
v Creation of families multi-application projects: batch/process applications in a chart status (SFC or Grafcet) in solutions (for example
v Development of functions in v Used for developing and “Collaborative Automation” sequential applications: interfaces with an electrical
C language structuring control system environment. It provides the v Overview of charts and CAD system, automatic
v Access to all data and applications in a “Collaborative unique project database: detailed views application generator, etc):
variable types Automation” environment v process and control (PLCs) v Can be integrated in v Access to Unity Pro object
v Debugging functions (step v Ensures consistency when v HMI user interface (Magelis) human/machine interface servers
by step, breakpoint) synchronizing applications on v SCADA supervision (HMI) applications v Reserved for IT
v Use of functions created in Ethernet (Monitor Pro V7.2) v Access to PLC data via OFS development engineers using
all languages v Based on the MS Visio 2003 (OPC Factory Server) Visual Basic or C++
graphic software, the software Based around re-usable
Supplied with Microsoft suite includes: objects (PID, valves, etc) and Includes EFB function block UDE software only supplied
Visual C++ v Unity Studio Manager complying with standard ISA library for Unity Pro after signature of a specific
v Unity Pro XL S88, UAG generates the PLC contract with
v OFS (communication) code and the elements Schneider Electric
v PowerSuite (drives and required for the HMI system.
motor starters) Complies with the GAMP
v XBT-L1000 (user interface) standard (Good Automation
v VBA (Visual Basic for Manufacturing Practice)
Applications)
6.1
Compatible with: Compatible with: Compatible with: Compatible with: Compatible with:
v Unity Pro Medium, Large v Unity Pro Medium, Large v Unity Pro Large and v Unity Pro Medium, Large v Unity Pro Medium, Large
and Extra Large and Extra Large Extra Large and Extra Large and Extra Large
v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All Atrium slot-PLCs v TSX P57 4634/454M and v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All Atrium slot-PLCs
v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Premium Unity CPUs TSX P57 5634/554M Premium v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Premium Unity CPUs
v All Quantum Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs
v All Quantum Unity CPUs
Unity EFB Toolkit Unity Studio Unity Application Generator Unity SFC View Unity Developer’s Edition
UAG Medium/Large
UNY SPU ZFU CD20E UNY SEW pF UNY SEW pFp CD21 UNY SDU MFp CD20 Please consult your Regional
Sales Office
6/27 6/27 6/47 6/33 6/26
6/3
platform 6
Unity Pro software
User interface
Unity Pro’s welcome screen provides access to all available tools in a user-friendly
format that has been redesigned on the basis of feedback received from users of
Concept and PL7 Junior/Pro application design software.
This welcome screen consists of a general view made up of a number of windows

and toolbars, which can be arranged as required on the screen:
1 Menu bar from which all functions can be accessed
2 Toolbar consisting of icons from which the most frequently used functions can be
accessed
3 Application browser, which can be used to browse the application based on a
conventional and/or a functional view
4 Editor windows area, which can be used to view a number of editors at the same
6 time (configuration editor, Structured Text/Ladder etc. language editors, data
editor)
5 Tabs for direct access to editor windows
6 Information window with tabs (User Errors, Import/Export, Search/Replace, etc.)
7 Status bar
6.1
Accessing functions
All functions can be accessed via drop-down menus from the menu bar. The toolbar,
which consists of icons, provides more rapid access to the most frequently used
“File/Edit” toolbar functions. This toolbar, which is displayed by default, can be customized to meet the
requirements associated with the various uses of Unity Pro software and is divided
into three groups:
b Main toolbars, which are visible at all times
FBD language editor contextual toolbar b Contextual toolbar, which is displayed when the corresponding editor is selected
b Toolbar with zoom functions (in and out), full-screen view for editor window
They are classified according to the category of functions available:

“PLC” toolbar for debug mode
b File management (New Project, Open, Save, Print)
b Edit (Undo, Redo, Confirm, Go To)
b Application services (Analyze Project, Build Project, Browse, Find, Access Library)
b Automation platform operating mode (Upload/Download Project, Online/Offline,
Run/Stop, Animate, PLC/Simulation Mode)
Toolbar with zoom (in and out) b Debug mode (Set/Remove Breakpoint, etc.)
b Window display (Cascade, Horizontal, Vertical)
b Online help (non-contextual or contextual)
Users can create their own toolbars and insert icons from the main and contextual
toolbars into them.
Setup: Software structure: IEC language: Functions: References:

pages 6/5 and 6/84 pages 6/85 to 6/9 pages 6/10 to 6/15 pages 6/16 to 6/26 pages 6/26 and 6/27
6/4
Setup Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Project browser
The project browser can be used:

b To display the content of an Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLC project
b To move between the different components of the application (configuration,
program, variables, communication, DFB user function blocks, DDT derived function
blocks) created by the user
The project can be displayed using two types of view:

b The structural view, which provides an overall view of the various components of
the application. This representation provides a view of the order in which the program
sections are processed in the PLC.
b The functional view, which provides a view of the project based on specific
function modules. This representation provides a breakdown according to consistent
functions in relation to the process to be controlled.
These two types of view, which are available at any time, can be displayed separately
or at the same time (horizontal or vertical windows) by clicking on the icons in the
toolbar.
Structural view
This conventional view allows you to access all the different components of the
1 application (configuration, programming, function blocks, debugging, etc.) via the
application browser.
The browser gives an overall view of the program and offers fast access to all
2 application components.
1 Configuration editor
5 2 DFB (user function block) and DDT (Derived Data Type) editors
3 Communication networks editor
4 Program editor
5 Variables editor
3 6 Animation tables editor
7 Runtime screens editor
9 8 Documentation editor
4
From any level in the tree structure, you can:
9 Create a hyperlink to a comment or description
10 Create a directory for storing hyperlinks used to access a set of user folders
6
From this level, it is also possible to zoom in and only view the detailed levels for a
component on this level.
10
6 Functional view 6.1

7
8 Unity Pro software applications support the creation of an application structure for
Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms based on function modules comprising:
Structural view b Sections (program code)
b Animation tables
b Runtime screens
The designer can define a multi-level tree structure for the application, independently
of the multitask structure of the PLC.
Program sections written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL),
Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language can be
associated with each level, along with animation tables and runtime screens. .
Exporting/Importing function modules
All or part of the tree structure can be exported to function modules. In this case, all
program sections on the various module levels are exported.
Utilities make it easy to reuse these modules in new applications by means of data
and module name reassignment services.
Functional view
Presentation: Software structure: IEC language: Functions: References:

page 6/4 pages 6/85 to 6/9 pages 6/10 to 6/15 pages 6/16 to 6/26 pages 6/26 and 6/27
6/5
Setup (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Configuration editor
Hardware configuration
The first step when creating an automation project based on an Atrium, Premium or
Quantum platform is to select the processor for which a rack and power supply are
defined by default.
The configuration editor supports the intuitive and graphics-based modification and
extension of this configuration with the following elements:
b Racks, power supply
b PCMCIA memory or communication cards (Atrium/Premium) on the processor
b Discrete I/O, analog I/O or application-specific modules
b Etc
The user has two options:

1 Select the reference for the module chosen from the catalog list and drag it to an
2 1 available slot in the rack.
2 Insert a new module into a free slot from the contextual file.
Configuration and parameter settings for I/O and application-specific

modules
From the configuration screen for Atrium, Premium or Quantum racks, the
parameters screen displayed for the module concerned can be used to define the
operating characteristics and parameters for the selected application, e.g.:
b Filter values for discrete I/O
b Voltage or current range for analog I/O
b Threshold counter values
b Trajectory of axes for position control
b Weigher calibration for weighing
b Transmission speed for communication
b Presymbolization for variables associated with modules
b Etc
Configuration and parameter settings for communication networks
The “Communication” folder in the structural view can be used to define the list of
6 networks connected to the PLC station. Then, the parameters for all elements
required for networks to function correctly can be set by:
b Creating a logical network to which comments can be associated
b Configuring a logical network defining the various associated network services.
Once the network module has been created in the configuration, it must then be
6.1 associated with one of the logical networks.
Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus Plus and Fipway network modules are all configured in this
way.
The Unity Studio software suite provides the same parameter-setting services for the
global automation project, see page 6/36.
Configuration check
The following information can be accessed at any time during configuration:
b The power consumption statistics for the power supply in each of the racks in the
PLC configuration, for all the different voltages provided by each of these power
supplies
b The number of inputs/outputs configured (with Atrium or Premium platform)

6/6
Software structure Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Software structure
The Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms set up by Unity Pro software support
two types of application structure:
b Single-task: This is the more simple default structure, in which only the master task
is executed.
b Multitask: This structure, which is more suitable for high-performance real-time
events, consists of a master task, a fast task, periodic tasks, and high-priority
event-triggered tasks.
The master, fast and periodic tasks are made up of sections and subroutines. The
sections and subroutines can be programmed in any of the following languages:
Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Ladder (LD) or Function Block Diagram
(FBD) (1). The event-triggered tasks use the same languages. Sequential Function
Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language is reserved for master task sections.
The table below lists the possible program tasks for Atrium, Premium and Quantum
type processors respectively.
Platform Premium Atrium Quantum

TSX P 57 1p4M TSX P 57 2p(3)4M TSX P 57 554M TSX PCI 57 204 M 140 CPU 31110 140 CPU 651 p0
TSX P 57 3p(3)4M TSX P 57 564M TSX PCI 57 454 M 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 671 60
TSX P 57 4p(3)4M 140 CPU 534 14A
Cyclic or periodic Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
master task
Periodic fast task Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Periodic auxiliary – – 4 – – 4
tasks
Event-triggered 32 64 128 64 64 128

tasks (from modules)
Event-triggered – – 32 – 16 32
tasks (from timers)
Total number of 32 64 128 64 64 128

event-triggered
tasks
6
(1) Premium TSX P57 1p4M processors do not support Function Block Diagram (FBD) language.
Structure, modular and portable programming

6.1
The tasks of a Unity Pro program for Atrium, Premium or Quantum platforms are
Airlock (LD) Airlock_Alarm (LD) composed of several parts known as sections and subroutines. Each of these
sections can be programmed in the most appropriate language for the process to be
executed.
Oven_1 (SFC) Mon_Sec (LD)
Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program
Tunnel_1 (SFC) Oven_Alarm (ST) modules to be generated or added with ease.
Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from
Extractor (FBD) Cleaning_Alarm (ST) other subroutines in the same task.
SR0 SR0
Cleaning (ST)
Compatibility of languages compliant with IEC standard 61131-3: Unity Pro
software can be configured (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu) to
ensure that applications generated are compliant with IEC standard 61131-3.
Master task Fast task
Furthermore, as long as you use only the standard instruction libraries, you will be
able to reuse programs created in this way on any Atrium, Premium or Quantum
platform.

6/7
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Single-task memory structure

Start of
Internal processing period Two types of cyclic execution are supported:
b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option.
Input acquisition
b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by
Input acquisition (%I) the user during programming when the task parameters are set (master task).
(%I)
Normal execution (cyclic)

RUN STOP RUN STOP
Program At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches a new scan. The execution time
Program processing processing of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user
(max. 1500 ms).
Updating of outputs In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing:

Updating of outputs
(%O)
(%O) b The scan to stop immediately (STOP)
b A fault state to be displayed on the front panel of the processor
Internal processing b The alarm relay for the main rack power supply to be set to 0
End of period
Periodic execution
A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan
Cyclic execution Periodic execution
must be less than the time of the period defined (max. 255 ms). In the event of
overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be reset to 0 by the
user (via the program or terminal).
A software watchdog, which can be configured by the user (max. 1500 ms), monitors
the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is indicated (see normal
execution). The scan execution times (the last scan, the longest scan and the
shortest scan) are stored in system words %SW 30/31/32.
Multitask software structure
Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms support a multitask structure comprising:

b 1 master task (divided into several sections programmed in ST, IL, LD, FBD, and
SFC languages)
b 1 fast task (divided into sections)
b 0 to 4 auxiliary tasks (divided into sections) (1)
6 b 1 or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task)
These tasks are independent and are executed in parallel, with the PLC processor
managing their execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast
task scan:
b If any lower-priority tasks are currently being executed, they are suspended.
6.1 b The event-triggered task or fast task is executed.
b The interrupted task resumes once execution of the priority task has been
completed.
Event-triggered tasks Fast task Master task Auxiliary tasks (1)

Timer_1 Aux1
Fast Mast
Airlock_Alarm (IL) Airlock (LD) Process value Aux0
EVT1 (FBD)
Mon_Dry (LD)
Oven_1 (SFC) Oven Diag (ST)
EVT0
Outside limits Tunnel_1 (SFC)
Oven_Alarm (ST)
Temp. (FBD)
Cleaning_Alarm (ST) Extractor (FBD)
SR0 SR0 SR0
Drying (LD)
Priority +…-
This structure optimizes the way in which processing power is employed and can be
used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as each task
can be written and debugged independently of the others.
(1) Tasks reserved for top-of-the-range Premium TSX P57 5p4M and Quantum
140 CPU 651 p0/67160 processors.
Presentation: Setup: IEC language: Functions: References:

page 6/4 pages 6/83 and 6/84 pages 6/10 to 6/15 pages 6/16 to 6/26 pages 6/26 and 6/27
6/8
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Multitask memory structure (continued)

Master task
This task, which can be periodic or cyclic, executes the main program. It is activated
systematically.
Each of its component sections and subroutines can be programmed in Ladder (LD),
Function Block Diagram (FBD), Structured Text (ST) or Instruction List (IL) language.
Several sections of the master task can be programmed in Sequential Function Chart
(SFC) or Grafcet language.
Fast task
This task, which has a higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to allow
time for tasks with lower priorities to be executed. It should be used when fast
periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored and acknowledged.
The execution of the master task (lower priority) is suspended while the fast task is
being executed. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible in
order to avoid adversely affecting master task processing operations.
Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed
in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST,
IL, LD or FBD).
Auxiliary tasks
These tasks, which are available on top-of-the-range Premium TSX P57 5p4M and
Quantum 140 CPU 651 p0/67160 processors, are designed for use with slower types
of processing operation such as measurement, process control, HMI, application
diagnostics, etc.
Periodic type auxiliary tasks have the lowest level of priority and are executed once
the higher-priority periodic tasks (master and fast) have completed their scan.
Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed
in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST,
IL, LD or FBD).
Event-triggered tasks
Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to one period. The
execution of these tasks is triggered asynchronously by:
An event from certain application-specific modules (e.g.: overrun of a counter
threshold, change of state of a discrete input)
An event from the event timers
These tasks are processed before all other tasks and are thus suitable for processing
6
requiring very short reaction times in comparison to the arrival of the event.
Atrium, Premium or Quantum platforms have 3 levels of priority (these are, in
descending order, module event EVT0, module events EVTi and timer events
Timeri). 6.1
These tasks, each comprised of a single section, can be programmed in Instruction
List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or
FBD).
Assignment of I/O channels to tasks

Each of the master, fast or event-triggered tasks reads (at the start of the scan) and
writes (at the end of the scan) the inputs assigned to it. By default, they are assigned
to the master task.
Input acquisition
For the Quantum platform, the remote inputs/outputs (RIO) are only assigned to the
master task (these assignments can be made per station or for each of the
component sections of the task), while the distributed inputs/outputs (DIO) are all
assigned to the master task (without assignment to its component sections).
Program processing
For event-triggered tasks, it is possible to assign input/output channels (1) other than
those relating to the event. Exchanges are then performed implicitly at the start of
processing for inputs and at the end of processing for outputs.
Updating of outputs
(1) These channel assignments are made per I/O module for Quantum and per channel for
Atrium/Premium inputs/outputs.
Presentation: Setup: IEC language: Functions: References:

6/9
IEC language Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Unity Pro software
The five IEC languages
The five graphical or textual languages available in Unity Pro are used for
programming Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms.
The 3 graphical languages are:

b Ladder (LD)
b Function Block Diagram (FBD)
b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet
The 2 textual languages are:

b Structured Text (ST)
b Instruction List (IL)
For these 5 languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with
IEC standard 61131-3 to create applications, which can be transferred from one
platform to another. Unity Pro software also provides extensions to this standard set
of instructions. As they are specific to Atrium/Premium and Quantum PLCs, these
extensions support the development of more complex applications in order to
maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms.
Functionalities common to all five language editors
The editors for each of the 5 languages provide a number of common tools used for
writing, reading and analyzing programs in a user-friendly manner:
b The text editors for Instruction List (IL) and Structured Text (ST) support:
v Text entry in insert or overwrite mode
v The use of dialog boxes for the assisted entry of variables, functions, function
blocks or assignment instructions
v Checks on data entry to detect syntax or semantics errors. The user is informed of
the result of this check by red “wavy” underlining or by a change in the color of the
text concerned.
v Access to a set of colors, which can be used to facilitate reading by distinguishing
text (black) from operators (red), language key words (blue), and program comments
(green)
6 b The graphics editors for Ladder (LD) language, Function Block Diagram (FBD)
language and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language feature:
v A set of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols in the
language via the mouse or keyboard
v A pop-up menu, which can be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse
6.1
b Unlimited number and length of comments. These comments can be positioned as
text objects in any cell (graphical languages) or at any point in expressions (textual
languages).
b Assisted data entry functions for:

v Accessing DFB function libraries, the variables editor or the text object for entering
comments
v Initializing a variable reference
v Initializing the animation table on selected variables
v Displaying and modifying the properties of the selected variable
v Creating variables in real time without having to use the data editor
b “Cut”, “Copy”, “Paste”, “Delete”, “Move”, etc.
b Setting bookmarks on lines of text or in the margin so that you can:

v Easily locate lines in important program sections
v Browse in an editor by bookmark, label or line and column number
Presentation: Setup: Software structure: Functions: References:

6/10
IEC languages (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Ladder (LD) language
Each section or subroutine using Ladder language consists of a series of rungs,

which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung consists of graphic objects
(placed in cells arranged in columns and lines) corresponding to contacts, links, coils,
operation blocks, EF/EFB/DFB function blocks, jumps, SR calls, etc.
Program structure (section or subroutine)
Each Ladder language section may contain:
b Between 11 and 64 columns (number set by user)

b Up to 2000 lines (for all rungs in the section)
6
Graphics palette in the Ladder language editor

6.1
“Mixed Display” mode supports the unrestricted display of comments, addresses and
symbols for the variables used for rungs.

6/11
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Function Block Diagram (FBD) language, with Unity Pro Large and
X Large version
Function Block Diagram language is a graphical language based on function blocks

associated with variables or parameters, which are linked together. This language is
particularly suitable for process control applications.

6 The graphical language FBD supports three types of function block:
b Elementary blocks (EFs)
b Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs), sorted into different libraries depending on
their type of use
6.1 b Derived Function Blocks (DFBs), which have a structure identical to that of EFBs
but are created by the user with the ST, IL, LD or FBD programming languages
Within the same section, subroutines can be called using a specific block. Program
jumps to a block instance can also be programmed.
A section programmed in FBD language contains the equivalent of a grid with 30

columns and 23 rows. The blocks are positioned on this grid in minimum steps of
1/10 of a column and 1/10 of a line (called halftone dot).

6/12
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Grafcet language
Sequential Function Chart (and Grafcet) language can be used to describe the
sequential part of an automation system in simple graphical format using steps and
transitions.
SFC language does not process charts in the same way as Grafcet language:
b SFC only authorizes one token in one chart.
b Grafcet language authorizes several tokens in one chart.
Unity Pro software has one editor for these two languages with the option of defining
behavior in the application settings (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions
menu).
Program structure (master task section)
SFC language is only used in sections belonging to the master task. Each SFC
section consists of a main chart sub-section CHART and sub-sections for each of the
macro-steps. The component parts of the charts are:
b Macro-steps, which are the sole representation of a set of steps and transitions
(used to set up a hierarchical chart structure)
b Steps
b Transitions and directed links between steps and transitions
Associated with steps and transitions respectively, the actions and transition
conditions can be:
b Integrated into the CHART or macro-step charts, in which case the actions or
transition conditions are defined by a single variable
b Processed in specific sections, in which case dedicated processing (to be
programmed in Ladder, Function Block Diagram, Structured Text or Instruction List
language) is necessary
In order to check that machine scans have been completed successfully, activity
times (minimum, maximum) can be associated with each step. These times are set
by the user.
Program structure (section in master task)
For each SFC section, the graphics editor provides a maximum of:
b One grid containing 32 columns and 200 rows, or 6400 cells. Steps, transitions or
jumps all need one cell respectively. 6
b 1024 steps (macro-steps and steps in macro-steps)
b 20 actions assigned to the same step
b 100 steps activated at the same time
b 100 actions activated at the same time
6.1
To help you to create basic charts, graphic screens can be used to create “n” steps
in series and “m” steps in parallel in a single operation.
Dialog boxes can be used to assign associated properties to steps (activity time,
actions), transitions (variable linked to transition condition), etc.

6/13
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Structured Text (ST) language
Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language, which is

particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations,
message handling, etc.
Structured Text language, which can be used to directly transcribe an analysis based
on an organization chart, is structured into expressions composed of a series of
instructions organized in lines.
6 There is no limit to the number of characters an instruction line may contain (the only
limit is the program memory available for the Premium and Quantum platforms,
except on TSX P57 10…40 processors, where the limit is 64 Kb). The length of the
section is only limited by the size of the application memory.
6.1 Four preformatted expression structures can be called up directly from the toolbar:
b Conditional action : IF…THEN…ELSIF…THEN…ELSE…END-IF;
b Iterative conditional action: WHILE…DO…END_WHILE;
REPEAT…UNTIL…END_REPEAT;
b Repetitive action: FOR…TO…BY…DO…END_FOR;
b Selective action: CASE…OF…ELSE…END_CASE;
The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables
linked to function blocks.
To make the expressions easier to read, different colors are used to identify objects,
language key words and program comments.

6/14
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Instruction List (IL) language
Instruction List language is a language representing the equivalent of a Ladder

diagram in text form. It can be used to write Boolean and arithmetic equations using
all the functions available in the Unity Pro language (calling of functions and function
blocks, assignment of variables, creation of program jumps, branching to
subroutines within a program section, etc.).

6
A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions
classified into the following different families:
b Bit instructions, e.g. read input: LD overspeed 6.1
b Function block instructions, e.g. call timer: CAL MOTOR_TIMER
b Numerical instructions using single, double and floating point integers, e.g.: LD
Result ADD Surplus ST Archive
b Word table or character string instructions, e.g. make assignment: LD
Result:10:=Setpoint:10
b Program instructions, e.g. SR call: CALL SR10
The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables
linked to function blocks.

6/15
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Data editor
The data editor, which can be accessed from the structural view of the project,
provides a single tool for performing the following editing tasks:
b Declaration of data including variables and function blocks (declaration of their

type, instants and attributes)
b Use and archiving of function block data types in different libraries
b Hierarchical view of data structures
b Searching, sorting and filtering of data
b Creation of a hyperlink to access a description from any variable comment
The data is displayed under four tabs:
b “Variables” tab for the creation and management of the following data instances:
bits, words, double words, inputs/outputs, tables, and structures
b “DDT Types” tab for the creation of derived data types (tables and structures)
b “Function Blocks” tabs for the declaration of EFB and DFB function blocks
b “DFB Types” for the creation of DFB user function block data types
Each data instance has several attributes, of which:

b The name and type of the variable are mandatory
b The comment, physical address in the memory or initial values are optional
The data editor columns can be configured (number of columns, order). All the
attributes associated with a variable can be displayed in a properties window.
This editor can be accessed at any time during programming by selecting variables
for data modification or creation.
6.1
Presentation: Setup: Software structure: IEC language: References:

6/16
platform 6
Unity Pro software
DFB user function blocks

The user can create his own function blocks for specific application requirements on
Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms using Unity Pro software.
Once created and saved in the library, these user function blocks can be reused as
easily as EFBs (Elementary Function Blocks).
These user function blocks can be used to structure an application. They are used
when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for fixing a
standard programming routine. They can be read-only protected or
read/write-protected. They can be exported to all other Unity Pro applications.
Using a DFB function block in one or more applications:
b Simplifies program design and entry
b Improves program readability and understanding
b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB block function are
identified in the data editor)
b Enables the use of private variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent
of the application
A DFB function block is set up in several phases:
b The DFB is designed by assigning a name, a set of parameters (inputs, outputs,
public and private internal variables) and a comment to it via the data editor.
b The code is created in one or more sections of the program, with the following
languages selected according to requirements: Structured Text, Instruction List,
Ladder or Function Block Diagram (ST, IL, LD or FBD).
b The DFB may be stored in a library with an associated version number.
b A DFB instance is created in the data editor or when the function is called in the
program editor.
b This instance is used in the program in the same way as an EFB (Elementary
Function Block). (The instance can be created from within the program.)
6.1
Main characteristics
Inputs 32 max. (1)
Outputs 32 max. (2)
Inputs/outputs 32 max. (1) (2)
Public internal variables Unlimited (can be accessed via the application program)
Private internal variables Unlimited (cannot be accessed via the application program)
Comment 1024 characters max.
Program sections Unlimited, each section can be programmed independently in
one of the 4 languages (IL, ST, LD, and FBD).
(1) The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 32.
(2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 32.

6/17
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Function block libraries
The function and function block libraries manager contains all the elements provided
with Unity Pro software. The functions and function blocks are organized into
libraries, which themselves consist of families. Depending on the type of PLC
selected and the model of processor, the user will have a sub-set of these libraries
available to write his/her applications. However, the “Base Lib” library contains a set
of functions and function blocks, the majority of which are compatible with all
platforms. In particular, it contains the blocks compliant with IEC 61131-3.
The “Base Lib” library is structured into families:
b Timers and counters
b Internal process control
b Array management
b Comparison
b Date and time management
b Logic processing
b Mathematical processing
b Statistical processing
b Character string processing
b Type-to-type data conversion
This library, which covers standard automation functions, is supplemented by other,

more application-specific libraries, which are platform-specific:
b Management library for motion control and fast counting

b Process control library. The CONT_CTL library can be used to set up
process-specific control loops. In particular, it offers controller, derivative and integral
control functions.
b Communication library, providing an easy means of integrating communication
programs from PLCs with those used by HMIs from the PLC application program.
Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to share data or
to deliver data to be displayed on an HMI.
b Extended library, providing additional algorithms, e.g.: EFBs for calculating mean
values, selecting a maximum value, performing movements with first-order
interpolation, detecting edges or assigning a hysteresis to process variables, etc.
b Diagnostics library, which can be used to monitor actuators and contains EFBs
for active diagnostics, reactive diagnostics, interlocking diagnostics, permanent
6 process condition diagnostics, dynamic diagnostics, monitoring of signal groups, etc.

b “System” library, which provides EFBs for the execution of system functions:
evaluation of scan time, availability of several different system clocks, SFC section
monitoring, display of system state, etc.
b Finally, a library named “obsolete” containing all function blocks used by legacy
programming software needed to perform application conversions
6.1
Management of user standards
Users may create libraries and families in order to store their own DFB function
blocks and DDT data structures. This enhancement allows users to take advantage
of programming standards adapted to their needs, along with version management.
This means that it is possible to:
b Check the version of the elements used in an application program against those
stored in the library
b Perform an upgrade, if necessary

6/18
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Debugging tools
Unity Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging Atrium, Premium or
Quantum applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions:
b Dynamic program animation
b Setting of watchdogs or breakpoints (not authorized in event-triggered tasks)
b Step-by-step program execution. A function in this mode enables
section-by-section execution. Instruction-by-instruction execution can be launched
from the previous breakpoint. Three execution commands are therefore possible
when the element to be processed is a subroutine (SR) or DFB user block:
Insertion/removal of watchpoint
v Detailed step-by-step or “Step Into”. This command is used to move to the first
element of the SR or DFB.
v Overall step-by-step or “Step Over”. This command is used to process the entire
SR or DFB.
v Outgoing step-by-step or “Step Out”. This command is used to move to the next
instruction after the SR or DFB element.
Execution command b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST), auxiliary (AUX), and
event-triggered (EVTi) tasks.
Animation of program elements
Dynamic animation is managed section by section. A button in the toolbar is used to

activate or deactivate animation for each section.
When the PLC is in RUN, this mode can be used to view, simultaneously:
b The animation of a program section, regardless of the language used
b The variables window containing the application objects created automatically
from the section viewed
Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. The “Tool tip”
function, which uses help balloons, can be used to view a variable and its content
Animation of ST program simultaneously when the object is selected with the mouse (or other pointing device).
Two types of animation are supported:

b Standard: The variables of the active section are refreshed at the end of the master
task (MAST).
b Synchronized: The watchpoint can be used to synchronize the display of animated
variables with a program element in order to determine their value at this precise
point in the program.
6
Animation table
Animation table
Tables containing the variables of the application to be monitored or modified can be
created by data entry or initialized automatically from the selected program section.
In addition to data animation it is possible to: 6.1
b Modify bit variables or force them to 0 or 1
b Change the display format
b Copy or move variables
b Search by cross-reference
b Display the list of forced bits
These tables can be stored in the application and retrieved from there at a later date.
Debugging of DFB user function blocks
The parameters and public variables of these blocks are displayed and animated in
real time using animation tables, with the possibility of modifying and forcing the
required objects.
In exactly the same way as with other program elements, the watchpoint, breakpoint,
step-by-step execution, and program code diagnostics functions can be used to
analyze the behavior of DFBs. Setting a breakpoint in a DFB user function block
instance stops the execution of the task containing this block.

6/19
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Debugging in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language
The various debugging tools are also available in SFC language. However, unlike
other sections (IL, ST, LD or FBD) an SFC section executed step by step does not
stop execution of the task but instead freezes the SFC chart. Several breakpoints
can be declared simultaneously within a single SFC section.
Numerous commands are available in this debugging mode via the control panel:
b Deactivate active step(s)
b Activate initial step(s)
b Disable step execution times
b Freeze chart regardless of transition conditions
b Stop processing of steps
b Move to the next step taking account of the transition conditions
b Enable transition and move to next step(s) (detailed step-by-step command, “Step
Into”)
b Enable transition in order to execute the end of the macro-step (outgoing
step-by-step command, “Step Out”)
b Preposition chart on steps for which markers have been set, etc.
SFC control panel
PLC simulator
The simulator integrated in Unity Pro can be used to test the application program for
Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLCs from the PC terminal without having to connect
to the PLC processor. The functions provided by the debugging tools are available
for debugging the master, fast and auxiliary tasks.
As the simulator does not manage the PLC I/O, animation tables can be used to
simulate the state of inputs by forcing them to 0 or 1.
The simulator can be connected to third-party applications via an OPC server with
OFS (OPC Factory Server) software.
Simulator control panel
Documentation editor
The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser, which shows
the file structure in tree form.
6 It allows all or part of the application file to be printed on any graphics printer
accessible under Windows and using True Type technology, in A4 or US letter print
format.
The documentation editor supports the creation of user-specific documentation files
using the following headings:
6.1 b Title page
b Contents
b General information
b Title block
b Configuration
b EF, EFB and DFB type function blocks
b User variables
b Communication
Access to documentation editor b Project structure
b Program
b Animation tables and cross-references
b Runtime screens
The documentation editor can generate the documentation file based on two different
structures:
b Structural view: All the objects in the project are associated with their
corresponding headings.
b Functional view: The objects in the project are associated with the function
modules to which they belong.
The documentation file can be created and saved as the project progresses, from
one Unity Pro session to another.

6/20
platform 6
Unity Pro software

Integrated diagnostics
Presentation
Diagnostics integrated into Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms
System diagnostics Diagnostics viewers
Higher-level
Vijeo Look M.E.S.
Monitor Pro
Processor for In-rack I/O Remote I/O
system bits and modules modules
words on Fipio Ethernet TCP/IP
Quantum
Cell level
Application diagnostics
Premium Magelis XBT/T XBT
Machine level
Unity Pro
PC
The diagnostics offer for Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms is based on three
components:
b System diagnostics
b DFB and EFB diagnostic function blocks (for system and application diagnostics)
b Error message display system or viewers supplied as standard with Magelis
XBT/T XBT terminals, Vijeo Look/ Monitor Pro supervisory software and Unity Pro
setup software.
Functions 6
System diagnostics
The system diagnostics for the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms supports the
monitoring of system bits/words, I/O modules and activity times (minimum/maximum)
of SFC steps. By simply choosing the relevant option in the application configuration,
6.1
any event will result in time-stamped messages being generated automatically without
the need for any additional programming thanks to these diagnostics viewers (1).
With the assistance of Unity Pro's integrated diagnostics, this function can be used to
perform 1st level diagnostics of the elements in the configuration, up to and including
each I/O module channel.
Configuration level Module level
Viewer window (example with Unity Pro software) Channel level
(1) Diagnostics viewers are tools used to display and acknowledge error messages relating to
diagnostics. They are supplied as standard with Unity Pro, Vijeo Look and Monitor Pro
software and with Magelis terminals.
6/21
platform 6
Unity Pro software

Unity Pro software also has a library of function blocks for monitoring, called diagnostic
DFBs and EFBs. The library of diagnostic function blocks contains:
b Manufacturer blocks for system diagnostics

v IO_DIA input/output fault, which is used to monitor the state of inputs/outputs.
v ASI_DIA, which monitors whether an error has occurred on the AS-i bus (module
or bus fault, no slave, slave not configured or faulty).
b Manufacturer blocks for application diagnostics, for example:

v EV_DIA, which monitors whether an event (bit status) has the correct value at a
given time (no notion of timing).
v MV_DIA, D_GRP, D_REA, which monitor whether an event (change in the status of
a bit) occurs in accordance with the specified time conditions.
v ALRM_DIA, which monitors the combination of the status of 2 bits.
v NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA, which can be used to check, control and perform
diagnostics for elements in the working part of the system made up of the
combination of 2 actuators and 2 sensors.
b Open diagnostics blocks

These enable users to create their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the
Usrst_dia specific requirements of their applications and therefore to supplement the
ED manufacturer DFBs and EFBs described above. They can be created from 2 model
Inputs
COND ERROR
blocks, which must be written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Function Block
Outputs Diagram (FBD) or Instruction List (IL) language.
STATUS
AREA_NR
OP_CTRL Diagnostics with fault finding
Furthermore, when a fault occurs, Unity Pro analyzes the program sections
concerned and opens a second window displaying the causes and probable sources
of the fault.
The user or process operator is guided though the fault-finding process, enabling
machine downtimes to be reduced.
The configuration module or instruction, which is the source of the fault, can also be
6 accessed via the diagnostics viewer integrated into Unity Pro, directly from the alarm
in the viewer output window (see page 6/23).
6.1

6/22
platform 6
Unity Pro software

Diagnostics viewers
All the diagnostic events processed by Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms via
diagnostic DFBs/EFBs are stored in a buffer (specific data memory area on the PLC).
The information contained in this buffer is sent (transparently for the user) to viewers
for automatic display and for management of faults and alarms. The viewer function
is supplied as standard with:
b Vijeo Look and Monitor Pro V7 supervisory software
b Unity Pro programming software
b Magelis XBT F and Magelis iPC HMI terminals (function only available with
Premium PLCs)
The integrated viewer in Unity Pro can also be used to access the instruction or
module, which is the source of the fault. See “Diagnostics with fault finding”, page
6/22.
Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms have multiviewer capability (can be used
with a maximum of 15 viewers). A PC-compatible station with the viewer function can
be multi-PLC (can be used with a maximum of 15 Atrium/Premium/Quantum
platforms).
The buffer/viewer structure supports:

b A single point for fault management in each application
b Time-stamping of the occurrence of faults at source
b Storage of intermittent faults in memory
b Independence with regard to the viewer functions. The frame sent from the PLC
buffer is identical for all viewers.
b Automatic archiving of all error messages
Viewer
Output window
The diagnostics viewer takes the form of an output window divided into 2 sections:
b A message list indicating, for each alarm: state, DFB type, geographical zone,
dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and status
b An area for additional information about the selected message: type, comment,
date of appearance, specific data, variables in error state, etc.
Runtime screens
The runtime screen tool is integrated into Unity Pro. The runtime screens are
designed to facilitate the operation of automated processes during debugging,
6
startup and maintenance. The runtime screens provide a set of information
(explanatory texts, display of dynamic values, push buttons, and synoptics), enabling
users to act quickly and easily to modify and dynamically monitor PLC variables.
The runtime screens editor provides all the HMI (Human/Machine Interface)
6.1
elements needed for the animated design and viewing of processes. It enables these
screens to be designed using specific tools:
b Screen: Creation of runtime screens, which can be classified according to family.
b Message: Creation of messages to be displayed.
b Objects: Creation of a graphic objects library using:
v Geometrical elements (line, rectangle, ellipse, incorporation of images, controller
front panels, etc.)
v Control elements (buttons, data entry fields, screen browsing controls, etc.)
v Animation elements (colors, flashing elements, bar graphs, etc.)
When the station on which Unity Pro has been installed is connected to the PLC, the
user can obtain a dynamic display of the screens according to the state of the
process. Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the priority attributed, either
via the keyboard or a PLC request.
When online, the Unity Pro application program can be accessed directly from the
runtime screens by clicking on the selected object in a synoptic screen view. It is also
possible to activate the animation table or cross-reference functions by selecting one
or more variables on the screen. To make the display easier to read, the synoptic
views can be displayed in full-screen view.

6/23
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN
Unity Pro enables changes to be made to the program when the PLC connected to
the programming terminal is in RUN. These modifications are made by performing
the following operations:
b Where necessary, transferring the application in the PLC to the PC terminal
running Unity Pro.
b Preparing the program changes offline. These program modifications can be of
any type and in any language (IL, ST, LD, FBD, and SFC), for example
adding/deleting SFC steps or actions. Furthermore, modifications can be made to the
code of a DFB user function block (although its interface cannot be modified).
b Updating the program in the PLC (in RUN) to reflect these program changes.
This function allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be
added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified
and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes
at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required.
Cross-References functions
The Unity Pro Cross-References function, which is available in standalone mode

(offline) and when connected to the PLC (online), allows users to view all the
elements of a PLC application by searching for variables of any type. This view
indicates where the declared variable is used as well as the mode in which it is used
(write, read, etc.).
This function also provides access to the Search/Replace function for variable
names.
The variables search can be initialized from any editor (language, data, runtime
screen, animation table, etc.).
Import/export function
The import/export function available in Unity Pro supports the following operations
from the structural and functional project views:
b Via the import function, to reuse all or part of a project created previously in the
current project
b Via the export function, to copy all or part of the current project to a file for
6 subsequent reuse
The files generated on export are generally in XML format (1). However, variables
can be exported or imported in the following formats in addition to XML:
b .xvm format compatible with OFS data server software
6.1 b Source format, in a .scy file compatible with PL7 design software
b Text format with separator (TAB), in a .txt file for compatibility with any other
system
On import, data can be assigned to new instances of the following elements via an
assistant:
b DFB function blocks
b DDT data structures
b Simple data
Furthermore, when importing a function module, the data associated with animation
tables and runtime screens is also reassigned.
The XML import function also supports the transfer of an Atrium, Premium or
Quantum PLC configuration prepared in the SIS Pro costing and configuration tool
for use in the creation of a project in Unity Pro.
This import function means that the user does not have to repeat the PLC
configuration process when this has already been completed in the SIS Pro tool.
(1) XML language: Open text-based language providing structural and semantic information.

6/24
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Application converters
Unity Pro's integrated conversion tools can be used to convert PLC applications
created with Concept and PL7 programming and setup software in Unity Pro
applications.
Concept/Unity Pro converter (Quantum PLC)
The conversion can be performed from a Concept V2.5 application (possible in V2.11
or later but only once it has been updated to version V2.5). In order to perform the
conversion, the application must be exported to an ASCII file in Concept.
The export file is converted into Unity Pro source files automatically. This
source file is then analyzed by Unity Pro. At the end of the procedure, a conversion
report is generated and an output window displays any conversion errors from which
the part of the program to be modified can be accessed directly.
The Concept application converter converts the application into Unity Pro but does
not guarantee that it will operate correctly in real time. It is therefore essential to test
or debug any converted application.
PL7/Unity Pro converter (Premium and Atrium slot PLC)
The conversion can be performed from a PL7 application V4 or later (Premium PLC
or Atrium slot PLC). In order to perform the conversion, the source file (complete
application) or source file (user function block) must be exported in PL7.
The conversion procedure is similar to that of the Concept conversion described
above.
Operating system update utilities
OS-Loader software is designed for updating operating systems on Atrium, Premium

and Quantum platforms and is supplied with Unity Pro software.
It can be used to update the following for compatibility with Unity Pro:
b Premium TSX P57 2p3M/2623M and TSX P57 3p3M/3623M processors
b Quantum 140 CPU 434 12A and 140 CPU 534 14A processors (requires PV 04 or
later)
b Ethernet TCP/IP TSX ETY and 140 NOE 771 communication modules
These operating system updates are performed as follows for the various types of
processor:
6
b Uni-Telway RS 485 terminal link for Premium processors
b Modbus or Modbus Plus terminal link for Quantum processors
b Ethernet TCP/IP network for integrated Ethernet port on Premium processors and
Ethernet Premium and Quantum processors 6.1
Communication drivers
The drivers used most frequently on the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms
are installed at the same time as the Unity Pro software.
Furthermore, Unity Pro also includes the following communication drivers, which can
be installed as required:
Driver type Windows XP Windows NT Windows 98 Windows 95 OSS/2 DOS
Windows 2000 Millennium
Uni-Telway V1.6 IE17 V1.9 IE17 V1.6 IE17 V7.8 IE18 – V7.4 IE14
TSX FPC10 V1.3 IE05 V1.3 IE08 V1.3 IE05 V2.4 IE14 V2.4 IE13 V2.2 IE11
TSX FPC20 V1.2 IE03 V1.3 IE08 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE05 –
TSX SCP 114 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 – –
Ethway V1.1 IE02 V1.1 IE03 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE22 –
ISAway V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE06 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE09 – –
PCIway V1.0 IE06 – – – – –
XIP V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 – –
Modbus V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 – –
USB for mini-DIN Included with – – – – –
terminal port PL7
USB for USB terminal port V1.0 IE14 – – – – –

6/25
Unity Pro software
Advanced openness for experienced IT engineers
Advanced openness, which is reserved for experienced IT engineers, supports the

development of interfaces between Unity and expert tools as well as specific
user-defined functions.
This type of development requires expert IT knowledge in the following areas:
b C++ or Visual Basic languages

b Client/server architectures
b XML and COM/DCOM technologies
b Issues relating to data synchronization
As a supplement to the Unity Studio software suite, the UDE (Unity Developer's
Edition) development tool can be used to set up made-to-order solutions. In addition
to a development kit, it includes the Unity servers, training, documentation, and
technical support.
This UDE development tool can only be supplied once a specific contract has been
Example of a made-to-order solution, which can signed with Schneider Electric. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
be set up with UDE
References
Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large software packages
The software is available in 3 versions:

b Unity Pro Medium for programming and setting up Unity automation platforms:
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10 and 57 20
b Unity Pro Large for programming and setting up automation platforms:
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30 and 57 40
v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U and 534 14U processors
b Unity Pro Extra Large for programming and setting up all Unity automation
platforms:
v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30
v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30, 57 40 and 57 50
v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U, 534 14U, 651 50, 651 60 and Hot
6 Standby 140 CPU 671 60 processors
Furthermore, Unity Pro can be used to design and run programmable process control
loops on Premium TSX 57 40 and 57 50 platforms and Quantum platforms with 140
CPU 651 50, 651 60 and 671 60 processors (access to CONT_CTL process control
function block library).
6.1
Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software
Users who have already purchased these installed base software programs and
have a current subscription may purchase Unity Pro version V2.0 software at
vastly reduced prices. These upgrades are only possible for licenses of the same
type (from Concept XL group license to Unity Pro Extra Large group license).
OS Windows composition and compatibility
Unity Pro multilingual software is compatible with Windows 2000 Professional and
Windows XP operating systems.
It comprises:
b Documentation in electronic format in 4 languages (English, French, German, and
Spanish)
This documentation can be ordered separately in paper format.
b Converters for converting applications created with Concept and PL7 Pro
programming software
b PLC simulator
Cables for connecting the processor to the programming PC must be ordered
separately.
Presentation: Setup: Software structure: IEC language: Functions:

page 6/82 pages 6/83 and 6/84 pages 6/85 to 6/9 pages 6/10 to 6/15 pages 6/16 to 6/26
6/26
platform 6
Unity Pro software
Unity Pro Medium version 2.0 software packages
For PLCs Description Type of license Reference Weight
kg
TSX 57 0p…57 20 Unity Pro Medium software Single-station UNY SPU MFU CD 20 –
TSX PCI 57 20 packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MFG CD 20 –
Software upgrades from: Single-station UNY SPU MZU CD 20 –
- Concept M Group (3 stations) UNY SPU MZG CD 20 –
- PL7 Junior
Unity Pro Large version 2.0 software packages
kg
TSX 57 0p…57 40 Unity Pro Large software Single-station UNY SPU LFU CD 20 –
TSX PCI 57 20/30 packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LFG CD 20 –
140 CPU 311 10
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LFT CD 20 –
140 CPU 434 12U
140 CPU 534 14U Site (> 10 stations) UNY SPU LFF CD 20 –
Software upgrades from: Single-station UNY SPU LZU CD 20 –
- Concept M Group (3 stations) UNY SPU LZG CD 20 –
- PL7 Junior
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU LZT CD 20 –
Site (> 10 stations) UNY SPU LZF CD 20 –
Unity Pro Extra Large version 2.0 software packages
kg
TSX 57 0p…57 50 Unity Pro Extra Large software Single-station UNY SPU EFU CD 20 –
TSX PCI 57 20/30 packages Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EFG CD 20 –
140 CPU 311 10
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EFT CD 20 –
140 CPU 434 12U
140 CPU 534 14U Site (> 10 stations) UNY SPU EFF CD 20 –
140 CPU 651 50/60 Software upgrades from: Single-station UNY SPU EZU CD 20 –
140 CPU 671 60 - Concept M Group (3 stations) UNY SPU EZG CD 20 –
- PL7 Junior
Team (10 stations) UNY SPU EZT CD 20 –
- ProWORX NxT
- ProWORX 32 Site (> 10 stations) UNY SPU EZF CD 20 –
Documentation for Unity Pro version 2.0
kg
Getting Started manuals Assisted creation of a first English UNY USE 100 10E –
(on CD-ROM) Unity Pro application French UNY USE 100 10E –
Hardware and software

manuals (on CD-ROM)
Platform setup for:
- Atrium/Premium
Multilingual: English, French,
German, and Spanish
UNY USE 909 CD M – 6
- Quantum
- Momentum
- Electromagnetic compatibility
of networks and fieldbuses
Software setup for: 6.1
- Unity Pro
- EF/EFB/DFB function blocks
library
Separate parts
Description Use from processor To PC port Length Reference Weight
kg
PC terminal connection Mini-DIN port for RS 232D (15-way 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
cables Premium TSx 57 1p/2p/3p/4p SUB-D connector)
Atrium TSX PCI 57 USB port 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 0.150
Modbus port RS 232D (15-way 3.7 m 990 NAA 263 20 0.300
15-way SUB-D Quantum SUB-D connector) 15 m 990 NAA 263 50 0.180
140 CPU 311 10
TSX PCX 1031 140 CPU 434 12A
140 CPU 534 14A
RJ45 connector for Modbus RJ45 connector 1m 110 XCA 282 01 –
port Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 3m 110 XCA 282 02 –
6m 110 XCA 282 03 –
USB port Premium TSX 57 5p USB port 3.3 m UNY XCA USB 033 –
Quantum 140 CPU 6p1
Presentation: Setup: Software structure: IEC language: Functions:

page 6/82 pages 6/83 and 6/84 pages 6/85 to 6/9 pages 6/10 to 6/15 pages 6/16 to 6/26
6/27
setup platform 6
Unity EFB Toolkit software
Presentation
Unity EFB Toolkit is the software for developing EF functions and EFB function
blocks in C language and is optional software for Unity Pro. It can be used to develop
new functions (whose internal code is written in C language) to extend and complete
the set of functions proposed as standard in Unity Pro. This software comes with
Microsoft Visual C++ @.Net which can be used to debug the functions used on the
Unity Pro PLC simulator. Unity EFB Toolkit also includes a service for creating and
managing families of functions, with a view to their integration in the Unity Pro
function libraries.
Setup
C language development software is a proper tool for managing the whole function
while it is being performed:
b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in Unity Pro, with automatic file
organization
b Powerful tools for testing and debugging
b Management of compatibilities and software versions of created functions
b Generation of files for subsequent installation of functions on other development
stations
Managing function families
The software can be used to define different function families. These functions, also
known as EFs/EFBs, are stored in families, making it possible to create an organized
library of functions written in C language.
Once created, these families can be distributed and integrated in the Unity Pro
libraries.
They are:
b Arranged in families/functions
b Used in all languages with the same flexibility as standard functions (data entry
wizard)
b Managed by the Unity Pro library tool (version management)
Editing functions
6.1
The various tabs in the EFB Toolkit software editor allow the user to create the
function by:
b Declaring the interface, all data types are possible (elementary, structures, tables)
b Supporting public and private variables
Writing the source code file in C language

A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such
as the real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, math functions. In particular, it
is possible to perform numerical processing in floating point format.
6/28
Setup(continued), Modicon Premium automation
reference platform 6
Unity EFB Toolkit software
Setup (continued)
Debugging functions
The function created can be tested after insertion in an application and loading into
the Unity Pro PLC simulator.
The Microsoft Visual C++ tool is used to debug the function.
It is used to:
b Insert breakpoints
b Perform step by step execution
b Display the code with the breakpoints visible
b Display manipulated data
Enhancing the function library
As the function has been debugged, it can be generated and distributed, and the
updating tool supplied with Unity Pro can be used to enhance the libraries on a user
station.
Version management means that at any time the user knows the level of functions
installed on a station and can update the application with the latest existing versions.
References
The “companion” software for Unity Pro, Unity EFB Toolkit can be used to create EF
elementary blocks and EFB elementary function blocks. These are developed in
Visual C++ language and are integrated in Unity Pro function block libraries.
The Unity EFB Toolkit software and its documentation are supplied in electronic form
on CD-ROM in English.
Description Type of Language Reference Weight

license kg
Unity EFB Toolkit, kit for Single English UNY SPU ZFU CD 20E – 6
developing EF and EFB (1 station) (software and
blocks electronic
documentation)
Unity EFB Toolkit UNY CSP SPU ZBU –
subscription renewal
6.1
6/29
platform 6
Unity SFC View software
Presentation
Unity SFC View is integrated in human/machine interface (HMI) applications for

monitoring Unity Pro sequential applications written in sequential function chart
language (SFC or Grafcet) executed by a PLC.
Set up in the same way as an ActiveX control component, Unity SFC View is used to
display status information relating to SFC charts executed by a Premium or Quantum
PLC. Installed on an HMI station, Unity SFC View monitors and controls the status
of SFC charts in real time, supplying detailed diagnostic data.
Unity SFC View reads the necessary data from the Unity project database in offline
mode. The PLC data is accessed online via the OFS (OPC Factory Server).
Without needing to recreate SFC charts in the HMI environment, Unity SFC View
reads the structure of the SFC charts directly from the Unity project database.
Modifications made to the SFC application are detected and updated at any time.
In online mode, Unity SFC View accesses the PLC diagnostic data, thus enabling
awareness and tracking of the occurrence of the first fault and subsequent faults.
System downtime is much reduced since Unity SFC View enables maintenance staff
to locate the source of the problem much more quickly.
Unity SFC View is designed for end users and system designers who wish to
integrate this control into their HMI system. Unity SFC View is compatible with most
HMI platforms handling ActiveX Control components such as Vijeo Look control
software or Monitor Pro supervisory software or in a programming environment such
as Visual Basic.
6.1
6/30
platform 6
The 3 Unity SFC View views
Unity SFC View offers 3 views:

b An overview for managing selection of SFC charts
b Two detailed views presenting the status and diagnostic data of the selected SFC
chart
The overview provides a general view of all the SFC charts in a Unity project. It
contains real-time data such as current step, simultaneous steps, chart error with
indication of the SFC chart status. The overview makes it easy to browse through
SFC charts and switch quickly to the detailed view of the desired SFC chart in the
Unity Pro application.
Overview
The simple detailed view shows the elementary data on the active step (or selected
step) of the SFC chart in real time. The data displayed may include the name,
comment, chart and step status, as well as the activity times (min, max, actual). You
can also enable the chart navigation option.
Because of the compact size of the simple detailed view, it is possible to place
Simple detailed view several instances of it on a single HMI screen relating to a certain part of the process.
From this simple detailed mode, you can navigate between HMI screens with SFC
View controls and display the detailed view of SFC charts.
The detailed view illustrates the details of an SFC chart in real time. The display
indicates the current step, the transition awaiting activation and the next step. The
actions associated with the steps are displayed along with sequence selections or
parallel branches. The detailed diagnostic data includes analysis of the causes of the
fault at transition level. Depending on the diagnostic mode, the error grid contains the
causes of errors or all the variables assigned to the transition logic. The current state
of the various variables and selected errors are identified by different colors.
Diagnostic mode
Transition logic diagnostics is a key function of Unity SFC View. It minimizes system
downtimes in the event of a fault.
Two different diagnostic modes are available:

Detailed view
b Unity SFC View reads the data in the Unity PLC diagnostic buffer. It provides
6
information about faulty or missing events that are preventing the transition from
being enabled. This mode does not require any configuration or additional
programming in the PLC program.
6.1
b Unity SFC View monitors the internal logic of the transition conditions “back to
front”. This mode provides diagnostic data concerning all the inputs connected to the
transition (not limited to faulty inputs). In this mode, Unity SFC View uses specific
EFB function blocks linked to the transition conditions. The library for these blocks is
supplied with the Unity SFC View software.
Customization
Unity SFC View offers a programming interface which can be used to integrate the
ActiveX Control component in an HMI application and customize its functions and its
operator interface.
The ActiveX Control component in Unity SFC View can be customized. It accepts
properties, methods and events (all the properties have a default value).
The properties pages simplify configuration. Unity SFC View accepts scripts with
methods such as browsing through charts, status control of charts, and also events
such as error notification or chart selection. This data can be used to launch
programs or operator screens.
SFC View properties page
6/31
platform 6
Possible architectures
Unity SFC View is used in a configuration where the OFS and Unity Pro software
reside on the same PC platform as the HMI application.
Basic architecture
Operator station with HMI

application and Unity Pro,
OFS and SFC View
programs and projects
Quantum, Premium with

Unity SFC program
In a distributed configuration, the OFS and Unity Pro software can be installed on
different servers.
Distributed architecture
Operator station with HMI Unity projects
application and SFC View
projects
Ethernet TCP/IP
COM or
DCOM
OFS server
P Server (Unity)
PLC network
6
Quantum, Premium with
Unity SFC program
6.1
6/32
platform 6
References
When integrated in an HMI application, Unity SFC View can be used to monitor and
control charts in applications developed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
language running on Premium/Quantum Unity PLCs.
The HMI station, compatible with Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional

operating systems, must support ActiveX Control components. Unity SFC View V2.0
requires:
b Unity Pro V2.0 (M, L or XL), to be ordered separately
b OFS V3.1 data server software, to be ordered separately
Unity SFC View multilingual software, supplied on a CD-ROM, includes:

b The SFC View ActiveX Control component
b The EFB function block library for Unity Pro V2.0
b An example of how to integrate SFC View in Unity Pro projects
b The electronic documentation (English, French, German and Spanish)
The Unity SFC View integration example illustrates the main possibilities offered by
Unity SFC View. This is an executable program which does not need HMI software
in order to run. It helps the user understand how to configure and use the Unity SFC
View ActiveX Control component.
Description Type of license Reference Weight

kg
Unity SFC View software Single (1 station) UNY SDU MFU CD20 –
packages
(version V2.0) Team (10 stations) UNY SDU MFT CD20 –
Site (100 stations) UNY SDU MFF CD20 –
6.1
6/33
platform 6
Unity Studio software suite

General presentation
Unity Studio for the development of a distributed project

1
The Unity Studio software suite is the key component on design office workstations
used for designing and structuring automation applications in a collaborative
1 2 environment. This type of project consists of creating an automation application
comprising various devices:
2 1 Communication networks
2 Automation platforms and distributed I/O
2 3 Variable speed drives, motion control
4 Human machine interfaces (HMIs)
4
3
Based on a horizontal approach, the software suite supports:
b Project management for distributed control applications
b Application and device management
b The consistency and synchronization of Ethernet TCP/IP communication between
devices
The Unity Studio software suite offers designers of industrial automation distributed
control projects the possibility of using all these tools in conjunction. From the design
phase on, everyone involved has easy, user-friendly access to a single, shared
representation of the project.
The objective of the Unity Studio software suite is to:

b Provide a unique structural representation of the project shared by experts in all
application-specific domains
b Increase the productivity of each expert
“All-in-one” software suite
Unity Studio V2.0 is an “all-in-one” software suite based on Microsoft's Visio 2003
Professional graphic design tool. It is supplied with the following software as
standard:
b Unity Studio Manager V2.0 for managing distributed control applications
b Unity Pro XL V2.0 for programming Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms
b OFS V3.1 (OPC Factory Server) for accessing and exchanging data in the
architecture
b PowerSuite V1.5 for setting up drives and motor starters
6 b XBT-L1000 V4.30 for creating Magelis HMI applications
b Microsoft VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for developing customized functions
b MS Visio 2003 Professional, depending on the type of software license
Unity Studio V2.0 is the ideal tool for integrating and configuring Transparent Ready
6.1 products.
Unity Studio Manager tools allow you to create direct links with other Schneider
Electric applications or with third-party software applications.
In addition, the Unity Developer's Edition (UDE) software package provides an

advanced open development solution for the programming of user functions and the
development of interactive interfaces with other software applications (programming
in C++, VBA, VBA macros, etc.), see page 6/26.
The Unity Studio software suite is the ideal software engineering platform for
distributed control applications.
Functions: References:
Pages 6/35 to 6/40 page 6/41
6/34
platform 6
Project views
Graphical project views
In conjunction with the Visio 2003 graphics editor, the Unity Studio software suite can
be used to create project views in specific pages:
b Process or machine view: A unique representation shared by all specialist

experts/consultants working on the project (mechanical, hydraulic, electrical
engineering, etc.).
b View of the distributed automation architecture: A graphical representation of

Graphical process or machine view
the project's automation devices and communication networks.
These views are composed using application-specific object libraries (construction,

mechanical, hydraulic, electrical engineering, etc.). The Schneider component library
extends the scope of the Visio libraries. Graphical views are created by dragging and
dropping objects from the libraries to the tabbed pages.
Objects, their links and related properties composing the project views are entered
once into the graphical views and shared with:
b Other views
b Other Unity Studio suite software and external software applications
Based on the Visio 2003 editor, the graphical views are easy to use thanks to the
standard user interface (Microsoft office tools). Graphic elements can be integrated
from other market-standard CAD software (AutoCAD, Micro Station, etc.).
Graphical view of the distributed automation architecture
Functional view
The functional view is a structured tree diagram of the entire set of machine or
process functions. It is taken from the graphical view of the process or machine.
This hierarchical structure comprises functional entities in the form of folders that can
be nested at different levels.
The project designer associates functional entities with stations making up the
project.
6
After “generation” (see page 6/39), the corresponding functional entities are made
available in the structural view (configuration entity) of Unity Pro applications for
Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms. 6.1
Functional view
Topological view
The topological view is composed using the control architecture graphical view. This
topological view displays the communication networks and connected devices in a
folder structure.
In a similar fashion, after “generation” (see page 6/39), elements of the topological
view are made available in the structural view (communication element) of each
Unity Pro application for the Modicon Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms in the
distributed automation architecture. Network names and the names and types of
stations defined in the graphical view of Unity Studio are sent to Unity Pro
applications.
Topological view
page 6/34 page 6/41
6/35
platform 6
Communication view
The communication view enables PLCs to be synchronized and data to be

exchanged with the following types of distributed product:
v Altivar drives
v Advantys STB, Momentum distributed I/O
v Or any other product
connected to the Ethernet architecture, including those connected via
Ethernet/Modbus Plus or Ethernet/Modbus gateways.
Communication view Set using the symbolic variables editor in Unity Studio, parameters for
communication services between the various devices or products (Global Data and
I/O Scanning services) are loaded automatically in the files for each station during
generation (see page 6/39), thereby ensuring that all stations benefit from:
b Ensured communication consistency between the distributed applications
concerned
b Maximum productivity based on station configuration
b Reduction in the risk of errors
I/O Scanning
The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states
on the Ethernet TCP/IP network following simple configuration, with no need for
specific programming.
I/O scanning is transparent and is carried out via read/write requests sent by the
Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms in accordance with the Modbus
TCP client/server protocol. This technique of scanning via a standard protocol
enables communication with any product that supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP.
Unity Studio can define a number of communication frames for each station. Each
communication frame, reserved for reading inputs and writing outputs, is limited to
100 consecutive words.
See page 5/22 for more information about the I/O Scanning service.
6 Ethernet TCP/IP
Variable A
Global Data
Variable B
Variable C
The Global Data service on Ethernet TCP/IP communication networks can be used
to exchange data between connected stations in real time.
6.1 This service enables a common database to be synchronized and shared between
64 stations. Each of the 64 stations in a distribution group can:
Publication Subscription Subscription b Publish a 1024-byte variable on the network
Publication b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 published variables
Application 1 Application 2 Application n
The Global Data view in Unity Studio can be used to define Global Data distribution
groups and set parameters for variables published and subscribed to by the stations.
See page 5/24 for more information about the Global Data service.
6/36
platform 6
Object libraries
The Unity Studio software suite supplies open libraries of objects that can be re-used
in graphical views:
b Visio 2003 libraries
b Schneider Electric automation product library
Objects found in these libraries are of 2 types:

b Process objects for the creation of a graphical view of a process or machine
(motors, valves, actuators, pumps, etc.)
b Automation objects for the creation of a control architecture view (PLCs,
networks, drives, HMI terminals, Ethernet hubs, etc.)
Each object can be given its own parameters (type of valve, etc.) using predefined
properties or enhanced by applying customized properties.
Adding new objects
The numerous libraries supplied can be expanded as needed by:

b Downloading Visio objects available online, covering all industrial fields (Microsoft
Process library Schneider Electric Visio site, product reseller sites or sites specializing in Visio objects)
automation product library b Creation of objects by the user
A customized object can be created by:

b Integrating a graphical thumbnail of your choice (.bmp format) into the library
b Defining customized object properties
b Creating XML-format rules for complex objects
Complex objects (for automation devices) can be created by writing usage rules (for
instance, the possibility of connecting a type of automation device to a type of
communication network) in standard eXtensible Markup Language (XML) format.
6
PLCs
Networks
HMI
Thumbnails Variable speed
drives
Parameters
Motor starters 6.1
Hubs
Rules Switches
etc.
XML-format rules
Process objects Automation objects

(sensors, actuators, etc.) (components, etc.)
Hyperlinks can be defined from the objects in order to launch a software application
or to open a document related to the object (see next page).
page 6/34 page 6/41
6/37
platform 6
Direct-access hyperlinks
From the Unity Studio project views, it is possible to create hyperlinks at any time to:
b All document types in .xls, .doc, .pdf, etc. formats

b Web pages via a URL address
b Software tools, for example for configuration, network diagnostics, production
management, etc.
Creation of a link from an Direct access to the

object configuration software tool
relative to the object
Managing distributed control applications
The project is described in Unity Studio by different views, which:

b Provide specific types of characteristic information
b Provide access to associated information
6.1
4 2 1 3
1 Assignment of an automation application to each station in the architecture

2 Launch of the application from the topological or functional view
3 Creation and location of files for each station
4 Assignment of functional process or machine entities to station applications
page 6/34 page 6/41
6/38
platform 6
Project analysis operations
In order to detect any errors as early as possible, the Unity Studio software suite
analyzes application coherence and consistency. A report indicates any possible
errors in the form of alarms. Checks are performed on:
b Station addressing
b The types of station defined
b Data exchanged in real time on the Ethernet network between PLC stations via the
I/O Scanning and Global Data services (reserved word zones, group, published and
subscribed variables)
b The hierarchical structure of functional entities
Generation for each individual station
Following the analysis (and after any corrections have been made to render the
application compliant), generation using the Unity Pro software suite enables you to
create specific parameter settings for each station in each corresponding station file.
The parameter settings generated - consistent with the global project - are listed in
the table below for each type of station.
For PLC stations (Atrium, Premium and Quantum), this generation includes the
creation of the functional view, the program structure and the parameter settings for
the Global Data and I/O Scanning services.
Generation in Unity Pro Type of data generated Unity XBT Power Concept PL7 OFS
Pro L1000 Suite
Application Name
Project file
Device Name
Format
Network Routing path
Link Name
Format
Address
Functional Name
entity Structure
Group Name 6
Multicast address
Global Data Variable name
Variable type
Producer/consumer
Creation of Unity Pro program structures
I/O Scanning Variable name 6.1
Variable type
I/O Scanner setting
Data generated using Unity Studio with consistency check and updates
Data created in Unity Studio
XML data generated using Unity Pro
Consistency check and update operations
The check verifies the consistency of the project parameter settings with the files for
each station.
The update updates the parameter settings in the station files to correspond to those
in Unity Studio (see table above). Any modifications made on the stations are
checked and replicated at all other project levels. The existing parameter settings for
a station added to the project are updated in Unity Studio (in the event of the re-use
of an existing station).
page 6/34 page 6/41
6/39
platform 6
Global project documentation
The Unity Studio software suite is a single publishing resource for creating global
project documentation including information about the following different levels:
b Project (topology, networks, global data, functional modules, Visio graphical

views, VBA macros)
b Stations (station applications), see “Unity Pro documentation editor”, page 6/19
This documentation can be viewed on screen or printed.
Openness of the Unity Studio software suite

Better customer solutions with Unity Studio
The inherent openness of Unity Studio means that project object models can be
accessed for the purpose of using and extending their services. This adaptation of
generic functions to meet user-specific requirements is achieved by:
b Importing/exporting components in standard XML format
b Launching VBA macros (Microsoft Visual Basic)
b The option to include hyperlinks to third-party documents and software (MES,
ERP, web, configurators, maintenance guide, etc.)
b The use of COM/DCOM technology
b The use of the UDE (Unity Developer's Edition) development tool, see page 6/27
The Unity Studio software suite is supplied with productivity examples based on VBA
technology for creating language objects designed to enhance the Unity Pro design
software.
Unrestricted design approach

Unity software applications combine the assurance of overall project consistency
with the freedom to select project design and debugging methods. A number of
Top-down Unrestricted Bottom-up approaches are possible:
approach approach approach
b The top-down approach: In the Unity Studio software suite, this approach
6 corresponds to the creation of graphical representations, the declaration of
applications, the configuration of communications, the generation of station files
(particularly in the Unity Pro setup software) and the publishing of global
documentation.
6.1 b The bottom-up approach: Based on applications created at each station level,
this approach enables all parameter settings to be updated to match those at
Unity Studio project level.
b The unrestricted approach: In the Unity Studio software suite, this approach
allows users to freely select the design method for a distributed automation project.
Information entered at one level is automatically replicated and distributed at other
levels of the project.
This design freedom facilitates, for example:

b The integration of existing applications into the project with upgrading to Unity Pro
software and Unity Studio global project level
b The incorporation of modifications made to each application following testing and
start-up or maintenance operations
page 6/34 page 6/41
6/40
platform 6
References
The multilingual Unity Studio software suite, compatible with the Windows 2000
Professional and Windows XP Professional operating systems, can be used to
design and structure distributed automation projects.
The Unity Studio software suite includes the following software applications:
b Depending on the software offer, Microsoft Visio 2003 Professional for graphic
design
b Unity Studio Manager V2.0 for the management of distributed applications
b Unity Pro Extra Large V2.0 for the programming and debugging of Atrium,
Premium and Quantum automation platforms
b OFS V3.1 (OPC Factory Server) for accessing and exchanging data in the
architecture
b PowerSuite V1.50 for setting up drives and motor starters
b XBT-L1000 V4.30 for creating Magelis applications
b Microsoft VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for developing customized functions
b Communication drivers (see detailed information on page 6/26).
Documentation is supplied in electronic format.

Processor/PC programming terminal connection cables must be ordered separately
(see page 6/27).
Description MS Visio 2003 Type of license Language Reference Weight

(1) kg
Unity Studio Included Single-station French UNY SEW XFU CD20F r –
development English UNY SEW XFU CD20E r –
software suite
German UNY SEW XFU CD20D r –
Spanish UNY SEW XFU CD20S r –
Italian UNY SEW XFU CD20T r
Not included Single-station Multilingual UNY SEW LFU CD20 r –

Group (3 stations) Multilingual UNY SEW LFG CD20 r –
Team (10 stations) Multilingual UNY SEW LFT CD20 r –
Site (unlimited) Multilingual UNY SEW LFF CD20 r
UNY SEW LYU CD20 r

Upgrade from
Unity Pro to
Unity Studio
Not included Single-station Multilingual –
6
(1) Defines the language for Visio 2003 Professional and the electronic documentation.
r Launch planned for 4th quarter of 2004 6.1
Presentation: Functions:
page 6/34 pages 6/35 to 6/40
6/41
platform 6
Unity Application Generator
Unity Application Generator for designing and generating

process applications
Unity Application Generator (UAG) is a specialized software productivity tool for

modeling and generating process applications in a collaborative environment.
For process type applications, UAG provides a single database containing all the
project information (process model, control configuration and SCADA integration).
Using an approach based on reusable control devices (PID, motor, valve,etc.), UAG
which complies with the standard ISA S88 and generates the PLC code (Unity Pro &
Concept), plus all the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis) or
SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 (1) or third-party supervision system).
Single entry and central information management ensure data consistency and the
integration of the control (PLC) and monitoring (HMI/SCADA) systems.
Process models
Physical model (process view)
Process components and logical structureation of the process are based on the ISA
S88 standard.
Adopting the ISA S88 standard provides the following benefits:
b Considerable process flexibility.
b Significant reduction in development and delivery timescales.
b A standardized, uniform solution.
b Reuse of sub-elements.
UAG offers the 6 structural levels from the ISA S88 standard (site, area, process cell,
unit, equipment module and control module):
These levels can be found again within the applications structure (supervision and
PLC) generated by UAG. Process parameters for control devices, such as motors,
control loops and valves, are set at control module level.
6
Topological model (automation view)

6.1
In a Collaborative Control environment, UAG can be applied to the entire process’
control, monitoring and supervision topology. The topological view includes all
devices with I/O points, as well as the communication channels between these
devices.
UAG supports:
b Architectures comprising automation platforms.
v Modicon Quantum, Premium and Atrium with Unity Pro.
v Modicon Quantum and Momentum with Concept.
b SCADA systems (Monitor Pro, iFix or generic), Magelis panels.
b Ethernet TCP/IP and Modbus Plus communication networks.
b Third-party devices.
The process for configuration of networks, PLC applications with their I/O and other
devices of the topological model , takes place directly in UAG.
Complet model (project view)
The physical and topological models are independent and can be created in
parallel by independent process and automation experts.
The models are integrated via simple drag & drop operations between the two views..
This integration simply involves assigning PLC I/O points to control devices
(valves, motors, etc.).
6/42
platform 6
Flow loop control

Integrating your expertise in UAG
Smart Control Devices (SCoDs)
UAG software is an object-oriented tool based on these Smart Control Devices.

These elements describe a part of the process, including all the aspects of the
process control system:
PLC b Links to the PLC logic.
Documentation
b Links to the graphic representation in the supervisory system.
b Description of I/O interfaces.
PLC Logic Maintenance b Description of interfaces intended for HMI/SCADA supervisory.
b Information related for handling alarms and events.
Locking Diagnostic b Documentation.
In UAG these multi-faceted elements are called SCoDs (Smart Control Devices).
They are created using UAG’s specific SCoD editor.
A SCoD is defined for each control devices, and is created with the help of the SCoD
editor by:
b Using the DFB or EFB interface of the PLC logic (Unity Pro/Concept) by importing
FBD Language.
b Assigning a supervisory graphic reference (Monitor Pro (1) or others).
b Defining the Smart control Device parameters and their behavior in the process
control system:
Graphic Alarms/
v control device parameters and attributes from the process side (operating modes,
representation events threshold limits, alarm texts, etc.).
v I/O parameters and attributes for PLC logic,
Security I/O interfaces
v parameters and attributes for HMI/SCADA supervisory.
b Defining configuration screens for the UAG user interface.
Documentation
b Defining default or initial parameters.
IHM
This means that you can integrate your process expertise and know-how in your
own SCoD libraries and reuse them again and again in all your UAG applications.
Customization
UAG can be used to define your own standards and apply them. It provides a uniform
solution based on your standards, and prepares for validation operations.
6
During the design phase, the risk of error is kept to a minimum, thereby reducing
debugging and maintenance costs too.
UAG can be used to customize: 6.1

b The selection of SCoD libraries.
b The symbols nomenclature used in UAG.
b The selection of PLC platforms and modules.
b The definition of access levels, display formats, units of measurement, etc. used
for HMI/SCADA supervisory.
b The user documentation.
b Security.
This means that you can integrate your process expertise and standards in all
your UAG applications.
6/43
platform 6
Integrating your expertise in UAG (continued)

Modeling process applications
Once you have created the customization based on your standards and chosen your
SCoD libraries, UAG offers you a simple, user-friendly, application-specific method
of working.
The process is defined using the physical model (process view), exploiting the
expertise provided at customization and SCoD library creation stages. This means
that the process behavior and the process configuration screens match exactly your
requirements.
The process control is defined using the topological model (automation view), again,
in accordance with your customization.
b Process design using UAG is made easy through functional analyses. It allows the
user to reliably track the exact project status. In order to be able to detect any error
or oversight as soon as possible, UAG analyzes the project and flags any bugs at the
various levels of the project, for instance:
b At physical model level:
v SCoD instance attributes that are missing or over limit,
v invalid or missing interlock parameters.
b At topological model level:
v Communication channels between devices that are not defined,
v invalid or missing communication parameters.
b At project level:
v SCoD data is being transmitted from another PLC, but communication with this
device has not been configured,
v the SCoD data is not assigned to any PLC I/O variable,
v behavior on response time for I/O variables that is not defined.
This means that your process expertise and know-how is made available to be
used in UAG, ensuring consistent process application modeling.
Generating process applications
UAG provides at a single point all the process information intended for the project’s
multiple applications (PLCs, HMI/SCADA), along with the communication
parameters.
6 When applications are generated this information is used to create the configuration
and part of the control logic in using IEC 61131-3 FBD functional language. The
following items are generated:
b At PLC level:
v Hardware configuration,
6.1 v localized and non-localized data with its initial value and symbol,
v initialization,
v inter-PLC communication and distributed I/O (I/O Scanning on Ethernet or Peer
Coop on Modbus Plus),
v DFB/EFB block data (information from SCoDs),
v interlocks.
b At HMI/SCADA level:
v Data for graphic animations,
v localized data with its corresponding symbol (display, alarm, archiving information,
etc.),
v user access rights.
b At communication level:
v Communication driver configuration (Monitor Pro (1) and iFIX),
v configuration data for third-party devices (via an XML interface).
The generation process in UAG is incremental, which makes it possible to

supplement the various applications with their dedicated tools outside UAG without
any risk.
Incremental generation in UAG only impacts changed elements within the
applications, which ensures that any additions made using the dedicated tools are
stored permanently.
This means that your process expertise and know-how is quickly operational in
your process without any errors or oversights.
6/44
platform 6
Validation
Validation
UAG is a specialized functional tool for process experts and has been developed to
comply with the following process standards:
b ISA S88.
b GAMP (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice).
Implementing validation procedures
User requirement Performances

Related to
specification qualification
Process control
system
Operational documentation
Software Functional
Related to qualification Validation
Design specification
Qualification
Specification
(IQ, OQ)
PLC/HMI Related to
Application Design Installation
Software specification qualification
Good Automation System build

Manufacturing Practice
UAG uses ISA S88 standard terminology for batch control and adopts the GAMP
methodology for creating an automated system.
The inclusion of these two standards provides major support in the task of approving
and validating processes. Validation according to FDA 21CFR Part 11 regulations is
simplified by UAG, as it provides:
b All process information at a single point, based on functional analysis.
b Automatic generation of process applications by UAG.
b Archiving in compliance with FDA regulations.
b A log of all interactions by UAG.
b Electronic documentation.
UAG tracks and documents every modification made. The version control system, in
compliance with regulation FDA 21 CFR Part 11, ensures simple, straightforward
validation. 6
Active collaboration
Compatible with third-party tools

UAG arranges existing information according to your operating objectives and 6.1
constraints. Open import/export interfaces are available at every level, facilitating the
connection of third-party tools at any time. This means that you can share your
expertise by reusing, for example, data from your CAD tools.
Total user accessibility
With its multi-user environment and common language, UAG facilitates sharing
among process and PLC developers, as well as maintenance engineers and
operating staff.
UAG ensures optimum productivity throughout your application’s entire life

cycle.
6/45
platform 6
Interfacing with SCADA applications
UAG can openly interface with many of the SCADA systems currently available on
the market.
Direct integration
Direct integration by UAG automatically generates the Monitor Pro V7.2 supervisory
application elements, which are:
b Variables with symbol and attributes.
b Alarm server configuration.
b Trend server configuration (real time and historical).
b Mimics (graphic objects) of the devices.
b Configuration of the Modbus TCP/IP communication driver.
In addition, for each modification by UAG, the Monitor Pro V7.2 application is
automatically updated without any conflicts or risk of disruption of added or changed
elements.
UAG therefore ensures data consistency between the automation control and the
supervory level.
This type of direct integration is also available with the iFix supervisory and control
system (GE Fanuc).
Open integration
Open integration is based on all the UAG application information made available via
XML file format. This XML file is generated by UAG and can be imported into many
third-party SCADA systems, once it has been customized using the XLS style sheets
specific to the third-party system.
Regardless of whether direct or open integration is involved, UAG provides

you with total consistency within your control, monitoring and supervision
system throughout the application’s entire life.
6.1
6/46
platform 6
References
This specialized software program UAG (Unity Application Generator) is multilingual

(available in English, French and German) and is compatible with the Windows 2000
Professional and Windows XP operating systems.
UAG can be used to model and generate process applications in a collaborative

environment. It generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept) and the elements
required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis), SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 or
third-party supervision systems).
There are two types of software license available for UAG: Medium (M) and Large
(L). They are determined by the functional level of the HMI integration:
b The Medium version generates HMI information using customizable XML files
(XSL style sheets).
b The Large version also provides customizable XML files, direct integration for
Monitor Pro and iFix supervision systems featuring the generation of SCADA
applications with variables and attributes, mimics (graphic objects), alarm tables and
communication driver configuration.
Documentation is supplied in electronic format.
UAG software suites

Description Type License type Reference Weight
Code generated kg
UAG software suites Medium Single UAG SEW MFUCD 21 –
(Unity Application (1 machine) r
Generator)
Site UAG SEW MFFCD 21 –
r
Large Single UAG SEW LFUCD 21 –

(1 machine) r
Site UAG SEW LFFCD 21 –

r
r Available later
6.1
6/47
platform 0
Process control
Unity Pro
The 2 Unity Pro process control offers

User-definable control loops
This offer of user-definable control loops is integrated as standard in Atrium

PCI 57 2p/3p and Premium TSX 57 2p/3p/4p/5p platforms with Unity Pro Medium,
Large and Extra Large software. This offer is identical to that offered with
PL7 Junior/Pro, except for the runtime screens. See page 6/49.
Programmable control loops
The process control offer for Premium TSX 57 4p/5p platforms with Unity Pro Large
and Extra Large software has been enhanced with the new programmable offer. This
offer is based around the EF and EFB function block library specific to process
control. More than 30 blocks are available, classified in 6 families:
b EFB blocks for data preparation (for example, DTIME, INTEGRATOR, SCALING,
etc)
b Controller EFB blocks (for example, AUTOTUNE, PIDFF, SAMPLETM, etc)
b Math EF blocks (for example, COMP_DB, MULTIV_M, SUM_W, etc)
b Measurement processing EF/EFB blocks (for example, LOOKUP_TABLR1,
HYST_ppp, AVGMV, etc)
b Output value processing EFB blocks (for example, PWM1, SERVO, etc)
b Reference value processing EFB blocks (RAMP, RATIO, SP8SEL)
These blocks manage operating modes such as tracking, manual/automatic mode

and process control algorithms on cyclic values (intervals between two consecutive
sampling operations).
For more information on this programmable process control offer, please consult
your Regional Sales Office.
6.1
6/48
platform 0
Process control
Unity Pro
User-definable process control

The process control offer integrated as standard in Premium platforms can be used
to set up and debug machine control-oriented control loops in Unity Pro Large and
Extra Large.
User-definable process control functions
TSX P57 2p4/2634/3p4/3634/454/44634/554/5634M CPUs and

TSX PCI 57 204/354M slot PLCs make it possible, depending on the model, to
manage between 10 and 30 process control channels (of 3 loops each).
These channels can be configured to execute algorithms for industrial processes:
b Cascaded loop
6
b Process loop
b Autoselective loop
b Setpoint programmer
b Controller with three simple loops 6.1
Inputs/Outputs
TSX P57 2p4/2634/3p4/3634/454/44634/554/5634M CPUs and

TSX PCI 57 204/354M slot PLCs manage an entire station consisting of racks
connected on Bus X.
The I/O interfaces required for process control processing operations are analog or
discrete channels in:
b “In rack” I/O modules
b TBX, Advantys STB or Momentum distributed I/O modules
Control loops
Software setup of the control loops is user-definable (Plug and Play technology)
during configuration of the Premium CPU or Atrium slot PLC.
The user enters information in the predefined loop diagrams which also integrate
management of operating modes and the link with the I/O.
Functions:
pages 6/50 to 6/53
6/49
Process control
Unity Pro
Presentation
TSX P57 2p4/2634/3p4/3634/454/44634/554/5634M CPUs and
TSX PCI 57 204/354M slot PLCs offer the possibility of configuring 10, 15, 20 or
30 control channels for continuous or semi-continuous processes.
The process control functions offered by these CPUs are particularly suitable for:
b Sequential processes requiring auxiliary process control functions such as
packaging machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc
b Simple processes such as metal treatment furnaces, ceramic ovens, refrigeration
units
b Servocontrol systems or mechanical process control where the sampling time is
critical, such as torque control, speed control, etc
Premium CPUs include the following characteristics:
b Each configurable process control channel can be used to manage 1 to 3 loops
depending on the type of loop selected
b Process control processes can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site,
thanks to the integration of the PLC in different communication networks
b Process control-related calculations are performed in floating point arithmetic
expressed in physical units
Description and characteristics : TSX P57 pp4/pp34M CPUs, see pages 1/6 to 1/11;
TSX PCI 57pp4M slot PLCs, see pages 1/16 to 1/20.
Functions
Control loops
Premium CPUs can be used to set up 10 to 30 process control channels, each
adopting one of the following 5 control profiles:
b Process-type loop: loop with a single controller
b Controller with 3 simple loops: controller used to increase the capacity of the
number of loops
b Autoselective loop, also called secondary loop: consisting of 2 loops in parallel
with an algorithm for selecting the output
b Cascaded loop: consists of 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave
loop setpoint)
b Setpoint programmer: consisting of a maximum of 6 composite profiles, with a total
of 48 segments
As the channels are independent, configuration of 10 channels can be used for
example to obtain:
b 30 simple loops
6 b 5 setpoint programmers, each associated with 5 control loops
b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops
The various loops are characterized by:
b Their different algorithms
b 5 processing branches (measurement, setpoint, Feed Forward, controller and
6.1 output processing)
b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters
Types of control loop
Predefined algorithms can be defined by the user and are represented as shown
below:
Process loop Simple loop
Autoselective loop Cascaded loop
Presentation:
page 6/48
6/50
platform 0
Process control
Unity Pro
Processing branches
Parameter-setting (selection of the functions to be used) of the control loop profiles

can be used to adapt the algorithm to the process to be controlled.
Measurement processing
Measurements can be processed either in the standard way or externally.
b Standard processing: The user can access the following functions: filtering, setting
measurement between limits, function generator with scaling, management of
alarms on threshold overshoot, totalizer and simulation of the measured value.
b External processing: This means there can be a process value PV at the controller
input which has been processed outside the control loop. This is a handy solution if
calculation of the measurement requires special or customized functions.
Setpoint processing
Depending on the type of loop selected, it is possible to opt for one of the following
4 types of setpoint: ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint (“remote” with
scaling) or setpoint programmer.
In the case of the controller with 3 simple loops or the secondary loop (in an
autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be
used.
Feed Forward processing
Feed Forward processing can be used to compensate for a measurable disturbance

as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the
disturbance. It features the “Leading” function (lead/lag phase).
Controller and command processing
The controller can be chosen from the following 6 types: Self-tuning PID, controller
in discrete mode with 2 or 3 states, hot/cool controller (PID or self-tuning model) or
Split Range controller (PID or self-tuning model).
Output processing
6
There are 3 types of output which can be processed: analog output, servomotor output
or PWM output. Whatever the type of output, the command calculated by the
controller crosses a gradient limiter and a limiter whose upper and lower limits are 6.1
used to define the output variation range.
Setpoint programmer
The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles consisting of a total of 48

segments. It is thus possible to create various programmer/segment configurations,
e.g. one programmer with 48 segments, 6 programmers with 8 segments or one
programmer with 24 segments plus one programmer with 16 segments and one
programmer with 8 segments, etc.
Each segment is configured as either a ramp or dwell step. It is characterized by:

b The setpoint to be reached
b The duration of the segment or slope of the segment (if it is a ramp)
A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or looped continuously. In

addition, the concept of a guaranteed dwell step means the time is only counted down
if the measurement is definitely within the specified range.
Presentation:
page 6/48
6/51
platform 0
Process control
Unity Pro
Configuring process control channels
Special screens, accessible using Unity Pro software, can be used to configure
control loops.
Configuring process control channels:
The “Loops” interface in Premium CPUs simplifies configuration by offering simple

selections from menus:
b The type of loop from 5 options

b The choice of functions used in the 5 processing branches
b The parameters linked to each of the functions
b The assignment of PLC variables to the different loop branches (memory words,
input words or output words depending on the processing branch)
b Automatic presymbolization of the variables used in loops
When configuring process, simple, autoselective and cascaded loops, default

Configuring process control channels parameter settings are offered. The various functions integrated in the algorithms
(square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are
predefined.
Example: Configuring a process loop
Once the type has been chosen, its parameters can be set by selecting or deselecting
the options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore necessary, the
loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as and when the parameters are validated.
Opposite, selecting the PID controller enables display of the various valid
parameters for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc).
In the case of the setpoint programmer, the different profiles (6 maximum) are
configured via a table defining each segment.
After selecting the type of segment (ramp or dwell step), its configuration consists of
defining the setpoint to be reached (with the ramp) and the duration (for the ramp or
Configuring a process loop dwell step).
6 As selections are made, the bottom of the screen displays the profile with the setpoint
limit values.
This screen can also be used to define the cycles for this profile: execution once, a
certain number of times or looped continuously (32,767 times maximum).
6.1
Executing process control channels
The sampling period for the loops is predefined at 300 ms. This defines the controller
processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop
configuration screen.
All the I/O and the parameters of the various configured process control channels
can be accessed by the user at program level or via the various Unity Pro software
tools (especially language editors and animation tables).
Defining profile cycles
Presentation:
page 6/48
6/52
platform 0
Process control
Unity Pro
Debugging functions
Adjusting and debugging control loops is simple and user-friendly via, for example,
the application-specific loop configuration screen which, in online mode, provides
access to the following functions:
b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram

b Display of process alarms and channel faults
b Simulation of the input interface values: for example when these are not connected
(measurement, Feed Forward)
b Addition, deletion or replacement of calculation functions in online mode
b Modification of the adjustment parameters for each of the functions
b Modification of the controller operating modes and manual control mode
With the controllers integrated in the control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning
function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T1,
T-delay) on request.
Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current values resulting
from the tests in the initial loop parameters values. This means that, on restarting the
loop, it will start off with the correct values.
Debugging a loop
The debug screen can be used to:
b Display the values of the variables linked to the loop in real time
b Know which parameters have been selected (and even modify them)
b Display alarms
The menus can be used for manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter
backup, etc.
6
Debugging a loop
6.1
Debugging the setpoint programmer
The setpoint programmer channels have their own debug screen which can be used
to display:
b The number of the active segment and the iteration

b The execution time for the active segment
b The overall execution time
Debugging the setpoint programmer
Presentation:
page 6/48
6/53
platform 0
PL7 software
PL7 programming software
Languages Instruction List (IL) M A-P-M A-P-M

Ladder (LD) M A-P-M A-P-M
Structured Text (ST) M A-P-M A-P-M
Grafcet (SFC) M A-P-M A-P-M
Grafcet with macro-steps (SFC) A-P A-P
Programming Multitask programming (master, fast and M A-P-M A-P-M

services event-triggered)
Functional view and function modules A-P
DFB editor A-P
Use of DFB instances A-P A-P
EF function libraries M A-P-M A-P-M
Configurable control loops M A-P-M A-P-M
User-definable control loops A - P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p) A - P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p)
Warm Standby PLC redundancy system P (TSX P57 353/453M)
System diagnostics M A-P-M A-P-M
Application diagnostics A-P-M
Debugging and Step by step execution, breakpoint M A-P-M A-P-M

display Runtime screens A-P-M
services
Diagnostic viewers A-P-M
6 Other services PL7 2 application converters

PL7 3 and Orphee application converters
M A-P-M
A-P-M
A-P-M
A-P-M
Utilities for updating PLC operating systems M A-P-M A-P-M
Communication drivers for M A-P-M A-P-M
Windows 2000/XP
Compatible Atrium slot-PLCs A – T PCX 57 2p T PCX 57 2p

Modicon T PCX 57 3p T PCX 57 3p
platforms Premium CPUs P – TSX P57 1p TSX P57 1p
6.2 TSX P57 2p TSX P57 2p
TSX P57 3p TSX P57 3p
TSX P57 4p TSX P57 4p
TSX Micro PLCs M TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22 TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22 TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22
Software name PL7 Micro PL7 Junior PL7 Pro
Unity Pro software type TLX CDp PL7M p44M TLX CDp PL7J p44M TLX CDp PL7J p44P
Pages 6/70 and 6/71
6/54
0
EF function development software in Development of applications in C Comparison of PL7 applications Availability of control systems
C language language based on Premium platforms
Enhancement of EF function block Development for processing process Automatic comparison of 2 Premium Continuity of operation in a Premium
libraries: applications using fuzzy logic: applications with identification of all redundant PLC architecture.
v Creation of families v 25 linguistic rules for redefining differences. Provides access to shared I/O on the
v Development of functions in expert knowledge using Fipio bus or redundant I/O.
C language conditions/conclusions (If...Then) Requires PL7 Pro software Typical “Normal/Standby” switching
v Access to math calculation functions v Description of membership functions time: 1 to 2 s
in floating point format
v Debugging functions (step by step, Screens for simulation in offline mode
breakpoint) and debugging in online mode.
v Use of functions created in all
languages
Supplied with Microsoft Visual C++
Compatible with: Compatible with: Compatible with: Compatible with:

v PL7 Pro v PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro v PL7 Pro v PL7 Pro
v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All Atrium slot-PLCs v TSX P57 353/453M CPUs
v All TSX Micro/Premium CPUs v All TSX Micro/Premium Unity CPUs v All TSX Micro/Premium CPUs
6.2
SDK C PL7 FUZ PL7 DIF Warm Standby
TLX SDKC PL7 41M TLX L PL7 FUZ 34M TLX CDp PL7 DIF 41 TLX CDp WSBY P40F
6/73 6/75 6/77 6/66
6/55
platform 6
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software
Presentation
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software packages are designed for Windows 2000

Professional and Windows XP (1) operating systems and therefore benefit from all
the facilities relating to these.
PL7 version 4.4 enables new TSX Micro/Premium modules to take advantage of
additional functionalities:
b PL7 software registrations by the Internet, electronic mail, fax or phone (obligatory
registration before 22nd day).
b Change in the Fipio catalogue for Momentum distributed I/O.
b Transfer of PL7 user rights between PCs via floppy disk or network.
b Enriched export files of the data application (FEF) for better compatibility with Unity
software after migration.
PL7 Micro Junior/Pro software packages are offered according to two alternatives
depending on the type of PLCs/PC cable: connection on the RS 232C port, or the
USB port of a PC.
Ergonomics of the software
More user-friendly and productive ergonomics thanks to:

b Access to contextual menus by right-clicking with the mouse for fast access to the
services available for the select ed object.
b Contextual help: direct access to help correspondingto the selected object.
b Tool tips: explanatory messages appear when skimming over the toolbar buttons.
Furthermore, some important functions make the software easier and safer to use:
Multi-instance
The multi-instance function enables several applications to be worked on

simultaneously.
This function enables:
b Several different applications present on the PC to be opened in offline mode in
order to check or copy data.
b Debugging of two (or more) applications on two PLCs present on the same
network in on-line mode. This is particularly useful when debugging inter-PLC
6 communication functions.
Management of access rights
Use of the various PL7 software functions can be limited and controlled by managing
the access rights.
There are 5 user profiles (differentiated by passwords) which characterize the
functions available to users on the programming terminal. The profiles range from
read-only access to an application (lowest profile) to full programming (profile with
6.2 the most rights).
Application server
PL7 Pro software can be launched in OLE Automation server mode from a third-party
Terminal PC Terminal PC
Client Serveur
client application. In this case, certain PL7 program functions can be executed
following commands sent by an OLE client application. This instance of the program
then no longer reacts to commands from the operator keyboard. Server mode can
be launched in offline mode (COM) if both programs are on the same machine, or in
Automation
Automation
Applicatifs PL7 remote mode (DCOM), if the programs are installed on different machines.
Client
OLE
OLE
The commands available are as follows:

b Manage an execution context (open/close an application, modification of the
Fipway address and driver of the connected PLC; PLC status).
b Control the PLC (connection/disconnection, send a RUN/STOP/INIT command,
Premium program uploading/downloading).
b Read data (application or symbol export only in source format, read
symbol/comment associated with an address, read application identity).
TSX Micro
(1) However, compatibility with the Windows 95 operating system is no longer provided and USB
port is not compatible with Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0.
6/56
Setup Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Application creation and debug tools

Application browser (conventional view)
Access to all programming and debug tools is gained via the application browser.
1 This gives a global view of the program and enables all the application components to
be accessed quickly via contextual menus.
2
1 Configuration editor.
2 Program editor.
3 DFB user function block editor.
4 Variable editor.
5 Animation table editor.
3 6 Documentation editor.
7 Operating screen editor.
4
Concept of sections and Grafcet enhancement
In order to make programs more comprehensible, the FAST and MAST tasks are
5 split into sections.
6 Each section 1 has a name, a comment and is programmed in one of the four
languages available in PL7.
7
A section programmed in Grafcet language can contain a main chart 2 and
macro-steps 3. Version u V4.0 of PL7 allows comments to be added to each
macro-step.
To protect intellectual property or avoid any unwarranted modification, each section
can be write-protected or read/write-protected.
Function views of an application
1 PL7 Pro software can be used to structure an application for a Premium platform into
functional modules that are broken down into sections (program code), animation
2 tables and operating screens. Independently of the multitask structure of the PLC, the
3
designer can define a multilevel tree structure of the automation application.
At each level, it is possible to attach program sections written in Ladder language (LD),
Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Grafcet (SFC), and animation tables.
Two types of view are available at all times:

6
b A representation showing a tree structure of modules can provide a breakdown
according to consistent functions in relation to the process to control.
b The classic representation of the application browser provides a view of the
execution order of the program sections for each PLC.
The operation services associated with the functional view are available in one or
the other view. In particular, a single command can be used to force whether or not
a functional module is executed.
In this case, every section attached to the functional module is automatically forced. 6.2
Exporting/importing functional modules
All or part of the tree structure can be exported into functional modules.
In this case, all program sections of the different module levels are exported.
During an import, an assistant can be used to reassign the data associated with the
module in stages.
9/57
Setup (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Configuration editor
Hardware configuration
The configuration editor intuitively and graphically enables the declaration and
configuration of the various components of the TSX Micro/Premium PLC application:
b Processor, coprocessor.
b Tasks.
b Application-specific I/O modules.
b Memory.
b ...
By clicking on an unconfigured position, the display of a dialog box shows the
available I/O modules, classed according to family.
Once the various modules are positioned, selecting them accesses parameter entry
for each module.
The configuration editor can also be used to set the software parameters of the
application: choice of the number of constants, number of internal words and the
number of each type of function block.
The configuration editor provides access to parameter entry for the function blocks.
The copy/paste function for these parameters is available from version u V4.0 of the
PL7 software onwards.
Configuration of Grafcet objects
When programming in Grafcet language, the configuration editor can define Grafcet
objects (steps, macro-steps, etc.) and execution parameters (number of steps and
active transitions).
Setup of application-specific functions
A number of tools are provided as standard for setting up the various applications:
discrete I/O, analog I/O, counting, motion control (1), man-machine interface (MMI),
communication, weighing (1), Warm Standby redundancy (2).
The parameter screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the
6 I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been
defined.
The screens enable the main operating characteristics of the chosen application to be
defined, for example:
b Filter values for discrete I/O.

b Voltage or current range for analog I/O.
b Threshold values for counting.
b Path of axes for position control.
b Calibration change during weighing.
6.2 b Transmission speed for communication.
(1) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform.

(2) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform based on a TSX P57 353/453
processor (version with integrated Fipio link).
6/58
Software structure Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Software structure
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers two types of structure:

b Single task: this is the simplified structure offered by default, where a single master
task consisting of a main program, comprising several sections and subroutines, is
executed.
b Multitask: this structure, which is better suited to high-performance real-time
applications, consists of a master task, a fast task and event-triggered tasks, which
have the highest priority. Master and fast tasks are divided into sections.
Structured and modular programming

Mast Fast
PL7 program tasks comprise several parts called sections and subroutines. Each
Sas(LD) Alarm_Sas(LD) section can be programmed in the appropriate language for the processing to be
carried out.
Furnace_1(Grafcet) Safety_Mon(LD) Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program
modules can easily be generated or added.
PRE(LD) Alarm_Furnace(ST)
CHART Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from
POST(IL) Alarm_Cleaning(ST) other subroutines in the same task.
SR0 SR0
Cleaning(ST)
Simple task software structure
There are two types of cyclic execution:

b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option.
b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by
the user during configuration.
Normal execution (cyclic)
Internal At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches the execution of a new scan.
processing
The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value
is defined by the user.
Input acquisition
(%I)
In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing:
b The scan to stop immediately (STOP).
6
RUN STOP b A display on the front panel of the PLC.
Program b The alarm relay of the main rack power supply to be set to 0.
processing
Update of
outputs (%O)
6.2
Periodic execution
Launch
of the period A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must
be less than the time of the period defined (1 to 255 ms). In the event of overrun, the
Input acquisition latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be set to 0 by the user (by program
(%I) or by the terminal).
A software watchdog which can be configured by the user monitors the scan time. In
RUN STOP
the event of overrun, an execution fault is signaled (see normal execution).
Program
processing
Update of
outputs (%O)
Internal
processing
End of period
9/59
Software structure (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
Multitask software structure

PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a Multitask software structure, consisting of:
b A master task (divided into sections, one of which may contain Grafcet).
b A fast task (divided into sections).
b One or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task).
These tasks are independent and are executed in "parallel", with the PLC processor
managing the execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task
cycle:
b The current execution of lower priority tasks is stopped.
b The event-triggered task or the fast task is executed.
b The interrupted task takes over again when processing of the priority task is
completed.
Fast task Master task
Event triggered tasks Alarm_Sas(LD) Sas(LD)
Safety_Mon(LD) Furnace_1(LD)
Alarm_Furnace(ST) PRE(LD)
CHART
Alarm_Cleaning(ST) POST(IL)
SR0 SR0
Drying(LD)
Priority + ... –
This structure can optimize use of the processing power, and can be used to
structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as it is possible to write
and debug each task independently of the others.
Master task
This compulsory task, which executes the main program, is periodic or cyclic (see
single task structures). It is activated systematically. It is intended for sequential
processing. Each section can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or
Instruction List language. One section is dedicated to Grafcet language; when this
language is chosen, 3 processing operations are proposed:
b Preliminary processing (PRE) is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or
Instruction List language and processes initializations on power return, operating
6 mode modifications, input logic.
b Sequential processing (CHART) includes the graphic transcription and
management of Grafcet charts. It provides access to processing of the actions and
transition conditions.
b Post-processing (POST). This is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or
Instruction List language and is used to process all the instructions from the
2 preceding processing operations and the indirect safety functions specific to the
outputs.
6.2 Fast task

This task, which is higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to leave
time for execution of the lower priority task. Processing operations in this task must be
as short as possible so as not to adversely affect the master task. It is useful when fast
periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored.
Each section of this task can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or
Instruction List language.
Event triggered tasks

Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to a period. Their
execution is triggered by an event occurring in an application-specific module (eg.:
overrun of a counter threshold, change in state of a discrete input). These tasks have
higher priority than all other tasks, and they are therefore suitable for processing
operations requiring very short response times to the occurrence of an event.
They can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language.
Number of EVTi control events:
b TSX Micro PLCs: 8 events with TSX 37 10 and 16 events with TSX 37 21/22.
b Premium PLCs: 32 events with TSX 57 10 and 64 events with TSX 57 20/30/40
and PCX 57 20/30.
TSX Micro TSX 37 21/22 and Premium PLCs have 2 priority levels (EVT0 event has
priority over other EVTi events).
6/60
Ladder language, Modicon Premium automation
structured text language platform 6
Ladder language (LD)

Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task)
Programs written in Ladder language consist of a series of rungs which are executed
sequentially by the PLC. Each rung may be:
b Identified by a label.
b Completed by a comment of up to 222 characters.
A rung consists of 7 lines on TSX Micro and 16 lines on Premium, with 11 columns,
allowing a maximum of 10 contacts and one coil per line.
Program editor: Ladder language
The Ladder language editor offers several tools for constructing rungs in a user-
friendly way:
b A palette of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols of
the language via the mouse or the keyboard: contacts, Boolean logic, coils, operation
blocks, predefined function blocks…
b A rung can be drawn without having to fill in each element.

b The language objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address
format.
b The symbol and address of each object can be displayed simultaneously.
b A rung is constructed simply by selecting the symbol from the graphic palette and
placing it in the correct position in the grid on-screen.
b An automatic link line function optimizes the number of user actions.
The Ladder language editor is used to call up immediately the functions which assist
data entry:
b Access to function libraries.
b Access to the variables editor.
b Cut, copy, paste.
Structured Text language (ST)
Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language which is

particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations,
message handling, etc.
6
Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task)
Structured Text language enables direct transcription of a flowchart analysis and is

organized into statements. Each statement consists of a label (1000 labels max),
comments (256 characters max) and instructions.
There are four methods for controlling statements:
b Conditional action IF. 6.2
b Conditional iterative action WHILE (action repeated while a condition is true).
b Conditional iterative action REPEAT (action repeated until a condition is true).
b Repetitive action FOR (action repeated a certain number of times).
Program editor: Structured Text language
The editor enables statements to be entered one after another.

The editor provides help with entering:
b Modifications, insertion, etc.
b Cut, copy, paste.
Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format.
Different colors are used for the objects, language key words and program
comments to make it easier to read.
9/61
Grafcet language, Modicon Premium automation
Instruction List language platform 6
TSX Micro PLC Premium PLC Grafcet language (SFC)

Grafcet language is used to describe, in a simple and graphic manner, the sequential
b 96 steps maximum (2) on b maximum of 250 steps (2) part of control systems. It corresponds to the SFC "sequential function chart"
8 pages for on 8 pages
TSX 37-10 and 128 steps language described in standard IEC 1131-3.
for TSX 37-21/22 b 64 macro-steps of 250
steps. Structure of the section in the master task
b 1024 transitions maximum b A "generic" comment can
(2) be associated with each
macro-step Grafcet SFC language is only used in one section of the master task.
b 11 elements maximum per This is structured in three processing operations, see page 6/60.
divergence/convergence b 1024 transitions maximum Programs written in Grafcet SFC language consist of:
(2) b Macro-steps (1) which are the only representation of a set of steps and a transition.
b 11 elements maximum per b Steps, with which the actions to be executed are associated.
divergence/ convergence b Transitions, with which the conditions are associated (transition conditions).
b Directed links, connecting the steps and transitions.
b 1024 steps maximum in See characteristics page 6/68.
the application The actions (continual, pulsed on activation or deactivation) and transition conditions
can be programmed in the desired language: Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction
List.
Program editor: Grafcet SFC language
The editor offers 8 pages, each consisting of 11 columns and 14 lines, giving
154 cells per page.
A palette of graphic objects is used for direct access to each graphic symbol
(macro-steps, steps, transitions, sequence selection, simultaneous activation/
deactivation and connectors).
Programming of the transition conditions and actions is performed simply by clicking on
the required chart element.
On a Grafcet page, comments of up to 64 characters can be entered in any cell.
Functions which assist entry: cut, copy, paste, etc. are available to the user.
Instruction List language (IL)
Instruction List language is a language representing, in the form of text, the

equivalent of a Ladder diagram. It is used for writing Boolean equations and making
use of the functions available in the language.
6 Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered tasks)
A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions from the

following different families:
b Bit instructions, for example read input n° 3: LD %I1.3.
b Instructions on function blocks, for example start timer n° 0: IN %TM0.
b Numerical instructions on single, double and floating point integers, for example,
perform an addition: [%MW10:= %MW50 + 100].
6.2 b Instructions on word tables, character strings, for example, perform an
assignment: [%MW10:10:=%KW50:10].
b Program instructions, for example, call subroutine n° 10: SR10.
Each instruction is composed of an instruction code and a bit or word type operand.
Program editor: Instruction List language
As in Ladder language, instructions are organized into sequences of instructions

(equivalent to a rung). Each sequence of instructions can be identified by a label %Li,
with i being from 0 to 999 and accompanied by a comment of 222 characters
maximum.
Each sequence of instructions is composed of one or more test instructions. The result
of these instructions is applied to one or more action instructions.
Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format.
The editor provides help with entering data.
(1) With Premium PLCs only.
6/62
platform 6
Functions
User DFB function blocks
PL7 Pro software offers the user the possibility (for Premium PLCs) of creating their
own function blocks which meet the particular needs of their applications. Once they
have been created in the library, these function blocks can be used with PL7
Junior/Pro software.
These user function blocks enable an application to be structured. They are used as
soon as a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or to freeze
a standard type of programming. They can be exported to all other PL7 applications.
Using a DFB function block in one or more applications enables:
b Simplification of program entry and design.
b Improved program readability.
b Easier debugging (all variables handled by the DFB function block are identified
on its interface).
b Use of DFB-specific internal variables (independent of the application).
A DFB derived function block is set up in three phases:
b Design of the DFB which has a name, parameters (I/O), variables and code in
Structured Text or ladder language.
b Creation of a DFB instance in the variables editor or when calling the function in
the program editor.
b Using this instance in the program in the same way as a standard function block.
Main characteristics
Inputs 16 max. (1)
Outputs 16 max. (2)
Inputs/outputs 16 max. (1) (2)
Public internal variables 1000 (can be accessed via the application program)
Private internal variables 1000 (cannot be accessed via the application program)
Comment 322 characters max.
Program sections One section in one of the 2 languages (ST, LD).
(1) The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 16.
(2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 16.
Variables editor
The variables editor is used to:

b Symbolize the various application objects (bits, words, function blocks, I/O, …).
6
b Define the parameters of the predefined function blocks (timers, counters,
registers etc.).
b Enter the values of the constants and select the display base (decimal, binary,
hexadecimal, floating point, message).
b Define the DFB user function block parameters.
Each symbol (32 characters max, accented characters are permitted) can be
accompanied by a comment (508 characters max).
Editing services are available in the editor: 6.2
b Find/replace an object in a part of the program or in a set of function modules
(PL7 Pro).
b Find a character string in a list of symbols or comments.
Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers enhanced functions due to:
b Copy/paste function for one or more symbol(s) and comments.
b Display in plain language of the overlap of different types of variable on a single
memory address (for example, single and double format internal words,
%MW0/%MD0).
b Highlighting of objects used by the application program.
b Opening the application variable database to third-party tools by
importing/exporting text files (.txt). This new function makes it possible to
create/modify application databases using a third-party software (for example
TSX Microsoft Excel) that has extended edit functions.
v For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal,
binary, hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message).
Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables:
b Display of the comment associated with variables.
b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables.
b Change of display format for a number of variables.
b Display of the list of forced bits.
9/63
platform 6
Animation table
Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be

created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected phrase or
rung.
Variables can then be:
b Modified.
b Forced to 0 or 1 for bit objects.
For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal, binary,
hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message).
Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables:
b Display of the comment associated with variables.
b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables.
b Change of display format for a number of variables.
b Display of the list of forced bits.
Documentation editor
The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser which displays
the contents of the documentation file in a tree structure.
It can be used to print all or part of the application documentation file on any graphic
printer which can be accessed in Windows and uses True Type technology, in A4 or
US letter print formats.
The documentation editor is used to define:
b A title page, including the name of the designer and project.

b General information pages.
b A footer.
The documentation editor automatically generates:
b The contents.
b The application documentation file: hardware and software configuration, program
with its comments (including those relating to the macro-steps and subroutines).
b The list of variables sorted by address or symbol.
b The cross-references, sorted by address or symbol.
6
Runtime screens
The runtime screen tool is integrated in PL7 Pro software (creation and use of
screens). It is intended in particular, for debugging when starting up installations and
for diagnostics on faults or malfunctions.
6.2 It comprises data (explanatory texts, dynamic values, synoptics, etc.) and enables a
simple and fast action (modification and dynamic monitoring of PLC variables).
The editor enables the design of these screens using the following tools:
b Screen: creation of runtime screens, which can be classed according to family.

b Message: creation of messages used.
b Objects: creation of a graphic objects library.
When the station is connected to the PLC, the user can display screens dynamically
depending on the state of the process.
Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the attributed priority, via either the
keyboard or PLC request.
In online mode, runtime screens enable direct access to the PL7 program from
synoptics by simply clicking on the selected object.
It is also possible to activate the animation table functions or cross references once
one or more variables have been selected on the screen. Version u V4.0 of PL7
software also enables character string type objects to be displayed.
Synoptics can be displayed on the full screen for ease of viewing.
6/64
platform 6
Debugging tools
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging

applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions:
b Setting stop points.
b Step by step program execution.
b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST) and event-triggered
(EVTi) tasks.
Animation of program elements

Parts of the program are animated directly when the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is in
RUN (rung, Structured Text statement or sequence of instructions in Instruction List
language) by activating the PL7 animation function.
Animation is used to display the status of program variables, whatever the language
used.
The animation can be frozen. Several windows can be displayed and animated
simultaneously.
Animation tables
Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be
created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected program part.
Variables can then be modified, forced to 0 or to 1 for bit objects.
These tables can be stored in the application and therefore retrieved at a later date.
Debugging the DFBs

b Animation table: all public parameters and variables are displayed and animated
in real time. It is possible to modify and force the desired objects.
b As for the rest of the program, it is possible to use the following functions:
breakpoint, step-by-step and program diagnostics.
Grafcet debugging
In online mode, the browser gives a hierarchical view of the chart with CHART
module and macro-step nesting. Animation is characterized by the presence or
absence of indicator colors.
The Grafcet debug bar:
b Displays the state of the chart.
6
b Modifies the state of the chart.
b Gives information on the state of the Master task.
Debugging the application-specific functions

The debug screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O
configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been
defined, when the terminal is in online mode.
These screens are used for: 6.2
b Displaying and modifying the state of the I/O.
b Forcing the I/O.
b Displaying and modifying the current values.
b ...
Diagnostics
The debug screens provide access to the general module or channel diagnostics.
These screens identify:
Internal module faults.
b External faults from the application.
b E.g.: range overrun fault for an analog module.
With version u V4.0 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics are
extended. It is possible to monitor system bits and words as well as to display
associated time-stamped messages automatically, without the need for additional
programming. This monitoring applies to the system elements (processor,
memory,tasks, …), in-rack I/O and remote I/O on the Fipio bus.
9/65
platform 6

.
Presentation
Integrated diagnostics in Premium automation platforms
System diagnostics Display viewers
Higher level
Monitor Pro M.E.S
Processor In-rack I/O Remote I/O

System bits modules modules on
and words Fipio Ethernet
Cell level
Magelis
XBT/T XBT
Machine level
Viewer
CCX 17
The diagnostic offer of Premium platform is built on threeelements:

b System diagnostic.
b Diagnostic DFBs function blocks (system and application).
b Display system of fault messages named viewers. This viewer function is
included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro softwares and CCX 17,
Magelis dialog terminals.
Functions
6 System diagnostics
With version V4 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics has been
enhanced by the monitoring of system bits/words and I/O (in-rack and remote via the
Fipio bus). All events automatically display time and date-stamped messages,
without any additional programming, using one of the display units (1).
The diagnostic functions integrated in PL7 Junior/Pro software can be used for 1st
level diagnostics of the configuration elements, and are effective for every module up
6.2 to channel level.
Configuration level
Module level
Viewer window (example with PL7 Pro software)
Channel level
(1) Viewers function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro software and
CCX 17, Magelis dialog terminals see page 6/67.
6/66
platform 6

PL7 Pro software has an integrated function block library containing monitoring
function blocks known as Diagnostic DFBs. The Diagnostic DFB library comprises:
System diagnostic manufacturer blocks:
b IO_DIA input/output fault. It can be used to monitor the state of the inputs/outputs.
b ASI_DIA checks for the appearance of any errors on the AS-Interface bus (module
or bus fault, slave missing, slave not configured or faulty).
Application diagnostic manufacturer blocks:
b EV_DIA checks that an event (state of a bit) takes the correct value at the expected
time (no notion of time).
b MV_DIA checks the requested movement (change in the state of a bit) due to
occur in a preset time period.
b ALRM_DIA monitors the state of a bit (at 1 or 0).
b NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA can be used to monitor, control and diagnose the
elements of the operating part created by wiring 2 preactuators and 2 sensors in
conjunction.
Open diagnostic blocks:
These offer users the option of creating their own diagnostic function blocks to meet
Usrst_dia the specific requirements of their applications, thus complementing the manufacturer
ED DFBs described above. They are created using 2 model blocks written in Ladder or
Inputs
Structured Text language.
COND ERROR
Outputs The following can be created simultaneously in one application:
STATUS b a maximum of 26 types of system diagnostic DFBs
AREA_NR b a maximum of 26 types of application diagnostic DFBs.
OP_CTRL
Viewers
The diagnostic events processed by the Premium PLC using the diagnostic DFBs
are stored in a buffer (memory space for data specific to the Premium PLC). The
information contained in this PLC buffer is sent transparently for the user to the
viewers and can be displayed automatically and used to handle errors and alarms.
6
The viewer function is included as standard in:
b PL7 Pro programming software

b CCX 17 version > V 2.5 operator panels
b Magelis XBT-F graphic terminals
b Monitor Pro supervisor version V7.0.
The Premium platform has a multi-viewer option (link to a maximum of 15 viewers). 6.2
A PC compatible station with the viewer function can be connected to several PLCs
(link via X-Way communication to a maximum of 15 Premium platforms).
This buffer/viewer structure offers:
b A single point for managing faults per application

b Time and date-stamping at source of the appearance of faults
b Memorisation of transient faults
*ACTIVE ALARMS: 011 * b Independence from the viewer functions. The frame transmitted from the PLC
002 03/04/97 11:07:54_NEPO_ACK 1 buffer is identical for all viewers.
Fault in left motor N° 3 2
<ALT>+<P> V Status <XI > V Return Composition of messages:
Each line displayed by the viewer represents a fault with, depending on the display
capacity: state, type of DFB, geographical zone, dates and times of
appearance/disappearance, associated message and status.
1 Viewer window on PL7 Pro screen.
Viewer screen on CCX 17 operator panel.
9/67
platform 6
Variable cross-references
For every variable, this function can be used to:

b Search for program modules where this variable is used.
b Obtain the list of statements, rungs or expressions.
b Display and check activation conditions.
A log is used to keep track of this navigation.
Options relating to the variable, can be associated with the search (extract bit, table
object, function block elements, network object, etc.).
This function can be initialized from the program or runtime screens.
Application converters
PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software includes application converters which make it

possible to reuse in full or in part, applications already written in:
b PL7 2, applications for TSX 17, TSX 27 or TSX 47 10/20/25 PLCs.
b PL7 3 (1), applications for TSX/PMX 47...TSX/PMX 107 PLCs.
b ORPHEE (1), applications for April Series 1000 PLCs.
The converters offer the following utilities:

b Translation of language objects into the new PL7 syntax with retrieval of
associated symbols and comments.
b Possibility of manually reassigning objects.
b Configuration check: the tool checks whether the configuration resources required
by the program to be converted are compatible with the configuration of the
destination application.
b Conversion (1) with generation of source files (Ladder, Structured Text or Grafcet)
in PL7 Junior/Pro format.
b Conversion ensures that instructions which are translated are functionally identical
to the original program.
b A translation report gives a summary:
v result of the conversion with the cause of non-translation where possible,
v correspondence of variables in PL7 with original variables.
(1) Function or functionality requiring PL7 Junior/Pro software.
6.2
6/68
Selection Modicon Premium automation
platform 6
X-Way communication drivers
The communication drivers (Uni-Telway COM port ans USB port, PC side) are
available in the PL7 software CD-Rom.
Depending on needs, another drivers can be be installed from TLX CD DRV20M
CD-Rom (to order separately). See following table.
Type of drivers Windows XP Windows NT Windows 98 Windows 95 OS/2 DOS

Windows 2000 Millenium
Uni-Telway V1.6 IE17 V1.9 IE17 V1.6 IE17 V7.8 IE18 – V7.4 IE14
TSX FPC10 V1.3 IE05 V1.3 IE08 V1.3 IE05 V2.4 IE14 V2.4 IE13 V2.2 IE11
TSX FPC20 V1.2 IE03 V1.3 IE08 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE05 –
TSX SCP 114 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 – –
Ethway V1.1 IE02 V1.1 IE03 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE06 V2.6 IE22 –
ISAway V1.2 IE04 V1.5 IE06 V1.2 IE04 V1.2 IE09 – –
PCIway V1.0 IE06 – – – – –
XIP V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 – –
Modbus V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 – –
USB for mini-DIN terminal Inclus PL7 – – – – –
port
USB for USB terminal port V1.0 IE14 – – – – –
References
Multilingual software packages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) for
PC compatibles (1) equipped with Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
Millennium, Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems.
For one station, these packages comprise:
b A CD-ROM supporting the PL7 multilingual software, the PL7 demonstration
applications and the terminal link Uni-Telway driver.
b A cable reference TSX PCU 1031, PC compatible with TSX Micro/Premium PLC
(length 2.5 m). Not supplied with software upgrade or update packages and PL7
software licenses.
b Two CD-ROMs containing multilingual technical documentation.
b A CD-ROM containing the TSX Micro/Premium platform operating systems.
For packages for 3 stations, the above quantities are multiplied by three. For software
licenses, TSX PCX 1031 cables must be ordered separately, according to the required 6
number of users.
All documentation reference (software setup manuals) reference TLX DOC PL7 43F
should be ordered separately.
(1) Typical recommended configuration: Pentium processor, 266 MHz, 128 Mb of RAM memory,
CD-ROM drive for installation of the PL7 program, VGA screen or above.
6.2
9/69
platform 6
PL7 Micro software packages
PL7 Micro software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text
and Grafcet language. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and
perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the
PL7 2 application converter.
Description For PLC Type of device Reference Weight

and update (1) kg
PL7 Micro TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7M p44M –
software packages
Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7M p44M –
PL7 Micro and TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7M PC44M –
SyCon V2.8
software package
Mises à jour logiciels PL7 Micro

Software updates TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7M P 44M –
for previous
version of
PL7 Micro Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7M P 44M –
Software update TSX Micro Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7M PC44M –
for previous
version of
PL7 Micro
supplied with
SyCon V2.8
PL7 junior software packages
PL7 Junior software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured

Text and Grafcet languages. It can also be used to set up application-specific
functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It
includes the PL7 2, PL7 3 and ORPHEE application converters.
6 Description For PLCs Type Reference

(1)
Weight
kg
PL7 Junior TSX Micro, Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7J p44M –
software packages Premium,
Atrium PCX
Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7J p44M –
Software updates TSX Micro, Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7J P44M –
for previous Premium,
version of Atrium PCX
6.2 PL7 Junior Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7J P44M –
Software upgrade TSX Micro, Single (1 station) TLX UCD PL7J P44M –
packages from Premium,
previous version of Atrium PCX
PL7 TSX Micro Group (3 stations) TLX UCD3 PL7J P44M –
(1) p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2.5 m)
v P: TSX PCX 1031 cable for RS 232C port of PC,
v PU: TSX PCX 3030 cable for USB port of PC.
6/70
platform 6
Ensembles logiciels PL7 Pro
Functions on PL7 Pro software are identical to those on PL7 Junior software. It also
offers the user thepossibility of creating his own function blocks (DFBs) and graphic
runtime screens.
Description For PLCs Type Reference Weight

(1) kg
PL7 Pro TSX Micro, Premium, Single (1 station) TLX CD PL7P p44M –
software package Atrium PCX
Group (3 stations) TLX CD3 PL7P p44M –
Software updates for TSX Micro, Premium, Single (1 station) TLX RCD PL7P P44M –
previous version of Atrium PCX
PL7 Pro Group (3 stations) TLX RCD3 PL7P P44M –
Software upgrade TSX Micro, Premium, Single (1 station) TLX UCD PL7P P44M –
packages from previous Atrium PCX
versions of PL7 Junior Group (3 stations) TLX UCD3 PL7P P44M –
PL7 Micro/Pro software licenses

Description For PLCs Type Reference Weight
kg
PL7 TSX Micro Open Team TSX Micro Team (10 stations) (2) TLX OT PL7M P44M –
software license
PL7 Pro Open Team TSX Micro, Premium, Team (10 stations) (2) TLX OT PL7P P44M –
software license Atrium PCX
PL7 Pro Open Site TSX Micro, Premium, Site > 10 stations (2) TLX OS PL7P P44M –
software license Atrium PCX
PL7 Pro Servi software TSX Micro, Premium, Client/server network TLX S PL7P P44M –
license Atrium PCX architecture server device.
Use of the PL7 Pro via client
station (Thin client) on network
and with access rights.
Separated elements
kg 6
X-Way drivers package for Includes all X-Way drivers (voir page 6/67) TLX CD DRV20M –
compatible PC Includes multilingual user documentation.
Description Used from processor to PC port Length Reference Weight

kg
Universal terminal port Mini-DIN port RS 232D 2.5 m TSX PCX 1031 0.170
cable TSX Micro/Premium (15-way
SUB-D
connector)
6.2
USB Port 2.5 m TSX PCX 3030 0.150
TSX PCX 1031
Description Description Reference Weight
kg
Set of manuals PL7 Hard copy including PL7 reference manuals, functions, TLX DOC PL7 44E 3.410
software (in english) communication, converters and diagnostics
(1) p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2.5 m)
v P: TSX PCX 1031 cable for RS 232C port of PC,
v PU: TSX PCX 3030 cable for USB port of PC.
(2) Team user stations from the same geographical site.
9/71
setup platform 6
SDKC software
Presentation
C language function development software, also called SDKC, is a PL7 Micro, PL7
Junior and PL7 Pro software option. It enables new functions to be developed
(internal code written in C language) and extends and completes the standard set of
functions offered by PL7 software.
SDKC software also integrates a creation and management service for families of
functions, so they can be integrated in the PL7 library.
Finally, it can be used to generate the function which ensures the protection of PL7
applications by reading a signature in the PCMCIA card inserted in the PLC.
Setup
C language development software is a genuine tool for managing the entire function
which has been created:
b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in PL7, with automatic file
organisation.
b Powerful debug and test tools.
b Management of compatibility and software version for the functions created.
b Generation of disks for the subsequent installation of functions on other
development stations.
Management of function families
The software enables different function families to be defined. These functions, also
known as EF, are classed according to family, allowing the user to create a
sequential library of functions written in C language.
These functions, which will eventually form a part of the PL7 library, can be:
b Used in all languages.
b Displayed by the PL7 library tool.
b Classed according to family/function.
The user has the following data at his disposal:

b Date of creation and generation of the function.
b The version number of the function family.
Editing functions
The various SDKC software editor tabs enable the user to create the function by:
b Declaring the interface (name, type and comment) for each input, output or I/O
parameter.
6.2 b Writing the source code file in C language.
b Declaring the constants as separate files.
A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such
as real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, mathematical functions. In
particular, it is possible to carry out numerical processing in floating point format, if
the target PLC allows.
6/72
Setup (continued), Modicon Premium automation
SDKC software
Setup (continued)
Debugging the functions
The function created must be generated under the “debug” format to be tested.
Once it has been inserted in an application and loaded to a PLC, the execution of a
function can be checked using numerous debug tools.
A specific function debug menu in C language accesses the following services:
b Breakpoint insertion.
b Step by step execution.
b Display of code with breakpoints shown.
b Display of data manipulations.
Functions library enhancement
After developing, generating, then debugging the function, the last step consists of
generating a function family installation disk.
This enables the function library on the user's programming terminal to be enhanced.
Managing the versions allows the level of any functions installed on a station to be
known at any time.
These functions can be used in all PL7 languages.
Reference
This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior
and PL7 Pro version > V4 software to be extended.
6
It comprises:
b A set of 3“1/2 disks.
b A bilingual user manual (English and French).
This software is supplied with a Microsoft Visual C++ software package registration
card.
PL7 SDKC procedure creation software 6.2

Description Function Target PLC Reference Weight
extension kg
PL7 SDKC software Procedure written in PL7 Micro/ TLX L SDKC PL7 41M 0.930
extension C language with Junior/Pro
access to floating TSX Micro/
point functions Premium
Debug in PLC
6/73
setup platform 6
PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing
Presentation
PL7 FUZ software is a PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro software option enabling fuzzy
logic processing in order to optimise the control of processes from Micro and
Premium PLCs. This is a software function which can be integrated in any
PL7 program. lt includes setup and debug tools.
This function is particularly suitable for controlling:

b Systems which are difficult to model or non-linear systems, with wide variation of
inputs or an insufficient sensor resolution.
b Systems which are difficult to control and require experience and human intuition.
It enables:
b Boolean logic limits to be exceeded (true or false state).
b The representation of physical measurements by gradual concepts.
b Benefit to be gained from the expertise of operators when controlling a proces.s
The fuzzy logic function is characterised by:

b 5 physical measurements used as inputs (temperature, pressure, speed…).
b 20 graphic related functions which allow the physical measurement inputs to be
represented by predefined associated linguistic terms. A temperature will be
represented for example by the terms: low, average, high according to the limits for the
various terminals.
b 25 linguistic rules which determine the state to be applied to the outputs
(3 conditions and 2 conclusions per rule).
b 4 numerical variables as outputs, results applying to the function input values
b The possibility of debugging its control offline.
Once inserted in a program, the fuzzy function can either operate in continuous mode
(function executed on each scan) or on request (a single iteration on each
execution). The operating mode enables the function to be used in automatic mode
(calculation of the outputs depending on the state of the inputs) or in manual mode
(applications with predefined output values).
Software setup
The fuzzy logic function software is set up in 2 steps:

6 b Integration of the fuzzy function in the application program, in the same way as any
other standard function.
b Setting the fuzzy function parameters using the setup screen.
Integration in the program
The fuzzy logic function is inserted in the program in all the available languages. The
software checks the various function parameters:
b The 5 input variables.
6.2 b The 4 output variables (plus an error bit).
b The internal variables necessary for the function to operate correctly.
The function setup screen is used to access parameters (I/O), membership

functions, linguistic rules, as well as debug functions.
Membership functions
The membership functions are described intuitively using a suitable layout. A

membership function is characterised by:
b The selection of one of the parameters (I/O).
b The choice of associated linguistic terms from a library of terms predefined or
created by the user.
b The type of function to apply for the inputs (trapeze, triangle, etc) as well as its
characteristic values and the functions to apply for the outputs (singleton).
6/74
PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing
Setup software (continued)

Linguistic rules
Linguistic rules (25 maximum) enable experts' know-how to be transcribed using

conditions/conclusions such as: If…Then…
b The definition of a rule is made easier by selecting the input parameters (3 per
rule).
b By assigning one of the possible linguistic terms to each input.
b By defining the outputs affected by this rule (2 per rule) as well as the associated
linguistic terms.
Simulation and debug
The fuzzy function is easily debugged using the setup and debug screen, especially
simplified by the possibility of simulating the operation offline.
Offline simulation
Once the parameter entry screens have been completed, it is possible to perform the
fuzzy function operation offline. The debug screen offers the possibility of:
b Forcing values for the various input variables.
b Starting the simulation using the “Start” key.
The results achieved are:

The values which will be applied to the outputs in normal operation.
The percentages obtained under the various rules.
Debug in online mode
In online mode the debug screen enables:

b Display of the state of the I/O.
b Access to the involvement percentages obtained under the various rules.
It can also:
b Force the inputs for testing precise operating points.
b Change to manual mode to apply predetermined values on the outputs.
b Change the operating mode: on request, or continuously by defining a period of
activation. 6
Reference
This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior
and PL7 Pro software to be extended into the domain of fuzzy logic. It comprises:
b A set of 3"1/2 disks.
b A multilingual user manual (English, French and German).
6.2
Software for fuzzy logic processing
Description Function Target PLC Reference Weight
extension kg
PL7 FUZ Development and PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TLX L PL7 FUZ 34M 0.560
software debugging of fuzzy TSX Micro/Premium
extension logic applications.
Defines the
membership
functions and fuzzy
rules for the
applications.
6/75
setup platform 6
PL7 DIF application comparison software
Presentation
PL7 DIF application comparison software for Premium platforms is an optional

program which complements the PL7 Pro programming software. It is used to
compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and automatically provide an
exhaustive list of all the differences between them.
The PL7 DIF program increases productivity in the main life phases of a control
system based on a Premium platform:
b Application development and debugging.

b Starting up installations and processes.
b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes.
PL7 DIF software is an efficient tool for handling PL7 applications for:
b Control system design offices.

b Operation and maintenance managers.
b Installers and systems integrators.
Software setup
The PL7 DIF software can be used in one of two modes:
b Interactive mode, when the comparison is launched by an operator command

(double-click on thePL7Diff software icon).
b “Batch” mode, when it is launched by a previously established call command.
These comparison commands locate all the differences between two applications in
terms of:
b The hardware configuration.

b The application access protection.
b The software structure with the section validation conditions.
b The application program regardless of the language(s) used.
b The function modules.
b The code for the DFB user function blocks.
6 b All the variables.
The result of the comparison between the two applications can be:
b Displayed.
b Printed.
b Saved in .txt format in a differences list.
Comparison
6.2
The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the
application browser with its three tabs.
1 Identification tab for accessing the characteristics of the two applications being
1 compared. The differences are marked by the sign #.
2 Browser tab for accessing the application multilevel tree structure.

2
3 List tab for accessing:
v Printing the comparison list,
v Creating the comparison file.
3
6/76
Setup (continued)
Display of results
The representation of the application multilevel tree structure, which can be

accessed via the browser tab after launching a comparison, is annotated by
4 symbols in which the information associated with application 1 appear in blue and
those associated with application 2 appear in red:
This branch, found in this level of the tree structure, contains at least
one difference
This block contains at least one difference
This section is only present in application 1
This section is only present in application 2
The programming language of this section differs between

application 1 and application 2
In the example opposite, a difference on the rung causing changeover to manual

mode is detected:
1 This line [7] displayed in blue belongs to application 1.

2 This line [7] displayed in red belongs to application 2.
1
2
The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences
precisely.
Printing a comparison list/creating a comparison file
The list tab is the means of accessing the functions for printing a comparison list or
creating a comparison file:
Access to the list form for printing a comparison list (or creating a
comparison file) 6
Used to include the block selected in the tree structure in the
comparison list (or the comparison file)
Used to exclude the block selected in the tree structure of the

comparison list (or the comparison file)
Used to create the comparison list (or the comparison file) according
to the selections above
6.2
Starts printing the comparison list (or saving the comparison file)
References
This software extension can be used to compare two PL7 applications generated by
PL7 Pro and designed for TSX Micro/Premium platforms. It comprises one CD-Rom
(three disks), containing the PL7 DIF software with its documentation (English and
French). A software subscription is available for this extension (please consult your
Regional Sales Office).

Function Target Type of device Reference Weight
extension PLC kg
target
Using for comparing PL7 Pro 1 station TLX CD PL7 DIF 41 –
applications generated TSX Micro/
by PL7 Pro version u V4 Premium 3 stations TLX CD3 PL7 DIF 41 –
6/77
platform 6
Process control
PL7
The process control range integrated as standard in Premium platforms enables the
setup and debugging of process control loops specifically designed for machine
control.
User-definable process control functions
TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and T PCX 57 203/353M

slot-PLCs can be used, depending on the model, to manage 10 to 20 control
channels (of 3 loops each).
These channels can be configured in order to execute algorithms used in industrial
processes:
6 b Cascaded loop.
b Process loop.
b Autoselective loop.
b Setpoint programmer.
b Controller with three simple loops.
Inputs/outputs
TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and TPCX 57 203/353M

6.2 slot-PLCs manage an entire station consisting of racks connected on Bus X.
The I/O interfaces necessary for process control processing are analog or discrete
module channels in:
b In-rack I/O modules.
b TBX or Momentum distributed I/O modules.
Control loops
The software setup of control loops is performed by entering parameters (Plug and
Play technology) when configuring the TSX P57/T PCX 57 processor or slot-PLC.
The user completes predefined loop diagrams which also integrate management of the
operating mode and the link with the I/O.
Operator dialogue and control
XBT F operator dialogue terminals have preconfigured screens dedicated to process

control which simplify loop operation and control. These screens show the controller
front panels as well as trending views and monitoring views.
6/78
Process control
PL7
Presentation
TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and T PCX 57 pp3M slot-PLCs

can be used to configure 10, 15 or 20 continuous or semi-continuous process control
channels.
The control functions of these processors are particularly suitable for:
b Sequential processing requiring auxiliary control functions such as packaging
machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc.
b Simple processes such as metal processing furnaces, ceramic furnaces,
refrigeration units, etc.
b Feedback or mechanical control where sampling time is critical, eg torque control,
speed control, etc.
b Premium processors have, amongst others, the following characteristics:
b Each configurable control channel can be used to manage 1 to 3 loops depending
on the type of loop chosen.
b Process control processors can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site as the
PLC can be integrated in various communication networks.
b Calculations related to process control are performed in floating point mode,
expressed as physical units.
Description: TSX P57 pp3/pp23M processors, see pages 1/27 to 1/29;
TPCX 57 pp3M slot-PLCs, see pages 1/33 and 1/34.
Functions
Control loops
Premium processors can be used to set up 10 to 20 control channels, each one
adopting one of the following 5 loop profiles :
b Process loop: loop with a single controller.
b Controller with 3 simple loops: controller which can increase the capacity of the
number of loops.
b Autoselective loop also known as secondary: comprises 2 loops in parallel with an
output selection algorithm.
b Cascaded loop: comprises 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave
loop setpoint).
b Setpoint programmer: comprises a maximum of 6 compound profiles with a total
of 48 segments.
Since the channels are independent, configuration of 10 channels can be used to
obtain:
b 30 simple loops.
b 5 setpoint programmers, each one associated with 5 control loops.
6
b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops.
The various loops are characterised by:
b Their different algorithms.
b 5 processing branches (process value, setpoint, Feed Forward, loop controller and
output processing).
b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters.
Type of control loops 6.2

Predefined algorithms, whose parameters can be defined by the user, are shown
below:
Process loop Simple loop
Autoselective loop Cascaded loop
6/79
platform 6
Process control
PL7
Processing branches
Parameter definition (choice of functions to be used) of control loop profiles enables

the algorithm to be adapted to the process to be controlled.
Process value processing
Process value processing can be performed either in standard fashion or externally.
b Standard processing, the user has the following functions at his disposal: filtering,
process value between limits, function generator with scaling, alarm management on
threshold overrun, totalizer and simulation of the measured value.
b External processing is used to obtain, at the loop controller input, a process value,
PV, which was processed outside the control loop. This solution is useful if
measurement calculation of the process value requires specific or customised
functions.
Setpoint processing
Depending on the type of loop chosen, it is possible to opt for one of the following
4 setpoints: ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint (remote with scaling) or
setpoint programmer.
When using the controller with 3 single loops or the secondary loop (in an
autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be
used.
Feed Forward processing
Feed Forward processing corrects a measurable disturbance as soon as it appears.

This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the disturbance. It has the
Leading function (phase lead/lag).
Loop controller and command processing
There are 6 different types of loop controller to choose from: autotuning PID,
controller in discrete mode with 2 or 3 states, hot/cool controller (PID or autotuning
6 model) or Split Range controller (PID or autotuning model).
Output processing
There are 3 types of output processing: analog output, servomotor output or PWM
output. Whatever the type of output, the control calculated by the controller crosses
a ramp limiter and a limiter where the lower and higher limits can be used to define
the output variation range.
6.2 Setpoint programmer
The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles with a total of 48 segments.

It is therefore possible to create a 48-segment programmer, six 8-segment
programmers or one 24-segment programmer with one 16-segment programmer
and one 8-segment programmer, etc.
Each segment is configured as a ramp or dwell time. It is characterised by:

b The setpoint to be reached.
b Duration of the segment or gradient of the segment (if a ramp).
A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or continually looped back.
Moreover, due to the concept of guaranteed dwell time, the time will only need to be
downcounted if the process value is actually in the specified range.
6/80
platform 6
Process control
PL7
Configuration of control channels
Special screens, accessible using PL7 Junior/Pro software, enable the configuration
of control loops.
Configuration of control channels
By simply selecting from the menus, the “Loops” interface on PMX process control
processors enables the following to be configured:
b The type of loop (out of the 5 existing ones).
b The choice of functions used in the 5 processing branches.
b Parameters linked to each function.
b Assignment of PLC variables to different loop branches (memory words, input
words or output words depending on the processing branch).
b Automatic presymbolization of variables used in the loops.
Configuration of process, single, autoselective and cascaded loops proposes

parameter entry by default. The various functions integrated in the algorithms
Configuration of control channels (square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are
predefined.
Example: configuration of process loop
Once the type of loop has been chosen, parameter entry is performed by selecting or
deselecting options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore
necessary, loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as parameters are validated.
The screen opposite shows how selecting the PID controller can display the various
parameters valid for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc).
For the setpoint programmer, configuration of the various profiles (6 maximum) is

done using a table defining each segment.
Once the type of segment has been chosen (ramp or dwell time), configuration
consists of defining the setpoint to be reached (for the ramp) and duration (for the
Configuration of a process loop ramp or dwell time).
While making selections, the lower part of the screen shows the profile display with
the setpoint limit values. 6
This screen also allows the cycles of this profile to be defined: execution once, a
certain number of times or continually looped back (32,767 times maximum).
Execution of control channels
The loop sampling period is predefined at 300 ms. This defines the loop controller
processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop
6.2
configuration screen.
The user can access all the I/O and parameters for the various configured control
channels via the program or by using the various PL7 Junior/Pro software tools (in
particular language editors and animation tables).
Defining of the cycles of profiles
6/81
platform 6
Process control
PL7
Debug functions
Adjustment and debugging of control loops is performed in a simple and user-friendly

way using the loop configuration application-specific screen which, when online, can
access the following functions:
b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram.
b Display of alarms linked to the process and channel faults.
b Simulation of input interface values: for example when they are not connected
(process value, Feed Forward).
b Addition, removal or replacement of calculation functions in online mode.
b Modification of adjustment parameters for each function.
b Modification of loop controller operating modes and manual control.
With the controllers integrated in control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning
function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T1,
T-delay) upon request.
Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current test values as the
initial loop parameter values. Hence, on restarting the loop, it will contain the correct
values.
Loop debugging
The debugging screen:
b Displays the values of variables linked to the loop dynamically.

b Shows the parameters chosen (or can even modify them).
b Displays alarms.
The menus enable manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter backup, etc.
Loop debugging
Setpoint programmer debugging
Setpoint programmer channels have their own debugging screen which displays:
6 b The number of the current segment and the iteration number.

b Execution time of the current segment.
b Overall execution time.
6.2 Runtime screens
The runtime screen tool available in PL7 Pro software integrates front panel views and
Setpoint programmer debugging trending views in its object library which can be used to adjust and operate control
loops.
Front panel views and trending views
Predefined controller front panel views provide the user with the traditional
appearance of controller front panels. The user only enters the variables used by the
loop being dealt with in the various fields in this view.
Similarly, trending views display changes in loop parameters in graph form as well as
useful operating information: operating mode, alarms, etc.
6/82
platform 6
Process control
PL7
Control and operation
Tools integrated in PL7 software (loop debugging screens, runtime screens, etc) which
are associated with XBT F Magelis graphic screen terminals offer screens dedicated to
the control and operation of control loops.
Setup
These predefined screens offer runtime and control views.
As standard, PL7 Junior/Pro software contains the application developed with

XBT L1003/L1004 development software, which comprises predefined runtime and
control views. When using this dialogue application, animation of runtime and control
views is automatic.
Presentation of views
Each control loop is associated with a certain number of views depending on the size
of the Magelis terminal screen.
b With 5” screen terminals, the user has 7 views at his disposal:

v monitoring view,
v front panel (bar chart),
v supervisory control view (trending),
v adjustment view,
v autotuning view,
v setpoint programmer view,
v alarm view.
With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 8 loops.
b With 10” screen terminals, the user has 5 views at his disposal:
v monitoring view,
v front panel view integrating the display of the front panel, loop adjustment and
autotuning,
v supervisory control view,
v setpoint programmer view,
v alarm view. 6
With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 16 loops.
All runtime pages are based on the same presentation module:
b An alarm zone is positioned at the bottom of the screen. It shows the last active
alarm.
Adjustment view
b Dynamic function keys execute one and only one function (access to the
adjustment page, starting autotuning, navigation between the various pages, 6.2
selecting a loop, etc.).
It is of course possible for the user to customise the screens to suit his requirements.
6/83
7
7/0
Contents 7 - Human/Machine Interfaces 7
7 - Human/Machine Interfaces
Selection guide Magelis display units and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2
Selection guide Magelis graphic terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4
Selection guide Magelis iPC industrial PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6
Software and Web servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8
b OFS data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10
b Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces
v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14

v Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/16
7/1
Selection guide 7
Operator dialogue terminals 7
Magelis display units and terminals
Applications Display of text messages Display of text messages

and/or semi-graphics
Type of unit Compact display units Display units
Display Type Back-lit green LCD, Fluorescent green matrix Back-lit monochrome matrix
height 5.5 mm (5 x 7 pixels), LCD (240 x 64 pixels),
or height 5 mm height 5.3 or 10.6 mm
Back-lit green, orange or or
red LCD, Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),
height 4.34…17.36 mm height 9 mm
Capacity 2 lines of 20 characters or 2 lines of 20 characters 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40

1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters
characters
Data entry Via keypad with Display only

8 keys (4 with changeable or
legends) via keypad with 4 function keys + 1 service key
or
5 service keys
Memory capacity Application 512 Kb Flash 128 Kb/256 Kb Flash 384 Kb Flash EPROM
Extension via type II PCMCIA –
Functions Maximum number of pages 128/200 application pages 100/200 application pages 600 application pages
256 alarm pages 128/256 alarm pages 256 alarm pages
256 print-out form pages (1) 256 print-out form pages (1)
Variables per page 40…50 50

Representation of variables Alphanumeric Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge
7 Recipes –
Curves –
Alarm logs – Depending on model
Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock
Alarm relay – No
Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 232 C/RS 485 RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422
Downloadable protocols Uni-Telway, Modbus Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE
Fanuc, Omron, Siemens
Bus and networks – AS-Interface using 22.5 pitch module

Printer link – RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (1)
Development software XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)
Operating systems Magelis
Type of terminal XBT N XBT H XBT HM
Pages Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces”

(1) Depending on model.
7/2
7
7
Display of text messages Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics

Control and parametering of data Control and parametering of data
Terminals
Fluorescent green matrix (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm Fluorescent green matrix (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels),
or or height 5.3 or 10.6 mm
Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm
2 lines of 20 characters 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters
Via keypad with Via keypad with Via keypad with

8 function keys + 9 service keys 24 function keys 12 function keys
or + 10 service keys 10 service keys
keypad with 12 function keys + 12 alphanumeric keys 12 numeric keys
+ 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys 4 soft function keys
256 Kb Flash EPROM 384 Kb Flash EPROM 512 Kb Flash EPROM
400 application pages 800 application pages 800 application pages

256 alarm pages 256 alarm pages 256 alarm pages
256 print-out form pages (1) 256 print-out form pages (1) 256 print-out form pages (1)
50
Alphanumeric Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge
–
7
–
Depending on model
Access to the PLC real-time clock Built-in Access to the PLC real-time clock
No Yes No
RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422

Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens
AS-Interface using 22.5 pitch module – AS-Interface using 22.5 pitch module
RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (1)
XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)
Magelis
XBT P XBT E XBT PM
Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces”
7/3
Selection guide 7
Operator dialogue terminals 7
Magelis graphic terminals
Applications Display of text messages and graphic objects

Control and parametering of data
Type of unit Graphic terminals
Display Type Back-lit monochrome LCD (320 x 240 pixels)

or Colour LCD STN with touch-sensitive screen (320 x 240 pixels) with optimum viewing angle
(1)
Capacity 5.7"
Data entry Via touch-sensitive screen Via keypad with

4 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC) 10 static function keys
8 soft function keys
12 service keys
12 alphanumeric keys
Memory capacity Application 8 Mb Flash EPROM (via PCMCIA type II card)
Extension By PCMCIA type II card, 8 or 16 Mb
Functions Maximum number of pages 50 to 720 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used
(512 alarms maximum)
Variables per page 64
Representation of variables Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, potentiometer, selector
Recipes 125 records maximum with 5000 values maximum
7 Curves
Alarm logs
16
Yes
Real-time clock Access to the PLC real-time clock
Alarm relay Yes
Communication Asynchronous serial link RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422

Downloadable protocols Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens
Bus and networks Modbus Plus, Fipio/Fipway with add-on PCMCIA type III card, Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP
(1) (2)
Printer link RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (depending on model)
Development software XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)
Operating systems Magelis
Type of terminal XBT F01/F03/FC

(1) Depending on model.
(2) TCP/IP with Modbus protocol for XBT F.
(3) Uni-Telway version V2 for Nano/Micro/Premium PLCs.
7/4
7
7
New Technology touch-sensitive graphic terminals
Back-lit monochrome LCD (640 x 480 pixels) Back-lit monochrome (blue or black and white mode) or colour
or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels) with optimum viewing angle (1) LCD STN or LCD TFT (320 x 240 pixels)
or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels or
800 x 600 pixels)
or Back-lit colour LCD STN (640 x 480 pixels)
9.5" (monochrome) 5.7" (monochrome or colour)

10.4" (colour) 7.4", 10.4" and 12.1" (colour)
Via touch-sensitive screen Via keypad with Via touch-sensitive screen (1)
8, 12 or 16 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC) (1) 12 static function keys
10 soft function keys
12 service keys
12 alphanumeric keys
4…8 Mb (1)
By "Compact Flash" card, 16 or 32 Mb
30 to 480 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used Limited by the internal Flash memory capacity or "Compact Flash"
(512 alarms maximum) card memory capacity
Unrestricted
Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, button, light, clock,

flashing light, keypad
–
Yes, with log
7
Built-in
–
RS 232 C/RS 485

Uni-Telway (3), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP
Ethernet (1), IEEE 802.3 10BaseT, RJ 45
For future use
VJD SPUL FUCDV10M (under Windows 2000 and XP)
Magelis (CPU 100 MHz RISC)
XBT F02/F03/FC XBT G
7/5
Selection guide 7
Magelis iPC industrial PCs 7
Applications “All in One” compact products
Screen 12” By keyboard

SVGA (800 x 600), By keyboard and touch screen
Data entry
By touch screen
Screen 15” By keyboard

XGA (1024 x 768) By keyboard and touch screen
Data entry
By touch screen p p
Page –
Control box Type Smart iPC Compact iPC
For modular products, to

use with 1 front panel Processor VIA 667 MHz Intel Pentium 4 Mobile
screen or in stand-alone 1.7 GHz
(1)
Internal hard disk – u 20 Gb
RAM memory 256 Mb extendable to 512 Mb 256 Mb extendable to 512 Mb
CD-Rom drive – Yes
Floppy disk drive – Yes

7 Extension slots 2 PCMCIA slots 1 PCI bus slot,
2 PCMCIA slots and 1 Compact Flash slot
Ethernet TCP/IP network 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)
Input/output ports 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x COM3, 1 x parallel

1 x COM2, 1 x parallel
1 x PS/2 keyboard 1 x USB on front panel, 1 x PS/2 keyboard, 1 x PS/2 pointing
device
Operating system Windows XPe integrated Windows 2000 pre-installed operating system
operating system
Pre-installed software or Transparent Ready – –

software package Web browser Vijeo Look Vijeo Look
Supply voltage c 24 V a 115...230 V
Type of PC or Control box MPC ST5 2NDJ 00T MPC KT5 2NAA 00p MPC KT5 5NAA 00p
7/6
7
7
Modular products
Control box to use with 1 front panel screen or in stand-alone (1)
MPC NA2 0NNN 00N

MPC NA2 0NNN 00N
MPC NA2 0NNN 00N
MPC NA5 0NNN 00N

MPC NA5 0NNN 00N
MPC NA5 0NNN 00N
Modular iPC Small Modular iPC Medium Modular iPC Large
Intel Celeron 566 MHz Intel Pentium III Intel Celeron 566 MHz Intel Pentium III 850 MHz
850 MHz
u 20 Gb, removable
Optionnal Yes, removable
Yes, removable
– 1 ISA bus slot, 1 PCI bus slot and 2 ISA bus slots, 3 PCI bus slots and 1 ISA/PCI bus slot
7
1 ISA/PCI bus slot
2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM4 and 1 x parallel
1 x external VGA video screen, 1 x PS/2 keyboard (2), 1 x PS/2 pointing device (2)
Windows pre-installed operating system (Windows 2000 or Windows XPe)
Pack A – Pack A, B, C or D – Pack E (a 115…230 V model)

(a 115…230 V)
a 115...230 V c 24 V a 115…230 V ou c 24 V depending on model
MPC AN0 MPC AN0 MPC BN0 MPC BN0 MPC CN0 2NpA 00N MPC CN0 5NpA 00N
2NAp 00N 2NDp 00N 2NpA 00N 5NpA 00N

(1) To use the Control box without a front panel, you will require the MPC NP0 0NNN 00N mounting panel.
(2) Port not operational when the Control box is used with the front panel screen.
7/7
Selection guide 7
Software and Web servers 7
Applications Traditional architecture, HMI executed on dedicated terminal or PC platform
Configuration software for user interface applications
Target products Type Magelis XBT N/H/P/E Magelis XBT G (1)

Magelis XBT HM/PM
Magelis XBT F/FC
(1)
Operating system on terminals Proprietary Magelis operating system
Functions Reading/writing of PLC variables Yes

Display of variables Yes
Data processing – Yes, with Java programming
Sharing of variables between HMI –

applications
Saving of variables to external –
database
Development of Native library of graphic objects Yes

graphics Container Active X –
applications
Java Beans – Yes
Curves and alarms Yes, with XBT F/FC terminal Yes, with log
Scripts VBA –
Java – Yes
Online modification of applications –
Communication between PLCs and HMI application Via I/O drivers
Uploading of applications Yes No
Simulation of HMI applications Yes

7
Redundancy –
Recipe management Yes No
Report printing Form, historical data and alarm pages –
Access security Linked to user profiles
Software compatible with OS Windows 98, 2000 or XP Windows 2000 or XP
Type of software XBT L1000 Vijeo Designer

(1) Magelis XBT terminals behave transparently on restoration of power.
7/8
7
7
Web architecture, embedded HMI in PLC
SCADA supervisory software Ethernet TCP/IP modules with embedded Web server
Magelis Compact iPC industrial PCs Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs TSX Micro TSX ETZ Premium TSX WMY 100
Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs PC micro-computers Premium TSX ETY Quantum 140 NWM 100 00
PC micro-computers Quantum 140 NOE 771
Microsoft Windows
Yes Yes – Yes

Application tasks
Yes –
Client/server architecture
Yes Yes – Yes + e-mail transmission triggered
MSDE 2000 interface supplied (2) SQL server 2000 interface supplied by event
Yes –
– Yes
Alarms via diagnostics buffer (3)
Yes Yes + compiled math and logic –
–
Yes – Yes
Via OFS data server Via OFS data server or I/O drivers Via internal bus on Premium/Quantum platforms
Yes
– Yes
7
Yes –
Yes –
Alarms and setpoints All information in the real-time –

database
Windows 98, 2000, NT or XP Windows 2000 or XP
Vijeo Look Monitor Pro FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI

(2) Compatible with SQL server 2000 interface.
(3) Specific memory area with Modicon Premium (with PL7 or Unity Pro software) and Quantum (with Unity Pro software) PLC platforms.
7/9
Presentation 7
OFS data server software
Presentation
OPC Factory Server (OFS) version 3.0 software uses the OLE for Process Control
(OPC) standard, allowing "Client" software applications (supervisors, databases,
spreadsheet programs) to access the following data:
b Internal variables (words, bits) and inputs/outputs of Modicon Premium/Quantum
PLCs.
b Internal variables (words, bits) of Modicon TSX Micro PLCs, Modicon
Momentum/Quantum PLCs (1), TSX Series 7 and April PLCs.
OFS software is a multi-PLC data Server that enables several communication

protocols to be used by providing Client application programs with a set of services
for accessing the control system variables.
This software is aimed at two types of user in particular:

b “End” users who seek to develop applications on a PC and require access to PLC
data. In this context, it is possible, for example, to create Client applications
(supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc.) with access to a number of PLCs
connected to the PC supporting these applications.
b “Suppliers” of control system or industrial data processing products (supervision,
Human/Machine Interfaces, etc.) seeking to develop, within their standard products,
an OPC Client application capable of accessing data stored in PLCs via the OPC
Server.
The OFS offer comprises:

b A tool for configuring the OPC Server.
b An OPC Server software application that receives requests from an OPC Client
and retransmits them to the PLCs.
b Low-level drivers for communication with Modicon PLCs.
b An OPC Client enabling verification of Client/Server communication between the
various connected elements.
b A simulator enabling verification of operation of one or more Clients, without a
connected PLC.
b The electronic setup documentation.
(1) With Concept/ProWORX software.
Setup: Functions: References:

7/10
Setup 7
Setup
Ethernet TCP/IP 7
OFS Station 1
(V3.0)
7
Databases
4
symbols.xvm (Unity Pro)

5 symbols.prj (Concept)
2 symbols.scy (PL7)
8 Unity Pro project station

6
Premium
Ethernet TCP/IP 3 Quantum
Momentum TSX Micro
OFS software can be integrated into control system architectures such as the one
shown above:
1 PC running OFS software including the OPC Server.
2 PC running the Client application, which accesses the PLC data via OFS.
3 Communication networks linking the PC, running OFS software, with the PLCs.
4 OPC communication protocol.
5 Modbus on TCP/IP communication protocol.
6 Uni-TE on TCP/IP communication protocol.
7 OFS software program accesses Unity Pro project variables directly. Additionally,
it conducts a check to verify that these variables are consistent with those of the
Premium or Quantum PLC.
Depending on the usage, the Client application and OFS software can be located on
the same PC or on two different PCs 1 and 2, linked by a TCP/IP Ethernet network 7.
Nota : Depending on the software used for Modicon PLCs:

- PL7 software generates PLC variable symbol export files. These export files (symbols.scy)
should be integrated in the OPC Server.
- Concept: the variables can be accessed directly in the project (file.prj) of the Concept
application. This direct link requires Concept (version > V2.0) to be installed on the OFS station 1.
7
- Unity Pro programming software generates export files from PLC variable symbols. These
export files (.xvm symbols) should be integrated into the OPC Server when the Unity Pro project
development station 8 is not accessible via the OFS station. If the Unity Pro project station is
permanently accessible via the OFS station, the former exchanges directly with the variables of
the Unity Pro project (via P. server).
Presentation: Functions: Reference numbers:

7/11
Functions 7
Functions
Development of Client applications
OFS software has two interfaces:
b OPC Automation interface.

Particularly suitable for “end” users, it enables the development of OPC Client
applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic for Excel, but also in C++.
b OPC Custom interface.
Used primarily by “suppliers” of automated control system or industrial IT products.
It enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the OFS
software OPC Server. This interface is aimed at software development experts in
particular, so that they can integrate the Client application into their standard
products. This is the interface with the highest performance, in terms of access time,
to data stored in the OPC Server but it requires extensive knowledge of C++
programming.
OFS software services
The various OFS software services enable:
b Access to the Server in local or remote mode. Symbols are accessed either:
v via an .xvm/.prj/.scy-format export file (depending on the software used),
v or via direct access to the Unity Pro project in the case where it is accessible via
the OFS station.
b With Unity Pro software, when accessing the Unity Pro project directly, the OFS
software program transparently manages the consistency of the Unity Pro project
symbol database with that of the Premium or Quantum PLC. In the event of
inconsistency, three types of operation are possible:
v "strict" mode, which stops exchanges,
v "symbolic" mode, which signals an alert to the user,
v "debug" mode, which does not hold up debugging of the architecture.
b Access to variables in the form of addresses or symbols.
b Reading and writing of variables to one or more PLCs present on the
communication network connected to the PC running the OFS software. These
variables can be:
v the sum of all variables belonging to the Unity Pro projects (bits, words,
spreadsheets, DDT/IODDT-type compound data),
v system variables (OPC System Group: PLC status, diagnostics, etc.),
v internal variables representing the PLC words or registers (OPC User Group).
b Use of a notification mechanism that transmits change of status values to the
Client. Communication between the OPC Server and the PLC uses polling or can be
initiated by the PLC in order to decrease the volume of exchanges (“push data”).
7 b Definition of dead bands for measurement noise filtering (floating variables).
Communication with PLCs
The various variables contained in the PLCs are accessed via standard
Telemecanique communication protocols using the following:
b Uni-Telway bus and Ethernet/Fipway networks, Uni-TE protocol on TCP/IP, as well

as the PCIway communication driver when TSX PCI 57 Atrium coprocessors (with
Unity Pro) are used.
b Modbus serial link, Ethernet/Modbus Plus networks and Modbus protocol on
TCP/IP.
The various corresponding communication drivers are supplied in the OFS software
(except Modbus Plus driver, which is supplied with the PC Modbus Plus card).
Presentation: Setup: References:

7/12
References 7
References
OFS software for PC compatible stations (minimum configuration: Pentium 266 MHz
processor, 64 Mb of RAM) running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP.
The OFS offer comprises:
b OPC Server software, compatible with the OPC Data Access 2.0 standard.
b OPC Server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present).
b A tool for configuring the Server on the PC.
b A example of OPC Client for setting up applications.
b The setup documentation on CD-Rom.
Supplied on CD-Rom, this software operates independently on a PC. Nevertheless,

export files for variables generated by PL7 or ProWORX development software are
required. The direct link with Concept applications requires Concept software
(version > 2.0) to be installed on the same station.
Description Function Type of Reference Weight

license kg
OFS data Enables the development of Single station TLX CD OFS 30M –
server Client applications, accessing
software data of Premium and Quantum
(version V3.0) (with Unity Pro) via the OFS
Server. 10 stations TLX CD 10OFS 30M –
Also compatible with:
- TSX Micro/Premium (with
PL7),
- Momentum/Quantum (with
200 stations TLX CD UNOFS 30M –
Concept/ProWORX),
- TSX Series 7 and April PLCs
OFS software Enables you to update a – Consult your

update previous version of OFS data Regional Sales Office.
server software
Presentation: Setup: Functions:

7/13
Presentation, description Installation system 7
Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces
Presentation
The modular Tego Dial system is used to define human-machine interfaces. It facilitates the installation of Ø 22, Ø 16 and Ø 30 mm control and signalling units,
DIN format display units, Magelis terminals and display units, XBL keypads and other products.
Tego Dial simplifies an HMI application by :
- definition of the application by Tego Dial Design software,
- quick assembly of dialogue and display units, through the use of modular elements,
- standard connections from the dialogue units to PLCs, bus and other products,
- facilitates the integration of the dialogue application into the machine, control panel, enclosure, machine housing or intermediate suspension arm.
Description
p Tego Dial Design definition software
This software on CD-ROM facilitates graphical definition of the
dialogue application in relation to the control units, pilot lights
and display units necessary for the device.
It selects the correct Tego Dial components that are required for
the application and also features a legend design and printing
function, both for the front panel and the connections.
p Dialboard front panels 1

The front panels basically comprise a grey, RAL 7016, painted
aluminium frame which is covered by a polycarbonate film.
Six sizes are available based on a modular pattern of height H
= 50 mm and width W = 75 mm 2. The sizes are 3H x 4W, 3H x
6W, 6H x 4W, 9H x 2W, 9H x 4W and 9H x 6W.
p Dialpack control console enclosers 3

Four control consoles are available in the following modular
sizes: 3H x 4W, 6H x 4W, 9H x 4W and 9H x 6W.
The Dialpack console is an assembly comprising a Dialboard type
1 3 front panel and a sheet steel folded and welded enclosure, painted
with textured grey RAL 7016.
The front panel is hinged and can be opened to 120°. Closing is
by a 1/4-turn device, with stop, and locking by Ronis key no. 455.
H = 50 mm, L = 75 mm Double bar or CNOMO triangular key locks are also available. A
3H
customising component in 2 versions - yellow or unpainted -

enhances the Dialpack unit and makes it more ergonomic. A
Dialpack S version in stainless steel type 304 is available for
6L corrosive environments. This version conforms to enclosure
standard EN 50298.
6H
p Plates and cross-pieces 4

A range of modular dimensioned plates facilitates the installation
of all combinations of control and signalling units, operator
dialogue terminals and other devices. These plates are
9H
9H
9H
4L attached directly to the framework of the front panel.

The plates, made from sheet steel and painted grey RAL 7016,
are designed for the following product ranges :
- Ø 22, Ø 16 and Ø 30 control and signalling units,
3H
- DIN format display units,

- Electronic operator terminals and displays (Magelis and
4L 2L 4L 6L others),
- keypads,
7 2
- other units: joystick controllers, cam switches, etc.
Cross-pieces aid vertical mounting of several rows of plates.
Cut-outs in the plates are dimensioned to suit the dialogue or
display units that are to be installed. Some plate versions for Ø 22
units are available with knock-outs, which need to be removed
before mounting the unit. Other versions incorporate cut-outs for
the transparent polycarbonate legend holders (included with the
plate).
Alternatively, solid plates are also available for mounting any
special equipment required.
p Toolkit 5
The installation of dialogue and display units requires cut-outs to
be made through the polycarbonate film. To simplify this
operation, the plate is marked with cut-out guides and a toolkit is
available, comprising : a mallet, cutting tools and replacement
blades.
p Pre-assembled kits
Dialboard and Dialpack with pre-assembled plates and cross-
pieces are available.
4
5

Presentation Installation system 7
Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces
Standard connections
Tego Dial offers a range of interface components and

cabling accessories that simplify connections between
control and signalling units and PLCs, buses and other
products.
- prefabricated connection cables and insulation
displacement connectors 1, 5 mm pitch, for connecting
control and signalling units to Dialbase interfaces,
1
5 - Dialbase 8I/8O or 16I interfaces 2 with integrated
commons, for connecting control and signalling units to
1 PLCs via prefabricated Telefast connection cables 5,
7 - an active splitter block 7 for connecting a Dialbase 8I/8O
5 interface to PLCs with a connection modularity greater than
8I/8O,
- a Dialbase 230 V interface 3 for connecting control and
signalling units to any product up to 230V,
2 - a Dialbase AS-i 4I/4O interface 4 with integrated commons,
for connecting control and signalling units to the AS-i bus.
5
The selection guide on page 7/16 indicates the type and
quantity of components (Dialbase interfaces, active splitter
Other block, Telefast connection cables) required to connect the
H G
D C
B A
F E = 230Vac C B
Ue E D
A
products control and signalling units to the various types of PLC. The
P
APE1B
P
M
O N
Dia
O N 230 M L K
J I
J
points G F
L Klbase 16 I H
6 most efficient connection is achieved using the Dialbase 8I/
8O interface and the Telemecanique TSX Micro PLC
3 AS-i bus TSX DMZ16DTK card 6.
Q4
Q1
108
4 105
1
104
101
206
205
201 204
301
Dialfix and Dialmove suspension arms
Dialpack control consoles can be fitted directly using 4

adjustable lugs, ref. AE3-FX122. However, for improved
ergonomy, they are usually mounted on a suspension arm.
This can either be fixed (Dialfix) or moving (Dialmove).
Dialfix fixed arms
Two versions are available :
7
- a straight fixed arm kit, comprising a straight Ø 70 mm tube,
500 or 1000 mm in length, and a pair of clamps (one for each
end). Depending on the positioning of the clamps, an
inclination of ±15° from the natural position can be achieved,
- an elbowed (90°) fixed arm kit, 500 mm in length. This kit also
includes the pair of clamps described above.
Arms for corrosive environments
The arms are in 304 type stainless steel and provide 350°
rotation on the Dialpack fixing side. Two models are
available:
- straight arm kit, length 1000 mm,
- 90° elbowed arm kit, length 500 mm.
Dialmove moving arm
This arm enables an extensive choice of mounting
configurations. The cabling runs through the elements, which
have removable side covers for easy access.
Numerous configuration possibilities can be achieved by
combining the following components:
- straight tubes (100 to 1000 mm long),
- fixed 90° joint,
- wall fixing bracket (straight or elbowed, fixed or mobile),
- straight fixing plates (one fixed, other rotating) for Dialpack,
- 15° tilted joints,
- pivoting joint (-90° to +90° in the same plane).

Compatibility Modicon Premium automation
platform 7
Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system
Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces and Tego Power for motor power-starter components
Automation platforms Tego Dial components Tego Power components
Type Modularity of Compatible I/O Tego Dialbase Tego Dialbase 16 I Communication module or control splitter
connection to the modules 8 I/8 O box with 8 I/8 O
PLC
APE-1B24M APE-1B24E APP-1CH, APP-2R4H1/H3
Micro platform
Tego Dial 8 inputs TSX DMZ 16DTK 1

+ 8 outputs
16 inputs TSX DMZ 64DTK 1 (1)
+ 16 outputs
16 inputs TSX DMZ 1
64DTK/28DTK
Tego Power 8 inputs TSX DMZ 16DTK 1
+ 8 outputs
16 inputs TSX DMZ 64DTK 1
+ 16 outputs
Premium platform
Tego Dial 16 inputs TSX DEY 1 (1)

+ 16 outputs 16FK/32D2K/64D2K
TSX DSY
7 16 inputs
32T2K/64T2K
TSX DEY
16FK/32D2K/64D2K
Tego Power 16 inputs TSX DEY 1
+ 16 outputs 32D2K/64D2K/16FK
TSX DSY
32T2K/64T2K
Quantum platform
Tego Dial 32 inputs 140 DDI 353 00/10, 1 (1)

+ 32 outputs 140 DDI 853 00,
140 DD0 353 00/10
32 inputs 140 DDI 353 00/10, 1

140 DDI 853 00
Tego Power 32 inputs 140 DDI 353 00/10, 1
+ 32 outputs 140 DDI 853 00,
140 DD0 353 00/10
(1) For the connection of a second Dialbase APE-1B24M, use 2 x TSX DP pp3 connecting cables.
7/16
7
Connecting components
Control splitter box 16 I/8 O Splitter box Splitter box Telefast connecting cables
16 I + 16 O 16 to 2 x 8
to 2 x (8 I+8 O)
APP-2RH2/H4 APE-1R1628 ABE-7ACC02 TSX CDP pp3 ABF-M32Hpp0
1 2
1 (2) 3
1 1 (3) 3
1 2
2
7
1 (2) 3
1 1 (3) 3
1 1 2
1 (2) 1 2
1 1 (3) 1 2
(2) 8 I + 8 O remain available. To connect a second APP-1CH module or APP-2ppp 8 E + 8 S control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp4 cable.
(3) 8 O remain available on ABE-7ACC02. To connect them a second AAP-2ppp 16 I/8 O control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp3 cable.
7/17
8
8/0
Contents 8 - Connection interfaces and
power supplies 8
8.1 - Telefast 2 pre-wired system

Selection guide Telefast 2 pre-wired system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8
b References
v Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/10

v Sub-bases with soldered solid state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/12
v Sub bases equipped with plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/13
v Sub-bases for analogue channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/16
b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/18
8.2 - Power supplies for d.c. control circuits

Selection guide Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies . . . . page 8/20
b Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/24
b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/26
b Dimensions and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/32
8/1
Selection guide 8
Connection interfaces 8
Telefast® 2 pre-wired system

Discrete input and/or output sub-bases
Applications Discrete input or output
817436
817437
817438
Relay amplification –
Equipped with relay –
Control voltage c 24 V
Output voltage c 24 V
Output current per channel 0.5 A
Modularity 16 8 -12 -16
No. of terminals per channel 1 1 to 3 1 2
Type of connection terminals Signal Signal, common Signal Signal, Common

(configurable (configurable c 24 V or 0 V)
c 24 V or 0 V)
Connectors 20-way HE10 connector
Terminal block
Removable No No
Type of Screw Screw or spring

terminals
Additional or optional* Low cost version Miniature sub-bases Compact size * Type 2 input * Isolator *
function fitted with cable (1)
Device type ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE-

7H20Eppp 7H16Cpp 7HppR1p 7HppR2p 7HppS21
7H32Eppp 7HppR50
8 Pages 8/10 8/11
(1) For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs.
8.1
8/2
8
8
Discrete input and output

817432
521500
– Removable electromechanical or solid state
– No Yes
c 24 V
c 24 V c 24 V (solid state)
c 5... 24 V, a 230 V (electromechanical)
0.5 A 0.5 A 5 A (E.M.), 2 A (solid state) 5 A (th)
16 16
8 passive inputs
8 relay outputs
1 2 1
Signal, Signal, common, 1 N/O contact and common, 4 output channels

2 common connections between 2 common connections between 2 input connection points
the inputs and the outputs. the inputs and the outputs.
20-way HE10 connectors
No
Screw
Miniature sub-base Miniature sub-base - Common per 4 channels

Synergy with Tego Power and API Micro PLC Synergy with Tego Power and API Micro PLC
ABE-7H16CM11 ABE-7H16CM21 ABE-7P16M111 ABE-7R16M111
8/10 8/14 8/13

8
8.1
8/3
Selection guide (continued) 8

Discrete input and output sub-bases
Applications Discrete output
817440
Relay amplification Electromechanical, fixed Electromechanical or solid state
Equipped with relay Yes Yes No No
Output voltage c 5 V... 30 V c 5 V... 150 V c 24 V (solid state) c 5 V... 150 V

a 230 V a 230 V c 5 V... 24 V, a 230 V (E.M.) a 230 V
Output current per channel 2 A (th) 3 A (th) 5 A (th) 2 A (solid state), Depends on
6 A (electromechanical) relay mounted
0.5 to 10 A
Modularity 8 8 - 16 16 8 or 16
No. of terminals per channel 2 1 2 1 2 to 3
Type of connection terminals 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact 1 N/O contact Signal,
and common and common Polarities
Volt-free
Connectors 20-way HE 10 connector
Terminal block
Removable Yes Yes Yes No No
Type of Screw or spring Screw Screw or spring

terminals
Additional or optional* Miniature Volt-free Miniature sub-bases Isolator and fuse

function sub-base or common per 8 channels Common per 4 channels
Bistable relay
Device type ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE-

8 7R08S216p 7RppS1pp 7RppS2pp 7R16T111 7P16T111 7P16T2ppp
7P08T3ppp
Pages 8/12 8/13 8/14
8.1 (1) For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs.
8/4
8
8
Discrete input
817439
Electromechanical, removable Solid state, fixed – – Solid state, fixed Solid state,
removable
Yes Yes – – Yes No
From c 24 V From 5 V TTL

to a 230 V to a 230 V
c 5 V... 150 V c 24 V
a 230 V
5A (th) 8 A (th) from 0.5 to 2 A 125 mA 0.5 A 125 mA 12 mA
16
2 to 3 2 to 6 2 3 2
1 C/O contact or 1 C/O contact or Signal and 0 V Signal Signal can be Signal Signal
1 N/O contact 2 C/O contacts c 24 V and 0 V isolated, Protected and common
and common and common common
No Yes No No Yes No
Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw or spring
Volt-free or common per: Fault signal Isolator and fuse 3-wire proximity Isolator and fuse –
(indicator) sensor (indicator)
8 channels 4 channels
ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE- ABE-

7R16T2pp 7R16T3pp 7SppS2Bp 7H16F43 7H16R3p 7H16S43 7S16E2pp 7P16F31p 8
8/13 8/12 8/11 8/12 8/15
8.1
8/5
Selection guide (continued) 8

Analogue sub-bases
Applications Analogue signals and special functions
817431
Compatibility TSX Micro Premium Standard
Type of signal Counter inputs Counter inputs Analogue inputs Analogue outputs
and analogue I/O Axis control Current Current
Position control Voltage Voltage
Pt 100
Functions Passive connection, point-to-point with shield continuity
Modularity 1 counter channel or 8 analogue inputs + 2 analogue outputs 8 channels 4 channels
Output voltage c 24 V
Output current 25 mA
per channel
Number of terminals 2 2 or 4 2 or 4
per channel
Type of connector 15-way SUB-D + 9-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D
Terminal block
Removable No No
Type of terminals Screw Screw
Device type ABE-7CPA01 ABE-7CPA02 ABE-7CPA21
Pages 8/16
8
8.1
8/6
8
8
817435
817434
817435
Premium Premium Premium Premium

TSX AEY810 TSX CAYp1 TSX AEY1614 TSX PAY2p2
TSX CTY2C
Analogue inputs Isolated analogue inputs Inputs Inputs for thermocouples I/O
Current Counter
Voltage
Pt 100
Distribution of sensor Distribution of isolated sensor Acquisition of value from Connection of Safety module
power supplies per limiter power supplies per converter an absolute encoder 16 thermocouples with (BG)
(25 mA) cold junction compensation
8 channels 8 channels 1 channel 16 channels 12 Emergency stops
– 2 or 4 1
25-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D 15-way SUB-D 25-way SUB-D 50-way SUB-D
No No No No No
Screw Screw or spring Screw Screw Screw
ABE-7CPA03 ABE-7CPA31p ABE-7CPA11 ABE-7CPA12 ABE-7CPA13
8.1
8/7
Presentation Connection interfaces 8
Telefast®
2 pre-wired system
Connector cables for Modicon PLCs
816575
5
1
1 15
4
1
1 14
3
1
1 13
2
2
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
5
2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
5
1
4
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5 5
8
1-2 Cabled connectors combine a standard terminal block equipped with screw terminals, two multicore (AWG 22)
cables and two 20-way HE 10 connectors. Two cabled connectors are available for the Quantum range and two
others for the 984-A120-Compact range.
The 4 products have the following functions:
8.1 - ABF-M32Hpp0 1 for Quantum relay inputs or outputs, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 16 channels.
- ABF-M32Hpp1 2 for outputs directly connected to the Quantum, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 16
channels and an external power supply with a direct connection to the output terminal marked 1.
- ABF-M16Hpp0 for 984-A120-Compact inputs or relay outputs, with 1 x HE 10 connector each integrating 16 channels.
- ABF-M16Hpp1 for 984-A120-Compact directly connected outputs, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 8 channels.
3 The splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 may be used to connect sub-bases with 8-channel modularity.
4 A single type of cable equipped with 20-way HE 10 connectors irrespective of the 8, 12 or 16-channel modularity.
The HE 10 connectors may be moulded (TSX-CDPppp) or self-perforating (ABF-H20Hppp).
5 8 and 16-channel sub-bases from the Telefast 2 range.

(1) The c 24 V power supply is connected using Telefast 2 sub-bases only. The c 0 V connections must be equipotential.
8/8
Compatibility Connection interfaces 8

Modicon PLC and NUM numerical control I/O modules with
interface sub-bases
I/O modules Modicon PLCs NUM

numerical controllers
984-A120-Compact Quantum NUM 1050/ NUM 1020
1060
Inputs Outputs TOR TOR Analogue Inputs/ Inputs/
In- Outputs In- Out- Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs
put put put
16 E 16 S 32 E 32 S 96 E 96 S 8 E 16E 4 S 8S 64 E + 48 S 32 E + 24 S
DEP DEP DAO DAO DAP DDI DDO DDI DDO 140 140 140 140 140 64 I 48 O 32 I 24 O
220 217 216 216 217 353 353 364 364 AVI ACI AVO ACO ACO
DEO DAP DAP DDI 03000 04000 02000 02000 13000
216 216 216 853 140
DEP ACI
216 03000
Connection terminal blocks Included NUM cables not supplied
Cabled connectors ABF- M16 M16 M32 M32 – M08 M16 M04 M04 M08 – – – –
Hpp0 Hpp1 Hpp0 Hpp1 S201 S201 S200 S201 S202 – – – –
Splitter sub-bases ABE-7 – – – – CDPppp3 – ACC04 ACC05 ACC04 ACC05
Connection sub-bases
(1)
8 channels ABE-7H08Rpp (5) (5) (1) (2) (2) (2) (2)
ABE-7H08S21 (5) (2) (2) (2)
12 channels ABE-7H12Rpp
ABE-7H12S21
16 channels ABE-7H16Rpp/H16Cpp (1)
ABE-7H16S21
ABE-7H16R23 (4)
ABE-7H16F43
ABE-7H16S43 (3)
Input adaptor sub-bases
16 channels ABE-7S16E2pp/7P16F3pp
ABE-7P08T330 (2)
Output adaptor sub-bases
8 channels ABE-7S08S2pp (2)
ABE-7R08Sppp/7P08T330 (2) (2)
16 channels ABE-7R16Sppp
ABE-7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp
ABE-7S16Sppp
Sub-bases for analogue/counter I/O
ABE-7CPA01
ABE-7CPA02 (6) 8
ABE-7CPA03 (6)
ABE-7CPA21
ABE-7CPA31 (6)
8.1
(1) With Telefast 2 sub-bases with no channel LED.
(2) With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02.
(3) Only with module DDI 853.
(4) Only with module DDI 353.
(5) With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 or with a cabled connector ABF-M16Hpp1 directly.
(6) 2 sub-bases are required.
Pre-wired cabled connectors
8/9
References Connection interfaces 8
Telefast®2 pre-wired system

Passive connection sub-bases
Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals

816460
"Low cost" sub-bases

816461
Function No. No. of terminals For PLCs Length Type Reference Weight
of per on of PLC of
chan- chan- row connection connection
nels nel number cable
m kg
Input 16 1 2 Modicon TSX 1 Screw ABE-7H20E100 0.330

or Micro/Premium
Output
ABE-7H20Eppp
2 Screw ABE-7H20E200 0.410
3 Screw ABE-7H20E300 0.480
Siemens S7 1.5 Screw ABE-7H32E150 0.360
3 Screw ABE-7H32E300 0.460
"Miniature" sub-bases
Function No. No. of terminals LED Polarity Type Reference Weight
of per on per distribution of
chan- chan- row chan- connection
nels nel number nel kg
Input 16 1 1 No No Screw ABE-7H16C10 0.160

or
Output
Yes No Screw ABE-7H16C11 0.160

816462
2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE-7H16C21 0.205
8
ABE-7H16C21 3 3 Yes 0 and 24 V Screw ABE-7H16C31 0.260
8.1
816463
Input 16 1 1 Yes No Screw ABE-7H16CM11 0.160

and
Output(1)
ABE-7H16CM21
2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE-7H16CM21 0.200
(1) 8 I + 8 Q: these products have 2 commons connections which enable inputs and outputs to be connected to the same
sub-base at the same time.
8/10

Passive connection sub-bases
Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals (continued)

Function No. No. of terminals LED Polarity Isolator (I) Type of Reference Weight
816464
of per on per distribution Fuse (F) connection

chan- chan- row chan- per
nels nel number nel channel kg
Input 8 1 1 No No – Screw ABE-7H08R10 0.187

ABE-7H16R50 or
Output Yes No – Screw ABE-7H08R11 0.187
2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE-7H08R21 0.218
I Screw ABE-7H08S21 0.245
12 1 1 No No – Screw ABE-7H12R10 0.274
Yes No – Screw ABE-7H12R11 0.274
2 No No – Screw ABE-7H12R50 0.196
2 2 No 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE-7H12R20 0.300
Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE-7H12R21 0.300
16 1 1 No No – Screw ABE-7H16R10 0.274

816465
Yes No – Screw ABE-7H16R11 0.274
Spring ABE-7H16R11E 0.274
ABE-7H16R31
2 No No – Screw ABE-7H16R50 0.196
2 2 No 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE-7H16R20 0.300
Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE-7H16R21 0.300
Spring ABE-7H16S21E 0.375
3 3 No 0 and 24 V – Screw ABE-7H16R30 0.346
Yes 0 and 24 V – Screw ABE-7H16R31 0.346 8

Type 2 16 2 2 Yes 0 and 24 V – Screw ABE-7H16R23 0.320
input (1)
816466
Input 16 2 1 Yes 24 V I, F (2) Screw ABE-7H16S43 0.640 8.1
Output 16 2 1 Yes 0V I, F (2) Screw ABE-7H16F43 0.640

ABE-7H16p43
(1) For Modicon TSX Micro, Premium and Numerical Controller NUM 1020/1060.
(2) With LED to indicate blown fuse.
8/11

Connection sub-bases with soldered relays and plug-in
terminal blocks
Sub-bases with soldered solid state inputs, plug-in terminal blocks

Number No. of Isolation Voltage Type Reference Weight
of terminals PLC/application of
816467
channels per channel V connection kg
16 2 Yes c 24 Screw ABE-7S16E2B1 0.370
Spring ABE-7S16E2B1E 0.370

ABE-7S16E2pp
c 48 Screw ABE-7S16E2E1 0.370
Spring ABE-7S16E2E1E 0.370
a 48 Screw ABE-7S16E2E0 0.386
Spring ABE-7S16E2E0E 0.386
a 110 Screw ABE-7S16E2F0 0.397
Spring ABE-7S16E2F0E 0.397
a 230 Screw ABE-7S16E2M0 0.407
Spring ABE-7S16E2M0E 0.407
Sub-bases with soldered solid state outputs, plug-in terminal blocks

No. of Isolation Output Output Fault Type Reference Weight
channels PLC/ voltage current detection of
application V A signal (1) connection kg
8 No c 24 0.5 Yes (2) Screw ABE-7S08S2B0 0.252
Spring ABE-7S08S2B0E 0.252
2 Yes (2) Screw ABE-7S08S2B1 0.448
16 No c 24 0.5 Yes (2) Screw ABE-7S16S2B0 0.405
No Screw ABE-7S16S1B2 0.400
Sub-bases with soldered electromechanical relays, plug-in terminal blocks

No. of Relay No. of Output Polarity Type Reference Weight
channels width contacts current distribution/ of
mm A application connection kg
8 5 1 “N/O” 2 Contact common Screw ABE-7R08S111 0.244

per group
of 4 channels Spring ABE-7R08S111E 0.244
816468
8 Bistable 2 Volt-free Screw ABE-7R08S216 0.250
Spring ABE-7R08S216E 0.250
10 1 “N/O” 5 Volt-free Screw ABE-7R08S210 0.352

ABE-7R08S216
8.1 Spring ABE-7R08S210E 0.352
16 5 1 “N/O” 2 Contact common Screw ABE-7R16S11 0.352

per group
of 8 channels Spring ABE-7R16S111E 0.352
10 1 “N/O” 5 Volt-free Screw ABE-7R16S210 0.547

Spring ABE-7R16S210E 0.547
Common per Screw ABE-7R16S212 0.547

group of 8 chan. Spring ABE-7R16S212E 0.547
on both poles
(1) A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to safety mode which will be detected by the PLC.
(2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs.
8/12

Plug-in relay sub-bases
Sub-bases for plug-in solid state input relays (1)

816469
No. of Term- For Isolation Input Type Reference Weight

chan- inals/ relay PLC/ connection of
nels channel type application connection kg
16 2 ABS-7E Yes Volt-free Screw ABE-7P16F310 0.850

ABR-7
ABS-7S33E
ABE-7R16T210
Spring ABE-7P16F310E 0.850
Polarity distribution Screw ABE-7P16F312 0.850
Output sub-bases, equipped with plug-in electromechanical relays (2)

No. of Relay Type No. and Polarity Reference Weight
chan- width of type of distribution/
nels mm relay contacts application kg
816471
16 5 ABR-7S11 1 N/O Contact common ABE-7R16T111 0.600

per group of 4 channels
Contact common ABE-7R16M111 (3) 0.600

per group of 4 output channels
ABE-7R16M111 + 2 input common terminals
10 ABR-7S21 1 N/O Volt-free ABE-7R16T210 0.735
Common ABE-7R16T212 0.730

on both poles (4)
ABR-7S23 1 C/O Contact common (4) ABE-7R16T231 0.730
Volt-free ABE-7R16T230 0.775
12 ABR-7S33 1 C/O Volt-free ABE-7R16T330 1.300

8
Common ABE-7R16T332 1.200
on both poles (5)
8.1
ABR-7S37 2 C/O Volt-free ABE-7R16T370 1.300
(1) Not equipped with relays.

(2) Both technologies (electromechanical and solid state) may be combined on the same sub-base.
(3) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same
time.
(4) Per group of 8 channels.
8/13

Plug-in relay sub-bases
Sub-bases for solid state and/or electromechanical output relays, plug-in (1)
No. of Relay For Isolator Fuse Polarity Type Reference Weight
chan- width relay per per distribution/ of
nels type channel channel application connection
mm kg
16 5 ABR-7S11 No No Contact common ABE-7P16T111 0.550

ABS-7SC1B per group of 4 channels
Contact common ABE-7P16M111 (2) 0.550

per group of 4 output
channels and 2 common
input terminals
10 ABR-7S2p No No Volt-free Screw ABE-7P16T210 (3) 0.615

ABS-7SA2p
ABS-7SC2p ABE-7P16T230 (3) 0.655
ABE-7ACC20
Spring ABE-7P16T230E (3) 0.655
Yes Volt-free Screw ABE-7P16T214 0.675

816473
No Common Screw ABE-7P16T212 0.615

on both
poles (4)
ABE-7P16T2pp Yes Common Screw ABE-7P16T215 0.670

on both
poles (4)
8 12 ABR-7S33 No No Volt-free Screw ABE-7P08T330 0.450

ABS-7SA3p
ABS-7SC3pp
ABE-7ACC21
Spring ABE-7P08T330E 0.450
16 12 ABR-7S33 No No Volt-free Screw ABE-7P16T330 0.900

ABS-7SA3p
ABS-7SC3pp
ABE-7ACC21
8 Common
on both
Screw ABE-7P16T332 0.900
poles (5)
ABR-7S33 No Yes Volt-free Screw ABE-7P16T334 0.900

ABS-7SA3M
8.1 ABS-7SC3E
ABE-7ACC21
Yes Yes Common Screw ABE-7P16T318 1.000
on both
poles (5)
(1) Not equipped with relays

(2) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time.
(3) With relay ABR-7S21 for sub-base ABE-7P16T210, with relay ABR-7S23 for sub-base ABE-7P16T230p.
8/14

Plug-in relays
Plug-in solid state relays (Order in multiples of 4)

Relay Func- Input circuit Output circuit Unit Weight
width tions Current Nominal Current (1) Nominal reference
voltage voltage
mm V A V kg
816475
5 Output c 24 2 c 24 ABS-7SC1B 0.010

ABS-7SC1B
10 Output c 24 0.5 c 5…48 ABS-7SC2E 0.016
a 24…240 ABS-7SA2M 0.016
12 Input c 5 TTL c 24 ABS-7EC3AL 0.014
24 Type 2 – c 24 ABS-7EC3B2 0.014
48 Type 2 – c 24 ABS-7EC3E2 0.014
a 50 Hz 48 – c 24 ABS-7EA3E5 0.014
a 60 Hz 110…130 – c 24 ABS-7EA3F5 0.014
a 50 Hz 230…240 – c 24 ABS-7EA3M5 0.014
Output c 24 2 c 24 ABS-7SC3BA 0.016

Self-protected
1.5 c 5…48 ABS-7SC3E 0.016
1.5 a 24…240 ABS-7SA3MA 0.016
Plug-in electromechanical relays

Relay Control Output No. of Order in Unit Weight
816476
width voltage current (1) contacts multiples of reference

mm V A (Ith) kg
5 c 24 5 1 N/O 4 ABR-7S11 0.005
ABR-7S2p 10 c 24 5 1 N/O 4 ABR-7S21 0.008
1 C/O 4 ABR-7S23 0.008
12 c 24 10 1 C/O 4 ABR-7S33 0.017

8
816474
8 2 C/O 4 ABR-7S37 0.017

8.1
c 48 8 1 C/O 4 ABR-7S33E 0.017
ABR-7S3p
Accessory
Description Reference Weight
kg
Extractor for 5 mm miniature relays ABE-7ACC12 0.010
(1) See characterics table for specifications of relays in the sub-bases
8/15

Connection sub-bases for counter and analogue channels
Connection sub-bases for counter and analogue channels

Functions For Compatible Type of Type of Reference Weight
Modicon modules connection connection
PLCs Telefast 2 side kg
816478
Counting and TSX Micro Integrated 15-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA01 0.300
analogue analogue
and counter
TSX 37.22
ABE-7CPA01 TSX CTZpA
Counting Premium TSX CTYpA 15-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA01 0.300

Axis control TSX CAYp1
Position control
Parallel output Premium TSX CTYpA 15-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA11 0.330
absolute TSX CAYp1
encoder
connection
Distribution Premium TSX AEY1614 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA12 0.300

of 16
thermocouples
Passive Premium TSX ASY810 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA02 0.290

816477
distribution TSX AEY1600

of 8 channels TSX ApY800
on screw Quantum 140 AVI 03000
terminal block 140 ACI 03000
with shielding 140 ACI 04000
ABE-7CPA02 continuity 140 ACO 13000
Distribution Premium TSX ASY410 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA21 0.210

of 4 analogue TSX AEY420
output Quantum 140 AVO 02000
channels 140 ACO 02000
Distribution Premium TSX AEM8p1 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA03 0.330

and supply TSX AEM16pp
of 8 analogue TSX AEY800
channels TSX AEY1600
with limitation Quantum 140 AVI 03000
of each 140 ACI 03000
current loop 140 ACI 04000
8 Distribution Premium TSX AEY810 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA31 0.410

and supply Quantum 140 AVI 03000
of 8 analogue 140 ACI 03000
input channels 140 ACI 04000
isolated from
8.1 each other Spring ABE-7CPA31E 0.410
with 25 mA/
channel limiter
Safety Premium TSX PAY2p2 25-way SUB-D Screw ABE-7CPA13 0.290
8/16

Accessories for connection sub-bases
Software
Description Operating system Reference Weight
kg
816483
Software for Under Windows ABE-7LOGV10 0.350

client label marking version 3.1 or 95
Pack of 25 pre-cut label – ABE-7LOGF25 0.200

sheets (160 labels)
ABE-7ACC02
Accessories
Description No. of Characteristics Order in Unit Weight
channels multiples of reference kg
Kit for fixing
816480
on solid plate – – 10 ABE-7ACC01 0.008
Splitter sub-base – 16 as 2 x 8 channels 1 ABE-7ACC02 0.075

Redundant
output sub-base – 16 as 2 x 16 channels 1 ABE-7ACC10 0.075
Redundant input sub-base 16 as 2 x 16 channels 1 ABE-7ACC11 0.075
Removable continuity – 10 mm wide 4 ABE-7ACC20 0.007

blocks
– 12 mm wide 4 ABE-7ACC21 0.010
Locating device for
removable terminal block – – 100 ABE-7ACC30 0.100
ABE-7ACC80 + ABE-7ACC81
Enclosure feedthrough 32 40-way 1 ABE-7ACC80 0.300
with industrial connector
Plug-in 40-way 32 For mounting on 1 ABE-7ACC81 0.370

816481
male connector ABE-7ACC80
Enclosure feedthrough 16 19-way 1 ABE-7ACC82 0.150

with CNOMO M23 connector
(1 x 20-way HE 10 8 and 12 19-way 1 ABE-7ACC83 0.150
connector, PLC end)
ABE-7BV20
Impedance adaptor – Used with ABE-7ACC82 1 ABE-7ACC85 0.012
for Type 2 compatibility and ABE-7ACC83
816482
8 IP 65 cable gland – For 3 cables 1 ABE-7ACC84 0.300

2 01
9
0
2 01 10
1
11 Additional snap-on 8 10 screw terminals 5 ABE-7BV10 0.030
2
3
12 terminal blocks
13
4
14 (shunted terminals) 10 spring terminals 5 ABE-7BV10E 0.030
5
6 15
7 16 20 screw terminals 5 ABE-7BV20 0.060
20 spring terminals 5 ABE-7BV20E 0.060
ABE-7TES160 I/O simulator 16 Display, forcing 1 ABE-7TES160 0.350

sub-base inhibition, continuity
Adhesive label holder – For 6 characters 50 AR1-SB3 0.001

8
816479
Fast blow fuses – 0.125 A 10 ABE-7FU012 0.010

5 x 20, 250 V, UL 0.5 A 10 ABE-7FU050 0.010
1A 10 ABE-7FU100 0.010
2A 10 ABE-7FU200 0.010
4A 10 ABE-7FU400 0.010
AR1-SB3 6.3 A 10 ABE-7FU630 0.010 8.1
816484
“Flexible commoning links” accessories

Description For Colour Distance between Reference Weight
common cable ends kg
cm
Flexible Coil White 12 ABF-C08R12W 0.020

commoning 2 ABF-C08R02W 0.010
links a Red 12 ABF-C08R12R 0.020
Modularity 2 ABF-C08R02R 0.010
ABF-C08Rppp 8 x 1 mm2 c Blue 12 ABF-C08R12B 0.020
2 ABF-C08R02B 0.010
8/17
Dimensions Connection interfaces 8
Common side view ABE-7H20Eppp ABE-7H16R50, ABE-7H12R50, ABE-7H16Cpp/ABE-7H16CMpp,

ABE-7H32Eppp ABE-7H08R1p, ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7p16M111/ABE-7p16T111
ABE-7R08S111/S111E,
ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7CPA21
b1
b
35
b
1
1 1
1 84
15 55 a
c
c+9
ABE- 7H20E/7H32Eppp 7Hppppp/CPA21 7R08S111p ABE- 7H16Cpp/CMpp 7p16M111/T111

b 67 70 77 a 106 110
b1 56 58 58 b 49 89
c 59 58 58 b1 41,5 58
1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE-7BV10/7BV20 c 60 54
Common side view ABE-7H16R2p, ABE-7H12R2p, ABE-7H16R3p, ABE-7R16S21p, ABE-7H16p43
ABE-7H16R1p, ABE-7H12R1p, ABE-7H12S21, ABE-7S16S2B0/S2B02E,
ABE-7H16S2p, ABE-7R16S11p, ABE-7R08S210, ABE-7S16E2pp/S16E2ppE,
ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7CPA02, ABE-7CPA03 ABE-7S08S2B1/S08S2B1E
ABE7S16S1B2, ABE-7R08S216 ABE-7CPA31
b1
b + 12
70
77
35
1
206
15 125
c
c1
ABE- 7pppppp 7pR08S210p, 7S16S1B2p, 7R08S216 All sub-bases
b 70 77 b1 58
b1 58 58 c 58
c 58 58
1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE-7BV10/7BV20
ABE-7R16T2pp, ABE-7P16T2pp ABE-7CPA01, ABE-7CPA11/CPA12/CPA13
58
70
35
89
35
58 143
8 64
15 211 67
Note:
73 details of the front view are the same as for the ABE-7CPA01.
ABE-7R16T3pp, ABE-7P16T3pp, ABE-7P16F31p ABE-7P08T330

Common side view
8.1
58
35
89
89
15 272 150
74
83
8/18
Dimensions Connection interfaces 8
ABE-7ACC02 ABE-7ACC03 ABE-7ACC04, ABE-7ACC05

ABE-7ACC10, ABE-7ACC11
A
A B C D B C D
A B C
58
58
58
70
35
35
35
89
89
15 50
48 15 88 15 66
57 48 48
57 57
Note: Drawing representing ABE-7ACC04
and ABE-7ACC05
ABE-7ACC80 ABE-7ACC82, ABE-7ACC83

54
88
50
140
112
130
25 34 65 52
42 43
32
74 64,5
35
ABE-7ACC84 ABE-7TES160
58
35
89
120
103
80
15 170
72 43 30 50
54 32 59
8
Fixing centres for sub-bases using mounting kit ABE-7ACC01
a ABE-7 G H ABE-7 G H ABE-7 G H

ACC02 38 82 H12R1p 113 82 H16F43 194 82
ACC03 53 101 H12R2p 113 82 H16S43 194 82 8.1
ACC04 53 101 H16R1p 113 82 S16E2pp 194 82
ACC05 53 101 H16R2p 113 82 S16S1B2 113 82
H16R3p S16S2pp
H = b+12
ACC10/11 53 101 113 82 194 82

H08Rpp 72 82 H12S21 113 82 R16T2pp 199 101
b
H08S21 72 82 H16S21 113 82 P16T2pp 199 101

H12R50 72 82 R08S210 113 82 R16T3pp 260 101
H16R50 72 82 R16S111 113 82 P08T330 150 101
R08S111 72 82 R16S21p 194 82 P16T3pp 260 101
CPA01 131 82 S08S2B0 113 82 P16F3pp 260 101
G = a-12 6 CPA02 113 82 S08S2B1 194 82
CPA1p 131 82
CPA03 113 82
8/19
Selection guide 8
Power supplies 8
Power supplies for d.c. control circuits
Functions Supplies for d.c. control circuits
Type of product Single-phase, modular Single-phase, regulated switch mode power supplies
switch mode power supplies
Applications Industrial, commercial or Simple, Industrial Industrial or

residential applications. low power applications, commercial
Modular format allowing equipment. low and medium applications on sites
integration into panels. power. sensitive to mains
Machine interference.
equipment Protection against
applications. accidental restarting.
Nominal power 22 W 30 W 7 W…30 W 48…240 W 60…240 W
Input voltage a 100…240 V single-phase a 100…240 V a 100…240 V a 100…240 V

single-phase single-phase single-phase,
c 110…220 V c 110…220 V
compatible (1) compatible (1)
Output voltage c 12 V c 24 V c 24 V c 24 V c 12, 24 V or

adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable 48 V adjustable
Technology Primary switch mode electronic power supplies.
Secondary protection Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with automatic reset. Integrated, against
overloads and
short-circuits,
with manual and
automatic reset.
Signalling Output indicator lamp. Output and input indicator lamp.
Other characteristics – Connection by lug- – Anti-harmonic

clamps possible distortion filter
Mounting Direct on 7 rail Direct, on 7 rail Direct on 7 rail

8 and on panel
Disturbance (conforming to EN55011/22)

Conducted and radiated cl.B cl.A (7/15 W) cl.B
cl.B (30 W)
Conforming to standards EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2 EN 50081-2, EN 50081-1, EN 50081-1,

(EN 50082-2), IEC 950, IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-2,
EN61131-2/A11 EN 60950 (EN 50082-2), (EN 50082-2),
IEC 950 IEC 950, 61000-3-2
8.2 Approvals UL, CSA, TÜV cULus, TÜV UL, CSA, TÜV, CTick
Device type ABL-7RM ABL-7CEM ABL-7RE ABL-7RP
Pages Please consult our catalog: 8/22

“Automation & Control,
Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and
power supplies”
(1) Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product.
8/20
8
8
2-phase regulated switch mode power supplies 3-phase regulated switch mode power supplies Regulated switch mode power supplies
for AS-Interface
Industrial applications. Industrial applications. Industrial applications.

In-line continuous process equipment, machine Supply of d.c. voltage necessary for AS-Interface
tools, injection presses, etc. systems.
120 and 240 W 240 and 480 W 120 W 240…960 W 72 W 145 W 2 x 72 W
a 2 x 380…415 V 2-phase a3x a3x a3x a 100…240 V single-phase

380…415 V 400…520 V 400…520 V
3-phase 3-phase 3-phase
c 24 V c 30 V c 24 V
adjustable adjustable
Primary switch mode electronic power supplies.
Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with manual and automatic reset. Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits,
overvoltage and undervoltage.
Output indicator lamp. Output and input indicator lamps.
– – Anti-harmonic –
distortion filter
Direct on 7 rail Direct on 7 rail Direct on 7 rail

(except ABL-7UPS 24200 and ABL-7UPS24400) 8
cl.B cl.B cl.B
EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 60950 EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 50081-1, EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 55022 class B
EN 60950 EN 50082-2,
EN 60950,
IEC 61000-3-2
– – cULus, c us UL, CSA, TÜV
8.2
ABL-7REQ ABL-7UEQ ABL-7UES ABL-7UPS ASI-ABL
8/22 8/22 Please consult our catalog

“AS-Interface cabling system”
8/21
Presentation 8
Power supplies 8

Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies
ABL-7 power supplies

The ABL-7 range of power supplies is designed to provide the d.c. voltage necessary
for the control circuits of automation system equipment. Split into three families, this
range meets all the needs encountered in industrial, commercial and residential
applications. Single-phase or 3-phase, of the electronic switch mode type, they
provide a quality of output which is suitable for the loads supplied and compatible
with the mains supply available in the equipment. Clear guidelines are given for
selecting protection devices which are often used with them and thus a
comprehensive solution is provided, which can be used in total safety.
Phaseo switch mode power supplies
These switch mode power supplies are totally electronic and regulated. The use of
electronics makes it possible to significantly improve the performance of these power
supplies, which offer:
- very compact size,
- integrated overload, short-circuit, overvoltage and undervoltage protection,
- a very wide range of permissible input voltages, without any adjustment,
- a high degree of output voltage stability,
- good performance,
- LED indicators on the front panel.
Phaseo power supplies are available in single-phase and 3-phase versions. They
deliver a voltage which is precise to 3%, whatever the load and whatever the type of
mains supply, within a range of 85 to 264 V for single-phase, or 360 to 550 V for
3-phase. Conforming to IEC standards and UL and CSA certified, they are suitable
for universal use. The inclusion of overload and short-circuit protection makes
downstream protection unnecessary if discrimination is not required.
ABL-7 RE and ABL-7 RP supplies are also equipped with an output undervoltage
control which causes the product to trip if the output voltage drops below 19 V, in
order to ensure that the voltage delivered is always usable by the actuators being
supplied. All the products are fitted with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer
in order to be able to compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long
cable runs. Most of our power supplies are designed for direct mounting on 35 and
75 mm 7 rails.
These power supplies are available in single-phase and 3-phase versions and are
split into three families:
Compact single-phase supply ABL-7CEM:
b power less than or equal to 30 W (1.2 A),
b compact size,
b for all low power equipment,
ABL 7CEM b suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Nano and Twido
platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 24 V supply.
Universal single-phase supplies ABL-7RE and ABL-7RP:

b ABL-7RE
v power between 48 W (2 A) and 240 W (10 A),
v compact size,
v for all machine equipment,
8 v suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Micro and
Premium platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 24 V
supply.
b ABL-7RP
v power between 60 W (2.5 A) and 240 W (10 A),
ABL-7RP v output voltage available: c 12, 24 and 48 V,
v input filter (PFC) for commercial and residential environments (conforming to
standard EN 61000-3-2),
v two operating modes possible for handling of overload and short-circuit faults:
8.2 - "AUTO" mode which provides automatic restarting of the power supply on
elimination of the fault,
- "MANU" mode which requires manual resetting of the power supply to restart.
Resetting is achieved by switching off the mains power.
Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 8/26 to 8/29 page 8/31 page 8/32 page 8/33
8/22
Presentation (continued) 8
Power supplies 8

Phaseo switch mode power supplies (continued)

3-phase and single-phase process supplies ABL-7U and ABL-7REQ:
108387-25-M
b ABL-7UE
v compact size,
v voltages between 3 x 380 V and 3 x 500 V,
v for use in industrial applications, for all in-line or continuous process equipment,
530894
machine tools and injection presses, etc.

v suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Premium and
Quantum platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 24 V
supply.
b ABL-7UPS
v power between 120 W (10 A) and 960 W (40 A).
Identical to the ABL-7UE range, this power supply differs in that it includes a filter
ABL-7UPS ABL-7REQ (PFC) which means that it can be connected directly to the public mains supply, in
compliance with standard EN 61000-3-2. This product, for world-wide use, is UL
certified.
b ABL-7 REQ
v compact size,
v can be connected to 2-phase input voltages between 380 V and 415 V, to replace
older power supplies connected by only two wires. Economical, more competitive, yet
with a smaller input voltage range it can, in certain cases, be used in place of the 3-
phase versions.
Using c 24 V
b Using c 24 V enables so-called protection installations (PELV) to be built. Using
PELV is a measure designed to protect people from direct and indirect contact.
Measures relating to these installations are defined in publication NF C 12-201 and
in standard IEC 364-4-41.
b The application of these measures to the electrical equipment in machines is
defined in standard NF EN 60204-1 and requires:
v that the voltage used is below 60 V d.c. in dry environments and below 30 V in
damp environments,
v the connection of one side of the PELV circuit, or one point of the source, to the
equipotential protection circuit associated with higher voltages,
v the use of switchgear and control gear on which measures have been taken to
ensure "safety separation" between power circuits and control circuits.
b A safety separation is necessary between power circuits and control circuits in
PELV circuits. Its aim is to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltages in c 24 V
safety circuits.
b The reference standards involved are:
v IEC 61558-2-6 and EN 61558-2-6 (safety transformers),
v IEC 664 (coordination of isolation).
Telemecanique power supplies meet these requirements.
b Moreover, to ensure that these products will operate correctly in relation to the
demands of their reinforced isolation, it is recommended that they be mounted and
wired as indicated below:
v they should be placed on an earthed mounting plate or rail,
v they should be connected using flexible cables, with a maximum of two wires per
connection, and tightened to the nominal torque,
v conductors of the correct insulation class must be used.
b If the d.c. circuit is not connected to an equipotential protection conductor, an
8
earth leakage detector will indicate any accidental earth faults (please consult your
Regional Sales Office).
Operating voltage
b The permissible tolerances for the operating voltage are listed in publications
IEC 1131-2 and DIN 19240.
b For nominal voltage Un = c 24 V, the extreme operating values are from - 15 %
to + 20 % of Un, whatever the supply fluctuations in the range -10 % to + 6 % 8.2
(defined by standard IEC 38) and load variations in the range 0-100 % of In.
All Telemecanique c 24 V power supplies are designed to provide a voltage within
this range.
b It may be necessary to use a voltage measurement relay to detect when the
normal voltage limits are being surpassed and to deal with the consequences of this
(please consult your Regional Sales Office).
Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 8/26 to 8/29 page 8/31 page 8/32 page 8/33
8/23
Selection 8
Power supplies 8

Selection of power supplies

The characteristics to be taken into account when selecting a power supply are:
- the required output voltage and current,
- the mains voltage available in the installation.
An initial selection can be made using the table opposite.
This may however result in several products being selected as suitable.
Other selection criteria must therefore be taken into account.
b The quality of the mains power supply

The Phaseo range is the solution because it guarantees precision to 3% of the output
voltage, whatever the load current and the input voltage. In addition, the wide input
voltage range of Phaseo power supplies allows them to be connected to all mains
supplies within the nominal range, without any adjustment.
The Phaseo RP family can also be connected to c 110 and 220 V emergency
supplies.
b Harmonic pollution (power factor)

The current drawn by a power supply is not sinusoidal. This leads to the existence of
harmonic currents which pollute the mains supply. European standard EN 61000-3-2
limits the harmonic currents produced by power supplies. This standard covers all
devices between 75 W and 1000 W, drawing up to 16 A per phase, and connected
directly to the public mains power supply. Devices connected downstream of a
private, low voltage general transformer are therefore excluded.
Regulated switch mode supplies always produce harmonic currents; a filter circuit
(Power Factor Correction or PFC) must therefore be added to comply with standard
EN 61000-3-2.
Phaseo ABL-7RP and ABL-7UPS power supplies conform to standard EN 61000-3-2
and can therefore be connected directly to public mains power supplies.
b Electromagnetic compatibility
Levels of conducted and radiated emissions are defined in standards EN 55011 and
EN 55022.
The majority of products in the Phaseo range have class B certification and can be
used without any restrictions due to their low emissions.
ABL-7CEM24003 and ABL-7CEM24006 power supplies have class A certification. It
is recommended that they should not be used in the following equipment: trains,
aircraft, nuclear applications and in any environment where malfunctioning could
cause serious injuries or lead to death. These products are designed for use in
industrial equipment and are not suitable for use in residential environments.
b Behaviour in the event of short-circuits

Phaseo power supplies are equipped with an electronic protection device. This
protection device resets itself automatically on elimination of the fault (around 1 second
for ABL-7 RE/RP, around 3 seconds for ABL-7 UE/UP/REQ) which avoids having to
take any action or change a fuse. In addition, the Phaseo ABL-7RP/U/REQ ranges
allow the user to select the reset mode in the event of a fault:
- in the "AUTO" position, resetting is automatic,
- in the "MANU" position, resetting occurs after elimination of the fault and after
switching the mains power off and back on.
This feature allows Phaseo ABL-7RP/U/REQ power supplies to be used in
installations where the risks associated with untimely restarting are significant.
8 b Behaviour in the event of phase failure

In the event of failure of one phase, all Phaseo 3-phase power supplies switch to
relaxation mode for as long as the input voltage is < 450 V.
For operation on higher voltages (e.g. 480 V), use of an upstream GV2 type residual
current protection device is recommended.
b Selection of reset mode

v on the ABL-7RP family of products:
By microswitch on the front panel of the product.
8.2 v on the ABL-7U/REQ family of products:
By jumper on the front panel. Warning: selection of the function is only possible
after the mains power supply has been switched off for at least 5 minutes. The
jumper is moved using a pair of insulated, flat-nose pliers.
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 8/22 and 8/23 pages 8/26 to 8/29 page 8/31 page 8/32 page 8/33
8/24
Selection (continued) 8
Power supplies 8

Selection according to application characteristics

Type of mains supply Single-phase 2-phase 3-phase
Rated mains supply voltage
a 100…240 V 50/60 Hz 100…240 V 2 x 380…415 V 3 x 3 x 400…520 V 3 x 380…520 V
c 110… 220 V (1) 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 380…415 V 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Wide range Wide range 50/60 Hz Wide range Wide range
Permissible variation 85…264 V, 47…63 Hz 85…264 V 340…460 V 340…460 V 360…550 V 340…550 V
c 100...250 V (1), c 105...370 V (2) 47…63 Hz 47…63 Hz 47…63 Hz 47…63 Hz 47…63 Hz
Output voltage 12 V 48 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
Output current 0.3 A ABL-

7CEM24003
0.6 A ABL-
7CEM24006
1.2 A ABL-
7CEM24012
2A ABL-
7RE2402
2.5 A ABL-
7RP4803
3A ABL- ABL-
7RP2403 7RE2403
5A ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL-
7RP1205 7RP2405 7RE2405 7REQ24050 7UES24050
10 A ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL- ABL-
7RP2410 7RE2410 7REQ24100 7UEQ24100 7UPS24100
20 A ABL- ABL-
7UEQ24200 7UPS24200
40 A ABL-
7UPS24400
Conforming to EN 61000-3-2 Yes (not applicable for ABL-7CEM) No No No No Yes
Integrated automatic Yes Yes Yes

protection Automatic or manual restart on ABL-7RP Automatic Automatic or manual restart
Automatic restart only on ABL-7CEM restart
(1) Values for ABL-7RP power supplies, not indicated on the product.
(2) Values for ABL-7CEM power supplies, not indicated on the product.
8.2
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 8/22 and 8/23 pages 8/26 to 8/29 page 8/31 page 8/32 page 8/33
8/25
Characteristics 8
Power supplies 8

Type of power supply ABL-7CEM ABL-7RE ABL-7RP
Product certifications cULus, TÜV UL, CSA, TÜV, CTick
Conforming to standards UL 508 UL 508, CSA 22.2 n° 950
Safety IEC/EN 60950, FELV IEC/EN 61496-1-2, FELV
EMC EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2 EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2 (EN 50082-2)
Low frequency harmonic currents – – EN 61000-3-2
Input circuit
LED indication – Orange LED Orange LED
Input voltages Rated values V a 100…240, a 100…240 a 100…240,
c 110…220 compatible (1) c 110…220 compatible (1)
Permissible values V a 85…264, a 85…264 single-phase a 85…264,
c 105…370 compatible (1) c 100…250 compatible (1)
Efficiency at nominal load > 70 % > 85 %
Current Ue = 240 V A 0.1 (7 W)/0.2 (15 W)/0.45 0.6 (48 W)/0.83 (72 W) 0.4 (72 W)/0.6 (120 W)
consumption (30 W) 1.2 (120 W)/2.5 (240 W) 1.3 (240W)
Ue = 100 V A 0.17 (7 W)/0.3 (15 W)/0.68 1.2 (48 W)/1.46 (72 W) 0.8 (72 W)/1 (120 W)/2.8
(30 W) 1.9 (120 W)/3.6 (240 W) (240 W)
Current at switch-on A < 50 < 30
Power factor 0.45 approx. 0.65 approx. 0.98 approx.
Output circuit
LED indication Green LED Green LED Green LED
Nominal output voltage (U out) V c 24 12, 24 and 48
Nominal output current A 0.3/0.6/1.2 2/3/5/10 2.5/5/10
Precision Output voltage Adjustable from 90 to 110 % Adjustable from 100 to 120 %
Line and load regulation 2 % max ±3%
Residual ripple - interference mV < 200 (peak-peak)
Micro-breaks Holding time at I max and Ve min ms > 20 > 10 > 20
Temporary overloads Permissible inrush current (U out >19V) See curves page 8/29
Protection Short-circuit Permanent/automatic Permanent/automatic Permanent/automatic
restart restart restart or restart after
switching off mains power
Overload 1.05 In 1.1 In
Overvoltage U > 1.2 Tripping if U > 1.5 Un
Undervoltage – Tripping if U < 0.8 Un
Operating and environmental characteristics
Connections Input mm2 2 x 2.5 + earth
Output mm2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 + earth, multiple output, depending on model
Ambient conditions Storage temperature °C - 25… + 70
Operating temperature °C - 10… + 60 (derating as 0… + 60 (derating as from 50° C, mounted vertically)
from 50° C, mounted
vertically)
Max. relative humidity 20…90 % 95 % without condensation or dripping water
Degree of protection IP 20 conforming to IEC 529
Vibrations Conforming to IEC 61131-2
Operating position Vertical and horizontal Vertical
(see derating curve,
page 8/28)
MTBF at 40° > 100 000 h
Connections Series Possible (see page 8/29)
8 Parallel No Possible (max. temperature 50° C)
Dielectric strength Input/output 3000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 3000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min
Input/earth 2000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 3000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min
Output/earth (and output/output) 500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min
Input fuse incorporated Yes (not interchangeable)
Disturbance EN 50081-2 (generic) EN 50081-1
Conducted EN 55011/EN 55022 class A EN 55011/EN 55022 class B
(7 and 15 W) EN 55011/
EN 55022 class B (30W)
8.2 Radiated EN 55011/EN 55022 class B
Immunity IEC 61000-6-2 (generic)
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air)
Conducted interference EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV) , EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6 level 3, EN 61000-4-8 level 4
Mains interference EN 1000-4-11 (voltage drops and cuts)
Presentation : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 8/22 and 8/23 page 8/31 page 8/32 page 8/33
8/26
Characteristics (continued) 8
Power supplies 8

Type of power supply ABL-7REQ24p ABL-7UEQ24p ABL-7UES24p ABL-7UPS24p
Product certifications – cULus, c us
Conforming to standards
Safety EN 60950, FELV
EMC EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2
Low frequency harmonic currents – EN 61000-3-2
Input circuit
LED indication –
Input voltages
Rated values V a 2 x 380…415 a 3 x 380…415 a 3 x 400…520 a 3 x 400…520
Permissible values V a 2 x 340…460 a 3 x 340…460 a 3 x 360…550 a 3 x 360…550
Efficiency at nominal load > 85 % > 90 %
Current consumption
Ue = 400 V A 0.65 (120 W)/1.2 0.75 (240 W)/1.5 0.7 (240 W)/1.2 (480 W)/1.7 (960 W)
(240 W) (480 W)
Current at switch-on A < 35
Power factor 0.6 0.55 0.7 0.7/0.9 (960 W)
2-phase operating mode V – Relaxation if input voltage < a 450
Output circuit
LED indication Green LED
Nominal output voltage (U out) V c 24
Nominal output current A 5/10 10/20 5 10/20/40
Precision
Output voltage Adjustable from 100 to 116%
Line and load regulation 1 % max
Residual ripple - interference mV < 200 (peak-peak)
Micro-breaks
Holding time for I max and Ve min ms 15 10 Between 8 and 13
Temporary overloads
Permissible inrush current (U out >19V) See curves, page 8/29
Protection
Short-circuit Permanent/automatic or normal restart
Overload 1.20 In < 50 ms
Overvoltage V 28.5 typical
Undervoltage V 19 typical
Operating and environmental characteristics
Connections Input mm2 2 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 + earth
Output mm2 4 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 4 x 4…6 mm2 4 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 4 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 + earth
(240 W)
4 x 4…6 mm2 + earth (480 W)
4 x 4…10 mm2 + earth (960 W)
Ambient Storage temperature °C - 25…+ 70
conditions Operating temperature °C 0° C…+ 60° C
Maximum relative humidity 30…90 %
Degree of protection IP 20 or IP XXB
Vibrations Conforming to IEC 61131-2
Operating position Vertical
MTBF
Connections Series
> 100 000 h
Possible 8
Parallel See page 8/29
Dielectric Input/output 3750 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min

strength Input/earth 3500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min
Output/earth (and output/output) 500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min
Input fuse incorporated No
Disturbance Conducted/radiated EN 55011/EN 5022 - class B
Immunity Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air) 8.2
Conducted interference EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV) , EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6 level3, EN 61000-4-8 level 4 (for
ABL-7RE/RP)
Mains interference EN 61000-4-11 (voltage drops and cuts)

8/27
Output characteristics 8
Power supplies 8

Derating
The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an
electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the
electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. Conversely,
a power supply can deliver more than its nominal power if the ambient temperature
remains largely below the rated operating temperature.
The rated ambient temperature for Phaseo power supplies is 50 °C. Above this,
derating is necessary up to a maximum temperature of 60 °C.
The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power
supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature.
P/Pn (%)
140
120
100
80
3 2 1
60
50
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Maximum operating temperature (°C)
1 ABL-7RE, ABL-7RP, ABL-7U mounted vertically

2 ABL-7CEM mounted vertically
3 ABL-7CEM mounted horizontally
Derating should be considered in extreme operating conditions:
- intensive operation (output current permanently close to the nominal current,

combined with a high ambient temperature),
- output voltage set above 24 V (to compensate for line voltage drops, for example),
- parallel connection to increase the total power.
General rules to be complied with
Intensive operation See derating on above graph.

Example for ABL-7RE:
8 - without derating, from 0 °C to 50 °C,
- derating of nominal current by 2%, per additional °C, up to 60 °C.
Rise in output The nominal power is fixed.
voltage Increasing the output voltage means that the current delivered must be
reduced
Parallel connection The total power is equal to the sum of the power supplies used, but the
to increase the maximum ambient temperature for operation is 50 °C.
power (except To improve heat dissipation, the power supplies must not be in contact
ABL-7CEM) with each other
8.2 In all cases, there must be adequate convection round the products to ensure easier
cooling. There must be a clear space of 50 mm above and below Phaseo power
supplies and of 15 mm at the sides.

8/28
Output characteristics Power supplies 8
(continued) 8
Load limit
ABL-7CEM24ppp ABL-7RE24pp/ABL-7RPpppp
ABL-7Upp24pp/ABL-7REQpppp
U out (%) U out
100 %
19 V
50 %
1 2
I out
1,1 x In 1,2 x In I out
In 1,2 x In
1 ABL-7RE24pp/ABL-7RPpppp
2 ABL-7Upp24pp/ABL-7REQpppp
Temporary overloads
ABL-7CEM ABL-7RE/ABL-7RP
T (ms) I out T (ms) I out
100 20
I out:(0...100%) I out:(0...100%)
90
80 18
70
16
60
50 14
40
12
30
20 10
10
0 0
1,8 2 2,2 2,4 2,6 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8
x In x In
ABL-7U
T (ms)
800
700
600 I out=0%
500 I out=50%
Example: For an ABL-7UPS24ppp power supply with 50 % loading.
400 (I out = 50 %), this power supply can absorb a current peak of 1.6 x In for 250 ms
with an output voltage u 19 V.
300
I out=80%
250
200
I out=100%
100
0
1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8
x In
Series or parallel connection

Series connection Parallel connection
8
ABL 7 ABL 7 ABL 7 ABL 7
+
(1) (1)
8.2
2 x c 24 V / I out c 24 V / 2 x I out
Family Series Parallel

ABL-7CEM 2 products max (1) No
ABL-7RE/RP 2 products max 2 products max
ABL-7U/REQ 2 products max 2 products max
(1) 2 Shottky diodes 2 A/100 V on ABL-7CEM only.

8/29
Selection 8
Power supplies 8

Upstream protection
ABL-7CEM, ABL-7RE and ABL-7RP power supplies: protection of the power supply line
Type of mains supply a 115 V single-phase a 230 V single-phase
Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gG fuse Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gG fuse
GB2 C60N GB2 C60N
ABL-7CEM24003 GB2-CD06 24183 2A GB2-CD07 24184 2A

MG24516 (1) MG24517 (1)
MG24517 (1) MG24518 (1)
MG24517 (1) MG24518 (1)
ABL-7RE2402 GB2-pB07 MG24517 (1) 2A GB2-DB06 MG24516 (1) 2A
ABL-7RP2403 GB2-pB07 MG24517 (1) 2A GB2-DB07 MG24516 (1) 2A
ABL-7REQ power supplies: protection of the power supply line

Type of mains supply a 400 V 2-phase
Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gG fuse
2-pole GB2-DBpp C60N
ABL-7REQ24050 DB07 24100 10 A
ABL-7REQ24100 DB08 24100 10 A
ABL-7UEQ, ABL-7UES and ABL-7UPS power supplies: protection of the power supply line
Type of mains supply a 400…480 V 3-phase
Type of protection Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker gG fuse
2-pole GV2-MEpp C60N
ABL-7UEQ24100 GV2-ME08 (1) 24212 4A
ABL-7UEQ24200 GV2-ME08 (1) 24213 6A
ABL-7UES24050 GV2-ME08 (1) 24210 2A
ABL-7UPS24100 GV2-ME08 (1) 24210 2A
ABL-7UPS24200 GV2-ME08 (1) 24211 3A
8 ABL-7UPS24400 GV2-ME08 (1) 24212 4A
(1) UL certified circuit-breaker.
8.2

8/30
References 8
Power supplies 8

ABL 7CEM single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies

Mains Output Nominal Nominal Auto- Conforming Reference Weight
input voltage voltage power current protect to standard
47...63 Hz reset EN 61000-3-2
V cV W A kg
108700-13-M
a 100…240 24 7 0.3 auto no ABL-7CEM24003 0.150

single-phase
wide range
15 0.6 auto no ABL-7CEM24006 0.180
c 110…220 (1)
ABL-7CEM
30 1.2 auto no ABL-7CEM24012 0.220
ABL-7RE single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies
47...63 Hz reset EN 61000-3-2
V cV W A kg
a 100…240 24 48 2 auto no ABL-7RE2402 0.520

single-phase
wide range
72 3 auto no ABL-7RE2403 0.520
43367-15-M
120 5 auto no ABL-7RE2405 1.000
240 10 auto no ABL-7RE2410 2.200

ABL-7RP single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies
ABL-7RE2405 47...63 Hz reset EN 61000-3-2
ABL-7RP2405 V cV W A kg
ABL-7RP4803
a 100...240 12 60 5 auto/man yes ABL-7RP1205 1.000
single-phase
wide range
24 72 3 auto/man yes ABL-7RP2403 0.520
c 110...220 (1)
120 5 auto/man yes ABL-7RP2405 1.000
240 10 auto/man yes ABL-7RP2410 2.200

530894
48 144 2.5 auto/man yes ABL-7RP4803 1.000

ABL-7REQ 2-phase regulated switch mode power supplies
47...63 Hz reset EN 61000-3-2
V cV W A kg
a 380…415 24 120 5 auto/man no ABL-7REQ24050 0.850

ABL-7REQ
240 10 auto/man no ABL-7REQ24100 1.200

ABL-7U 3-phase regulated switch mode power supplies
108387-25-M
input voltage
47...63 Hz
voltage power current protect
reset
to standard
EN 61000-3-2
8
V cV W A kg
a 3x380…415 24 240 10 auto/man no ABL-7UEQ24100 1.200
480 20 auto/man no ABL-7UEQ24200 2.100
a 3x400…520 24 120 5 auto/man no ABL-7UES24050 1.300

8.2
240 10 auto/man yes ABL-7UPS24100 1.300
ABL-7UPS

Presentation : Characteristics : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 8/22 and 8/23 pages 8/26 to 8/29 page 8/32 page 8/33
8/31
Dimensions 8
Power supplies 8

ABL-7RE24pp/ABL-7RPpppp ABL-7RE2402/2403 ABL-7RE2405 ABL-7RE2410

Common side view ABL-7RP2403 ABL-7RP1205/2405/4803 ABL-7RP2410
Mounting on 35 and 75 mm rails
120
120
120
120 27 54 135
ABL-7CEM24ppp ABL-7CEM24006/ ABL-7REQ24ppp/ABL-7UEQ24100/ABL-7UES24050/

ABL-7CEM24003 ABL-7CEM24012 ABL-7UPS24100
Common front view
127
75
120
70 95 45
a P 6 68
Panel mounting
(1)
ABL- P a
mm mm
(62,5)
7REQ24050 130 –
60
7REQ24100 154 –
7UEQ24100 154 –
7UES24050 171 15
35 (38,5)
7UPS24100 171 15
(1) 2 x M4 or 2 x Ø4.5
ABL-7UEQ24200 ABL-7UPS24200
60
209
197
170
201 6 84 240 84
ABL-7UPS24400
8 81
242
230
8.2
275 106
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

8/32
Schemes 8
Power supplies 8

ABL-7RE2402/2403 ABL-7RE2405 ABL-7RE2410
N
L
N
L
N
L
+
+
ABL-7RP2403 ABL-7RP1205/2405/4803 ABL-7RP2410
L/+
L/+
L/+
N/
N/
N/
Filter Filter Filter
+
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
ABL-7CEM24ppp
N
L
NC
+
ABL-7REQ24ppp ABL-7UEppppp ABL-7UPppppp
+ + +
+ + +
L1
L
N
L2
L1
L2 8
L3 L3
8.2
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

8/33
9
9/0
Contents 9 - Services 9
Technical information
b Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/2
b Power supply module selection document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/4
b Standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/6
b Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/7
b Optional conformal coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/9
b Automation product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/10
b Community regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/11
Schneider Electric worldwide

b Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/12
Index
b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/18
9/1
platform 0
Documentation
An electronic documentation (hardware and software) in 4 languages (English,

French, German and Spanish) is included in the software package (1). Each software
includes online contextual help in 4 languages (2).
These electronic documentation are added to following paper documentation:

b B7 format multilingual data sheet (93 x 127 mm), supplied with each
application-specific module and communication module.
b B7 format mini-book (93 x 127 mm) for hardware installation of processors,
slot-PLCs, racks and power supplies, to be ordered separately.
b Kit of manuals (178 x 216 mm) for hardware installation of:
v Premium processors and Atrium slot-PLCs,
v discrete I/O modules,
v analog I/O modules,
v communication overview,
v grounding and cabling system installation.
b Unity Pro quick start manual.
(1) Only with Unity Pro software.

(2) English, French, German, Spanish and Italian for PL7 software.
Unity documentation manuals
kg
Premium et Atrium To be ordered separately UNY USE 20110 V20E –
reference manual: bases,
discrete/analog modules,
communication, grounding
and cabling system
installation
Minibook: hardware 5 languages (English, French, UNY USE 20910 V10M –

installation of German, Spanish and Italian)
processors, slot-PLCs, Sold in lots of 10
racks and power To be ordered separately
supplies
Unity Pro quick start To be ordered separately UNY USE 40010 V20E –
manual
PL7 documentation manuals

kg
Premium et Atrium To be ordered separately TSX DM 57 43E –
reference manual: bases,
discrete/analog modules,
communication
Minibook: hardware 5 languages (English, French, UNY USE 20910 V10M –

installation of German, Spanish and Italian)
processors, slot-PLCs, Sold in lots of 10
racks and power To be ordered separately
supplies
All PL7 software To be ordered separately TLX DOC PL7 44E –

installation software:
reference,
functions, communication,
converters, runtime screen
ans diagnostics
Documentation on CD-Rom
9 Description Use Reference Weight
kg
Full documentation, 4 languages (English, French, UNY USE 909 CDM –
hardware (Atrium, Premium German and Spanish)
and Quantum) and Unity To be ordered separately
software
9/2
platform 0
Documentation
Bus/network documentation manuals (178 x 216 mm)

Grounding and cabling Included in Premium and UNY USE 10010 V11E –
system installation guide Atrium reference manual
UNY USE 20110 V20E
Ethernet network (10BASE-5) To be ordered separately TSX DR ETH E 0,120

reference manual
CANopen bus module To be ordered separately TSX DM CPP 100E –

Installation manual
X-Way communication To be ordered separately TSX DR NET E 0,320

reference manual
Fipio bus reference manual To be ordered separately TSX DR FIP E 0,230
Fipway network installation To be ordered separately TSX DG FPW E 0,140

and setup
Fipio/Fipway optic fibre To be ordered separately TSX DM OZD 01E 0,110
transceiver setup
Modbus Plus network To be ordered separately 890 USE 100 00 0,040

installation guide
Modbus serial link To be ordered separately TSX DG MDB E 0,040

user’s manual
Uni-Telway serial link To be ordered separately TSX DG UTW E 0,060

installation and setup
Jnet serial link user’s manual To be ordered separately TSX DG JNT M 0,360
(English and French)
Profibus DP module To be ordered separately TSX DM PBY 100E 0,140

installation manual
INTERBUS modules installation To be ordered separately TSX DM IBY 100E 0,140

manual
9/3
TSX PSY power supply Modicon Premium automation
module selection document platform 9
(specimen to be photocopied)
The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed. It is therefore necessary to create a
power consumption table for each rack in order to define the most suitable TSX PSY power supply module for each rack.
The table below can be used to calculate the consumption on the three different voltages to be supplied (c 5 V, c 24 V, c 24 VR).
Procedure :
b Check and choose a power supply module corresponding to the power supplies available for the 3 voltages.
b Check that the total power absorbed on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module.
b Values to be entered according to the type of Premium PLC configuration.
Reference Format Number Consumption in mA (1)
Rack n° S : standard Voltage c 5 V Voltage c 24 VR Voltage c 24 V
D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total
Unity processors TSX P57 Cp 0244M Configuration 910

with memory TSX P57 0244M S 910
extension card TSX P57 104M S 850
TSX P57 1634M D 1650
TSX P57 154M S 930
TSX P57 204M D 850
TSX P57 2634M D 1650
TSX P57 254M D 930
TSX P57 304M D 1180
TSX P57 3634M D 1900
TSX P57 354M D 1180
TSX P57 454M D 1680
TSX P57 4634M D 1880
TSX P57 554M D 1680
TSX P57 5634M D 1880
PL7 processors TSX P57 103M S 440
with memory TSX P57 153M S 8530
extension card TSX P57 203M D 750
TSX P57 2623M D 1110
TSX P57 253M D 820
TSX P57 2823M D 1180
TSX P57 303M D 1000
TSX P57 3623M D 1360
TSX P57 353M D 1060
TSX P57 453M D 1080
TSX P57 4823M D 1440
Discrete I/O TSX DEY 08D2 S 55 80

TSX DEY 16A2 S 80
TSX DEY 16A3 S 80
TSX DEY 16A4 S 80
TSX DEY 16A5 S 80
TSX DEY 16D2 S 80 135
TSX DEY 16D3 S 80 135
TSX DEY 16FK S 250 75
TSX DEY 32D2K S 135 160
TSX DEY 32D3K S 140 275
TSX DEY 64D2K S 155 315
TSX DSY 08R4D S 55 80
TSX DSY 08R5 S 55 70
TSX DSY 08R5A S 55 80
TSX DSY 08S5 S 125
TSX DSY 08T2 S 55
TSY DSY 08T22 S 55
TSX DSY 08T31 S 55
TSX DSY 16R5 S 80 135
TSX DSY 16S4 S 220
TSX DSY 16S5 S 220
TSX DSY 16T2 S 80
TSX DSY 16T3 S 80
TSX DSY 32T2K S 140
TSX DSY 64T2K S 155
TSX DMY 28FK S 300 75
TSX DMY 28RFK S 300 75
Bus X remote TSX REY 200 S 500
9 Analogue I/O TSX AEY 414
TSX AEY 420
S
S
660
500
TSX AEY 800 S 270
TSX AEY 810 S 475
TSX AEY 1600 S 270
TSX AEY 1614 S 300
TSX ASY 410 S 900
TSX ASY 800 (2) S 200 300
Safety TSX PAY 262 S 150 200
TSX PAY 282 S 150 200
Total (cary ovet to page 9/5) Current (mA)
9/4
TSX PSY power supply Modicon Premium automation
module selection document platform 9
(specimen to be photocopied)
Reference Format Number Consumption 1n mA (1)

Rack n° S : standard Voltage c 5 V Voltage c 24 VR Voltage c 24 V
D : double Module Total Module Total Module Total
Carried forward
Counting, motion,
control and TSX CTY 2A S 280 30
weighing TSX CTY 4A S 330 36
TSX CTY 2C S 850 15
TSX CCY 1128 S 660 15
TSX CAY 21 S 1100 15
TSX CAY 41 D 1500 30
TSX CAY 22 S 1100 15
TSX CAY 42 D 1500 30
TSX CAY 33 D 1500 30
TSX CFY 11 S 510 50
TSX CFY 21 S 650 100
TSX CSY 84/164 D 1800
TSX ISP Y101 S 150 145
Communication TSX ETY 110 (3) S 800

TSX ETY 110 (4) S 1200
TSX ETY 110 WS (3) S 800
TSX ETY 110 WS (4) S 1200
TSX ETY 4103/5103 S 360
TSX IBY 100 S 500
TSX PBY 100 S 400
TSX SAY 100 S 110
TSX SAY 1000 S 100
TSX SCY 11601 S 350
TSX SCY 21601 S 350
TSX SCP 111 – 140
TSX SCP 112 – 120
TSX SCP 114 – 150
TSX FPP 10 – 330
TSX FPP 20 – 330
TSX JNP 112 – 120
TSX JNP 114 – 150
TSX MBP 100 – 220
TSX CPP 110 60
TSX P ACC 01 – 150
Terminal T FTX 117 ADJ 02 – 310
Total of
the 3
powers
Consumption per voltage Total current (mA)
x5V x 24 VR x 24 V
Power (mW) + + =
Power available in mW Overall
Choice of power TSX PSY 1610 S c 24 V non isolated 15 000 15 000 – 30 000
supply TSX PSY 2600 S a 100…240 V 25 000 15 000 12 000 26 000
TSX PSY 3610 D c 24 V non isolated 35 000 19 000 – 50 000
TSX PSY 5520 D c 24…48 V isolated 35 000 19 000 – 50 000
TSX PSY 5500 D a 100…120 V 35 000 19 000 19 000 50 000
a 200…240 V
TSX PSY 8500 D a 100…120 V 75 000 – 38 000 77 000 (5)
a 200…240 V
(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.
(2) If using an external c 24 V sensor power supply, the consumption on the c 24 V voltage should not be included.
(3) Without remote power supply (RJ 45).
(4) With remote power supply (AUI).
9
(5) 77,000 mW at 60 °C, 85,000 mW at 55 °C or 100,000 mW at 55 °C when using TSX FAN fan modules.
9/5
Standards and Modicon Premium automation
certifications platform 0
Standards, certifications and environment

conditions
Standards and certifications
Modicon Premium and Atrium PLCs have been developed to conform to the principal
national and international standards concerning electronic equipment for industrial
automation systems.
b Requirements specific to programmable controllers: functional characteristics,

immunity, resistance, safety, etc.: IEC 61131-2, CSA 22.2 N° 142, UL 508.
b Merchant navy requirements of the main international bodies: ABS, BV, DNV, GL,
LR, RINA, RMRS, etc.
b Compliance with European Directives:
v Low Voltage: 73/23/EEC amendment 93/68/EEC,
v Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC amendments 92/31/EEC and
93/68/EEC.
b Electrical qualities and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials:
UL 746C, UL 94.
b Hazardous areas calssification: CSA 22.2 No. 213, Class I, Division 2, Groups A,
B, C and D.
Characteristics
Service conditions and recommendations relating to environment
Temperature Operation °C 0...+ 60 (to IEC 61131-2, + 5...+ 55) (1)
0...+ 70 with TSX FAN fan modules (1)
Storage °C -25...+ 70 (according to IEC 61131-2)
Relative humidity Operation % 10…95 without condensation
Storage % 5…95 without condensation (according to IEC 61131-2)
Altitude m 0…2000
Supply voltage TSX PSY p610 TSX PSY 5520 TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY p500
Nominal voltage V c 24 c 48 a 100...240 a 100...120
a 200...240
Limit voltages c 19..30 c 19...60 a 90...264 a 140/190...264
Nominal frequencies Hz – – 50/60 50/60
Limit frequencies Hz – – 47/63 47/63
Protective treatment of Modicon Premium PLCs
Premium/Atrium PLCs meet the requirements of "TC" treatment (Treatment for all
Climates).
For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding
to "TH" treatment (treatment for hot and humid environments), Premium PLCs must
be embedded in envelopes with a minimum IP 54 protection, in compliance with
IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040.
Premium/Atrium PLCs themselves offer protection to IP 20 level (1). They can

therefore be installed without an envelope in reserved-access areas which do not
exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machine or activity).
The pollution level 2 does not take account of more severe environmental conditions:
air pollution by dust, smoke, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapours or salts,
attack by fungi, insects, ...
If the control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, some of then

Premium modules and racks can be ordered with a conformal applied to the cover and
bezel, see page 9/9.
(1) TSX P57 0244/104/154M and TSX P57 454/4634/554/5634M: 0...+ 57 °C (or 0...67 )C with
TSX FAN fan modules) when some of then I/O modules are insert adjacent to above
processors.
(2) In the case where a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protection cover
must be installed.
9/6
Environment tests Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

conditions
Environment tests
Name of test Standards Levels
Immunity to LF interference (e) (1)
Voltage and frequency variation IEC/EN 61131-2 0.85 Un/0.95 Fn for 30 minutes; 1.15 Un/1.05 Fn for 30 minutes;
0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 5 seconds; 1.2 Un/1.1 Fn for 5 seconds
Direct voltage variation IEC/EN 61131-2 0.85 Un...1.2 Un for 30 minutes with 5% ripple (peak values)
Harmonic 3 IEC/EN 61131-2 10 % Un; 0°/5 min...180°/5 min
Short momentary interrupt IEC/EN 61131-2 10 ms with a supply; 1 ms with c supply
Voltage shut-down/start-up IEC/EN 61131-2 Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 10 s
Un-0-Un; Un for 5 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s
Un-0.9-Udl; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s
Where:
Un: nominal voltage
Fn: nominal frequency
Udl: detection level when powered

Immunity to HF interference. (e) (1)
Damped oscillatory wave IEC 61000-4-12 a / c supply: 1kV in serial mode
Discrete I/O u 24V: 1 kV in serial mode
Electrical fast transient bursts IEC 61000-4-4 a / c supply: 2 kV in wire/common mode
Discrete I/O > 48V: 2 kV in common mode; other ports: 1 kV in common mode
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 a / csupply: 2 kV in wire mode/1 kV in serial mode;
Discrete I/O a: 2 kV in wire mode/1 kV in serial mode; Discrete I/O c: 2 kV in wire mode/0.5 kV
in serial mode; shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode
Electrostatic discharges IEC 61000-4-2 6 kV contact, 8 kV air
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m; 80 MHz...2 GHz
Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80 %/1 kHz
Conducted interference induced IEC 61000-4-6 10 V/0,15 MHz...80 MHz
by radiated field Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80%/1 kHz
Electromagnetic emissions (e) (1) (2)

Interference voltage IEC 61000-6-4 Class A
150 kHz...500 kHz quasi-peak 79 dB (µV); average 66 dB (µV)
500 kHz...30 MHz quasi-peak 73 dB (µV); average 60 dB (µV)
Interference field (3) IEC 61000-6-4 Class A, 10 m measurement
30 MHz...230 MHz quasi-peak 40 dB (µV); 230 MHz...1 GHz quasi-peak 47 dB (µV)
Immunity to climatic variations

Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bd 60 ° C for 16 hours (D.O); 40 ° C for 16 hours (D.C)
Cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ad 0 ° C for 16 hours
Continuous humid heat IEC 60068-2-3 Ca 60 ° C with 93 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.O);
40 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.C);
Cyclical humid heat IEC 60068-2-3 Db [55 ° C (D.O)/40 ° C (D.O)] - 25 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours
Cyclical temperature variations IEC 60068-2-14 Nb 0 ° C...60 ° C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.O)
0 ° C...40 ° C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.C)
Temperature Rise IEC 61131-2/UL 508 Ambient temperature: 60 ° C
CSA 22-2 No.142
Withstand to climatic variations

Dry heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-2 Bb 70 ° C for 96 hours
Cold (power off) IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25 ° C for 96 hours
Humid heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-30 dB 60 ° C-25 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours
Heat shocks when not operational IEC 60068-2-14 Na - 25 ° C...70 ° C; 2 cycles: 3 hours/3 hours
D.O: Device Open (device to be embedded in an envelope

D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see (1) page 9/6
(e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards.
(1) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation
guide”.
(2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixed on a metal grid and wired as per the recommendations in the industrial UNY USE 10010 V11E
manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation guide”.
9
(3) In the case where the limits of electromagnetic emissions between 30 MHz and 1 GHz must be supervised, it is recommended to use the TSX RKY 6EX/8EX
racks instead of the TSX RKY 6/8 racks.
9/7
Environment tests (continued) Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

conditions
Environment tests
Immunity to mechanical constraints
Sinusoidal vibrations IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 3 Hz...100 Hz/1 mm amplitude/0.7 g; endurance: fr/90 min/axis (application coefficient < 10)
IEC 60068-2-6 Fc 10...150 Hz/75 µm amplitude/1 g; endurance: 10 cycles of 1 octave/min
Shocks IEC 60068-2-27 Ea 15 g-11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis
Withstand to mechanical constraints

Flat freefall IEC 60068-2-32 Ed 10 cm/2 falls
Controlled position freefall IEC 60068-2-31 Ec 30 ° or 10 cm/2 falls
Random freefall, equipment in IEC 60068-2-32 method 1 1 m/5 falls
packaging
Equipment and personnel safety (1)

Dielectric strength and insulation UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.14 c 24/48V supply: 1,500 V rms; a 100/220V supply: 2,000 V rms
resistance (e) IEC 60950 Discrete I/O u 48 V: 500 V rms; Discrete I/O > 48 V: 2,000 V rms; > 10 MΩ
Continuity of earth(e) UL 508 < 0,1 Ω/30 A/2 min
CSA 22-2 No.142
Leakage current (e) CSA 22-2 No.142/IEC 60950 < 3.5 mA fixed device
Protection offered by enclosures CSA 22-2 No.142 IP 20
(e) IEC 60950
Withstand to impacts CSA 22-2 No.142/IEC 60950 500 g sphere: fall from 1.3 m
D.O: Device Open (device to be embedded in an envelope

D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see (1) page 9/6
(e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards.
(1) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the
UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation guide”.
(2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixed on a metal grid and wired
as per the recommendations in the industrial UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and
cabling system intallation guide”.
9/8
Optional conformal coating Modicon Premium automation
platform 0

conditions
If the control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, some of then

Premium modules and racks can be ordered with a conformal coating applied to
components of the product. Conformal coating will extend its life and enhance its
environmental performance capabilities.
For more information or to order, please contact your Regional Sales Office.
Mixed flowing gas (power on)

Standard Pollutant Parts/billion Quantum's performance
EIA 364-65 CI2 20 (±5) Meets the standard
level III NO2 200 (±50) Exceeds standard (1250 parts/billion)
H 2S 100 (±20) Meets standard
ISA-S71.04 CI2 10 Exceeds standard (20 parts/billion)

GX severe NO2 1250 Meets standard
H 2S 50 Exceeds standard (100 parts/billion)
SO2 300 Meets standard
Humidity (operating)
Standard Concentration (%) Quantum's performance
IEC-68-2-3 93 @ 60 °C (140 °F) Meets standard
Salt mist (non-operating)

Standard Concentration (%) Quantum's performance
IEC 68-2-11 5 (±1) Exceeds standard (5.7%)
Fungus resistance
Standard Quantum's performance
MIL-I-46058C Designed to meet standard
Temperature cycling (operating)

Standard Cycles Quantum's performance
IEC 68-2-14 100 @ 0…60 °C (32…140 °F) Meets standard
Dust (non-operating)
Standard Pollutant Weight (%) Quantum's performance
EIA 364-TP91 Silica 36 Meets standard
(pending) Calcite 29 Meets standard
Iron oxide 12 Meets standard
Alumina 8 Meets standard
Gypsum 5 Meets standard
Paper fiber 3 Meets standard
Cotton fiber 3 Meets standard
Polyester fiber 2 Meets standard
Carbon black 1 Meets standard
Human hair 0.5 Meets standard
Cigarette ash 0.5 Meets standard
9/9
Technical information 9
Automation products certifications
In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law.

A standard conformity certificate is then issued by the official organization. Each
certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced.
Use on board merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval
(= certification) of an electrical device by certain marine classification authorities.
Key Certification body Country
CSA Canadian Standards Association Canada
C-Tick Australian Communication Authority Australia
UL Underwriters Laboratories USA
Key Classification authority Country
ABS American Bureau of Shipping USA
BV Bureau Veritas France
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway
GL Germanischer Lloyd Germany
GOST Institut de recherche Scientifique Gost Standardt C.I.S., Russia
LR Lloyd's Register United-Kingdom
RINA Registro Italiano Navale Italiy
RMRS Register of Shipping C.I.S.
The table below shows the situation as of the 01.07.2004 for certifications obtained
or pending from organizations for base PLCs. An overview of certificates for
Telemecanique products is available on our Internet web site :
www.telemecanique.com
Product certifications
Certifications
C-Tick
Certified Hazardous
Pending locations
certification Class 1 Div 2
UL CSA ACA SIMTARS GOST
(1)
USA Canada Australia Australia CEI, Russia US
Advantys STB
ConneXium (2)
Lexium MHD/BPH
Magelis iPC
Magelis XBT-F/FC
Magelis XBT-G/H/P/E/HM/PM
Momentum
Premium PL7 CSA
Unity CSA
Quantum Concept FM
Unity FM
TBX
Telefast 2
TSX Micro
TSX/PMX 47 à 107
Twido (2)
Twin Line
(1) Hazardous locations: CSA 22.2 no. 213, certified products are suitable for use in Class I,
division 2, groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only.
(2) Depending on product, see pages 5/46 to 5/50.
(3) cULus north-american certification (Canada and US).
Local certifications
BG Germany TSX DPZ 10D2A safety module (TSX Micro)
TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules (Premium)
AS-Interface Europe TSX SAZ 10 master module (TSX Micro)
9 TSX SAY 100/1000 master modules (Premium)
TBX SAP 10 Fipio bus/AS-Interface bus gateway
9/10
Technical information 9
Automation products certifications

Community regulations
Marine classification
Marine classification des authorities
Certified
Pending
certification ABS BV DNV GL LR RINA RMRS
USA France Norway Germany Unit.-Kingdom Italiy C.I.S.
Advantys STB
ConneXium (1)
Lexium MHD/BPH
Magelis iPC
Magelis XBT-F/FC
Magelis XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM
Momentum
Premium PL7
Unity (2)
Quantum Concept
Unity (2)
TBX
Telefast 2
TSX Micro
TSX/PMX 47 à 107
Twido
Twin Line
(1) Depending on product, see pages 5/46 to 5/50.
(2) Request for Marine certifications forecast 4th quarter 2004.
Community regulations
European directives
The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the
various European Union member states.
European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement
of goods and their application is compulsory in all states of the European Union.
Member states are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation
and, at the same time, to withdraw any conflicting regulations.
The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned,
only set objectives, called “general requirements”.
The manufacturer must take all necessary measures to ensure that his products
conform to the requirements of each Directive relating to his equipment.
As a general rule, the manufacturer affirms that his product conforms to the
necessary requirements of the Directive(s) by applying the e label to his product.
e marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant.
The significance of e marking

b e marking on a product means that the manufacturer certifies that his product
conforms to the relevant European Directives ; it is necessary in order that a product
which is subject to a Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved within the
European Union.
b e marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market
regulation.
For electrical equipment, only conformity of the product to standards indicates that it
is suitable for use, and only a guarantee by a recognised manufacturer can ensure
a high level of quality.
One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular :
b The Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC : e
marking under the terms of this Directive is compulsory as of 1 January 1997. 9
b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives
92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC : e marking on the products covered by this Directive
d
has been compulsory since 1 January 1996.
The system designer must use devices external to the SCADA to protect
against active faults, which are not indicated and are judjed to be dangerous
to the application.
This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical,
electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a
limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control
contactor).
9/11
Schneider Electric worldwide 0
Up-dated: 30-07-2003
Afghanistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Albania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Austria
Algeria b Schneider Electric voie A Lot C22 Tel. : +213 21 92 97 02 à 09

Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 à 01
Andorra Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France
Angola Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Anguilla Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Antartica Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil
Antigua & Barbuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Argentina b Schneider Argentina Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88 www.schneider-electric.com.ar
(provincia Buenos Aires) Fax: +54 1 716 88 33
Armenia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Aruba Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Australia b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2 Solent Circuit Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00 www.schneider.com.au
Limited Norwest Business Park Fax: +61 296 29 83 40
Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153
Austria b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H. Birostrasse 11 Tel.: +431 610 540 www.schneider-electric.at
1239 Wien Fax: +431 610 54 54
Azerbaijan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Bahamas b Schneider Electric Union Village Tel. : +1 242 327 42 91 www.squared.com

PO Box 3901 - Nassau Fax : +1 242 327 42 91
Bahrain b Schneider Electric Floor 1 - Juma Building Tel.: +97 322 7897
Abu Horaira Avenue Fax: +97 321 8313
PO Box 355 - 304 Manama
Bangladesh Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Barbados Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Belarus b Schneider Electric Industries SA Prospect Macherova 5, of. 202 Tel. : +375 172 23 75 50
220004 Minsk Fax : +375 172 23 97 61
Belgium b Schneider Electric nv/sa Dieweg 3 Tel.: +3223737711 www.schneider-electric.be

B - 1180 Brussels Fax: +3223753858
Belize Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA
Benin Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Bermuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Bhutan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Bolivia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Chile
Bosnia and Herzegovina Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Croatia
Botswana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Bouvet island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Brazil b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda. Avenida Das Nações Unidas 23223 Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33 www.schneider-electric.com.br
Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34
São Paulo-SP
Brunei (Darussalam) Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore
Bulgaria b Schneider Electric Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov Tel.: +3592 919 42 www.schneiderelectric.bg
1407 Sofiav Fax: +3592 962 44 39
Burkina Faso Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Burundi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Cambodia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Viet Nam
Cameroon b Schneider Electric Cameroon 166, rue de l'Hôtel de Ville Tel.: +237 343 38 84
BP12087 - Douala Fax: +237 343 11 94
Canada b Schneider Canada 19, Waterman Avenue Tel.: +1 416 752 8020 www.schneider-electric.ca
M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario Fax: +1 416 752 4203
Cape Verde Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal

9 Caribee Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Cayman islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Central African Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Chad Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Chile b Schneider Electric Chile S.A. Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 6001-31 Tel.: +56 2 444 3000 www.schneider-electric.co.cl
Conchali - Santiago Fax: +56 2 423 9335
China b Schneider Beijing Landmark bldg-Room 1801 Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 www.schneider-electric.com.cn

8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13
Chaoyang District
100004 Beijing
9/12
Up-dated: 30-07-2003
Christmas island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Cocos (Keeling) islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Colombia b Schneider Electric de Colombia Calle 45A #102-48 Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00
S.A. Bogota DC Fax: +57 1 426 97 40
Comoros Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion
Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Cook islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Costa Rica b Schneider Centroamérica Ltda. 1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Tel.: +506 232-60-55 www.schneider-ca.com
Americana, Fax: +506 232-04-26
Pavas, San José, Costa Rica C.A.
Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose
Croatia b Schneider Electric SA Fallerovo Setaliste 22 Tel.: +385 1 367 100

HR - 10000 Zagreb Fax: +385 1 367 111
Cuba b Schneider Electric Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Tel.: +53 724 15 59

Calle 36- N°306-Apto1 Fax: +53 724 12 17
Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar
Playa Habana
Cyprus b Schneider Electric Cyprus 28 General Timayia Avenue Tel.: +00357 248 12646
Kyriakos Building, Block #A301 Fax: +00357 246 37382
Larnaca 6046
Czech Republic b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o. Thámova 13 Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111 www.schneider-electric.cz
Praha 8 - 186 00 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49
Democratic Rep. of Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Denmark b Schneider Electric A/S Baltorpbakken 14 Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88 www.schneider-electric.dk

DK-2750 Ballerup Fax: +45 44 68 5255
Djibouti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Dominican Republic b Schneider Electric Calle Jacinto Manon Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63
Esq. Federico Geraldino Fax: +1 809 334 66 68
Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402,
Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo
Ecuador b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA Av.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42
Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Fax : +593 2 224 42 94
Egypt b Schneider Electric Egypt sae 68, El Tayaran Street Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 www.schneider.com.eg
Nasr City, 11371 - Cairo Fax: +20 24 01 66 87
El Salvador Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA
Equatorial Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Eritrea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Estonia b Lexel Electric Ehitajate tee 110 Tel. : +372 650 97 00

EE 12618 Talinn Fax : +372 650 97 22
Ethiopia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Falkland islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil
Faroe islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Fiji Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Finland b Schneider Electric Oy Sinimäentie 14 Tel. : +358 9 527 000 www.schneider-electric.fi

02630 Espoo Fax : +358 9 5270 0376
France b Schneider Electric SA 5, rue Nadar Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 www.schneider-electric.fr

92500 Rueil Malmaison Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20
French Polynesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
French West Indies Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Gabon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Gambia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Georgia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Germany b Schneider Electric GmbH Gothaer Straße 29 Tel.: +49210 240 40 www.schneiderelectric.de
D-40880 Ratingen Fax: +492 10 240 49 256
Ghana b Schneider Electric Ghana PMB Kia Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687

3rd Floor Opeibea House
Airport Commercial Center
Fax : +233 21 77 96 22 9
Liberation road - Accra
Gilbraltar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Spain
Greece b Schneider Electric AE 14th km - RN Athens-Lamia Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00 www.schneider-electric.com.gr

GR - 14564 Kifissia Fax: +302 106 29 52 10
Greenland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Grenada Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Guadeloupe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Martinique
Guam Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
9/13
Up-dated: 30-07-2003
Guatemala Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Guinea-Bissau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Sénégal
Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Guyana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Haiti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Heard & Mac Donald isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Honduras Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Hong Kong b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong) Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21
Ltd Sun Hung Kai Centre, Fax: +852 28 11 10 29
30 Harbour Road, Wanchai
Hungary b Schneider Electric Hungária Fehérvári út 108 – 112 Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06 www.schneider-electric.hu
Villamossági Rt. H-1116 Budapest Fax: +36 1 206 1429
Iceland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark
India b Schneider Electric India Max House, 1 Dr Jha Marg, Okhla Tel. : +91 11 631 85 84 www.schneiderelectric-in.com
110 020 New Dehli Tel. : +91 11 631 71 61
Indonesia b P.T. Schneider Indonesia Ventura Building 7th Floor Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 www.schneider-electric.co.id
Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16
Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta
Iran (Islamic Republic of) b Telemecanique Iran 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42
P.O. Box 15875-3547 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87
15116 Teheran
Irak b Schneider Electric Industries SA 38050 Grenoble Cedex 9 Tel.: +33 04 76 60 54 27

Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60
Ireland b Schneider Electric Ireland Maynooth Road Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200 www.schneiderelectric.ie
Cellbridge - Co. Kildare Fax: +353+0 1 6012201
Italy b Schneider Electric S.p.A. Centro Direzionale Colleoni Tel.: +39 39 655 8111 www.schneiderelectric.it
Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 Fax: +39 39 605 6237
20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi)
Ivory Coast b Schneider Electric Afrique de Rue Pierre et Marie Curie Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10
l'Ouest 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30
Jamaica b Schneider Electric Shop#5, Plaza Dunrobin Tel. : +1876 755 41 27

30 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown Tel. : +931 87 74
Japan b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd Torigoe F. Bldg Tel.: +81 358 35 35 81 www.schneider-electric.co.jp
1-8-2, Torigoe Fax: +81 358 35 35 85
Taito-Ku - 111-0054 Tokyo
Jordan b Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University Street Tel.: 962 65 16 78 87
Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex Fax: 962 65 16 79 1
2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman
Kazakstan b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9 Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88
Liaison Office 480009 Almaty Tel. : +7 327 250 63 70
Kenya b Schneider East Africa Power Technics Complex Tel. : +254 2.824.156
Monbasa Road - PO Box 46345 Fax : +254 2.824.157
Nairobi
Kiribati Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Korea b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd 3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Tel. : +82 2 2630 9700 www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/
Youngdeungpodong, Fax : +82 2 2630 9800
Youngdeungpo-ku
150-037 Seoul
Kuwait b Schneider Electric Kuwait Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor Tel.: +965 240 75 46
PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat Fax: +965 240 75 06
Kyrgyz Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Laos Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Thailand
Latvia b Lexel Electric 60A A.Deglava str. Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75
LV1035 Riga Fax : +371 754 62 80
Lebanon b Schneider Electric Liban Tabaris, Avenue Charles Malek Tel. : +961 1 20 46 20
Immeuble Ashada, 8 Tel. : +961 1 20 31 19
P.O. Box 166223 - Beyrouth
Lesotho Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
9 Liberia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana
Libya Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia
Liechtenstein Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Switzerland
Lithuania b Lexel Electric 44, Verkiu str. Tel. : +370 278 59 59/61
LT-2012 Vilnius Fax : +370 278 59 60
Loro Sae Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Luxembourg b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS Agence de Metz Tel.: 33 03 87 39 06 03 www.schneider-electric.fr

1, Rue Graham Bell - BP n° 35190 Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96
57075 Metz cedex 3 - France
Macau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China
9/14
Up-dated: 30-07-2003
Macedonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Bulgaria
Madagascar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion
Malawi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Malaysia b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1 Tel. : (603) 7883 6333 www.schneider-
Bhd Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park Fax : (603) 7883 6188 electric.com.my
40150 Shah Alam
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Maldives Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion
Mali Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Malta Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia
Marshall islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Martinique b Schneider Electric Schneider Electric Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00

Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lézarde Fax: +05 96 51 11 26
97232 Le Lamentin
Mauritania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Mauritius b Schneider Electric Route côtière Tel.: 230 282 18 83

Calodyne - Mauritius Fax: 230 282 18 84
Mayotte Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion
Mexico b Groupe Schneider Mexico Calz. Rojo Gomez N° 1121-A Tel.: +525 686 30 00 www.schneider-
Col. Guadalupe del Moral Fax: +525 686 24 09 electric.com.mx
México, D.F. - C.P. 09300
Micronesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Moldova Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Romania
Monaco Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France
Mongolia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Montserrat Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Morocco b Schneider Electric Morocco 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 www.schneider.co.ma
Quartier Palmiers Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69
20100 Casablanca
Mozambique Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Myanmar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore
Namibia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Nauru Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Nepal Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Netherlands b Schneider Electric BV Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 www.schneider-electric.nl
2003 RV Haarlem Fax: +31 23 512 4100
Netherlands Antilles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
New Caledonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
New Zealand b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd 14 Charann Place Avondale Tel. : +64 9 829 04 90 www.schneider-electric.co.nz
P.O. Box 15355 - New Lynn Fax : +64 9 829 04 91
Auckland
Nicaragua Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Niger Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Nigeria b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 634 Tel. : +234 1 2702973
Abeyemo Alakija Street Fax : +234 1 2702976
Victoria Islan - Lagos
Niue Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Norfolk island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
North Korea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China
Northern Mariana islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Norway b Schneider Electric Norge A/S Solgaard Skog 2 Tel.: +47 6924 9700 www.schneider-electric.no
Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss Fax: +47 6925 7871
Oman b Schneider Electric CA c/o Arab Development Co

PO Box 439 - 113 Muscat
Tel.: +968 77 163 64
Fax: +968 77 104 49
9
Pakistan b Schneider Electric Pakistan 43-L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road, Tel.: +92 42 5754471 à 73
Gulberg II - Lahore Fax: +92 42 5754474
Palau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Panama Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Papua New Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Paraguay Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Uruguay
Peru b Schneider Electric Peru S.A. Los Telares n°231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Tel.: +511 348 44 11 www.schneider-electric.com.pe
Lima 03 Fax: +511 348 05 23
9/15
Up-dated: 30-07-2003
Philippines b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc 5th Floor, ALCO Building Tel. : +632 896 6063
391 Sen, Gil Puyat Avenue Fax : +632 896 7229
Makati 1209
Pitcairn Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Poland b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Lubinowa 4a Tel.: +48 22 511 8 200 www.schneider-electric.pl
03-878 - Warszawa Fax: +48 22 511 8 210
Portugal b Schneider Electric Portugal Av.do Forte, 3 Tel.: +351 21 416 5800 www.schneiderelectric.pt
Edificio Suécia II, Piso 3-A Fax: +351 21 416 5857
CP 2028 Carnaxide
2795 Linda-A-Velha
Puerto Rico Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Qatar b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Tel.: +97 4424358
Trad.and Co - P.O. Box 4484 Fax: +97 4424358
Doha
Reunion b Schneider Electric Immeuble Futura, Tel.: +262 28 14 28

190, rue des 2 canons Fax: +262 28 39 37
BP 646 - 97497 Sainte Clothilde
Romania b Schneider Electric Bd Ficusului n°42 Tel.: +401 203 06 50 www.schneider-electric.ro

Apimondia, Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1 Fax: +401 232 15 98
Bucuresti
Russian Federation b Schneider Electric ZAO Enisseyskaya 37 Tel.: +7095 797 40 00 www.schneider-electric.ru
129 281 Moscow Fax: +7095 797 40 03
Rwanda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Samoa Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
San Marino Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy
Sandwich & Georgia island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Sao Tome & Principe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Saudi Arabia b Schneider Electric Second Industrial City Tel.: +966 1 265 1515
P.O. Box 89249 - 11682 Riyadh Fax: +966 1 265 1860
Senegal b Schneider Electric Sénégal BP 15952 - Dakar-Fann Tel.: +221 820 68 05

Rond point N'Gor - Dakar Fax: +221 820 58 50
Seychelles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion
Sierra Leone Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana
Singapore b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 Tel.: +65 484 78 77 www.schneider-electric.com.sg
Ltd #02-17/20 TechPoint Fax: +65 484 78 00
Singapore 569059
Slovak Republic b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol Borekova 10 Tel. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30 www.schneider-electric.sk
s.r.o. SK-821 06 Bratislava Fax : +02 45 52 40 00
Slovenia b Schneider Electric, d.o.o. Dunasjka 47 Tel. : +386 1 23 63 555 www.schneider-electric.si

1000 Ljubljana Fax : +386 1 23 63 559
Solomon islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Somalia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
South Africa b Schneider Electric South Africa Private Bag X139 Tel.: +27 11 254 6400 www.schneider-electric.co.za
(PTY) Ltd Halfway House Fax: +27 11 315 8830
1685 - Midrand.
Spain b Schneider Electric España, S.A. Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-7 Tel.: +34 93 484 3100 www.schneiderelectric.es
08007 Barcelona Fax: +34 93 484 3308
Sri Lanka b Schneider Electric Industries SA Liaison office SRI Lanka Tel. : +94 77 48 54 89 www.schneiderelectric-in.com
Level 3B Valiant towers
46/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2
St Helena Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy
St Kitts & Nevis Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
St Lucia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
St Pierre et Miquelon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
St Vincent & Grenadines Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Sudan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
9 Suriname Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark
Swaziland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Sweden b Schneider Electric AB Djupdalsvägen 17/19 Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 www.schneider-electric.se

19129 Sollentuna Fax: +46 8 623 84 85
Switzerland b Schneider Electric (Switzerland) Schermenwaldstrasse 11 Tel.: +41 31 917 3333 www.schneider-electric.ch
S.A. CH - 3063 Ittigen Fax: +41 31 917 3355
Syrian Arab Republic b Schneider Electric Syria Elba Street - Malki Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00
Gheibeh and Qassas bldg, 1st floor Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9
PO Box 33876-Damascus
9/16
Up-dated: 30-07-2003
Taiwan, Republic of China b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N°37, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist., Tel. : +886 2 8751 6388 www.schneider-electric.com.tw
Taipei 114 Fax : +886 2 8751 6389
Tajikistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Tanzania, United Rep. of Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Thailand b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd 20th Floor Richmond Building Tel.: +662 204 9888 www.schneider-electric.co.th
75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Fax: +662 204 9816
Bangkok 10110
Togo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Tokelau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Tonga Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Trinidad & Tobago b Schneider Electric 6, 1st Street West Ext. Tel.: 1868 640 42 04
Beaulieu Avenue Fax: 1868 640 42 04
Trincity Trinidad West Indies
Tunisia b Schneider Electric Tunisia Rue du Lac Oubeira Tel.: +216 71 960 477
1053 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis Fax: +216 71 960 342
Turkey b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi Cad. N°:110 Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 www.schneiderelectric.com.tr
Ticaret A.S. Kat 1-2 - 81080 Göztepe – Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75
Turkmenistan b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28, Tel. : +993 12 46 29 52
Liaison Office off.326/327 Fax : +993 12 46 29 52
74 000 Achgabad
Turks & Caicos islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Tuvalu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Uganda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Ukraine b Schneider Electric Rue Krechtchalik 2 Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25 www.schneider-electric.com.ua

252601 Kiev Fax: +380 44 462 04 24
United Arab Emirates b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi PO Box 29580 Tel.: +9712 6 339444
Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Fax: +9712 6 316606
Al Marina Plaza Tower
Abu Dhabi
United Kingdom b Schneider Electric Ltd Braywick House East Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 www.schneider.co.uk
Windsor Road - Maidenhead Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508
Berkshire SL6 1 DN
United States b Schneider Electric North American Division Tel.: +1 847 397 2600 www.squared.com
1415 Roselle Road Fax: +1 847 925 7500
Palatine - IL 60067
Uruguay b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A. Ramon Masini 3190 Tel. : +59 82 707 2392
Montevideo Fax : +59 82 707 2184
Uzbekistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Vanuatu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Vatican city St./Holy See Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy
Venezuela b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A Calle 162/ Piso 2 Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44 www.schneider-electric.com.ve
Edificio Centro Cynamid Fax: +58 2 243 60 09
La Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas
Viet Nam b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-Town Building Tel.: +84 8 8103 103
Industries S.A.S. in Viet Nam 364 Cong Hoa Street Fax: +84 8 8120 477
Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City
Virgin islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Wallis & Futuna islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Western Sahara Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Morocco
Yemen Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric U.A.E.
Yugoslavia b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija Ratarski put 27d Tel.: +381 11 192 414
d.o.o. 11186 Belgrade Fax: +381 11 107 125
Zambia b Schneider Zambia Zambia Office Tel.: +260 222 22 52

c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Fax: +260 222 83 89
Plot 1036 - Accra Road
PO Box 22792 - Kitwe
Zimbabwe b Schneider Electric Zimbabwe Liaison Office Tel.: +263 4 707 179/180
75A Second Street
(corner Livingstone Avenue)
Harare
Fax: +263 4 707 176
9
9/17
Product reference index 0
,
0 499 ABE ABE 7H16R21 8/11 ABE 7P16T332 8/14
043 509 383 5/91 499 NEH 104 10 5/46 ABE 7ACC01 8/17 ABE 7H16R21E 8/11 ABE 7P16T334 8/14
499 NEH 141 00 5/46 ABE 7ACC02 8/17 ABE 7H16R23 8/11 ABE 7R08S111 8/12
110 499 NES 171 00 5/49 ABE 7ACC10 8/17 ABE 7H16R30 8/11 ABE 7R08S111E 8/12
110 XCA 282 01 6/27 499 NES 181 00 5/49 ABE 7ACC11 8/17 ABE 7H16R31 8/11 ABE 7R08S210 8/12
110 XCA 282 02 6/27 499 NES 251 00 5/48 ABE 7ACC12 8/15 ABE 7H16R50 8/11 ABE 7R08S210E 8/12
110 XCA 282 03 6/27 499 NMS 251 01 5/48 ABE 7ACC20 8/17 ABE 7H16R50E 8/11 ABE 7R08S216 8/12
499 NMS 251 02 5/48 ABE 7ACC21 8/17 ABE 7H16S21 8/11 ABE 7R08S216E 8/12
140 499 NOH 105 10 5/46 ABE 7ACC30 8/17 ABE 7H16S21E 8/11 ABE 7R16M111 8/13
140 NWM 100 00 5/21 499 NOS 171 00 5/49 ABE 7ACC80 8/17 ABE 7H16S43 8/11 ABE 7R16S111 8/12
499 NSS 251 01 5/48 ABE 7ACC81 8/17 ABE 7H20E100 8/10 ABE 7R16S111E 8/12
170 499 NSS 251 02 5/48 ABE 7ACC82 8/17 ABE 7H20E200 8/10 ABE 7R16S210 8/12
170 DTN 110 00 5/93 499 NTR 100 10 5/47 ABE 7ACC83 8/17 ABE 7H20E300 8/10 ABE 7R16S210E 8/12
170 EDI 346 00 3/73 499 NTR 101 00 5/47 ABE 7ACC84 8/17 ABE 7H32E150 8/10 ABE 7R16S212 8/12
170 EDO 346 00 3/73 ABE 7ACC85 8/17 ABE 7H32E300 8/10 ABE 7R16S212E 8/12
170 ENO 396 00 3/73 8 ABE 7BV10 8/17 ABE 7LOGF25 8/17 ABE 7R16T111 8/13
170 INT 110 00 5/97 870 USE 100 00 3/73 ABE 7BV10E 8/17 ABE 7LOGV10 8/17 ABE 7R16T210 8/13
170 MCI 007 00 5/97 ABE 7BV20 4/19, ABE 7P08T330 8/14 ABE 7R16T212 8/13
170 MCI 020 10 5/91 9 4/23, ABE 7P08T330E 8/14 ABE 7R16T230 8/13
170 MCI 020 36 5/91 990 MCO 000 01 4/54 4/37, ABE 7P16F310 8/13 ABE 7R16T231 8/13
170 MCI 020 80 5/91 990 MCO 000 03 4/54 et 8/17 ABE 7P16F310E 8/13 ABE 7R16T330 8/13
170 MCI 021 20 5/91 990 MCO 000 05 4/54 ABE 7BV20E 8/17 ABE 7P16F312 8/13 ABE 7R16T332 8/13
170 MCI 100 00 5/97 990 MCO 000 15 4/54 ABE 7CPA01 4/19 ABE 7P16M111 8/14 ABE 7R16T370 8/13
170 PNT 110 20 5/91 990 MCO 000 55 4/54 4/23 ABE 7P16T111 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B0 8/12
170 XTS 009 00 5/97 990 MCO 000 75 4/54 4/41 ABE 7P16T210 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B0E 8/12
170 XTS 020 00 5/91 990 MCO 001 25 4/54 et 8/17 ABE 7P16T212 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B1 8/12
170 XTS 021 00 5/91 990 MCO KIT 00 4/54 ABE 7CPA02 3/27 ABE 7P16T214 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B1E 8/12
170 XTS 050 00 3/69, 990 MCO KIT 01 4/54 et 8/16 ABE 7P16T215 8/14 ABE 7S16E2B1 8/12
et 3/73 990 NAA 263 20 6/27, ABE 7CPA03 3/27, ABE 7P16T230 8/14 ABE 7S16E2B1E 8/12
et 5/97 et 8/16 ABE 7P16T230E 8/14 ABE 7S16E2E0 8/12
174 990 NAA 263 50 5/97, ABE 7CPA11 4/23, ABE 7P16T318 8/14 ABE 7S16E2E0E 8/12
174 CEV 200 30 5/50 et 6/27 4/26, ABE 7P16T318E 8/14 ABE 7S16E2E1 8/12
174 CEV 200 40 5/50 990 NAD 211 10 5/91 4/41, ABE 7P16T330 8/14 ABE 7S16E2E1E 8/12
174 CEV 300 20 5/50 990 NAD 211 30 5/91 et 8/16 ABE 7P16T330E 8/14 ABE 7S16E2F0 8/12
990 NAD 230 00 5/91 ABE 7CPA12 3/27, ABE 7P16T332 8/14 ABE 7S16E2F0E 8/12
490 990 NAD 230 10 5/91 et 8/16 ABE 7P16T334 8/14 ABE 7S16E2M0 8/12
490 NAA 271 01 5/91 990 NAD 230 11 5/91 ABE 7CPA13 4/8, ABE 7R08S111 8/12 ABE 7P16F312 8/13
490 NAA 271 02 5/91 990 NAD 230 12 5/91 et 8/16 ABE 7R08S111E 8/12 ABE 7P16M111 8/14
490 NAA 271 03 5/91 990 NAD 230 20 5/91 ABE 7CPA21 3/27, ABE 7R08S210 8/12 ABE 7P16T111 8/14
490 NAA 271 04 5/91 990 NAD 230 21 5/91 et 8/16 ABE 7R08S210E 8/12 ABE 7P16T210 8/14
490 NAA 271 06 5/91 990 NAD 230 22 5/91 ABE 7CPA31 3/27, ABE 7R08S216 8/12 ABE 7P16T212 8/14
490 NAD 911 03 5/93 990 NAD 230 23 5/91 et 8/16 ABE 7R08S216E 8/12 ABE 7P16T214 8/14
490 NAD 911 04 5/93 ABE 7CPA31E 3/27, ABE 7R16M111 8/13 ABE 7P16T215 8/14
490 NAD 911 05 5/93 et 8/16 ABE 7R16S111 8/12 ABE 7P16T230 8/14
490 NOC 000 05 5/51 ABE 7FU012 8/17 ABE 7R16S111E 8/12 ABE 7P16T230E 8/14
490 NOR 000 05 5/51 ABE 7FU050 8/17 ABE 7H16R30 8/11 ABE 7P16T318 8/14
490 NOT 000 05 5/51 ABE 7FU100 8/17 ABE 7H16R31 8/11 ABE 7P16T318E 8/14
490 NTC 000 02 5/51 ABE 7FU200 8/17 ABE 7H16R50 8/11 ABE 7P16T330 8/14
490 NTC 000 02U 5/51 ABE 7FU400 8/17 ABE 7H16R50E 8/11 ABE 7P16T330E 8/14
490 NTC 000 05 5/51 ABE 7FU630 8/17 ABE 7H16S21 8/11 ABE 7P16T332 8/14
490 NTC 000 05U 5/51 ABE 7H08R10 8/11 ABE 7H16S21E 8/11 ABE 7P16T334 8/14
490 NTC 000 12 5/51 ABE 7H08R11 8/11 ABE 7H16S43 8/11 ABE 7R08S111 8/12
490 NTC 000 12U 5/51 ABE 7H08R21 8/11 ABE 7H20E100 8/10 ABE 7R08S111E 8/12
490 NTC 000 40 5/51 ABE 7H08S21 8/11 ABE 7H20E200 8/10 ABE 7R08S210 8/12
490 NTC 000 80 5/51 ABE 7H12R11 8/11 ABE 7H32E150 8/10 ABE 7R08S216 8/12
490 NTW 000 02 5/51 ABE 7H12R21 8/11 ABE 7LOGF25 8/17 ABE 7R16M111 8/13
490 NTW 000 02U 5/51 ABE 7H12R50 8/11 ABE 7LOGV10 8/17 ABE 7R16S111 8/12
490 NTW 000 05 5/51 ABE 7H12S21 8/11 ABE 7P08T330 8/14 ABE 7R16S111E 8/12
490 NTW 000 05U 5/51 ABE 7H16C10 8/10 ABE 7P08T330E 8/14 ABE 7R16S210 8/12
490 NTW 000 12 5/51 ABE 7H16C11 8/10 ABE 7P16F310 8/13 ABE 7R16S210E 8/12
490 NTW 000 12U 5/51 ABE 7H16C21 8/10 ABE 7P16F310E 8/13 ABE 7R16S212 8/12
9 490 NTW 000 40

490 NTW 000 40U
5/51
5/51
ABE 7H16C31
ABE 7H16CM11
8/10
8/10
ABE 7P16F312
ABE 7P16M111
8/13
8/14
ABE 7R16S212E
ABE 7R16T111
8/12
8/13
490 NTW 000 80 5/51 ABE 7H16CM21 8/10 ABE 7P16T111 8/14 ABE 7R16T210 8/13
490 NTW 000 80U 5/51 ABE 7H16F43 8/11 ABE 7P16T210 8/14 ABE 7R16T212 8/13
ABE 7H16R10 8/11 ABE 7P16T212 8/14 ABE 7R16T230 8/13
ABE 7H16R11 8/11 ABE 7P16T214 8/14 ABE 7R16T231 8/13
ABE 7H16R11E 8/11 ABE 7P16T215 8/14 ABE 7R16T330 8/13
ABE 7H16R20 4/19, ABE 7P16T230 8/14 ABE 7R16T332 8/13
4/23, ABE 7P16T230E 8/14 ABE 7R16T370 8/13
4/26, ABE 7P16T318 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B0 8/12
4/37, ABE 7P16T318E 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B0E 8/12
4/41, ABE 7P16T330 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B1 8/12
et 8/11 ABE 7P16T330E 8/14 ABE 7S08S2B1E 8/12
9/18
Product reference index 0
ABE 7S16E2B1 8/12 AR1 TBX OT PL7P P44M 6/71 TSX CCT 200 4/54
ABE 7S16E2B1E 8/12 AR1 SB3 8/17 TBX AES 400 3/51 RCD PL7J P44M 6/70 TSX CCY 1128 4/26
ABE 7S16E2E0 8/12 TBX AMS 620 3/51 RCD PL7M P44M 6/70 TSX CD DRV 20M 5/105
ABE 7S16E2E0E 8/12 ASp TBX ASS 200 3/51 RCD PL7M 6/70 TSX CDP 053 3/16,
ABE 7S16E2E1 8/12 AS MBKT 185 5/91 TBX BAS 10 3/58, PC44M 4/19,
ABE 7S16E2E1E 8/12 ASI ABLB3002 5/63 et 3/73 RCD PL7P P44M 6/71 4/23,
ABE 7S16E2F0 8/12 ASI ABLB3004 5/63 TBX BLP 01 3/41, RCD3 PL7J P44M 6/70 4/26,
ABE 7S16E2F0E 8/12 ASI ABLD3002 5/63 3/51, RCD3 6/70 4/37,
ABE 7S16E2M0 8/12 ASI ABLD3004 5/63 et 3/58 PL7M P44M et 4/42
ABE 7S16E2M0E 8/12 ASI ABLM3024 5/63 TBX CBS 010 3/41 RCD3 PL7P P44M 6/71 TSX CDP 1001 3/16,
ABE 7S16S1B2 8/12 TBX CEP 1622 3/40 S PL7P P44M 6/71 4/19,
ABE 7S16S1B2E 8/12 O TBX CSP 1622 3/40 UCD PL7J P44M 6/70 4/23,
ABE 7S16S2B0 8/12 OZD FIP G3 5/81 TBX CSP 1625 3/40 UCD PL7P P44M 6/71 et 4/37
ABE 7S16S2B0E 8/12 TBX DES 1622 3/40 UCD3 PL7J P44M 6/70 TSX CDP 1003 3/16
ABE 7TES160 3/16, SF3 TBX DES 1633 3/40 UCD3 PL7P P44M 6/71 TSX CDP 102 3/16,
et 8/17 SF3 CPY005 4/60 TBX DES 16C22 3/40 4/19,
SF3 CPY010 4/60 TBX DES 16F22 3/40 TSX et 4/23
ABF SF3 CPY015 4/60 TBX DES 16S04 3/40 TSX AAK2 3/27, TSX CDP 103 3/16,
ABF C08R02B 8/17 SF3 CPY020 4/60 TBX DMS 1025 3/40 et 3/51 4/19,
ABF C08R02R 8/17 SF3 CPY025 4/60 TBX DMS 1625 3/40 TSX ACC VA625 2/10 4/23,
ABF C08R02W 8/17 SF3 CPY030 4/60 TBX DMS 16C22 3/40 TSX ACC VA625 2/7 4/26,
ABF C08R12B 8/17 SF3 PY32003 4/61 TBX DMS 16C222 3/40 TSX AEY 1600 3/26 4/37,
ABF C08R12R 8/17 SF3 PY32010 4/61 TBX DMS 16P22 3/40 TSX AEY 1614 3/26 et 4/42
ABF C08R12W 8/17 SF3 PY32020 4/61 TBX DMS 16S44 3/40 TSX AEY 414 3/26 TSX CDP 202 3/16,
ABF Y25S150 3/27 SF3 PY32030 4/61 TBX DSS 1235 3/40 TSX AEY 420 3/26 4/19,
ABF Y25S200 3/27 SF3 PY32040 4/61 TBX DSS 1622 3/40 TSX AEY 800 3/26 et 4/23
ABF Y25S300 3/27 SF3 PY32050 4/61 TBX DSS 1625 3/40 TSX AEY 810 3/26 TSX CDP 203 3/16,
ABF Y25S500 3/27 SF3 PY32060 4/61 TBX DSS 16C22 3/40 TSX ASY 410 3/26 4/19,
SF3 PY32080 4/61 TBX EEP 08C22 3/58 TSX ASY 800 3/26 4/23,
ABL SF3 PY32120 4/61 TBX EEP 1622 3/58 TSX BAT M02 1/23, 4/26,
ABL 7CEM24003 8/31 SF3 PY32200 4/61 TBX ESP 08C22 3/58 et 1/37 4/37,
ABL 7CEM24006 8/31 SF3 PY32300 4/61 TBX ESP 1622 3/58 TSX BAT M03 1/23, et 4/42
ABL 7CEM24012 8/31 TBX FP ACC 10 3/58 et 1/37 TSX CDP 301 3/16,
ABL 7RE2402 8/31 SM1 TBX GND 015 3/41 TSX BLY 01 3/16, 4/19,
ABL 7RE2403 8/31 SM1 PS371 4/60 TBX LEP 020 3/41 et 3/27 4/26,
ABL 7RE2405 8/31 SM1 PS381 4/60 TBX LEP 030 3/41 TSX CAP 030 3/27 4/37,
ABL 7RE2410 8/31 SM1 PY52 4/60 TBX LEP 030 3/51 TSX CAP S15 4/19, et 4/42
ABL 7REQ24050 8/31 TBX RV 015 3/41 4/23, TSX CDP 302 3/16,
ABL 7REQ24100 8/31 STB TBX SEP 08 3/41 4/26, 4/19,
ABL 7RP1205 8/31 STB NDP 2112 5/93 TBX SSP 08 3/41 4/37, et 4/23
ABL 7RP2403 8/31 STB NIB 2212 5/97 TBX SUP 10 3/41 et 4/41 TSX CDP 303 3/16,
ABL 7RP2405 8/31 STB NMP 2212 5/91 TSX CAP S9 4/41 4/19,
ABL 7RP2410 4/13, TLX TSX CAY 21 4/41 4/23,
et 8/31 SYC CD 10OFS 30M 7/13 TSX CAY 22 4/41 4/26,
ABL 7RP4803 8/31 SPU LFF CD28M 5/55, CD OFS 30M 7/13 TSX CAY 33 4/41 4/37,
ABL 7UEQ24100 8/31 et 5/93 CD DRV 20 M 5/79, TSX CAY 41 4/41 et 4/42
ABL 7UEQ24200 8/31 SPU LFG CD28M 5/55, et 6/71 TSX CAY 42 4/41 TSX CDP 501 3/16,
ABL 7UES24050 8/31 et 5/93 CD FCHMI V1M 5/39, TSX CBRY 2500 2/13 4/19,
ABL 7UPS24100 8/31 SPU LFT CD28M 5/55, et 5/21 TSX CBRY 2500F 2/13 4/23,
ABL 7UPS24200 8/31 et 5/93 CD GTW 10M 1/21, TSX CBRY K5 2/13 4/26,
ABL 7UPS24400 8/31 SPU LFU CD28M 5/55, et 1/35 TSX CBY 010K 2/10 et 4/42
et 5/93 CD PL7 DIF 41 6/77 TSX CBY 030K 2/10 TSX CDP 503 3/16,
ABR SPU LRU CD28M 5/55, CD PL7J p44M 6/70 TSX CBY 050K 2/10 4/19,
ABR 7S11 8/15 et 5/93 CD PL7M p44M 6/70 TSX CBY 1000 2/10 4/23,
ABR 7S21 8/15 SPU LUF CD28M 5/55, CD PL7M PC44M 6/70 TSX CBY 1000K 2/10 4/26,
ABR 7S23 8/15 et 5/93 CD PL7P p44M 6/71 TSX CBY 120K 2/10 4/37,
ABR 7S33 8/15 SPU LUG CD28M 5/55, CD3 PL7 DIF 41 6/77 TSX CBY 180K 2/10 et 4/42
ABR 7S33E 8/15 et 5/93 CD3 PL7J p44M 6/70 TSX CBY 280K 2/10 TSX CDP 611 4/42
ABR 7S37 8/15 SPU LUT CD28M 5/55, CD3 PL7M p44M 6/70 TSX CBY 380K 2/10 TSX CFY 11 4/37
et 5/93 CD3 PL7P p44M 6/71 TSX CBY 500K 2/10 TSX CFY 21 4/37
ABS CD TCPA33E 5/39 TSX CBY 720K 2/10 TSX CPP 102 4/8
ABS 7EA3E5 8/15 T CD UNOFS 30M 7/13 TSX CBY ACC 10 2/10 TSX CPP 110 5/55
ABS 7EA3F5 8/15 T FTX CB1 020 5/110 CD WSBY P40F 4/66 TSX CBY K9 2/10 TSX CPP 202 4/8
ABS 7EA3M5
ABS 7EC3AL
8/15
8/15
T FTX CB1 050
T PCX 57 203M
5/110
1/35
CD10 GTW 10M 1/21,
et 1/35
TSX CCP 301
TSX CCP S15
4/23
4/19,
TSX CPP 301
TSX CPP 302
4/8
4/8
9
ABS 7EC3B2 8/15 T PCX 57 353M 1/35 CD3 WSBY P40F 4/66 4/23, TSX CSA 100 5/101,
ABS 7EC3E2 8/15 CDUNT GTW 10M 1/21, 4/26, et 5/105
ABS 7SA2M 8/15 et 1/35 et 4/42 TSX CSA 200 5/101,
ABS 7SA3MA 8/15 DOC PL7 44F 6/71 TSX CCP S15 050 4/19, et 5/105
ABS 7SC1B 8/15 LIBS CNVF 5/97 4/23, TSX CSA 500 5/101,
ABS 7SC2E 8/15 LSDKC PL741M 5/39 4/26, et 5/105
ABS 7SC3BA 8/15 L PL7 FUZ 34M 6/75 4/42, TSX CSY 164 4/54
ABS 7SC3E 8/15 SDKC PL7 41M 6/73 TSX CCP S15 100 4/19, TSX CSY 84 4/54
OS PL7P P44M 6/71 4/23, TSX CTC 07 5/111
OT PL7M P44M 6/71 4/26, TSX CTC 10 5/111
et 4/42
9/19
Product reference index
TSX CTY 2A 4/19 TSX DSY 16S5 3/15 TSX FP CC 200 3/69, TSX MRP 032P 1/36, TSX PBS CA 100 5/93
TSX CTY 2C 4/23 TSX DSY 16T2 3/15 et 5/85 et 1/37 TSX PBY 100 5/93
TSX CTY 4A 4/19 TSX DSY 16T3 3/15 TSX FP CC 500 3/69, TSX MRP 0512P 1/36, TSX PCI 57 204M 1/21
TSX CXP 213 4/42 TSX DSY 32T2K 3/15 et 5/85 et 1/37 TSX PCI 57 354M 1/21
TSX CXP 223 4/42 TSX DSY 64T2K 3/15 TSX FP CE 030 5/85 TSX MRP 064P 1/36, TSX PCI ACC1 1/21
TSX CXP 233 4/42 TSX EEF 08D2 3/68 TSX FP CG 010 5/75, et 1/37 TSX PCX 1031 4/13,
TSX CXP 235 4/42 TSX EEF 16D2 3/68 et 5/79 TSX MRP 2128P 1/36, 5/105,
TSX CXP 243 4/42 TSX EF ACC 2002 3/69 TSX FP CG 030 5/75, et 1/37 5/109,
TSX CXP 245 4/42 TSX EF ACC 2010 3/69 et 5/79 TSX MRP 232P 1/36 5/110,
TSX CXP 263 4/37 TSX EF ACC 20120 3/69 TSX FP CP 100 3/69, TSX MRP 1/37 5/111,
TSX CXP 273 4/42 TSX EF ACC 20250 3/69 et 5/85 232P/264P 6/27,
TSX CXP 613 4/42 TSX EF ACC 2030 3/69 TSX FP CP 500 3/69, TSX MRP 264P 1/36 et 6/71
TSX CXP 633 4/42 TSX EF ACC 2070 3/69 TSX FP CP 500 et 5/85 TSX MRP 3256P 1/36, TSX PCX 1130 5/111
TSX CXP 635 4/42 TSX EF ACC 7 3/68, TSX FP CR 100 3/69 et 1/37 TSX PCX 3030 5/105,
TSX CXP 643 4/42 et 5/84 TSX FP CR 200 3/69 TSX MRP 3384P 1/36, 5/109,
TSX CXP 645 4/42 TSX EF ACC 99 3/68, TSX FP CR 500 3/69 et 1/37 5/110,
TSX CXP 663 4/37 et 5/84 TSX FP JF020 5/85 TSX MRP C001M 1/23, 5/111,
TSX CXP 673 4/42 TSX EF CF 01 3/68 TSX FPC10M 5/84 1/36, 6/27,
TSX DEY 08D2 3/14 TSX EF CF 02 3/68 TSX FPP 10 5/75, et 1/37 et 6/71
TSX DEY 16A2 3/14 TSX EF CF 03 3/68 et 5/81 TSX MRP C002M 1/23, TSX PLP 01 1/21,
TSX DEY 16A3 3/14 TSX EF CM 01 3/68 TSX FPP 20 5/79 1/36, et 2/5
TSX DEY 16A4 3/14 TSX EF CM 03 3/68 TSX FPP OZD 200 5/81 et 1/37 TSX PLP 101 1/21,
TSX DEY 16A5 3/14 TSX EF CT 03 3/68 TSX IBI CP DD9 004 3/73 TSX MRP C003M 1/23, et 2/5
TSX DEY 16D2 3/14 TSX EMF 16DT2 3/68 TSX IBI CP DD9 010 3/73 1/36, TSX PSI 2010 1/21
TSX DEY 16D3 3/14 TSX ESF 08T22 3/68 TSX IBI CP DD9 030 3/73 et 1/37 TSX PSY 1610M 2/5
TSX DEY 16FK 3/14 TSX ETH ACC 10M 5/87 TSX IBI CP DD9 070 3/73 TSX MRP C007M 1/23, TSX PSY 2600M 2/5
TSX DEY 32D2K 3/14 TSX ETH ACC 2 5/87 TSX IBI CP DD9 120 3/73 1/36, TSX PSY 3610M 2/5
TSX DEY 32D3K 3/14 TSX ETH ACC 3 5/87 TSX IBI CP DD9 250 3/73 et 1/37 TSX PSY 5500M 2/5
TSX DEY 64D2K 3/14 TSX ETH ACC 4 5/87 TSX IBS CA 100 5/97 TSX MRP C01M7 1/23, TSX PSY 5520M 2/5
TSX CTC 07 5/111 TSX ETH ACC 5 5/87 TSX IBS CA 400 5/97 1/36, TSX PSY 8500M 2/5
TSX CTC 10 5/111 TSX ETH CA 020 5/87 TSX IBX 100 5/97 et 1/37 TSX REY 200 2/13
TSX CTY 2A 4/19 TSX ETH CA 100 5/87 TSX IBY 100 5/97 TSX MRP C448K 1/23, TSX RKA 02 2/7,
TSX CTY 2C 4/23 TSX ETH CA 200 5/87 TSX ISP Y101 4/60 1/36, et 2/10
TSX CTY 4A 4/19 TSX ETH CC 005 5/87 TSX ISP Y111 4/60 et 1/37 TSX RKY 12 2/7
TSX CXP 213 4/42 TSX ETH CC 010 5/87 TSX JNP 112 5/107 TSX MRP C768K 1/23, TSX RKY 12EX 2/10
TSX CXP 223 4/42 TSX ETH CC 020 5/87 TSX JNP 114 5/107 1/36, TSX RKY 4EX 2/10
TSX CXP 233 4/42 TSX ETH CD 025 5/87 TSX MBP 100 5/91 et 1/37 TSX RKY 6 2/7
TSX CXP 235 4/42 TSX ETH NTR1 5/87 TSX MBP CE 002 5/91 TSX MRP DS 2048P 1/37 TSX RKY 6EX 2/10
TSX CXP 243 4/42 TSX ETY 110 5/39 TSX MBP CE 030 5/91 TSX MRP F004M 1/23 TSX RKY 8 2/7
TSX CXP 245 4/42 TSX ETY 110 WS 5/39 TSX MBP CE 060 5/91 TSX MRP F008M 1/23 TSX RKY 8EX 2/10
TSX CXP 263 4/37 TSX ETY 210 4/66 TSX MCP C002M 1/23 TSX MRP P128K 1/23, TSX SAY 100 5/57
TSX CXP 273 4/42 TSX ETY 4103 5/39 TSX MCP C224K 1/36, 1/36, TSX SAY 1000 5/57
TSX CXP 613 4/42 TSX ETY 5103 5/39 et 1/37 et 1/37 TSX SCA 10 5/100
TSX CXP 633 4/42 TSX ETY CB 005 5/87 TSX MCP C224K 1/23 TSX MRPP 224K 1/23, 5/107
TSX CXP 635 4/42 TSX ETY CB 010 5/87 TSX MCP C512K 1/23 1/36, TSX SCA 50 5/100,
TSX CXP 643 4/42 TSX ETY CB 020 5/87 TSX MFP 0128P 1/36, et 1/37 5/105,
TSX CXP 645 4/42 TSX FAN A4P 2/5 et 1/37 TSX MRP P384K 1/23, et 5/107
TSX CXP 663 4/37 TSX FAN A5P 2/5 TSX MFP 032P 1/36, 1/36, TSX SCA 62 5/105
TSX CXP 673 4/42 TSX FAN D2P 2/5 et 1/37 et 1/37 TSX SCA 64 5/100,
TSX DEY 08D2 3/14 TSX FP ACC12 5/84 TSX MFP 064P 1/36, TSX P ACC 01 5/100, et 5/107
TSX DEY 16A2 3/14 TSX FP ACC12 3/68, et 1/37 5/105, TSX SCA 72 5/100
TSX DEY 16A3 3/14 et 5/71 TSX MFP 232P 1/36 5/109 et 5/105
TSX DEY 16A4 3/14 TSX FP ACC14 5/84 TSX MFP 232P/264P 1/37 TSX P CAP 1/23 TSX SCP 111 5/100,
TSX DEY 16A5 3/14 TSX FP ACC2 3/68, TSX MFP 264P 1/36 et1/37 5/105,
TSX DEY 16D2 3/14 5/75, TSX MFP B096K 1/23, TSX P57 103M 1/31 et 5/109
TSX DEY 16D3 3/14 et 5/84 et 1/37 TSX P57 153M 1/31 TSX SCP 112 5/100,
TSX DEY 16FK 3/14 TSX FP ACC3 5/75, TSX MFP BAK 032P 1/37 TSX P57 1634M 5/38 5/105,
TSX DEY 32D2K 3/14 et 5/84 TSX MFP C384K 1/37 TSX P57 203M 1/31 et 5/109
TSX DEY 32D3K 3/14 TSX FP ACC4 3/58, TSX MFP P001M 1/23 TSX P57 253M 1/31 TSX SCP 114 5/100,
TSX DEY 64D2K 3/14 5/71, TSX MFP P002M 1/23 TSX P57 2623M 1/31, 5/105,
TSX DMY 28FK 3/16 et 5/84 TSX MFP P004M 1/37 et 5/38 et 5/109
TSX DMY 28RFK 3/16 TSX FP ACC6 5/84 TSX MFP P004M 1/23 TSX P57 2634M 5/38 TSX SCP CC 1030 5/101,
TSX DSY 08R4D 3/15 TSX FP ACC7 3/68 TSX MFP P128K 1/23, TSX P57 2823M 1/31, 5/109,
9 TSX DSY 08R5

TSX DSY 08R5A
3/15
3/15
TSX FP ACC8M
TSX FP ACC9
5/84
5/84
1/36,
et 1/37 TSX P57 303M
et 5/38
1/31 TSX SCP CD 1030
et 5/110
5/101,
TSX DSY 08S5 3/15 TSX FP C100 5/85 TSX MFP P224K 1/23, TSX P57 3623M 1/31, 5/109,
TSX DMY 28FK 3/16 TSX FP C200 5/85 1/36, et 5/38 et 5/110
TSX DMY 28RFK 3/16 TSX FP C500 5/85 et 1/37 TSX P57 3634M 5/38 TSX SCP CD 1100 5/101,
TSX DSY 08R4D 3/15 TSX FP CA 100 3/69, TSX MFP P384K 1/23, TSX P57 453M 1/31 5/109,
TSX DSY 08R5 3/15 et 5/85 et 1/36 TSX P57 4634M 5/38 et 5/110
TSX DSY 08R5A 3/15 TSX FP CA 200 3/69, TSX MFP P512K 1/23 TSX P57 4823M 1/31 TSX SCP CM 4030 5/101,
TSX DSY 08T2 3/15 et 5/85 TSX MRP 0128P 1/36, 5/38 5/107,
TSX DSY 08T22 3/15 TSX FP CA 500 5/85 et 1/37 TSX P57 5634M 5/38 et 5/110
TSX DSY 08T31 3/15 TSX FP CC 100 3/69, TSX MRP 0256P 1/36, TSX PAY 262 4/8 TSX SCP CU 4530 5/105,
TSX DSY 16R5 3/15 et 5/85 et 1/37 TSX PAY 282 4/8 et 5/110
TSX DSY 16S4 3/15
9/20
Product reference index
TSX SCP CX 2030 5/101, SPU ZFU CD 20E 6/29

5/107, USE 10010 V11E 9/3
5/109, USE 20110 V20E 9/2
et 5/110 USE 20910 V10M 9/2
TSX SCP CX 4030 5/101, USE 40010 V20E 6/27
5/109, USE 909 CD M 6/27
et 5/110 XCA USB 033 6/27
TSX SCY 11601 5/100
TSX SCY 21601 5/79, V
5/100, VY1 X411CA15 4/42
5/105,
et 5/109 X
TSX SCY CM 6030 5/101, XBT Z968 4/13,
et 5/111 et 5/111
TSX SCY CM 6530 5/101 XBT Z9681 5/111
TSX SCY CU 6030 5/105, XPS MC16X 4/13
5/109, XPS MC32X 4/13
et 5/111 XPS MCCPC 4/13
TSX SCY CU 6530 5/105, XPS MCTC16 4/13
et 5/111 XPS MCTC32 4/13
TSX TAP MAS 4/41 XPS MCTS16 4/13
TSX TAP S15 05 4/19, XPS MCTS32 4/13
4/23, XPS MCWIN 4/13
4/26, XZ LG101 3/69
et 4/41 XZ LG102 3/69
TSX TAP S15 24 4/19, XZ-CB10201 5/57
4/23, XZ-CB10501 5/57
et 4/26 XZ-CB11001 5/57
TSX TLY EX 2/10,
et 2/13
TSX WMY 100 5/21,
et 5/39
TSX XBT H100 4/60,
et 5/39
UAG
SEW LFFCD 21 6/47
SEW LFUCD 21 6/47
SEW MFFCD 21 6/47
SEW MFUCD 21 6/47
UNY
CSP SPU ZBU 6/29
SDU MFF CD20 6/33
SDU MFT CD20 6/33
SDU MFU CD20 6/33
SEW LFF CD20 6/41
SEW LFG CD20 6/41
SEW LFT CD20 6/41
SEW LFU CD20 6/41
SEW LYU CD20 6/41
SEW XFU CD20D 6/41
SEW XFU CD20E 6/41
SEW XFU CD20F 6/41
SEW XFU CD20S 6/41
SEW XFU CD20T 6/41
SPU EFF CD 20 6/27
SPU EFG CD 20 6/27
SPU EFT CD 20 6/27
SPU EFU CD 20 6/27
SPU EZF CD 20 6/27
SPU EZG CD 20 6/27
SPU EZT CD 20 6/27
SPU EZU CD 20
SPU LFF CD 20
6/27
6/27 9
SPU LFG CD 20 6/27
SPU LFT CD 20 6/27
SPU LFU CD 20 6/27
SPU LZF CD 20 6/27
SPU LZG CD 20 6/27
SPU LZT CD 20 6/27
SPU LZU CD 20 6/27
SPU MFG CD 20 6/27
SPU MFU CD 20 6/27
SPU MZG CD 20 6/27
SPU MZU CD 20 6/27
9/21
Automation & Control
07-04
Modicon Premium
automation platform
Modicon Premium automation platform

Unity & PL7
Catalogue
July
04
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

MKTED204072EN
Headquarters
Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics
89, bd Franklin Roosevelt given in the text and images in this document are not binding us until
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex they have been confirmed with us.
Production: Schneider Electric Industries

http://www.schneider-electric.com Photos: Schneider Electric Industries
http://www.telemecanique.com Printed by: Pozzo Gros Monti - Italy
ART. 802625 July 2004

MK Ted 204072 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MK Ted 204072 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Automation & Control

Modicon Premium automation platform

Schneider Electric Industries SAS

Production: Schneider Electric Industries

Art. 67341 - MKTED203111EN Ethernet TCP/IP

Control and Protection,

Control and Protection,

Control and signalling units Automation,

Automation and control

2004 Automation and control

Panel-building and cabling accessories

2003 Modicon Momentum Art. 802621 - MKTED204071EN

Automation and control

Art. 960015 - DIA1ED2040506EN

Automation and control

Art. 66692 - DIA7ED20310006EN

Art. 61233 - DIA7ED2030902EN 2004

Art. 802660 - MKTED204091EN 2003

Art. 27501 - MKTED201001EN 2004

Control and protection

Welcome to the world of Telemecanique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6

2 – Racks, I/O architectures and power supplies

3 – Discrete and analog I/O

4 – Application-specific modules and solutions

8 – Connection interfaces and power supplies

To the world of Telemecanique

Modicon automation platforms

Premium, an optimized platform for complex

Quantum, an optimized platform for batch/process

Atrium, the slot PLC meeting PC Based requirements

To the world of Telemecanique

A new organizer environment for high end Modicon

Web technology serving automation solutions

With Transparent Ready, you can:

The new world of automation

New features in Unity Premium

New Premium CPUs

Extension of the range

Improved execution speed

Enhancements in the process control offer

New features in Unity Premium

Unity Pro – a seamless continuation of PL7

Unity Pro boosts software productivity by means of

Advanced Unity Pro specialist software

1.1 - Premium processors - Unity

v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14

b PCMCIA memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22

1.2 - Premium processors - PL7

v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26

v Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32

b PCMCIA memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36

Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs Unity

Number of racks 4/6/8 slots 1 (6 slots) 1 4

2-channel modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels)

PCMCIA modules (4), max. 3

4 “in-rack” modules 8 “in-rack” modules

1 PCMCIA module (3)

1 “in-rack” module 3 “in-rack” modules 4 “in-rack” modules 5 “in-rack” modules

1 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium 3 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium 4

TSX P57 204M TSX P57 304M

b Discrete I/O modules

b Either in several racks interconnected by Bus X (max. 700 m)

The processors are differentiated by their memory capacities, processing speeds,